Dictionary and grammar of the language of Saʻa and Ulawa, Solomon islands

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

r^-

DICTIONARY AND GRAMMAR

OF THE

LANGUAGE OF SA'A AND
ULAWA, SOLOMON ISLANDS

WALTER C^TvENS, M. A.

WITH APPENDICES

Published by the Odtw^it^ IrKrilvuoN op Washington

G30\
.1 ^

50 \ 0"^

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON

Publication No. 253

PRESS OF GIBSON BROTHERS
WASHINGTON

PREFACE,

The two languages, Sa'a and Ulawa> of which a dictionary is here
presented, belong to one of the Melanesian groups of the Oceanic
family of languages. Ulawa is the language spoken in the ten villages
of the small island of Ulawa, the Contrariete Island of the charts, in the
southeast Solomons. Sa'a is spoken in its purity in the village of the
same name, the last inhabited place on the southeast extremity of the
large island of Malaita, which lies some 30 miles west of Ulawa.

Malaita is composed of two islands, commonly called Big and Little
Malaita, separated by a narrow channel designated Mara Masiki Chan-
nel on the Admiralty chart, but called Laloi Su'u (literally '' within-the-
inlet '0 hy the people who use the languages presented here. Sa'a is
situated on the Malaita coast exactly opposite Ulawa, and there is con-
stant communication between the two places during the cabner weather
after the dropping of the southeast trade winds. The two languages
are evidently from a conunon stock and are so closely allied that it has
been found quite possible in the present work to adjust the various
details to the same scheme of treatment, both as to grammar and
vocabulary.

Of the two, Sa'a is far more highly specialized than Ulawa. This
specialization is shown:

1. In the use of nouns in the singular number,^ and particularly of such

as are the names of parts of the body, without the definite article
nga being prefixed.

2. In the very careful observance of the phonetic rule that the vowel a

changes to e in certain words after a preceding % or u or after the
verbal particle ko.

3. In the very frequent use of the gerundive.

4. In the richer vocabulary and in the employment of words not used in

Ulawa in order to avoid uncertainty in meaning, r. f., Sa'a numr
house, nifM bowl, where Ulawa employs nima for boUi; Sa^a domu
to fall (of persons only) in addition to 'u/k, where Ulawa has only
*usu for both.

5. In the fuller forms of the pronoun used as subject of the verb and in

the more particular ana careful use of the quasi-trinal forms end-
ing in -/tt.^

6. In the dropping of an inner consonant in the reduplication of stems.

The name of Contrariete Island is Ulawa and not Ulava or Ulaua, as
is sometimes found; the language has no ▼ sound, and in Lau, where
w changes to q (kw), the island is known as Ulaqa. The number of
persons who live on Ulawa and who speak Ulawa is not more than i ,200
at the outside; but the language has a certain and c(msiderable extrinsic
importance in view of the fact that a number of villages on Ugi, the
island lying off the east coast of San Cristoval, have Ulawa teachers^
and are using Ulawa books.

lii

IV PREFACE.

The true Sa'a speech is spoken in its purity at two villages only,
Sa'a itself and A'ulu. But the diflFerences between Sa^a and Qaloto
(Pwaloto), the language of the majority of the inhabitants of Little
Malaita, 4,000 or 5,000 in number, are so slight, amounting largely to
variety in accent and intonation, that Sa'a may be said to be the prin-
cipal language of Little Malaita.

The language of the north end of Little Malaita is called Tolo, and
this is also the language of the south end of Big Malaita. On the north
end of Big Malaita the language is known as Lau. These three lan-
guages, Sa^a, Tolo, and Lau are closely akin, and with Ulawa they form
a distinct subgroup in the linguistics of the Solomon Islands. Sa^a and
Ulawa on their part have distinct likenesses with the languages of San
Cristoval, and Lau at the other end of Malaita has several features
which show a grammatical connection with the language of Florida.

An important feature in both Sa^a and Ulawa is the use of shortened
forms of the personal pronouns in the three persons singular and of
additional forms in the third person plural, and the suffixing of these
as objects to verbs and prepositions. This is the practice of Solomon
Island languages generally. The presence of the third personal pos-
sessive has not hitherto been recognized in the languages of San Cristo-
val, but doubtless it exists, although not so commonly in use as in
Sa'a and Ulawa. Certain examples seem to show its presence in the
language of Florida (though Dr. Codrington has not marked it in his
grammar of Florida) ; anggu and ana certainly occur, cf. ganagana oli
anggu remembering me, ganagana oli ana remembering him. If these
are compared with Sa*a *amasi to'o aku feeling pity for me and ^amasi
to*o ana feeling pity for him, it will be seen that the so-called suffix in
Florida is anggUf ana, and not nggu and na, cf. '^Melanesian Languages,"
page 524, nouns.

This is the first essay toward the dictionary of any Solomon Island
language. The compiler is fully aware of the scantiness of his work.
Probably not more than one-third and certainly not one-half of the
existing words have been collected by him. The languages are rich
and, with proper opportunity, many additions might easily be made to
the words herein set forth.

Of the linguistic importance of the Melanesian languages there can be
no possible doubt. Dr. Codrington in his book ''The Melanesian
Languages" has shown how certain features in a language so far
removed geographically from Melanesia as Malagasy can be explained
by referring to Melanesian habits of speech, and also how Melanesia is
in many ways the linguistic key to the proper explanation of Polyne-
sian. Mr. A. S. Atkinson, in a paper read in 1886 before the Nelson
(New Zealand) Philosophical Society, said with reference to Dr. Cod-
rington's ''Melanesian Languages" that "this work will mark an epoch
in Polynesian philology by showing the fundamental relation between

PREFACE. V

the Polynesian and the Melanesian languages/' If this opinion is cor-
rect, and Mr. Atkinson was an excellent judge, it is of the highest
importance that matter such as is contained in this dictionary, the
compilation of which is directly the result of the lead given by Dr.
Codrington, should be placed before scholars in the hope that it may be
of some further help in elucidating the philological problems of the
Oceanic family of languages.

It should be noted that it has not been thought necessary to print in
this work many words common to the Oceanic family whose cognates
are set out in full in the Mota dictionary.

The compiler of this dictionary desires to put on record his indebted-
ness herein to Dr. Codrington's example, and wishes to acknowledge
that whatever value the dictionary may be found to possess will be due
to his having endeavored to follow the lines laid down in two of the
books from Dr. Codrington's pen, '' Melanesian Languages" and the
"Dictionary of Mota.*'

The thanks of the author are also due to the officials of the Carnegie
Institution of Washington for their readiness to print and publish the
present volume, and to Mr. William Churchill, Associate of the Institu-
tion, for assistance in arranging the matter presented in the dictionary.

W. G. IVENS.

Malvern, Victoria, June 1917.

LITERATURE.

List of books printed in the languages of Sa* a and of Ulawa:

1. Prayer Books containing Matins and Evensong, Litany, Selection of

rsalms containing about 60 Psalms, Holy Communion Office with
Collects, Occasional Services, Church Catechism.

2. Hymn Books containing 50 Hymns.

3. Complete New Testament.

4. Catechism for the Children of the Church.

Bibliography of Sa*a and Ulawa languages:

1. Small grammars in Dr. Codrington's ''Melanesian Languages. *'

2. Separate grammars compiled by W. G. Ivans.

Other Matter:

Collection of Folk Lore Tales in Ulawa.

CHEOC-LIST OF LANGUAGES.

Araga, Pentecost IsUuul. New Hebridet.
B<mgain9iU€ Siraiis, Solomon lalanda b e twe e n

Bougainville and Choiaeul Ulanda.
Bug., Bugotu, Yaabd, Solomon Islands.
D. K.. Duke of York Island. Bismarck Arcfal-

pelaco*
£^', New Hebrides.

Esp. Sto„ Bspiritii Santo, New Hebrides.
FaU, New Hebrides (Bfat6).
FaganUt San Cristoval. Solomon Islands.
Fiji Islands.

FL, Florida, Solomon Islands.
Gitb,, Gilbert Islands. Micronesia.
Haw., Hawaii.

Loift. Malaita. Solomon Islands.
Maisin, Collingwood Bay. New Guinea.
MaL, Malay.

Malag., Malagasy, Madagascar,
MalaUa, Solomon Islands.
MaUhda, New Hebrides.
Mah, New Hebrides.
Jf so., Maori. New Zealand.
Marsh,, Manhall Islands, Micronesia.
Md., Melanesia.
Jfoto, Banks Islands (New Hebrides complex).

Mau, Gull ci Papua, New Guinea.

N. B., New Britain. Bismarck Arcliipels«o.

N, G„ New Guinea.

Nguma, New Hebrides.

Niui, Savage Islands. Polynesia.

Omba, Lepers' Island. New Hebrides.

PoL, Polynesian.

C» Qak>to. Malaita, Sok>mon Islands.

5.. Sa'a. Malaita. Sok>mon Islands (see follow-
ing note).

Sam,, Samoa, Polynesia.

San Or., San Cristoval, Solomon Islands.

Ses., Sesake, New Hebrides.

ScL, Solomon Islands.

Sta. Or., SanU Cms, New Hebrides.

Tah., Tahiti, southeast Polynesia.

Tasma, New Hebrides.

ToJo. Malaita, Solomon Islands

U., Ulawa, Cont»ri^4 Island, Solomon
Islands (see following note).

Vaturanga, Guadakanar, Solomon Islands.

ViU, the language of the Fiji Islands.

Wangft, San Cristoval, Solomon Islands

Wtdau, Bartle Bay, New Guinea.

Note. — ^When S. or U. is found after words it is intended to mark that
word as peculiar to Sa'a or Ulawa re8i>ectively; where no such notation appears
it is to be understood that the word is common to both languages.

TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.

a4/<t adjective.

ada»9 adverb.

orf., artide.

(flu) marks a preposition as taking the suffiaed
pronouns An, *o. g.

dif., definite, definitive.

dtMOiui.9 demonstrative.

tfcfann.. determinative.

axd., exclusive (of peraonal pronouns, exclud-
ing the person addressed).

axdain*, ffBT^ff T fta t JCTi ■

§tuiL, genitive.

gprund., gerundive.

ind., inclusive (of peraonal pronouns, including
the person addressed).

inierj., interjection.

ffil0T.. inteiTogative.

(fm) marks a noun as taking the suffixed pro-
nouns Am, mu, no.

msi., metaphoricaL

mOath., metathesis.

meUm*, metonymy.

«.. noun.

n€g., negative.

iMicl., neuter.

(Na) or {no, ni) marks a noun as taking the
suffixed pronoun in the third singular and
in the neuter only of the third plund.

obj,, object.

omomatop., onomatopoetic
part., particle.
parHc., participle.
ptrs,, person, personal.
pl„ plural.
Poss., possessive.
pr., pronoun.
Prrf., prefix.
prep., preposition.
Pro9., proverbial.

rsdup., reduplication, reduplicated.
shtg., singular.
sm^., subject.
suff., sufiSx, suffixed.
isrm., termination.
tr., transitive.
v., verb.

9. f.. verb intransitive,
v. p., verbal particle.
9. tr„ verb transitive.
woe., vocative.

M. A., Codrington's "Melanesian Anthro-
pology."
Jf . L.. Codrington's "Melanesian Languages."
r. 5. £. "Tones Straits Expedition." vol. ill.

VI

CONTENTS.

PAOIt

Preface iii-vi

Dictionary of Sa'a and Ulawa Languages 1-115

Index to the Dictionary 117-130

Appendices:

A Brief Grammar of Sa'a and Ulawa I39^IS4

The Lord's Pnijrer in Twenty Languages as used in the Diocese

of Melanesia in the Islands of the South Pacific "^5$"^$^

Linguistics in the Western Pacific 157-176

Melanesia and its People 177-191

Natives of Melanesia .^ 192-198

Some Historical Notes ocmceming the Melanesian Mission .... 199-206

"Yachting" in Melanesia * 207-216

The Queensland Labor Trade 217-232

Santa Cruz 233-249

ILLUSTRATIONS.

F&ONnsPiBCB. The Landing of John Williams at Tanna.

Tbxt-figurb (p. 208). The Undine.

PLatb I. The Southern Cross at Santa Cruz.

2. A. Recruiting Boat at a Market in Malaita. The Women in Canoes
are waiting to exchange their Fish for Garden Produce.
B. Women Traders, etc., Malaita.
3* A* Sea-ftoine Canoe, Malaita.

B. Mooel of Canoe used for Bonito Fishing, Ulawa.

C. Matema, Reef Group.

4. A. Carved Food-bowls and Porpoise.
B. Food-bowls from Ulawa.

5. War-belts, Bowl, Lime-sdcks, Ear-plug, Forehead Ornaments,

Water-bottle, etc.

6. A. Carvinn from Ulawa: Man, Pig, and Dog.

B. Ulawa Hair-combs.

C. Forehead Ornaments made of Gam and Turtle SheU, from
Florida.

7. A. Gubs from Malaita, Solomon Islands.
B. Gubs, etc., from Malaita and Ulawa.

8. A. Ornaments of Shell for Forehead, Ear, and Nose, from Malaita

and Ulawa.
B* Nose Pendants and Fasteners for Bandolier*
9« Belts, Bandolier, Necklaces, Armlets, etc., made of Native Money,
Shells, Dos»' Teeth, Porpoise Teedi.

10. A. Natural Flints indsed, regarded as possessing Mana and

causing Yams to frucdfv, from Solomons.
B* Ghost made of Coral, from Ulawa.

11. A. Young Man of Nukapu.
B. Man of Qarea, Malaita.

vii

DICTIONARY

OF

SA'A AND ULAWA LANGUAGES

ULAWA LANGUAGES.

m 1. peraonai article used with nouns and
verbs: (a) when used with a common
noun it indicates its use as a personal
name; oUt thing, a ola. So-and-so; rnwae,
person, a mwaena. So-and-so; it is
applied to all personal names, both
native and foreign, male and female,
a WaU, a John; it is seen also in aUi,
wiio? it is used to personify; a wawa ko
'unu'tmue mu ola a sa^ e honu ens, the
mouth speaks of what the heart is full,
(b) when used with a verb or adjective
it indicates their use as a descriptive
name; ero, to deceive; a eroero, a de-
ceiver. In usage it corresponds to the
f of Mota and Malagasy.

« 2. termination of the verbal noun: kataU,
to go along the shore; haialea, sea-coast.

m, 3. adverb of assent: *o U urmct a, did you
do thus? yes.

M, 4. pers. pron. 3d sing, suffixed to verb (with
or without verbal suffix) as object, and
to prepositions as antidpatocy object
and used both of persons and things, as
him, her, it; it does not change to e after
a preceding I or « before a proper name
owing to the presence of the personal
artide a; li'oa e lio dhuiaa Dora, the
spirit protected Dora.

ik 5. stem to wliich the pronouns ku, mu, no,
etc., are suffixed in forming poes. 3.
Polynesian ka, ta,

*M 6. prefix of condition, making partldples:
Idngu, to pluck, *aldngu, come out of
socket; hiUi, to break off, *ahdU, brokoi
off. Mota ga 3.

^a 7. Ulawa v. p. of present or general time,
joined in pronunciation to the personal
pronoun used as subject, na'a, 'o'a.
Lau ka, future particle; Fotuna, New
Hebrides, ka, id.

''a ^'a 8. exdam. negative, don't.

^il *a'a 9. adj. term, suffixed to nouns, verbs
and other adjectives; ^iqii, mud;
9iiqU*€, muddy; mwako, to pierce;
mwakomwako*a, prickly. Mota ga 5,
Bugotu ga, Motu ka, Samoa a.

'*lk 10. suffix, (a) to poss. 2 and 3 in sing. 1 and
2: fUUbi'A, naku*€, &kH*a, Omu'A, nAmu'd.
(b) to pers. pron. dual 2 and 3 : i*emeru*e,
kereru*e. Probably 'a 9.

^i 11. stem to which pronouns ku, mu, na,
etc, are suffixed, forming poss. 1 of
things to eat. </. d 5. Mota ga 1,
Bugotu ga,

H 12. as A 6; 'dnguru from nguru.

^'a 1. exdam. negative, don't; *a 8.

''a'a 2. a large green parrot with red under the
wings, the male of ihilo'a. New
Guinea dectus. San Cristoval kaka,
Maori kaka.

*a'a 3. to run. to be abundant, of creepers;

kahaiisi e 'a'a, the Krass has spread; kuU

« 'a*a ha'ahia ta&ka, convolvulus had

crept over the canoe house. Wango

taga, to be in leaf.
*a*a 4. to rise up dear, of the moon: wsoro-

iMMTo e mdnu *a*a mai iUngi, the moon

has floated dear up on high.
*a'a S. 5. to throw, to bond: 'a*a lo'okaa^ to

contribute money. Wango gaga, to be

spent; Lau taga, to throw.
*a*a 6. adj. suff.; puru, frequent; purupuru'a'a,

frequently; wdi, water; wdiwH'a'a,

watery, gf. *a 9.

'A^adaH v. L, to importune, to vex, to beg, to
dun.
'a'ada'ini v. tr., to importune a person.

Vade U., to see. tf.kd'iade'u Wango ooial.
to look.

'a'aa (ku) S., n., leg, foot. ef. 'm 1.

*a^ U. exdam. hahal 'a'ai laa, so there!

Valla'a adj., firm, strong, powerful; ea'a*ila'a
oio ma4 ana, he is very strong; redupli-
cated 'a<2a with 'a 9.
*a*ailahaana strength, its strength.

'a'aU V. 1., to bite; mwaa 'a'ala, poisonous
snake. *ala 3.

'a'aUH V. i., to increase, to spread, of plants.
Va 3.

'a'ana U. v. i., to vomit.
'a'anala'ini v. tr.

aani U., adverb preceding verb; at all, just
now; qake aani lae, he did not go at all;
na'asi aani Uu mai, I have just come.

*a*a«o €f. 'a*o.

'a'aolaanga S., v. n., lamentation.

'a'aro v. t., to come aboard, of surf; kai nako a
'a'aro melu, a wave came aboard us.
a'aronga v. n., surf breaking on the shore.

'a'sii V. i., to be rent asunder. Wango kari,
Lau kakari, Florida takari.

'a'ataal v. i., to be odd, uneven. In number;
nga kue e *a*aiaH, there is an odd one.

'a*«te V. i., to be dry; kero 'a* ate, dregs of grated
coconut after pressing out the milk.

aau the season of the southeast trades, winter,
the season of the ripe canarium nuts:
aau koH repo, the canarium nuts are just
ripe; aau e refo kosi ktdaa, when the nuta
are ripe the weather Is cahn; aau
marawa, the nuts purpling before ripen-
ing, the month of July. ef. maraau,

'a'auhi V. tr., to hdp, to come to the aid of.
kdTa'auki. Wango aauki; Mota kakau,
to visit constantly.

ada 1. poss. 3, pi. 3, among them, bdongiag to
them, they (obj.).

*ada 2. poss. 1. pi. 3, for them, theirs, of things
to eat.

adaada S., ataata U., v. i., to progress, to move
on, to be in motion.

ADA'SLU

a<U*elu 1. po88., 3. pi. 3. among them, for them,

them (obj.); (^da 1, *elu.
'adft'eltt 2. po8s. 1, pi. 3, for them, theirs, of

things to eat; *ada 2.
adai 1. n., a cluster; a bunch: adai niu, a bunch

of green coconuts.
*adt'i S. 2. V. i.. to rub: nunurete ko 'ada*i melu,

fearfulness has come upon us.
adairl S. v. i., to despise, used with poss. 3.
ftdairinceliii v. tr. Wango adairi, to

separate.
adlao n., a creeper used to make bowstrings.
adftoro V. i., to crouch (oro, to stoop). In this

word ao is diphthong.
adaru'eS., adam'a U.. 1. poss. 3, dual 3, among,

belonging to, the two of them; used also

as object when the pronoun is separated

from the verb.
*adani*e S., *adaru*a U.. 'adaml U.. 2. poss. 1.

dual 3, for the two of them, of things to

eat.
'ade U., to see: e qaUo la ne*e *ad€a, I saw

nothing, ha'i'ade^i.
Mdi V. tr., to tabu, to set one's mark upon; n., a

tabu mark; huui edit S., huu ni edi, U.,

a bunch of leaves used as a tabu sign.
Mdlnga U., V. n., *alu edinga, the placing of

a tabu sign.
ftdUa-dm), gerund.
idiadi 1. n., yellow vascular tissue of gleichenia

fern used in ornamentation on combs,

spears, etc.: noma Sdiedit a spear with

grass plaiting; arapa dditdi, a comb so

decorated.
Xdiedi 2. v. i.. to have pins and needles in the

limbs: *aeku ko ediedu my legs tingle.
Hdine S., n., of relationship, used with ro mwa:

ro mwa Mine, two cousins-german

regarded as brother and sister. Hdi.
idle n., a creeper which grows on banyans, used

as fishing-lines or to tie together the

teeth of combs {arapa) : nga hikei adio,

a coil of adio.
Xdin V. i., to be out of joint, diu 1.
ado V. i., to share in, to participate; (a) used

with poss. 3; (b) used with suff. pron.

ku, YfMi, na. da* ni, to befit; adoku, my

deserts; le*u e adoku, my share, ha'aado.
adonga S., v. n., used with ddu 1, hele: noko deu

adtmga, I am making an attempt; mola

adonga^ merely tentatively.
adomaH, adoadoma'i U., v.i ., to think, to recol-
lect; adoma'i mousi, to decide, to dare;

adoma*i sae, to give thought to; adoma'i

su*aie*et to be anxious about.
adomaHnga v. n., thought, recollection.
adoma'ini v. tr., to think of a thing.
adoflia*l]iila-(ka) gerund. Wango adomai,

Bugotu aiio, to know.
Xdo, Kduedn v. i., to carve, to build, to dub out

planks; Adu Vole, to build a canoe; &du

Volanga, canoe building.
Kdttini v. tr., to carve, etc.
ftdttminga v. n.

Kdumila-Ckii), gerund. Wango adu.
'aa, 'ae*aa (ku), n., leg, foot; 'aeku e li'i, my legs

are out of joint; 'ae loku, maimed in the

'ae, 'ae'aa (continued).

feet, halt; 'ae pule, dropsical; 'aeku ko
ediedi, my foot tingles; 'aeku ko seunieu,
my foot hurts; *ato 'ae, to move quickly;
kuni lengu ka'aodohie 'aeka, to guide our
feet; t ngadona 'aena, before, at the feet
of, him; kolune 'ae, the heel; koukouli 'ae,
the ankle; lAu 'ae, be quick; ni'i 'ae la'o
i'ola, to board a canoe; peuaiana 'ae,
the sole; poupou ni 'ae'ae, the heel; Ulu
'ae, to hurry; Mola i 'ae, to follow a
master; umu i 'ae, to gather round the
feet of. M aori woe, foot ; Motu ae, foot ;
Bugotu nae, foot.

'ae 2. n.. mark, example.

*ae 3. n., source, beginning; mu 'aei vfola, first
principles; a 'aei meurihe, the source of
life; 'aei henue, the land of origin; 'aei
hohola, the owner of the garden; 'aei
'inoni nemue, thy dependents; 'ae hdu,
precipice,
'aana because of, the beginning of; used
with ana 7; 'aena ana, because of; 'aen4i
maa, threshold; 'aena papali, the jaw.

'ae 4. n., faeces, ordure; mu 'ae, faeces; kuui 'ae,
excrement. Polynesian iae, tutae, faeces.

'aa 5. V. i., to uncover, to bring to light, to open
out, to expose: walana ko 'ae ka'adai ana
mu esoesohai dunge, his voice deaveth
the flames of fire.
'aeli V. tr., used of the action of the sea.
rain, etc., in exposing anything.

'ae 6. specific numeral; 'aeni ue, five rolls {hikei
ue) of dyed cane for plaiting wristlets,
etc.

'ae 7. ha'a'ae, to be fleeting, vain.

'ae'aenida v. i.. to commit fornication,
'ae'aeniolanga v. n.. fornication.

'aehota S. 1. v. tr.. v. i., to begin. The root
notion is that of generation, there is also
inherent a notion of continuance; atei ni
e 'aehoiaa, who began it? melu 'aekoia
'unue, we began to say. 'ae 1. koia 1.

'aehota 2. v. i., to conceive; v. tr., to generate, to
beget, tala'aehota.
'aehotalana S., gerund, the beginning; 'urt
*oto m&i i 'aehotalana, from the begin-
ning up to now.

'aela» 'aa'aela v. i., to be bad, no good, ill; inu
'aela, nasty to drink, not fresh (of
water); e la 'otoi 'aela, it is bAd; e la
'oioi 'aela mwaani nonola, it is worse
than yesterday; laehaku e 'aela, I can not
walk well; e lai 'aela, it is bad; lalona e
'aela; loo 'aela, to be immodest, to offend
against propriety; in a depreciatory
sense e mu Himwei 'aela, very small,^too
small; e no'i 'aela 'oio, to be bad;
ng&uhana e 'aela, he overeats himself;
'osi kdrikeni 'aela laa, do not be such a
nuisance; rako 'aela, unpleasant, irksome;
e rako 'aela aku, it is against my grain;
fon^ 'aela, to make a din; noko sapt
'aela, I am ill; sapekue 'aela, I am ill;
siho 'aela ana, to spread evil reports of; <
tala'ai 'aela. e lala'aeni 'aela, it is begin-

AHU'I

'aelt, *ae'«elt (continued).

ning to spoil; e tola 'aela aku^ it was bad
for me.
'aekhftAxiA gerund, its badness; 'aelahaana

mu »'e. the bad fish.
*Ml«ti V. tr., to cause to be no good, to
spoil; used with ddu 1; scie *aelasi, to
bear malice. Not connected with iata'
*ala, cf. M. L., p. 54; probably 'a« 1»
with la 3.

'aelnlii v. i., to step over, to neglect; used with
prep, haahi; *ae 1.

'aena cf. 'ae 3. *aeni. cf. *ae 6.

aha 1. n., a sparrow hawk.

aha 2. V. i., to cut, to score, to notch, to mark
by incising.
ahasi V. tr.
aha^a-(ktt) gerund. Wango aha.

aha 3. to recede, to dry up (of water).

aha 4. v. tr., aha tahanit to warn.
aha tihanila-(ktt). gerund.

ahaa 1. v. i., to be bitter to the taste; W ahaa,
wild areca nut.

ahaa 2. n., salt water, salt; me'i ahaa^ some salt
water. Bugotu aha,

ahalaH, ahaahala'i partic, removed, changed
in position; sae ahala*i, vexed at heart,
unsettled, provoked.
ahalaHni v. tr.. to provoke, ha'aahala'ini,

*§hJtii partic, broken off (of boughs); *a 6,
hdlil.

ahare awalasi i ahare, the northeast wind.

'aharo 1. v. 1., to conduct a betrothal or wed-
ding ceremony.

^aharo 2. n., relations by marriage; 'aharo inau,
my relatives by marriage. Heuru,
S. C, aharo.

'aharota v. n., a wedding feast; ddu *aharota
ana kalena, wedding feast of his child;
kara ni *aharoiat a large yam pudding
for bridals.

'aha 1. n., surf, currents from wind or tide, tide-
rip; *ah€ hiru, an eddy; hirutu *ahe,
troublesome waves; *ah€ hirune i
Nielaha'u, the tide rip at Cape Z616e;
*ahe ho hurosieu, the surf whirls me
about; 'ahe host lola^ the current sets;
*ahe Iduleu, strong current; *ahe e
lomosie *iola, the surf buffeted the canoe;
*ahe lulu, boiling tide; *ahe i niu langalau,
a tide rip between Ulawa and Sa'a; halo
*ahe, to divide the waves by incantation
and make a way for a canoe.
*ahela adj., strong current; e *ahela, there is

a strong current.
'ahasi v. tr., to cause to drift; e 'ahcsie, it

has drifted.
'aheai]a-(lni) gerund. Polynesian tahe, to
flow; Viti ndave, Mota ave, Florida tahe.

'ahe 2. v. i., to melt away, to waste, to dis-
appear; wa'e 'ahe, to waste.
'ahelalni v. tr., to cause to disappear.

'ahe 3. n., a crab. Mota gave.

'ahe S.. 4. 'ahs langalau, to bear bountifully (of
a garden).

'ahdidii, 'ahe'ahelidu S., v. i., to congregate.
'aheUdiiiife v. n., congregating.

aheta v. i.. to stretch out the arms with weari*
ness, premonitory of malaria.

'aheulao v. i., to be a fornicator, fornicating;
ulao.

'ahewa'a v. i., to be fleeting, vanishing, melting
away; *ahe 2. wa*a 4.

'ilhi n., closet, chamber.

*jlhinga U., V. n.. chamber; mwai keni ana
*dhinga, women fond of staying in their
chambers.

'Ahi'a the southernmost village on the west
coast of XJlawa.

'Uhi't S., 'Mhi*a U., n., Malay apple (Eugenia
sp-); Puli *ehi*e, orange cowrie. Mota
gaviga, Viti kavika.

'Hhihi partic, crouching, groveling (of a dog) ;
hihi,

Mhimawa v. i., to yawn.

AhinaH U.. AhinaH amau the name of a canoe
in a story.

'Uilau, 'ilbi'ehiia partic, out of joint, fallen
out of place, hisuhisu, maaJiu ho
hinVi *ehVehisu *olo, my eyes nearly
fell out.

aho v.. to be abraded (of skin).

'aho'a partic, separate, apart from; used with
poss. 3; *aho*a aku, far off me. 'a 6,
ho*a2.

ahoaho (na, ni) U., n., the inner shell of the
canarium nut, film.

'ahola partic, broad, wide. *a 6. hda 1.
'aholanga v. n., breadth, width.

'aholo V. i., to fish for garfish {mwanole) with
a kite; sa'o ni * aholo, the kite.
'aholonga v. n., fishing with a kite. *a 6,
holol.

ahonga U., v. n., making trial, tentative, used
with tdu 1; tola ahonga, to tempt; name
ahonga, taste and try. malaahonga.

ahowa n., open space of sea and sky. Wango
ahowa,

ahu talo ahu, a war band, fighting company.

Mhtt, fthnihtt U. 1. v. i., to be complete, perfect
(of numbers) ; Ahu mae, to oeaae hostili-
ties; ma'uru llhu, to be sound asleep;
talo dku, to amass.
ha'alhu v.. to complete, to finish.
Uittsi v. tr., to a£fect completely, to extend
all over, to encompass; Akusie mu U*u,
everywhere; e dhusie hUnue, it has
affected the whole place. Lau afu,
complete; Maori ahu, to heap up;
ahuatia, completed; Mota as, to pile;
Ambrym ahu, ten; M. L., p. 458; Motu
ahu, to inclose.

Mhtt 2. v. i., to bring forth fruit.

Xhohn v., to fade away, to droop.

ihnhtt'e S.. n., crumbs of food; mu ehuhu'ei
ngeulaa.

timi 1. n., a dancing dub; moo pe'e dhui, to
danoe holding the dhui, M. A.* p. 333.
cf. moo hidehide.

MhnH 2. determ., from dhu 1, used as preposi-
tion, around, protecting; huU dku*i, to
come for; lio dhu'i, to protect; Para
dhu*i, to protect with a fence; puli ehu'i,
to gather in a crowd round a person; toto

IHU*!

Hliu'i 2 (continued).

AJiMi'l. to pay a fine on behalf of; i
saPena i Dora iiku'i niu, an apostrophe
addressed to Ugi. €f. ha*ad&hi.

MhiiH 3. V. tr., to wrap up; AAu'f ola, a parcel.
&hu 1: Wango ahui, to wrap; Lau afu,
Samoa *afu\ Niu€ aji, to wrap.

UiiiH 4. partic. used as adverb, altogether,
completely; ke llhu'i saediana lokoioko,
will completely rejoice together.

UitiH 5. n., dAM*< menu, a lily (Crinum asiat-
icum) which grows on the beaches.
Wango hit menu.

iUni4-(nM) 6. n.* a stump of a tree.

Xhvlill n.. seeds of a tree, strung in a bunch and
worn on the backs of the fingers after
the fashion of castanets in dances. </.
kidekide.

ihololii n.. a small yzm pudding used in sacri-
fices, ihu 1, luLu 2.

Ihimi determ. from 6hu 1. used as an adverb;
entirely, completely; more common in
Ulawa; hHunit metathetic.

'ahtt'o n., owl; onomatop. San Cristoval
kdhuho.

mmora v.. to be dusty, ora 2.

MbttqaH S.. n.. a dish of edible fiig-leaves Cffiiiflut)
and pounded new canarium nuts {ngiUi).
Hhu'i 3.

Xhuraa U., Ukuraa ddni, to be on the move
before daylight.

Xhvraka U.. v. i.. to come forth, proceed out of.

Mhvnura v., to be abundant, to be green (of
grass), dku 2. Wango akmra.

Urare v. i., to make holes with a digging-stick
(pi'€ 2) for 3^am planting.

Uivreha v. i., to be open, clear, of unimpeded
vision, dku 1.

Mhiirav S., v.. to do haphazard; lUnureu ana
kurung€t to run uncertainly.

'ihuii n., the conch shell, blown as a summons;
laJmUma *lUmri, the blowing of a conch;
ngaraiai 'ekuri, the sound of the conch;
walana *dkuri e UOalea walu tola i Tolo,
the sound of the conch went through all
the villages in Tolo; walowalai 'ekuri,
the sound of the conch. Bugotu tavuU.

Mhiita-(kii) V. n., all, completely, the whole of.
dku 1. dkuiamere'i mango, both of us,
dkuiamolu mango, all of you; dkutana
sapeku, my whole body; Ukuteni, all
(things) ; i*oe iUtuiemu, the whole of thee;
mdni dhUaka, U., all of us.

Ihvtftta v., to be vanished, to have vanished.
dku 1, tola 2.

*1U 1. n., a tree (more common in Ulawa); *&i
ka'angdu keni, ginger, given to women as
an ordeal; 'di ni kaka, U., papaya; *di
nekuneku, a rod, a stick; *Ai ni ile, U.,
wood for making fire by friction; *di repo,
a pestle for pounding taro to make Untr
manga; kai 'ei, U., a log; kiie *di,V., to split
firewood; kou 'ei, U., the kidneys; kuani
'ei, U., fruit; iduidu mesi 'ei, U., Jumped
about on the firewood; kokopa ni 'ei, U.,
buttress flanges of certain trees; lolo'a
ni *ei, U.. a thicket; maa ni 'ai, U., a

'li 1 (continued).

stake, picket; mwa 'di, U.. firewood;
mwai 'ei, U., trees; mwai ngangani *«••
U., chips of wood; mwai tango ni 'ei, U.«
dead trees; pou ni 'ei, U., a log of wood;
qa'akiia ni 'ei, U., a slab of wood; rai 'ei,
U., plank; so'o *di, U., to pick up fire-
wood; suli 'ei i qac^, ridge-pole; tdu 'ei,
U.. to break firewood; uietiieni 'ei, U.t
twigs; 'ulu'ulu ni *ei, U., branches, twig*
and leaves; usu 'ei, S., firestick. Mota
iangae (M. L., p. 95). Florida gai,
Malagasy koto.

*li 2. V. 1., to be stiff, numb; nimeku e 'di 'oio,
my hand is numb.

IH 3. tr. suflBx to verb; sdsu, sdsue'i,

I'i 4. participial ending used adverbially; ere
kd'ikonod'i, to speak revilingly.

XI 5. U., di suu, to perish, to become extinct.
suu 1.

11 6. di uki, to clean shoots off stored jrams. </•
diU'i,

*ai, 'ai^ai 7. exdam., mind, look outl

'Xl*aa 1. v.. to be lost, misring. wanting.
ka'a'di'aa. Wango aiaa,
'li'aaafa v. n., destruction.

•i'aa 2. exdam., alas, woe!

*ai*a«na without, unless, failing; used as ad-
verb; 'ai'aa$M ineu, failing me, but for
me. 'ai'aa 1, ana 2.

iidaa v.. to be in pain.

iidari specific numeral, ten parrot-fish caught
with a dip net (kdtu). dideri ni i'e.

<Xl'sl*aa adj., fleeting, transitory, 'di'aa,

'llhii v.. to be uprooted, to fall, of trees in a
storm.

'llhvri n., lettuce tree, with yellow leaves,
planted to mark landing-places. *di 1.
kwtt*

*aila </. 'a'aUa'a.

*iiil«Ait S.. n., the banyan tree. *di 1.

*ai]i 'oOi lado, v. tr., to graft, lado 1.

*ai]i'apaa U.. n.. a staff, walking-sUck. 'di 1.
li 1, 'aPaa,

Xlttpo'n U.. n., transverse beams, a cross (late
use), 'ai 1, li 1, po'upo'u,

lini tr. suff. to verb, d'i 3, ni 4.

Aio an island off the east coast of Big Malaita.

a'itada S.. thus, in their style. Just their way.
da 2,

a'itana S., thus, similarly to, Just that way, like
his style, na 2. </. U. alika 2.

litanaH, lisitanal v. tr.. to beseech, to beg, to
entreat.
Mitanalnge v. n., entreaty, prayer.
Mita]ia*i]a-(kn) gerund.

liteH V. i., to dean the rootlets off taro, etc.
At 6.
Iite<isi V. tr.

'Mitapl rL, a tree. Barrlngtonia edulis; koi 'eiiepi,
its nut; trunk used for ridge-poles.
'ai 1, tdpi.

'Xi walo'a adj., covered with creepers, entan-
gled, 'di 1, walo 1.

aka poss. 3, pi. 1, ind., to, or on. us; used as
object ^en the pronoun is separated
from the verb.

*9ktL 1. V. 1m to poll out; *aka Ite, to imll out
▼lolently. to defenid. to hdp; *aia niko,
to pull teeth,
"akaai v. tr., noho 'cktmU hmunm, I gouse

his eyes oat.
'akuiiU-*(kii) flenind. Lau af a. Mota f ikoika.

'eka 2. poM. !• pL 1, for lit, of thliigB to eat.

aka'afai 1. poM. 3, pi. 1. to. or on, us; lued as
object when the pronoun Is separated
from the verb.

'ska'eitt 2. poes. 1, pL 1, for us. of things to eat.

'akalo 1. n.. a ghost, a spirit; M. A., p. 260. </.
uraa'i. 'akalo • kdusU i'oia, a ghost
clutched the canoe and capeiaed It;
'akah Iff ifMtews, a ghost of the open sea.
tf. Ngorieru; Mnua ni 'akah, Malapa
Island, hades; ho'o 'akalo, to tie a granny
knot; maa ni 'akalo, eye of coconut;
falolama mu 'akalo, worship of the
ghosts; ta'e 'akalo, to raise a ghost; tola
'akalo, to exorcise spirits; tola 'akalo, to
ezordse a ghost. M. A., p. 137; uunu
da saana mu 'akalo, to offer burnt offer-
ings to the ghosts, wdi ni 'akalo, tears.
Wango aiaro, Mota taiaro, Gilberts
Utiaro, Viti iataro. M. L.. p. 146.

'akalo 2. a dead person; nikoi 'akalo, dead
man's tooth; ^ora ni 'akalo, cemetery
(late use).

akara% akam'a S. 1.. poss. 3. dual 1, to. or on.
us two. used as object when the pronoun
is separated from the verb.

*akafa% 'akam's S. 2.. poss. 1, dual 1. for us
two (of things to eat).

akav, akakaa v., to be ready, to be lit. to be
burning. d4u akau, to prepare, to make
ready; s akau, is it alight? keU akau, to
prepare, to make ready,
akavsl v. tr.. ka'akauni, to cause to light.
Wango Of OM.

akauii V. tr., v. i., to be positsscd of. to be pro-
vided with, akau, melu akanri 'oio,
we are furnished; mare 'asi akauri ikai,
U.. where are we likely to get anything?
ha'aakaurisl causative,
akauiiage v. n.. profit, possession,
akaurlsi v. tr., to obtain possession of, to

provide, to have.
akaarisila-(kn) gerund.

aks n., string fringe, the dress of married
women hung suspended from the waist.

akaake n., strand of rope. twig, sprig; akeake

ni dUi, sprig of dracaena.
akaraH partic. come undone.

Hiksra^nl v. tr., to undo, to destroy, to
subvert.

'akars 1. partic, untwisted.

'akere (na) 2. n., border, edge. bank, karekare.

*akaa partic.. on one side, overbalanoed, tilting.
'a 6. kdu 1.

*ako 1. V. i., to catch in the arms, to grasp, to
wrestle,
'akonga v. n.
*ako'i V. tr. Wango agoi, Viti rako,

ako 2. konu ako, to have pulmonary disease.

akoako 1. v.. to be out of heart, without i^n^rgy;
kde akoako, to do listlessly.

'aka'ako 2. v.. to deprecate wrath by saying

'ako'ako saemu; not used to women,
akaha v. i.. to be listless, to neglect through
lasiness; e akoks mmaanie, he neglected
it through lariness.
akahataSni v. tr.

akohataH partic to neglect through lasi-
ness; lie aknMa'i su'a ona maamaaka,
run carelessly Into danger,
'akoln partic, excited In mind, 'a 6.
Ikn 1. poss. 3, sing. 1. to. or upon, me, used as
object of verb when the pronoun is
separated from the verb; s kopi eku,
touch me. Rafurafu, S. C. mwaii^ aku,
my husband.
'Ikttt *lkn'a 2. poss. 1, sing. 1. for me (of
things to eat).
'MkuH U.. of many things for one person to
eat; koni waieu 'dku'i, bonito for me to
eat.
akau esdam.. pish, humph, pooh,
'ala, 'ala'sla 1. v. L. to answer; with poss. 3.
to obey, to give attention to; fioa ka'a
'ala ana, I did not obey; 'ala qA'u, to
nod the head backward In assent.
'alami v. tr., to answer a person.
'ala]nila-(kn) gerund.

'alama'lai v. tr.. to reqwod to. to acknowl-
edge, to give leave to. to consent.
<alaflsaiaila-(ktt) gerund.
'alamaH, hl'i'alama'i ▼. tr.. to consent
mutually. Florida ialantagini.
'ala 2. V. 1.. to be prosperous; s 'ia diana 'oto,

itisdoingwelL
'ala, 'ala'ala 3. v. i., to bite, to sting, to be sharp-
edged; 'ala mumu, to dose in like jaws;
'ala tola, to bite at and miss; pa'awa ko
'ala tola, last two days of the moon.
'ala'i V. tr. Motu karakara, fierce; New
Britain karai, Kabadi arasia, Maisin
karaf€\ Mota garagara, to dench the
teeth,
"ala 4. V. tr.. to break off. to lop. of branches;
'ala dango, to lop off limbs of a tree.
Mota sal 1, Wango ala, Maori kera.
'ala 5. to cut the teeth, to get feathers; €ka ko
'ala, the white cockatoo is growing
feathers; to flash as lightning; wa'ariri
ko 'ala kiidie salo, the lightning-flash
deaves the sky; 'ala ngingita, U., to
frown, to dench the teeth. Florida
gala; Mota sar, to pierce, to shine.
'sla 6. to set a net. to lie in wait for, to go the
rounds of the flying-fish floats (a'o);
'ala poo, to catch pigs in a net; 'ala
pupulu kaaki, to surround in a dense
body; mae ko 'ala, enemies lie in wait.
'alail tr.. ku'o kire 'alasis ka'u, the net that

they have laid.
'alaaH v. 1.. 'alaa'lni tr.. to plan, to lay out

the plan of. to shape, to lay in order.
'alaa*inila-(ku) gerund. Mota sal 2;
Maori ftarakou, net.
'ala 7. U., plural article in the vocative; 'ala

mwane, you men. </. 'ailai 1.
'ala 8. adjective ending; sasu'ala, smoky;
Monga'ala, resinous, 'a 9. la 4.

ALAA

8

'alaa 1. n.. a flock or covey of birds, 'alaa ni
m€Hu. ala 6. Mota Tgara, spread, or
sara 3, to gather.
"ala'a 2. S.. adv.» up, upward; noko sot 'ala'a
ana, I call upon him. Wango araa,
Florida gataga.

alalia n.. croton; alaala pa*ewat a variety with
red leaves shaped like a shark's fin.

alaha 1. n.. a chief. In M. A., pp. 47, 51 (note).
maelaha appears to be the Wango word
maeraha. No such word occurs in Sa'a
or Ulawa. dili alaha, red-leaved dra-
caena used in incantations and in draw-
ing lots; horana mwa alaha, U., under
the power of the chiefs; huui alaha, a
chiefly family; reoreo alaha, a large
variety of nautilus, 'king* nautilus;
mwei ia'a alaha, dear lord; niniho alaha,
a large hornet; pepe alaha, a butterfly;
siri alaha, a parrot, Lorius chlorocercus.

alaha 2. v. i.. to rule; alaha haahi, to rule over.
ha'aalaha, a 1, laha.
ilihinga V. n., rule, dominion, chieftain-
ship, kingdom (late use) . Wango or aha.

t lahtttt, alaalahutt v. 1., to talk in parables, to
compare in wottis*
•lahonnge v. n., parables, metaphors.
•lahQute'ini S.. alahuunge'ini U., v. tr., to
use parabolic language.

'alai U. 1. plur. art., used of persons only; cf.
'alei; *alai *inoni, you people; *alai
Mwado*a, Mwado*a people; *alai 61a,
you people.

*Alai 2. n., northeast cape of Little Malaita.
opposite the rock HSLu Hari at the
entrance of Mara Masiki Channel.

'alali U., V. tr., to apportion food. *ala 6.
Wango arari, to befit.

alalu V. tr., to disobey, to mutiny against.

alanga, Alanga klide Selwyn Bay. on Ugi. a
trading-station for copra.

'alangaH S., *alanga'i i*ola ni lolo, fifth and
sixth days of the moon; * alanga* i hapa,
first quarter of the moon; *alanga*i roa,
third and fourth days of the moon.
*ala 6.

'alSngtt partic, out of its socket. *a 6, lUngu.

'Ala Sa'a n., the northwest Alite mountain
above Langalanga. Big Malaita.

'alasi U., 'arasi S., v. tr., to fine down by scrap-
ing (of bows, spears, combs, and other
wooden articles); hira *alasi past, they
scrape bows. Niu€ alaii, to scratch.
cf. harasi.

'alatalni v. tr., to bait a hook. *ala 6.

ale, aleale v. tr., to give oneself airs.

tleale 1. n.. an umbrella palm.

tlaala 2. n., a frond of the umbrella palm cut
into strips and dyed red with the root of
the lettuce-leaf tree {kikiri), used for
decorating canoes, combs, spears, etc.;
PungHi aleale, a bunch of dyed aleale.

'alei, 'alal U., pi. art., used of persons only;
*alei he*i nikana ineu, my family; *alei
Hnoni, you people; 'alei Hnoni ineu, my
relations. Florida lei used to form
plurals.

■lele to be jubilant; alele ni (ani) kananga, to
rejoice in song.

'denga adv., up; uwe 'alenga, to lift up the eyes.

'a 6.

'dsleiMEA adv.. up; lio 'al^enga, to look up.

'delensa'a adv. 1. upward. 2. v. tr., to

lift up. Mota langa, to lift; Samoa

langa, Viti langa,

alepopo U., lae aUpapo, to go sidewajrs. to walk
like a crab.

'■leu partic, turned upward; maana e 'aleu, to
have the whites of the eyes showing.

'Hi 1. V. 1.. to lie curled up as a snake or a dog;
mwaa ho *di, a snake is curled up (an
omen of danger, maemaeha). Mota ial,
to go around.

mi U. 2. V. tr., to cut the mortises (rfl'igc'ii) on
a pillar; kira *asi *alia i one, they mor-
tised it down on the beach.

'MU 3. a cord. cf. Teli. Wango art.

'«li U. 4. *iai *ae, the first piece of ground planted
in a garden.

Hide to travel by sea.

Uidanga v. n., 1. a sea journey. 2. a canoe-
load of voyagers. Midanga e hde
saaha'eln.
Illdangaha U., v. n., with double n. ter^
mination, as 2. Wango arida, Lau alid^

Mlieli 1. n., logs in a yam garden marking the
plots of different planters.

lOieU 2. lio dlidi, to look about.

ilieiimiii v.. to abound.

aliha U. 1. n., a centipede. Bugotu lira.

■liha-(ktt) U. 2. alihana, thus, similarly, just
his way; alihamu, just your way;
alihada, just what you might expect
from them. cf. aitana, S.. aliiana, XJ.

Xliho'i 1. V. i., to return, to go back, dli i,
ho*i 3. ho tola dliho'i ana nunune,
recovers its soul; mangona e puuto*o
lUiho*i, his breath returned; «t'« aiiho'i,
to recover health; susu eliho*i, restored
whole. 2. adv., again.
KlihoHsi U., V. tr., to turn over, to reverse.
Vaturanga hoi, again; Florida goi, again;
Wango *aho*i, ha'ari, to return.

Mliholo 1. n., a depression in a mountain ridge,
a pass. 2. a fosse cut on a ridge to
prevent access by an enemy, holo.

iUhuHti S., V. tr., to turn over, to reverse. hu*i 2.
Mliho'itelni Qaloto dialect, as mhu*iH.
ilihu'ita-(na) gerund, overturning, reversal;
*oio esi elihu*Uana mu huuilume, then
shall the cities be destroyed.

AliHte Northwest Sister Island, 'Olu Malau.

'mHi n., a shellfish (Turbo petholatus) ; mttsi
ni *elili, its operculum. Mota saliH,
NiuS aim.

MUlo'a n.. an eddy of the wind, 'dli 1.

'Mlinge (ku) 1. n., ear; *Minge ka*a kawa'ie, ear
hath not heard; *OUngada e hi*e mwaanie
rongo, ears weary of hearing; hu*esi
'elinge, to turn the ear to; rofigo ni
*e inge, to hear with the ear; snsu *elinge,
an ear-stick ornament; uwe *iUing€, to
give ear to. 2. mushroom, large fungus.
Pol3mesian talinga.

AHA

'Xliiig* V. n., vying; huruhuru ni *elinge, to run

nice8.
Mlingi V. tr.. iUingie ora ni uunu, to build up the

altar of saoifioe.
'aliiico V. i., of the tongue, to "get round'* a

word; medku ka*a *alingo ana, my

tongue can not pronounce it.
alipono s&su alipanot thick smoke, pono.
'Mlipnri v. i.. to follow (of time). *iUi 1. Puri\

est *elipuri ana, a little while after.
'Mlisuu ina*ahu 'elisuu, to sleep sound; m&-

*ahung€ 'elisuu, sound sleep. *dli 1.

suu 1.
'alisottte'ini v. tr., to be forgetful of.
alitana U., adv., even so, thus, alihana,
'Uite 1. n., a tree (Catappa terminalis); hoi

* elite, its nut; 'Alite ko mena, the *dlUe is

turning red. 2. n., a diamond-shape in

ornament. Mota saliU,
Mlitehn n., rubbish heap. Lau tafu.
'Xlin 1. partic. reversed; saena e *aliu, he

repented. Uu, 2. v. i.. to turn round;

*dliu haahie mwala, to turn round and

face the people. ha*a*dliu.
'Sliimge V. n.. *lUiunge ni sae, conversion

of mind.
'alo specific numeral, of taro, 100; 'alo ni hut,

100 taro. Espiritu Santo taro, 100;

Mota tar, 1,000.
•lo'a 1. adj., suiOfering from yaws. 2. n., the

yaws; mu alo*a, the frambcesia.
'alohi V. tr., to anoint. Florida dalovi.
alo4 to be loose (of teeth).
*alopi partic, having a jagged edge.
Aloii the north end of San Cristoval.
'alo'tt 1. partic, turned back upon itself. *a 6.

2. n.. a verse. *aU}*u ni wala,
iflu 1. v., dlu ana 'ape, to fish with a seine,
'•la U. 2. V. tr., to put, to place. Lrau alu;

Florida talu, to put.
'alo U. 3. V. n., to change into, to become (of

ghosts); e *alu ana pa*ewa, he changed

into the form of a shark.
Iiliih« S. 1. a centipede,
'•lithe 2. partic, untied, loosened. *a 6. luhe.
Xlvlii, Mluelahl 1. v. t.. to wrap up, to cover up.

2. n., a covering, cloak.
Illiiliite-(kii) gerund, a covering, cloak.
•longeH partic, rongonga alungeH, heedless.
'•luaae U., v. i., to meditate, to revolve in

mind. *alu 2.
'•]na-(ka) n.. father, father's brother; 'amaku,

voc, father; *amana e ngUungeu, his

father ate it, a railing exclamation; e

usulie *amana, he is like his father.

Polynesian tama.
'•maa partic, outside, at the door, 'a 6, maa,
'ama'ama 1. v. i., to ifestoon with Ijrcopodium

fern. 2. n.. a bandolier of sheU money

(haa) strung in a pattern with fringe of

human teeth; Hi *ama*ama, to make such

a belt. 3. n., festive ornaments, belts,

necklaces, bracelets, etc.; *ama*ama ni

mae, panoply, war decoration.
'amadi 1. v. i., to eat one thing with another as

a relish, as fish with 3rams. 2. n., the

thing so eaten.

■msini 1. poss. 3, pi. 1. excl.. of us, for us,
belonging to us, to us. used as object;
*oke ha*ata*inie amami, show it to us.

'amami 2. poss. 1, pi. 1, excl.. for us to eat.

•mara to be barren, childless; muini e amara,
the childless women. Wango amara.

'amasi, 'ama'amasi v. tr., to feel pity for; *amasi
meuri, to be sorry for oneself, to save
one's skin by avoidance, hd'i'amasi,
*sinaans«(ktt) gerund. *amasiUku, woe is
me. Wango amari.

'amaiito'o 1. v. i., used with poss. 3. to hold in
memory. 2. to be homesick, to pine.
'amaiito'ong^ v. n., remembrance, recol-
lection; *amasito*onga amelu, remem-
brance of us.

amau U., n., a fig with edible leaves; mwai keni
ana sili atnaunga, women given up to
getting amau. Ahina'i amau, the name
of a canoe in an Ulawa story.

'amliiirila-(kn) gerund, living, alive; 'am&urila-
daru*e, they two alive.

amslo 1. poss. 3, pi. 1. excl.. of, for, to, belong*
ing to us.

'amsltt 2. poss. 3, pi. 1, excl.. for us to eat.

amerel, ameni'e S. 1. poss. 1, dual 2. of. for,
to, belonging to, us two; amere*i is
sometimes used for amelu 1.

'amaret, 'amem'e S. 2. poss. 1, dual 2, for ua
two to eat.

'ami U., pers. pron., pi. 1, excl. 1. used as sub-
ject, we. 2. used following the full
form i*amu 3. suffixed as object to
verbs and prepositions. Florida garni,
Malay kami,

'amo'amo U., to commit adultery.

*amo*amoim v. n., adultery. Wango kamo-
kamo.

amolu 1. poss. 3, pi, 2, of, for, to, belonging to.
you.

'amolu 2. poss. 1, pi. 2. for you to eat.

'Imu U. 1. pers. pron., pi. 2, used as subject,
you. 2. suffixed as object to verbs and
prepositions. Lau gamu, Motu amu.

Kmu 3. poss. 3, sing. 2, of, for, to, belonging to,
you.

Imu 4. V. i., to weed, to pull up weeds. San
Cristoval amu.

'ttmu'e poss. 1, sing. 2, yours to eat.

'ftmuH yours to eat. of many things. Motu
amui, yours.

'amomu to be dumb. Lau amu, dumb.

'ftmiini partic. lost to sight, sunk below the
horizon. *a 6, mumuni.

Kmvai, ftmn'emtial S. 1 . to eat areca nut with lime
and betel pepper.
Mmtninga v. n., betel-chewing.

Kmuai S. 2. a fig with edible leaves, placed
under pork in ovens: also used to make
dhuqa*i. cf, amau, U.

'amnte to be silent, to withhold speech;
*amumu, td 3.

'amwada partic, loose (of teeth).

'amwaoro partic, bent down, bowed. *a 6,
mwa 1.

amwoamwo U., n., a sprat.

ana 1. poss. 3, sing. 3; a 5. (a) used as object

AHA

lO

1 (continued).
when the preposition ia wpninted ftom
the verb, (b) to, for, ooooeminc, of.
agninat, him, her, it; calling on (of a
ghott). U.. # damu'ia mtms ans KHt'
tmo, he chewed aieca nut to Kiiramo.
Florida oiM. </. Preface.

aaa 2. prep., instrumental, used only with
nouns to which the pron. 3 can be suf-
fixed, the definite article may follow
ana; ana specifies the instrument, ant
the method; ana nga noma, with a spear;
s sdunie ani noma, he killed him spear-
wise; ana maaku, with my eye; ana nga
taa, with what? why? ama saemami,
with our hearts; ere lole ana ma'nnge,
to talk confusedly from fear.

ana 3. prep., belonging to, from, him. her, it;
'o da nga muini ana mnini *ie, take some
from these; n<m da ana, I got it from
him; e mdiiri ana mwela, delivered of a
child.

ana 4. place where; e knre'iia'a ana Mn, it
gushed forth from the rock; U*n e lot
ana, the place to which he went; ana
mn 'tMOfit, among men.

aaa 5. piep.. after, by the name of; kke saaie
ana a ola, they named him after So-and-
so; Poro (keni) ana a oia, the man
(woman) named So-and-so.

ana 6. adv., time when; ana aan, at the time
(d ripe canarium nuts; ana kdUsi, at
harvest time. Mota ana, in anaqarig,
ananera; Polsmesian ana, of past time.

ana 7. adv., if, for, because; ana e takanU
maamn ne, in that he opened ywu eyes;
•fM he ola mwamwadan, if possible; ana
muni hire 'unua, if they say it; ana nge
na ka'a diana, now herein it is not good;
ana uri, for if, of supposititious cases;
anoa ni 'is ana 'omu lae mat, a marvel
it is in that ye came. Mao. anfk, there,
when.

ana 8. iangakidu ana, tenth in a series. Mota
anai, pasopasoanoL

<ana 9. poss. 1. sing. 3; for him to eat. 'all.
Motu ana.

anaaaawala adj., without blemish.

anahi to succor.

'ana4 U., verb. part., denoting futurity of
action; the *a is attracted to the pre-
ceding a of pronoun na 2 and to hira,
na*a na'i lae 'oio, I shaU be off. Oba
na, M. L., p. 426. Bugotu da, M. L.,
p. 550. cf. he'i.

ans S.. v. tr., to wonder at, to marvel at; one i
Malau, able to see 'Olu Malau; proverb
of clear weather. Wango ha*ane, praise.

'anane adv., gently; oom 'anene, to blow gently.
Maori hanene, to blow gently.

iai 1. poss. 3, pi. 3; of things only; concerning,
for, from among, to; used as object;
ne'isae Aitt, think upon; nou da nga
muini eni, I took a few of them.

ttni 2. prep., instrumental, used instead of ana
when no article follows, but not used of
pemns; e s&unie dni taa? Ani hakis,
with what did he kill him? with an axe;

lal 2 (continued).'

dm denotes the method, ana the instru-
ment; dni is used of general and ana of
particular signification; dni has an
adverbial force; dni noma, spearwise;
dni eromga, guilefully; holola'i eni io'ohaa^
to promise in money; honu em to*okaa,
filled with money; kute dni mesinge, bom
in adultery; ulo dni erenga, to lament
with crying; dni ke'idinge, at some future
day; but when an adjective follows the
noun ana may be used in the place of
dni; ana hd^idinge tata'ala, in an evil
day; dm koulaa, at the feast; ladae diU
*uri isulie, walk in his footsteps; maa
dni maa, niho dni niko, eye for eye,
tooth for tooth; e kure'ita*a dni ken pulu,
gushed out of the stony rock; dm meta-
thetic upon nia. ni 1; a 4. Florida
nia, instrumental; Mota nia.

Ini S. 3. prep., of, belonging to; used in com-
position; dni SMusuu, U., a cubit; 'apu
eni sheep, the blood of sheep; hole dm
henue, a native paddle; li'oa dni wols-
'imolinge, the spirit of truth; mu na'okai
mwela dni Hnoni, the first-bom children
of men; qooqoola dni nume, foundations
of the house; raaraa dni meurihe, light
of life; supi eni heu, a stone dub.

'ano 1. ground; cf. Vano. *ano kuu, the earth,
opposed to 'dsi, sea; *ano mola, cultivable
ground, deep soil on top of the ridges of
the upper hills, opposed to qd*u 4, the
ground on the ridges immediately above
the beach; hai 'ano, on the ground; hoi
*ano, underground; odohaana me*i *ano
mola, in good ground; susu *ano, to
make holes for planting yams. Lau
gano, Mota tano.

'ano 2. V. i.. to pass away, to disappear out of
sight; *ano suu, to perish and become
extinct; *ano tdlihuu, to vanish com-
pletely.

anoa n., a marvel, miracle, vision, apparition;
anoa e wa'araa mdi, an apparition came
into view.

'anomi v. tr., to cover with earth, to bury.
*ano 1. ha* a po'oU*e ada, ho anomire
mola, no care is taken of them, they are
merely buried, of the undistinguished
dead. M. A., p. 263.

llatt, Xnoann to be loose, unstable.

InnlsH partic, loosened, waving in the
wind. Florida ante

Anute 1. the island of Florida. 2. Annie ni
i*e, island at the eastern entrance U>
Mara Masiki Channel. Z.AnuUPdine.
North Sister Island near Aio on the east
coast of Big Malaita. Java nusa,
island. </. Anuda, Cherry Island.

'anga 1. n., large woven basket for yams.
Mota tanga,

'anga 2. to open; *anga waima, to open the
mouth to speak. Buogut hangoH.

aagat v. L, to carry, to act as porter.

angalnl v. tr. Mota anga, to shoot up;
Malagasy anga, lifted up.

II

AFB

aafl 1. V. tr.. t la nudai angU heiaa, there was

a flat calm.
iagl, iliigiangi 2. v. !., to be looee. inaecure.
•haky.
Xstfrelai v. tr.» to move backward and

forward in order to looeen.
ingireH partic, loose, capable of being
worked out.
Kagi, ingienci 3. to jerk.
'anfo 1. V. L, to creep, to crawl (of children).
ha*a*ango,
'angohi V. tr., to crawl to. to crawl over, to
creep over; e *angQhia huu ni kana, be
crawled over to the singers.
'angohOa-Ckn) gerund. Mota kalo 3.
'ango 2. V. 1.. ango walo, to roll fiber on the
thigh into twine; ango Mu, to lengthen
out.
'angoh! v. tr.
'angohUa-Cka) gerund.
'l&gvni partic, fallen out (of teeth, etc.).

*il 12. ngurusi.
ao 1. n.. a bird* egret (Demiegretta sacra);
onomatopoetic; ao eJks, white egret; ao
Pulu, gray egret. Mota kaova,
ao U. 2. qd*i ao^ the hermit crab.
'a*o, 'a'a'o S. 3. v. i., to catch fish, to go fishing.
wa*owa*Ot U. hinou ni *a*a*o, hook for
fishing. Fagani agoago,
a'oho v. i., to be uprooted, to collapse (of a
building).
a'ohonga v. n., a fall, collapse. Wango
arobo.
<a*oH U., partic. broken in two. 'a 6, Vt.
'a*61t 1. n.. a flying-fish; poro 'a'oU, used in
addiessing the fish as they fly; waiopasa,
10 flying-fish.
*a'ole 2. V. L, to catch flying-fish. The bait of
the flesh of crabs' claws (asusu) is
whipped on a gorge {maai mudt) made
of turtle shell or of the midrib or rachis
of the sago-palm leaf, the line is tied to
a float (m'o) which is watched {'ala 6).
M. A., p. 317.
aonga4 v. i.. to look fixedly, to stare.
aongalni v. tr., to stare at.
aoiiga^nila-(ka) gerund,
aopa v. 1., different, exceedingly. hA*iaopa'i,
d&u aopa, to make mistakes, to err;
e aopa *oio, it has got too bad already;
e sa*a he'i aopa lo*u, it will never be
different; hire qao aopara mwaanikolu,
they treated them differently from us;
si^o aopa, to separate.
aori 1. V. tr.. to e^^pose a body for burial in a
canoe or tree, or to lay it into a canoe.
(f. sdlu. Wango aora,
aori 2. V. tr., to approach (of persons).
'apa 1. n., a part, side, half; *apai loa, hea-
ven, sky; 'apai saio, afternoon; *apai
hui, 100.000 taro; 'aPai niu, 100.000
coconuts; 'apani uhi, U., 100,000 yams;
'apani mae, a fighting party; 'apani mae
peTemi, to side with us; </. Florida
levu ni mate,
'apa U. 2. to be different.
'apa 3. n., a leaf; tf. 'apa'apa 1. mu 'apai

'apa 3 (continued).

dango, leaves of trees; 'apani paaie'o,
nautilus shell cut in triangular forma
for inlaying; kala 'apani paale'o, to cut
such pieces of shell. Florida gaba,
branch. 4. side (not of persons); ho
aweawekie ro 'apa na, walks on every
side; the locative i is added; 'apai haha.
Big Malaita,t. e., downside; *apaihenue^
the west (down side) of the island; *apai
loa ta'au, the heavens; *apai saio, after-
noon.

'apaa n., a staff.

'apa'apa (ku) 1. n., wing, shoulder, leaves;
'apa'apana mu menu, birds* wings;
i 'apa'apana mu 'inoni, on the shoulders
of men; i qe'une 'apa'apana, on hia
shoulders; mu * apa* apai dango, tree
leaves; tere 'apa'apa, to flap the wings;
Me 'apa' apa, to flutter the wings; 'apai
reu, a leaf; mu 'apai reu ana mu danga,
the leaves of the trees; mwa 'apa'apatU
'ei, v., tree leaves. *apa 3. Wango
abaaba, shoulder, leaf; \^ti tamba, wing;
Florida gaba, branch; Samoa 'apa'apa,
fin of a shark; Malay sapa, wing; Maori
kapakapa, to flutter; Mota govot to flap
the wings.

'i^a'apa 2. n., a shed, hut; probably because
built originally of leaves.

'apa'apa 3. 'apa'apai i'i, a bird, a swift. Mota
gapagapa, a swallow.

'apahae n.. a pig's ham.

'apakare n., a yam.

'apala U. 1. shoulder; qA'uU 'apala, the
shoulder. 2. a sum of money (haa)
reaching from finger tips to opposite
shoulder; ida 'apala, a yard and a
quarter. 3. rua 'apala, a phase of the
moon. 4. v. tr.. to carry in the arms;
e 'apdUara, knre he 'apala, let me carry
you. Mota sapan, to lead ; Samoa sapa,
sapai; San Cristoval abara.

'apallli to make a detour, lili 1. Florida
iabalili, apart.

'apalido U.. n.. the banyan; used in Sa'a of a
special variety. *apa 3, lolo 3. 'apalolo
e toli, the banyan has shed its leaves.
Florida tabalolo.

'apani ere 'apani, to talk in a dialect; wala
'apani, speech, 'apa 3.
'apaaile-(ka) gerund., brogue.

'apara'i partic, surprised, frightened, taken at
a disadvantage, ha'a'apara'ini,

'apasn partic. chipped, with the end broken
off.

apau side (not of persons); apau deni, U.,
toward morning; apau one, the lee side
of an island, an inlet west of Cape Z616e;
e apau *oto, it is afternoon; sato 'oio t
apau, the sun declines. Wango abau,
beside, outside.

ape 1. to run aground, to prevent, to hinder,
to serve as a barrier, ha'aape. ape
kite, to curtail; ape hono, ape konosi, Uy
prevent; ape pitri, to be last, in the rear^
to follow after.

APB

12

ape 2. ape sada S.. ape dao U.. to be level (of
country).

ape 3. V. tr., to encourage; eapeasaena, he en-
couraged him.

'ape 4. a net. a seine; *ape ni menu, nets set ior
birds acroes the openings in a ridge of
hills; the place where such nets are set;
*ape e tdu, the net has fish inclosed in it;
Mu ana *ape, to fish with a seine; sdu
maa ana mu *ape, to mend the meshes
of the nets. Mota gape, Maori kupenga.

'Ape 5. the constellation of the Southern Cross;
ro mwane, the two pointers to that con-
stellation. M. A., p. 349.

Mpi-(na) bordering on; i epina laio, bordering
on the garden.

iplepl V. i.. to border on, to be contiguous to.
Malay apU, side by side; Maori apiti,
to place side by side; NiuC apiapi,
narrow.

apirawa a yam with purple flesh.

apiopio a flowering creeper (Hoya).

aplte'l partic, sore, of feet; met., sore at heart.

apo 1. V. tr.. to epilate.

apo 2. a bivalve shell used to pluck out hairs —
it is held in the fingers and worked like
pincers.

apo 3. V. tr.. to lever, to prize; e apoa mu heu,
he prized up the rocks.

'apolo 1. a piece of shell money (haa)\ 'ele
'apolo, U., a small length of money,
met., of a small piece of garden planted.
Florida polo, up till.

'apolo 2. partic. ceased, ended; hoia ni mwane
e *apolo ana ro Dora, the succession of
bojrs ceased with the two Doras; mae
*ap6U>, paralyzed.

'apoloa S., people, descendants; *apoloa ineu,
my people.

apota apota ni honu, egg of turtle.

<Mpa (ku) 1. blood, cf. ma'Apu'a; *apu e siki
ana, seed of copulation; *dpu raharaha,
an issue of blood; kohoi *epu, a drop of
blood; me'i 'epu, S., mast *epu, U.. blood;
e ngisuhie *dpu, to spit blood; sulu *epu,
to adopt a child.
'KpQle adj., bloody; qa*u 'dpula, U., a person
wounded in battle; awalaa*i *epule,
bloodshot; lili 'epule, turned into blood.
'Kptukge V. n.. sulu ^epunge, adoption of
children.

'Mpu 2. to be forbidden, tabu, to be final.
ha'a*apu, e 'dpu laa, U.. why not? (is
it forbidden?); toli *epu, to observe a
tabu, to fast.

'Apu *Ala a district on Little Malaita over-
looking Mara Masiki Channel.

'Mpu'l v.. to flatter, to cajole, to say *dko*ako
sae. MTepu'i.

'apttlo partic, returned, turned back on a
journey, 'a 6, pulo.

apune wa'l n., stinging-nettle tree, wa'i 7.

'apuru partic, crowded. *a 6, puru.

'Apuninge the Pleiades. M. A., p. 349.
Maori apuru, to crowd.

'aqa 1. to squat on the heels, to cower down,
'aqahi tr., to crouch and await, to lie in

'aqa 1 (continued).

wait for; 'aqaki lue, aheU-money orna-
ment in pairs and worn by the women on
breast and back,
'aqaha'i v. i.. to crouch, to brood over

(of hens).
'aqataliil v. tr.. to beset, to lie in wait for.
Mota taqa, crouch; Wango * aqa* aqa,
Maori ?awki.

'aqa (kn) U. 2. n.. belly, ff. *oqa.

'aqa 3. ha'a'aqaha*ini, to measure by.

'aqa'aqa n.. bay. indentation in coast. *aqa 2.
'aqa'aqa'a adj., bay-shaped. San Cris-
toval waqa, a cave.

aqalao n., pus. matter in a sore.

'aqalnltt S.. 'aqamra U.. n.. coconut beetle.

'aqaqo *aqaqoi sa*o 1. fronds of sago palm. 2.
raft made of the fronds.

'aqeln partic. overturned, 'a 6, qelu.

era 1. n.. dew; hu'ori or a, to be early afoot.

ara« araara 2. v., to make an advance, to move
forward, to get on; ko keU araara ta'ane,
it is moving slightly.
arena tr.. to move a thing on.
arala-(kn) gerund, aralana, its being moved
forward.

ara 3. v.. to be lost, dispersed.

'arai v. i.. to call out, to cry aloud. Bugotu
tarai.

araldio v. i.. to alight upon, to swoop, of
birds. d$o.

arakaa n., fish hawk (Haliaster girrenera).
kdu 1. Wango arakau,

arakoko n., taro pudding, pounded taro with
grated raw coconut on top. considered
poor cookery.

aramn U., v., to hch.

aranga n., a wild duck.

arapa n., a wooden hair comb; it is made of
separate pieces and not cut out of the
solid: a cross-bar is tied with fibers of
the creeper adio below the handle, the
center piece projects beyond the others,
which are bent and tied tightly to it.
the flat handle is frequently inlaid with
pieces of nautilus shell (reoreo), the
teeth of the comb are very sharp and
the hair is teased out with an upward
movement; arapa ddiedi, a comb made
in Big Malaita and ornamented with
dyed plaited cane (ice) and yellow fern
tissue (ddiedi) woven into a pattern on
the handle, the ends passing between
the pieces composing the comb; arapa
reoreo, comb inlaid with nautilus shell,
arapaai v. tr., to comb the hair.

arapuu v. i., to make land when at sea, to reach.
ara 2, puu 1.
arapnimge v. n., a coming to land, reaching
a destination.

'arasi 1. to scrape, to fine down spears, etc.,
by scraping, kara 2; * arasi niu, to
grate coconut with a roa or sdukai;
'arasi noma, to scrape spears with ngddi,
Mota sarav, to stroke; NiuC alaU, to
scratch.

'arad 2. v. i., * arasi mao, to lead the chorus in

13

*A8I

'tntl 2 (continued).

a dance; ha* a ni *arasu ark of the

covenant.
arato U.. seeds worn on the ankles in a dance.
aratoto v. i., to get to a destination, ara 2.
araa 1. n., a kind of canarium nut. 2. n., the

place where such grow,
'arawa adj.. raw, unripe, uncooked; mae

'arawa, to die suddenly or in youth; noio

'oroiMi, to die suddenly.
'arawanga v. n., noto *arawanga, sudden

death,
'arawana its greenness, unripeness; 'ara-

wana e ngdu diana, it eats well raw.
'ara'arawa'a adj., raw. Wango marawa.
arawana n., a tree on Malaita with large edible

fruit brown in color,
are, areare v. tr., to call upon a ghost (li'oa,

'akalo)t to beg, to importune; arearedu

ana uununge, call upon me with sacrifice,
arenga'i v. i., arenga'i he*u, to use hot stones

in the ordeal by fire, calling on a ghost

to witness one's innocence. M.A., p. 212.
'arengaHni tr., to offer prajrers and invo-
cations to a ghost.
are hd*iare» U., v. tr., to proffer help, to push

oneself forward.
areareo'a U., adj., ulcerous, crippled with

ulcers.
area inter j., exclamation of grief or pain.
areka an acacia which grows in abandoned

gardens.
arenga-(ku) 1. duty, part; noho esu arengaku, I

am doing my part. Lau arenga.
Arenga 2. Arenga Manu, the northwest point

of Ulawa, near Haraina.
axikoai U.. v., to work in common, to have a

working bee.
arikosinga v. n., work done in common.
arikotilana gerund, the working of it, its

being done.
Iriri. iriariri to tremble, to shiver from cold

or fear.
Mrixinge v. n.. trembling. Bugotu ariri.
Iriai V. tr.. to attack craftily, with deceit and

guile.
Sri8ila-(ku) gerund.
Xriii n., kingfish.

aro 1. wild ginger, aro pue, *apai aro, ginger-
leaf wrapping of food in the oven; maai

arOt stalks of ginger.
aro 2. v., to soar, to hover.
aro 3. foe aro, a nose-stick of bamboo or shell.
•roaro v . to shout, to exult; tike pe*i aroaro,

to rejoice and shout.
'aroka partic. open, wide, 'a 6, roka,
Arona n., the south cape of Ulawa and the

village east of it.
aropu U. 1. n.. snail; hdnuaana ngdu aropunga,

a snail-eating place.
aropn S. 2. ioto aropu, to sip.
aroqaH to mix liquids, qd'i 2.

aroqaH'e adj.. *omu ke ruan anga aroqa'Ve

hunie, give her a double mixture.
'aroro 1. n., a wooden hook. 2. v. tr., to sus-
pend, to hang on a hook. Florida

dororo.

Am i saptna i Aru ni iV, apostrophe addressed
to San Cristoval. </. ha'addhi.

amhi n., a covering.

ata V. i., to be difficult, mjrsterious. ha'aasa,
ha*aasa*i. mango asa, to gasp; mu wet
e asa, deep waters; rorongo asa, U., to
be dull of hearing.
asaaia'a adj., difficult.
aiaH tr., to be too difficult for; e asa*ieu, it
is too difficult for me. Wango asa,
mysterious.

atai mango tree; hoi asai, mango fruit; te*eie*ei
asai, dry mango seed used as a cover for
the shell (apo) used as a razor.

aiaka n.. coleus.

atavnge n.. sardine, caught with a shell hook
{tooioo, tooh€*o) from a stage built out
in the bays; asaunge e ddu, the sardines
have arrived.

'iti 1. sea, salt water, salt; *dsi dodo, deep water;
*dsi ho hohohut the sea is booming; 'dsi
ho ulungaa hdnue, the sea under the
earth; *dsi mae, lee shore; 'dsi matawa,
open sea; *dsi meuri, weather side; 'dsi
namo, quiet water inside a harbor; *ds
rodo, deep water; *dsi rodo, a month
January (part); hdu ni *esi, a wave;
holosie *asi, to cross the waves; holune
*dsi, the face of the sea; houkou 'est, to
gargle salt water; liu i *esi, to travel by
sea; moro tdria Paro i'ola i 'esi, you
launch the canoe yonder into the sea;
mu suuleni *esi, the paths of the sea;
mwai malau i *esi, U., the islands of the
sea; nono 'dsi, sandfly, gnat; pine ni
*esi, booby; pusu *esi, whale; te'i *esi, to
dip and draw up salt water in a bamboo;
f to'tUana 'dsi, on the surface of the sea.
Mota tas, Ceram kisi, Polynesian tai.

'ft8i-(kii) 2. S., man's brother, woman's sister;
'asiku, my brother; *asiku ineu, my
brother; maeni *esikH, my brethren; mu
mwa *asine, brethren: in Sa'a a sister
may be spoken of by her brother as
*asiku; in Ulawa 'asiku means a woman's
brother or a sister-in-law; ro mwa 'asina,
v., two sisters-in-law. each calling the
other 'asihu (Su'uholo usage). Mota
tasiu, Motu tadi, Polynesian tahi, tei.

'aai 3. V. tr., to throw away; joined with certain
words it denotes destruction, doing away
with; dere *asi, U.. to throw away; ere
*asi, U., to reproach, to vilify; horo 'asi,
to decimate; hu*e *asi, to overturn, to
overthrow; hoe *asi, to pluck out (thorn) ;
ne*isae *asi, to forgive; ooho 'asi, to
break up. to destroy; sae *asi, to forgive,
to neglect; susu *asi, to prick and re-
move; *tisunge'i *asi, to despatch.
'atila-(ku) gerund, uunu *asilana, destroy-
ing by burning.
*aii*a U., adj., with notion of wasted; e
pdina *asi*a, needlessly big; e udiudi
*asi*a, rotting away; nga hudi e maia
'asi'a, the bananas were rotting away
unpicked. Florida asi, lost; Wango
gasi; Malo asrna, very.

■A8I

14

*aii U. 4. adv., thereupoa, ooniequently. 'a,

V. p*, si, illative.
Iriha U., to sneese. 'asinge, S. M. A., p. 226.
Buffottt aekihe, Maori maUhe, NiuC Hk4,
Probably onomatop.
«!■&• adj., laltiali. biaddsh. 'dH 1.
^Aiiloli'a U.. the name of a canoe in a story,
^atinga S., to tneese. Ilsihe, U.; oooaldered a

sign that someone is calling.
IsireH v. L. to be taken unawares, to be unpre-
pared for. ha'adsire'i,
aaoao v. L, to tremble, to shake, to be palsied.
Isttt ftsnesn 1. S., to work; dsu hohola, to work
in a yam patch; dsu maarue, to serve
two masters; dsu me'i ola, to minister
at holy things; dsu nani 'inoni, of work
not faithfully done, eye service; dsu
ramoramo'angat mighty work; dsu susu*
U'i, to work unremittingly; dsu iaiai
ngsuiaa, to work for food; dsu wt'Ut
hard work,
isnage v. n., work.
MsvH tr., to work at a thing.
issla-Kka) gerund., the doing of.
Isu, Iraestt 2. v. L, to move from place to place,
to be loose.
isnleH partic, unstable,
asuata ezclam. of disapprovaL
asnhe n., a rat; 'asuhe s ngero'U, rats nibbled
it. Mota gaswwe, Vlti kudhuve, Bugotu
kuhi.
Iso'olo'olo V. i., to be loose, shaking, to move

to and fro. dsu 2, *oio'oio,
Isosn coconut crab (Bh:gu8 latro). the flesh of

daws used as bait for flsrlng-fish.
ata 1 S.. a unit; methathetic upon ia'a 3. 'snUe
*aia, just how many? # ro *aia mwant,
only two men.
ata, ataata 2. U., to progress, to move on, to
be in motion, adaada, S.
atana tr., to move a thing slightly.
atalawa v. i., to be set wide apart.
atanau v. i.. used with poss. 3; of a ghost, to

fasten on, to attack a person.
*ats» *ate'at« to be dry, to have no moisture on;
ngisu *ate, to be thirsty (parched lips);
ngisu *9Umga» thirst.
^atsa S. 1. a coconut water-bottle, hou 'aisa.

2. a glass bottle.
atsi interrog. pron., sing., who; plural, kiratei;
atei 'eUkaU, what child? atei e manalO"
'inie, who knows? (I can't say); ola
aiei, whose thing? the demonstrative
fit may be added; aiei ni ngeeua, who is
that? saiaua atei, what (who) is his
name? Mota isH, Maori vot.
ato 1. to be in motion; *iUo 'as, to move quickly,
to stride; 'aU> *as su*ahia, U., to leap and
encounter; *slo hdu iUugi, to stone with
stones; 'aU> kolo, to cross over the sea;
*ato honosi, to oppose; *ato hunt, to lie
in wait for; 'aio i na'oua huni, to be in
worse plight, circumstances became
worse for one; 'aio hu*o, to set a net; 'aio
hu'omg^, a plot; 'aio nime, to set out
bowls of fooid at a feast; *aio puri, with
p ss. 3, to turn the back on.

ato 1 (continued).

'ateni tr., 'alami lalo, to plan, to set out, a
garden; 'aioni ku'o, to set a net; 'stout
u€, to steep and dye strips of cane; ku'sU
'aio'aio, to wind dyed cane.
*ato 2. n., rafter, generally of bamboo. Mota
gaso, Bugotu foAo, Borneo kasau, NiuiS
ato, Maori kaho, ato, thatch.
'ato'ato 1. n., ku'sli 'ato'ato, to wind rolls of

dyed cane.
'ato'alo 2. V. i., to take a new canoe on a tour
around the neighborhood and to neart»y
islands in order to raise money; Voia
'ato'ato, a canoe so taken.
'ato*ato 3. 'olo'oto kdu, to perform the ordeal
with hot stones. M. A., p. 212. ddu
h€*u, id.; sulu *ato, a song sung as an
ordeal; sulu 'atouga v. n.
'atohono n., a chamber, inner room, 'aio 2,
kono,

atowaa n., broad day, 10 a. m. to 2 p. m.; hat
atowaa hd'ileku, a whole day long; mm
hei atowaa, the days, as opposed to mu
hei rodo, the nights; susu's atowaa, all
day long.

au 1 . n., a black, poisonous snake. M. A., p. 22 1 .

io 2. pers. pron., sing., 1, suffixed to verb and
to preposition as object. »-fia-«, M. L.,
p. 116.

Ku 3. n.. the bamboo; du puugu, a large, strong
kind of bamboo; du qe'i, a variety of
bamboo with dose joints, planted
upright to retain walls of houses, also
employed in making combs; du rarahi,
the third finger; du susu, an ear-stick
of reed; dm wale, a flute; hai su, a reed,
a length of bamboo; huui su, a stool of
bamboo; ftret su, a length of bamboo, a
bamboo stalk. Mota au 1. Motu bau.

*d,u 4. 'du ta'a, to debouch (of a path), to end
in, to proceed from. Mota au, to step.

'a*a U. 5. ezclam. of assent, yes.

Xneu 1. a short bamboo plugged at one end,
used as a receptade. 2. a casket. 3. a
match-box, dusu ni dunge,

Xttsuiie V. i., to be discontented, upset in mind.

aohs&tts 1. v., to be resident in a place, to be a
native of a place, hdntte, 2. n., an
inhabitant of a plaoe; nou etthenme 'oio,
I am acclimatised. 3. n., a neighbor;
e sa'a saronie auhenue ings'ie, he will do
no harm to his neighbor.

'ftohora v. i., to come open, to come apart, to
be revealed, hd'ihora'i. sato ho sukora,
the sky is opened; ddngi esi euhota,
light has been revealed.

X'ultt 1. specific numeral, ten of coconuts.
d'ului niu,

A'ola 2. village on the east coast of Little
Malaita next to Sa'a. 3. X'ulu Peine,
A'ulu Talau, northeast end of Little
Malaita.

Iliiags-(ka) dungana, his master; dungani lata,
U., master of the garden.

AuqsH a hill on the main ridge of Little MalaiU
hi the Koru district at the head of the
river Walo'a'a, near original home of
Sa'a people.

IS

Dl'IDBRfB

*ivni to be uprooted, to fall down (of a tree).
San Criatoval attru, down; Maori aturu,

^ttnaala v. i., to be a gadabout, to neglect the
home. Mota sola 1.

*ll«ia*a to proceed from, to come forth, 'au 4.
to'a 4.

^ivtala «-« 'Afclola, to speak to the air, for
naught.

awa 1. to be a aojoumer in a foreign place; in
proper names, Wateawa. noko awa
mJU, I am a stranger here.

awa 2. y. i., to roar (of flood, etc.); taa ni ko
ama mM, what is that roaring? pmg
awa, the honibill, from the rushing noise
made by its wing.
awaawata-(na) gerund.; awaawaiana naho,
the roaring of the surf.

awa 3. to be brown in color; *usu awa, a brown
dog; kana awa, a pinkish-colored yam.

awa 4. the walking-fish (Periophtfaalmus sp.).

awa 5. U., awa tahu, to slip, to come loose (of
bands).

awa 6. U., takanga awa nusi, a measure, just
on a fathom.

*awa 7. a tree (Nephelium pinnatum). Mota
loisafi, Viti ndawa.

'awa 8. </. 'awofif f . *awasi,

awaa to be convalescent after fever, to be over
the attack.

awaawahane U., v. i.. to sigh for; e'a awaa-
wahan4 mola amoro'i, he is forever
sighing for you two.

awala n., a ten, a tally, ha'aawala. nga
awala, a ten; « ro awala, two tens,
twenty; awala ha*ahuu, S., owsia *oio
kMM, U., a full ten; awala da*adala, an
uneven tally; awala mdia 'enita, awala
mwafia *#fiite, how many over ten;
awala mwana rue, twelve (ten complete
and two); kdli awala, ten strings of
shell money each a fathom long. Lau
aqala.

awalaa4 S., partic, awalaa'i *€Pmle, bloodshot,
red (of eyes).

awalao cresking branches in a tree.

awalod 1. the wind between west and north
blowing in the summer; awalosi i ahare,
northeast wind; awalosi kaiaU, north
wind; awalosi i henue, northwest wind;
awalosi i Kela, southwest wind (as Kela
is the south point of Guadalcanar this
shows that the wind notation rests
upon the rhumb toward whi^ the wind
blows); awalosi i one, north-northeast
wind; awalosi i su*u west wind.
awalosi 2. a reed (Arundo sp.) with edible

flower-heads.
awanganga v. i., to open the mouth, to gape.
Mota vafiga, to gape; Lau /aga, mouth;
Maori wangai, to feed; NiuC fangai,
to feed.

^waagi V. tr., to expose to the air (of an ulcer

or sore place),
awara* awaawara to cry out, to yell, to whine;
kdu ni mwela awara, the day after fuU
moon,
awaranga v. n., crying, yelling.

awara (continued).

awarail tr., to cry over, to lament.

Wango awara,
'awaai to draw in the breath with a wiiistllng

sound when eating areca nut, *awaii

Vs, S., 'awasi fna, U. 'aiva 8, tlawa.

mouth.
'awadraha v. i., to groan, to mourn, to sigh.

n.. a groan * awasi, rake.
'awaslrahenga v. n., groaning,
awata'a to be a stranger and as such in evil

plight, awa 1, ta'a 1. Wango awata'a*
awa, awaawe v. i., to walk about.

awaawahi tr., to travel up and down a place;

ko aweawehie ro *apana, walks on every

side.

D

Before i d is pronounced as eh in the wotd
church; adi a-chi, diena chi-e-na. In all other
cases in pronouncing d the tongue is pressed
against the palate and held there while the
breath is forced against it, then the tongue is
relaxed and the breath escapes, the resultant
sound being equivalent to dr.

da 1. pers. pron., pi. 3, sufiSxed to nouns and
to certain verbs and gerundives.

da 2. mwane da na kolu tnae, lest we die. daa,

daa» daadaa S., v. 1., to give, to take, to do.
laa, U. le'une nou daa *oto, I did that
already.

dada U.. to be smooth, to be flat, level.
ha'adada, M'idada, hu'idada,

dadada'a U.. adj.. smooth, flat, level.

dadaaga'a S., burnished, shining.

da'sln pers. pron., pi. 3, sufiixed to nouns and
to certain verbs and gerundives, da 1.
i saada*elu.

Daha a beach in 'Olu Su'u. the landing-place
next north of Sa'a on the east coast.

dahe V. tr., to adse down, to chip ground with
the hoe. ha*adahe,

dMhi 1. the golden-Up pearl shell; 'm'« iMoa^
deM, a pearl; suu dehi, to dive for peari
shell. 2. a crescentic breast ornament
for men cut from this shell; ddhi raha,
a pearl-shell gorget worn with the
convex side outward and the rounded
outer edge plastered with piUu 3. 3. U.t
a phase of the moon.

dXhi, dMHdeU 4. to be favored, to be lucky;
ha'addki; to the reduplicated form the
possessive pronoun is sufiSxed, and in
Sa'a the A is replaced by e where no • or
u precedes; nou dehi, lucky me; de'ide-
hieu, de'idehire, happy me. happy they.

dXhi'e, dftHdehi'a S.. dMhid«hi*a U.. adj..
happy, fortunate, blessed.

dihtt the sheath covering the coconut flower,
used when dry for tinder or for fire-
kindling.

dIH 1. seen in compounds. dH'idiena, dd*ila*a,
dd*ilama'a,

DIH 2. Gower Island, north of Big Malaita.

daHdangI adv., by daylight. ddngL

diHderi'a n., a vaUey. ddri.

DlODISHA

l6

dI4dieiui U.. dM'idiana S.. to be in peace, to
be in safety, diana. ani dinge ni
de'idiana, in a day of salvation.
dlHdiananca v. n.. «*o ni de*idiananga, to
dwell in safety.

diilama U.i v., to be in peace, n., peace.
dM*ila]iia'a adj.. peaceful.
dl'iUuna'aii v. tr., to be at peace; € dd*ila-
ma'asirot they were in peace.

dXMta'a v.. to be in trouble, n., trouble.

dala in the reduplicated form da'adala used
to denote numbers above ten, not a full
tally; e da'adala, it was a number over
ten; awala da*adala, an uneven tally; nga
muini da'adala, more than ten. Fagani
matara,

dalao to have the skin broken; *aeku e daUto,
the skin of my leg is broken, abraded.

dalo 1. a littoral tree (Calophyllum inophyl-
lum); when growing by the landing-
places the dalo is the scene of taho
lalamoa, the payment for men killed.
5UU ola, also as the place for offerings
to *akalo; dalo ni nu'esu, the paule tree.
Viti ndilo.

dalo 2. uwe dalo, to clear the throat of mucus.

daluma U.. middle, danume S.

dama-Cka) U.. fellow, mate. cf. sama.
damaku, my fellow; dama din, of
unequal length.

dama'a rank, row. of men in a dance.

damaditt to overlap, cf. dama.

dftmn U., V. i., to eat areca nut; demudemu
UHoria, a phase of the moon.
dXamlaa areca nut and pepper leaf for

chewing, idemu, loo 2. sdru*e.
dUmu'i tr.. e d&mu'ia hou menu ana Kiiramo,
he chewed a ball of meme calling on
Kiiramo. San Cristoval iamu; Lau
kamu, to chew areca nut; Maori kamu,
eat; Samoa samusamu, to eat scraps.

dilmuteke an inclosure sacred to an 'akalo
inside a taoha or ioohi round the central
pillar and fenced with a heap of stones,
or outside the door of dwelling-houses,
into which areca-nut skins or scraps of
food may be thrown without fear of an
enemy getting them and using them for
malign purposes.

dana U., a bamboo for carrying water, holes
being made through the joints.

dXnl U., to be daylight. dUngi, S. kd'idenie'i;
ahuraa ddni, to be on the move before
daylight; apau dtni, toward morning;
e d&ni ha*ahulee, next day; e ddni *oio,
it is day; marawa ni deni, daybreak.
dM<ld«id daylight, by daylight.
dXnita*! haudinga po*o dSnita'i, the follow-
ing day.
dlttite'ini tr., of the daylight dawning upon
a person. Florida dani, day; danihagi.

dXnu, dX'udanu S., daidenu U., v. i., to bale,
to draw water; d&nu oku, to catch the
palolo worm with coconut nets; ddnu
wei, to bale, to draw water; oku denu,
name of a month, November, when the
palolo worm appears, idenu.

dXna (continued).

dlnsH tr.. to bale, to whet, to sprinkle
with water.

dilniima-<lni) middle, waist: with locative t;
ddnnmeku, my waist; i denume, in the
midst; t denumana hUnue, in the middle
of the ialand.

dXngi 1. S., to be daylight, idni. U. karidtn-
gie'i. Wango deni. dAngi koowa, the
next day; e ddngi 'oio, it is day; € ddngi
Paro, as aoon as it was day; id^ngi,
tomorrow; susu*e ddngi, every day.
dM4d«ifi by daylight; melu kuU dd*idengi

ia'ane, we arrived in daylight.
dlngita'iiii tr., of the day dawning upon a
person; 4 dAngUe*ini *emdu, day dawned
upon us. Lau dani,

dMngi 2. n., wind; ddngi ka*a ooru ike, there
was no wind at all; kai nuud dengi
ke'iUune, the four winds; qetolama dUngi,
qelohaana dAngi, a wind gone down.
qdo; ramohaana ddngi, a gale. ramo.
Mota lang, Florida dani, Pdyneaian
langi, Malay angin.

danfo 1. S.. n., a tree; dango mwamwaho'a, a
prickly tree; dango ni haka, papaya;
dangona mwakana, trees of the field;
kai dango, a log; hoi dango, U. (Ahi'a.
use), papaya; hoi dango, S., the kidneys;
huesi dango, S.. the kidnesrs; imiimine
dango, root of a tree; mu *apa$ reu ana
mu dango, the leaves of the trees; rai
dango, S., a plank; takai dango, a flower.

dango 2. S., n.. firewood; roio dango, to cut
firewood; hiU dango, to split firewood;
so*o dangq, S., to gather firewood.
Malagasy Irano.

dao U., ape dao, to be level, of country.

dacha, daodaoha U., v. i.. to be ill.

daohanga v. n.. sickness, illness. Wango
daoka,

dara (kn) n., forehead; daraku, my forehead;
i na'ona dara, on the forehead.

daralialni S., v. tr.. to fit a shell ring (hato) on
the arm, to impale. Wango darasi.

darasahn n., a bird, a tern (Sterna frontalis),
having a white mark above the bill.
dara, sahu 1.

darati S., daretl U.. to draw a thing out of iu
covering, to unsheathe.

dKri dSri mwaa, a torrent running only in the
rains and dry {mwaa) at other times.
ddHderi*e.

daro, dadaro 1. v. i., to hit, to beat, to strike
with a stick. 2. v. i., to cast a fishing-
line for garfish (mwanoU), to whiff for
sardines with toohe'o.
daroH tr., to hit a person with a stick.
darongaHni U., tr., to strike and overthrow.

dXm'e pers. pron., dual 3. suffixed to nouns
and to gerundives and to verbal nouns
used as prepositions; *anU^nriladaru*e,
they two alive; *amadaru*e, the father of
those two; *upuderu*e, their middle.

dXu 1. V. tr. and v. i., to do, to attempt, tocauie.
to make, to take, to get, to obtain; ddu
dunge, ordeal with hot stones. M. A«,

17

DI0N6A1

dXtt 1. (continued).

p. 2 1 2. ddu €u, to play tunes; dAu haahi,
to omit; Mu hahotat S., to act the hypo-
crite; Mu heu, ordeal with hot stones,
M. A., p. 210. d&u hono, S., to hinder;
d&u lah ana, S., to be plunged into the
midst of; dHu farasi, U., to hinder; dflK
rainoramo*a, to do violence; dHu suu'i,
to importune; ddu wala (.ku)» to trans-
gress; mu da nou deu waUUnt eni, my
offenses; ddu toej, to catch fish in pools
when the river is low; d&ud&u poo, U.,
to sacrifice pigs; e dAu ni ere, he made
to speak; hpo'i deu, to feign; nuda kite
manata*i deue, as they were wont; nou
deu ni lae, I attempted to go; sulu
dduddu, to make songs on.
dXnlana gerund. ; mu da saemu eni dtuUni,
the things your heart is set upon doing.
Wango dau, to touch; Viti ndau, to do.

dlo 2. to come to rest, to be stationary (of
canoes). ha*adS,u, ddu suu weu, move
farther up.
dXiinge V. n., i'o ni deunge, to be a sojourner.
Lau dau, to reach; Samoa tau, to anchor;
Maori tau, to rest.

davreH U., v. i., to put layen of sago-palm leaf
sewn on reeds on a roof to thatch it.
daiire4iil tr., to thatch a house.

dawa (ka) 1. n., the mouth, ngidu, lip, is
more commonly used in Sa'a for the
sake of politeness.

dawa 2. v., to be toothless.

dawaii U., v. tr., to chew with the gums
because toothless.

deda 1. v. i., to fill with fluid; dede ha'akonu
ana, fill it full; kara dede, yam mash
run into a bamboo and cooked over a
fire.
dadal tr.. to fiU with liquid. Lau dedengi,
Florida dodf.

dede 2. V. tr., to drip, to protrude; ahuiana
'oqana e dede *ok>, all his bowels gushed
out; *apu e dede, the blood dripped.

dada 3. dede ^u, an arrow.

data U., v. tr.. to wrap up a paroeL

dan! U.. as ddni: e deni 'do; ideni.

dara 1. U., to throw away; with 'asi 3. dere
'asia, thxx)w it away.

dara 2. dared S., daralialol U., to insert, to
sheathe.

dara 3. U.. dere unu, to get in between; dere
unu ana Para, between the pickets of
the fence; u'i dere unu, to pierce with a
blow.

dao €f, ddu,

di 1. with adv. 'do\ *do di, a long space of time
either past or to come, f offever, from of
old; may be reduplicated, *oto di *oto di,
forever and forever.

Di 2. a bay in 'Olu Su'u just north of A'ulu.

diana S.. diaaa U., adj., good, proper, accurate,
beloved. ha*atUana, dd*idiena» ke haro
dianOf when it is well; iieiiaua nga da
sa*a diana, nothing will be good; ke'i
ne'i meuia'a diana, it will become quite
•tnmg ; koni diana, to take good care

diana (continued).

of; e la *oio i diana, it is good; lado
diana, U., to explain; loo diana, to look
good; maelona e ngdu diana, when ripe
it eats well; mwane diena inau, my dear
friend; ngdulana e diana, it is good to
eat; e rako diana, it causes a pleasant
sensation; sama diana, to correspond
exactly,
diananga, diananga v. n., goodness; wdu

diananga ineu, all my goods.
didiana'a, didiena'a adj., exceedingly good,
dianaha S.. dlenala U., v. n.. used with ana
1; dianaha ana mu i*e, the good fishes;
Lau diena, Tolo sieni, Malay dian, dien.
The addition of the noun suffix nga
seems to show that diana is a verb;
possibly the na is a verb suffix and dia
equates with Mota wia, good. ha*adiana.

didi 1. to be small, undersiied, dwarf.

didi 2. to chop with an axe, to carve, to quarry;
didi haio, to make a shell armlet; didi
opa olanga, discrimination, partiality.

didlaHnge v. n., opposition.

dia n., a club, long-handled and straight, used
mostly on Big Malaita. Lifu jia, club.

Dia'i U., Su*u i Die'i, the landing-place at
Mwouta on the east coast of Ulawa.

dila S., V. i., to slip, to slip out of place, to be
in vain. Florida dila, *aeku e dile, my
foot slipped; noru dile, to trust in vain,
to be disappointed,
dllahi tr., *ala dilehi, to bite at and miss.

dlli 1. n., a dracaena; dili alaha, a dracaena
with bright red leaves used in incanta-
tions, also in drawing lots: a leaf (*apai
dili) is held in the fingers and pulled,
the test is according as the leaf breaks
easily or not: the process is called
kdhuto'o and ilaia.

dili 2. n., fftwa*a dili sato, a snake observed as
an omen. M. A., p. 221.

dimwa n., a tree fern.

diaga S., dinga U., a day. ddngi, ddni, deni.
ana nga'eia dinge, on another day;
kd'idinge si'iri, to-day; nga hd'idinge,
S., nga haudinga, U., a day; mu dinge
hunge e liueu, many dasrs pasaed over me.
Motu dina, sun, day; Viti sinaa, day.

dingadinga U., to be dear (of voice); walaku
e dingadinga, my voice is clear.

dingala a littoral tree whose hard wood is used
in making paddles.

dio V. i., to swoop (of pigeons), to jump from an
eminence; dio hunu, to swoop; dio hunu
ni sae, to be faint-hearted; *oke dio kou,
leap down; urou e dio i'ano, the pigeon
swooped down,
diohi tr.. to swoop down on; diohi malau,
name of a canoe in a story, literally,
swoop down on the islands. Wango dio,

diodiom to diatter (of wisi, a bird observed
as an omen. M. A., p. 221).

diongaH 1. V. i., to be squally (of wind), dio.
2. n., a wind squall.
diongaHid tr., e dionga'ini *emelu, a squall
descended upon us.

Dra

i8

diu 1. to be uneven in length; damn diu, to
overlap; madiu, overlapping; ddiu, to
be out of joint. Wango diu» to excel;
Lau madiu, different.

ditt 2. U., to carve, to chip with blows.

dinna U.. adj.. out of joint; *aeku e diuna, my
leg is dislocated, diu.

do V. i.. to gather, to pluck; do rou, to pluck
leaves for use in wrapping up kara,
grated yam cooked in leaves* t nativ^e
oven, ora,

dodo 1. to sink, to drown, to be composed, to
be deep, ha'adodo. *asi dodo hide i one,
deep water right in to shore; sae dodo,
dodonga ni sae, ease of mind; kara dodo,
grated yzm run into a bsimboo and
cooked over embers,
dodoa'ini tr., to be of good comfort con-
cerning a person; saeku e dodoa*ini *omu,
my mind is easy about you. 2. to dip
into a liquid: to*oni kite dodoa'inie, a
cloth dipped.
dodongaH partic, S., crouched down.
Wango dodo, to sink; Motu dodo, to
subside.

dodo 2. dodo 'usUf the columella of a shell used
as a gimlet.

dodonga a piece, a bit.

dola used in the reduplicated form dodola,
various, mixed, of different sorts,
doltli tr.. to commingle, to dilute, to insert;
ddu dolalie, put some with it; kele dalali,
to take some of one thing and some of
another, to vary; ngaini dolalVi, one
here and there among them. Wango
dorari, to mix.

doloii S., v. tr., to question; e doiosieu^ be asked
my name; e dolosie aku, he questioned
me about it; he fndni dolosie satada, let
him ask all their names,
dolosinge v. n., questioning.
dolotila-(1cii) gerund.

domana, domani, as if, like, just as if ; e domana
nou ka'a lae ike, it is as if I had never
gone; he *o'o domani hune, shall be as
it were a net. na 5, ni 5.

domu, do*adomu S., to fall (used of persons
only) ; Domu ni niu, Fall-from-Coconut,
a nickname.

done S., doni U., a prickly shrub growing in
old gardens.

donga 1. n., a pair, a couple: the definite article
vga may be prefixed; nga to donga, two
pair; dongai niu, S., donga ni niu, U., a
couple of coconuts tied together with
strips of their husk; e *asi totcia donga
ni mwdi, wearing a couple of bags
apiece; e ro donga, two couple.

donga 2. v. tr., to lengthen, to draw out, to
splice.

dongadongiAf U.. dongadonga*a ni qe*u, the skull.

Dora the name of families of chiefs in Little
Malaita.

doraH v. tr., to withhold; kele dora'ie ha'alunge,
to break a promise.

doro hot; used in compounds; ha'adoro, to heat
up food; madoro, hot.

dudii, dndnda U.. v. i.. to move position; dudu
tnei, ease up; dudu vfeu, ease off; Pua
dududu i Kela, the areca palm that
drew toward Kda; waio dududu, elastic
dttdnhl tr., to approach. Wango duuri,
Florida dudu, to be near.

dttdndn U.. large glass beads; wiU dududu, to
string beads.

dnidoi yellow (vinegar) ants with painful bite.

domali S.. hele dumuli, to repress, to hold down.

donge S., dnnga U.* fire, fiiestick, matches:
na 5 may be sufi&xed; dungana e diana,
its fire is good, it bums well (of fire-
wood); dunge ho mea, the fire is fierce;
dunge ho qe*u, the fire smokes; dunga
ni heu, U., to undergo the ordeal of
fire; dunge ni raa, a burning-glass; dAu
dunge, S., to undergo the ordeal of fire;
esoesohana dunge, the flame of the fire;
iU dunge, to obtain fire by friction; horu
dunge, to make a fire; maai, S. (maani
U.), dunge, a match; mwai keni ana
dunga rakanga, women who make too
big fires; mu meameahai dunge, tongues
of fire; mu melahai dunge, flames of
fire; qd*uli dunge, smoke; ruru dunge,
to build a fire; mu si'i dunge, sparks;
wdiwei dunge, to wave a fiiestick. Tolo
suna, Efat6 fanga, Malay panas, hot.
Malagasy fana.

dnni 1. V. tr.. to place in a store room (of
yams). 2. a store chamber, cupboard,
generally a section of the dwelling-house;
ladaei duru, to go behind the partition,
a sign of close acquaintanceship.

da*ii U.. V. i.. to move position, cf. dudu,
su'u 6; du*u mei, ease up; du*u weu, ease
off.

dn'iina v. tr.. to move up in position; 'o du'unaa
Paro, move it on a little.

dttiidiin adv., from time to time, at Intervals.

dn'tt'e backward, to go backward. du*u.

dtt*ii]ie4m U., tr., to destroy. su'uheHni, S.

E

e 1. pers. pron., sing. 3; he, she, it. (a) fol-
lowing inge'ie or nge*ie and supplying
the place of a verbal particle: nge*i€ e
lae, he went; inge'ie nge*ie e lae, it was
he who went. Following nouns used
with verb in past tense: nemo e nemo,
the rain it rained. With nouns having
a collective force: mu wei e hone, the
waters were out in flood; hira madoonga
hunie esi masa, his enemies were put to
shame. With interrogative plural pro-
noun: hiratei, who; hiraiei ni e *unue,
who said so? (b) By itself as subject
of verbs: e *unue ta*ane, he said so. As
meaning "there is": e ha' a ola, there is
nothing; e sato *oio, it is fine weather.

• 2. S., omtraction for ie; haahe for haahie,
about it; pe*e for pe*ie; nga tea ni *oho
ngarase, what are you crying for? par'ie
here, for paro'ie.

'• 3. U., verbal partide; in pronunciation 's
is joined to the governing pronoun. In

19

BRB

^e 3. (continued).

the senae oi, let, that it may: m«'« lae
ka*u, let me go. Used with a negative:
e qdU da n4*s loosia, there is nothing
that I saw, I saw nothing. With the
prepodtiott mitfi*, as subjunctive or
optative: ncu ha*alu muni ne*e lae, I
promised that I would go; muni *e
lae mai, let him come; *e *u€, how?
mwane *e*ue, why not? Sa'a ke, </.
qa*iket ha'ike,

*e 4. V. pM used with numerals and with niU;
'e rue, two; V* *olu, three; *eniUf *eniia,
how many. '« 3. Florida e, Maori e,
ehia, how many? Epi ve vio, how many?

*9_5, sufiuEed to poss. 1 and 2 in sing. 1 and 2,
added to ru in V&meru'e, kereru'e,

•'a U., pers. pron., sing. 3, and verbal particle
•a.

e'aii U., e'a, si, illative.

^e'e S. 1. areca nut (Areca catechu); hoi 'e'e,
the nut of the areca palm; mu *e*e, areca-
palm trees; *e*e ahaa, wild areca nut;
eaten only occasionally in Little Malaita,
but generally in Big Malaita.

^e'e S. 2. to be open, enlarged; wawaku ho *e*e
haahi *omu, my mouth is enlarged
against you.

'e'eli U.. V. i.. to go astray, to swerve. ha*a*e*eli
'e'elinga v. n., a going astray.

^e^engo S., v. i., to chatter, to disturb by
chattering.

*ehi*e cf. 'Ohi'e.

eho n., a round ear ornament of clam shell with
a pattern cut like the lines of a compass
and radiating from the center; it is hung
below the ear by a string through a hole
in the center.

«hoeho S., to prate, to be a tattler; wawa
ehoeho, to boast.

«hu native jews-harp; e sore io'o ehu, he wants
a jews-harp.

^ei 1. cf. 'ai 1.

«4 2. tr. suffix to verbs, participial ending.
cf. a'i 3.

'*Ei'ei U., a water spring at Mwado'a. Ulawa.

•*ini tr. suffix to verbs. </. d*ini.

eke the white cockatoo, used of other white
birds; ao eke, the white egret.

''ele U., kele S., adj., and adv., little, somewhat,
just now; *ele poo, a little pig; a *ele ola,
little So-and-so; nau si *eU lae mai, I
have just come; e *asi *eU diena, it is a
Uttle better.

«leele 1. real, proper, good; mu eleelei wala, S.,
mwa elede huu ni wala, U.. real words:
used also of yams {uM) and of musical
instruments (du 3).

«leela (na) 2. n., top shoots of trees, etc.; to*o
eleeUnat its tip.

^eleksle U.. a child; *elekaie inau, my child;
'eUkale we re were, an infant.

''Ele maoti, the landing-place in the reef at
Ngorangora.

<dl, 'di'eli v. tr., to dig; *eli talana, to dig his
grave.
'eUnga v. n., digging, jram digging, harvest.

'eli, 'eU*eU (continued).
'•l]la-(iia) gerund.
*aUhe4iil tr., to dig poet holes, foundations,

etc.; ho *dihe*inie hokoro, dug it deep.
'eiihe'i v. i.. noko 'elih€*i, I am digging post
holes. Mota gil, Malay gali, Borneo
kali, Maori keri,

'elu 1 . cf, *olu, three; suffix limiting the meaning
and added to (a) pers. pron., pi. 3:
ikira*elu, kira*elu, (b) suff. pron., rdt
rd'elu. (c) in Ulawa to stem, ka form-
ing pers. pron., pi. 1. ind., ka*elu we.

'•In 2. used in Tolo for melu we.

'emela pers. pron., pi. 1. exd.; we, more limited
and particular in meaning than i*emi.

'•mere, 'smMr^H, '•rn^ni'^ S. 1. pers. pron.,
dual 1, excl., we two. 2. pers. pron.,
dual 1, suffixed to verbs and preposi-
tions as object.

'•mi S., pers. pron., pi. 1, exd. (a) as subject,
we. (b) with the full form i*emi; i*emi
emi lae mai, vft have come, (c) suffixed
as object to verbs and prepositions.
Florida garni, Malay kami.

•mu cf. dmu 3.

'•mu'o, '•mttH S., cf, *dmu*e,

•na S., demonstrative, that; possibly e 1, na 4.
ngeena, ka*ike ena, not that, not so;
mango ena, finished that, that ends it;
nge manikulu*anga ineu ena ka*a ola
ike, the glory, mine I mean, is nothing.

•ni </. dni,

'enit^ S., '•nita U., how many, so many, a few;
the 'e 4 is detachable, see niU; the suff.
pron. na may be added, ha'anite;
*eniU *aia kaidinge, just a few dAys ago;
*eniie lusu, what size (of a canoe), lit.,
how many ribs; *enUana *oto *ie, the
how-manyeth is this, what number;
awala mdia *enila, how many over ten;
mana *enite, what unit above ten; ta*e
'enita ile, just a few.

•no, •no^no to lie down; eno taalenga, to lie
on the back,
•nonga v. n., a lying down, reclining.
•nohi tr., to lie in, to lie on; e enokie hulite,

he lay on a mat.
•nohilana gerund,
ha'aenohl causative. Nguna one, Motu eno,

•pa 1. glandular swellings in the armpits and
groins. 2. to have such swdlings.

•pa 3. V. i.. Mo epa kdnue, to cleanse well the
village by a sacrifice. M. A., p. 137.
•paai tr., to spread over. Mota epa, a mat.

'epoH kdTepu'i, to propitiate.

'•piil^ </. *dpuU,

•r^, ttttre 1. v. L, to speak, to talk; with poas. 3,
to forbid, to bid, to order, U. ka*aere.
ere ana nga Hnoni, to forbid a person;
ere ani le*u honu, to boast; ere *asi, U.,
to reproach, to vilify; ere 'auiala, to
speak in vain; ere ni ha*apu tako'te,
swore by him; ere haahi, to betroth, to
bespeak a wife; ere hd*ihonoa*i, to curse;
ere hd*isuru, to have altercations; ere
hd'Oohe, to contradict; ere ni hedi
olanga, to take an oath; ere laelae'i.

20

ere, ereere 1 (continued).

talk by the wayeide; ert loU atia
ma'ungg, to talk confusedly from fear;
ere luu'i, U.t to forbid; ere maahoosi. to
boast; ere maUUdi, to rail at; ere
mama*ila*a ana, to speak despisingly;
ere mamakinanga» to reproach; nau ere
Pele, I spoke inadvertently; ere raradi'e,
correction; ere raramaa, insolent speech;
ere ni sae, to say with the heart; ere
ta'anga, plain speech; ere taAa'tra'a, to
speak plainly; ere ialihe, to defend one-
self when accused, to deny; nou ere
taliheku, I made my defense; ere
iaSaa'ini, to curse; ere tolu to revile;
ere to*o, to be correct in one's statement;
'o ere to'Ot verily; ere uqe, to talk
enviously; ere warawara*a, clamorous;
lopo'i ere, to deceive with words; toli
ereere, to cease speaking.

ereafa v. n., speech.

ereal U.» tr.. to plan in speech, to decide
upon; hu'o ni pesi koto eresia, the war
expedition over the bows which they
planned. Motu erena, speech.
ere, ereere 2. v. tr.. to make up in a roll, to
coil.

ereereta v. n., a roll, a coil; mu ereeretai
usuusu, the roll of the book. Lau ereere,

ereereaHle S.. ereere*a U.. ereereta'a U.,

rolled up in a coil, round, disk-shaped.

ereha4iil S., v. tr., to set alight, to light a torch.

erehal partic. lighted. Lau ere, fire.
'erete'a adj., whitish, pale; hoU sa'a hole wa
nga m€*i ola *ereU*a ke'i i*o i sapeka, the
paddles must not rattle nor anything
of light color be about our bodies.
Maori kiriiea, fair, Ua, white; Samoa
iea, white,
ero, eroero S., v. tr.. to deceive, to tell lies.
ha'aero. ho ero, he is lying; mwane 'o
eroau, do not deceive me; a eroero, the

eroaga v. n., lying, deceit; ho Uhie eronga,

in travail with lying.
erola-(k«) gerund., erolana vfolumalau, the

deceits of the world.
eretaHni tr., to deceive,
ed 1. « 1. si, illative; esi heU loio, he has just

washed.
etl U. 2. n.. a ghost, considered harmless.

i/. 'ahah.
eao» eioeto S.. v. i.. to flare up, to flame, to
bum. ha'aeso, sae esoeso, to have
indignation.
etoeioha v. n., flame; used with poss. 3;
esoesohaana dunge, the flame of the fire;
esoesokai dunge, flame of fire.
eeolaaa gerund, its flaming.
'eCe S.« numeral, one; used with definite article
nga and denotes another, different. *e
4. for ta €f, ta*a 2. nga *eta ola; nga
'eia mu *inoni, various people; 'eia
mMini, some; maholo 'eia mwane e
ka'aiau ue, while the other was yet far
off; *€ta ina*o, to be in the lead.

'eta (continued).

'etana ordinal, first, the fint time; "eiana
ngaile, *etana ngaini, the first one.
Malay sa, one; Mota tea. Indefinite
pronoun.

eCe ha'aeie, S., v. tr.. to importune, to be per-
sistent.

en ddu eu, to play tunes, du 3.

eaeu pepe i eueu, a butterfly.

ewa U., to brandish a spear; ewa lulu, a measure
of a yard and a half.

ewe, eweewe 1. v. i., to have water in; e ewe
ia*aMe, it has water in it (said of a
bamboo). 2. to be in a liquid state.
3. n., flood; ewe e mlungaa mdurihaahu,
the floods have covered over my soul;
ere honi, to gather together, of flood
water,
eweewe (na) n.. juice; mu eweewei ola,.
liquid.

hi termination of verbal nouns: mduri, to live;
mdurihet life.

haa 1. shell-money discs made from the red
hinge of the oyster shell (roma); the
chief places of manufacture are Langa-
langa in Big Malaita and Makira in
San Cristoval. The Malaita shells are
obtained in the Mara Masiki ChanneL
The discs are always strung on string
and the value is proportionate to the
length of the string and the smallnesa
of the discs. *eniie haa, how many
mones^? to make a haa four strings
of shell discs are used, the strings are
kept together by being passed through
strips of tortoise shell hapa, </.
huresoso; haa i mwe'i, money in the
bag, earnest money, security paid to
the parents of a girl to insure getting
her as a bride for some lad; haa pdine,
large money discs, not considered of
much value; haa ni siwe, blood money;
haa tahanga, a sum of money conaiatliig
of four strings of haa tied together, eadi
string a fathom long, the strings are
separated by strips of tortoise shell;
haa ni Ulawa, small and valuable shell-
money discs, often strung in a kind of
crochet pattern with maio and huresoso
added to complete the design; haani
wili, tribute money; hdu haa, red brala
coral; hune haa, to display bridal
moneys at the bride's home; iio ni ham*
a bunch of money; lai loosi haa, to go and
inspect the money given for a bride;
mwariiei haa, a strand of money; sulm
haa, to collect money; wili haa, to thread
shell money; maapou, a measure of shell
money, from finger tips to elbow;
to'ohaa money, both shell and teetb
(dogs and porpoise). Wango haa,

ha'a 2. a platform for storing yams; ha'a ni
'arasi, ark of the covenant; hA*u ha'a, to
tie the laths on a platform, to make »

21

HA'AHIRU

lia'a 2 (continued).

platform; lalai ha* a, within the gBuner,
Maori whata,
ha'angi v. tr., to place yams. etc. on a plat-
form in order to store them, to put a
dried coconut on a platform so that it
may shoot. Samoa fata; Mao wkaia.

ha'a 3. exdam.. oh.

ha'a 4. causative prefix applied to verbs and
less frequently to nouns; it may be
duplicated for emphasis; in Ulawa when
ha' a is applied to a word beginning with
a one a is dropped. Mota vago,
Maori whaka.

ha'a 5. prefixed to cardinals to form multipli-
catives; ha' ante, twice; to hunge,
ha'ahunge, to multiply; to niU, ha'anite,
how many; to tau, ha'aiau, far.

ha'aado v. tr., to apportion.

ha'a*ae v. i., to be fleeting, vain.

ha'aahala'ini v. tr.. to provoke.

ha'aVhu v. tr., to complete a number, to make
the tally, to round off; ha'aHhu mae, to
finish fighting, to cease hostilities.

ha'a*ai'aa v. tr., to destroy, to cause to dis-
appear.

ha'aakauiisi v. tr., to provide a person with
a thing.

ha'aalaha v. tr., to exalt, to conduct the cere-
mony of a chief's coming of age.

ha'a'slitt v. tr., to cause to turn back, to turn
around, to convert in mind.
ha*a'aliuU-(ktt) gerund.

]ia'a*ango v. i., to tie up creepers, yam vines,
to cause them to twine.
ha'a'angohi tr.
ha'a'asgohila-(na, ni) gerund.

ha*a*apara'ini v. tr., to surprise, to startle.

ha'aape 1. v. tr., to make shipwreck of.

ha'aapengaHni tr. 2. ha'aape sae, to
encourage.

ha'a'aptt 1. v. i., to make an oath. 2. v. tr.,
to put a person or thing under tabu.
3. V. tr., to forbid.

ha'a'apnnge v. n., a vow to kill in revenge.

ha'aasa ere ha*aasa, to take an oath.

ha'aasal to stultify; ha*aasa*ie hurunge, to
run to no purpose.

ha'aXtireHni v. tr., to scare, to frighten.

ha'aawala v. i.. to tally, to count by tens; nou
ha*aawala ha*aniU, how many tens have
I counted?

ha*adada U.. v. tr.. to smooth, to flatten out.

ha'adahe v. tr., to cause to be adxed down or
to be hoed.

ha'adXhi 1. to cause a person to be fortunate,
to thank, to make presents to, U. 2.
when at sea to apostrophize the various
islands in sight, the phrases being,
Sa'a: i sapena i Sa'a ni menu, the con-
figuration of Sa'a ni menu; Ulawa:
f sapena i Ulawa e rara; Ugi: f sapena
i Dora ahu*i niu; San Cristoval : i sapena
i Am ni i*e,
ha'adJIWnga U., v. n., blessing, happiness.

ha'adlH S., partlc., open, plain; soi ha*ada*i
ada, call them out.

ha'ada'inga soi ha'adainge, church (late use).

ha*adMn v. tr., to bring a canoe to a standstill,
to cause to be stationary, to assign a
position to a person.

ha*adiana S.. ha*adiena U.. to do good to, to
bless.

ha'adodo v. tr., to cause to sink, to drown,
to dip.

ha'adoro v. tr., to heat up food.

ha*a*6'eU U., v. tr., to divert, to cause to go
out of the way.

ha'aenohi v. tr.. to lay down a child, to cradle.

ha'aere v. tr.. to scold, to wrangle.
ha'aersere U., to engage in talk.

lia'aero v. tr.. to make jests upon, to jest, to
deceive.
ha'asronga v. n.. a jest.

ha'aeso S.. v. tr.. to cause to fltfme. to bum.

ha'aete U.. v. tr., to importune, to be persist-
ent with.

ha'aha'altt S. 1. v. tr., to renew, to make afresh.
2. V. i.. to make a covenant.

ha'ahai four times.

ha'ahslahala v. tr., to make firm, to confirm.

ha'ahanenga'ini 1. v. tr., to lust after. 2.
V. tr., to exalt.

ha'aha'oltt U., v. tr., to renew, to make afresh.
ha*aha*alu, S.

]ia*ahaora U., v. tr.. to abase, to humble.
lia<ahaQra<ala-(kii) gerund.

haahe saeku e lae haaJie, I forgot it. </. kaahi,

ha'aheha 1. v. tr., to pretend not to possess,
to be niggardly over.

ha'ahebs 2. v. i.. to abound, to be in abun-
dance, honu ha*ahshe.

haahi (Ma) prep., because of. around, for, on
account oi: haahie contracts to haahe.
haahie noko lae, because of my going;
haahi iaa, because of what, why; ddu
haahi, to omit; haaMrd diana, on the
good; haianga*i vfala haahi, to accuse;
inemauri haahi, to rule over; lAn haahi,
to make a defense in words; luhe haahi,
to be surety for; luqe*i lalawa haahi, to
give a feigned excuse; mwa'e haahi, of
those who dap thdr hands at dances;
ntwana haahi, to make pretence; iit't
nitne haahi, to lay hands on; noko haahi,
to keep watch over; sae haahi, parsi-
monious; salo haahi, to make a sign to a
person; vdi e lama haahi ue holune
mwakemo, water covered the face of
the earth.
haahaahi v. tr., to prise; nga me'i da taena

he haahaahe, a thing his heart prised.
Iiaahila-(ka) gfir\ind.;m»anangahaahilana,
a doaking. glossing over; ani to*oni
haahilada, in clothing themselves. Lau
faA.

ha*ahl4to*o U., v. tr., to cause hurt to, punish.
hi'ito'o,

ha*ahili, ha'ahilihili v. tr.. to abstain from
certain foods, to fast.

ha'ahireme in front of them.

ha'ahlm v. i., to be slow, behindhand,
ha'ahinmge v. n.. delay.
ha'ahintsi tr., to be a hindrance to.

HA'AHITS

22

ha'tliite n., an ovcnful of food.

bft'thiu aeven times.

ha'ahola v. tr., to create; him ola ka'aholc,
created things.
ha'ahda'i tr., to inaugurate. Lau fafola.

ha'ahoU v. i., to expose for sale, to conduct
operations for barter; used with poss. 3,
meaning to make merchandise of.
ha'aholinge'ini tr., to put up for sale.

ha'aholo adv., crosswise, transversely, astride,
aslant. Fagani fagaforo,

ha'ahonu v. tr., to fill.

ha'ahott v. i., to proclaim.

ha'ahoulana gerund., a representation of.
ha'ahoulelni tr.. to proclaim.

ha'aholea U., n., morning; i ha'ahuUe, e dani
ha*ahuUe, tomorrow, in the morning;
hai ha'ahuUe, a morning; muni 'e hara
ha'ahuUe, as soon as it is daylight; sulia
tttwa hai ha'ahuUe, every morning.

Iia*a]iiile4ta-(ku) S., a reaching up to. attain-
ing, requiting.

ha'ahnni S., v. tr., to be contrary to. in
opposition to.

ha'ahimge S. 1. adv.. frequently. 2. v. tr.,
to make many, to multiply.
lia*a]iiiiifa'a adv., frequently.

ha'aho'o to be in good time, early afoot in the
morning; 'amu he ha'ahu'o, be here
early in the morning.

ha'ahnta to beget, of either parent.

ha'almtanga v. n., birth, generation.
ha'a]iiitela-(ku) gerund., begetting, being
begotten.

ha'ahun 1. adv.. complete; awala ha'ahuu, a
full ten. 2. V. tr.. to complete the tally.

ha'ahvn'e adj., faithful, tried; complete.
iahanga ha'ahuu'a, U.. a full fathom (of
money); with suffixed pron. 3. sing.;
ha'ahuu'ana mu ola, S.. mwa ha'ahuu'ana
ola, U., real things, the correct things;
e ha'ahuu'ana 'oto, it is quite the real
thing; with genitive t. mu ha'ahuu'ei ola,
the real things.
lia*ahmi'6-(kii) ha'ahuu'emu, your own self.
ha'ahutt'ani U., adv., altogether, com-
pletely.

ha'aHU S., v. tr., to charge unduly for, to put
on a big price.

ha'aHiioiii v. tr., to Justify oneself, to find

ha'aimilii S. 1. v. tr., to give drink to, to cause
to drink. 2. to drown.

ha'ai'od v. tr. 1. to cause to sit down. 2. used
of ha'amalaohu, to cause to undergo the
novitiate. M. A., p. 234. a Wate-
ha'aodo ngaini ha'a ha'ai'ose i one, no
one caused Wateha'aodo to be initiated
down at the beach.

ha'aiti adv.. at all, precedes the verb.

ha*aitita'aiica4iii S., ha*«idtahanga*iiii U..
v. tr.. to cause to emerge, to conduct out.

ha'akakahuru S., v. tr., to surprise, used with
poss. 3.

lia'akale v. tr., to wait for, to watch, to keep
an eye on.

ha'akamii U.. v. tr.. to cause to light (of (ire,
pipe, etc.).

ha'akana'i U., exclam., not used before women.

^. he'asikena'i.
ha'akensta'i U.. ha'akineta'i S.. to observe,

to have a care for, to keep.
Ita'akanataHni U.. ha'aki&aUHni S.. tr.
ha'akeni v. tr.. to marry a girl off, to conduct

a betrothal.
ha'akolo U.. v. i., to be strange, foreign; mo ola

ha'aholo, strange things,
ha'akom U., v. tr., to gather people together.
ha'akomnga v. n., ha'akorunga ni 'inoni, a

gathering of men.
ha'akuko U. 1. to bang up, to suspend. 2. to

lower,
ha'slaa S.. adv.. used of conditional affirmation,

the pronoun e coalesces; a ola, ha'alaa.

So-and-so I grant you; hire ho U urine

ha'alaa e diana, were they to do so it

would be good; ho nemo, ha'alaa, if it

rains granted; su'uri 'untu ha'alae diana,

had you not mentioned it it were well,
ha'aiaelas v. tr., to cause to walk, to teach to

walk.
ha'tlanga v. tr.. to expose to the air in order to

dry. to dry nets and clothes,
ha'alangi n., a house on piles, cf. iUngi. Lau

falangi,
ha'altuai v. tr.. to decorate.
ha'alsde U., v. tr.. to break in pieces.
ha*alete S.. v. tr.. to chasten, to punish, to

persecute.
ha*aletehi tr.
ha*aletehinge v. n.
ha*aietehila-(kis) gerund.
ha*ali*e v. i.. to be engaged in cooking,
ha'ali'asga v. n.. a cooking of food,
ha'tlili V. i.. to change shape, of a ghostly

apparition; e ha'alili ana pa'ewa, he

took the form of a shark,
ha'alime five times.

ha'slio 1. V. tr.. to awaken, to cause to awake,
ha'sli'o 2. v. tr.. to strangle, to hang by the neck.

In M. A., p. 288. the woman strangled

was named Hu'e sihi ni uhi, and her

husband was Olosango.
ha'aloko U.. v. tr.. to gather people together.
ha*aloo4 v. tr..[^to instruct, to punish, to make

loo.
ha'sl oungs v. n., quarreling, bickering,
ha'alu, ha'aha'alu 1. v. i., to promise, used with

ana; e ha'alu ana 'oto, he promised it;

ha'alu horana, to swear by a person or

thing,
ha'alunge v. n., a promise; hde dara'ie

ha'alunge, to break a promise,
ha'alunge'ini tr., to make a covenant,
ha'alunge 'inila-(ku) gerund. Lau g!walu,

ha'alu S. 2. adj., new, fresh, recent; ha'olu, U.;

kau ha'alu, heifer; keni ha'alu, virgin;

poro ha'alu, bridegroom.
ha'alttha v. n., used with poss. 3; ha'aluha

ana, its newness. Nguna van, Niu€

fou, Malay baru,
ha'alttdo S.. v. i., ko ere ha'aluelu, to give a

sign with a word . 'alu 2.
ha'amaa v. i., to'^dry canarium nuts ingdlt)

in smoke.

23

HA'AOPO

ha'asuudioosi U.. to boast.
ha'aniAaH v. i., to consecrate, to ordain, to
set apart for sacred use.
lui'ainaa*ince v. n., holiness (late use).
lia'aiuuiHla-Oni) gerund., making holy.
ba'ama*ani U., v. tr., to copy, to repeat after.
</. hd'imaani,
ha'ama'aninge, v. n., copying, repeating
after,
ha'amaa'o U., v. 1., to frighten.

ha'amaa'tutt tr.
ha'amada v. tr., to soil,
ha'amaa to bray nuts, yams, taro in a mortar.

ha*amaesi tr.
ha*amaeai 1. to kill.

ha'amaesi 2. to watch, as a cat a mouse.
ha'amahoro v. i., to cover up.

ha'amahoroai tr.. to cause to pass in sight.
ha'amala v. i., to copy; ko ha*amala po*upo'u
anot to make the sign of the cross on him.
ha*afflilala-(k«) gerund., doing like.
ha'amalaohit v. tr. 1. to initiate. M. A.,
p. 233. hoia ni mwane, all the boys
who are eligible. 2. U., to use a thing
for the first time, to hansel. 3. to assist
a novice in catching his first bonito.
ha'amalv v. i., to frighten fish or animals by
one's shadow falling upon them.
ha'amaloti tr.
ha'amamaklne v. tr., to inspire with dread.
ha'amamalo v. tr., to cause to rest; used also
with poes. 3; neke ha*amamalo 'am»u, I
will cause you to rest.
ha'amamaa*n U.. v. i., to cause to fear.

ha*amamaa'iiti tr.
ha'amamu v. i., to entice fish with scraps of
food, to burly; met., to entice a person
with suggestions.
ha'amlnmeH U., v. tr., to scorch. mUmu 2.
ha'amlnml v. tr., to char, to bum (of food).

mAmu2.
ha'amanata v. i., to train, to educate, to tame.

ha'amanata'i tr.
ha'amanlkiiltt'e v. tr., to give praise to, to
glorify, to make glorious.
ha*amanilniltt*aU-(kii) gerund.
ha'amanida v. i., to give peace to. to cause
peace; 'oke ha'amanola honoiamami,
give peace in our time.
ha^amango 1. to bring to a finish. 2. to com-
fort, to refresh; ha'amango sae, to com-
fort the mind,
lia'amaaa v. i., to shame, to make ashamed:

used with poss. 3.
ha'amataqa v. i., to enlighten, to cast light
upon, to let light in.
ha'amataqasi S., ha'amataqali U., tr.
ha'amataqasQa-Ckn) gerund.
ha'ama'ii S., v. i., to honor, used with poss. 3.
ha'ama'iinge v. n., respect, honor.
ha'ama'oti tr., to terrify.
lia'amaii'o S., v. i., to offend, to cause to offend,

uaed with poss. 3.
ha'amlvta'a v. tr., to strengthen, to make firm.
Ita'amedo v. tr., to steep, to wet.
liaHunenamena v. i., to be false, to flatter.
ha'amola v. tr., to cause to fail.

ha'amola (continued).

ha'amolahi tr.. to cause to fail, to cause to

miss, to make of no effect.
ha'amotaahi S., v. tr., to inflict agony on, to

persecute cruelly.
ha'amotaahila-(ktt) gerund.
ha'amoufi v. tr., to break off.
ha'amwadaoti v. tr., to soften, to make easy.
lia'amwMimwei*e S., v. tr.. to belittle, to make

of no account.
ha'amwUmwei'alatta gerund.
ha'amwamwat6*a v. i., to make light of, to

belittle; ne'isae ha'amwamwate'alana,

making light of it.
ha'amwXri v. tr., to enfeeble, to weaken by

sickness or wounds.
ha'amwMrila-(ku) gerund.
ha'amw&iie'ini v. tr.. to laugh at. to mock, to

jest at.
ha'anlLkuai U., v. tr.. to seat, to cause to sit.
ha'ananama'ini U., v. tr., to put spiritual

power into,
ha'ananatt v. tr.. to instruct, to practise.

ha'ananaitla-(ku) gerund. Wango ha'ana-

nau'a, clearly.
ha'ananoa'i. v. tr., to exercise, to accustom

oneself to.
ha'ana'o n.. first fruits, early yams; tnu

ha'ana'o, the first fruits.
ha'ana'ola'ini U.. v. tr., to do a thing first, to

do before anything else.
ha'anemo S.. ha'animo U.. v. i.. to get wet

from rain, to be in the rain.
ha*anemosi S.. ha'animoU U.. tr., to cause

to get wet with rain.
ha'anine S., v. tr., to accustom oneself, to be

accustomed; tnu tolaha e ha'anine, the

wonted practices,
ha'anipili S.. n.. anguish, pili. ha*anipili

e pilingie, he travailed with anguish.
ha*ano n., a scaffold.
ha'angM'ingedi v. tr., to strengthen.
ha*angXu v. tr.. to feed; 'at ha'angHu keni,

ginger given to women as an ordeal,
ha'aoa'i 1. v. tr.. to apportion, to correspond

to; 'ure'ure ha'aoa*ie hat suurei welu^

malau, standing opposite to the four

comers of the earth. 2. v. tr., to fulfill,

to witness; *unu ha'aoa'i, 'unu ha'aoO"

*inge, witness,
ha'aodo to straighten, to put straight, to

direct; a Wale ha'aodo, a proper name.
ha'aodohi hunt lengu ha'aodohie *aeka, to

guide our feet.
ha'aodohila-(ktt) gerund.
ha'aohtt V. tr.. to cause to boil, to boil vege-
tables, etc.
ha'aohnsi v. tr., to distribute, to apportion,
ha'aola v. tr., to put to silence; ere ha'ada, to

persuade,
ha'a'olu three times.
ha'aono six times,
ha'a'o'oni v. tr., to cause to sink, to drown;

to subject, to bring into submission;

'akalo e ha'a'o'onief a ghost took pos-
session of him.
ha'aopo v. tr., to heat up food already cooked.

HA'AORA

24

ha'aora U., v. tr., to shine, of bright light,
ha'aorata'iiii tr., to enJighten.

ha'apiina v. tr.. to enlarge, to aggrandize, to
exalt oneself,
ha'apiina'ala (kn) gerund.

ha'aparasi, ha'aqaraai U.. v. tr.. to hinder, to
prevent.

ha'apasn v. i., to threaten, to threaten the life
of a person,
ha'apasiili tr.
ha'aptanHnge v. n.
ha*apas«lila-(kn) gerund.

ha'apiho U., v. tr.. to divide into two parts.

ha'apo'e n., yam or taro mash: the yams or
taro are first roasted {sule) on embeca.
then the skin is scraped (on) with a
shell {U*eU*ei henu), and finally the
vegetable is pounded in a wooden
mortar {ult) with a pestle (*At rtpo), the
mess is then placed in wooden bowls
(mffu) and heated up with hot stones
(pit), coconut milk ('oni wrt) being
added; ha'apo'e uki, yam mash; ha*afo*9
hui, taro mash; maladi, stale, sour.

ha'apolahaH v. i., to cast away, to disregard,
used with poss. 3.

ha'apona v. 1.. to interrupt with questions,
ha'aponanga v. n.. questioning,
ha'aponal tr.. to question.

ha'apoaod v. tr., to overgrow and choke (of
creepers).

ha'apn ere ni ka*apu taho'ie, swore by him.
ha'apunga v. n.

ha'apnU rvru ha'aPuU, to throng together.

ha'apulo v. i., to turn back before reaching
one's destination.
ha*apnlongaHni S., ha'apalod U.. tr.. 1. to
accompany a person, to attend on the
way home. 2. to turn a thing over, to
reverse.

ha'apu'o v. i.. to turn back before reaching
one*s destination, to return.
ha*apu'oai S. 1. to accompany a person on
his return journey. 2. to return a thing.

ha'aqaali U.. v. tr.. to break in two pieces.

ha'aqaha'ini U., v. tr., to lay a thing along,
to measure by.

ha'aqala U., v. tr., to cause to be empty or
vacant; sak) e ha'aqalaa one, the sun
had caused the beach to be deserted.

ha'aqati U.. v. tr.. to encircle with the arms.

ba'aqt'n v. tr., to cause to be mad.

ha'aqini U.. v. tr.. to steep, to wet.

haara-(na) 1. n.. smell: haarama ho wesu, its
smell smells; haarana nga me'i oia, the
smell of anything; h4Uirani, plural, of
many things that smell. Motu harahua,
to be kissed, sniffed.

ha'ara 2. a sign. mark, flag (late use). Wango
ha'ara.

ha'araa v. i.. to sit in the sun. to bask.
ha*araalii tr.. to expose to the sun.

ha'ara'i v. i.. to summon, to call a person to
come and partake of food.

ha'ara*i]ii S., v. tr., to name, to give a person
a name. U., haora*ini,

ha'arako v. tr., to appease, to treat gently.

ha*arangaai v. tr., to blow out. to puff up. to

distend,
ha'ararada v. tr., to broil, to fiy (late use).

Wango ka'aradchi,
ha'ararao v. tr.. to cause to ding, to cause to

deave to.
ha*araa U., v. L. tola ha* area, to send out a

smell on all sides,
ha'araka 1. to land p as s engers or goods from

a canoe, used of labor vessels landing

returned laborers. 2. to land trade

goods which are left in charge of a

native trader,
ha'arakanga v. n.. trade goods landed,
ha'arakahi v. tr.. to cause to skip, to cause to

leap,
ha'arapi v. tr.. to make a prostitute of.
ha'trara v. tr.. to cleanse.

ha'arara*anga v. n.. cleansing, purification,
ha'ariro v. tr.. to entice with food, to offer

food to a ghostly visitor in order to

prove that he is not human,
ha'arodo v. i.. to darken, to stand in the light.
ha'aroH U.. v. tr. to find, to come across; (at

ha*aFo*i, go and meet; idu ha'aroH, to find.
ha'arongo v. tr.. to summon, to invite; the

technical word for a summons to a

feast delivered by a herald {hundaa).

Three days notice is given; Jtia'aroMfoa

a olo. e ro hd*idinie, 'ohtMe tU n§eu,

summon So-and-so. there remain two

days, on the third is the feast,
ha'arongonga v. n.. an invitation, summons.

calling.
ha'aroroaH v. tr.. to become indebted to. to

involve oneself with.
ha'antnt v. i., to conduct a marriage ceremony,
ha'ammnga v. n., a marriage ceremony.
ha'anffnlaKktt) gerund., the marrying of.
ha'aaada 1. v. tr., to flatten, to make level.

2. adj., flat, level.
ha'asaadiana U., v. tr., to thank, to salute in

speech.
ha'aaaadiaaanga v. n., thanks.
ha'aaaadiaaala-(ka) ferund.
ha'aaaamango v. tr.. to comfort, to settle the

mind.
ha'aaaaoBangonga v. n.. comfort, ease of

mind,
ha'aaato v. i., to sit in the sun. to sun oneself.
ha'aaatoaH tr., to expose a thing to the sun

in order to dry it.
ha'aaloni v. tr.. to vex. to cause trouble to.
ha'aaiho v. i.. to land a passenger from a canoe,

also oi labor vessels landing returned

laborers,
ha'aaiholi tr.. to lower, to let down,
ha'aaihopoltt n., a stone sinker for fishing-lines.

rounded and grooved for the attachment

of the line.
ha*aaikihl U.. v. tr.. to detach.
ha'aaUitaha U.. v. tr.. to cause to emerge, used

with poss. 3.
ha'aauan S.. 1. to strengthen, to make firm,

confirmation (late use) ; ha'asusu sae,

to confirm the heart.
lia'aaQaala-(ka) gerund.

25

HAHA

lui*aBiisii 2. V. tr.. to suckle.
ha'asfistt 3. v. i., to tell tales about, to gossip,
ha'asusiingo v. n.. gossip.
ha'asutimge'iiii tr., to spread tales about

a peraon, to be a subject of gossip,
ha'aiitsii 4. U.. ha'asusu uhi, name of a month,

March, susu 4.
ha*ata'ali v. tr., to cause to embark, to take on

board.
ha*ata*ala*i]ii U., tr., to cause to arise.
ha'ataH partic. made plain, open; hume taU

Voe ke*i ha*ata*i, that thy way may be

made plain.
ha'ata'iai v. tr., to show, to reveal, used

with poes. 3; ka*ataHnie *emelu, show

it to us. Pagani faiagi,
ha'atakalo v. tr., to lose, to lose the run of,

to misplace, to cause to err.
ha'atalaH v. tr., to egg on, to incite.
ha'atSliti U., v. tr., to cause to awake.
ha'ataaauhi v. tr., to decoy a ghost or an

animal by offering food. ^. ha*anro.

Mota watanau.
ha'atapala*a U., v. i.. to cause to abound,
ha'atata'ala v. tr., to harm, to cause evil to;

mu ola ni ka*fU<Ua*ala 'emt, things that

harm us.
ha'atatangalni v. tr.. to scatter.
ha'alataqelo v. tr., to throw a peraon down

headlong.
ha'atataro v. tr., to cause to stumble.
ha*atau v. i., to be far off, distant.

ha'atauli S., ha'atauri U.. determ., to be

far off from. Wango ha'aiau, Lau

faff, Mota sau, Florida hau, Malay jau.
ha'ateke v. i., to cause to fall; ngAu ha*ateke, to

drop crumbs while eating,
ha'atengotengo v. tr.. to droop, of lip or head.
ha'atohaHni v. tr., to give oneseff airs, to

boast, to maJce much of a person.
ha'atoha'failla-(kn) gerund.
ba'atobn 1. v. L, to make request for, to ask

leave, to ask a favor: used with poes. 3.

e ha'atohu eku, he asked my leave. 2.

V. tr., to ask that a person or thing be

granted to one. e ha'atokus ana, he

asked him for it.
ha'atohnnge v. n., a making request.
ha'at^ala-<ktt) gerund.
ha'atola 1. v. i., to send a message, to send a

thing. 2. U., n., a messenger: laa

ha^atola, a person sent.
ha'atolanga v. n., a message, command,

order, epistle (late use).
ha'atolaH tr., to give a message to.
ba'atolanga'ini tr., to give a message ta
ha'atonohi U., v. tr., to offer drink, to cause to

drink.
ha'atonohlla-(kii) gerund.
ha'ato'o v. tr., to confirm, to accomplish; «

ha*ato*oa saeku, he carried out my

wish.
lui'alo*08ii'a U., v. tr., to cause to stumble.
ba'atorstore U., v. i.; ha'aioretore maa, to act

stealthily.
HaHitt the landing-place at Oloha, west coast

of Little Malaita.

ha'a'uduhi v. tr., to drip on, to bespatter.

ha'a'nku v. tr., to lower, to let down.

ha'aulao v. L, to act the wanton.

ha'a'ultt V. tr., to make blind, to cause to be
blind, to cause the eye to close.

ha'a'ura v. i., to set up. to cause to stand.
ka'a'ure mauia'a,
ha*a'iiresi tr., to make to stand, to set on

end, to build up. to edify.
ha'a'urerila-(kii) gerund.

ha'a'arenga4iil S., v. tr., to accompany a
person on a journey.

ha*a'ur«nsm S.. v. tr., to make peace between,
to restore friendship between,
ha'a'uraninmge v. n.

lia*aari v. tr., to save, to make alive, to put
parrot-fish, t'a ni kalu, in a pool to keep
them alive, tf, mAuri. lopo ni ha'anri,
pool of salvation, baptismal font,
ha'auringe v. n., safety, salvation.
ha*aiirile-(ka) S., ha<aaiita-(kn) U., gerund.
1. the saving of. 2. the being saved,
salvation; ini ni ka*a$irilana *oto, a
person to be saved. 3. the person who
saves; a ha*auriieknt my saviour.

ha'aufine S.. ha*amina U., adv., thus, just so.
that's the way.

ha*a*nsv U., v. i, to let fall.

ha*a'u8ali 1. v. tr., to let fall, to cause to drop.
*usu 11.

ha'ausuU 2. v. tr., to teach, to cause to do like.

ustdi. ini qaarongoisuli e ka'a linia'ana

ini ha*ansuli, the disciple is not above

his master.

ha'auaiilinge v. n., teaching, instruction.

maai ka*ausidinget a lesson.
ha'aiiaiilfla-(kn) gerund.

ha'awa'a v. i., to desecrate, to defile; are
ha'awa*a, to speak blasphemy.
ha*awaa4 U.. v. tr.. to dishonor.

ha'awXiteu v. i., to engender strife.

ha'awall 1. v. i., to delay, to pass, of a short
period of time. waU, 2. adv., a short
time. 3. with suff. pron.: *ohe ha*awa'
li'en, wait a little while for me.
ha'awaUnga v. n., a delay.

ha'awaradkala U.. a scorpion: lit., causing the
child to scream.

ha'awXal v. tr., to hunt, to chase wild animals.

ha'awaweta*a'i v. tr., to cause vexation to. to
fash, to wrangle.

ha'awe'o to cause to be weary; ho ha'awe'ora
mola, trouble themselves for nothing.

ha'awewan U., v. i., to quarrel, to bicker.

hada n., a bird, an eagle (Haliaetus leucogaster)
used in Ulawa as an omen. Wango hada.

hldi V. tr., to forbid under a curse, to prevent;
Mdt ola, hddi olanga, v. n., cursing;
ere ni hedi olanga, to swear, to take an
oath.

hadonga U., n., a shellfish, univalve, mutton-
fish, hangoda, S.

haeta U., v. i., to appear, of ghostly visions.

haha S. 1. adv., down, not used of points of
compass, but apai haha, the downward
side, i. e,t Big Malaita; mai i haha,
under the earth; hoi haha, under the

HAHA

26

hAha (continued).

earth, the downward side; hakani
*ono*onoma, a measure* a jrard. 2.
prep, {ku) ; t kakamu, underneath you.
Wedau wopa, west; Wango bahai,
Samoa /a/a. Vaturanga vava, Mao. haha
earth.

haha 3. v. tr.. to carry a person on the back.
Samoa fafa, NiuC fttfa, Viti vava.

haha 4. haha* walo, a thicket.

hahaHteli S.. v. tr., to distinguish, lio
haha'iteli.
hahaHtelila-(lra) gerund.
haha'iteUnge'ini tr., to single out. to par-
ticularize; e ka'a haha^Uelinge'inie ike
WutUt it was not confined to that par-
ticular instance.

hahaia n.. a cave. kaU 1.

hahaliai S.. n.. grass. </. kiUisi. Mota valis.

hahaora'e U., adj., very small, diminutive.
kaora,

hahaii n.. a bifurcation, used with genitive t
S., ni U. kari 2. kakarii tola, branch-
ing roads.

hUhi V. tr., to cook in an oven with leaves and
hot stones: a layer of hot stones on
bottom, then the kara, etc., amd then
leaves to cover all. The floor of oven is
level with the ground.
hithinga v. n., a cooking in an oven.
hlUiUa-(kii) gerund.

hahitali U., v. tr., to distinguish, to separate
between, kaka'iteli, S.

haho (kn) 1. prep., above; dinge ta'i kakoma, the
day after it; with locative i: i kako, on
top; ilengi i kako, in the sky above.
2. n., U.. uplands; mwa kako i Rakumaea,
Fagani fafo, Lau fafo, Mota vawo,

haho 3. n., a leef lying off shore.

hahota S.. n., used with ddu 1; ddu kakota, to
deceive, to act the hypocrite; ddu
kahotanga, v. n. kako 1.

hahnilala U. 1. v. i.. used with poss. 3. to
exemplify. 2. n., a sign, an example.

hUiure'l v. tr.. k&kure*i maa* to lift up the
eyes; hdkure*i 'elingCt to incline the
ears.

hahuroto v. i., to be clear, of unimpeded vision;
est ne'i maa kakttroto, his eye became
clear; lio kakurolo, to see clearly.

hUhoto'o v. 1., to cast lots, to test by lots: a
leaf of red dracaena ('apai dili) is held
in the fingeri and pulled; the judgment
is given according as the leaf breaks
easily or with difficulty, cf. iUda,
hthttto'onga v. n.

bai 1. numeral, four; kai awala^ forty is used
as a unit in counting men. Mota vat,
Maori wka.

hai 2. contraction of kao i; kai 'ano, on the
ground; kai la'ana, within; kai Wune*
down there; kai nume, down in the
house; kai Ui, down where?

hai 3. exclamation of reproof; kai raona, well
I never; kai mwaena, I say, you I

hMi 4. art., one, a; probably a contraction of
kdu 4 and i 2; kdidinge, a day; mu

hlli 4 (continued).

keidinge, days; kdiwala, a word; kdi
nako, a wave, a breaker; k&i rodo, a
night; kdi koiaa, a calm; kdi lama^ a
pool; kdi Uqe, a bamboo; nga kJU tat. a
length of bamboo.

hii, hiihei 5. v. tr., to scratch with the nails
(of birds, dogs, etc.) ; hokoho ko kei, the
brush-turkey scratdites; kdi naU, to dig
up worms for bait for t'a ttt sane,

hlH 6. participial ending, erekd'i. Mota vag. 2.

hJLH 7. suffix to verbs, used intransitively: to
make it transitive ni is added, kd'ini.

hI4 8. prefix, may be doubled kd'ikeH, (a)
expresses reciprocity, (b) used with
nouns of relationship; ro kd*i (mu ke'i)
ma*amaMa, father and son; ktreme hd*i
maeloonga, they two are at enmity,
(c) ke*it S., expresses repetition or con-
tinuance; mwane hire ke*i 'umtulo'u, they
must not ever say it again; e sa'a he'i
aopa lo*u, it will never be different; ko
ke'i sapeie, adds more to it; kd*i mai, U..
to add to; kira'au a $a'e kd'i *olie'u they
embark on their return Journey, (d)
denotes relative action: kd*i *amasi, to
pity. M. L., p. 531, 186. ^. Florida
vei arovi, Motu ke, Viti set, Florida
veit Wango ka*i. The pronunciation
kd'i may have been adopted in order
to diatingiiish it from kdi 4. </. kau 1
(Mota walu) and ka*u 6 (Mota voa).

hft*i S. 9. used occasionally where Ulawa uses
ka'a. cf, kd'imaani*

haH U. 10, v. i., to call attention to: uaed ^nth
poss. 3.

haia exclam.. I say.

liI*i*a*aQhi v. tr.. to deliver, to help.

hAH^adei v. i., to make a spectacle of, to look
on at.
hK*i<ad6<inge v. n., a spectacle.

hAH'alama'i v. i., to consent mutually, to be
agreed upon a policy. Wango Aotaramat.
hX4'alama*inge v. n.

hXH*ama8i to be merciful.

hXHaopaH adj., different, various; mn ola
hd'iaopa'it different things.

hftHare U., v. tr., to proffer help, to push one-
self forward, e kd*iarea maraana, he
pushed himself forward: not considered
good form.

hildada U., v. i., to be level.

hlHdadanga U., v. n., used aa verb or adverb:
used with poss. 3 equal to, agreeing with,
sufficient, sadanga, S. e kd^idadanga
maia, equal to it; « kd'idadanga ana. it
corresponds to it.

hAidengiel S.. hX*idenieH U., partic, until
daylight.

hJUdinga S., n., a day; nga kdidinge; mu
keidinge, days; suU keidinge, daily; e
topoa kdidinge, to set a day.

hX'i'apn'i v. tr., to propitiate a person, to
smooth down temper.

hXHheH 1. reduplication of kd'i 8.

hMHhe*! 2. S., kd'ike'i uta, a log of coconut
wood, kd'uke'u, U.

27

hAitalb

hliiheHdliage v. n., bounty.

liX*|]iolotaH V. i., to promiae, to have an agree-
ment between.
li]l*ihalota'inc« v. n., an agreement.

hMHhoaoIH V. i.. to curae; ere hd'ihoHod'i, to
speak revilingly.
h&*£hononsa v. n., cursing.

hM^ihora'i U., partic, to be daybreak, cf.
*auhora*

h&'ihoro'i U., v. i.. to be at strife, to fight.
hitihoronga v. n., variance, strife.

baiha n., dugong, sea-oow.

hl'lhnni U., v. tr., to desire, to wish for. hunt.
h&'ihiiiilnga v. n., desire, lust.
hll4hiinila-(ktt) gerund. Wango kaahuni.

halke S. 1. negative, no: not used as negative
particle; demonstrative »a, ena, may
be added for emphasis. 2. n., nothing,
naught; nga da taa*f what? ha*ike,
nothing; ko ha*ik$t otherwise, else; ha*ik£
na, oh no; ha*ike *oio *o*o, never at all;
ha* ike ue, not yet. 3. to be nothing,
not to be; ana ko ka'ike, if it is not so;
maala ko ka*ike, even if not. Probably
ka'iandkel, tf.qa'ike^qa^lJ, Wango
qai,

hM'ikinataH S., v. i.. to take care, to be faithful,
to guard against.

hX'ilakali U.. v. i., to have sexual intercourse
with. kd*ilakali maia a ola.

hXHIektt V. i., to be whole, entire: adv., com-
pletely; kai alowaa kdHleku* whole day
long; iola hdHleku, to carry whole, in
one piece.

h&'ileladi v. tr., to mock at, to despise: v. i.,
to be abominable.
hllleladUige v. n., abomination.

hi'flaii V. i., to snatch, to be violent; ko
ke'iUuUu ana moia, merely snatched it
with violence.

hftHUn adv., redprocaUy; kai maai dengi
ke'iliune, the four winds; k€*u io'oa'i
ke'iliu, wandering star, planet; kira 'asi
lu*ua kd'iliu, U.. they ceased hosUUties;
ko saewasu keHUu, angry with one
another; mAni oaoanga kii*iliu, equality;
moro ko pu*oia*inie erenga kd*iliu, you
are ignorant of one another's speech;
opa k&*iliu, to be at variance.
hM'flitinge*ini v. tr., to pass a thing from
person to person.

hXlla'ia v. tr., to exhume human bones. M. A.,
p. 262: to remove.
hl*tta'iingeini tr.

h&*iffla'amana n., used with numeral ro, two.
nd 7. TO kd'ima'amana, father and son.
hKlma'amananga n., mu ke*ima*amananga,
parents.

hMlma'ani S., v. tr., to copy, to do Uke.
ka'amaani, U. ngara kd*ima*ani, to cry
in sjrmpathy with.

hXImalahime n., used with ro or mu. nd 7.
kir€ru*e ro kd*imalakune, they two are
friends.

hH'imanana n., used with ro: ro kd'imauana,
man and wife; with ineu, etc., added, ro
kd*imaiuma ineu, my parents, nd 7.

hil'imwa*ste4 1. v. i., to assent, to be willing.
2. V. i., to kiss.

hains S., haina U.. fourth, the fourth time.
nd 7.

lill*ini tr. suff.; suu, to sink; suuke*ini, to de-
stroy. Florida vagini,

hlHoa V. i., to agree with, to agree together.

hlL*ioangi v. i., to cackle (of birds), to imitate,
to follow on with.

hX'iodo'i V. i., to meet one another.

hMHohe v. i., to compete, to race.

hJL4*ohi U.. V. i., to query, to be doubtful about.

hMHohonginga n.. trial, making trial of one
another, fighting.

hftH'oli V. i., to turn back, to return, to take
turn about; kakali ke'iheToli, to take
turns in guarding; lae kd*i*oli, to go
and return.
hllH*olid antiphonally, mutually; iapa
kdTolisi, to converse. Wango keikeiori.

hlHora 1. v. i., to fail to return, to stay behind.
lae kd'iore,

UlHora 2. v. i., to scold, to quarrel.
hll*iorenga v. n., bickering.

hMHpini4 U., v. i., to strive with, to contend,
to race.
hIHpftni4nga v. n.

hUHpolanga v. n., insurrection, tumult.

hlHpuri 1 . V. L, to be last. 2. adv., latest, at last.

h&HpanmgaH U., partic., dose together, clus-
tered.

bttHqa'aqana n., grandparents and grand-
children, those who call one another
qa*aqa: used with ro, mu, mwa.

hai raona S., hai raoni U.. exclamation of
reproof.

hX'IrapeH U., v. tr., to exhort.

hll4rara v. i., to be sealous, diligent.

hi*irarahi U., v. tr., to persuade, importune.
hX*irarahinga U.. v. n.. persuasion.

hliraratat 1. v. i., to tend. 2. n.. a servant.

hX*irianga v. n., a contest; ani keHrienga pe'i
safe, in subduing the body.

hilrodo n.. a night; nga kdtrodo; mu keirodo,
nights; kdtrodo 5t*tr». last night.

hI4nini U., v. i., to be lumped together, to be
identical with.

hX*isada v. L. to be flat, even. Wango taisada,
agreeing with.

hlHsa'iri v. i.. to quarrel.

hXHaevni S.. v. i., to be at strife, to be at
variance, to fight. M. L., p. 186.

hXHaiho U.. v. i.. to speak against, decry, to
prate; used with poss. 3.

hXHin^eau'e S.. v. i.. to meet one another.

hUHsnhinga U.. v. n.. unction.

hllsnm V. i.. ere kd*isuru, to have altercations.

hiHansu v. i.. to be continuous, sustained;
saewasu ke*isusu, continued anger.

httHsttu V. i.. to flit from place to place; *i'i ko
ke'isuu, the swift flits about.

hXltakoH U.. v. i.. to swear an oath.

hXHtale 1. v. tr.. to search for; ana *oio *emi ka'a
roro'a kd*italea *amut unless we seek it
of thee; lio kd'OaU U.. to look in vain
for. 2. V. i., to get out of the way;
kd*iiaU talaku, make room for me.

Hl^ITALB

28

hM'ltale (continued).

hiHtalensa v. n.. a search.
hK'HaleU-dni) gerund.
hftltalancAlni tr.. to look for.
iai*itatan<aH U.. partic. scattered.
Ul*it«li]l S., to be unruly.

htHtaliUasa v. n., unruliness.
hlHte'a adj., with whole skin, unpeeled. cf,

hd'iUku.
hlHtstt V. i., to move quickly, to hasten.

hlHtenhi tr.. to deliver, to free.
hUHtohe v. tr., to dispute with, to refuse to
listen to; ere hA*iiohe, to contradict.
hKHtohenga v. n.. refusal, disobedience.
hftHtohaU-(kii) gerund. Wango kaUoket
hariiohe,
hiHtoli v. tr., to bury, to be a>burying.
hiltolings v. n., burial.
hlHtoliU-(kn) gerund.
ha'itolinge4iil tr.. to bury,
hi'itorangi v. tr.. to exhort.
hMHtotori U.. v. i., to await, to expect; Ad'ito-
lori susuio'o, to hope (late use); hd'itoiO'
ringa susuio*o, v n.. hope.
hiHuqanqeni v. tr., to complain of.

hlHuqeuqaninge v. n.. complaint.
hX4uai U., v. i.. to traffic, to barter.
ULHttSonge*! S., v. i.. to send, to despatch.
hiHusungelnga v. n., a command.
hi'iasonge4ni tr.. to give command to.
hftlttwalina U.. n.. a man and his sister's son,
those who call one another uweli, used
with ro, mwa, nd 7.
hXlttwetl v. i.. to use oaths, to curse.
hlHwalo V. i.. to be choked with vines; mae

hd*iwalo, to die prematurely.
haka 1. v. i., to be torn, to tear; haka lo'oni, to
tear clothes.
hakaai tr., to tear something.
Haka 2. n., the Southern Cross Mission
schooner; palapala ni Haka, omen of
the Southern Cross coming, a sign of
rain.
haka 3. n.. a ship; white people, foreign; haka
lude mwane, a vessel of the labor trade;
dangq ni haka» papaya; hoU ni haka, an
oar; mu haka, white people; hudi ni
haka, Musa cavendishii; ola ni haka, a
foreign thing; poro ni haka, a man of the
ship, white man; * haka, the white man's
country; noko lai haka, I am going
abroad. Probably Mota aka through
San Cristoval, where Bishop Patteson
first called and where the word was
first learned by the peoples of Sa'a and
Ulawa.
haka 4. n., a herd; haka ni poo, herd of swine.
hakia n.. axe (English).
kllkn 1. v. i.. to go together, to go in a company.
hikoai S., hXkuai U.. tr., to go with, to

accompany.
hikttsila-(ka) gerund. Wango hagu.
hiku 2. n., the prow of a canoe, separately
made and tied on with cane: poop, v.,
to cut out the boards for the prow.
hala v. i.. to attempt, used with fit; nou hala
ni lae, I attempt to go.

halahala firm, taut.

halai 1. to be bald. 2. a bald person; a kalai,

the bald man.
halsttana the top of a hill lit., ito baldness,
halaii U.. to be sti£f. to stiffen, kalakaia,
halata a wound, scar.
hale 1. a shed, a yam-shed in a garden, nga kale.

Florida vale, house; Maori wkare.
hale (ktt) 2. the gums, palate; idemm ke sum i

kaUna, the lime spatula shall pieroe

his gums.
haie4te U.. adv.. entirely, only, kdli'iie, S.

Lau fala*eie,
Hal«la4 the island forming Port Adam. Little

Malaita.
hifU, hiUhaH 1. v. tr., to break off branches;

kdU W. to break areca branches.
'ahUi partic., broken off.
hllila-(ku) gerund.
hilihsli*a adj., broken ofl;kokiU kdlikeU'e,

breaks in pieces. Wango makarikari,

ruined.
hUi 2. V. i.. to strive; kdli wala, to dispute; kdU

walanga, S.. v. n.. disputation; wala

kdlinge, V. n.. strife; kdli ama knrunge,

foot racing.
hlUaga V. n., strife, bad feeling.
hlUila-(kn) gerund. Mota walu, match;

Vtti valu, fight; Malagasy valy.
hill 3 . stingray. Mota sor , Viti vai, Maori wkai,
hilidaVa U.. v. i., to stumble.
hXU'ite S.. adv.. entirely, only. kdU'iU, U.
haliono U.. v. i.. to dose the eyes,
hdisi 1. harvest, crop, time of ripening; dango

ni kelisi, fruit (nut) tree; mora kdlisi,

northeast wind; mora kdlisi i fnatewa,

north-by-east wind. 2. yam season.

year (late use); kdlisi Mre *eUe *oio^ last

yam-digging; kdlisi kire ke*i *eU€, the

coming yam-digging season; kdlisi mei,

next 3ram-digging; nga kdm ni kelisi, a

year. 3. U.. grass, onion (late use).

Mota valis, grass. 4. kdlisi pena, U..

Coix lachryma. Job's tears,
halo 1. V. tr., to bore, to drill. 2. n.. a drill;

kalo moo, a pump drill: the sections of

shell for money {kaa) are all bored.

Mota war, to twist.
halo 3. V. tr.. to helve an axe.
halolo V. i.. to come forcibly into contact with.

used with poss. 3; e kaldo ama nume

ngeena, beat on that house,
hilu 1. n.. some; used in Sa'a with genitive t.

also with suffixed pronoun no; mu kdui

Hnoni, mwa kdlu Hnoni, certain persons;

kdluna ngaini, kdUtna ngaile, U.. one

here and there. Florida balu, NiuC
falu,
hala 2. S.. rdui kelu, 10.0(M> coconuts.
hXlote'i V. tr.. to paddle and overtake. kdlmU'i

kaka,
hilatsHagsHni tr. Ulawa kdlnU, in proper

names. Wango karuia^ to paddle;

Fate halusa, paddle; Mota alo 3. to

steer; Samoa alo, to paddle; Motu kalo.

New Britain walu, Lif u galu,
hama hatchet, tomahawk (English hammer)

29

HA&O

luuui 1. n., a yam with prickly vines, twining
to the left on its pole, whereas uhi twine
to the right; it ia planted whole; hana
ni Kela, a hana planted head down-
ward: other varieties are hana sa*o, hana
tapole, hana wai; h&u hana, coral lime-
stone; nini hana, U.. a yam; sikei hana,
a thorn on top of the tuber.

hana 2. v. L, to shoot, with arrow or gun; hane
takarurume'inire, to shoot several at
one shot.

v. n.

banaai determ., to shoot anyone.

hanaiOa-(]ra) gerund. Florida vanahi, to
shoot; Viti vana, Samoa fana, Niu6
fanot Malay panah, arrow.

hanali determ.* to covet; sas hanalinge,
covetousness.

himHls-(tai) gerund.
hana 1. v. n., to climb; hane pot iU'u, come up
here to me. 2. used of the bridegroom's
party visiting the bride's party at a
wedding feast; mwala ho holi heni ho
hane, ho lai hune ola, the people who are
buying the bride go up and display the
bridal moneys. 3. to rise, to ferment
(of ha*aPo*e that has stood in bowls).
4. to leave the land and put out to sea
when crossing to another island, to aim
at a point of land, hdulihane.

hmnmngm y. n., climbing.

hanengaHai tr., determ.. to climb and carry.

haneta'a S., hanetaha U.. v. i., to climb up.

haneta'anga S., hanetahanga U.. a slope,
a steep place, a declivity. Fagani fane.

hanal tr., to covet, to desire.

hananga v. n.. hanenga ni sae, saehanenga,
covetousness.

ha'a]iaaaiiga4iil to lust after, to exalt.
himie S*. hXima U.. land, country, village; in
Sa*a the final e changes to a before the
penonal article a, resulting in a long
vowel, hannaa oia, the land of So-and-so.
hainu€ hnu, solid land, dry land, heri-
tage; hdmue mdine, the place here, this
land; hOnne e ninle, a place abounding
in coconuts; hdnue e qala, the village is
empty; hUnue sola, desert; mwa h&nua,
U.. villagers, people; mwa hAnua hunga,
everybody; apai henne, the west side of
an island; awalosi i henue, the north-
west wind; t denumana hdnue, in the
middle of the island; e hnluhie hdnue,
upholds the earth; lai henue, to go on
a journey; ngprana hdnue, point of land,
cape; qd'usi henue, he whose duty it is
to approach the ancestor ghosts; saio
e qa'alie hdnue, the sun has risen on the
earth; Id'i henue, S.. in the uplands;
td*i$elihana hdnue, boundary of land;
mu toloi henue, the hills; toUma hdnue,
the hill country; *usu henue, the first
finger; wai henue, up in the village.
Hiiraa 'Alt U.. Lark Shoal south of Ulawa,

figures in folklore.
kiattdama S.. to be at peace, ef. lama 4.

hittartamaiiga v. n.. peace.

hXauelama (continued).

hiUinalsinati tr., to have peace among men;
e hdnuelamasire, they were at peace.

hanga v. i.. to be jammed, to be too tight.

hangoda S., hadonga U.. a haliotis or sea-ear,
strung and used as a bait for crayfish;
hinui hangoda, its shell.

hao S., adv.. of direction, down, west; with
locative t contracts to hai, hai one, hoi
*ano, hai la'ona; na'o hao, to go toward*
to go west; po'o hao, S.. farther west;
poo hao lihitemu, on beyond thee; qdu
hao, to be going north or west.

ha'olu U., ha'altt S.. adj.. new. fresh.
ha'aha'olu, Nguna vau, Wango ha*oru,
Bougainville Straits faolu, Malay vau,
Malagasy vao, Maori hou.

haora« hahaore'e U.. small.

haoraha v. n.. used with poss 3: boyhood,
smallness; haoraha ana, the small size,
haoirad tr.. to be too small for.

haora4ni U.. v. tr., to name, to give a name to.

hapa 1. a plank, thwart of a canoe, rdi (rdu i)
hapa. 2. plates of turtle shell, hapa ni
honu; Mo hapa, to bend the shell.
3. a phase of the moon; hapa ni na'o,
*alanga'i hapa, U.. first quarter.

hara U.. haro S. 1. adv.. of time, used of con-
secutive time, of unfinished action, pre-
cedes verb, Ahi'a use. muni *e hara
ha*ahulee, as soon as it is daylight; muni
*e hara lae, begin to go gently.

hara S. 2. hara pole, a phase of the moon, first
quarter, day before full.

hara 3. v. i.. to be firm; pun hara, to get a firm
footing; susu hara, to lean firmly, to
rest upon.

Haraina a village on the northwest comer of
Ulawa.

haraai v. tr.. to chafe, to scratch.

harahara U., v. i.. to cram; susu harehare, to
cram full.

Hari Hdu Hari, a rock at the east entrance to
Mara Masiki Channel.

hiri» hlxiheri 1. v. tr.. to ask about; soi heri, to
question, to ask questions. 17.
hXrite'liiga v. n.. questioning, suha hdriU-
Hnga. Wango han haaie, Florida
varigohi,

hlri 2. n.. used with genitive t or ni; hdrii tola,
S., hdri ni tola, U., side track, bifur*
cation of roads, hahari.

hiiihari S., n.. a scorpion. Lau farifari, San
Cristovai susu heri, Maori locrt. hdli 3.

hlrihnni, blribarihiiiii S. 1. v. tr.. to desire, to
wish for. hdri 1. huni,
hirihoninge v. n., desire.
hiiibiiBila*(ka) gerund.

hlrUmni, hiriherihwit 2. adv.. at all. precedes
verb.

hirikokosi U.. v. i.. to be straitened, confined.
hohol,

haro S., hara U., adv., of time, of consecutive
or of unfinished action or of future time.
cf. saro, he haro diana, when it is well;
he haro hoowa ha'u, let it be first light, as
soon as it is light ; 'ohe haro lae, go gently.

HAKO'A

30

liaro*« U. (Su'uholo use), as kara 1.

hmnuL U.. ezdam. of assent, yes.

hlti, hUHliMi S.. hUilUlai U. 1. v. tr.. to plant.
^. *u*uk$si.
hlsi]ig« V. n.. a planting.
httaOa-Clni) gerund. Wango hasi» Lau foH.

hllri U. 2. maana e*a hdsi i saroha, his eyes roU
up to the ceiling.

haai'ei'ei S.. twist tot>acco in sticks. Wango
hcsi'ei, a tree; the first tobacco came to
Sa'a from Wango.

hftiikokosi U.. v. tr., to cause distress to.
koko2.

hasileHni U., v. tr.. to set. place.

Hllsiino a bay on the west side of Ulawa
between Lenga and Ripoo, the site of
an old village.

hMsi'o (k«) n.. flesh of body; me*i )uH*o Ve, this
flesh.
hl8i*onga V. n., fi^AM hesi*onga^ cannibalism;
to*oni e mada'a ani hesi'onga owt, gar-
ments defiled with the flesh. ^.
hinesu. Wango hasi'o, Mota visogoif
Maisin visoa, Wedau vioa.
hiai'ola adj., fleshy, with plenty of flesh on.

hilBip6*ale S., adj.. hard, close in grain.

faata, hatahata 1. v. i., to go together, to accom-
pany one another, tola hatahuta, to act
in harmony. 2. v. i., to set well, to be
easy, comfortable; tori ineu e hata^ my
yoke is easy. 3. v. i.. to be gentle (of
wind); mawa hatahaia mola, a gentle
breeze. 4. suit haia, 40 dogs' teeth, a
imit in reckoning money. M. A., pp.
238, 325. 5. maraau wet hata, south-
southeast wind, strong but with no rain,
cloudy skies. 6. a tree of hard wood
used to make drums; pig-proof fences
are made of it in Guadalcanar. San
Cristoval haia. 7. hata koula*a, to be
noisy, chattering.
h a t a n ga v. n., fellowship, communion.

Pf^a takanga, to keep fellowship.
hataa'i v. i., to arrange, to place one along-
side the other; hataa*i diena ana mwa
ola, to put things in due order; hataa*i
sae talani, to be careful to; U*u hire
hataa'i heu ana, a pavement.
hataalni tr. to cleave to. to accompany,
to arrange.

hatale, hatahatals v. i., to go along the beach
as opposed to liu i henue, take the
upper road; awalosi i hatale, the north
wind.
hatalea v. n., shore, coast.

hatara v. i., to rest upon, to lean, to press
against,
hatarangalni tr., to cause to lean upon.
San Cristoval hatara, to reach.

hatara on the side of, toward, used with suff.
pron. a. katarea i ola.

hato 1. a large armlet made of clam-shell;
daraha'ini hato, to fit the shell ring on
the arm; didi hato, to make the shell
ring: a hole is made by tai>ping with a
piece of flint tied to a handle, then a
stick studded with flints is inserted and

hato 1 (continued).

the hole made larger, the outside is
rounded on coral rock and a groove is
made; the old men, and often the blind,
make the hato, 2. U.. hiha hato, the
moon on the fifth day.

hato 3 (kn) U.. knee-cap.

hatonga S. 1. suited to, used with poss. 3.
€ hatonga akn,
hatongal v. i., to explain, to set out in
words; hatonga* i wala haahi, to accuse.
hatonga'ini tr., to dte an example, to illus-
trate, to give instructions about.

hatonga U. 2. to be small.

hftu 1. rock, stone; hoi heu, a rock. €f, lilihsu,
suluheu, hdu haa, red madrepore coral;
hdu hana, coral limestone; Hdu Hari,
a rock at the east entrance of Mara
Masiki Channel; hdu ni iu, twin rocks;
Hdu ni Keni, rock at Ali'ite where
female ghosts congregate; hdu ni lilie*i,
a rock from which men cast for gar-
fish; Hdu Loho, a boat harbor south of
Port Adam; Hdu Maelo, a rock near
Ngorangora on the east coast of Ulawa:
prov. raa hitelia Hdu Mado, dry
weather enough to crack H&u Maelo;
hdu menu, pumice; hdu mou, an isolated
rock; hdu ngedi, flint; hdu *ono*ono, to
swallow stones in an ordeal; Mm pawa,
soapstone; hdu pie, a precipitous wall
of rock; hdu pulu, hard volcanic rock;
hdu pu*opu*o, a grindstone; hdu susu,
an immovable rock; hdu suusuui kan>^
cornerstone; *ato*ato Mto, to p er fo r m the
hot-stone ordeal; ddu heu, the hot-stone
ordeal. M. A., p. 210; ddu dunge,
dunga ni heu, to undergo the ordeal;
i'e hd'u, a stone fish; ipdu eni heu, to
fight with stones; hahatai heu, iron rod;
ki*ihi*i heu, a rod of iron; Ungine hdu,
above the rock; leu hire hataa'i heu ana,
a pavement; nga odoni heu, a row of
stones; qd*une hdu, rocks on shore seen
from the sea; rete hdu, to grind the
teeth; sae hdu, hard heart (late use);
e 'u'iie*inie nga hoi heu, a stone's throw.
Mota vatu, stone; New Guinea vau:
possibly pronounced hau and not ha'u
in order to distinguish it from ha'u
(Mota van).

hiu 2. axe, stone axe, iron (late use); hduHle^
kite, a long-handled tomahawk with
iron blade; hdu roroho, a stone axe; rere
hdu, to sharpen an axe; rere hdunge,
v. n., axe sharpening; warei heu, ware
ni hau, a short club with a stone head
made at Waisisi. Big Malaita.
hMulo adj.. stony.

hi'u 3. n., a log of wood; hdu i contracts to hai,
hai dango, S., hai *ei, U.. a log; Mlii UU
qana, a boom; iiga hduheui niu, U., nga
hdihei, S., a log of coconut wood. Mota
vat 3, Batak hau, tree; Malay hayu. M.
L., p. 95.

hMtt 4. n.. (a) denotes a period of time; nga hdu*
dinga, U., a day; nga hdu ni hdlisi, a

31

HBLSHBLB

hKii 4 (continued).

period of a year, (b) with numeral
ia*a, S., ta*e» U.. one. it makes hHuta'a'i,
hduia'e, once: with genitive i, hdu i
contracts to hdi, hdidinge, S., a day,
hdirodo, a night, (c) a row of teeth:
reU hiiUt to grind the teeth; reU hdunga,
V. n., ialai heunet a row of teeth; kulaa
talai heune, to loosen teeth; used of
things that are in succession with
genitive (, /t, ni; h/iu ni *esi, a wave;
hdiUiahet tide-rips; hduliqongi, one day
of a series, cf. au in Motu and Hula.
Keapara hau prefixed to names of
things of length. T.S.E. iii, p. 475.

hftu 5. U., used of phases of the moon; h&u ni
lemit full moon; hdu ni mwela awara, day
after full moon; ruana hdu, second day
after full moon.

hMa 6. a pandanus with broad leaves used to
make umbrellas.

hMa 7. an umbrella of pandanus leaf sewn in
strips, carried on journeys and used as a
sleeping-mat, also to protect children
when they are carried by the mother;
mwela ko kerukeru la*o hdu, the child's
ghost scratches inside the umbrella.

hlu 8. U., hau ni taretare, outrigger.

hM'ii 9. to plait; hd'u ha* a, to tie laths in a plat-
form; hd*u mwe*i, to plait a native bag;
hd*u ni*e, to plait a coconut mat; hd*u
qaso, to plait a grass armlet; hd*u tahe,
to make a platform.
hH'Qsi tr.

hli'iwUa-(ku) gerund. Mota vau, Florida
vau, Samoa /o/u.

hflttdinga U., n., a day; suli hdudinga, daily.

hltthea'e adj., used as n., a precipice, rocky
place.

hMnho eel. used in divination; hduho ni wei,
fresh-water eel; hduho i dunga e *ura
ilengit the eel in the fire stood erect;
hduho ni *esi, conger eel.

hMiikiina v. i., to be in opposition to. to oppose,
to revolt: followed by prep, honosi,
against, with suff . pron. as object.
hMiikainanga v. n.

liaakari U., starfish.

havle 1 . V. tr., to nurse, to mind a child, to mind
a house; noko haule, I am minding the
house; noko haulaa mwela, I am minding
the children.

hliila 2. adj., stony, rocky, rough.

hKnUhane a rock from which a voyage starts,
as at Waingile, Ulawa.

hM'iilioka the end purlins of a house.

havliii (ktt) n., the throat.

luraoi U., adv., altogether; precedes the verb;
metathetic upon ahuni.

hinta'aH S., hKaU'e U., once: the final '« may
be the verb sufifix. in which case the
composite may be regarded as a par-
ticiple, cf, pele, pele'i. San Cristoval,
ta*a*i, one.

he 1. exclamation of encouragement; he i*o€,
he'o, bravo. 2. v. tr., to urge, to bid.

he'a, h«*ah«*a 1. to defecate. 2. to rust.

he's, he'ahe'a (continued).

he'aai tr.. to defecate upon, to dirt u[>on.
Possibly metathetic upon Mota tae,
Motu tage, Polynesian tas, kae.

he'a 3. exclamation, with demonstrative na
or ni added; he* a na, S., he* a ni, U., there
you are.

he'ttikenaH U.. exclam.. not used before
women, cf. ha*akena*i.

hahe 1. U., hoi hehe ani dunga, tinder, the accu-
mulation at the outer end of the groove
caused by rubbing two sticks together,
ile dunge.

hahe 2. ef. ha*ahehe.

heheoktt U.. n., a dove. cf. hiroiku.

h«heai U., v. tr., to be obstinate, to dispute.
hehetinga v. n., obstinacy.

heheunge S., v. n., mentioning, speaking.

heho V. i., to accuse a person of causing death
by magic.

hai 1. U.. preceded by locative f, ihei, U.. iiei,
S., where; e kei hei, from whence; nga laa
ni hei, who is this person.

heH 2. cf. hd*i S:hs*i\B often used in Sa'a when
the preceding vowel is neither i nor n.

heko V. i., to be palsied, withered, of limbs.

hele 1. V. i., to hold, to catch hold of, to work
at, to do; hele dora*i, to withhold; h^
dora*ie ha*alunge, to break a promise;
hele dumuli, to repress, to hold down;
hele hu*ihu*inge, unprofitableness; hele
hu*isie nga le*u, to err in anything; hele
huu, to inherit; hele isuli, to do accord-
ing to; hele lahoma*inie, hold it together;
hele langa*a, to hold up conspicuously;
hele lolomi, to keep for oneself; hele
manekosi, to handle gently; hele manire*i,
to live orderly; hele mdnu soda, to hold
level, upright; hele marangana, to take
from amongst; hele marara, to act with
diffidence; hele mduli, to do awkwardly;
hele ngd'ingedi, hold fast; heU *o*i*o*i, to
break; hele ola, to act; hele *onime*i, to
do cleverly; hele ni oraha*a, to do too
much; hele pd*ipesi, to grasp firmly; hele
ponosie wawana, keep his mouth shut;
hele po*opo*oli*ili*i, to do perversely;
hele pupupu'e, to keep intact; hele rodi,
to grip, to hold tight; heU rorodo, to
grant fair weather, to hold off squalls:
a phrase used in incantations; hele
saedami, U., with poss. 3 ana, to have
enough; hele susuli, to inherit; hele
suusuu ana, to do in succession, con-
tinuously; hele iararuru, take hold all
together; hele temweri, to touch; hele
tUinge, to hold in subjection; hde Mo,
to get for nothing; hele wa*ini*ini, to do
diligently; hele walamangp, to perfect;
*osi hele hinoli*a taha ine, how well you
have done it.
hele&ga v. n., action, acts.
helela*(kn) gerund., the doing of.
hsleai tr., to hold, to do. to work at.
h«lMila-(kv) gerund. Wango heresi.

hele 2. Florida tele, magic. M. A., p. 207.

helehele 1. containing no coconut milk (of

HBLEHBLB

32

helehele 1 (continued).

yam puddings), unleavened. Wango
fureherg.

helohela S. 2. of phases of the moon: helehele
mvdfimnet. seventh and eighth days;
heUheU puine, ninth and tenth days.

halo a small fresh-water fish.

heltt (f, hdlu,

hena S. 1. lime, uunu hena, to bum lime. 2. a
lime box for use in chewing betel; hoi
hena Aoto, a gourd used for holding lime.
Lau fena.

henn a fresh-water cockle found in swamps,
shell blue inside, used to scrape the
charred part off sulanga and to hara
with.

heotat V. i.. to slander, to be jealous of, to
accuse of infidelity; heoia*inge, v. n.,
accusation of infidelity; heota'ini, tr.;
heoiaHnie pe*ia olo, to accuse of infidelity
with So-and-so.

hera a court}rard; hera honu, a congregation;
herd usinge^ a market-place. Lau fera,
village; Vaturanga, S. I., vera, Wango
herahora.

hareho S., a hereho. So-and-so: a Wango word
meaning thing.

haro scraped coconut, mu hero; hero *a'aU,
dregs of scraped coconut after straining
the milk.

beroharo v. i., to be mad, out of one's mind.

hate'i hete'i maa, to &x the ejres upon; heU*i
maanga, v. n., a fixing of the eyes.

hatala sasa hetda, thin, lean.

he'n 1. star, AoffA«'«; he*uto*oa*ihe*il%u, planet;
mu he*u sisine, shining stars; mu he*une
solo, the stars of heaven; 'M'lit he*u, a
star. (/. *u'u 2. he*u saisasu, U.,
comet. Mota WIm, Maori wheiu, Bou-
gainville Straits bito,

ba<« 2 cf, M'tt.

Ha*tt*e the hills at the head of the river
Walo'a'a, Little MalaiU.

havlao V. i., to act the wanton. €f. ulao,

htttna ^. hdu 4.

havtaa U., mcra*i heuiaa, to droop (of flowers).

bi tr. suff., lae, laehi,

bl«a U., ^. MV, S.

bide* bidablde v. i., to clap the hands; mao
hidehide, to dance to the clapping of
hands, not holding the Ahui but with
dhulili on the fingers.
bideli tr.. to hit with the hand; hideli to*oni,
to wash clothes by hitting them on a
stone.

bi'a S., bi*a U.. v. i., 1. to be weary; olingada
t hi*e mwaanie rongo; tola hVe, to be
heavy laden. 2. redup. hi*ehi*e, to be
pregnant; e hi'ehi'e ana a ola, con-
ceived by So-and-so; nihehu e hi*ehi*e
ahu, my mother conceived me.
bi'a*i tr., to weigh heavily upon. Wango
M'a, NiuC fUa, wearied; Maori hia,
difficulty.

bibi V. i., to crouch (of dogs), hihi lo'ulohu,
</. *dhihi.

btt> blibli V. tr., to be in a state of perception;

hii, hiihii (continued).

noho hiie sapeku, I feel my body. I am
weU.
blingalnl tr.. to perceive, to apprehend,

to suspect.
biliige'i]iila-(kii) gerund. Lau fii\ Maori
hia, wish; NiuC Jia, Viti via*
biHto*o U. 1 . V. i., to be in pain. cf. sapehVUo'o.

biHto'onga v. n., pain.
biHto'o S.. adv., to excess; e pdine 'oio hVUo'o.

it is far too big. Mota viviig.
bliwalaHm<di v. i., to believe, used with poss. 3.

hilwalalmolinga v. n., belief, faith.
bliwala*imolila-(kii) gerund.
bika U.. hika haio, last stage of the moon.
bikana cf, hike 2.
bika 1. a roll of cane dyed red {hihei ue), used

to make bracelets and anklets or collars,

used also to ornament spears {noma

ddiedi) ; nga hihei adio, a coil of banjran

creeper.
bika (k«) 2. prep., of, among; ngaini hikemiu,

one of you; nou ha' a lio hikena nga da,

I saw nothing; ngUu hiheni, to eat of it.
bika 3. ten, of garfish (mwanole), hike ni i'e.
bikv, bikvbikn v. i., to be entangled, cf.

i&*ihihuhiku.
bikusi tr., to wind around a thing (of

creepers); nga walo e hikusie, tangled

up by a creeper.
bikutalni tr., to wind around, to whip with

string; e hikuie*inia i denumana, he tied

it round his waist.
bllabila v. i., to be wounded,
bill v. tr., to choose for one's own, to desire

and take; io*o hili, with poes. 2. lo'o hilt

nada, they alone.
biUai tr., to pick, to choose, ha'ahili; lio

hiUsi, to choose; lio hilisie huni hu'e i'oe,

choose her for your wife.
blliai]a-(ku) gerund. Lau iaHJUi as to'o

hili; Florida vili, to choose; Samoa JUi;

Niue;S^«; Motu hidi,
bilolo U.. v., to be warped by the sun.
bilabfloaH S., partic, t'o hilukilue*i, to be

estranged,
biaanga U., hara ni mwane, yam pudding used

in sacrifices.
blnaaii (kn) S., flesh, meat. Fl. vinahi.
binil adv.. nearly, almost; precedes the verb.

cf. hiri'i,
binoU*a U., adj., beautiful; 'osi heU hinoli'a

iaha ine, how well you have done it.
binou a fish-hook made of turtle shell, not

barbed: a steel hook; hinou ni *a*ao»

hook for fishing; hinou ni semu, a hook

for deep-sea fish; hinou ni ioU, hook for

deep-sea fishing; wanawana hinou, to

make turtle-shell hooks. Lau >(««».
bino 1. shell of shellfish; hinui hangoda, shell

of haliotis. 2. bark: hinui ue, bark of

cane. Mota vinui, skin. 3. v. tr., to

pull up the eyelid; 'o hinua maamu,

peel your eye!
binvbimi eyelid, hinuhinui ma*a. cf, hiruhiru,
biobio U. 1. mwahiohio, swayed, bent; iata^

33

HO«ITB*I

hlohio (continued).

hiohio, to stagger. 2. twist trade
tobacco.

lii*olo, hi'ohi'olo v. i., to be hungry; olo ana
hi*olo, to be faint from fasting.
U'donga v. n., hunger, famine; hi*ol<mga e
tola, there was a famine; hVolonga e
loUa hUnue, hunger was upon the land.
Florida viUAo, Motu hitolo.

W^nM. U. ghost, spirit. Wango hVona,
Florida vigona. M. A., p. 124.

liiri, hlrihiri 1. v. tr., to lap with a string, to
bind. Mota vir, Viti wiri, Samoa fili-

hiri 2. V. tr., to pay a fine for, to make atone-
ment for a death by violence,
hiritaa v. n., a fine paid; soi hiritaa, to
demand a fine; hirUaana a ola, atone-
ment for So-and-so. Motu kili.

Uiil adv., nearly, almost: precedes the verb.
cf, hini'i.

hlro v. i., to revolve.

Urotl tr. Wango taihiro.

Uroiktt n., a dove. cf. heheoku.

hirori 1. v. i.. to be kinked. 2. v. i., to chatter
indistinctly, cf. rori 4, *irori, kirori.

him 1. V. i., to be busy, engaged, to have a
press of work. ha*ahiru; 'ahe hiru,
hirune *ahe, troublesome waves, boiling
tide-rip; luqeH hiru, to pretend to be
busy,
hinmga'a adj., used as n, hindrance.
hirueH partic, hindered; noko kirue*i lae,

I am hindered from going.
bim'e S., hint'a U., adj.; sae hiru* a, a mind

engaged; 'Ass pouhiru*e, raging sea.
himsi tr., to get in the way of; oku e
hirusia maafia, the oku has got in its
eye: said of the migratory plover
{kdrikerVala) which arrives in November
at time of palolo and is found exhausted
in the gardens and open spaces.

hiru 2. v., to be curly, of hair.

Umhim U. cf. hinuhinu; hiruhiru ana maanaf
his eyelid.

hid U., rdi hist, a stake.

hiso t. V. tr., to pluck leaves, to pull fruit.
2. U., to wean; hisu susu mwaani, to
pluck the breast from.

hitnhisa v. i.. to be out of joint.

hite S.. hits U. 1. v. i., to split, cf. ha'ahite,
wa'ahite; kite dango, S., hita 'at, U., to
split firewood; hile pewa'ali, to cleave;
ape kite, to curtail; kala kite, to cut
nautilus in rectangles with notched
ends; *ini kite, the thumb, used to split
leaves,
hiteli tr., opa kiteli, to cut up an animal;
Po*o kiteli, to cause to burst; toku kiteli,
to cleave asunder; raa kitelia Hdu
Maelo. Wango kita.

hite 2. V. L, to hit, to strike: used with poss. 3,
e kita ana; kite tekala'ini, to strike and
disperse; hit€ meenasi, to strike and
bn»k to pieces; ddu kite, to score a hit.
Wango kita.

hill 1. numeral, seven; ka*akiu, seven times.
Motu Mtu, NiuC fUu, Maori wkitu.

hi'tt, hi'uhi'u 2. v. i., to turn from side to side;
kVuki'u poU, S., kVuki*u kape, U., a
bird, wagtail, fiy-catcher.
hi'tue tr., to alter the position of.
hi'nsi U.. tr., to turn, to alter the nature of,

to change.
hi*ittan« tr.. to change the nature of.
hi'vte'ini tr.. to wag.
hi'iita'i U., partic, changed, altered in
position, moved. Mota vusiag.

hi*iihi«iiia adj., to*o kVukVuU, spotted.

hinne the seventh time.

ho exdam., used in chorus.

hoa, hoahoa 1. v. i., to make an incision in.
hoa'i tr., to cut by making an incision in.
hoaai tr.. to cut marks upon, to carve.

ho'a 2. V. tr.. to take aside, to separate, cf. koka,
ho'alaH partic, used as v. i., to depart, to
leave, cf. *aho'a. Florida voka, sepa-
rate, open; Sesake qqka.

ho'asi V. i.. to use oaths, to swear by, to curse;
ko*asi sisingeH, to clear with an oath,
to adjure; ko*asi sisingana li*oa, to
swear by a spirit,
ho'asinge v. n. Wango koasi, Fagani
fogasi.

hoda, hohoda v. i., to lave the hands or face;
koda maa, to wash the face; koda
maanga, v. n.
hodalitr.
hodaliU-(ku) gerund.

hoa exdam. 1. used to sum up a statement or
argument. 2. expresses disapproba-
tion. 3. caUs the attention.

hoho v. i., to cut undergrowth.

hohola S., Am kokola, to prepare a yam
garden.

hohoro V. i., to barter, to buy, to sell. cf. holt,
kolokolo.
hohoronga v. n.

hohoto n., long wooden mortar used for pound-
ing yams, etc.

hoi 1. art. a. one. used of things spherical in
shape, fruit, eggs, shells; in the plural mu,
mwa precede hoi; probably derives from
koa with genitive i. hoi dango, mu
koi dango, fruit, kidneys; koi kuu, fruit
of the Barringtonia; koi i'a, koi i*e, fish;
koi kue, a hen's egg; koi kuru, a ripe
areca nut; koi lite, a seed; koi madeli, a
fully ripe coconut; koi menu, an egg;
koi seku, v., a gourd. Mota wo, Mala-
gasy voa, fruit.

hoi 2. contraction of kou 2 and locative i. koi
kaka, the downward side, under the
earth; koi saeka, in our hearts.

hoH 3. V. i., to wind. cf. *dliko'i; koH tu, to
roll dyed cane to make kikei ue. Vatur-
anga hoi, to return; Florida go** again;
Wango ahoi, return.

ho4 4. U., V. i., to gather, collect; mwane nga
rurukonileni esi ko'i ka*aro*iau, that no
collection be made in my presence.

hoiliwo S., honliwo U., a hill.

hoHtana v. tr., to alter the nature of. </.
ku'Uana.

ho*iteH partic. changed, altered, cf. ku'iteH,

HOKA

34

hoka 1. to come apart. 2. to have a hole In
the bottom.
hokaii tr., to burst, to split. Florida woka,
to come open; Lau /ofo, to burst open;
Maori kokai, to spread out; NiuC hoka,
to pierce.
hola 1. V. i., to spread.

holati tr. Maori hora, makora, spread out.
hola 2. V. i., to spring forth in a jet. Florida

VOTQ.

hola 3. V. i.. to begin. Aa'oAo/a; kolai na*o, in
former times.

holaH tr.. aUi ni e hoia*U, who began it.

holaH partic, used as adv.. precedes the
verb: formerly, at first, e kola'i ma'o
*oto wau, he first led the way; nou kola*i
*unu€, I first said it.
holaa 1. V. i., to be calm (of the sea) ; aau e rtpo
kosi holaa, when the nuts are ripe it is
calm weather. 2. n.. a calm, hAVholaa;
kolaa totoweru'e, a flat calm. E Holaot
a rock on the west coast of Ulawa near
the south cape.

hoUati tr., to be in calm weather, e kola^
asire; Met. to be in peace.
holi, holiholi v. tr., to barter, to buy. ha'aholi;
hire lo*oana keni mwala ho holU, they
own the girl who is being bought.

holinge v. n., a sale.

holiholinga U.. n., a bought dependent.

holite-(ku), hoUhoUte v. n., price, payment,
holilaHa, the price of it, its being sold.
Mota wol, Malay belt, Malagasy vily,
Bugotu 9oli.
hole V. i., to divide, ha'ahoio. cf. makoio,
maaliholo, maukolo. Mo *ahe, to divide
the waves by incantation and make a
way for a canoe; holo ohm. to divide and
cut short; *ato holo, to cross over the
sea; Idngu holo, to break in two; *o holo
oHu*e qoHgiku hao, thou hast shortened
my days.

h<^oti tr. 1. to cut a piece off. 2. to cross
over; holosie 'asi, to cross the sea.

holoifla (ku) gerund. Wango horo, to
cross; Mota wolos, to cut across; Lau
folo, Makula foro; Florida polo, when,
holoti v. tr., to appoint, to assign.

holota4ni determ.. to make an appoint-
ment, to agree upon, to arrange, cf.
hd'iholoiaH.
haloholo 1. n., interval, part, portion, thing, U.;
holoholo i sapeku, S., my duty; ngaiU
haiohoio, U.. a different thing. 2.
irregular, intermittent; maia'i holoholo,
intermittent fever. 3. U., v., to barter,
honi U., contraction for hou ni, a. one, used of
fish; honi weieu, a bonito; honi mehm, a
mehu fish,
bono, hohono v. i., to shut, to shut a door. ^.
hd*ihonoa*i; hono sikihi, to shut off by
itself; hono sisinge*i, to shut out; € hono
sisingana, shut him in; ape hono, to
prevent; dAu hono, S., to hinder; nam
hono, to be windbound; susu hono, to
heal over (of a sore).

hoaoai v. tr., used as prep., to meet, opposed
to, over against; *aio honosi, to oppose;

(contintied).
knio hanoH, to dose up an apcrtore;
lae honosi, to go and meet; si'o honoti, to
intetnipt with qacstioos; smsu homoti^
to close in on; *nre honosi, to oppose.
hoaataKka) geniiid., protecting, guarding;
e poio homdaka^ our mediator; para
konotaka, defend us.
hoBohoBota v. n., a shutter, an obstacle.
Mota mono, Lau fono, Florida soicfo.
Malagasy /oNo.

hottu 1. n., a turtle; honn i'e, green turtle; homu
hapa, hawksbiU turtle; hapa ni kont^
plates of turtle shell; tarihoa homm, to
watch for turtles on the sands, tf.
karenga. popo mi honu, tailpieoe d
turtle shell used for nose-rings at Santa
Cruz; su'ai honu, a summerset. Nifilole
fonu, Malagasy /sMo.

honu 2. V. i., to be full, ha'ahonu; Aomi
makealo, full to overflow i ng; ere ami
le'u honu, to boast; hera honu, a con-
gregation; i'e honu, a hundred fish-
teeth; homu, homu leu*ae, poro mi toio
e hule *oU> pe'i o^i poo, a catdb, said
when filling a bamboo rata at a spring,
fill, fill quickly, a hill man has arrived
bearing a pig's entrails.
honnlaa v. n., a crowd, a company.
honoloH partic, filled, full. Wango honu,
honurai, Florida vonu, Motu honu.

honu 3. honu oho, to have pulmonary disease.

hoo 1. exdam., of contempt, of disbelief.

ho'o, ho'oho'o 2. V. tr., to bind.
ho'oaga v. n.. a binding.
ho*oai tr.

ho'otila-(kn) gerund.
iho'o n.. a bundle. Wango hoo.

ho'oho'odara n.. a wreath, a crown. ^. dara.

hoowa S., n., morning, between 8 and 10. rf,
hu'o 2; ddngi hoowa, the next day; he
haro hoowa hd'u, as soon as it is U^t.

hora (ku) 1. prep., over against, in order to
get. for; horana i ola, over against such-
and-such a place; horana nga taa, what
for? 2. U., ha'alu horana, to swear by
a thing or person; 3. U., concerning.
Fagani fora, subject to. under the rule
of; horana mwa aloha, under the power
of the chiefs.

horaaH v. tr., to turn round (of objects).
hoiaaHni tr.

horthora'apu'i S., n.. first fruits of nuts and
yams. cf. *apu 2.

hora'i hd*ihora'i, partic, to be daybreak, if.

horo, horohoro v. i., to beat, to strike, to kill;
horo *asi, to destroy utteriy; horo mi
Moio i purine maeia, to kill a man In
order thist men may bathe after cel^
brating a death feast; horo m w am w ahi ,
to kill wantonly; horo suuheHni, to kill
out, to destroy; horo suulana, to klU
in revenge; horo i tola, to kill to avenge;
horo taia'alasi, to kill without mercy;
hire tahoa nana mwaia e hallo.
korongi v. n. murder, killing; horomga

35

HUHUDARO

horo borohoro (continued).

maafala, murder; horonga i ialada,
revenge for them; horonga UUaraaraa^
indiscriminate slaughter.
horotaa v. n., murder, killing.
horol tr., hd*ikoro*u

hota 1. *aehota, talaa^ehoia^ to begin. Mota
wota.

hota 2. hoia ni mwane, all the boys who are
eligible for ka*amalaohu\ e mou ue ena
ngaini ha*a hota ni mwane h'u, € mou
ana WaUha'aodo, it is still in desuetude,
no boys are initiated into bonito catch-
ing, it ceased with Wateha'aodo. M.A.,
p. 234.

bote 1. V. i., to paddle, to row a boat (late use).
2. n.. a paddle, an oar; hoU ani henue, a
paddle; hoi4 ni haka, an oar; hole ni
monaki, bone of the cuttlefish; pdlupelu
ni hoU, handle of the paddle; tarasie *dsi
ana hole, to feather the oar.
hotenga v. n., paddling, rowing; ani

hoienga, by paddling.
hoteU'ini tr., to propel by paddling, by

rowing.
hotela-(]ra) gerund. Mota wose, Motu
hode, Maori hoe.

hoto n., a gourd used to hold lime for betd
chewing; hoi hena hoto^ a lime gourd.

hotohoto 1. to ^ake (of gourd or bottle). 2. to
rattle the spatula in the lime gourd;
e hoiohoio ana lo*u hoi sehu.
hotel, hotohoto<i tr.
hotohoto'i U. V. i., to swing.

hotohotomoUta'a U.. round in shape. ^. moli.

hotol to bore (of beetles or worms in wood);
hou e hoio*ie, it is wormeaten.

hoii 1. article, a; more frequently used in
Ulawa; with genitive ni contracted to
honi, U.; probably connected with hoi 1.
hou aUa, a coconut water-bottle; hou
kao, a bottom plank in a canoe; homi
mehut a mehu fish; hou ntei, an ebb tide;
hou ola, a thing of a round shape; hou
pua, an areca nut; mai nga hou pua, give
an areca nut; houhi, a yam; hou wet, a
bamboo for carnring water; honi wei€u,
a bonito.

hott 2. S., adv., down: not used of direction;
with locative i contracts to hoi. siho
hou, lae hou, to descend; hoi sae, in the
heart; hoi *ano, underground.

hou 3. dry rot, worm in wood, hou e hoio*i€.

hou 4. V. i., to proclaim, to be proclaimed;
e hou lilikeli, hou keli, proclaimed
abroad,
hoala'i partic proclaimed, made public
houle'iai tr., to proclaim, to tell out.
hoiil6'inlla*(ka) gerund. Fagani fou.

hov 5. U., dem. pron., this, these, cf. nihou,
laa hou, vocative youl

houhott n., a bier.

hovlaa v. n., a feast; d&u houlaa, to have a
feast, hou 4.

hoalana n., fame, kingdom; a Wango word
hourana.

Hoidaaga a proper name.

honliwo U., hoQiwo S., n., a hill.

hvata n., a crocodile. Mota vua, crocodile,
puasa lisard; Malagasy buaya, crocodile.

Ha'atoa a rock off Cape Arona. Ulawa.

hndi 1. n., banana; hoi hudi, a banana fruit;
hudi UMuh a variety with erect bunch,
plantain; hudi ni haka, introduced
banana (Musa ca vendishii) ; hungui
hudi, a bunch of bananas; tangisi hudi,
a hand of bananas; pi*e ni hudi, pi*€i
hudi, banana sucker; nga hudi e nuUa
*asi*a, the bananas are rotting away
unpicked. Florida vudi, Viti titii^.
NiuC futi, Motu dui, Malagasy ontsy.

hudi 2. S., first and second days of the moon.

hndihodi n., a stripe, bruise, weal.

hadibudi'e adj., bruised (of the body).

hoe S., hna U. (na) 1. article, a. one, used of
fruits only; huana i*ada, the fruit of
their womb; huani 'ei, U., fruit; huesi
dangp, kidney {si genitive); kau mei nga
hue, give me one. Wango hua, Mota
fooai, fruit; Motu huahua, fruit; Maori
hua, Malay buwah. cf. fu/e. See M. L..
p. 71.

hn'e S., htt'a U. 2. a married woman, wife;
women in general in distinction from
mwane, male; the demonstrative no,
S., ni, U., may be added, a hu'ena,
the woman, to'o hu'e, to be married;
io'o hu'anga, v. n., the being married;
sike hu*e, to divorce a woman; sike
hu'anga, v. n., divorce; e lio hunie huni
hu*e nana, he chooses her for his wife;
lio hilisie huni hu*e i*oe, choose her for
your wife; hu*e hire konie mola, a con-
cubine; ta'e hu*a saena e diena, there's a
good-hearted woman.

htt'e 3. V. tr., to carry suspended from the head
as native women do. Niu6 fua, to
carry on the shoulder; Motu huai, to
carry from the shoulder.

hn'e 4. V. i., to reverse; hu*e asi, to overturn,

to overthrow; hu*e hau, to dig up stones

suitable for use in cooking hdhi; hu*e

Ukda*ini, to uproot and destroy.

hu'eli tr., hu'eii 'ato'ato, to wind rolls of

dyed cane,
hn'ed tr. 1. to reverse; hu'esi *dinge, to
turn the ear to. 2. to open a native
oven.
ha'esiU-(ktt) gerund.

htt'etaHni U., tr., to reverse. NiuS wnt to
uncover; Mota sug, to dig up. uqa. to
lever, vut^uqa-uqa, to dig; Wango huke,
reverse; Florida vuka; Maori hua, lever,
overturn; huke, dig up; Malay bukai,
open; Sulu ukai; Viti tevuka, open.

hoehoe (na) fruit, mu huehuei da, fruits;
huehuana, its fruit.

hoho 1. V. i., to leak, to drip, to spill out.
hnhttsi tr., to pour upon. Wango huku,
spill; Lau fufusi, to sow broadcast.

hnhu 2. V. i., huhu la*ola*o ana wd*i, to be in
contortions with tetanus.

hnha 3. v. i., to pluck, to pick off.

huhodaro U., v. i., to smite, strike, daro.

HTTHUHU

36

hnhona 1. v. tr., to poison fish with pounded
leaves of Barringtonia. 2. n.. dynamite
used to shoot fish with. Mota vun,
to poison fish; Efat^ bnnu, death;
Florida kunu, leaven.

hii]ivere*a adj.. dazzling white, cf, rere'a.

hni 1. n., taro (Caladium esculentum); kui
kerekere, a taro shot with veins; kui ni
maUtwa, giant caladium, the only kind
grown on Ulawa; nisi kui, to pull taro
for eating; poe kui, to pull wild taro;
tapali kui, to cut off the leaves of taro;
k>*oHi kui, to plant taro; 'usu kui, to
grate taro.

hitH 2. S.. adj.. troublous. kVu 2. U.; mu ola
ku'ikn'i, dangers, difiicultles. hard cir-
cumstances,
hnlhttlnge v. n., k^U ku*iku*inge, unprofit-
ableness.
ho'lsi tr., to turn over, to reverse, to turn
toward, to change the nature of, to
harm; d&u ku'isi, to overthrow, to put
to wrong use, to bring to naught; hrU
ku*isie nga le'u, to err in anything.
ha*isila-(ka) gerund,
hn'ltana tr., to change, to alter the nature

of. ^. ko'ilana.
htt*ita4, hiiHhu*ite4 partic, upset, undone,
altered, cf. ko'ite'i; e ka'a me'i ola he
ku*iku*iu'i, unchangeable; satku e ku'i-
te*i, my heart is undone. Mota vusiag.

hoH 3. V. tr., to pour water on. Mota vuvui.

huldada U.. v. i., to be level, smooth, cf. dada.

hii4htt*ite S., a marvel, a wonder, a miracle.

hu'ine'i S., v. tr., to warp, to wrest aside.

hnUa S., hnlahula U., a spring, fountain, kulaa
ni wei, wdi kulakula. cf. kuUkuU,
kure'i. Florida vtiravura, Mota vura,
Viti vure, NiuS. Mao. puna.

hnlaaholaa v. i., to be full (of the moon). Mota
vula, moon; Malagasy w^na.

hole S., hula U., v. i. 1. to arrive; kule dku'i, to
come for; kule odo'i, to arrive and find;
kula talaki, to fail to find a person at
home; 'asi dodo kule i one, deep water
right up to shore; lai kule, to reach; nga
kale e koru kula i sinaka, the shed was
full right up to the door; lai kulaana,
till, until.
hnle'ita-Cku) gerund., up to, reaching to.
ka'akule*ita. sa'a kule'ilana ike saena-
naunge, never coming to wisdom.
huletalni tr., to come and seek for.

hole U. 2. to be in danger, distress; maenga
kulakula, U., danger.
huletl tr., to be dangerously ill; e kulesie,
he has a bad attack.

hole 3. a convolvulus growing on the beaches;
kule e 'a*a kaakia taoka, the convolvulus
had climbed over the canoe house.

httlehula (na, id) 1. n., husks, chaff; kulekuleni,
the chaff.

httlehvla S., luilahiila U. 2. n., water springs,
mu kulekule. cf. kulaa, kure'i. Florida
vure, Viti vure, Mota vura, Dyak pura.

hiilemotaa S. v. i., to be in agony, cf. moiaa.

hvU 1. V. tr., to overtake, to overcome.

hvU (kn) 2. S.. a bed, a mat. kuliie, S.

hiili 3. kmli nume, S., the site of a house, house
plat, ef.talakulu Lau,^ilf /era, a village.

hvIihiiU n.. a black biting ant.

hiiUta (kn) S., a bed, a mat. kuU 2. U.

hulo 1. n., a sponge, a towel (late use).

hvlod tr., to wipe. Samoa sola, Maori koroi,
Viti vulo, to strain.

holo 2. V. i., kulo konasi, to dose up an aperture.

hvliihiltt S., V. i., to make a sacrifirial offering.

hiiliimota*a S., adj., hairy. Mota ului, hair,
Maori kuru.

hmuL U., kune, S.

himata v. n.. stakes driven to moor a canoe,
an anchor (late use).

hone S., htma U. 1. to anchor; liki kune, S.,
riki kuna, U., to loosen mooring-stakes,
to get up anchor. 2. to hang up, to
display; kune kaa, to hang up and dis-
play the bridal moneys at the home of
the bride, to conduct the initial cere-
mony of a wedding.
honesi tr. 1. to anchor. 2. to display
wedding moneys. Wango kuna, Maori
punga, anchor.

hnne S. 3. a snare, a gin. lolokuna, U. Most
kune, to set a trap; toli kune, to lay a
snare. Wango kuna,

huni (Kn) S. 1. dative preposition, for, to; kuni
lu*ue mo ola ineu, to remove my goods;
kuni lengu ka*aodokie *aeka, to guide
our feet; ddu toli kuni, to submit to, to
be subject to; e kai lalamoa e mae kunia
Qai, four dead men for Qai to pay a fine
for; e ka*a kunie ike maenga, not unto
death; kire kusingi'i kunieu, I have
become accustomed to it; lae kuni'i, go
to fetch them; le*u noko lae kunie, the
place whither I go; lio kilisie kuni ku*€
i*oe, choose her for your wife; lio kuni,
to choose; e lio kunie kuni ku*e nana, he
chose her for his wife; lio kuni maa, to
exercise partiality; mdsi kuni, to commit
adultery with; qdlu kuni, to conceive
by a person; ke sdune kuni ke mae, to be
well mashed. Mota mun, Ulawa muni.
2. adv., in order that. ffiMif t , U. : also as
an optative; kuni ke lae mai, that he
may come,
hunie adv., in order that; kunie esi kule
*ulu *ie, that he should be bom blind
thus. Wango ^Mfii . ka'ikuni.

huni (ka) 3. U., skin disease, ringworm; kuniku,
my ringworm,
hunila, adj.. suffering from ringworm.
NiuC matafune.

huni 4. kd'ikuni, U.. kOrikuni, S.. v. tr.. to
desire, to wish for.

hunu 1. V. tr., to cut up an animal; kunu poo,
to butcher a pig; kira kunu poo mala
ideni, tomorrow they kill the pigs.
Malagasy vono, to kill; Borneo Imuoh.

hunu 2. S., n., a mast.

hunn, huhunu 3. v. i., to poison fish with
Barringtonia leaves.

hunu 4. dio kunu, to swoop (of pigeons); dio
kunu ni sae, to be faint-hearted, to faint.

37

HIT UTALA

hmigao-dra) n., brother-in-law. sister-in-law,
mwane or keni added for distinction;
hungaona, used with to ha*i or ro ma:
ro ha*i hungaana, U.. ro ma hungaona, S.,
brothers-in-lawp sisters-in-law. Wango
hungOf Lau fungo» Maori hunaonga.
himge S.« bunga U., many, enough, too much,
to abound. ha*ahunge, mu dinge hunge,
many days.
himgehiuiga'a adv.. frequently. Wango
huHga, Maori hunga, a company.
himgehtuifa'a S.. adj.. used as noun, hillock.

Wango hungahunga.
himgu, hangiihimgii 1. to bear fruit. 2. n., a
bunch of fruit; hungui hudi, a bunch of
bananas,
hunguha U.. v. n., a fruiting.
hungimge S., v. n.. a fruiting; kire ko
mwamwasu*i eni hungunge, become
unfruitful.
hungiita U., v. n.. a bunch; hungutani pua,
a bunch of areca nuts. Viti bunua, a
bunch of nuts; Florida vungu, Mota
vung, Samoa punupunu, a cluster of
parasitical plants; Borneo bunga, flower,
hu'o 1. n.. fishing-net. seine; hu*o ni moke, a
casting net; 'aio hu*o, to set a net; *aio
hu'oHga, a plot; e soda ana hu'o, he fell
into the net; tola hu*o, to set a snare for;
wd*i haahie ana hu'o, to draw a net
about. Florida vugo, Motu huo, kan-
garoo net.
i:'o 2. ha'ahu'o, to come early in the morning.
mahu'ohu'o, dawn, early morning.
hu'oti Hu'oriara, a proper name, Early-afoot.
hure S., v. i.. mwaa e hure ana, he was eaten of

l» worms.
hurel, hurelhureH 1. v. i.. to gush out. cf.
hulaa, huUhuU 2. e hure'i ta*a ana hdu,
to gush forth from the rock. Mota vura,
hure'i 2. hure'i lade, name of a month. July,
huresoso n., white shell discs used in ornamen-
tation with haa and malo, used also to
finish off the ends of strings of money,
htiri V. tr., to cut in sections; malo hurt, black
bugles cut from a creeper and used in
ornament. Florida vuri,
huzihiiri U., to wallow, of a pig.
huro, mahnro adj., disturbed, upset in mind.
hnroai tr.. to upset the mind, to disturb, to
whirl about as surf; *ahe ko hurosieu, the
stream whirls me about.
haroaUa-Ckn) gerund.
hum, hvmhiini v. i., to run; hum ni 'elinge, to
race; huruhuru meumeurVe, to be living.
htsmnge v. n., running; hAli ana hurunge,

foot racing; ohoa hurunge, to race,
hnnmge'iai tr., to run and carry.
hamlaa v. n., a messenger.
hnruhuro a bridge, a tree fallen over a stream,

ladder.
hutfngi v. tr., to make accustomed; kire hu^
singi'i hunieu, I have become accus-
tomed to it.

hute, hutehute S. , huta U., to be bom. ha'ahuU.
e hute talahie qongine, bom out of due
time; hunie est hide *ulu* ie, that he
should be bom blind thus,
hatanga v. n., birth.
htttaa» hutelta v. n.. generation, birth.
hutela-(ktt) gerund., being born, birth.
Mota vfola; Niu€ mafuta, emerge.

hato 1. cuscus. phalanger. M. A., p. 17.
Wango hulo.

huto 2. V. i., to swarm (of ants. etc.).

hotohuto (na) 1. froth, foam. Wango huUy-
huto, Viti vuto,

hittohttto 2. name of a month, June.

huu 1. n., a group, a bunch, with genitive t;
huui *ae, excrement; huui alaha, a chiefly
family; huui edi, a bunch of leaves used
as a tabu sign; huui eu, a stool of bam-
boos; huu ni kana, a group of singers;
huui keu, branching coral; huui lue,
shoulder of pork; huui lume, huu lume,
collection of houses, village; Aiiui sata,
the heel; huui tomwaso, a thicket of
tomwaso bushes. Viti vutu, plenty of;
Maori pu, tribe, bunch.

hou 2. adj.. real, permanent, ha'ahuu'e.
awala *oto huu, U., awala ha*ahuu, S.. a
full ten; hdniu huu, solid land, dry land,
heritage; hele huu, to inherit; i'o huu, to
abide forever; mwado huu, the earth;
'oni huu *oto ana, to be settled therein;
'oto huu, U.. forever; te*ete*e huu, forever,
abidmg. for good, finally. Wango
huuna, real; Samoa ftUu, to be a long
time; Mota tur, real; Viti vu, bottom,
root; NiuS fu, trunk, cause; Florida
fniku, real.

huu 3. v. i., to be sad; sae huu, to grieve; sae

huunge, grief. Viti ku, to be angry;

Motu hu, to look angry,
htttt 4. n.. a littoral tree (Barringtonia speciosa) ;

hoi huu, its fruit; huhunu, roma, to

stupefy fish therewith. Mota vtU,

Viti vuiu.
ho'u 5. a cough, to cough. Mota vur, Viti vu,

Motu hua.
hnohtttt to gush forth in a jet; wdi e huuhuu

*oto, the water spurted out; huuna wHi,

U., fountain head. Bugotu fuuftUu, a

spring,
httullttme, hmiliune S., a village, i/. nume,

uunu tara*a huuilume, bum up the

village.
hoida*ini v. tr., to chop down, to fell a tree;

*aihu, U., uprooted,
hnnraro n., rainbow: if pointed at (usu'i) bad

_ luck results.
hTusi, hu'uhnHial v. tr., to detach *6ha from

a tree, to pluck leaves, tf. *u*usi,

Wango huusi,
ho'ntala U. v. i., to miss the mark, to fail, to

be in vain, tola*

38

i 1. prep., locative; always used before names
of places, also with adverbs of time and
direction; iiei, where; i Sa'a, i hoowa,
in the morning; f ngcniie, when, with a
preceding « or o there is a contraction
to t: noko kd haka, I go abroad; tot Sa'a,
up at Sa'a; kai Malau, down at Malau;
ladat i rodot go until nightf alL Forms
the compound prepositions ilengi on;
tfulf, according to. Used in phrases.
i ladoihaana, in a line with; • la4lokaana,
thereby; • nooruhaana, relying on,
because of. Florida t. Vitl t.

i 2. prep., genitive, a variant of ni; joined In
pronunciation to the preceding word:
poioi haa, a strand of shell money;
f«rM CM. a stalk of bamboo. Used to
express purpose: noho lai leesU, I go to
see it. Expresses condition? « lai *ada,
it is bad; « la *oio i diana, it is good.
Used of continued action: koi i*a e lat
mai % rarada i saint one, the fish came
and grounded on the beach. Used
after iala'ae, to begin: « iala*ai 'ada^
it is beginning to spoil. Follows ort^
to fail: mdu orei lae, we almost went.
Bugotu f . Lau t.

1 3. instrumental prefix forming noun from
verb: ikeu* a crook; idenu^ a baler;
idemn, a lime spatula, from kdu, dHnu,
ddfiitt. Mota *. 4; Vlti i\ Motu t. in
tfiM, a bundle; g»»a. to wrap; ikoko, a
nail; kokoa, to nail.

i 4. prefix to personal and demonstrative pn^
nouns: ineu, i*oe, ing4*ie, inihon. Mota
f in inau; Maori • in ihoe.

1 5. U.. euphonic: sdisemu, reduplicated from
jAffiM, saisesu from sdsu, daidenu from

H 6. verbal suffix, horo koro*i: forms a parti-
ciple, PeU pde*i. Viti f, Maori • {poo,
Pao%), Florida gt.

H 7. suffixed to poss.. 1. sing. 1 and 2 and dual,
used of many things for one person to
eat, rnooia dku'i; suffixed to poss. 2 and
used of many things designed for one
person; ndku% for me. Florida gi, Lau
g>, plural sign.

H 8. a suffix denoting plurality, used of things
only; la$ kuni*i^ go fetch them; dolali'i,
among them. '« 7.

H 9. suffixed to pers. pron.. dual 1 and 2 exd.
iemere'i, ikara'i, U., hunvreru^i,

i«a U. </. *V, S.

'I'aa V. i., to be lost, missing. 'ai*aa,

i'ami U.. pers. pron., plur. 1 exd.: we, ours;
whni used as subject is followed by *ami,
Lau igami, Mota ikamam,

i'amn U. pers. pron., plur. 2 : you, yours; more
general in application than Vemdu;
when used as subject is followed by *amu,

IHmo adv., on the ground, down; mai f'ano, on
the earth; with demonstrative na added,
Vanona, in that soil; of direction, west;
kaka e lai qdi 'ano, the ship went west.

I'av S., exdam. of assent.

Ida U. ida 'afala, a length of money from the
finger tips to the opposite shoulder, a
yard and a quarter.

idams n., a lime spatula, ddmu. idemu ni
loo, a lime spatula used as a dagger on
a peison who is scared {loo) and hard
to get near but who is enticed by the
offer of areca nut; idemu ke snu i kaUma,
the spatula shall pierce his gums.

idaai U. tomorrow; kira kunu poo mala ideni^
tomor r ow they kifl the pigs.

idann n., a canoe baler, dflait.

idangi S.. tomorrow. dJhtgi 1.

idv« idvidn 1. V. i.. to count; iduidu nume, to

gadabout (Florida i^foif); iduidumtti

*ei, U., jumped about on the fir e w ood.

Idwni tr.. idumia one, countless (count

the sand).
Mnmila-Kka) gerund.

idnidwige v. n., numbering, number.
Florida ida.

id«« Ididdn 2. to be weary of a thing, to be ill
at ease. Florida idn,

ida 3. n.. a drilL

idalaiai v. tr.. to move the position of a thing,
to ease a burden.

la 1. S., demonstrative pnm., this, these; fol-
lows the noun; adverbially used as here,
now. thus; knma esi knU *uiu *i€, that
he d&ould be bom blind thus; ingi'ia
'ie, this is he; makolo *ie, now; ola'is,
this thing; *oio 'm, now; 'oio mola 'is,
just now. Mota io, Bintulu to.

i'a S. IHi U. 2. a fish, a fish (porpoise) tooth; M
$*#, a fish: ma Ts. mma i'a, plural; used
metaphorically in Ulawa as an excla-
mation of astonishment at stse. a big
thing, a whopperl nga $'«. 100 por-
poise teeth on a cord forming a unit
of money; koi i'a € Uu mai i rwrada i
9aim one, the fish came and grounded
on the beach; i*« kdu, a stone fish; i'#
JbofMft, 100 fish teeth; i^e 'fiumi, a fbh
caught with a scoop net; i*e ni sane,
sea-bream {note); i'e ni ioli, deep-sea
fish; Am ni i*e, honorific phrase of San
CristovaL ff. ka'adlUti. konu tV, a
green turtle; nikoi r<. porpoise teeth;
Palapala ni Ta. a nose ornament of
shell cut in the form of a frigate-bird;
qd'ni i^t 4 porpoise teeth; to*o, io'oami
i*e, 1,000 fish teeth; waaufoatani i*a,
pieces of fish. Mota iga, Maori ika.

He S. ^ U. (kn) 3. beUy, womb. *iana, S.. 'iena,
U., *iafia € ma^, pregnant; *ieku e too,
I am sick at the stomach. Mota lioao,
pregnant; Bugotu fio, Maori Ha, Malay
tia.

lalola V. i., to have the head thrown back.

H'sli 1. V. tr., to plait. 2. n.. a rope; radu
moumousie mu H*eU, to break the rope in
pieces. Lau ifioii. Mota tali, Maori tori,

i'emelo pers. pron.. plur. 1, exd.; we. our; more
restricted in meaning than Vemu

i'smarst i*amaraH pers. pron., dual 2. exd.;
we two, our; when used as subject is
followed by mere or mereH respectivdy;
6la i'emere'i, a thing belonging to us two.

39

IKURS

i*MB«nit i'eineni't S., tune as Vemur:
i'eflii pen. pron., plur. 1. exd.; we, our; more

geneial in mfiming than i'^mdu; when

used as subject is followed by *emi.
i'eoiiit U.. Mwado*a dialect for i'amu,
i'emv U.. Mwado'a dialect for i'amu,
Henini demonstrative pron., this; poro 'ieHtni,

this man; adverb now, *oio mola *Umni,

Just now.
i epi (nft) beside (of things only); i epine ora,

i epin€ hdo, i epiefi ana, contiguous to.

Maori apUi, Malay apU, to place side

by side,
ihaha 1. adv., below, underneath; nUU ihaha,

on earth. 2. prep, with sufBxed pro-
noun iku); ihakamu, underneath you;

ihakana saio, under the sky. Lau

fafa. haha.
ihaho 1. adv., over, above; ihngi ihako, in the

sky above. 2. prep., with suffixed

pronoun (Ati); ikahomu, above you,

over your head, haho,
ihe-(ktt) brother-in-law, sister-in-law; in Ulawa

the perKMial article coalesces, aikeku,
ihana ro mwaihana, S., ro aihana, U., two

brothers-in-law or sisters-in-law. Motu

ihanot brother-in-law.
Ihei 1. intenog. adv., where. UH, S. 2.

interrog. pron., which, what, whether,

of two; Va sore ngdu ihei, what will

you eat; with article ngaikei, mwaihei,

who. Mota o-vM.
ihei 3. S., the monitor Usaxd (Varanus indlcus).
iho'o n., a bundle; with genitive i, iho*oi da, a

bundle of goods. ho*o,
ihu (ko) 1. n., hair, feather; with genitive u

waraihu, U. ihui menu, birds' feathers;

ikui qe'u, hair of the head; *oU> hou'e

ikune, shave his head ck)se. Vatur-

anga ivu, Motu kui.
Ihn 2. V. i.. to cut, to chop down; iku uweha, to

cut bamboos for fishing-poles.
HH 1. V. tr., to judge.
H*inge V. n., judgment.
HHIa-(kii) gerund.
n 2. a bird, a swift; Tt ko he'isu'u, the swift

flits from tree to tree; qaaieru a 'i'i, a

large snail.
HI 3. ka'aH'i, to set a high price.
H*fle<i partic, loud, resounding; ngara *i*ik% to

cry aloud.
H^oha U., to hesitate.
4*ite 1. n., a round basket plaited of a coconut

leaf and used for holding yams.
H4te 2. V. tr., to find fault with, to censure.
HHteH tr., 'i*iu*i wala, to strive about

words; v. n., *i*ii€*i walanga, strife

about words.
H'HeHnltr.

Hltelnila-Oni) gerund.
ika'elii U., peis. pron., plural 1. ind.: we, outb;

move restricted in meaning than iki*a;

^dien used as subject is followed by

ka*du. Wango igau.
ikao %, the bottom, at the bottom, kao, 2.

with suffixed pronoun (ku), under a

person, U., under a thing.

iktra» ikaraH U., pers. pron., dual 1. incl.: we
two, ours; when used as subject is fol-
lowed by kara or kara*i, Mota ikara

ike S., negative particle following closely the
negatives ka*a and sa'a; when preceding
word ends in a, ike is joined in pro-
nunciation, e ka'a olaike, there is
nothing at all; e ka'a hunie ike
maenga, not unto death; e ka*a wala-
*anga ike nga *inoni, it is not the voice
of a man; mm ka'a manata*ie ike, I do
not know; sa*a kule'iiana ike saena-
naunge, never coming to wisdom.
ikeke 1. Ulawa, Qaloto, adv., beside, outside,
used of persons and tilings; kira konia
ikeke, they nfcommunirated him; paro
i keke, alongside. 2. with suffixed pro>
noun iku), prep., beside, alongside, of
motion toward, to; i kekemu, U., * siemu,
S., to you; i kekena tola, beside the path.
3. adv., behind; lio ikeke, look behind.
Lau gegs.
Ikeram'e S., IklramH U., pers. pron., dual 3.
they two, thehr; when used as subject
is followed by kereru'e or kireru'i,
ikeo S., ikau U., n., a stick with a hook, a crook
with which to twitdi off fruit and leaves.
kdu 1.
*lki,^ki^kil. to knock with the knuckles. 2.to
beat a wooden drum with a spathe of
sago palm.
ikiaga v. n.
•iUngi tr.

1klla-(ktt) gerund. Fk>rida gidigidi, Mota

ningi,

iki'a S., Ud'a U., pers. pron., plural 1. ind.: we,

ours; more general in meaning than

flwlii, etc; whtn used as subject is

followed by ki'e or ki'a. Florida igUa.

ikira'elii pers. pron. plural 3, they, theirs; more

restricted in meaning than ikire; when

used as subject is followed by kira'du,

iUre S., ikira U., pers. pron., plural 3: they,

theirs; used also as meaning "and the";

kdkira diana ikire nga muini lo*u ka'a

diana, on the good and the bad. Araga

ikera.

ikireH U., as ikira, but not used of persons;

ihire*ini, those are they.
iUrenl U., as ikkra, but not used of persons.
ikireru'e S., pers. pron., dual 3, they two,
theha; iR^ien used as subject is followed
by kireru*e,
Ikdlo S., pers. pron., plural 1, ind.: we. ours;
when used as subject is followed by holu.
ikoro, ikorol U., pers. pron., dual 3, they two,
theirs; when used as subject is followed
by koro, koro'i.
ikole 1. ashore; Ul'i hule, on the shore; lai kule,

to go up ashore,
ikule 2. V. i., to hiccou^
ikole'i partic, disturbed in mind; saena e

ikule'i, his mind was upset,
ikore S., pers. pron., dual 1, ind.: we two, ours;
wlien used as subject is followed by
kure.

I LADOHAAHA

40

i UdoluMna S., thereby, cf, lado.

i Udo'ihaaBA S., joining onto it. in a line with.
^. lado,

UalA V. L, to take an augury, to test a path by
udng dracaena leaf (*apai dili) in
hdhuto'o. Lau inala, Wango irara, to
peroeive.

ilalo adv.. within, inside; in Ulawa ku is suf-
fixed, but for reasons of delicacy Sa'a
prefere the poss. 3. ilalo aku. paro ilalo,
on the inside; ilalo ana mu 'inoni, in

ila'o adv., in. inside; used also with suffixed
pronoun na, ni; Ua'o t'oto, in the canoe;
paro i la*ona, U., on the inside; ila^oni,
plural, used of things only; ila*ona
ma*usu, within the forest. la*o 3.

ile 1. V. L. to produce fire by rubbing a stick
in a groove; iU dunge, a stick of hard-
wood is rubbed quickly to and fro in a
groove made in a piece of soft wood,
dust accumulates at the outer end of
the groove and soon begins to smoulder,
the dust is transferred to a piece of
coconut husk which serves as tinder
(hehe),

ila 2. U.. n.. one. thing or person; the articles
nga and mwa are prefixed and coalesce.
ngailtt nga mvtaile; ile inau, my one,
mine; ile keni, female; ile mwane, male;
ile nriUthat what one; mwanganga ni ile,
a few persons; ta*e 'enila ile, just a few.

ile 3. n., Pandanus odoratissimus: hoi *ile, its
fruit. Mota gire.

*Ue 4. stone axe. Lau kila, Florida kila, Motu
ilot Alu, Shortland Islands, kilifela, flint.

Uehn U.. adv., here; paro ilehut over here;
with demonstrative na, fit, added; ile-
huna, ilehuni, there, in that place.
Idhu 4.

ils 6 ilele malo, to gasp, to pant.

ilali U.. V. tr.. to distinguish.

ttanlmwa'e, ileilenimwa'e v. 1., to rejoice.
ilanimwa*enga v. n.. joy. mwa'e 1.

Uengi 1. adv.. above, on top. sky, heaven,
ashore. Inland; ilengi ihaho^ in the sky
above. 2. prep, with suffixed pronoun
{ku)\ ilengiku, on me; e loho ilengine,
he swooped down on it; ta*e iUngine,
mount up on it.

Ue*u S. adv.. here; with demonstrative na
added: mai ile*u, this way; ho nisi *oio
ile*n, this is the boundary; ile*une, there;
hd*i le'une, down there. U*u.

ili 1. adv., precedes verb; merely, only, barely:
uri 'o ka*a *am'amasie kalemu ana *o
ili ia'e, are you not sorry for your son
in that you alone are mounted?

ili 2. V. tr.. ili mangq, to draw in the breath.

ill 3. n., swordfish: an imitation is made of wood
and is used as a receptacle for dead
bodies. M. A., p. 261.

UIsi S., V. tr.. to choose. Wango irisi.

'Uiti'e S.. adj.. separated; 'ilisi'e 'omu, ye by
yourselves.

Uoilo'a n., a large red parrot, the female of *a*a.
New Guinea electus.

ilolo 1. n.. a bowstring. Uolo ni pesi. 2. U.«

v. tr.. to string a bow. kira itolo pUsi.
ila U., v. i.. to sup; «7it piinga, to sup yam soup.

cf. tllM.

flvhl tr.
imaa n.. turtle-shell barb tied on the bonito

hook (pasa). maa.
i maana prep., on aooount of; i maana nga ia'a,

wherefore, maa.
Ime n., the bears-paw dam (Chama sp.) ; la*o,
a frontlet carved therefrom; *ima awa,
U., yellow in color; *ima erete'a, U.,
white clam; 'ima pulu, U.. dark in
color; *ima susu, U.. a clam difficult to
detach; *ima snsnlu, U.. a dam easily
detached. Mota gtma, Maori kima.
imiimi n., a root; with suffixed pronoun na, ni,

imiimine dango, root of a tree.
ina'o adv.. before, formerly; *eta ima'o, to be
in the lead: with *ato 1., *oio ina*o, for-
merly; with suffixed pronoun. ina*oku,
before me; ina'ona mn maholo, in former
times, na'o.
ine 1. V. i., to take root (of yams, etc.); esi kde

ine, it has just taloen root,
ina 2. U., demonstrative pronoun, that; mwai
lehu ine, those places; *osi Jkd* hinoU'a
taha ine, how well you have done it.
Bintulu ina.
inehuH v. tr.. to wrap up a parcel in leaves, to

wrap up food in leaves for the oven,
inemae 1. v. i.. to be an orphan, to be bereft
of parents. 2. n.. an orphan. Lau
inemae. ine 1.
inemauri 1. v. 1., to rule, to govern. 2. n.. a

ruler, ine 1.
instt S., inau U.. pers. pron.. sing. 1. 1: used as
subject only and followed by iioa, S..
and nan, U.; iU inau, my one. mine;
Mota inau, Florida inau,
ini 1. S.. n.. a person, one (thing); nga and mu
may be prefixed : ngaini, muini; ini ineu,
my one; tut mwane, male; tut keni,
female; ini itei, what one; tut ni Sa*a,
the Sa*a man; e ro ini, two things; tut
qaarongoisuli e ka*a Uuia'ana ini ka'au"
suli, the disdple is not above his master;
figa hai ini, a length of bamboo; ngatiit
ia*ane, yes. there is one; mittiit ineu, my
ones; mufamwangaini, some odd ones,
one here and there,
ini 2. n., a sore under the foot, pitted, with hard

coating,
ini 3. U. (Su'uholo dialect), demonstrative
pron. follows noun. that. Florida ini,
Malay tut.
Ini 4. U.. prefix to pronouns, inikou, iniparo,

iniwau. cf. ni 4.
4ni 5. V. tr.. to pinch, to pluck leaves, to crop
with the fingers; 'tnt reko, to pluck
hibiscus; 'tfit kite, thumb, used for
pinching off leaves, etc Mota gift,'
Mao. kini, pinch; Motu gtitt. thorn.
inis-(kn) U.. sister, brother; the personal
axtide coalesces. atitteJbi. Florida Itno,
mother,
inlhoo U., demonstrative pron. this, these;

41

IPE

inUiOtt (continued).

adv.* here; *olo inihau, now; 'oto mola
inihout just now.

*i]ii*i]iiqttA U.t adj., that has not had 3'oung
(of animate).

iaiparo U.. demonstrative pron., that, those;
adv.. there.

Inmii n.. man, human being, ha'a'inoni.
ro Hnoni, voc.. you two (of husband
and wife); ro *in<mi ineu, my parents;
dsu nani Hnoni, of work not faithfully
done; t'e Hnoni, a fuh caught with kdlu;
i'emi mu m€*i *in<mi, we humble people;
iUUo ana mu Hnoni, in man; e ka*a
walana ike nga Hnoni, it is not the
voice of a man; fUHkiH ni Hnoni, a
dwarf; lUnleunitana nga Hnoni, orna-
ments of men; manalana mu Hnoni, mu
manataH Hnoni, the nature of men;
f maiolai Hnoni, among men; ngeiui
Hnoni, what man? oku Hnoni ohu sae,
many men, many minds; qH'uli Hnoni,
the name of a certain spear, man's head;
a qd'uqesu Hnoni, a policeman; qera-
qeraha ana mu Hnoni, exceeding many
people; ride ni Hnoni, a dwarf; riHriH ni
Hnoni, a dwarf, a great number of men;
ta*ena nga Hnoni, every man; la'ewau
mu Hnoni, the common people. Wango
noni, Florida Hnoni.
<inoiiinga U., v. n., to*o Hnoninga, possessing
friends.

iaiwait U., demonstrative pron., that; adv.,
there.

ian, inninu 1. to drink; inu *aela, not potable;
taleH inu mola'a, just drink without
price. 2. to be drowned.
Iniinge v. n., drinking,
inuhi tr., haHnuhi, to give to drink.
iniibila-(ku) gerund. Mota un, Motu inua,
Maori inu, Malay minum,

i nomhaana S., trusting in, relying on, through.

i mmnhaaiia S., through, by, because of.

i Bganit* S., i ngenita U., adv., when; *oio i
nganiie, when. Mota a ngaisa.

ingele, ingeH S., inge'ia U.. pers. pron., sing. 3;
he, she, it, his, her, its; used as subject
only and followed by e, Mota ineia,
Florida anggaia,

ingeHani U., as inge'ia.

*i«o, H«o«i*o 1. V. i., to sit, to live, to dwell, to
be; H*o hiluhilueH, estranged; H*o huu,
abide forever; To kd*u, wait, to stay a
while; H'o kioniU}*o, rest assured; H'o
loosi, to await; *oke H'o k&*u loosieu,
wait a while for me; mwala ko H*o loosi
hire to*oana keni mwala ko holie, the
party waiting, they own the girl who
is being bought in marriage; H*o mama-
nuio'o, to be at peace; H*o mamaware, to
be in safety; H*o manireH, to live
orderiy ; H'o peH roe, the mourning before
burial; H*o peH suke, sat and begged;
H*o rd*ireki, stay under the lee; H*o
raqasi, to sojourn; H*o rarao, to be stuck
tight; H*o rduieH, humble; e To siS'
ingeku, stood in front of me; hai dango

*3<

1*0, 'i'DYo 1 (continued).

e H*o sisingeH, the tree stood over
against; H*o susu, to continue in one
stay; H'o suuH, to be present with; e 'i'o
tohune, he was his own master; *i'o tali,
to be quiescent; *i*o to'o, to be fixed.
*i*onga V. n., way or manner of life; rara-
maanga ana 'i'onga tata'ala, rebuking be-
cause of evil wajrs.
H*ola-(ka) gerund., behavior.
H*oal tr., to dwell in (country), ka'a'i'osi.
H*ota4 V. i.. to set about a thing; 'i'ota'i
rongo keninga, to set about inquiring
for girte as wives.
4<ota*lni tr.. to set about doing. VitI tiko.

'i'o 2. U., exclam., who can say, I don't know.

i'oe pers. pron., sing. 2. thou, thine; when used
as subject is followed by *o. Florida
igoe, Maori ikoe,

4*oha, H*o*i'o]ia v. n., station, place; with
suffixed pronoun (ku), 'i'ohana, his
place.

4ola 1. canoe, 'iola 'ato'ato, a new canoe on a
money-seeking voyage; 'iola e qa'a *olo,
the canoe is cracked; 'iola la*o, canoe
inlaid with la'o; 'tola raku, canoe seating
four; 'iola sarasara, bonito canoe, inlaid
with reoreo; ddu 'iola, to build a canoe;
Udu 'iolanga, v. n., canoe building: the
canoes are all plank built and have no
outriggers; 'ahe e lomosie 'iola, the surf
buffeted the canoe; ana rao 'iola i qalo-
qalo, on the right side of the ship; ila'o
'iola, in the canoe; ma'aku mala 'iola,
to fast, lit., to sleep canoe fashion; moro
tOria paro 'iola i 'esi, you have launched
the canoe yonder into the sea; ni'i 'ae
la'o 'iola, to board a canoe; ro 'iola ko
sama, the two canoes keep abreast; loli
'iola, to steer for. to lay a canoe on her
course. 2. metaphorically, a village;
'iola 'i'emelu, our village, ff. na'oni^ola,
purini'ola. 3. a tree used to make
planks for canoes. Lau ola, Florida
tiola, Wango ora,

iolaha v. i., to be disturbed in mind, excited.

i*omola pers. pron., plural 2, you, yours; more
restricted in meaning than i'omu; when
used as subject is followed by molu,

i'omoro, i'omorol pers. pron.. dual 2, you two,
yours; when used as subject is followed
by moro, moro'i.

i'oiiiom*e S., pers. pron., dual 2, you two.
srours; when used as subject is followed
by 'omoru'e.

i'omo pers. pron., plural 2, you, yours: more
general in meaning than i'omohi; when
used as subject te followed by 'omu,
i'amu, U. Lau igamu.

ioo v. i., to curdle, of coconut milk brought to
the boil; the mUk is boiled in the half
shell (tetft) placed on embers.

ioqo V. i.. to be dense (of smoke).

ioroha U., prep., underneath; mai iorohana, on
the earth.

ipata S., hole where pigs wallow, ufieia, U.

ipa V. i.. to wallow (of pigs), iataipeipe.

IPSIPA

42

ifdya U.. pipe (Engiith).
i9«ln S.. ^« U.. ip«ip«la v. L, to fight, to
make war; ipdu €mi A«», to fight with

ipeloaga v. n.. fighting,
ipo^'ala U.. adj.. muddy. 'aU 8.
ipB n.. a pool of water in a hole in a tree,
ipari adv.. behind; prep.. ¥dth snffized pron.

ik») after; i pwiiu mahoiot after the

time, fwri,
Iqa 1. a lake. 2. calm water inside a reef.

neren€r€ ni iqe kittiwake of the lagoon.
SraU n. 1. tongs of bamboo for removing hot

stones from the fire in cooking. 2. a

constellation, the Southern Triangle.

raki,
iranae S.. prep., beside, used of things; ireuiu

wdi, beside the water.
Wo n.. porpoise; porpoises are hunted and

the teeth (nihoi i'e) form one of the

currencies oif the Solomons. Lau kirVo,

Mota Hr»fo.
'iro, ^roHro 1. to look at. to look for. to see; 'iro

keni, to look for a wife. Mota Itro.
*iro 2. *iro ni sato, drought.
•Iro 3. the district on the hills on the west side

of Mara Masiki Channel,
irolfo 1. a pool among rocks used as a mirror.

2. a glass (late use). Mota Uronin,
HfolroaH'e S.. adj.. reflecting like a mirror.

glassy.
Irori n.. a parrot (Lorius cardinalis). cf.

hkori, kirori, iaka 'iron, proverbially,

of confusion of voices.
Hrvt Hntim 1. v. i., to blow (of wind). 2. n..

wind.
Hmhi V. tr., to blow on (of wind). Florida

giirt.
i Baa-(ktt) S.. not used in sing. 1 and 2. where

the form i sie ib used instead; at the

house of. with, to; s saada'iiu, at their

house, at home.
isi» isiisi 1. to curse, to use defiling words about.
iiiiBlnge v. n.. cursing.
l8ila-(ku) gerund,
isi 2. iW to'a. S.. isi taka, U.. to come out, to

emerge,
isita'anga* isltshanga v. n.. ha'aisita-

'anga'ini.
id 3. ha'aisi, adv.. at alL
i da*(ktt) at the house of. with, to. cf, i saa,

nou Uu mai i siemu, I have oome to you.
i siaaha, i sihsna, S., adv.. outside the house,
isipori V. i.. to be last.
isuisu 1., V. i., to run along on top of a wave

(of a canoe). ^, tciaisuisu.
isuisu 2. V. i., to play at cat's cradle.

isuisunge v. n., cat's cradle.
isuiso 3. U.. isuisu ni *n, a splinter.
i so's adv.. exterior to. on the outside.
isuleH, lauisuleH partic. unstable, moving,
isuli 1. adv., accordingly, after, alongside, by.

if. luluisuli. heU isuU, do according to;

lio isnU, watch; rongq isnii, to be

obedient to; si*o isnU, to follow the

footsteps of; sulu isuli, to obey. 2.

prep., with suff. pron. (du), after.

Itoii (continued).

according to; heU isuUeu, copy me.
3. U.. prep., ci motion toward. 4. nono
ismii, a strong-smelling herb.

ita 1. U.. one. another: nga is always prefixed,
the plural article mma is used of persons
only, ngaiie 61a, another thing, some-
thing else; ngaiU laa, another person;
nga mwaiie 'inani, certain persons.

Its 2. a round basket made of plaited coconut
leaves for holding yams.

ita 3. V. tr.. to find fault with, to reject.
Wango iia, to reject.

itahula- S.. with poss. 3: because of, through
the agency of. iUh n lo M ta a oic, because
of So-and-so; iiehuUamu, through thine
agency.

ital 1. S.. interrog. adv.: where. U., ihtL
2. interrog. pron.. which, what, whether
of two; ini iiei, which one; '<^ sore
ngdu iiei, which will you eat. 3. in
phrase nge iui ue ena, that is just it.
Mota vea, Niu€ fe,

itsitana S.. one. any: used with negative verbal
particle ka*a, sa*a* € ka*a iieHanm
ngaini, there is not any one; iteitana nga
oia sa'a diana, nothing will be good.
Mota isei.

ito 1. orchid. 2. bunch of money, ito ni haa.

ite 3. V. tr., to offer, to make an offering to
ghosts.

itoii n., a shell ornament stuck in the tip of the
nose, the man-o'-war hawk is carved on
the projecting end. which is turned up
to r e pr esen t the neck and breast of a
sea-bird, t 3.

iweHta S., adv.. the day before yesterday;
t w€*iU wau, three days ago. • 1.

i welita U.. adv., the day after tomorrow. </.
wait, t vwlila ^00 «a». three days hence.

ka pron.. plural 1. ind.: sufiBxed to nouns and
denoting possession; nimaka, our hands.

ka'a S., negative verbal particle, twed of both
present and past time; ko*a balanced
by wa with iU is used as the negative
correlatives neither, nor. 'amu ka'a
manaia'init wa *omu ke lusie, ye
neither know him nor have seen him;
nou ka*a manata'ie ike, I don't know;
e ka*a lae, he did not go; « ka'a ola, there
is nothing; nou ka'a o2a, I have nothing;
melu ka'a ola ni ngaa, we have no food;
ka'a equates with kaka, cf, Mota U,
UU, Maori Ami. Mota ga 4; Lau ka,
future particle; Tolo ke, negative
particle.

kaakaa U.. child, baby. Wango kaakae.

ka'alawa v. i.. to be listless, inert, tf. lalawa;
sapeku e ka'alawa, my body is listless.

kaata cart (English).

kae 1. V. i., to pluck; kae 'asi, to pluck out.

kas, kaekae 2. U.. v. tr.. to deceive; lopo'i kae,
to deceive,
kaenga v. n.. deceit.

43

KAO

kae, kaakae 2 (continued).

kawigaha v. n. (double noun ending), deceit.

kMtitr.

Inatalai tr. (Qaloto dialect).

ka'^o 1. U.« pen. pron., plural 1, incl.: we,
more restricted than ki'a in meaning;
with future particle V, ka'du^ contracts
to ka*eVe. ka*eka*elu, come on. let us
be off; ka*€l*€ lae, let ua go. 2. pera.
pron., plural 1, incl., suffixed to nouns;
'amaka'du^ our father. 3. U., pers.
pron., plural 1, incl., suffixed to verbs
and prepositions; e sdunika*elu, he
beat us.

kaUta S., uwiHkahiUt rags.

kahii^. makaim.

kAl contraction of kd'u i; *o lae ha*i tei, where
did you go to.

kaka v. L, to be torn, to be split, makaka,
kakasi tr.. to split.

kakahite v. i., to gape open, to split, hakiu.

kakahii U., exdam. of astonishment at some-
thing of great sise; hakahu ni ola, a
monsterl

kakakuro S., v. i., to be taken by surprise.
ha'akakahuru.

kakaUhe n., a guarding, a guard, k&li 1.

kakalo v. i., to grope with the hands; kakalo
*uIu*uIh, to grope blindly.

kakalu S., n., a well of water. kUu, U.

kakamo U., v., to be stringy, of hana.

kakamv 1. v. L, to itdi.

kakaaii 2. n., with genitive ni; fringe, skirt.

kakamunl n., an armlet of shcJl.

kakapoo n., a strong-smelling herb.

kakata n., a handle; kakaUU knt, an iron rod;
with suff. pron., kakatanct its handle.
Mota kaka, to stretch out the hand
and catch hold.

kakau S., v. L, to shout, to cry aloud.

kakan'e adj., prickly. kAu 1.

kakawa (na) n., tentacles of octopus, cf. *ahe 3.
Mota gave, a crab, so named from its
daws; Motu gave, tentadea of octopus.

kala V. tr., to cut piecea of nautilus shell
(reoreo) for purposes of inlaying; kaia
'apani paaie'o, to cut nautilus shell in
triangular patterns; kola MU, to cut it
in rectangular pieces and to split the
ends in V-shape; kaia k)ohe*o, to cut
shell ho(4cs.

kalani a fish, re ni kakmi.

kala 1. (kn) n., a child, a son, a daughter; with
personal ardde a kale, the son; kalena
a ola, son of So-and-so; kaie madu ineu,
my beloved child ; kale ni ulao, a bastard;
Mdsi tuUekUf my child; keni kalei Sion,
daughter of Sion; nga keni mala a
kalemu, a girl a mate for your son. Lau
gale, Florida dale, Wango gore. New
Hebrides gari. New Britain garra,
^. kele,

kale 2. ka'akale, to wait for, to watch, to keep
an eye on. cf. MU«.

kale'aadj., heavy with child, to be inchUdbirth.

Kalenipa'awa the name of a canoe in a story,
Little Shark.

,, kakMli, kakakXU 1. v. tr., to watch, to>

surround, to double a point of land in a

canoe, lilikeli, kdU peU, to be cap-^

sixed in rounding a cape at sea; kiUi ta*a,

to emerge; ddu kdi, to surround;

kakaii ke'ike'roli, to take turns in

guarding; UH keli, to endrde; e piru kdk

ekn, surrounded me; si*o kdli, to spy;

e kSli i *elingeku, it sounded in my ears.

kaUUinge v. n., watching, guarding.

k«]iU-(k«) gerund.

kiUteH partic, ko keliUH konolamu, round

about thee.
kil]ita*ini tr., to keep watch over, to guard.
Florida tali, Omba dali, round; Wanga
gari, Mota kal, to stir, tal, to go around.

Um 2. kdli awala, a sum of money {haa) made
up of ten strings {kawe) each a fathom
long.

kMlikali 1. adv., around. 2. prep., with suff.
pron. (Alt), around.

klUnga (na) U., a hole; kdUngona, its hole.

kiliaga S., n., a well of water.

KaUtaalo one of the legendary persons of 'Olu
Malau; his drinking-place (jUmokaanay
IB at I^nga in Ulawa where he is reputed
to have thrust his fishing-rod into the
stream as it poured over the rock inta
the sea and to have drunk the drippings*.

UUitaH'a U., adj., used as noun, a strand of
rope; to kdliUTa, double thickness.

kalooa U.. n.. garden ground on the second
range of hills above the beach, i kalona;
nki ni kalona, yams from this region,
firm and hard as opposed to nki ni qe*n,
which are more mealy.

kilo 1. n., a hand net tied to the four comera
of two bent sticks laid at right angles
to one another, a third stick serving*
as a handle. 2. v. tr., to use such a
net in fishing from a canoe for parrot-
fish (t'« ni kelu), a live fish tied by the
gills to a stick is used as a decoy* where-
upon fish of the same sort come out.
to the decoy and are caught in the net.
The decoy fish when not in use is kept
in an artificial pond {lopo).
klQuH tr., to catch fish with such a net.

kiltt 3. V. tr., to bend a bow.

kana, kanakana 1. v. i., to sing. 2. n., a song.
knn ni kana, a company of singers at a
dance; nga odoni kana, a song sung;
straight through; supn kana, to com-
pose songs.
kananga v. n., a song; snlu kananga, a sing-
ing of songs; supu kananga, v. n., com-
posing songs,
kanali tr. Wango gana.

kao 1. n., the bottom planks of a canoe, the-
ked. ikao, 2. with suff. pron. 3 pers.
na, kaona, the under part, the hold, of
canoe or ship. 3. U.. i kaamu, under-
neath you; mwalo suku kao, a rock that,
pierces the bottom, sunken rock; Pali
kao, a drop left in the bottom, dregs;
e ka'a to'o kaona, bottomless. Wango
kao.

KAOKAO

44

ktokto n., a half coconut shell used for dzink-
ing-cup (late use). Wango kaokao.

kap« hi*uhi*H kape, U.. hi*uhi*u poU, S., to wag
the tail feathers, a bird (the wagtail).
Maori kapekapHa, to flutter; San Cris-
toval. rurukape,

kara, karaH U. 1. pers. pron., dual It ind.: we
two. 2. suffixed to noun or verb or
preposition as object. 3. suffixed to
noun, of us two. Wango kara,

kara 4. v. i.. to scrape, to grate; kara uki, kara
ukingSt yam grating; *usu kara, to grate
yams for yam pudding. 5. grated-yam
pudding tied up in leaves; kara ni
'aharoia, large puddings for a wedding
feast; kara dodo, yam pudding put into
bamboos and cooked over the embera;
kara laUmOt yam pudding without
coconut milk; kara ni mwatu {kinanga),
yam pudding used in sacrifices. Mota
gar, cockle; Viti kari, to scrape; Maisin
kari, NiuS aUUi,

kara'i adv., preceding the verb; nearly, almost;
nou kara'i lae, I almost went.

karalni 1. adv., as kara'i, 2, prep., with su£f.
pron. (du), near, close to. Lau garangi,
Wango garangi,

kar'e U., contraction of kara*e, let us two;
kar*€ lae, let us be off 1

Karelmeno a fabulous person, half boy and
half shark, changed by his mother, who
cursed him because he frightened his
younger brother by swimming with one
arm bent and held at his side so as to
resemble a shark's fin.

karekare U., osani karekare, a cliff.

karanga v. tr., to watch for turtles coming up
to lay.

kitrl n.. squid; used largely for fish bait; Utla'i
kari, to entice squid with a white cowrie
shell {puli) and red streamers {aUale),
Mota wirita, octopus, Motu uriia,
Malagasy kuriia,

Karieo a ghost. M. A., p. 261.

kMrikeri n., a piece, a bit.

kftriheni, kMiihani U.. adv.; *osi kerikeni 'aela
laa, do not be such a nuisance.

kMriwaaro v. i., to take a circuitous route.
waaro,

kMrikeri'ara S.. kilrikeri*ala U.. a bird, the
migratory plover, arriving in November
at the time of the palolo worm and
found exhausted in the gardens and
open spaces, whence it is said oku e
kirusia maana, the palolo has got into
its eye.

karo S. 1. the side walls of a house; kdu suusuui
kara, cornerstone.

karo 2. v. tr., to pick canarium nuto, karoa
ngOU; karo siriunga, picking up cockles.

karohure S., karokure e sasa*ae i kaona *asi, the
depths were troubled.

karokaro (ku) side, riba, of persons. Florida
nggaro.

kini 1. v. L, used with poss. 3; to clutch, to
hold; kdTH ana, take hold of it; more
common in Ulawa.

kKru, klmkeru 2. v. i., to scratch with the
finger nails; mwda ko kerukeru la*o k&*u,
the child scratches in the umbrella:
when a child is sick a wizard is called in
and he declares that its soul has been
stolen away; he takes leaves of dra-
caena {dilt) and collects the child's soul
with the leaves and places it in the
umbrella (M'm) where it is heard
scratching; he shakes the umbrella
over the child's body, the child is con-
vulsed, the soul returns and the child
recovers.
kMmmi tr., to scratch the body when suffer-
ing from skin disease or itching. Mota
karu, Maori raku, Malay ganU, Samoa
la*u, Gilb, kori,

klru 3. v. i., to suffer from sldn disease.

kilni 4. v. i., to hollow out a log for a drum,
kdru *o*o,
kimH v. tr.
kartt11a-(na, ni) gerund.

kXra oe U., to be foolish, to talk foolishly.

kMra mehu S., to endure hardness.

kiao, ka'okaau S.. v. i.. to be rotten, corrupt,
kkaunge v. n., corruption.

kata n., a mortar for pounding areca nut, used
by those who are toothless {dawa),

klo, kiukeu 1. v. i., to clutch hold of (of thorny
creepers), to catch hold of with ikeu,
kdu lomoiomo, the fourth finger; walo
kAukeu, a thorny creeper.
kXasi tr., walo « kdusis, the thorn caught
him *akalo e kdusie i*ola, a ghost clutched
and capeised the canoe; ikeu, a crook;
for twitching off fruit and leaves.
malakeu. Maori kakau, stalk; Lau
kakau, fingers; Mota kau, Malay kauit;
NiuC keu, crooked.

k&a 2. n., branching coral, mu keu; kuui keu, a
spray of coral; uunu keu, to bum coral
for lime used in areca chewing.

kMn 3. cow (English).

kft'tt 4. adv., follows verb, (a) forms a pre-
terite, nou lae kd*u, I went, (b) at the
beginning of a sentence it directe
attention, and generally it makes speedi
less abrupt; kd*u, neke leesie, please let
me see it; i*o k&*u, stay a while, wait;
kA*u mei nga kue^ give me one (fruit)
please; kolu ke'u, let us be off; konia
kd'u, wait, tarry a ^idiile; *oke lae kd*u,
you had better go; *omu ke mala mwda
kd*u, just become as UtUe children; lio
kd*u, behold; loo kTu, look; neku kd'u.
be seated; nge ke *ue kd*u ne, how then
will it be; 'oke i*o ki.*u loosieu, wait a
while for me; no*i kd'u, stay, wait a
while; lae kd*u 'okiH, go fetch it; taa
kA*u, let me see; MU ke*u, be off, get
out of the road. Wango gau,

klliUe S., kXala U., frigate-bird, man-o'-war
hawk, nests on Bio by Ugi; on account
of its siae and voracity and of its asso-
ciation with the bonito the frigate-bird
figures largely in the art of the aouthern
Solomons, poro kduie, mwane kduU,

45

KI«B

kHiile (continued).

the male bird: tenn used generally in
speaking of the kdule; rdpu keuU, to
tattoo the frigate-bird on the cheek: the
tattoo takes the form of an inverted W
where the two points represent the
curve in the wing of the bird. A
similar W pattern also called kd*uU i
found on the flat blades of clubs
(Guppy, "Solomon Islands," p. 74), and
it may be that a further explanation of
the device is that it is the conventional
representation of the MtUe. Florida
dauUi, M. A., p. 126.

kamnota n.t adze; in old days made of a stone
attached to V-shaped handle composed
of a branch and part of the stem of a tree.

kmowa'a S., n., must, mildew, rust.

kawa'i S., v. tr., to hear; 'alinge ka*a kawa'te,
ear hath not heard.

kawe n., a string of shell money {haa), nga
kawe. Wango gawe,

ke 1. S., verbal particle used of future time;
saune hunt ke mae, pound it so that it
will be well mashed; ana ke ola mwant'
wadau, if iMMsible; ke m&ni dolosie
satada, let him ask all their names.
With the negative particle ka*a\ e ka'a
ola ke Idkut there is nothing whole;
e ka*a ola neke leesie* I saw nothing.
Used with negatives ka*a and sa*a cor-
related with wa in the sense of neither,
nor: *omu ka'a manata*inie wa *omu ke
leesie, ye neither know him nor saw him,
Florida te, of present time. Lo te ke.
Mota te 1; Ulawa V. cf, ka*ike, qa'ike.

ke 2. exdam., used when one has made a wrong
statement.

kal 1. n., a female (of persons only), cf. mwei;
the personal article a precedes and de-
monstrative nd is suffixed; a keine, the
woman; mu keine, the women; keine,
vocative, woman; the addition of taa
expresses commiseration; kei to'a, poor
dear; pdine, big, is added in the case of
important persons, kei ta'a P&ine, dear
lady. Gilbert Islands net, Lau ni, per-
sonal article preceding the name of a
woman; Trobriand na, Efat^ lei, Tangoa
ve» cfm mwae,

kei, keikei 2. U., adv., of motion from, out of;
e kei kei, whence; nau keikei ana, I am
from thence.

koH 3. S., verbal particle used of definite future.
^* ke t. ke'i lae ta*ane, he will go cer-
tainly; ke'i *ue *oU>, how shall it be done;
kire ke*i ne*i manaia*a diana, they shall
become well trained; melu ke*i tola *oto,
are we to begin to carry? Fagani i,
Omba, Maewo t.

kake 1. U., with locative i; i keke, beside, out-
side; honi i keke, to excommunicate.
2. with suff. pron. (ku), to (of persons
only), Qaloto use. i kekemu, as i siemu,
in your house; i kekena wdi, beside the
stream. 3. adv., behind; lio keke, look
behind.

keke (continued).

kekeaH S., kekeni U., partic. Uo i kekeaH
maanga, to bear ill will, to have a spite
against, malakeke. Wango gege, Lau
gege, behind; Motu kekena, by the side of.

Kela the southern end of Guadalcanar. awalosi
i Kela, the southwest wind; hana ni
Kela, a yam planted head downward;
qaso ni Kela, armlet of dyed grass.

kele, 'ele U. 1. adv., somewhat, a little, just
now: precedes the verb, esi kele ine, it
has just rooted; esi kele loio, just washed;
kele me'i langa, it lets up a little. 2.
adj., small, little: precedes the noun;
kele mwau ineu, my little boy; kele
tnwela, little child; kele me'i ola, a little
thing; kele poo, a little pig; a kele ola,
young So-and-so. (Probably connected
with kale,) Wango gere,

keU cf, kiUi.

kelu U., contraction of kira'elu, used as subject
only.

kemo U., v.. to be straight, of hair.

kenal ha*akena'i, ke*asikena*i, interjections,
not to be used in the presence of women.

kenetaHni U., v. tr., to safeguard, to observe
and do. kineta*ini, S.
k6neta'infla-(kn) gerund.
ha'akenetaHni causative.

keni n., woman, wife, female: added to proper
names to show sex. ka*akeni, keni, mu
keni, vocative; keni ana a ola, such-and-
such a woman; nga keni mala a kalemu,
a girl, a mate for your son; keni ka*alu, S„
keni ka'olu, U., a maiden; keni ineu, my
dear; keni raori'i, a virgin; keni toro,
the lady; keni ulao, a harlot; *ai ha* an*
gdu keni, ginger given to women as an
ordeal; hdu ni keni, a rock at Ali'ite
where female ghosts congregate; ile keni,
female; ini keni, female; i*ota*i rongo
keninga, to set about a betrothal; meH
keni reu, a lowly woman; tola keni, to
take a wife. Motu kekeni, Doura, N.
G., eneni; Rotuma hen,

kere, kerekere v. tr., to incise, to draw, to
outline, to cut lateral marks on nautilus
plates, makere. Florida nggere, to
write; Wedau teretere.

kerehi, kerekerehi v. tr., to look at, to stare at.

kerekere 1. hui kerekere, a taro shot with veins.

kerekere-(na) 2. U., used with locative t, of
things only; beside, by the side of.
• kerekerena tola, beside the path.

kereru'e S., pers. pron., dual 3: they two; used
only as subject.

ked verbal particle: ke and si illative; nge
kienga kesi lae, then the journey will
take place.

keta, ketaketa v. tr., to annoy, to provoke,
ketanga v. n., uproar, upset.
ketala-(ku) gerund.

ki'e S., U'a U., pers. pron., plural 1 Incl.: we;
more general in meaning than kolu or
ka*€lu; used as subject, or suffixed as
object to verbs and prepositions.
Florida gita, Malay kit

IBKIB

46

Mekle S.. kUkU U., a dub of cresoent-tluLpe

with a point on the back. Guppy,

"Sok>mon Islands," p. 74.
ki% ki*ikiH (ka) 1. U.. n.. hand* finger, rod.

stem ; susue*i M*t, to stretch out the hand ;

ki*iki*i ni he'u, a rod of iron. 2. a

dwarf, ki*ikPi ni 'inomi. Makura wtrt-

kikin, Tavara nima-kiki.
Idito n., a bird, gray fish-hawk (Baia gumeyi).

Guadalcanar kiso,
kikiri 1. n., a lettuce-leal tree with large edible

fruits considered a cure for coughs; the

root affords the red dye used on strips

of cane (im, aleale),
kikiri 2.. kikiri ge*u, a ghost. M. A., p. 261.
kikoa n., a bird, the black mynah. sikoa.
kflaUla 1. n.. a small parrot (Trichoglossus

massena).
Ulekila 2. n., a long-handled tomahawk used

for fighting, with an iron head; a Florida

word.
kOiqe'u 1. n., a depression in the ground, a

grave. 2. n., a pass in the hills above

Su'uholo, Ulawa.
kHokilo V. i., to beat the water with the hands

in sport uriiile bathing, making thereby

a booming noise,
kiltt U. 1. a well of water, a hole in the ground;

kilu ni wei, a water hole; kilu ni ngtdi,

a pit where flints are found. Florida

gilut grave; Lau kilugwou, grave; Wango

giru, ditch; ViU kikilo, hole.
Ulo U. 2. contraction of kira*Hu. cf, kelu,
UnetaHni, klnekittetaHni S., to safeguard, to

preserve, to observe and do. keneta*ini,\J,
kitteta'inila-(ka) gerund.
U'oki'o n., a bird, the large kingfisher. Santa

Cruz Mo, Mota Jtfo, Samoa U*o.
kiraa for kire a, used of a company; kiraa ola,

whom do you mean, lit., they the person;

kiraa WaU, Wate and his companions.
Uratei interrog. pron., plural 3: who; followed

by e or kire; kiratei e Uu mai, kiraiti kire

lae, who went?
kira S.. Ura U., pers. pron., plural 3; used as

subject only,
kiraru'e S., pers. pron., dual 3: they two; used

as subject only,
kirori n., a parrot (Lorius cardinalis), found on

the blossoms of the Barringtonia and

coconut, tamed as a pet. cf. kirori,

'irori. Cruise of the Curacoa, p. 380.

Motu kiloki.
kim U.. rai kiru, a 3ram with reddish flesh,
kinkitt rape n., a bird, wagtail, cf, ki'uki'u

rape.
ko S., verbal particle used of general time;

si illative may be added, kosi; in cases

where a changes to e after a preceding

• or u the same change takes place after

ko. e 'nre'ure ko rarangi, he stood

warming himself; *oio kire kosi 'unue,

thereupon they began to say it; ko

ka'ike, otherwise, else; ko urine, that

being so. Sesake ko, future particle.
koe, koakoe U.. v. i., to make fun of; with poss.

3. to jest.

kos, koskos (continued).

koaoga, v. n.. koan^iha v. n. (double noun

ending). Wango koe, Florida koekoru.
koataaaHi to scatter (of a flock of birds).
koha, ko'afcoha as koe, in Qaloto dialect,
kohi adj., beautiful; e Uo JboM, it looks beautif uL
kohikoldia U.. adj.. beautiful.
koho 1. snags, logs or branches in a stream,
koho, kokoho 2. v. i., to be deceitful, to deceive;

ko kokoko kaaki waia, deceitful in speech,
kohanga v. n.
kohu 1. V. i.. to be half grown, unripe, green

(of fruit).
kohu 2. U.. V. i., to cut, to chop,
kahttkohn U., ko ku ko ku laona saio, far-off clouds,
koikol U., V. i.. to diew with toothless gums.
koHkori a pudding of pounded taro and cana-

rium nuts; Jbort.
koine v. tr.. to adopt.

koinala-(ka) gerund.
koke V. tr.. to hasten unduly.

kokalaH partic.. flurried, hastily; nou Ue

kokda*i, I came away without making

due preparations.
kokalaini tr.
koko 1. kokoi epu, a drop of blood. Wango

kokom*
koko 2. V. i.. to be narrow, confined, kariko^

kosi* Mota itoifto, Malagasy kokoia,
koko 3. kokoi sa*o, a frond of sago palm; kokoi

seiu, needles of casuarina.
kokohoSi a hilL
kokobial ▼. L, to be narrow, strait, confined.

koko 2.
kokohoao ▼. L. to be black and lowering, koko 2.

saio ko kokokono, the sky is lowering.
kokoHaH partic., narrow, confined, koko 2,
kokolo n.. a large hermit crab, (Coenobita).
kokola U., a coconut with hard flesh, fully

1[X(rmi;koinmkokolu,koikokolu, tola 4.

Bspiritii Santo koto, coconut.
kokoliita'a adj., with comers, kolu 2.
kokoma n., round white shell armlet made of

trochus {la*o).
kokopa U., kokopa ni *ei, a thin buttress on

certain trees, such as the canarium and

WU.
kokorako v. i., to crow (of fowls). Mota

kokorako.
kokoro V. i.. to sink deep into, to be deep.

Mota koro, deep,
kokosi U., kosi kokosi, to be in distress, koko 2.
kole, kolakola v. i., to rattie. to rustle; koie sa*a

koie wa nga me*i ola *ereie*a ke'i i*o i

sapeka, the paddles must not ratUe nor

anything of light color be about our

bodies.
kolokolo 1. U. V. tr., to forget, to fail to recol-
lect. ka*ak(Ao.
kolokolo 2. n.. a bird (Turacaena crasslroatris).

a pigeon with a long tail and a crest.

cries at evening and morning,
kola S. 1. pers. pron., plural 1 Incl. : we, us; more

restricted in meaning than ki*e; used as

subject, also suffixed to verba and prep-

ositioBS as object, kolu mone, lei ui be

gone. Mukawa kola.

47

Kir'i

kola*(lni) 2. the back (of penoiiB), the outside
(of things); kolune 'ojt, the face of the
sea; wdi e lama haahi ue holune mwakano,
water covered the face of the earth;
kolune nime, the outside of a bowl.
3. the hed, kolune *ae. Motu dolu,

kolu, kokolv 4. to gnaw, to champ with the
teeth.

kelohe v. n., the roof of & house, used with
poss. 3 ana, koluhaana nume. kolu 2.

koma V. i.. to kick; used with poss. 3 as
object.

komii family, clan, sort, tribe (late use) ; in Sa'a
pers. pron. sing 3 im is suffixed; komu
i'emelu, our family; komuna a ola. So-
and-so's family. Florida komu, village;
San Cristoval kumu.

Komnkomn n., the artificial islets off north
Malaita. Florida kokomu, islet.

kone v. L, to set (of current), to carry along in
flow, to be in flood; kone e qera, much
flood- waters; ewe kone, to gather to-
gether (of flood-waters); wdi ko kone,
the river is in spate. Ambrym kone,
to carry.

koni, koaikoni v. tr., to put, to place, to set.
to keep, to adopt, to endow, to receive,
to entertain, to nourish, koni diana,
to take good care of; konia kdu, U.,
wait a while; koni i keke, to excommuni-
cate; mdnu koni, a tame bird; hu*e kWe
konie mola, a concubine, lit., wife enter-
tained merely; ne'i koni, to lay up in
store, to make provision; noko konVo ana
to*olaku, I endow thee with my property;
*onime*i koni, to store up; si'o koni, to
collect together; tola koni, to receive,
konihe, konikonihe v. n., a servant, depend-
ant.
koiilla-(ktt) gerund. Florida nggoni, Wan-
go ftmt.

konito'o adj., assured, in safety; i*o konito'o,
rest in safety, koni,

konokono (ka) n., throat, gullet, cf, 'ono'ono,
to swallow. Florida sonosono, Wango
gono, Ulawa tono, to drink; Mota gom,
to hold liquid in the mouth, gonogono,
hollow, with a mouth.

koo V. i., to cause to boil by placing hot stones
in. stone-boiling.
koongl tr.

kookoo a word used to deter children, probably
connected with Lau koo a grandfather,
and having to do with religious rites.

kopi S., V. i., to touch, to flick with the finger;
used with poss. 3 as object, e kopi eku,
he touched me.
kopi U., V. tr.

kmraai 1. v. tr.. to scatter, to put to flight;
e korasie mu na*ona*oi mae, he put to
flight the ranks of the foe. 2. v. tr., to
pour out upon. Mota gora, to push
away.

koire» k o fe k pre U. 1. v. tr., to sweep. 2. a
besom made of midribs of sago frond-
lets.
kore 3. ruru kore, a landslip, avalanche.

Korea Lama i Korea, a lake on Little Malaita

above Su'u Pdne.
kori 1. a yam pudding. koHkori, 2, plug

tobacco (late use).
koro» kNMToH U., pers. pion., dual 3; they two;

used both as subject and as object;

koro *a mono 'oto i Kalona^ they two

live apart in Kalona.
kom 1. V. tr., to heap up, to be heaped up;

ka'akoru, koru dunge, to make a fiie;

nga kale e koru kula i si$taka, the shed

was full right to the door,
komte S., knmha, konita U.. a company, a

collection.
komhe^ii tr., to heap up.
Kom 2. a district on the hills of Little Malaita

near Xu Qe'i.
komkora 1. v. i., to water (of the mouth),
korokora 2. n., a piece, a morKl; nga koru'

korui niu, a piece of coconut,
kosi verbal partide of general time: ko and si

illative; *oto kire kosi 'unue, thereupon

they began to say it; kosi mei, it has

just begun to ebb.
koBO V. i., to drift (of a canoe).

kosolalni tr., to be driven by a storm, to

be drifted.
koBu V. i., to be humpbacked,
kotaa V. i., to chatter.

kotaaha v. n., confusion, vexation,
kotaahi tr., to chatter and vex, to annoy.

Mota koia,
kott 1. dean-shaven head. if. torokou'e, suki

kou, to shave the head dean.
kon^a dean shaven; *olo kou*e ikune, shave

his head dose, iorokou'e,
koHi 2. adj., maimed in foot or hand.
ko*ukohtt S., kohnkohn U., with genitive •,

a piece, cf, ko*uko*u. ko'ukokui poo,

a piece of pork,
koukon 1. V. L, to gargle; koukou wei, koukou

*esi, to gargle with sweet water, with

saltwater.
kookott 2. with genitive li, ni, cf, poupou 2;

kouhouU *ae, S., koukou ni *ae, U.,

ankle.
koukon (sa, nl) 3. n., kemd of canarium.
ko*nkohi 4 as ko'ukoku,
koSiko'n 5 loud noise, bang, kokoku. rongo;

ko'uko'u ana, to hear a loud report,
ko'nko'iihe v. n., report, loud noise;

ko'$tko*uka ana siule, report of the gun.
koukonle S., adj., short, stumpy,
koulaa S., kala koulaa, noisy chattering.
ktt 1. pron., sing. 1, suffixed to nouns and to

stem a forming poea, 3. Mota k, Poly-
nesian ku.
ktt 2. exdam. of contempt,
ku 3. V. tr., to mock at.
ku 4. V. tr., to bark at; 'usu e kueu, the dog

barked at me.
kae S., koa U. 1. n., a domestic fowl; koi kue, koi

mwaopunikue,tLioiwVBegg. Wango fciia.
kQ*e S., kn'a U. 2. pron., sing. 1, suffixed to

stems 'a and na forming poss. 1 and 2.
kuH V. tr., to mock at. ku 3; mwala ko ku*ie,

men mock him.

EUKA

48

kuka U.. Si'e &, a mud crab, kuka pulu.

kukao*6 U., a cry to call distant attention.

kiiku U.. SiHi S. 1. V. i., to hang down, to
depend, ha'akuku, mwakmlm.

knko U. 2. to be bent; Jordcn • kuku tUhoH,
Jordan was turned back. Motu
magngu^ to crinkle; Maori ibciht, pin-
cers; Salakau. Borneo, kulm^ a daw.

knkola U., v. i., to swing.

kale 1. n., the shore, the beach, dry land; M't
kuU, on the beach; lai kuU, to go up
on to the beach.

kule, kulakule 2. v. tr., to loosen, to be loose;
kulaa talai heune, to loosen the teeth.
Viti kurekure, to wag the head.

knln V. i.. to bury at sea. ktUn rae, M. A., p.
262; two canoes take the body out for
burial, the body is weighted with stones
and the knees hunched up and tied;
after the committal one canoe paddles
several times at a fast pace around the
spot, the other paddles out to sea taking
a mdngiU, q. v.
kaloH tr.
kalu*ila-(lni) gerund.

knlohi V. tr., to sustain, if. monikulu^e;
4 kuluhie h&nue, he sustains the land.

kmnara sweet potato (Polynesian), called
occasionally uhi ni haka, the imported
3ram; susu kumaraf to plant the vines.

kumu, kumnkomn 1. v. L, to punch, to beat
with the fist.
kumnH tr.
komii41t-(ka) gerund.

kumii 2. v. i., to be blunt, dull of edge.

kumuri v. tr., to quench.

knmwe S., kumwa U., v. i., to ebb. to go down,
to abate, to slacken, to diminish, to wane,
kumwesi 1. to shorten. 2. kumwesie UU,
to take a stone wall to pieces.

kure, kurekure 1. v. tr., to heal sickness;
mwane kurekure^ a witch doctor,
kuranga v. n., healing, curing.

kure S. 2. pers. pron., dual 1, incl.: we two, us
two; used as subject and also suffixed to
verbs and prepositions as object.

kure 3. ezdam.. often reduplicated; kurekure,
come on with you, let us (two) be off.

kuru n., a ripe areca nut. cf. fue, hoi kuru;
metaph. a full-grown person.

kumkuru 1. U., a wood-pigeon, generic term.
2. S., a pigeon without wattles on the
beak, kurukuru ni Malau,

knmraqa U., adj.. deceitful (derived from the
name of a penon).

kvtl cat (English pussy). Samoa ngose,

knte, kutekute v. tr.. to shake, to move
violently.

1. v. i., to be, to go; s la *oioi 'aela, it goes
(is) bad; e la 'oioi 'aela mwaani nonola,
it is worse than yesterday; e la *oU> i
diana, it is good; saeku e la 'dot wano,
my heart was hot; e lai *ada^ it is bad.
Tolo ra^ to go; Mota al; Keapara laa,
walk; Maisin rat, come; Trobriand la, go.

la 2. verbal sufiix; afa, apala.

IM 3. noun ending added to verbs, mae, maelA.

IM 4. adjective ending added to verbs and
participles, nakot nakoli, etterea^Ht,

U 5. gerundive ending, to which pronoun (te)
is always safiSsoed. Mtt* jaitmMiui.
launiUkm,

11 6. root of langa^ to lift; UNigt, sky.

laal. noun ending, added to verbs. Aon, Aoaioat
AoNtf, AoNitlaa.

laa 2. U.. a person; nga laa ni kei, who is this
person? ngaiie laa, a different person;
laa kau, vocative, you; 'o si ia*aia'a,
laa, don't, I say; *olo ikei» laa, where to.
boy.

la'a 3. adjective ending, mamaela'a,

la'a 4. U., adv. up; sulu la'a ana, lift it up.

la'alapa v. i., to complain, to moan, lapala'i.

La'tlaaga Alite Harbor, Langalanga. Big
Malaita.

la*alapasi cf, lapasi.

lada 1. V. i., to pierce, to thrust through.
ladami tr.
ladainila-(ku) gerund.

lada 2. ladaa*ini, to bow, to bend down; e
ladaaHnie maana, he fell on his face.
ladamaH partic, headlong, prostrate.
Florida lada, to bend, to worship.

lade 1. lade mae, deep sea. 2. deep-water
anchorage at the end of a harbor, t Lade,
e. g„ at Tawaniahia. 3. S.. name of
certain months; hure*i lade, August;
oku lade, September.

lado 1. V. tr.. to knot, to join, to graft.

ladoha na v. n., a joint ; t ladoHhaana, in a line
with, joining onto; t ladokaana, thereby,
ladoha 4ni tr., to join on.
ladola-(ktt) gerund.

lado, lalado 2. v. tr., to recount, to tell, to
recite a tale; lado diena, U., to explain;
lado tSliheku, to make my defense.
Isladonga v. n., story, tale, folk lore,
ladoha'ini tr. Florida lada.

las, laelae v. i., to go, to come, lae mat, lae wau;
to he, e lae uritaa, how is it; with loca-
tive t, lae i contracts to lai; kiraiei e lae
mat, who are coming; kiraUi kkre lae,
who went? lae hdH'oli, to go and return;
lae h&'iore, to stay behind ; noko lai kaka,
I am going abroad; lai kenue, to go a
journey; lae honosi, to go and meet; lae
hou, to descend; lai kule, to reach; lai
hulaana, till, until; lae kuni*i, go to
fetch them; *oke lae k&'u, you had better
go; nou lae k&'u, I went; lae kd'u *oki*i,
go fetch it; lae k&'u poi, come up here;
nou lae kokela'i, 1 came away in a hurry;
*oko lae mai *ure itei, where are you from?
lae mdlumu, go quietly; ngeni nou lae mdi,
that's why I came; lae molai rako, go
gently; lae mone, let us be gone; kira *a
mune*i lae, were they to go; mttiit *e lae,
go gently; fniifit 'e lae mai, let him come;
muni nge'ia e lae mai, if he comes; lae
okonga, to go tentatively; lae ni oraka'Ot
to go very fast; na'a lae *oU>, I am going;
e lae 'olo ni mae, he went like every*

49

Ue, laeUe (continued).

thing; lae po*opo*oU*Ui*i, to go way-
wardly; Ice moia qalaqcla^ to go for
naught; ko lae ni ramo, he goes in his
might; laelae i rodo, to go till nightfall;
lae rororaf to go in a hurry; nge'i ke'i lae
ia'ane, he will surely go; mm lae takalo,
I am lost; lae tara*asi, to go straight on;
lai toUt to be going to fish out at sea;
muni'e kara lae, begin to go gently; *oke
haro lae, go gently; noko hirue'i lae, I
am hindered from going; ka*el*e laelae,
let us go; le*u noko lae ana, le*u noko lae
kunie, whither I go; noko loonaH lae, I
intend going; luqe*i lae, to pretend to
go; mdni niHlana sakanga e mdni lae
kunieu, all power is given unto me;
melu orei lae, we almost went; e idu ni
lae, be made to go.

laaha v. n., a company traveling.

laanga v. n. 1. a journey; maai laenga, S.,
maani laenga, U., a journey; nge laenga
kesi lae, then the journey will take place.
2. laenga {ku), U.. laeha {ku), S., a going;
laengana, his going; laekaku e *ada, I
can not walk well.

laahi tr.. to travel through a place.

laali, laalaail tr. 1. to cause the bowels to be
open. 2. laeli wala, to make an oration;
ladi walanga, oratory, address, speech-
if3ring.

laalaaH partic.. ere laelae'i, talk by the way
side.

laaki-(lni) gerund., laelaku, my going. Lau
lea, to go; Mailu laea, path.
laha adj.. big (not in common use) ; Su'u Laha,
a boat harbor south of Su'u Peine;
Pululaha, a harbor south of the west
entrance to Mara Masiki Channel. ^.
alaha, a chief. Mota lava, Florida kaba,
Maori raka.
laha v. tr., to praise, to extol, paaiake.

kha'a adj., praised, blessed.

lahala-Cktt) gerund.
llhi, UVahi 1. to lay eggs. 2. v. tr., to be in
travail with; ko lekie eronga, in travail
with deceit,
lako'a adj., foggy, cloudy,
llhn 1. to be worn out. 2. worn out things,
mu lekni da; mn lekuni to*oni, ragged
clothes. Lau lafu, Wango rahu, old;
Florida ravn.
llhv 3. V. i., to blow a conch shell.

]ili«la-(ka) gerund.. Idkulana *dkun, the
sound of the oonch.
liliv U. 4. n., place; iMuna, iUknna, there;
mwai leku ine, those places. Sa'a le'u,
Florida fevM.
lahstoH U., partic, prostrate,
lai 1. contraction oi lae i: e lae tA*i Sa*a, he
went to Sa'a; noko lai kaka, I am going
abroad; noko lai leesie, I go to see it; lai
loosi kaa, to go and inspect the money
given for a bride; noko lai Urn, I go
bonilo fishing; 2. e lai'aeia; </./«!.
Ill 3. participial ending, komu konuU*i.

UH 4. suffix to verb, used intransitively; to
make it transitive ni is added, Wini,

liHni tr., suffix, ta'e, ta'elU'ini,

laka to play (of shoals of bonito); mu sen ko
laka, the bonito play in schools.

lakali U. , to have sexual intercourse. kAHldkali,

lakata'inl U., v. tr.. to open the eye.

lakdaka U., t&u lakelake, used with poss. 3. to
give oneself airs.

lakomalni S., v. tr., to be parallel to, to lay
on longitudinally. rakoma*ini, U. kde
lakoma'inie, hold it to, together with,
on it.
lakoma4 partic, laid out along, longitudi-
nally; rdpu lakomaH pe*i po*upo*u, to
crucify; *uri lakoma*i, to tread in the
steps of.

IXkn, liHilalro v. i.. to be whole, entire, safe.
kd*iUku, sapeUkku; e ka*a ola ke Ulku,
there is nothing whole. Lau lau.

lalahn'a adj., worn out. old. laku.

lalaini v. tr.. to stretch out. Wango rarasi.
Iala4 partic. outstretched.
lala*inl]a-(kv) gerund.

lalako U.. nanako S., v. i.. to be stkky. to stkk.

lalamoa n., a person killed by violenoe, a
victim; momo lalamoa, armlet. ^.
momo; lalamoa mAuri, a captive; poo ke
ne*i lalamoa ko 'olisie *oto a mwaena, a
pig is the victim in place of the man;
e kai lalamoa e mae kunia Qai, four dead
men for Qai to pay a fine for; toko
lalamoa, to pay for a man killed by
violence.

lalani U., lalani wala, to make an oration, to
speechify.

lalavagaH S., *unu lalaunge*i, to tell beforehand.

lalawa 1. v. i., to be lazy. ka*alawa, 2. U., to
be unwilling; luqe*i lalawa kaaki, to give
a feigned excuse,
lalawanga v. n., laziness.
lalawaal U., v. tr., to reject, to neglect
through laziness.

lalawa 3. n.. the marrow; mu lalawai ola ana
snU, the marrow of the bones.

lalamo 1. without coconut milk; kara lalemo,
yam pudding without the milk. 2.
unfermented.

lalo (ka) 1. n., inside, within; 'oio wdi lalo,
inside; lalona e *ada, it is bad inside;
laUma e waawaa, nothing inside it;
Idloi ka*a, within the gamer; laloi sulu
within the bones. 2. U.. laloku, my
stomach, my insides. 3. d&u lalo ana,
to be immersed in, to be plunged into.
Mota lolo, Motu lalo, Wedau ano, pith;
Wango raro, Gilberts nana.

lalo 4. U., n., a garden; lalo indu, my garden;
f epina lalo, bordering on the garden;
*aloni lalo, to lay out a garden.

lalo'a adj.. roomy, spacious.

Laloi SoSi (lit., in the Su'u) Mara Masiki
Channel, which divides Malaita.

lama 1. v. tr., to cut up trees, to cut feUed trees
into billets convenient for burning; lama
tali, to free a tree ol creepers; met., to
free persons.

so

lama 1 (continued).
Iiiftnti tr.
UunaUHni U.. tr.

lama 2. n.* a lake, MU lama; lama i Korea, Lake
Korea, Little Malaita. Mota lama,
open sea; Borneo lama, lake.

lama 3. v. i., to spread over, to cover; wdi $
lama haahi ue kdune mwakana, the
water still covered the face of the earth.

lama I. kdnudama, S., da*ilama'a, U., peace.

UUni n., a phase of the moon; Mu ni lemit full
moon; to*ohunga lemi, S., fuU moon;
Umi mwaa, U., full moon.

langa 1. v. L, to moderate temporarily (of rain);
n.. a spell between the showers, ka'a-
langa; U. la'a up. n., keU me*i langa, it
lets up a little. Lau lalang/a, dry;
Mota langa, to lift; Viti langa, Samoa
langa, NiuS langa, Mao. ranga, lift.

langa 2. ka*alanga, to expose to the air in order
to dry.

laaca'a, langalanga'a adj., up, on high, clear;
hele langa'a, heU langdlanga*a, to hold
up conspicuously. Mao. rangai, raised.

Laagalanga a village on Big Malaita where
shell money is made.

IXngl ha*aldngi, a house on piles; iUngi, sky,
heaven. Mota lang, wind ; Maori rangi,
sky; Salakau. Borneo, angin, wind.

lXngilengi*e adj., aloft, lifted up. Idngi, Fat6
langilangi, proud.

lango n., a fly; lango roe, bluebottle fly. Mota
lango, Maori rango, Gilbert Islands
nango.

iMngn. V. i, to pluck up; huni lengu ha*aodohie
*aeka, to guide our feet; Idngu holo, to
break in two.
iXngu'l tr. Wango rangui,

la*o 1. nnnula*o, stinging-nettle tree, nunu 4.

la'o 2. in, inside; with suffixed pronoun na\
locative i may be prefixed, cf. lalo 1.
la*o i'ola, in Uie canoe; la*<ma nime, in
the bowl; hoi la*ona, wdi la*<ma, within,
inside; ni*i *a€ la*o i*ola, to board a
canoe; hohukohu la*ona solo, far-off
clouds.

la'o 3. cone shell, trochus; a forehead ornament
of trochus or tridachna shell, it is cir-
cular or oval and incised with the device
of a frigate-bird, the hair is threaded
through a small hole in the la'o, which
then hangs on the side of the forehead;
semicircular pieces of trochus shell
inlaid upon the sides of large canoes;
i*ola la'o, a canoe thus inlaid; armlets
{kokomt) are cut from the trochus.
Florida lago,

la'ola'o huhu la'ola'o ana wA'i, to be contorted
with spasms of tetanus.

la'ongi S., la'oni U., v. tr., to step over, to
cross over.
la*onclla-(kn) gerund. Mota lago, Viti
laho, Motu loo.

lapad, ]a*alapad v. tr.. to attempt a thing.
Wango raba.

Iapata4 1. v. i., to complain, to moan; noko
lapaia'i nio *olo, I complain in mourning.

lapataHt la'alapataH 2. v. L. to be concerned

about, to endeavor, la'alapa.
lapi v. L, to change shape, to change appearance

(of ghosts); e lapi ana pa'iwa, he

changed into a shark,
laqa 1. bracken. 2. I Laqa, a district on the

hills above Sa'a on the ridges below

'alio mda,
laqi ointment, coconut oil for anointing, laqi

ni su.
laqitaa U., an oven of food.
IMsn 1. to be aged. pdipeiUsu*a. 2. used as

an endearing term to a young boy,

anglicft "old man."
Ulo, Unlstt 1. V. i., to snatch; Idu 'ae, be quick,

quickly; *aka lAn, to pull out violently.

2. to defend, to help; Idu kaatU, to make

a defense in words. Mao. ran, catch
Uahi tr., to defend, to succor; Idnki da, to

help; Iduki olanga, v. n., succor.
lMiiliila*(ktt) gerund. Wango ran.
llltt 3. V. tr., to weed.
Uuhi green snail shell (Turbo petholatus) ; situ

leuhi, to dive for the shell.
iXuleiil.tobequick. Idui, 2. quickly. Lau

louloH, Wango ranran,
Uulea'a U., adj., quick, fast.
lanna U., v. i., to be speechless, to lose one's

voice in sickness.
liluna*o V. i., to go before.
Uuni, llaleuni 1. v. tr., to adorn. 2. bodily

ornaments, mu leuni.
Iftonihe (ku) bodily ornaments. Idunifuku.
llaleimita-(ka) U., v. n., ornaments.

Iduleuniiana nga 'fftoni, ornaments of

men.
lawigaH U., to occupy first, to be the first

to live in.
lanwanga S.. the firmament, open space ol

heaven, maalau.
lawa 1. spider's web; used as bait and made to

skip on the surface of the sea (JUlie'i) at

the tail of a fish kite (sa*o) to catch

garfish (mwanoU). 2. a spider. Mota

marawa, Viti lawa, net; viriUilawalawa,

cobweb; Visaya lawa, cobweb,
lede U. 1. v. tr., to break. ha'aUde, maUUde;

lede 61a, to be mischievous; Ude

olanga, mischief.
ledeU-(ku) gerund.
Lede 2. a boat harbor on Little Malaita north

of Roasi Bay.
ledi, leledi 1. v. tr., to refuse, to examine and

reject. maUledi, hd*iUledi.
ledila-(ku) gerund.
ledi U. 2. v. i.. to ask, to question; soe ledi, to

question. Lau ledi,
leeti, leeleeai S., v. tr., to see; noko lai leasie,

go to see it; kdu neke leesie, please let

me see it; nou ka'a lo*ohuunge*i leesie,

I surely did not see it; na nileesie palonga

aku, and saw my works; e ka*a 61a neke

leesie, I saw nothing; *omu ka'a inaiM-

ta'inie wa *omu ke leesie, ye neither

know him nor have seen him.
le«tila->(ka) gerund,
lehu, IXhtt U.. le*o S. 1. place; 2. thing: the

SI

TJi^fgy

tohtt, IMhtt 1 (continued).

demoQBtrative ni may be added; lehuna
qaHke, not that; mwai leku raro, open
plains, glades. Florida Uvut portion,
side.

lahu 2. suu Uhu, a kind of arrow.

lei, leilei S.. v. tr., to judge.
leinge v. n., judgment.
leila-(ka) gerund.

lekoleko v. i., to hang down, to trail on the
ground.

lekoH U.. to bark (of a dog).

leku cf, Idku.

Ittle V. i., to squint; maana e leU, he squints.

leledi ^. ledi,

lelenga-(na) dear, unimpeded (of speech or
hearing); ka'a rongo lelengani, not to
hear plainly; 'unu Mengana, to speak
clearly.

Ittlengana U.. drowsy; to'o Ulengana, not
aroused from sleep.

Lenga a village on the west coast of Ulawa,
i Lenga.

Ittlen V. tr., to carry ofif, to abduct.

lemi cf. Idmi.

lengi, iMngi (ku) top, above, on; with locative t.
Id 6. Ungine M'u, on the top of the
rock; iUngi, heaven, sky; ilengiku, above
me; Po'oilengi, U.. south; qd*i lengi,
east or south.

lengtt cf. Idngu.

lao a tree (Hibiscus tUiaceus, Pariti tUiaceum)
with yellow flowers, the bast is used as
cord; uhi leoUo, a variety of yam.

lata 1. v. i., to be firm in opinion or in state-
ment; *unu leUt to affirm; ne'isae lete,
to be set in intention.
letehi tr., to affirm.
. letehila-(na, ni) gerund.

late 2. V. i., to be scared, wild, to scent danger.
ha'aleie.
latahi tr., to punish, to castigate. ha'aUieki.

le'u S. 1. place. 2. thing. 3. piece, part.
4. with i sape, *oU> may be added: le*u
i sapeku *oio, my duty; le*u noko lae ana,
le*u noko lae hunie, whither I go; le*u
nou saaU nou saaU, what I know I
know; Wune mm daa *oU>, I did that
already; tre ni le'u honu, to boast; hde
hu'isie nga U*u, to err in anything; mu
le*u e mwadau, places easy to traverse;
le*une e na*onga 'do, the place is quite
abandoned; po*o ni le'u^ partly; nga
Po*o ni U*u, a piece; le*u talaku, my
place; mu le'u talahuUana, his wonted
place. U., Idhu, Florida lam.

len kd*ileu, to snatch, to be violent. UUu.

lemi ef. Iduni.

laSiqala S., a deserted place, qala. i*o ni
le*uqqla, to be deeoted, alone.

li 1. genitive particle, a variant of fit used in
certain compounds. hd'uHhane, Qd*uli'
mwaa, maaUmwalo, *dili*apaa» kouktm"
U'ae. Epi n, AUte Malaita, li.

U 2. verbal suffix, lae laeli.

Udii, BHdii v. i., to aawl, to get along on all
fours.

U*e 1. n., ginger, given to women In ordeals

i'ai ha'angdu keni). Florida ria.
li'e 2. V. i., to change shape, to throw back, of

trees, e. g., oranges. Viti lia^ to trana-

form,
li'a 3. ha*ali*e, to cook, to get a meal ready.
U<eU<a<a adj., indistinctly, confusedly. We 2.

ngara li*eli*a*a» to give out an uncertain

note,
lihn, Uhnlihu v. i., to travel along the coast in

a canoe, to go by sea as opposed to liu

i henue, go by land,
lihunge V. n., a going by sea.
Uhtte'ini tr., to convey a person in a canoe.

Florida lUihi.
lihue'ini v. tr., to borrow or lend possessions.
Iti 1. v. tr.. to make qaso, threading the money

(wili haa)t and making the ornaments;

to lace.
U4 2. V. i.. to be out of joint (of limbs). *aeku

e li*i.
UHteH partic, twisted (of ankle).
UHai beyond, likisi. lae IVisi, to go beyond,

to exceed, to outstrip; talo liWisi, at

irregular intervals.
li'lte- cf. likite'. beyond, on the far side of;

po'o wau li'iiemuton the other side of thee.
liki, liliU, Ukiliki 1. v. i., to leap, pola likiliki.

2. to be nervous; saeku e liki, I was

nervous.
lUd 3. liki U., liki hunt, to puU up the mooring-

stakes of a canoe, to get up the anchor

(late use).
liki 4. a tree, rosewood, the branches live when

planted, the trunk has buttress flanges

\hokopa),
Uldti V. tr., to go beyond, to cross, to outdo,

to transgress; likisi to*i, a mouse.

Florida lilinggi, to border on, to pass

by; Nguna lingiraki, to leave, to

abandon.
Hkimaa-(na) adv., certainly, undoubtedly.

likimaana *oto; lisimaana, U.
Uldtaa glandular swelling in the armpit and

groin; to have such swellings.
Ukite-(ka) beyond, on the far side of; Po'o hao

likUemUt on the other side of thee,
lili 1. V. i., to change, to move about. ha*alili*

lili 'epuUt to be changed into blood; lili

keli, to encircle; lili qana, to jibe a sail,

to tack (of a canoe) ; hdu lili qana, the

boom of a sail.
liU 2 (ktt) back teeth.
liU 3. liliheu, lUikeli.

lili*a'a adj., racked with rheumatic pains,
lili'a rheumatic pains, lili.
lIUeH V. i., to cast for garfish (mwanole) with

a rod and line, using spider web (lama)

as bait, the teeth of the fish becoming

fast in the web; hdu ni liUe*it a rock

from which men cast for garfish.
liUhen stone walls of taoha or of toohi. si'o

liliheu, to collect stones for a wail,
lilikeli V. tr., to encirde; adv., encircling, kdli,
lilUd a mousetrap made of a hollow bamboo

and a noose hung in front of it. a spring

trap, liki 1.

LOISI

52

tout 1. talo lilisi, to offer a certain proportion
as a ncrifice. lilisi 2. tola liUsi, to walk
about. lUi 1.

lime S., lima U.« five: in pronunciation lima,
v., tends to approach nimct hand.
Hmana fifth.

ha'aUma five times. Mota limwa, five;
Maori rimat hand.

liiifl, HniJMmi v. i., to pour, malingilingi.
liaciaitr.

Wntiin>-(na, ni) genind. Mota ling, Maori
rtfift.

lio 1. v. i., to look to see. to be awake, to be
careful. ka*alio. lio dku% to protect;
lio lUieli, to look about one; lio hahO'
'tteliit. to distinguish; lio kokuroto, to
gaae, to see cleariy; lio hd*iicU, U., to
look for in vain; iioii ka*a Ho hikena nga
ola* I saw nothing; lio kilisi, to choose;
lio kilisie kuni ku*e i'oe, choose her for
3rour wife; lio kuni, to choose: e lio
kunie kuni ku*e nana; Ho kuni maa, S.,
to exercise partiality; Uo isuli, to watch,
to take care of (late use); lio kd*u,
behold; lio keke, to look behind; lio
i k€kea*i maauga, to bear ill will, to have
a spite against; e lio koki» it looks beau-
tiful; lio maai, U., to permit; lio maail^
'tut. to view with favor; kire ka'a lio
mdngini, they saw none of it; lio i
ngaei maa, lio i ngaena maa, to look
askance at. to envy, to be jealous of;
lio i nga€ maanga, jealousy; lio odo*i, to
find; ltd qd*ulunge*ini, to see indis-
tinctly; Uo qeru ngudu, Uo qeru *upu,
to grudge, to hate; Ito saai, S.. lio sae,
U-. to perceive, to recognize; Uo sae
to*o, to favor; Uo tala, to take care, to
beware; lio talaki, to look for in vain;
Uo tale, to fail to see; lio tataiteu, to
appear beautiful; lio to*o, with poss. 3.
to find; lio watawasa, to see indistincrtly.
Iloha-(aa) S.. llota-(na) U.. v. n.. looks,
appearance. Mota ilo, to see.

U'o 2. V. i.. to hang oneself. ka*ali*o, MoU
ligq, Motu rto, Maori niko, to form into
a bight.

U'aa S.. n., spirit, ghost. M. A., pp. 136, 260:
the word is U'oa and not Uo'a; the mean-
ing is rather spirit than ghost, though
undoubtedly both meanings appear;
there may be a connection with U.
ki'cna, ko'asi sisingana U'oa, to swear
by a spirit; ngeiiei U*oa, what spirit?
fiforfa Lt'oa. to quench the Spirit;
nanamanga para*itana mu U*oa, power
over the spirits; uraa'i, to make an
offering to the spirits.

Bai U.. nisi, S.. v. tr., to cut off a piece or sec-
tion. Wango risi, to shave the head.

Wrimii»(na) U.. as rikimaa.

ma (aa) n.. seed, kernel, koi Ute.

UkUf ttallo v. L, to come, to go, to pass by, to
ply about, to become general, kd'iliu,
Uuta*a. Uu i 'est, travel by sea; Uu i
Amim, travel by land, take the upper
toad. ant. kalale; Uu kotto, to intervene

Ua, lliiUu (continued).

(of time); itgatat sa'a Uu ka*akireru*e,
none shall pass in front d them (and
overcome them) ; mu ding^ kumgf e Uueu,
many days passed over me; Uu takalo,
to taike a wrong path; Uu tarau, to con-
tinue; tala ni Uu, path to travel by.
Wango rtti. Samoa Uu, to turn; Florida
UUu, to change; Mota riu, to move feet
or legs; Nguna Uu, excessive; Viti Uu,
to exceed; Mao. rta, to pass by.

Ihdla adv., about, to and fro; e tola liuUu, it
has become general.

HnUvna v. tr.. to turn over, to r e v e r se. fUl 4.

Uaaga v. n.. a common complaint, a plague.
Utmge ni maelaa,

UvtaHi S.. lintaha U. 1. v. i., to be beyond, to
be excessive, used with poss. 3. muim
liuta*ana a mwane 'ie e qaoH ne, more
than those which this man has done;
tut qaarongoisuU e ka'a Uuia*ana ini
ka*au9uU, the disciple is not above hia
master. 2. adv., excessively, exceed-
ingly.

Uwa S., Ihra U.. a cave. Lau Ufa,

ttwo koUiwo, S., kouUwo, U., a hill.

loa 1. S., V. i., to be big. to be too big.

loa 2. the heavens; a^t loa ta*au, the heavens
above. Bugotu maaloa.

loHi 3. adj.. cracked.

lo*a 4. S.. the name of several months; lo'a
madala. May; lo*a maU'e, April; lo'm
maramaramdi, lo*a «At mweimwei,
February; h'a w&i peine, March.

loaaana S., v. tr., to patch, to mend, to dam;
a patch.

lodo 1. to conceive a child: of the child, to be
conceived, nga mwela e lodo, the child
is conceived.
lo4o4 tr., to imagine, to conceive a thoui^t.

lodo 2. v. tr.. to carve, to construct.

lodoeae v. i., to ponder, to conceive in mind.
lodo'i.
lodeeaewge v. n., plan, meditation.

lohaiait loloha4ni v. tr., to lay up in store, to
put by.
lehaiage v. n., something put by, stored*

cold food.
lebaH V. i.

lehe 1. V. i., to sail. Wango rake.

lehe 2. to fit a bowstring to a bow.

lehe 3. to mark out a yam garden; lokea kokolOt
he marked out a garden.

lehe, lelmlehe 1. to fiy, to swoop; met. of
words, to reach; e loko iimgime, he
swo o ped down upon it; waiaku e loko
i saena, my words reached his heart.
kdu loko, a boat harbor south of Port
Adam; mwakana loko, dust,
loheei tr., to cause to fly. Wango roko^
Florida loM>, Mota ro«o, Bougainville
Straits, lofu; Motu fo*o.

lehe 2. (km) ke sulu i lokona, i lokomu, be plcaa-
ing in his sight, thy sight.

leileU n., charcoal.

loileU*e adj., black with cfaarooaU soiled.

leileei n.. a sponge, lost, Fk)rida IpOo$L

S3

tO'lX

loka n., gall* figures in folk lore, the hero throws

gall in the eyes of his enemies.
loke n.. the lamprey, found under rocks near

the shore,
loko 1. V. tr., to gather together. ha*aloko,

2. to agree, loko pe*i, to agree with.
lokoaga v. n., friendship.
lokota V. n.. a bundle; lokotai sa*Ot a bundle

of sago leaves.
lokoloko adv.. altogether.
lokoqaio n., a belt.
loktt, lo'utoka v. i., to be bent, bowed, doubled

up; *a€ loku, halt, maimed in the feet;

Hhi lo'uloku, to crouch (dogs).
lokona tr.. to bend, to double back;

e lokunoa nime, he clenched the fist.

Niu6 loku, Mota lokua, to fold up.
lola V. L, to be great, mighty; walana e lolo, his

word is mighty.
lolata n., courtyard; rara kaakie Mata ing€:*U,

guards his house,
lols V. i.. to be confused, dazed; ere lole oiia

ma*unge, to talk confusedly from fear.

Maori rore, intoxicated.
lolo 1. V. i.. to bend; lolo hapa, to bend turtie-

sheU.
loloai tT.,lolosi hune, to set a trap, lolori kapa*
lolotaH partic. bent down, bowed.
loloaOa-Cku) gerund. Wango rosi.
lolo 2. n., red ants, sugar ants, lolo pdali,

Viti Mo.
lolo 3. V. i.. to be abundant (of herbage), to

cover over (of creepers).
lolo 4. luke Mo, to clear away creepers.
loloSi U.. n., a thicket; Mo* a ni *ei, a clump of

loloha*iai cf, lokaHni.

lotohuna U.. n., a snare, a gin. Mo 1. hune 3.

lololo n.. a swamp in which sago grows. loMo
ni sa'o.

lolomalai v. tr., to dip; Moma'inie nime, to
dip the lumd.

lolomi V. tr., to grudge, to withhold; hele
Momi, to keep for oneself.

loloago n.. mud. swamp. loMo*

lotott V. i., to resound.

lonoiomo kdu lomolomo, the fourth finger.

lofliod V. tr.. to buffet; *ah€ e lomosie i*ola, the
surf buffeted the canoe.

loo 1. V. i., a shortened form of lio to look, loo
'aela, to be immodest; loo diana, to look
good; loo kd'u, lookl loo ta'a, to be
immodest, to offend against ijMropriety.

loo 2. V. i., to be frightened, to be on one's
guard, to be suspidous; idemu ni loo, a
line spatula for one who is scared: when
a man is on his guard (loo) and can not
be ambushed and killed he is won over
by false protestations of friendship and
offers of areca (dtunulaa), then as he sits
chewing the quid (flutnH) he is stabbed
with a large spatula (idsmu).
looH tr., to take couiuel. to consider.

ka*4iloo'i,
loolngo V. n., plan* intention.
looaainl tr., to deliberate about, to intend,
to plan.

loo 2 (continued).

loonaH v. L. to plan; fioJbo loona*i lae, I

intend going,
loona'inge v. n.. plan, meditation, hum*
loonga, Wango ro.
Iooloo*a adj.. scared.
loohi, looloohi V. tr.. to see. to look for.

loohinge v. n.. a searching.
looai U. 1. to see; nau qa'ihe loosia, I saw it not.
muni ne*e loosia, ta*an€ na*a *unua, if I
see him I shall tell it. 2. lai loosi haa,
to go and inspect the money given for
a bride; i*o loosi, to await; ntwala ko
i*o loosi, hire too*ana keni mwala ho
kolie, the party awaiting, they own the
girl who is being bought (sc, in mar-
riage). 3. prep., with suffixed pronoun
idu), awaiting; in M. L.. p. 155. loosi
is incorrectly assigned to the preposi-
tional sense of motion to; *oke i*o kil*u
loosieu, wait a while for me.
lood 4. Mi loosi, a charm set in the path,
lopalopa V. i., to flap (of wings). .
lopo 1. n.. a pool: an artificial pool used to keep
alive i*e ni kdu; lopo ni ha'auri, bap-
tismal font, lit., pool of salvation. San
Cristoval robo,
lopo 2. U.. *oio i lopo muni (parasi), to oppose.
Lopo a boat harbor on the east coast of XJlawa.
Lopo Stt*a Hon a gorge above Su'uholo. Ulawa:

figures in folklore.
lopoH v. i.. to be specious, to pretend, to
deceive. lopoH ere, S.. to deceive with
words; lopo'i hoe, U.. to deceive; lo^'t
vaZtf, U.. lopo*i deu, S.. to feign,
losi, lollosi V. tr.. to squeexe; ni*i lost, to
squeeze, to wring out water; n.. a
sponge, mei lo'ilosi. Viti losi, a spongec
loto. Idloto V. i.. to bathe; esi hele Mo, just
washed, t. e„ convalescent after illness;
horo ni loMo i purine maela, to kill a
man after celebrating a death feast in
order that people may bathe (bathing
being prohibited until some one was
killed); Mo maai, to baptize (late use);
Mo maainge, v. n., baptism,
lotottga V. n., bathing.
lotohi tr., to bathe a person; *ok€ Mohi'o,

bathe yourself.
loto]iila-(kii) gerund.
lott 1. V. i.. to fish for bonito; noho lai lou, I go

bonito fishing.
lou 2. V. i.. to emerge; lou ta'a, to come forth.
lo'u 3. V. i., to ocmtract ceremonial defilement
by walking under women, by eating
with women in the case of boys who
ha*amalaohu, cf. M. A., p. 233.
Polynesian Mu.
lo'tt 4. V. tr., to bend, to double back, malo'u,

lo'uno tr.
lo'u 5. adv. again, anew, also; kahira diana
ikire nga muini lo*u ka'a diana, on the
good and the bad; 'omu sa*a lio odo*ien
*oto Mu, ye shall not see me again.
Samoa Mou, to bend; Wango rou,
Lau lau, Motu lou, again.

LOIPB

54

loVe adj., used as n.; a bend, a verse; ia^aXa^a

me*i U/u*e, one vene.
loHiluuica'a v. i.. to be defiled cefemonially.

U>*u 3.
lo*iiloku ^. loku,
lonlou S.. 'u'oloii U.. V. L, to thunder; ngara

Undout to resound,
loitnge ka'dlounge, quarreling, bickering.
lonawi a short string of money made of a
whitish shell. Big Maiaita currency.
hBuUmsuu,
Itt ending of certain forms of pronouns in the
plural, kolu, mdu, molu; an abbreviation
of *olu, three.
loa U., V. i., to grant. Florida lua.
Inana suU tolai luana, his shoulder blade.
lodaa V. n.. cargo.

lode S., luda U.. v. L, to carry cargo, to be
heavily laden; lude olanga, v. n.. carry-
ing cargo; lude pelt, to "blackbird.** to
recruit men without giving a payment
iholUe) to their relations; haka lude
mwane, a labor vessel recruiting men.
lodanga v. n.. U.. cargo.
Ittdengi tr.. to carry as cargo, to recruit
men. Wango mto. Florida luda, luluda,
lite-(ko) S.. liia-(ku) U. 1. neck; lue susu, sore
throat, voice gone; ngora i lue, to growl;
huui lue, a shoulder of pork given to
chiefs as their portion at a feast; *aqahi
lue, paired back and breast ornament
of shell money for women. Florida
lua, Bougainville Straits, lualua.
lua S., lua U. 2. n.. the rising tide; lue qera,
high spring tide; nisUana lue, high-
water mark; salohi lue, a fiddler crab;
'upui lue, high Ude.
!«*•» lu'elu'e S.. lu<alu*a U. 3. a coconut-leaf

basket for holding yams.
Ineli S.. luengi U.. to lessen a fire by removing

some sticks. Mao. ruke, to remove.
Inelu ha*aluelu, S., v. i., to give a sign.
Ittdue S.. lualua U., n.. a flood; luelue e lake,
the flood came. Wango ruarua, Florida
lualua.
Ittlia to remove, to free, to loosen, iakaluhe,
luhe haahu to be surety for: to take oflf
clothing, to become a heathen again
(late use); luhe Mo, to dear away
creepers. Florida lt(6a, ViU 2si«a, Wango
ruha, Motu ruhaia, MoU luka, in tawa-
luka, to peel off.
luhesl tr., to loosen, to free, to let go.
Iuh6dla-(ktt) gerund,
luhtt V. i.. to cut off branches from a tree.

luhud tr.
lula U., n., a spear; generic term.
lulu i. V. i.. to follow: used with isuU, luluisulu
luluisulinge v. n.
luluisullla*(ku) gerund,
lulu 2. V. i., to fold; a Lulu^eu, a proper name,
lit. folder of leaves,
lulimgl tr.

lnlimgfla-(na, ni) gerund.
lulu 3. qd'ilulu, v. i., to be dismayed. qH'i 2.
lulu 4. V. i.. to back water with paddles or oars;
'ahe lulu, boiling tide.

lata 5. ora lulu, to bdch; po'o luU, to fill the

mouth with food,
lolttlitt tt., a coconut frond. Uduhui niu.
luluaaaa n., a gecko lisard with projecting

eyes, the children catch them with a

grass noose or a coconut leaflet midrib.
Inma S.. a variant of nume, house; kuuilume,

a village,
lumu, lumute S.. moss. Mota lumuia, Malay

lumut. Macassar lumu, malumu, soft.
lufliQ'e adj.. moss-covered.
lumwa S.. lomwalumwa U., to be long and

matted (of hair); q&'une e lumwe, k>ng-

haired.
Inpot Inpulupu U., v. i., to strike; lupu ra-

koma'ini, to nail upon, to crucify.
lupttH tr.
lupvngelnl tr.. to bump; maOupu'e^

bruised.
luqaH v. I., to pretend; luqeH laOae, to pretend

to go; luqe*i Mru, to pretend to be busy;

luqe'i lalawa kaaki, to give a feigned

excuse.
lustt n., the ribs in a canoe tied on to cleats

left on the planks forming the hulL

M. A., p. 295; *eniie lusu, what sise

canoe, lit. how many riba.
luaulnume S., luauinima U., a large seagoing

canoe, lit. ribbed like a house.
lu*u V. tr., to move one's habitation, hd'ilu'u.

hunt lu'tie mo ola ineu, to remove my^

goods; kira *asi lu'ua hdHliu, they

ceased hostilities. Viti luku, to remove.
luuH V. tr., to forbid, ere luu*i.
luuluu sungfi luuluu, elkhom fern.

H

ma 1. adjectival prefix of condition: lingi
malingi, mena mamenamena, Mota ma,
Maori ma,

ma 2. S., a prefix used with nouns which expresa
relationship; mwa, ro ma hungaoua,
two brothers-in-law; ro ma uweline, two
maternal uncles.

mi 3. as ma I : fii^iimtf.

mX 4. a noun ending: 'omo 'ouo'omomA, ndkm
nA'unekume,

maa 1. the eye: maana e Ide, he squints; mam
nora, to be angry-eyed; maa ngangua,
blear-eyed from smoke; maa rodo, blind,
to forget; maaku e iH'iere, I am dissy;
maana e waaro, goggle-eyed; hete*i hum,
to fix the eyes upon; 'o JbliMM «Maffiii. pe^
your eye; Mnuhinu {hirukiru) maa, ejre-
lid; Uo i ngaei maa, to look askance at,
to envy; marangia i maa, ejrebrow;.
ma*aru5i maa, to wink the esre; mimisi
maa, the mantis, lit. squirt in the e3^;
nohomi maa, to turn the eyes away;.
paraHmaa, eyeshade; nwfi« nue maa,
eye ointment; siMU maa, excoecaria
tree, lit. stings the eye; ana e iahanie
maamu ne. In that he opened your
eyes; e tdiUia maana, he doeed his cyea;
*oke 'uhte maamu, you dose your eyes;

S5

MADAU

1 (continued).
'u'ui maa, the eyeball; *u*u tnaai dehi,
a pearL

mafl 2. the face; 'aio maa^ to turn the face;
hoda moat to wash the face; e ladaa'inie
ffMMna, he fell on his face; lio hunt maa,
to ezerdse partiality; nunuku maa, to
wrinkle the face; e ptiingUaa maana, he
set his face; rHima^a, to cut and dis-
figure the face; *usu maa, to accuse, lit.
to point at his face.

maa 3. with genitive t in Sa'a. ni in Ulawa; hole,
mesh, opening, outlet, door, gate, fttoai
nume, S., maani nima, U., door; maai
para, S., maani para, U., gate; qli*ulimaa,
door lintel; sf^u maa ana mu *ape, to mend
the meshes of the nets; taha maa, to
open the door; to*oni pono maa, patched
clothes; maa ni qelusu, nostril.

maa 4. edge, point, blade, brim; maai mndi, a
gorge for flying-fish; maana nahi, the
edge of the sword; pulu maai sen, a
circular piece used in inlaying, a dot.

maa 5. front of the house;, t maa, outside;
odona maa, a gate opening directly in
front of one; oku i maa, wall in front.

maa 6. a stick, a match; maai aro, a stalk of
ginger; maai (maani) dunge, a match.

maa 7. one, a, also in plural, maai laenga, S.,
maani laenga, U., a journey; maai sola,
v., a piece of bast cloth; hat maai dengi
heHHune, the four winds; k&'u mei nga
maa, give me one; ta*ata'a maai ngeu,
one meal.
maai S., maani U. v. tr., to eye, to watch;
maai ngeu, S., maani ngeu, U.. the
evening star, so called because it shines
at the time of the evening meal which
it watches; maa shows no sign of a break
in pronunctation.
maaaiy maamaani tr., to copy, to do like,
to watch. Mota maiai, Polynesian
maia.

maa 8. dried canarium nuts, ngdli maa, put
into a cane basket (tangi) and kept
above the fire. ha*amaa.

ma'a 9. father, vocative: ma'a ineu, my dear
fatherl mama*a,

maadi U., v. tr., to reject.
maadfla-(kn) gerund.

Maadi'a the landing-place for Ripoo. Ulawa.

ma'aa n., a strong-smelling fish, caught with
a bait of red clay in which crabs' claws
have been set.

maahoo v. i., to be new to, to be a novice at.

maahooai v. i., to boast: ere maahoosi,

ma'ahiif ma'ama'ahu v. L, to sleep; ma*ahu
maia Vola, to fast; ma*ahu pole, to
dieam; nau ma'ahu qqlea, I dreamt it;
ma'ahu suu*i, to guard at night.
ma'ahimge v. n., sleep, e to*o ni ma'ahunge,
it is time for sleep. Motu mafuia,

maai» maaimaai 1. v. tr., to permit, to allow;
Uo maai, UM maai, to allow.
maaflafni U., tr., lio maaila*ini, to view
with favor.

maai 2. adj., holy, sacred: ha'amaa'i, lolo

maa'i 2 (continued).

maa'i, to baptize; loto maa*inge, bap-
tism; ngdu maa*i, ngUu maaHnge,

sacrificial eating. Mota matai, good;

Tahiti maitai, Mao. maitai,
maaH 3. beloved; mwane maa*i ineu, my dear

fellow,
maakahi v. i., to peek, to peep, to peer,
maakali v. tr., to visit.
maala adv., even if, granted that, supposing.

mala.
maalan air, firmament, lauwanga.
maalihdlo the main doorway of a house.
maalimae hostile bands: mu maalimae. Lau

maalimaea, enemy,
maalimwalo a staging for thatching (tahera'i)

erected inside the house,
maalitawa an opening in the shore reef, a

landing-place.
maamaa a fastening, a button.
mA'amana ro hd*ima*amana, mu he*ima*aman-

anga.
ma'amata'a adj., ashamed, reverential.
Maana Odo Port Adam, Malaita.
maana'o U., v. i., to be deserted (of a place);

a desert place, na'onga,
maani, maamaani v. tr., to copy, to do like, to

repeat: ha'amaani, S., hd*imaani, U.

maani moo, to watch the dance; si*o

maani, to collect.
maapala S., adj., unprovoked, malidous;

horonga maapala, murder,
maapott n. 1. a measure of shell money, from

the fingertips to the elbow, a cubit.

2. a piece, a bit.
ma'apQ'a U., adj., bloody; n., stripes, bruises.
ma'araraH v. tr., to provoke.
ma'am U., v. i., to sleep, to twinkle; ma*aru

talahi, to go like winking,
ma'anmga v. n., sleep.
maame S., dm maarue, to serve two masters,
maamii v. tr., to wink; maarusi maa, in a

twinkling.
maaiJHma U., ura maasilima, the second day

of the moon.
maatala U. 1. as maapala, S., unprovoked*

2. in vain. Lau mae^fola,
maatoli v. i., to visit.
maatoto v. tr., to expect, to await; maaioto

muni, U.. to a^radt.
maaHt U., miSi S., v. i., to fear, to be afraid.

ha'amaa'u.
maaHmi tr.
mada 1. n., dirt, mu mada. ha*amada»
mada 2. n., a fresh-water shell-fish (Nerita sp.).
mada'a adj., dirty, soiled; to'oni e mada* a ani

hesVonga, garments defiled by the flesh.
mada*anga n., filth.
madala 1. the morning star; madala e qa'a, the

day star is rising; nga madala mere 'ana*i

qaroa adaru'a, when the day star rises

we shall hitch it up for them. 2. lo'a

madala, the name of a month. May.

Viti maiaha, morning; Bougainville

Straits mataiala, Orion's Belt.
fflAdali, mamadali adj., greasy, slippery;

maenga (maemaeha) mamadali, fever.

MADAU

56

mtd«Ii, — — ^*" (continued).

Viti dadala, Samoa malali, Lau afedali,

Florida madali.
midamada 1. v. i.. to be dirty. 2. U.. mada-

mada sulu, a month. October,
madara'a adj., sweating, perBpiring; noko

rHadara'a, I sweat.
madara'aaga n., sweat.
madali U., a full grown coconut, hoi madeU.
maditt U., adj., overlapping; v., to overiap.
madoo S., adj., cooked.
madoro adj.. hot; ha*adoro,

madoranga n., heat, fever. Malay d^ah,

hot.
madott U. 1. madoH ni wala, a phrase. 2.

adj., broken clean off. 3. cinnamon,
madtt S., adj., beloved, dear; kale madu ineu^

my beloved child.
mae, auianaa 1. v. i.. to die, to be ill. to be

numb, to be ecUpaed. of moon; mae

*apolo, paralyied; a oiako mae. So-and-
so is sick; a ola e mae 'oio. So-and-so is

dead; e kai lalamoa e mae kumia Qa*,

Qai had the death of four men to account

for; mwane da na kolu mae, lest we die;

mae su*esu*ela*i, to die of hunger; roro

mae, to strangle; uhu mae, a wig; e mae

*o*o, quite dead.
mawga v. n.. sickness, death; maenga fcnto-

kula, danger; maenga mamadali, fever;

e ka*a hunie ike maenga, not unto death;

mwaanie maenga, from death; e ^*ike

munia nga maenga, not unto death.
masta (kn) v. n., death feast, death. U.; hire

ngUu maetana a ola, they eat the death

feast of So-and-so; koro ni loloio i purine

maeia, to kill a man after the death

feast in order that persons may bathe,
maaha U., maaoMaha S., v. n., sickness;

maemaeha mamadali, fever.
maala (kn) v. n., danger, death; si*ohaa*i

maeia, to be in danger,
maalaa v. n., danger, sickness; liunge ni

maeiaa, a plague, epidemic; maeiaa ni

qe*u, meningitis.
maa 2. used to denote excess, with poos. 3.

e 'a'aila'a *oto mae ana, he is very strong;

e lae *oio ni mae, he went like anything;

*u*u ni mae, heavy rain.
maa 3. the lee shore. *asi mae; lade mae, deep

water.
maa 4. to be well mashed (of areca nut);

s^ne he mae, pound it to a pulp.

tr., to be ill of, to die of. Mota maU,

Polynesian mate,
5. n., a fighting column, nga mae; mu

na*ona*oi mae, armies. ma*aUmae.
maa 6. n.. war; dAn mae knni, to make war on;

Ukn mae, to cease hostilities; ho apani

mae fe^ikie, sides with us; Woa ni mae,

M. A., p. 260, a ghost associated with

war.
maa 7. weapons; tapo mae, to seiae weapons,
ma'a 8. a pronged spear used for fishing; nwa

ma*e, a measure, 1} yards.

U., adj., holy, sacred, having to do with

the ancestor ghosts.

(continued).
maaanga v. n.. holiness (late use). Wango

maalo adj., ripe (of fruits); the suffixed pro-
nouns na, f»» may be added, 'tana ho
mo/Ao, pregnant, lit., her belly la ripe;
Mbf mado, a rock near Ngorangoia;
taa hiidia hdm mado, prov.. dry enough
to split U» maelo; maekma. Its ripeness,
when it is ripe; m aeUma e ngdu diana,
when ripe it is good eating; ngdli mado,
ripe canarium nuts, the name of a
month. August.

maslooaga n.. enemy, a maeloonga, mu
madoonga, Wango maeronga,

maahipn'a S., adj., bruised, lufu,

flUMfluaa S., adj., used with the personal
article; a maemaea, the sick man; mu
maemaea, the sick.

maamaako'a adj., gentle, mamaeko'a,

ma*aflMha v. i., to decorate the penon with

maaai S., article plural vocative, maeni *inoni,
maeni mwane, maeni heni; used also in
plain statement maeni Hnoni ineu, my
own people.

maaooto v. i., to be grave, sober, quiet.

maha v. tr., to profane holy things, to use
sacrilegiously.
mahawga v. n., profanation.

fluha a strong-smelling hert> (Evodla hortensis)
used to decorate the body, stuck in
armlets.
ma'aasaha v. i., to decorate with mahe, to
festoon in general; a gariand.

mlhiri, anilmahiri v. i., to be intoxicated from
eating areca fruit.
mlhlringe v. n., intoxication.

maholo 1 . n., space, interval of time or distance;
nga maholo, what a length of timet nga
maholo e liu, time went on; mahoto m
lae inge'ie, his time for going; maketo
nou lae, at the time when I went;
mahdo *eta mwane e ha*atau ue, while
the other was yet far off; mahoto 'ts.
now; ina'ona mu maholo, in former
times; ipuHne maholo, after the time;
fifO(MiftN>do ana maholo, end of the time;
maholo ni raon*i, time of virginity; fo'o
la'e maholo, sometimes; maholo e Mo, a
proper time. Florida polo, when. holo.

maholo 2. U.. a thing, a piece, a part.

maholo 3. v. i., to be parted; sae sa*a maholo
wa he mou, thoughts shall not be parted
and shall not cease,
maholota U.. n., a piece; m akoloia ni pua,
piece of areca nut.

mahono U.. iapa mahono, to Interfeie. to be a
busybody, hono,

mahoro v. L, to appear in view, to pass in view.
ha'amahoro.

mihu rdu mehu, to abide; kdru mehu, to endure
hardness.

mahnngaona n., to mahungaona, father-in-law
and son-in4aw, mother-in-law and
daughter-in-law; mwane male and heni
female are added to distinguish the pairs.

57

MALAOHU

malttt'oliii'o n., early morning, dawn; used with
locative i. hu*o.

mllittro adj., disturbed, muddy (of water);
da miUniro ana, disturbed it. m& 3.

mahttni adj., gentle, tractable.

mli 1. ady.. hither, here, this way; the demon-
strative nd may be added; mAi ana
walumalau, in the world; mdi i *ano, on
the earth; mdi i haha, on the earth; mdi
kaka, under the earth; mAi iorohana, on
the earth; *ur€ *oio mdi i 'aehoialana,
from the beginning up till now; *oko lae
mdi *ure tfet, where are you from; mm
*ure mdi i oia, I am from such-and-such
a place; mAi nga hou pua, give me an
areca nut; Mnue mdine, the place here;
mAi sXe», this way; mdi i numet into the
house; po*o mlU* hither, this side; qd*u
ffiAf , hither. Mota ma* Polimesian mat,

mli 2. ebb, low tide, turn met, U. host met,
it is low tide; mAi rata, dead low water
at spring tides; mtii ama waarowaaro e
qaa, ebb when the moon rises; mdi ana
waarowaaro e suu, ebb when the moon
sets; hdntta e la ni tola kdu ana mdi rara,
the people have gone gathering coral at
dead low water. Mota meai, Viti maH,

ttOAf milimei 3., U., v. tr.. to help, to be on the
side of: used with numerals more than
ten as an alternative to mana in the sense
of and, with; awala mdia *eniia, how
many over ten. cf. M. L., pp. 151-153.
Used as prep, meaning 'with'; the pron.
du, 'o, a, etc., are suffixed; wala*a mdia,
speak with him.
miila-<k«) gerund.; a mdilaku, my helper.
miila*i]ii U., v. tr., lio mdila'ini, to approve
of.

mi4 4. participial ending, oro oramd'i. Mota
mag.

mil 5. suffix to verb used intransitively.
cf, md*ini.

mllmepttsii U., n., memefosu S., a tree
(Ficus sp.) with bunches of flowers on
the stem as well as on the branches;
taka mala mdimepusn, to flower like
this tree.

ma*iai verbal suffix, 'ono *onomd*ini.

malpo U., V. i., to be dirty, unclean.

mlitale v. i., to be poor, possessing nothing.
tale 2. nlolada mdilale, the cry of the
poor.
mHitalania v. n., poverty.

makahtt adj., soft, mealy (of yams when
cookMl).

makaW adj.. bioken into pieces, asunder, kaka.
makaka'a adj., as miUtaka.
nakad v. tr., to break into pieces.

makaato to overflow; honn makeato, full and
running over.

makakaai U., v. tr., to disown, to put aside.
keke.

makemaketa (ku) n.. wiles, devices.

adj., gapped, with a broken edge. here.
t'a U.. adj.. wet, damp.

makolu adj.. resounding, with a loud noise.
Maori iakitru, thud.

mala 1. adv., as, like, according to. as one might
aay, as it might be. mala hire manata*i
deue, as they were wont to do; mala *oto
nou ka*a hdesie ike, as though I had
never done it; mala nga ia*a, like I don't
know what; mala pdine, to give oneself
airs; mala e *u*ile*inie nga hoi hen, about
a stone's throw; maahu mala Vela, to
fast, lit. to sleep canoe fashion; kira knnn
Poo mala ideni, they kill pigs (presum-
ably) tomorrow; nga keni mala a kalemn,
a girl a mate for your son; taka mala
mdimepnsn, to flower like the mdime"
pusn tree.

mala 2. U.. maala S., granted that, supposing.
3. to act like, to become like, to speak
the language of. ha*amala. *omn ke
mala mwela kdn, become like children;
a porona ko malamala Sa*a, So-and-so
speaks the language of Sa'a. San
Cristoval mora, Fagani mwara, Omba
miwei^e,

mala 4. prefix of condition, malaken. Mota
mala 2.

malaahonga S., v. i.. to make trial of. to tempt:
used with poss. 3. cf. mala, ahonga,

malaahonganga v. n., trial, temptatbn.
malaaliongala-(ktt) gerund.
Mala 5. Florida name for Mwala.
Malade a village at the northwest end of Port

Adam, Malaita.
maladi adj.. stale, sour (of yam and taro mash,

ka*apo*e).
mala hilisi U.. same as mora kdlisi, northeast

wind.
malahtt-(kn) n., friend, namesake; a malakaku,
my friend; malakuku, vocative, friend;
used with kd*i 7, ro kd*i malakune, mu
ke*i malaknne, friends. Wango maraku.
Malaita </. mora 3. ita may possibly be a con-
tracted form of Lau baita, big.
malska a wound. Lau maala, Wango numra.

malaka*a adj., wounded,
malakake U., adj.. unstable, keke.

malakakeai v. tr., to cause to spill, to
overturn.
malalahu'a S., adj.. covetous.
malamala 1. v. i., to act wantonly, to behave
badly.
malamalanga v. n., wantonness, mischief,

m.

malamala *anga n., evil. harm. Mota
mala, bad.

malamala 2. to talk the language of. mala 3.

malamalaoha U.. light in weight.

malamalau a pot hole in the ground.

malamaai v. i.. to destroy, used with poss. 3.
malamala 1.

malaohtt (the ao is a diphthong) v. i.. to be
separated for initiation, of boys who
live in the taoka on the beach with the
men preparatory to catching their first
bonito isdn) . take ni malaoku. cf. take.
ha'amalaoha v. tr.. to initiate, to assist a
novice in catching his first bonito: the
man in the front of the canoe hooked

MALAOHU

S8

nulMhii (continued).

the fish and the boy sitting behind
him grasped the rod as the man swung
the fish into the canoe. M. A., p. 233.
San Cristoval maraohu.

malaohoaca U.. v. i.» to make tria! ot . to tempt.
malaahoHga.
malaohonganga v. n.. triaJ, temptation.
m«laohongala-(ku) gerund.

Ma.apa an island in Marau Sound. Guadal-
canar; the hades of the Solomon Islands.
M. A., p. 260.

malapau'a'a U.. adj.. strong: Papau, paula'a.

malao 1. an island; malau mou, an islet.

Milaii 2. a bay west of Cape Z616e. Malaita.
3. Port Adam. 4. 'Olu Malau. Three
Sisters Islets, south of Ulawa, called
also Malau ni I'e. the home of the
ghosts and uninhabited; the names of
the three islets are. West Sister Ali'ite,
Middle Sister Malau Lalo. East Sister
Malau Peine; on the side of Ali'ite
facing Ulawa is the rock called H&u ni
Keni* the women's rock, where the
female ghosts emerge from the sea as
they cross on their last journey. M. A., p.
257 ; maraaui Malau, the southeast wind.

malaa 5. the fangs of dogs.

malelede adj.. broken in pieces. Ude.

maleledi v. tr.. to rail at. to rebuke, ledi 1.
maleUdi oraha'a mwaanie ngaini, to
rebuke a man for sin; ere maleUdi, to
rail at; sae maleledi, rage.
mtleledinge v. n.. abuse.

malengoleiigo adj.. reclining, falling to one
side, not upright.

maleqeleqe U.. weak.

maleqelaqenga v. n.. weakness.

maleti U.. uhi maleu, a month, April.

mili U.i to be roasted; a Poro Wakio Mali, a
legendary person.
mali'a adj.. cooked, roasted. Padas. Bor-
neo, maliaf red.

mali'e S.. lo*a malVt, a month. April.

iififi«fciHM U.. adj.. leaping; *ura malikiliki, to
leap.

mlUmeU adj.. sweet. Niu5 lango meli, bee;
kumelU, sweet; Borneo manis.

malingl, nifl«**""fl* adj.. spilt. Ungi. v. tr., to
overbalance, to lean; hoiiu malingi, full
to the brim.
mfHng jrf tr.i to cause to spill.

mallti (ko) to be fitting, becoming; e malisiku,
it becomes me; nou ka'a malisi 'unue,
I am not worthy to tell it.

male 1. black beads or bugles, sections of a
creeper, used with haa and huresoso in
the m^tging of *uri mwado, etc.: dark
glass beads introduced in trade are also
called mak); malo hurt, beads cut off in
sections; tnalo uU, beads rubbed down
to

malo 2. asthma, to suffer from asthma; iUle
malo, to gasp for breath.

malopi adj., with jagged edges.

malo'tt adj., bent, crooked. lo*ii. Su'uMalo'u.
a bay on Big Malaita opposite Aio. a
bay at the north end of San Cristoval.

mUo, mXlamJUis, oumXlii 1. v. i., to shade, to

o\ exdhad'^w. ka*amaiu, e md^M haahe,
ir i^ in thadow; sduUhi meiumelu, dusk,
mi lute (ko) shade, t Meluiei Rara, under
the shade of the coral tree, a village on
Ugi; t m€ltda$ta, under the rule of. used
of the overshadowing power of chiefs.

mXlii (kit) 2. n., t melune, under the rule of. seen
in proper names *<m*ou i Melune.

mllqha U., v. n.. shade, used with poss. 3.
Mota malu, Maori maru.

mXlumtt adj.. soft, gentle; lae mdlumu, go
quietly; sae mlUumunge, v. n., long-
suffering. Mota malumlum, Viti
malumu.

mama'a vocative, father; a mama'a, of a par*
ticular person; a mama* a e 'unue, father
said so. 2. used as an affectionate
address by the father to the male child.
cf. Polynesian tamaiti (little father).
ma*amana, n., ro Ml*i ma*amana, ro
ma'amana, U.. vocative, father and son.

mamidili adj.. running with sweat, madali.
ma*ema*eka mamadali, S.. fever.

mamadtt adj.. gentle, harmless, madu.

mamae adj.. fine, well ground; one mamae, fine
sand; sae mamae, meek. Wango
mamae, soft.

flumaeko'a adj.. gingerly, gently, subdued,
meek. maemaeko*a.

mamaela'a adj.. weak, prone to sickness,
mamaela'asga v. n., sickness.

mamahu'e n.. a tree, used for house posts.

mama'ila'a adj., despisingly. used with poss. 3.
la*a 3. ere mama'ila'a, to speak de-
spisingly of.

mama'ingi U.. v. i.. to despise, to reject; to
attack, to be fierce (of a dog or a pig),
used with poss. 3; mama'ingi *asi, to
reject.
mama4ngi*a U., adj.. disparagingly.
mama'ingi'ala-(ku) gerund.

mamaHraa v. i., to work at, to labor earnestly
over.

mamakare v. i., a children's game of hide and

seek with an object held in the hands,
mamakine adj., abashed, ashamed, with poss. 3.

ha'amamakine. ddu mamakine ada, put

them to shame.
mamakinanga n., ere mamakinanga, to

reproach. Gilbert Islands makina^ to

fear.
mamakola v. i.. to reject, to handle shamefully.

to be fierce, savage (of dogs and pigs).

used with poss. 3.
mamakolaai tr.
mamala n., wild taro.
MamaU WMl n.. the Milky Way.
mamalidn'a U., adj.. quiet, peaceable, doing

no harm,
mamalo, mamamalo v. i.. to rest, ha'amamalo,
maiiialonga v. n., rest, a resting-place.
mamaloha v. n., a resting-place. Wango

mamaro, Bugotu mamatho,
mamalate-(ku) v. n.. shade, shadow, veranda.

i mamalutana nume, on the veranda»

main.

59

MANGO

mamangto'o v. i.. to be at peace, free from
strife, t'o mamanuto*o. manu 2, to'o.

mimingo (ku) breath, mango 2. mamango
i saCf metaph., heart.

nuunataku adj., fearful, dreadful. maa*u.
Polynesian mataku, fear.

mama'u adj.. causing fear, fearful, ma'u.
lio mama^u, to look ugly; mama*u ni
mwane, a fearful lot of men, beyond
count.

mamau'ft'a S.» adj.. smooth, with smooth
surface.

mama'udi v. i.. to be cold (of the body).
mama'udinge v. n., cold. Borneo madud.

mamHiirita'a adj., living, alive, m&uri, ta'a 5. j

mama'vm'e S.. ma'ttma'nru'a U., adj.. sleepy.
ma*uru.
maiiiJi*ttru'aBgft v. n., sleepiness.

mmmaware adj., freed from, safe, in safety; Vo
mamawaret to be in safety.

mamenamena adj., broken to bits, menasi.

nUmi S. 1. v. i., to taste; mdmi okonga ana,
taste and try it. Motu mami,

mUmi 2. pron. plural 1 ezcl. suffixed to noun;
nimem&mit our hands.

mMmn 1. v. i.. to entice animals with scraps of
food, ha'amdmu.
mftmu'i tr.. to throw scraps of food to entice
animals.

mamu 2. to be burnt in cooking (of food).
ha'amdmu'i.

mana U., used of numerals over ten; awala
mana hat, fourteen; mana *enUe, what
unit over ten. Probably ma, n., na,
suffixed pronoun, cf. Arag ve, Espiritu
Santo va, Santa Cruz wa. M. L.,
p. 232. Viti mani.

manata 1. v. i., to be taught, quiet (of animals),
broken in, tamed, harmless,
manatanga v. n., wisdom, nature, knowl-
edge. Motu manada, gentle; Wango
manata.

manata (kn) 2. v. n.. nature, custom; iailai
suite manaUina, according to his nature;
manaiana mu 'inoni, mu manatai *inoni,
the nature of men. manatana € rako.
Florida manaha,

manata'a adj., tame. kind, ha'amanaia'a.
ke'i ne'i manatana diana, they shall
become well tamed.

manata'i, manata'i (Qaloto) v. tr.. to know, to
be accustomed; nou ka*a manata* ie ike,
I do not know; mala kire manata'i deue,
as they were wont.
manata Ini, manate'ini tr.. to know, to
have; *omu ka'a manata' inie wa *omu he
leesie, ye neither know him nor have seen
him; atei e manata* inie, who knows, as
Spanish ^ quien sabe? I don't know;
'o manata*inie hoi niuf nou pu*o, have
you a coconut? I have not. Samoa
manatu, to think; Lau manata, Florida
manaha.

manawa v. L, to proclaim oneself the cause of
the death of another by magic. San
Cristoval manawa, to breathe.

maneko, manemaneko v. i., to be gentle, harm-
less.

manekonga v. n., gentleness.

manekod U., tr., hele manekosi, to handle
gently. Wango manigo.
mMni adv.. entirely, altogether: precedes verb;
mdni nVilana sakanga e mdni lae, the
complete giving of power is completely
given; ke mdni dolosie satada, let him
ask all their names; mdni wala, S.. to
take counsel; mdni dhutaka, U.. all of us;
mdni oaoanga ha'iliu, equality. Wango
mwani. article; Lau qaimani, altogether.
milnikulu'e adj., glorious, resplendent, re*
nowned. ha'amdnikulu'e, kuluhi.

mMnikuluha n., glory, renown, used with
poss. 3.

mlnikulu'anga n., glory, praise,
manini oh manini, to be of orderly behavior.
mJlmre'i 1. v. tr.. to clean up, to put in order.
2. partic. skilfully; hele mdnire'i; i*o
mdnire*i, to live orderly.

mUnire'inJ U., tr.

inllnire*i.iila-(kis) gerund.

mlnire'inge'ini tr., to work skilfully at.
manola adj.. clear, pure, clean, ha'amanola.

manomanola'a, manomanoleta adj., unsul-
lied, refined.

manolanga v. n. Wango manora,
mllna 1. a bird, insect, mdnu poo, the pig-
bird, with a cry like the grunt of a hog.
a bird of ill omen; hoi menu, an egg;
pipisi ana mdnu, tail feathers; ihui
menu, feather; mdnu fcofit.a tame bird.
Sa'a ni menu, cf. ha'addhi. Mota
manu, Polynesian manu.
mMnu 2. v. i., to float; hdu menu, pumice stone;
hele mdnu soda, to hold level, upright;
mdnu odo, to be upright, level; waaro^
waaro e mdnu *a*a mdi ilengi, the moon
floated clear in the sky.

mMnule'i U., partic, raised up on high.
Samoa, Maori manu, to float.
mllngi-(na, ni) 'unu mengini, to tell everything
out; kire ka'a lio mdngini, they saw
none of it. Wango mangina, at all.
mAngite (kn) a relic of the dead, an amulet,
hair. bone. etc. rf. kulu.

mUngitana the dead body,
mango 1. v. i., to be finished, completed; the
adverb 'ofo may be added : with dhuta has
the sense of ail. ha*aptango. e mango
*oto, quite finished; mango *oto, that fin-
ished, thereupon ; melu mango *oto mdi, we
are all here; sae mangp, sae mangonga,
ha*asaemango, mental satisfaction; dhu-
tamere'i mango, both of us; dhutamolu
mango, all of you; mango te*ete*e, finished
for good and all.

mangomango adv., completely, follows
verb,
mango, mamango S.. mangomango U. 2. to
breathe; mango asa, to gasp; mango
pdine, to sigh; mango toli, to faint, be
insensible; ili mango, to draw in the

MAHGO

60

2 (continued),
breath; toU mangq, to hold the breath;
to'o fNaMfo, to have breath,
mango (ku) 3. breath, chest; moMgoku, my
life; mangcn ola, breath; manfoiM e sun,
his breath has gone, he is dead ; mafifONa
ue ana, he is still alive; man§jna e
puuio'o Uliho'i, his breath returned.

mangoaHni v. tr., to be satisfied with;
mangq 1.

mangofluuigo (kv) n., breath, chest.

wianjiMii adv., rich, fat; wAsu mangcmi, to emit
a rich savor.

naagiiliinfvltt adj., resounding.

mao» maomao 1. v. i.. to dance; moo kidehide,
to dance to the clapping of hands; moo
pe*e dhui, to dance holding a dancing-
club; *arasi moo, to lead the chorus in a
dance; maani moo, to watch the dance;
okoa moo, to practise the dance; snlu
moo, to sing dancing-songs.
maonga v. n., dancing; puulU maomga, to

tread the dance.
maoli tr.. maoli moo, to join in the dance.
■Miolila-(ka) gerund. Lau mao» Wango
moo.

HUM 2. halo maOf a pump drill; a piece of hard
palm wood is tipped with a flake of
flint which is bound tightly on, two
strings hang from the other end and are
made fast to a short stick; these strings
are then twisted around the palm wood
and the drill revolves as the strings
unwind and rewind by pushing down
the short stick.

ma'ohi, mama'oU S., v. tr.. to await, to expect.
ohi 1. ma*ohi raqasi, to await.
maSihiiM^a v. n., expectation; ma'ohinge

susuSo*o, hope (late use).
ma*oliila-(ka) gerund.
I'oH 1. adj.. broken in two. 2. n., a landslip.
o t o t.
t«oH*o'l altogether broken. Florida
maioti.

(*• S., adj., well grown, fatted; pdsu
maamaopu'ef in full leaf.

ouumaone U., adj.. sore smitten.

maopaopa adj.. distinct, showing up sepa-
rately (of trees in a landscape), opa.

mapipl adj., receding (of water); wdi e mapipi
*ohe *oto td'inie kolune mwakana, vdiether
the water had receded off the face of
the earth.

mapo 1. n., a locust.

Mapo 2. Roasi Bay, MalaiU.

mlfostt U., adj., stinking, rotten.

fluipatapvta U., adj., bruised.

maqa n., Tahiti chestnut (Bocoa, Inocarpus
edulis). Mota mwake, Tahiti mape.

man 1. i mora nume, the front of the house,
platform at front door, courtyard.

man S., mala U. 2. mora Mlisi, the northeast
wind. Possibly Mota maran, light.

ICara 3. (Tolo) the island of Malaita. Sa'a
Mwala; Mara masiki: Florida Mala,

maffaa-(lni) 1. n., lone, unaided; ineu maraaku.

raa-(kv) (continued).

I by mjrself ; ola maraana, nothing Uke
it. superexccUent. 2. U.. of one's own
accord; e hd*iarea maraama, be pushed
himself forward.

maraalmmii v. i., to do a thing secretly.
mMfiMiiif.

maraaa the southeast trade wind blowing from
south-southeast to eastpoortheast during
the months from May to November.
aau, maraau «w> koto, south-southeast
wind, a strong wind with cloudy days
but no rain; maraau i Malmu, southeast
wind, from the direction of *01u Malau;
msroati $ foro, south-by-east wind;
maraau *ufu*ufu, east wind, biows over
the middle Cupu'upu) of Ulawa;
maraau wH qini, east-by-north wind,
brings rain; maraau ro one, east-north-
east wind. Maori marangai, east wind.

mara hilisi northeast wind, fine weather with
masses of cumulus clouds; mara kiUsi
i matawa, north-by-east wind.

maraH havtaa U., v. i., to droop (of flowers).

Maramaia *0'or<Ni U., the name of a canoe
in a story.

maramarapa'a adj., secure, serene, prosperous.

maramaiawii lo*a maramarawdi, name of a
month.

miraiiga 1. maramga i maa, eyebrow.

maranga-(na, oi) 2. hiU maraugama, take from
amongst.

maraoha (ao diphthong) a large food-bowL

maraoh«*a S., maraohu^a U., adj., stale, not
fresh, brackish, water which tastes of the
bamboo water<arrier. Wango mora-
okua,

marapalsH adj.. fallen headlong, rdpu.

flurara v. i., to be diffident, hesiuting. to
flinch; hiU marara, to act with diffi-
dence. Mota maragai, to tremble;
Motu kamarai, to be coy.

martra*a adj.. white and glistening. r€*a.
Mota maran, light {lux),

marafiro'a adj., sumptuous, bright.

marawa U., to be blackish, purplish, in color;
marawa ni deni, daybreak; aau marawa,
the nuts getting purple in color before
ripening; a month, July. Mota moras,

marea n., a small fresh-water fish.

mareho S. (a Wango word), a mareko, So-and
so. hereko,

marlMriH adj.. broken into stivers. Niu«
malipilipi,

maroa v. n., to be thirsty. Mota marou,
Marshall Islands mam,

manida U., adj.. tender, of flesh meat.

masa to be shy, ashamed, re s pec tf ul; used with
poss. 3. ma*amasa*a, ka'amasa, e masa
aku, he was shy of me; masa mwaani, to
be shy of doing; masa suke, to be
ashamed to beg.
maiangi v. n., shame, confusion.

mlri, miHmad S. 1. to commit adultery; misi
hunt, to commit adultery with; Mima
tit fnJM, U.. an adulterous place,
mlsiage v. n., adultery.

6i

MAWA

mid, mi'imesi 1 (continued).

ligllani gerund., her fornication.

mill 2. U.» article, a, a piece: used also in
diminutive and depredatory sense;
nga and mwai may preoede. mUsi
kaiekut my child; nga m&si toAo, what
(thing); mwai mesi sae, hearts; iduidu
mesi 'et, jumped about on the firewood.
Wango: cf. si in kasi; hasi et, a tree;
kasi noni, a man; Lau si a.

mitl 3. dwarfs, pygmies: probably the autoch-
thons, oredited with being stupid.
San Cristoval masi,

mMikl (Tolo word). Mara Masiki, Little
Malaita. Mota rig, small; Motu
maragi.

mata 1. U., club (generic term); takola*i maia,
S., to wave the dub in the air. Wango
maia, Viti ntandc, Wedau mada.

mata 2. U., to be rotting away; nga hudi e mata
*asi*a, the bananas were rotting un-
picked.

nataH to have an attack of malarial fever;
moko maia*i, I have malaria; maia*i kolo-
koto, intermittent fever. Mota masag.

mataka Qaloto form for mataqa, dear.

imtakara adj., unraveled, come undone.
takara.
flurtakaraai tr., to unravd.

imtsmata soot.

antsiif adj., forked, branched, tanga, Lau
matangOt between, in the midst of.

mataqa adj., dear, open, plain, maiaka,
ka'amaia^asi.
mataqanga v. n., dear light, open space.
flwtaqaal S., mataqali U.. v. tr., to enlighten.
Samoa matala, Maori maiara,
flotsam, drift coconuts, iara 1.

1. adj., with the point broken off.

2. n., a small fish.

■urtawa n., the open sea. iawa. i matoioo,
the east; mora MUsi i maiaiwa, north-by-
east wind; hui ni maiawa, the giant taro;
mwai maiawa qaroqaro, U., natives of
Santa Crua; mu matawa *uhi'uhi, S..
foreigners with guns. San Cristoval
maiawa; Maori tawha, open; Omba
wawat the open sea; NiuC tawana^ open;
Araga wawana, open sea; Mota wawana,
wide and flat; Malagasy fafana,

flUilola-(kv) the midst of, between, midway;
f maioiana i Uki na i Ulawa, half way
between Ugi and Ulawa; i maiolai Hnoni,
among men. Wango madora.

Maiou a Poro Maiou ni Wala, a ghost in Ulawa
folklore.

man 1. to emerge, to debouch, to lead (of a
path); ko man i da, leads to such-and-
such a place.

ni% miHunaHi S. 2. v. i., to fear, to be afraid.
maa*n, ka'atnd'n.
mi'vaga v. n., fear; ere loie ana mA'nnge, to
talk confusedly from fear; saeda e
^"ilnln eni me'nnge, their hearts were
dismayed through fear.
aa*«le«itti tr.
miHrtaH v. i., to fear; noko mA*nU*i twa-

mia,mi'Qme'o (continued).

ngana, I am afraid of it. Wango
maman, Malay maiani, Maori matakn.

miua U. 1. V. i., to dye, to stain. 2. n., a djre:
the dyes in use are obtained from the
bark of the casuarina (sdln) and the o*a
(?Bischofiia javanica) and kikiri.

maqana n., man and wife, parents: used with
rOt TO hd'it to manana, U., to Wi
mana/na, S., man and wife; to Ml*i
mauana ineu, S., my parents.

millUt flmumeuU left-handed, awkward; a
Mdnlit a proper name; hele mdidi, to
do awkwardly. Florida manli, Maori
manit Viti mawi, Motu teurt, Nguna
manri,

maiunaii'a'a, maiunao'ala U., mamaii^a'a S.,
adj., smooth.

mawnaiiri'a U., adj.; alive. mAuri,

maHima'iini^a U., adj., sleepy. ma*um.

miSime'iila S., frightened, fearful. mA*u.

miiimaiill (kv) left, lefthanded, awkward.
m&nli. i menmenU, on the left; nime
i menmenUku, my left hand.
minmaiili'a adj., awkward.

miiunaiifi'a adj., living, alive, mduri. hnru-
knm mdnmenri*e to be living.

mi'iima*ttta-(ktt) terrible. lo*o md*nme*niana,
terrifying. mA*n.

mia'a S., to be offended. ka*amdn*o.

miari, minmawi 1. to live, to be alive, to
recover health. ka*amri. *asi meurit
weather side of an island; lalamoa mduri,
a captive; tola mdnrip to capture, used
with poes. 3.
minrihe v. n., life, soul: used with poes. 3.
mihirikaakn, my soul, my life; a *aei
menrihe, source of life; raaraa ani
meurike, the light of life.
miwlBga V. n., life (abstract).
miofiai tr., to survive, to escape from.

miwi 2. V. i., to be delivered of a child; e mduri
ana mweta, she was delivered of a child.
Java urip, life; Mota manr, Malay
mnrip, Ponape maur. Lau Mort, to live
may be connected with Sa'a moU true
(:maia*imoli) and with Maioriori, Chat-
ham Islanders, Maori, New 2Sealander,
rather than with mlinri. cf. molt.

miafihaa4 S., life. soul. Ftorida mduHhali.

maHttn U. (dialectic), to sleep; ma*nm dhn^
sound asleep, Fagani manrn, Mota
mainm.

mahun U., bush, forest; i la*ona ma*usu, in the
bush; e ma*nsn *oio, it is all overgrown.

mi«ta*a adj., firm, hard, exdam., hold tight.
ha*amauia*a. hoi meuia*a, a ripe areca
nut, hard; *ush menia^a, to affirm.

flumwaiiaa n., with ro: ro manweline, uncle and
nephew, nweli.

mawa, auunawa 1. to blow strong, to be a gale;
mawa ta*a^ to be exposed to the air (of
a sore).
mawaha U. v. n., tempest, gale. Wango
mawat wind.

flwwa 2. a tree, strong smelling when chopped
and causing vomiting.

MAWA

62

mawa 3. v. L, to shout.

mtwataa, mawalu S., mawancft U., a

about, a loud cry; sungie mawaiaa, to

lift up a ahout.
mawaaldeiigl S., mawaiideiii U., a ttorm of

wind; mamasidengi 4 taharara*^, a itonn

■wept down.
mea(ktt) 1. n., a tongue, the blade of a paddle;

nuaka'du io*ola ka*elu, our tongues are

our own; e rata mea, it burnt the tongue.

hot (of a rebuke).
meamaaha S., meameata U.. used with

genitive •, nt; tnu meanuakai dunge,

tongues of fire; meanuatani ola, U.. a

huge thing,
meali v. tr.. to lick.
maalila-(ktt) gerund. 2. v. i.. to be fierce

(of fire) ; dunge ko mea, the fire is fervent.

Mota gara-mweai, tongue; Maisin mm.
medo to be damp, wet. ha*amedo, Motu

medu, rain.
me*asn, ma*eme*esii S., bush, forest, ma'usu,

U. daio m me*esu, the paule tree; ola

ni me'esu, an uncultivated thing,
mehtt n., a fish caufl^t near the rocks; komi

mshu, U.. one such fish.
me'i S., article, a, one: nga and tnu may be

prefixed; also used in a diminutive or

depreciatory sense, masi, U. nga meH

ola, a thing; me'i wala, a word; mu me*i

waia; a meH wala, the Word; Me nuH

ola, a little thing; meH mwahana, dust;

me'i keni reu, a handmaid; rrmi mu

me*i 'inoni, we humble folk.
melmeileini v. tr., e tale'i meimeiU'ini, he was

in destitution.
melaha, maUmelaha n.. fierce flame; mu

meiakai dunge, flames of fire. Mota

mera, red glow; Maori miramira, red

heat,
meitt 1. pers. pron., plural 2, excl., we: more

restricted in meaning than ki*e. 2. pers.

pron., plural 2, excl.: sufiixed to nouns,

our: suffixed to verbs and prepositions

as object, us. lu,
malu 3. n.. a tree, the quandong (Eleocarpus

•p.).
melomela sdulehi melumelu, dusk.
melnm6ln<a*a adj., bluish, blackish, purplbh;

mAlu, shade. Seaeike meluna iasi,

depths of the sea.
melttmeltt*6 S., adj., glorious,
meme n., a ball of masticated food; hau menu,

chewed areca nut with betel leaf and

lime.
memelaHiii v. tr., to masticate. Gilbert

Islands mama, to masticate a ball of

food for an infant; Viti mama, to chew;

NiuC mama, a mouthful.
memeltt'a'a as melumdu*a*a,
memopuatt S., a tree (Ficus sp.). nUUmepusu,
memaao v. tr., to break into powder, pili

memesoa,
mana to turn color (of leaves of deciduous

trees); 'aUte ko mena, the *alite is

tumhig red. Mota mena, ripe,
manangaini v. tr., to do a thing perfectly.

menaai v. tr., to break into
hiie menasi.

ddumenasit
ka\

mango a shellfish (Oliva sp.).

mare, maral pen. pron., dual 1, excl., we two:
used as subject or as object of verba
and prepositi o ns; nun^i is used also (a)
following *emere*i or Vemere^i as subject*
and (b) 8u£Sxed to nouns. Ukuiamer^i.

maro to be white in color; ukune e lai mero^ hia
hair is white.

mara*a S. as mere, used as subject of verb.

mi 1. CAhi'a, U.), as *anU 1.

mi 2. article, used only in the phrase att jola,
a piece of any doth.

mi 3. verb suflSx, inu inumi,

mimi 1. to make water, urine. 2. the bladder.
Mota meme, to urinate; Polynesian

_ _ _ • •

mimisi v. tr., to spurtle on (of juioe. etc.);
e mimisie maaku, it squirted in my face.

mimisi maa 1. a tree (Excoecaria sp.). 2. the
mantis, walking-stick insect, which
spurts out a liquid when touched. Viti
mimi mata, Mota menus maia.

minga-(na, ni) S.. as kUtana; *o ngdu minga$ta^
did you eat of it?

min pron.. plural 2, suffixed to noun.

mo plural article used with nouns beginning
with the letter o; mo ola, mo one, alao
colloquially mo Hnoni; hunt lu'ue mo
ola ineu, to remove my goods.

moa S., V. i.. to vomit.
moana v. n., its vomit.
moata4ni tr.

mode to be listless, to faint; saeku e mode, I
am listless.

moka to wax old. to be fusty (of bags. etc.).

moke, momoka 1. a hand net used in openlnffi
{ta*aiaha) of the shore reef. 2. to use a
hand net; moke ana pusu 'esi, to net
whales; i sarona moke dmu, in your
sight, lit., opposite your net; uselie
moke, to make a net; ku'o ni moke, a
casting net.

mola 1. v. i., to heal (of a wound or soie).

mola 2. V. i., to fail, to miss; used with poos. 3.
ka*amola.
molahi tr., e molakie *oio, it failed.

mola 3. a numeral, 10,000, used piopefly of
yams, mdai uki; followed by genitive
f. S., fit, U.; denotes also a countless
number; may be used for counting men.
hu*e Mre konie mola, a concubine; w alm
mola ni ola, all things.
molata*(na) n., iNoioiaiia nga ola, innniner-
able things. Florida mola, a great
number.

mola 4. adv., merely, only; followed by genitive
i. lae molai tako, go gently; nga
ta*ata*a ini mola, only one pexaon;
e ta'ewau mola, e $a'e mola wau, it makea
no difference; *olo mola, *oio molana, S.,
*oto molani, U., *oto mola 'ie, S.. 'oto
mola inikou, U.. all mean Just now^

mola 5. *ano mola, good ground.

63

MUNI

mdU'a adj., free, without price; taUH inu
tnola*a^ just drink without prioe.

mole V. tr., to stain, to daub with pigments; n.,
pigment8,paint; solo molemoU,Ted douds.

moli 1. n., wild orange. hotohotamoUta'a,
Mota mwol, Viti moU,

moli 2. Su*u Molit a boat harbor at the north-
west comer of Ulawa.

moli 3. wala*im6li, true, i. e.» to speak true.
NiuC mdi, true.

moltt pers. pron., plural 2, you; used as subject
or as object of verb or preposition; more
restricted in meaning than 'omu; molu
is also used (a) following 'omolu or
Vomolu as subject, (b) su£Sxed to a
noun. Hhutamolu,

momo V. i., to squeeze, to press on each side;
momo lalamoa, a flat armlet of tridacna
shell, so called from its being used to
squeeze men to death.
momo4 tr., to bring side by side.

momo 2. rubbish, sweepings. Motu momo.

momoke moke.

momoru adj., small, little.

monaki cuttlefish; hole ni monaki, the bone
of the cuttlefish.

mono adv.. follows the verb* na may be added;
gives clearness, explains lae mone, gol
kolu mone, let us be gone; qongiku e to*o
mone *oio, my time is even now come;
i*oe ni monena^ it is you indeed.

mono U., to live apart; koro *a mono *oU>
i Kalona, they two live apart in Kalona.

moro, morol 1. pers. pron., dual 2, you two:
used as subject or as object of verb or
preposition: used in addressing a mar-
ried woman, or a woman with a child,
or a chief, or even a party: moro is also
used (a) following i'omoro as subject,
(b) suffixed to a noun; moro idria paro
i*ola i 'est ka*el*e ladae, you launch
away the canoe into the sea, let us go.

moro-(kn) 2. n., buttock.

mom'e S., pers. pron.. dual 2, you two; used
as subject or following *omoru*e.

morumom 1. U., small, little, momoru, 2.
broken in pieces, qa*a morumoru. Lau
morumoru.

mota n., a mortar for pounding areca nut; used
by toothless persons.

motaa, motaahl S., v. tr., to cause agony to.
hc*amoiaahi^ huiemoiaa.
motaahinge v. n., agony.
motaahila-(ka) gerund.

mon, monmoit 1. v. i., to be broken, rara
moumou. Mu moumou, an isolated
rock; e to'o mou, it has ceased; sae sa*a
mahoio wa ke mou, thought shall not
be parted and shall not cease; malau
mou, an islet; e mou ue ana, still in
desuetude.
mooai, mootaHni tr., to break (of a rope,
etc). ka'amouH. radu moumousie mu
'i*di, they broke the rope; adoma'i mousi,
U., to decide, to dare.
m«Qta-(]ia, al) e to'o mouiana, it has ceased.
moiitiIa-(lni) gerund.

mou, moumott 1 (continued).

montoH, monmonteH partic, one, only.
mwda mouie'i, only child; ta'ala'a ola
moumoute'i, one thing only; m^isae
moute'i, S.. to determine, to dare. Mota
moi, Polynesian moiu.

mou 2. U. (dialectic), forest, bush, f mou, oha
ni mou. ma'usu. Mota mwoi.

mouholo V. i., to break across. holo» saeku
e mouholo, I have no spirit left.

mouqell S., to get ready, to prepare, to be
ready; used with sufiixed pronouns ku,
mu, nH, d& instead of du, etc.; e mouqe»
line, it is prepared.

montoli v. i., to cease, to be ended.

m« 1. pron.. sing. 1, sufifixed to noun: thine;
nimemu, thy hand.

mo 2. plural article, the: mui is used with nga
in nga mui la' a, what things; nga mui
lata, paths.

modi 1. midrib of leaf of coconut, etc.; the
sufSxed pronoun nH may be added.
mudine; mudii niu, mudii sa*o, midrib
of coconut, of sago; maai mudi, a gorge
made of sago midrib or of tortoise shell
for catching flying-fish, the bait being
the flesh of the claws of the coconut
crab (Birgus latro, dsusu).

mudi 2. shear legs, maai mudi S., hou mudi U.

modimndi 1. U., a bird, yellow honey-sucker.

mudimudi 2. U., mwimwidi S., to drip;
mudimudi ura, to drip.

mnini ela muini, some; hahira diana ikire nga
muini lo'u ka*a diana, on the good and
the bad; muini e mw&'i, the rich people;
muini e i'o mwakule, those who have
no ties; muini Hula' ana a mwane *ie e
qao'i ne, more than those which this
man has done, ini 1.

momu 1. U.. mumua qangoqango, to decorate a
nose ornament with porpoise teeth.

mumn 2. to close in on; 'ala mumu, to close in
like jaws.
mvmoH tr., to place adjoining, close
together.

mmnn 3. mumulou, wild men, traditional.
M. A., p. 355.

mummii 1. v. tr., to hide, to conceal. 2. to be
hidden. Motu lakuni, Mota tamin, San
Cristoval ahuni, Mao. nunumi. dmuni.

mona'it mvneH U., adv., used in conditional
sentences: subjunctive; kira 'a mune'i
lae, were they to go.

muni U. 1. (Am) prep, dative, for, to; e qa'ihe
munia nga maenga, not unto death;
munia nga laha, what for.

muni U. 2. adv., in order that: used as optative
with verbal particle 'e; used with ana, if.
muni *e lae mai, let him come; muni *e
(mun'e) lae, gently; muni ne'e loosia,
ta'ane na'a 'unua, if I see him I shall
tell it; muni nge'ia 'e lae mai, if he come;
ana muni kir'e 'unua, if they say it;
muni 'ua, why, what for; nan 'unua uH
muni ne'e mae 'oto, I thought I was done
for; Mu muni, to endeavor. Mota
mun, Sa'a huni.

ujmo

64

mviio n., caterpillar, chrysalis.

miiai-(ka) 1. U.. finger or toe nail, mwisi, S.
2. operculum, met., a piece; musH elili»
operculum of Turbo petholatus.

MW

mwa, mwamwa 1. prefix of condition as fna 1.

mwamwanotOt mwoAiofcio.
mwa 2. U., plural article, used before words

beginning with a vowel or with k;

mwai.
mwa 3. prefix to nouns expressing relationship,

mu mwa'asine, to mwa'adine.
mwa 4. U., exclamation of surprise.
mwaa 1. n., a snake; mwaa dili saio, a snake

observed as an omen; sofo ni mwaa,

xigsag pattern in inlaying; mwaa

nuenuala, glistening, brilliant, snake.

Mota mwata. In M. A., p. 221, maii e

saio should be mwaa dili saio.
mwaa 2. n., a disease, lupus, mwaa e htare

ana, he was eaten of worms,
mwaa 3. lemi mwaa, U., full moon; oku mwaa,

October.
mwa'a 4. v. i., to be extinct (of fire or lamp).

mwa'aal tr., to extinguish.
mwaadalo to be innocent, meek,
mwa'adine n.. with ro, ro mwa^adine, two first

cousins, 'adi.
mwaadola earthworm.
mwaamwaa worm, maggot; mwaamwaa pmri,

trepang, b^he-de-mer; mwaamwaa ni

ngaU, U., woodlouse. Wango mwaa-

mwaamwaala adj.. infested with worms.

mwaaal (la) prep., from, out of, since: the
pnm. sing. 3 is suffixed as anticipatory
object; used in comparison of the
adjective, mwaani ta*a, from what;
'ulu mwHiani, to overlook; ddu tdi
mwaani, to submit to, to be subject to;
pola mwaani, to desert a ship; e la *oioi
'aela mwaani nonola, it is worse than
jresterday; mwaanie mu taia'alanga,
from evils; mwaanU maenga, from
death; e pdine mwaanie, bigger than he;
maUUdi oraha*a mwaanie ngaini, to
rebuke a man for sin; ore mwaani, to be
left out* Wango bant, Epi deni,

mwa'ariae n., brethren; a mwa'asine, the
brother; mu mwa*asine, the brethren; ro
mwa'asina, U., two sisters-in-law. *asi 2.

mwada, mwa'amwada S., mwadamwada U. 1.
to beat out seeds, to thresh; *uri mwada,
to tramp out seeds.
mwadamwadal U., tr.

mwada 2. U., to lift.

mwadamwadamo v. i., to masticate, to grind
the teeth (of pig).

mwadavt mwamwadau to be easy, possible,
soft, pliable; ana he ola mwamwadau, if
possible; mu U*u e mwadau, places easy
to traverse,
mwadavtl tr., to be easy for any one.
ka'amwadausi. eka*amwadausieunilae,
not easy for me to go. Wango mwadau.

mwadi (na) the old yam from whidi the

has grown; mwadi ni uhi. mwadine, its
old yam.

mwado U.. ground, soil, 'u'umwado, i mwado*
on the ground; mwado kuu, the earth;
HmairM mwado, anklet of shell money,
lit., gather dirt; mwado mwakiia'a, mud;
wakawaka ni mwado, dust; mwado wdru^
red earth. Florida meio; EspiritCi
Santo metu, dirty; Mota maelo; San
Cristoval maio, ground. M. L., p. 57.

mwadola adj., covered with earth, dirty.

Mwado'a a village on the west side of Ulawa;
Su'u i Teluhia, its boat harbor; *Ei*ei. its
spring.

mwas 1. S., n., person, fellow, man; demon-
strative na may be added; ta*a 6 may be
used in conjunction; mwaena, hey, you I
mu mwaena, you men! a mwaena. So-
and-so, such a one; me*i mwae, mwei
mwaena, mwaena, mu mwae, all used in
exclamations; mwae ta*a, poor fellow;
mu mwae ta*a, poor chaps; foo ke n€*i
lalamoa ko 'olisie 'oio a mwaena, the pig
is the victim in place of the man.
Nggao. Ysabel mae; Bugotu mae, mas-
culine article.

mw'aa, mwa'emwa's 2. to be willing, to be
diligent, to assent, to rejoice. hd'imwO'
*eia*i, ilenimwa't. mwa*e haaki, said
of those who clap their hands as an
accompaniment to dances; hire mwa'e
toUa, they consented to carry it.
mwa'smwa'aaga v. n.. willingness.
mwa'sd tr., to assent to.
mwa'atHaiia gerund. Wango mwae,

mwaalo used with numeral ro; ro mwado ans,
his two wives.

mwa'^tt adj.. crooked, bent. Wango mwaeru.

mwa'amwa'sta (na, ni) n., rejoicing; ke sulu
i mwa*emwa*etani, sing for joy over.

m waar a adj., prolific, abundant, increasing.

mwasffo, mwaarssro adj., soft, pliable.

mwahi to be crooked, bent.

mwaUoUo adj., swayed, bent by the wind.

mwai 1. U., plural article: when used before a
vowel or h, mwa is used; in certain words
the vowels coalesce, «. g„ mwauki, yams.
Used of reciprocal relationship; Wango
MiMifit; Lau mwai,

mwai 2. U., mwti S.. used with adj. taia'ala
or ia*a to express an endearing or com-
miserative sense.

mwlH 3. n., a hand-bag, a bag slung over the
shoulder, kaa i mwe*i, earnest money,
money given as earnest for the buying
of a wife; mwela ni mwe*i, a bought
chUd; kd*u rnweH, to plait a bag. 4. the
fiber used in weaving a mwA'i. 5. v. i.,
to be rich, to have bags of money;
mmim e mwd*i, the rich.

mrarlidi n., cockroach; the small indigenous
variety, the larger imported one.

mvaihana n., used with numeral ro; ro mwai'
kamot two brotheis-in-law.

65

MWAHB

mwaihei U.. interrogative plural, who, what

people.
mwaOd v. n.. to stand on tiptoe, to reach out to.
.iBwft^e cycas (Cycas drdnalis) . Mota mwele.
mwUmwei S.* to be small, ha'amwdimwei'e.

e mwHimwei *aelaf it is very small;

heUkde mwlUmweit seventh and eighth

days ol the moon; Wa wdi mwe i m wei,

February.
mwiimweiha v. n., used with poss. 3;

mwditHweihaana, when small, a small

mwlifflwsiai tr.. to be too small for. Tolo

maimai,
mwaka 1. v. i., to despise; used with poss. 3.
mwakatalni tr.. to despise, to make naught

of.
mwakata*iniU-(ktt) gerund. Wango.

mwagitaini.
mwaka 2. green, unripe, not full grown; uhi

mwaka, January.
mwakana S., n., ground, earth, me*i mwakana.

mwakana loho, dust; mwakana wdi,

moist ground; ngangai mwakana, dust;

dangona mwakana, trees of the field;

puulie mwakana, to tread the earth.
mwakano S., n., ground; i mwakano, on the

ground; koluns mwakana, the surface of

the earth; wdi $ lama kaaki me kolune

mwakano, the water covered still the

face of the earth; wAi € mapipi 'ohe *aio

tainU kolune mwakano, whether the*

water had receded off the face of the

earth.
mwakano'a covered with earth, dirty.

Probably connected with *ano, earth.

Lau goiio, Mota tano, earth,
mwakaterehaini tr., to flout, to put to scorn.

mwaksteraha*lslla-(ktt) gerund.
mwakoto U., adj., crooked, bent.
mwakita'a U., adj., clayey; mwado mwakUa'a,

mud.
mwako 1. v« i., to pierce, to prick.

mwak^li tr.; ona e mwakoUe *aeku, the spike

of the ona has got into my foot.
mwakoli]a«(ktt) gerund.
mwako 2. v. tr., to set open; nou mwakoa maa,

I set a door open,
mwakomwako'a U., adj., prickly.
mwakule S.. adj.. with no ties, unattached,

bare; follows the verb; muini e i*o

mwakule, they have no ties.
mwaknka adj., loose, slack.
mwala 1. n., people; nga mwala, a people, nation;

mwala ineu, my people; mwala *urei

iei ni *ie; mwala ko ku'ie, people mocked

him.
Mwala 2. Malaita; called also in Lau Mala and

in Tolo Mara.
fflwakunwala'a adj., ashamed.
mwall to foregather at a harbor waiting to

embark. Viti melo.
mwalo 1. n.. a sunken rock, a reef; mwalo

suku kao, a rock that pierces the bottom.

Motaiftwoto.
mwalo 2. maalimwalo, a platform, a staging.
mwamwadillta U., adj., without blemish.

mwamwadoleta i'o mwamwadaleta, patient.

mwamwakaola'a adj.. of medium lightness
cf. mwamwaU,

mwamwaki S.. wantonly; koro m w amwd ki, to
kill wantonly,
mwamwakittgs v. n., wantonness.

mwamwakoHi S.. adj.. prickly. dangQ nma-
mwako'a.

mwamwanoto adj.. quiet.

mwamwanga S., a few; used with ini 2.

mwamwangaini odd ones, some here and
there.

mwamwasii U.. wala*anga mwamwasu, up-
braiding words.

mwamwasoH S.. partic. of none effect, in vain;
kire ko mwamwasu'i eni kungunge, they
become unfruitful.

mwamwmts S.. to be of light weight, ha'amwa^
mwate'a. Viti mamada, light; NiuC
mama,

mwamwatekcla n.. dust. flue, rubbish.

mwana 1. v. L. to cover, to feign, to pretend.
mwana kaaki, to make pretence,
mwananga v. n.. mwananga kaakilana, a

cloaking,
mwanamwana n., a covering, hatchway
closure, deck.

mwasa 2. S.. used to express the numerals
above ten (pe*i 2); used also with units
to express the tens, mana U.. awala
mwana *enite *olo, how many more than
ten; awala mwana rue, ten and two.
twelve; iotola mwana kai, 440. Viti
mani.

mwanamwtna'a adj., decorated.

mwane 1. n., a male, man. boy; added to proper
names and to certain other words to
denote sex distinction, nga mwane, a
man; mu mwane, the males; mwane, mu
mwane, to mwane, all used as exclama-
tions; mwane poo, mwane *usu, barrow
pig. dog; a mwane kenlurion, the cen-
turion; mwane ineu, my dear fellow;
mwane ana a 61a, such-and-such a fellow;
mwane ana a Uqe, the man called Uqe;
mama'u ni mwane, a fearful lot of men.
beyond count; hota ni mwane, all the
boys who are eligible for ka*amalaoku;
tie mwane, ini mwane, male; mwane
kurekure, a witch doctor; kaka lude
mwane, a vessel in the labor trade;
mwane maa*i ineu, my dear fellow; uri
qa*une nge mwane, I mean that the head
is the male; sHu mwane, to commit
murder; sHu mwanenga, murder. 2.
used to denote sex. ola mwane, male;
mwane kAule, male frigate-bird; s lai
mwaru diana, fine, beautiful. 3. belong-
ing to males, holy, ola ni mwane; nume
ni mwane, church; kara ni mwane,
yam pudding (hinanga) used in sacri-
fices. Gilbert Islands mane, Florida
mane, Malay mon, omani, manesk,

mwane 4. adv., lest, mwane da na kolu
mae, lest we die; mwane e *ue, why
not; mwane *o ro*urokute*inie ngaralaku,
hold not thy peace at my tears; mwane

mwaub

66

4 (continued).

*o apaopaa LVoa miwaami*em$, take not

the Spirit from us.
aiwan«Awuie 1. male (of trees), not produdng

fruit; dango mrnaimemmame, a staminate

tree. 2. {ku) n., testicles.
ICwMnipM a village at Sa'a, site of the pnsent

mission school.
mwandle garfish, caught by troUing from a

rock or by means of a line at the taU of

a Idte (sa'o ni *akolo) flown from a canoe,

the bait is spiderweb (lawa) or a piece

of tow. UUe'i, to cast for garfish; Mbt,

ten garfish. Fagani mwarore,
mwanganga U., a few. mwaiinsattfa. S.

mwanganga ni He, a few persons,
mwaohe adj.. pliable.
mwaolaola adj.. shaky, rickety, not firm.

mwaolaoUnga n., sedition,
mwaopn n., egg; hoi mwaopu ni fciM« the egg

of a fowl.
mwaora to run (of vines).
mwaorohaH partic. bent, bowed, stooping.

San Ciistoval fnwooro.
Mwarada a village on the west coast of Ulawa;

Wftingile, a rocky promontory there,
mwaramwara (aa) n., a stalk, a twig,
mwaraa adj., thin.
mware*a U. 1. adj., in good health; sapeku •

q&*i mware*a, I am not feeling well.

2. lively, animated (of speech); mimif

keni e*asi qaU wala*awaia*a wtwarg'a,

what draining women,
mwarste U., h<m mwarOei qd'u, skull.
mwMxi to be ailing, noko mweri. ha'amrndri.

mwdri $aha, U., to recover from wounds.
mwMrita'a U., a wounded person. Wango

mart, a wound.
mwaxite coir, fiber of coconut; mwariUi niu,

sennit; mwariiei haa, a strand of shell

money.
mwarohi U.. adj., easy, possible; *nra mwarohi,

to be possible.
mwllal, mwaimweal S., mwlaimwiai U.. to

laugh; miwdsi mwaani, to laugh at a

person.
mwMsinge v. n. laughter.
mwisisHni to laugh at, to laugh to scorn.

ha*amwdsie*ini,
mwamhnrete U., a chink, a crack, mwa 1.

suku.
mwau S.. n., a boy, lad, nga nvmau; keU mwau

ineu, my little boy; mwaune, vocative,

boy.
mwaomwe S.. to be naked.
mwinmwavla adj.. foolish.
mwahin adj., diswderly; sae mwa'uu, mutiny.

rebellion.
mwal S., mwai U.. used with iata'ala or io'a in

commiseration, of males, as M is of

women; mwei $a*a aloha, dear lord (of

persons in authority).
mwela n., child, nga mwda, mu mwela; ta'aia'a

mwtia m<mU% an only child; mwda ni

mw€*i, a bought child; mwda ni nunu,

a son of the house; hAu ni mrnda amara,

day after full moon; hde inwila, little

Bwala (continued).

diiM; nga mwda e lodo, a child is con-
ceived. *omuk§malamweiaUlu,hecomt
aa diUdren; s mdmri ana mwcIa, to be
delivered of a child; Umgoni mmda, all
the children.
mwamwala pluiaL Motu awro, memeron

oiweta foliage plant (Coleus sp.).

mwldlmwidi S., mndimodi U.. to drip.

mwina to be thin (of liquids).

mwifimwiii skirts, fringes.

mwial (kn) U.. mnal S., finger-nail, toe-naiL
Savo karakara bisi, Mota pisni, fingers;
Nifik>le hisi nime,

m w om we a a to be rich, fiat (of viands). Samoa

Mwonta a village on the east coast of Ulawa;
iu landing-place is Su?tt i Diei.

In certain words there is a change of » to {;
Sa'a ddnn$ne middle, Ulawa daluma. i/. also
ni and U genitives. M. L., p. 212.

na 1. copulative, and; with nri thus, na nri I
mean, that is. used in ezplanatlona.
na taa, U.. but.

na2. U.. pers. pron., used with the verbal
partides 'a, *anai. na'a lae 'do, I am
going; na'a nai lae, I shall go; nge na'asi
idnri, then said I.

na 3. used in numeration, mu poo na, mu nunu
na, pigs, birds, e hant niu no, he
climbed for coconuts and — ; e halt pua
fM. he broke off areca nuts and — . Used
in phrases; ha*ik§ na, oh no; su*uH na,
not so; ko urine ia*ane na, even suppos-
ing it were so.

ni 4. verbal suffix; ara arand, qao qaoud, hi'u
hi*uns, lo*u lo*une.

nl 5. demonstrative suffix, follows noun and
adverb, that, there, these, those; may
be joined to preceding word; m wa ani t
you fellow; a poronA, the person; urine,
urinena, thus; ile'une, there, that place;
muini Uuta*ana a mwane *ie e qao'i ne,
more than those which this man haa
done; ana e tahanie maamu ne, in that
he opened your eyes; nge he 'ue kd'u ne,
how then will it be. At times equiva-
lent to the and that, me'i oland, the
thing; hdnue m&ine, this land; talai
heune, row of teeth. Malay s#.

nl 6. pron., sing. 3 suffixed to noun, equivalent
of genitive, nime, hand; nimand, his
hand; • reune wdi, by the side of the
water; ke*une saio, stars of heaven;
dangond mwakana, trees of the field;
hirune *ahe, troublesome waves. Mela-
nesia na passim, Malay nga, Malagasy
ny,

nil 7. noun ending, used with nouns which
express relationship; ro hd*i malakuue,
ro hd'i nikana, mu he'i maamana. Maori
na itaina), NiuC na {hoana), Viti na
{tamana).

nl 8. stem of ndkue, ndna, etc, with a general

.A

67

nV 8 (continued).

notion of appertaining, pofleefsing. Mota

no 1, Florida ni,
na'a, na*a«i U., pen. pron.. and verbal particle

with illative; I, I am. I thereupon.

muni n€*e loosia, ta*an§ na*a *nnna, if I

see him I shall tell it; ng€ na'asi iduri,

then said I.
naasaa for ngaamgaa^ cat. used to children.
nida, ailda'dtt poss. 2. plural 3; for them.

nd 8.
naU U.. knife (English).
aaho suif, wave; kM naho, a wave; e ro Mi f^ako,

two waves; mu ks'i nako, waves; awao"

waiana nako, roar of surf; fiapa naho, a

breaching fish; qa*awa*aU naho, a

naho*a &• nahola U.. rough sea on the coast;
s nahola, it is rough. Mota nawo, sa
water.

nHhunshtt U.. *ai neknnehu, a rod. a stick.

naH verbal suffix used intransitively, loo
loonaHm Mota nag,

naihi S., naU U.. knife (English).

naHni transitive suffix, loo loona'ini,

nika, nUka'^tt poss. 2, dual 1. incL: for us
two. nA 8.

nlkara'ipo6s.2. dual 1. incl.:forus two. ndS.

nako V. i., to strengthen; nakolana mu suuraa'i,
strengthening the comers.

ttXko, aikuneku U.. to sit; the form neku is
employed without a preceding i or u,
neku ka'u, be seated. Used in Sa'a to
signify session at a feast; nwala ho neku,
the people seat themselves.
nMknma v. n.. U.. nft'unskume S.. a seat,
niknal determ.. to occupy a place.
ha*anllikuH, Wango nagu*

nikii*s S., nikii'a U.. poss. 2, sing. 1. for me.

aikuH poss. 2. sing. 1. for me (of many things).

nalal, aanalaH U.. to rub in the hands, as
leaves. Wango nora,

nlnumi poss. 2. plural 1, excL: for us.

name U.. v. L. to taste; name ahonga, to taste
and try.
namsli tr. Mota nam, Wango namo,
Florida nami, Sulu aiiam. Malay nanam-
nMt, Maori tami, to smack lips.

Blmeltt poss. 2. plural 1. excL: for us.

almereH poss. 2. dual 1. exd.: for us two.

namo 1. a landlocked harbor; •' Qd*una Namo,
North Cape, Ulawa.

Hamo 2. an inlet of Port Adam, Malaita.
Samoa namo, a place in the lagoon
abounding in fish; Gilbert Islands namo,
a harbor; Mota namwo, lagoon in reef.

Kamoiia • Su'u Namona, i Namona, the open-
ing hi the reef at Sa'a.

niflni'e S.. nlma'a U.. poss. 2. sing. 2 : for thee.

aimvH as ndmu'e, but used of many things
for one person.

nana poss. 2. sing. 3: for him. her, it; e lio kunie
huni hu*e nana, he chose her for his wife.

naaako S., to be sticky, to stick, lalako, U.

naaaknaaa to be gentle, harmless, ndku.

aaimna to be powerful.

(continued).

V. n.« power; nauamanga
Para*iiana mu Woa, power over the
spirits.
oaaamaini tr.. to put power into, ha'ana-
nama'ini, Mota manot an invisible
spiritual force or influence; Pdynesiaa
mana id. (metathetic).

naaamn to travel fast, to be swift.

aanaa to be taught, to be wise, ha'ananau.
sae nanau, S., to be wise of heart; ««•
nanaunge, wisdom. Florida na un a u ,
Wango ha'ananaua, Mota vaianau, to
learn, to teach.
nanauhi v. tr., to approach, draw up to,
draw near, go up to. Wango nanau,

nani poss. 2. plural 3. neuter: for ttim (things) ;
nani rato, for the elders; dsu nani
*inoni, of work not faithfully done.

aaaoa'i U.. to accustom; ha'ananoa'i,

nanoi U.. to produce pain (of an arrow, otiio).

sangal. the barb of an arrow. 2. the fin of a
fish, hoi nanga.

naagsJi'a U.. flashing (of lightning).

BsagsHro'a U., flashing (of lightning), rf.
rangariro'a, S.

aao 1. numeral, a hundred (of yams), nga nao
ni uhi.

na'o* na*oaa*o (ku) 2. front, before; i na'oku
(face, time) before me; na*ona dara,
forehead; na*ona i*ola, the bow of a
canoe; hapa ni na'o, first quarter of the
moon; hdai na'o, in former times; to*o
na*o, front teeth; mu na'ona'o i mae,
armies; e korasie mu na'ona'o i mae, he
put to flight the ranks of the enemy.

na'o 3. V. L, to precede, to guide, to lead.
e hola*i na'o 'olo wau, he went away
first; a ola e na'oku 'olo. So-and-so
preceded me; *o na'o ndka'du, lead us
on; na'o talana, lead the way for him.

na'o 4. with locative i; ina'o of old, *oto ina'o,
holai na'o, formerly.

na'o 5. to approach, to steer, to go toward.
na'o susukire, draw toward them; na'o
susu ana, to make straight on toward;
na'o uri, steer this way; na'o kao, keep
her away,
aa'ohi tr.. to steer.
na'ohila-(ka) gerund.
na'ola*ini tr.. to do first. ha'ana'olaHni.
Mota nagoi, face; Santa Ouz nao,
mouth.

na'o (ku) 6. a widow, na'ona a ola* So-and-
so's widow. Mota naro.

na'oaga a deserted place. • na'onga, at the
old garden or deserted village; Wunge
e na'onga 'olo, the place is quite deserted.

nate a worm found in the beach sand and used
as bait for sea bream (i'e ni sane);
km note, to scratch up sand looking for
the worms.

nan 1. U., pers. pron., sing. 1. I.

atn 2. a fruit tree. Mota natu,

ni'unaknae S., n., a seat, ndhu,

na 1. pers. pron., sing. 1. I. used with verbal
partides ke, ke'i, S., and 'e, U., with aU

68

B« 1 (continued).

of which it coalcicct u with iUfttive si.
kd'u, neki UesU, please let me see it;
nekesi las si*iri, I shall go to-day; nfc
nni UmH, thereupon I said; imV Uu
kA'th let me fo; nau 'umua uri muni
n^€ mat 'oio, I thought I was done for;
na nesi ns'i 'am^amm *oio, and I shall be
3rour father; noko ke'i loi lo*n mH na
nesi U€sVo lo*u, I shall come back and
shall see thee again.

Ba 2. demonstrative, cf. nd 4.

aa'a 1. &, contraction for ne'ie; ne*e kd*u, wait
a bit, stay.

aa'a 2. U.. pers. pron.. sing 1, n4 and verbal
partide *e. e qale da ne'e adea, I saw
nothing; muni ne*e feosto, ta'ane na*a
*unua, if I see him I shaU teU it.

ae'aae's U.. v.. to whine.

naif nalnaH S. 1. v. tr.. to place, to put, to
appoint, ne'i koni, to lay up in store,
to make provision; ne'i «t«w, to appoint
a sum as blood money. 2. to become,
to turn into, to be: to ne'ie 'oio i'oe, if
it be thou; poo ho ne'i lalamoa ko 'olisie
'oio a mwaenat the pig becomes the
victim instead of the person; na nesi ne'i
'amamu 'oto, and I shiall be your father.

nalsae S., v. L, to think, to call to remem-
brance; ne'isae, exclamation, like any-
thing! ne'isae 'asi^ to forgive; ne'isae
lete, to be set in intention; ne'isae
moute'i, to determine, to dare; ne'isae
su'eie'e, to be anxious about; ne'isae
Mike, to reach in thought; ne'isae
to'oie'e, to be amdous.
nsHsaewgs v. n., thought, remembrance.

naksfl cf.nel,

name S., nimo U. 1. n., rain, ha'anemo. hoi
nemo, a rain squall; nemo raaraa, S.
nimo raaraa, U.. driaxling rain, sun and
rain. 2. v. i., to rain, nenemo,
namosi tr., to rain upon.

nana S., demonstrative; a ola nena, that thing.

nangansnga*a adj., glistening white.

naraners n., a sea-bird, the kittiwake; nerenere
ni iqe, kittiwake of the lagoon.

natl pers. pron, sing. 1 ; ne with illative si.

al 1. genitive, of; sape ni Hnoni, men's bodies;
raio ni mwane, elderly male, (a)
expressive of purpose: t'tit ni ha'aurUana
'oio, a person to be saved; hire kola ni lae,
they attempted to go; e dHu ni ere, he
made to speak; e ka'a mwadausieu ni
lae, not easy for me to go; tala ni liu,
path to travel; hinou ni 'a'a'o, hook for
fishing; walo ni fa'asdhu, a hook for
fa'asi^u, (b) expressive of condition,
lae ni tamo, go in might; ngfiu ni pole,
eat to satiety; lae ni oraha'a, to go very
fast; lae 'oio ni mae, go like everything.
May be rendered by with or in: rongo
ni 'elinge, to hear with the ear; ere ni sae,
to say with the heart; na ni leesie
paUmga aku, and saw (in seeing) my
works, (c) used after iala'ae, U..
tala'ae ni lae, begin to go. (d) added

ni 1 (continued).

to verbal suffix, a'im, ka'im, etc. transi-
tive fone. Mota nia, with; Florida ni;
Fati6 nL if. genitive U 1.

ol 2. intenogative. (a) used to call attention,
ni mwaenaf I say, you. (b) in the
aense of is that so. (c) added for
emphasis to atei, iUi, S., ikei, U., «fa
lao, S., nga taka, U.: nfs tea ni 'oka
ng§rase, what are you crying for;
mwala *nrei tei ni 'ie, whence are these
people? Vitili.

ni 3. demonstrative attached for emphasis to
nouns in Ulawa, to pronouns, adverbs
to si'iri and uri 2; may be reduplicated.
ngeni nou lae, and so I went; ngaini ni
eni usie, ngaini ni eni hoUuwo, one to his
merchandise, another to his trading;
a poroni. So-and-so; a Zoaitt, So-and-so;
t«gc''» ni e qaoa, he it is who did it;
ienini, this. Wango ni,

ni 4. a detachable prefix to pronouns, nikou,
niparo, niwau, U. mu 'inoni mangoi
ola fMo/a ni hire, S., men are but breath;
*oU> to'ohuu ni ngeena, it is so in truth;
*omu ka'a to'oio'ciamiu ike m 'omu, ye
are not your own. Santa Crux nt (in
ninge)\ Florida ni.

ni 5. suff. pron., plural 3. neut. i talani.

ni 6. verbal sufiSx. sHu sAumi.

ni'a n., a sleeping-mat made of coconut leaf;
kA'u ni'e, to plait a coconut leaf into a
sleeping-mat.

KlalahaHi Cape Z^l^, the southeast cape of
Malaita; *ake kirune i Nidaka'u, its
tide-rip.

nihiai v. tr., to refrain; noko nikisie nimeku, I
refrain my hand.
nihisila-(kn) gerund.

niho (ktt) n., tooth, cf. alo'i, *amimada»
'dnguru. nikoi i'e, porpoise-teeth cur-
rency; ngUngadi niko, to gnash the
teeth; e rdpu ngurusie nikona, knocked
his teeth out; e sisie nikona, he bared
his teeth in a grin.

oihott U., demonstrative pron.. this, here:
pronounced sometimes nikeu.

ni4, ni*ini4 1. v. tr., to give, to present, with
poss. 1. to feed ni'i ana. ni'i ittuM
kaaki, to lay hands on; ni'i *ae la'o t'ofo,
to board a canoe; ni'i suu, ni'i toio, to
make a free gift,
nilnge v. n., a gift, a giving, grace (late

use) ; e konu eni ni'inge, full of grace.
ni4]a-(lni) gerund. mAni ni'ilana sakang^
e mdni lae, the complete giving of power
is completely given.

nil 2. ni'i losi, to squeeze, to wring out water.

niks (ktt) mother, aunt; for the vocative iaiiai
is generally used; with the personal
article a nike mother, t. e., our mother
in speaking of a particular pemo.
nikei ola, S., nikeni da, U., a big thing,
lit., a mother thing; nikand, S., nikmd^
U.. to kd'i nikanO, to kd'i nikend, wife
and child, mother and child; ro kd'i
nikand ineu, my wife and child.

69

HORU

nimA U., nnnM S., house; nima indu, my house;
maa$ta nima, U.» door; auUni nima, a
row of bouses; sa*osa*oha*i*a ant nima,
an upper story in a house,'^ doubled
house.

aiflMy ninime S., nima, nimanima U. (ka), 1.
hand. arm. foreleg of animals, nimana
mu *inoni, men's hands (collective
sense), nimanimada nga mwa 'inoni, U.;
talana mu ninimei Hnoni, talana nimana
mu 'inoni, men's handiwork; io*o ro
nime, with just one's two hands, i. e..
unarmed; e lokunaa nims, he clenched
the fist; lohma*ini nime, to dip the
hands; nime i meumeuUku, my left hand;
nikisis nimeku, refrain my hand; ni'i
nime haahi, to lay hands on; ng&ungeu
nime, armlet; penaiana nime, the palm;
suusuune nime, elbow; taalengasie nime^
mu, open your hand out flat; ngdu i
nimana nga keni, to live with a woman,
lit., to eat from the hand of a woman.

nima S., nima U. 2. food bowl; nime sarasara,
a large bowl for feasts; *aU} nime, to set
out bowls of food at a feast; kolune nime,
the outside of a bowl; la*ona nime, in the
bowl.

nimo U.. nemo S.. rain, hoi nimo, ha'animo,
nimonimo.
nimdii tr.. to rain on.

nine ha*anine, S.. to accustom oneself, to be
accustomed to.

]ilnl-(na. ni) U.. n., kernel; ninina, its kernel,
its seed; nini hakis, an aze; mm uhi, a
yam; nini kana, a hana tuber.

ainiho n.. a hornet; niniho alaha, a large kind
of hornet.

alnftoSi adj.. trembling, wincing, shivering
from cold or fright.

ninginlngi a small bat.

niparo U.. demonstrative pron., that, these,
there; follows the noun.

alii, oinisi v. tr.. to divide, to be the boundary;
ko nisi *oto ile'u, this is the boundary;
nisi hue, to pull taro for eating.
nitlte (na) v. n.. boundary, limit; nisiUina

lue, high-water mark.
niilla-(kn) gerund. Florida ngUi,

nita S.. nita U., ha*aniU, ha'anila how often;
'eniie, 'eniiana, how many. Mota visa,
Motu nida, Florida ngiha, NiuS fiha.

aio the coconut palm (Cocos nudfera), its nut
nga hoi niu; nga niu, mu niu, coconut
trees; niu iangalau, a heavily laden
coconut tree; *ahe i niu kingalau, a tide-
rip between Ulawa and Sa'a; niu tesi,
a variety of nut with thin skin; niu
vferu, a short-stemmed coconut with
yellowish fronds and reddish-skinned
fruit; hduheui i niu, U., nga hdihei niu,
S., a log of coconut wood; nga koru"
horui niu, a chip of coconut meat; niu
hoholu, a hard-fleshed coconut; luluhui
niu, a coconut frond; mudii niu, midrib
of the leaflet; mwaritei niu, sennit;^ Pda
niu, to crack a nut; qAa ni niu, 1,000
nuts; sO/ukai niu, to grate coconut; udi

nitt (continued).

m niu, 100.000 nuts; niu madeli, a fully
ripe nut; *oni, coconut milk; teu, half
coconut shell; opu, the early stage of the
nut when the shell has not hardened;
poufou, a green nut; hoi ftto, a sprouting
nut; fdui helu, 10,000 nuts; suhuU, to
make an opening in a green nut; taho
ta*a, to put a nut with the corpse in a
canoe; uhu, to husk nuts; *ulu*ulu, a
dry nut; *unu, the flower spathe. Poly-
nesian niu.

nitt ni taoha a palm (Nipa fruticans).

niu'a, nittniQ*e adj., tasting of coconuts (as
swine flesh).

niole adj., possessing coconuts; h&nue e niule,
a place abounding in coconuts.

niui (ktt) n.. a nest. Florida niku, Mota nigiu,

niwett U., demonstrative pron., that, those,
there; follows the noun.

no S., pers. pron., sing. 1, used with verbal
particle ho. noko I.

no*i, noHnoH U., v. tr., to put, to place; no*i

kil*u, wait a while, stay. 2. to become,

to be; e no*i *aela *oio, it has become no

good.

no<lla-(ka) gerund. Viti not, to dwell in.

noHten U., v. i., to delay. €f. ddu 2.

noko 1. v. i., to guard, to keep watch over,
noho haahi.
nokomi tr. 1 . to guard. 2. U., to turn away,
to avert; m^iomi maa, to turn the eyes
away.

noko 2. (/. no.

noma S., n., a spear, generic term; noma ddiedi,
a spear with grass plaiting on it.

notto v. i., to place the face against, to kiss, to
sniff; nono wdsu, to smell,
nononga v. n.
nono*i S., nonohi U., tr.
nonoHla- S., nonohUa- U. (ka) gerund.
Florida nouiinongi.

nono 'atl n., gnat, sandfly.

noAO isttU n., a strong-smelling herb.

nonola yesterday, the locative i may precede.
nonola nga rodo, the night before last;
nonola wan, the day before yesterday;
nonoia *oto wau, three days ago; e ia
*otoi 'aela mwaani nonoia, it is wocae
than yesterday. Mota nora, Florida
noia.

nonoro*a S., adj., red. noro.

noBowMtn v. i., to sniff at, to smell; used with
suffixed pronouns hu, mu, nd; e nom(^
wdsune, he smelled him.
nonowMattU tr., to track by smelling, to get
the scent of.

nonganonga U. , n., nonganonga iano, a ripple.

Bo'one adv., even, also: follows the word
qualified; to*olamu no'one ado, thine
they are.

noonoo (na, ni) n., tips of shoots of creepers.

noomhaana i nooruhaana, relsring on, because
of. f/l noru,

noro, nonoro'a to be red.

norot no'naom S., nonmom U., v. L, to trust,
to rely; noru dile, S., to be disappointed

HORU

70

nont, no'imoni (continued).

of one's hope; noru hono^ to be wind-
bound (of a sailing party).
nonilieHni tr.
nornhaH v. i.. mm sa'a noruhe'i peU, I shall

not be confounded.
i Boniha v. n., used with poss. 3; relying on,
because of. Florida noru.

nornto'o used with poss. 3; to trust, to rely
on. U>*o,
nomto'onga trust.

nolo V. i.. to cease, to desist, to be quiet.
mwanvwanoto^ maenoio. nolo nguu, to
cease speaking; noio 'arawa, to die
suddenly; noio 'arawanga, sudden death.
Wango ngoto.

noil S., pers. pron., sing. 1; used as subject of
verb.

BOS, nnnna ▼. i., to anoint; rumu nue maa, eye
ointment.

BttMiiiala adj., glistening, brilliant; mwaa
nuenuiUi, a glist^fning snake.

nnktty nonnka v. L, to kink, to have corruga-
tions in, to shrivel, wrinkle; nnkn dara^
to wrinlde the forehead; nukn maa, to
wrinkle, to screw up, the face,
nnkoini tr., to crease, to fold.

mdcannkiila U., adj.* shriveled up.

snaia S.. nima U., n., a house; nume ineu, my
house; nnme ni nman€, church; t numaa
ola, at So-and-so's house; iwiim foia,
name of a cicada (empty house), its
presence taken as a sign of death, a bad
omen; hoi nume, in the house; huli
nume, house site, plat; kuui lume, a
collection of houses, village; iduidu
nume, to go from house to house, to
gad about; kolukoana nume, roof of a
house; maai nume, door; iiMr0 nume, in
front of the house, courtyard; mdi i
nume, within the house; i mamaUUana
nume, on the veranda; mweia ni nume,
child of the house; pipisine nume, eaves
of the house; mu poopooiana nume,
foundations of the house; pungui nume,
a group of houses; Hridine nume, eaves
of the house; ko ru'u i nume, goes back
into the house; ho sisUikie mu nume,
goes into houses; taiaa nume, a besom;
to'utohu nume, to build a house; poo ni
nume, domesticated pig; wai nume, in
the house. Mota tifiwa, San Cristoval
rumwa, Wedau numa, Malay Utma.

nnnn 1. v. i., to quake (of ground), to be
unstable, loose (of a post). 2. v., and
n., earthquake, nga nunu e nunu, there
was an earthquake. Wango nunu,
Maori mra.

nvmi 3. (kn) n., shadow (of persons), reflection,
likeness, life, soul. M. A., p. 252; ho
tcta *dUho'i ana nunune, recovers its
soul; tdio nunu, to photograiA; nunu
e tola, there was an earthquake.
i nnnnha used with poss. 3; because of,
owing to. Florida nunu, Malo nunu,
Bougainville Straits iioiio, Wango nunu.

nmn 4. nunuli, to sting (of the stinging trees)

nunula'o and apune «po'«.
nmm^a ptdu nunu*e, to*o nunu'e, spotted,

specked. Wango nunu, dust.
ananhe^ S., v. L, nunuhe'i qe*u, to enter, to

be entangled in.
mmnla'o n., stinging-nettle tree, with large

leaves, of ten planted as a fence, nunu A.
mmnli to sting, nunu 4.
nmtidv V. i., to wither (of trees, etc.). Mota

nun, to shed leaves,
niuittrata 1. v. 1., to be feeble, to tremble from

weakness, nunu 1, rele. 2. n., trem-
bling, fear,
nasi U., takanga aiwa nuH, a measure, just on

a fathom,
nitto 1. n., a squid, caught by spearing with

a hair comb (ora^a) fastened on a rod.
nnto, nntonnto 2. '0*0 nuto, to bow the head.

HO

The palatal nasal and has the sound of ng

in singer.

nga 1. artide, demonstrative, a, the; used in
the singular number only; in Sa'a as a
rule nga is not used of parts of the body,
but in Ulawa it is fredy used; nouns In
the singular may be used without nga
except when there is a sense of any or a.
nga taa, S., nga iaka, U., what; ngaini,
S., ngaile, U., some one; nga*e$a, S.,
ngaite, U.. another, a certain; ngaihei,
U., who.

nga 2. noun ending, added to verbs, adjectives
and other nouns: mae, to die; maenga,
death; mamaela'a, weak; mamaela'anga,
weakness; ngdngUdi niho, to gnash the
teeth; ngdngildi nikonga, gnashing of
the teeth. Maori nga.

ngaa, ngiangas v. tr., to eat; naanaa, used to
children; e ngaa *olo, did he eat it; m^u
ha*a da ni ngaa, we have no food, lit..
thing of eating.

ngaangaa 1. v. L, to spread (of ulcers) . 2. v. i.,
to crack with a loud noise (of trees about
to fall).

ngidi 1. n., flint; me*i ngedi, S., mAsi ngedi, U..
a flint; hdu ngedi, flint rock; kUu ni
ngedi, a hole in which flints are found.
2. an axe; ngddi weuwe, a stone axe
(grandfather's axe). Motu nadi, stone;
Florida nagi. Guppy "Sdomon Is-
lands," p. 77.

ngldl, ngllngedl 3. v. i., to be firm; suesuelaa
e ngddi, the foundation is firm; hde
ngd'ingedi, to hold fast. Wango nasi.

ngado (na, ni) i ngadona 'aena, before him. at
his feet.

ngae (kn) 1. suli qeri ngae, suli qeri i ngaena,
backbone. 2. Uo i ngaei maa, S., lio
i ngaena maa, U.. to look askance at,
to envy; lio i ngae maanga, n.. envy.

nga'eta S., ngaita U., some, one, another, a;
*eia, iie. nga'eia po'o ni nime, the other
hand; ana nga* eta dinge, on another day.

ngll'i verb suffix used intranritively: ueu mjk-
ng€*i. ngd*ini.

71

NGB

acaihd Um intenog. prtm., who: plural
mwailUL ngaihei e las mdi, who came
here; kira mwaihei, who are they.

ngafle U., artlde. one. a: ik, ta'atta ngaile,
every one; 'eiana ngaiU, the first; waia*m
wa'ema'4 ana ngaile, to speak ezoeasively
to one.

ngaiid 1. S., article, one. a. ia'eta'tna ngaini,
every one; iuUana ng^ini ka'a las mdi,
no one came; 'siana ngaini, the first
one; e ka'a iuiiana ngaini, there is not
any one; ngaini sa'a Un ka'akirtru's,
none shaJQ pass in front of them (and
overcome them); maUUdi waha'a
mwaanis ngaini, to rebuke a man for sin.

acft^ni 2. verb suffix of transitive force, kii
hUngt'ini* Mota Ufa*.

nst^nfadi to be strong, to be firm. nglUi,
ka'angA'initdi.

ngaita U., article; ngaiU kolo k dlo, a different
thing; ngatie laa, another person.

nglll 1. n.. canarium nut; ngdU maa, smoked
nuts stowed in a tangi. tf. repo, ngdU
mo/do, the month of August, the time
of ripe nuts; iksroo ngUi, to pick the
nuts; hoikopat buttress flanges on the
lower trunk of the tree; koukon, kernel
of the nut; ^a'aJbora, the outer skin of
the nut. Mota ngai, Solomons Hfoli.

ngm, ngUUngell U. 2. v. tr., to shake, to dis-
turb, to move about restlessly, to move
one's position.

ngllttte S., ifitft ngdaUi da, all and sundry

oganlte S.. nganlta U.. time when, with loo^
tive f. inganiu, when, at what time;
used of future or past time. Florida
ngiha, Mota ngaisa, Lau angita.

Bganga a crumb, used with genitive I. S.. wt.
U.; crumbs, shavings, dust, small pieces.
mm ngangai ngeulaa, crumbs of food;
ngangai mwakana, dust of the earth;
mwai ngangani *ei, chips of wood.

ngangadl, ngangangadl v. tr.. to creak, to
grate, to grind the teeth; ngangadi niko,
to grind the teeth, ngangadi nihonga,
V. n.

Bgangan to spread (of uloerB). to Uaae (of fire);
maa ngangan, blear-eyed from smoke of
cooking fires.

ngsra, ngarangara v. 1.. to cry. to buss, of
mosquito; ngara *i*Wi, to cry aloud;
ngara li*di*a*a, to give an uncertain
note; ng/ara lonUm, to resound; ngara
mango ta'a, U.. to sob; ngara takela'i
ana, to call upon him with weeping;
ngara nUmlo, to weep bitterly; ngara
wdeweU'a, to have a solid sound.
ligsraha U., v. n.. cry.
ngaranga v. n.. weeping.
nganta v. n.. sound; ngaratai *ehuri, sound

of the conch,
agarasi tr., to cry for. to cry on account of.
ngarala-(ktt) gerund, mwane *o ro'uro'
kuie'inie ngara^aku, hold not thy peace

ngarala (continued).

at my tears. Florida ng§rakai to cry
out.

agid 1. V. L. to be tough (of foodk Lau
ngasi, hard.

ogid* ngiingeai S., ngiringlrf U. 2. to chew,
to roll about in the mouth. Wango
ngasi.

ngtUt ngtimgau i. v. tr.. to eat; with poss. 3.
ngitn a$ta, to eat of; ng^ kiksna^ ng&n
hikeni, to partake of; ngdm i nimana
nga keni, to live with a woman, lit., to
eat from the hand of a woman; ngiu
lapaika, to smoke tobacco; ngdu maa*i,
a sacrificial feast, ngdn maa*ingt; ngdn
'immings, cannibalism; ngdn ni pots,
to eat to satiety; ngdn qe'n snn, to gorge,
lit., to eat till the head drops; ngdn
sasdami, to eat to repletion; ngdn
tskeUks, nga mala she, to drop crumbs
whUe eating; *o*a sars ngdn ihsi, what
will you eat; ta'ata'a maai ngeu, one
meal; maai, S. {maani, U.). ngeu, the
evening star. lit., meal watcher; iWr#
ngdn masiana a 61a, they eat the death
feast of So-and-so; ma^ona € ngdn
diana, when ripe it eats well; 'o ngdn
ndngana, did you eat of it; do ngdu, to
fast, to abstain from food,
ngluha S.. V. n.. a feast; ngdnha, U.. a feast.

food.
nglvha-(ka) gerund.; ngdnkanaspdipdne,
be is a great eater; ngdnkana e *ada, ha
overeats; tnpungU ngdnkana, to offer
food to.
nglalaa v. n.. food, things to eat. ms'i
ngtniaa, mm ngndaa; mn ngangai
ngtnlaa, crumbs of food,
agiunga v. n.. an eating, a meal; iaataa

maai ngmngi, one meal.
agtvla-(ka) gerund.; ngjdnlana < diana, it
Is good to eat. Wango ngau; Mota
ngan, to chew; Motu gan^, Maori wfsii.

agiu 2. vocative, used of children of each sex:
ngdu, ladl 'alai ngsn, U.. you boys; ro
ngdn, you two childreai.

nglnngtn aiina armlet made of haa, hnresaso,

nga pers. pron.. sing. 3. he, that; 1. used before
proper names: ngta Awao, that man
Awao. 'olo ngea Dora esi tenri, then said
Dora. 2. a shortened form of ingt'is:
*amamn nge iui, where is that father of
youra; ngsaUi, ngia ola, whom do you
mean? 3. added for explanation: nri
qa'nne nge mwane, I mean that the male
is the head; so ngs, well then; nge, nga
taa ni, heyl what's that? ngeni 'olo
ngeena, yes. that's it; ngeni non lae,
that is why, thereupon. I went; mwai
keni ana wda'anga ngeni, what women
for talking; oke nge e urine, possibly
that is so; nge laenga kesi lae, then the
journey ^tiUi take place; nge ke 'ue kd*n
ne, how then will it be?

HOEBHA

72

afteoft deinomtntive proa., that: foUowt noun
or pronoun; »fifi*s iifMiia, tliat U be; nga
oia tea ng^ena, what is that thing? nge.

ng^l petB. pron.. sing. 3, he. she, it: a shortened
form of nge'U; used as subject followed
by €. nie*i *oio € *unu€* it was he who
said it; ng^H nou ka'a lae, that is why
I did not go.

ng%H9 S.. afa*ia U.. pen. pron., sing. 3, he, she.
it: used as subject followed by c; three
forms of the pronoun may be used
together for emphasis: inge'u nge'i
9 *unu€, it was he who said it; in Sa'a
the final e becomes a before the peraonal
article a and a long vowel results, nge'ie
ni, that is it; ngc'ta t Aroma, nge'ia
'uUku, it is at Arona, the 'uUhu, I mean;
nge'ia aola e 'unna, he. So-and-so. said
it. Mota luia.

ngaitai S. 1. interrog. pron., what: used pre-
ceding noun, ngtiui *inomi, what man?
ngeiUi U*oa, what spirit? 2. ngeiiei ue
ena, that is Just it, just so.

ngengada-(na^) ngengedena, its end. Wango

ngani </. ngf .

ngaaita U.. used with locative i as nganite,

q. V.
ngsrsngarsla adj., of a checked pattern.
ngaro v. i., to chew, to nibble (of rats, etc.).
ngaroH tr.. *asuhe e ngero'ie, the rat gnawed
it.
ngen </. ng Am.
n^verb suffix of transitive force, raa raangi.

ngidn (kn) U. 1. the lip (of peraons); by
metonymy in Sa*a the mouth, tero
ngidu, to pout the lip. 2. ngidu *upu.
ngingidu *upu, to hate; ngidu *upunge,
hatred. Mota ngusui, Florida gidu,
Viti ngusu, Motu udu, Sa'a ngM^fii.

ngingidn'e the native bee, honey. Florida
midua.

ngiagite *ala ngingite, to clench the teeth.

nglsu, nginglstt S., ngitongiso U., to spit; hoi
ngisu, spittle, lungs; 'ono ngisu, to water
at the mouth; sae ngisu, the lungs.
ngisonge v. n., spitting.
ngituhi tr., to spit, to spit on; e ngisuhie

*apu, he spat blood.
ngisuhe4ni tr., to spit on. M. L., p. 91,
Maisin kasufe,

ngisu 'ate U., to be thirsty; ngisu *aUnga, n..
thirsL

ngo'a adj., blunt, with the point broken off;
nga ngcxmgoo ni solo e ngo'a, the tip of
the cloud was broken off.

ngoU V. tr., to destroy a man's property after
his death, huni ngolie to'oto'olana,
M. A., p. 263. sn*e ngoli, to fall back-
ward and break the neck.
ngoUte V. n., a destruction of property:

wrongly spelt in M. L., p. 263.
ngollla-(ku) gerund. Florida holi.

ngoengoo (na* ni) U., end: with locative t;
ngoo n goona, its end, skirts; paro i
ngioongpo, at the edge; t ngoongoo ana

ngoaugaa (continued).

w a lMmalam , &• at the world's end;
i n§oomgDo ana Kakua, Cape geibcck.
San Cristovml. Fagani ngo, lip; Santa
Crus iifo, nose. if. M. L., p. S4.

agoongoodo S.. end; ngqon§aodo ama makato,
end of the time.

agora (na* ai) 1. a point of land* a cape, ago-
rsfui Mmu, Mota nitregh point of
land. 2. Up. 1/. ngidu; dMu {idu, U.)
agora 'upm, to hate, lit., swollen Up;
afora *upmug$, a., hatred.

ngora* agoagora 3. to snoce. to grunt, snort;
ngora i i«# {ku), to growl. Mota
agora* Maori agofoagofo.

agoraagora 1. an isthmus, a cape.

Hgoraagora 2. the village at the northeast end
of Ulawa; Wdi ni Tekuln, its lagoon;
*EU Maosi, its landing place.

ngori V. tr., to quench; agorta Ltoa, to quench
the Spirit.

Ngoriera an *akalo ni maiawa armed with gar-
fish, seen off Qa'ulo. M. A., p. 259.

ngadtt S.. Up. </. ngidu, U. Uo gera agiida.
to grudge, to hate; qd'u ngudu, the
blackfish. Mota ngusui. Up; Poly-
nesian iku. M. L., p. 85.

ngulu to resound; mwanguiungulu, resounding.

nguruy ngunguni» agvngnagnm S., agaro*
ngnmU., 1. to growl or roar (of animals),
to mumble or groan (of persons),
ngombi tr., to growl at (of dogs). Maori
ngMra, to grunt; Bugotu aganagara, to
growl; Niu€ ngungulu^

nguru 2. p<Ua nguru, U., name of a month.
September,
ngumsi v. tr.. to knock out some (of things
in a row), 'anguru* e ripu ngurusit
nikona, knocked his teeth out, said of
a young child when the teeth of his
elder brother faU out.

ngna v. i., to answer, to make response,
ngnuhi tr.

nganhila-(ku) gerund. Wango nguuhi;
Samoa nga, to growl.

*o 1. exclamation of dissent.

'o 2. pen. pron., sing. 2, thou; used as subject
of verb either by itself or following i*oe;
suffixed to verbs and prepositions as
object. Florida o.

oa 1. V. i., to share in, to be fulfiUed, to come
to pass, to be fitting, to suit, to be
suited to, to permeate. ka*aoa*i, M'ioa.
melu oa *oto ana, we share in it; laa
makolo € oa *oto, the time is fulfiUed;
e oa ana, it is suited to it; toio oaoa, to
permeate.
osla-(kn) opposite to, over against, corre-
sponding to. concerning; PaPangurU'
nguru oalana, mutterings concerning.
oaoanga v. n., a sharing in; m&ni oaoanga

hd*iliu, equaUty.
oangi tr., to foUow suit. M'ioangi,

73

OKU

oa (ktt) 2. a pair, fellow; oaku, my fellow, my
mate; oa ni ola, a pair of things; oa ni
Ptdi, two cowries. Samoa oa, a pair.

Oa 3. the two islands at the south end of San
Cristoval; Oa Raha, Santa Anna, Oa
Riki, Santa Catalina. Spelt wrongly
as Owa.

o'a 4. a tree, the bark used for purposes of
staining; the red juice is extrsicted by
pounding and squeezing and is mixed
with charcoal.
o'aH V. tr.. to stain with o'a. Samoa *o*a,
Bischofiia javanica; *o*a*i, to dye with
its stain.

'o'a 5. to settle (of birds), to squat on the
haunches. Samoa to'a, to settle; Mota
toga. Nine tokai.

'o'a 6. U., *o 2, thou. *a 7. verbal particle.

*0'an an island in the Mara Masiki Channel.

odaH wd*i oda% to quarrel.

odo, odoodo 1. to be straight, to go forward.
ha'aodo, hH'iodoH, lamwaodo. € odo *oto
ia'au, he went straight on; mdnu odo,
to be level, upright; e odo, that's right
(Mwouta, U., use); sulu odoodo, to go
straight.
odoodonga v. n., straightness, uprightness.
odoha V. n., used with poss. 3. odokaana
me'i *ano mola, in good ground; tnu
odokaana wala, words to the point;
odokaana mu ola, correct, exact things;
odokaana i ola, opposite to, off, such-
and-such a place; *uri odokaana tola,
walk straight along the path.

odo (na» ni) 2. odona maa, a gate opening
directly opposite a person; nga odoni
kana, a song sung straight through; nga
odoni keu, a row of stones; odoni sae,
moral uprightness.

odo'i V. tr., to meet, to come across, lio odo*i,
to find; kuU odo*i, to arrive and find;
taha odoH, to come upon.

odonga U., dUn odonga, to make trial of.

odotaH partic. Just, fair, righteous; sulu
odota'i, to act righteously.
odotaHnge v. n., justice, righteousness.

o'e, o'eo'o U.. to be crazy, delirious.

*oha betel leaf (Piper betle), both leaves and
catkins are eaten. *oka ni me'esu
(nta'usu, mou, U.), a wild variety; pute
ni *oka, a packet of betel leaf; sili *oka,
to get betel from the bush; ku*usi, to
pluck leaves of betel.

ohaH to be capsized; melu oka'i *oto, we are
capsized,
ohalid tr., to cause to capsize.

oha 1. V. tr., to drive away.

'oha 2. adv., perhaps, possibly, most likely;
or it may be used at the beginning of a
sentence, of supposititious cases, wa
*oke, unless; so *oke, perhaps; wdi e
mapipi *oke *oto ia'inie holune mwakano,
whether the water had receded off the
face of the earth.

ohera v. i., to race, to compete, kd'ioke.

«ohi 1. (in) v.. after, for. to fetch; lae kd'u
*oki*i, please go bring it; tdu *oki, U., to

'ohi 1 (continued).

seek; tola *oki, to search for. Florida

goki, varigoki; Maori okia, to long after.
'ohi 2. U.. kUToki, to be doubtful about, to ask

questions,
'ohi'a U.. adv., perhaps, most likely,
ohiti perineal bandage, T bandage of pandanus

leaf worn by men.
oho V. i., to fight, to strive with, to attempt.

okoa kurunge, to race; okoa moo, to

practice the dance.
ohotaa v. n., a battle.
ohongi tr., to make trial of, to practice.

kA*iokonginge, Wango okongi; Niui

oko, to rush at.
ohonga U., n., lae ohonga, to go tentatively;

mala okonga, to tempt; mala okonganga

(double n. ending), temptation, trial;

mdmi okonga ana, taste and try it.
ohtt 1. V. i., to be boiling, to boil (of water).

ka'aoku.
ohii 2. various, different; e oku 'oto adaru'i, U.,

there is a difference between the two;

oku *inoni oku sae, many men Of many

minds.
ohusi V. tr., to differentiate, to distribute.

ka*aokusi. Florida ovu ni tinoni, a

crowd of men.
'oho 3. n., sugar cane; 'oku nunu. M. A., p.

21. Mota tou, Motu toku, Florida tovu,
oi 1. exclamation, aha.
*oH 2. V. tr., to break, ma'o'i. Wi H'iri'i, to

break in pieces; kele WVo'i, to break;

tale'i *oTo*i, to trouble oneself.
'o'i'oH n.. mu *oTo*i, sections of roof for

thatching. Florida goti.
oka 1. U., to eat areca nut along with betel

leaves and lime,
oka 2. to eat food raw. Viti ndroka, Niu6 ota,

Maori ota.
oka, okaoka 3. v. i.. to destroy gardens (of

pigs) ; poo okaoka, a mischievous pig.
oke, okaoka 1. v. tr., to draw, to drag.
okenga v. n.
okani tr. Wango oge.
'oke 2. 'o. thou; ke, verbal partide. cf. 'o*a 6.
oko 1. a band, a creeper used in tying.
oko 2. a tree (Acacia sp.) ; tarasi oko, a cuckoo.
oko, okooko 3. black (earth) pigment used for

the teeth, the idea being that the gums

ate hardened thereby.
'oko 4. *o, thou: ko, verbal particle, cf. *oke, *o*a 6.
okooko a basket, a receptacle; okooko ni pasa,

basket containing bonito hooks,
okoln oholu tewa, eleventh and twelfth day of

the moon,
oku 1. n., a marine annelid, palolo (Eunice

viridis, the epitokal segments), oku e

kirusia maana, said of the migratory

plover, cf. kdrikeri'ala. 2. names of

certain months: oku lade, September;

oku mwaa, October; oku denu, Novem-
ber; oku peine, December. 3. summer

time, as distinguished from aau, winter.

4. names of certain days of the month:

q&'i oku, tookuungei oku, S., second and

third days after full moon.

OKU

74

okn 5. the end-walls of the home; oku i maa,
wall in front; oku i puH, wall behind;
kMioku, end purlint of the house.

okB 6. swollen stomach.

ola n.. thing; the noun ending may be added;
with the personal article aols, the person
So-and-so, such a one; to ola, man and
wife, and as vocative, you two married
folk; in phrase ko ola, if it be so. a ola ib
mat. So-and-so is sick; a ola ho mas 'ofo.
So-and-so ia dead; a keU ola, young S(y
and-so; homuna a ola. So-and-so's fam*
ily; ktni ana a ola, such-and-such a
woman; kira a ola, whom do jrou mean;
saai ola, to know things, to be wise; ola a
Elija e na*o *oio mdi, how that verily
Elijah came before; keU SM't ola, a little
thing; e ka'a olaiJu, there is nothing at
all; keU ola, to act; kou ola, a thing of a
round shape; mu ola ku'iku'i, dangers,
diflkulties; iko'oi ola, a bundle; mu
Ukui ola, worn-out things; Ud€ ola,
mischievous; nou 'ure mdi i ola, I am
from such-and-such a place; mantoi ola,
breath; meameataui da, a huge thing;
molatana nga ola, innumerable things;
ana ks ola mwamwadau, if possible;
ola ni mwan€, a sacred thing; m£*i olana,
the thing; nikii (nikent) ola, a big thing;
oa ni ola, a pair; odokaana mu ola, cor-
rect, exact things; odokaana i ola, oppo-
site to, off, such-and-such a place; mu
qa'aSai ola, shreds; si'okaa'i ola, to be in
a poor way; ta*€la*i i ola, beginning from ;
mu U'itesi ola, flesh; mu iale*i ola mola,
inferior things, nga ola, pooh 1 absurd 1 nga
ola taa, what? nou ka*a io'oana nga ola, I
have nothing.
danga, ere ni kedi alanga, to take an oath;
lauki olanga, succor; lede olanga, mis-
chief; lude cianga, carrying cargo; saai
olanga, wisdom, Imowledge; idri olanga,
riches.

ols V. tr., to scrape with a shell, to get the skin
off yams, etc

'oil V. i., to return, to relapse. kAToli, nulu

*oli *olo, we have returned; mu ola

'oU*oU, changes; *oli ana, to succeed to

a thing, to inherit.

'dUngs V. n., return. kd*ikeToUnge, v. n.,

bounty.
'oHsi tr. to change, to alter; 'olisi to*okaa,
to exchange money, to buy; poo ke ne*i
lalamoa ko 'olisie *oto a mwaena, the pig
is the victim in place of the man.
'oliiila-(ktt) gerund.

*oIlts-(lni) n., used as preposition, in place
of. noko lae 'olitana, I come in his
place.
'oU'olits v. n., heir; a 'olt'oUU, the heir.
Wango ori, MoU M.

'oUeH V. 1., to return, to turn back, to go home;
kira'elu 'a We kA'i 'olieH, they embark
on their return Journey.
'oBa^Bga U., v. n., return.

Olo, oloolo 1. v. i., to swim.
oloolonga v. n., swimming.

ol0, siss l o 1 (continued).

alahi tr., to swim for and get.
oUIUL*bd to swim with, holding. FVondm
olo, Wango oro.

olo 2. v. !.. do ngdu, to abstain from food; olo
nggmngs, fasting; do ana ki*olo, to be
faint from fasting; olo manini, to be of
orderly behavior.

*olo, *do'do 3. v. tr., to cut the ends off; 'olo
^*u, to cut hair; *olo kou*e ikmne, to cut
the hair off the whole bead.
*olo4 tr., to sever the shoots of; nga *oka
na kira *olo*ia 'olo, the betel plants fom
which they cut off the shoots. Mota
foro 2.

Oloha a village on the west coast of Little
Malaita, its landing-place Ha'au; the
language of Oloha is Tolo, the qieecfa
of the people of the Mara Masiki Chan-
nel; it was known to Bishop Pattesoo,
who made a small sketch of its grammar.

*do*olo V. i., to reel, to stagger; dsu 'olo'ola, to
be loose, unstable.
'do*doa4 v. i.. to stagger about. Mota
gologolo, Malagasy AoroibofD.

dosi on ga U., n., a company, a party.

olopal U., n., a yam with fruit on the vine.

Siltt 1. numeral, three; *olun€, third, third time;
ka'a*olu, three times. Mota 161, Pdy-
nesian tolm,

*dn 2. S., dialectic for mda.

oai V. tr., to suck, to smoke tobacco.

ofldiige V. n., sucking, smoking. Maori
momt*

omo n., arrow; nanga, the barb of an arrow;
to'onga*i omo, to draw an arrow.

'omdu pers. pron., plural 2: you; used as sub-
ject, or attached to verb or preposition
as object; more restricted in meaning
than *omu.

'omu pers. pron., plural 2: you; used as sub-
ject, or attached to verb or preposition
as object; used following the longer
form t'offitt,

<omoro, *omoroH» *oaoru's S., pers. pron.,
dual 2; used as subject, or attached to
verb or preposition as object.

ona 1. fresh-water limpets with poisonous
spines; ona e mwakolieu, the shellfish
spiked my foot.

ona 2. a deep-sea fish.

onanala adj., lumpy (of idmmanga, taro pud-
ding), rough (of a road).

one n., sand, beach; one mamae, fine sand; ona
piruu, S., one ^iruu, U., black sand, such
as is found on the beaches at San Cris-
toval; apau one, the lee side of an island;
*asi dodo kule i one, deep water right
in to shore; awalosi i one, the north-
northeast wind; idumia one, U., count-
less; maraau ro one, the east-northeast
wind; kira 'asi usuU one, they went
then along the beach; e urikana nga
one, like the sands, of countless num-
bers; *u*ui one, a grain of sand.
ons*a S., onsla U., adj., sandy. Mota one,
Maori one.

75

OKB

*md 1. to remain, to be settled; '<mi huu 'oto
ana, dwell therein forever.

'oni 2. V. L, to repeat, to go over again (of
worda); ho '<mi ana ia'aia'a me*i wala
fifMiM, repeated the same words. San
Cristoval onioni, a tale.

'oni 3. coconut milk strained from the scraped
flesh of the nut mixed with a little water,
extracted by squeezing and used in the
cooking of various vegetables; when
without coconut milk the yam mash is
known as keUhde, tola, to curdle, pii
*oni, to make coconut milk; *oni wei

(a) coconut milk boiled thin into oil;

(b) a dish of pounded yam mash with
coconut oil.

'oBimal 1. ▼. !.• to pack, to stow; 'onime'i koni,
to stofe up. 2. partic well, cleverly;
kele 'onime'i, to do cleverly.
*oaima4ni tr., keU 'oninte'inie, to do it
• well; to stow. Wango orimainu

<ooi'oni adv.. always.

'oaioninga v. n.» a tale oft repeated, folklore.

'onlaaa S., v. i., to change the mind, to repent.
'oalaaenga v. n.. repentance.

'onltett V. L, to delay.

oao 1. numeial, six; onona, sixth, the sixth
time; ha'aono, six times.

'ono» 'ooo'oBO 2. v. i., to swallow, konokono.
*oino ngisu, to water at the mouth; 'ofio
Pola, to swallow whole; hoi 'ono*ono, a
pill; kilu *ono*ono, stones to swallow in
ordeal. M. A., p. 212*
<ononii tr.

'oMMnQa-Ckn) gerund,
'onoayiinl tr. Florida sofiomj, Mota nolo,
to swallow; Maori horohoro, throat;
Mottt kadonoa»

•onoHnoma n.. gullet, hakam 'ono'onoma, a
measure, a yard.

onu kdo of»«, to divide and cut short.

onu'e adj., S., cut off short; 'o hole onu*e
^ongikn hao»

'ongo n., mangrove. Florida iongo, Viti
ndtmgo.

'o'o 1. exclamation, of dissent.

'o'o 2. n., a wooden drum; the inside is hol-
lowed out {kdru) through a narrow slit
on the side, the drum when played is set
upon the stem of a tree fern as a pedes-
tal, the drumstick is a piece of sago-
pahn frond, the part of the drum hit is
the center portion just above the open-
ing. When a feast {koula) is being pre-
pared the drums are kept in a house
made for the purpose. Drumming is
kept up Gcmstantly till the feast is over.
Drums are beaten after a murder, hire
kofo, para ni *o'o, a set of drums; ri'i,
small, treble: iaha *o*o, tenor or middle
sise; ioU, bass; ikiikingi *o*o, sulu *o*o, to
beat the drums. Wango oo.BugotufoAo.

'o'o, 'o'o*o 3. to stay, to remain behind, to be;
Vo ni Ukinge, to be in flight. Lau ioo,
Nguna lofa>.

'o'o 4. adv., utterly, quite, e mae *o*o, he is
quite dead; haHk$ *oio *o*o, never at all.

•o'ohalni, ^o'ohi v. tr., to draw near to.

ooho 1. V. L, to take down; oolio 'asi, to destroy,
to break up (of a house); o<^ ioli, to
descend, to fall headlong.
oohoH tr., to take to pieces (of a house).
oohori tr., to take down, to detach. Wango
ohosi,

ooho 2. V. i., to desist from, to cease.

<0*olo'u an island in Mara Masiki Channel.

'o'omae U.. io*oni 'o'omat, mourning attire.

'o*eai U., V. i.. to sink. ka*a'o*oni.

(o<oauto» ^o'onntonttto to incline the head, to
bow. nuio 2.

'o'orott U.. Maramara 'O'orou. the name of a
canoe in a story.

oom 1. to blow (of winds). 2. n., the wind.
ooru ko ooru, the wind blows; ooru
peHpesi, to blow strong,
oombi tr., to blow on (of the wind).

'o'ora*e S., adj., short. U., pom,

opa* opaopa 1. to divide, to separate, to di»»
tinguish, to take away from, maopaopa.
susu opa, ornamental ridge covering;
mmane *o opaopaa U'oa mwadni'emi,
take not the Spirit from us; opa kd*iliu,
to be at variance; opa hitM, to cut up
an animal; opa sae, to be at variance;
didi opa oianga, discrimination, par-
tiality.
opa i a el akn gerund., my transgression.
opanga v. n., division.

opa 2. v. tr., to adopt children.

'opa U.. 3. for *oqa, stomach.

opo» to heat up food once cooked, ha'aopo,

opu 1. green coconut in its early stage with
Uttte flesh and with the sheU still soft.
2. the heart.

opvopn nhi opnopu, U., the name of a month*
February.

'oqa (kn) belly, bowels, stomach. *aqa. M.L.,
p. 55. Florida toba, Mota toqai,

'oqa'oqa U., a bay, indentation of the coast.

ora 1. oven, altar; ora ni uunu, the altar of
burnt offering; • €pin4 ora, beside the
altar.

ora 2. U., ashes; Shuora, dusty.

ora 3. U., to flame, to bum brightly, ha'aora*
Wango ora,

ora 4. a boar pig.

ora 5. ora lulu, to belch.

ocaa V. i., to flow.

oraha'a 1. adj., excessive, hele ni oraha*a, to
do too much; Uu ni oraka*a, to go very
fast. 2. V. i., to sin, to contravene the
public standards of morality. 3. n.,
sin, mu oraha*a, ddu oraha*a; maleledi
oraka*a mwaanie ngaini, to rebuke a man
for sin; sae *asilana oraha*a, fotrgiveness
of sins.
oraha'ala adj., sinful; aoraha'ala, the sinner.
oraha'anga n., sin. Wango oraoraa.

oraora 1. a holy person, one in touch with the
ghosts.

oraora 2. refuse, dung. if. ora 2.

ore 1. V. i.. to remain behind, to be omitted;
V. tr.. to leave. M*iore. ore mwaani,
to be left out; ruana ke'i orea, the other

ORE

76

ore 1 (continued.)

■hall be left; hire ngdu area, they did
not eat it all.
cnore n. with genitive i, ni, areorti oia, an

empty case, a shell.
oreta (ku) v. n.. an end. € *unu oreia ana
mu wala, he spoke and finished the
words; kesi oreta ana uunu 'asikma,
whose end is burning; oreiana mu 'inonu
the rest of the men.
oretalaaa ana i oretalana, finally.
oratanga v. n.. the finish, final end. Motu
ore, orena, remnant.

ora 2. used with genitive «. ni; almost, nearly,
just failing to. melu orei lae, we nearly
wenL

ore S.. lira U., 3. fresh-water prawn, ore ni wet.

ore S., 4. crajrfish, ore ni *esi, Mota nra, Maori
houra,

ore 5. hA*ioref to scold, to quarrel.

oroa to chatter (of ths bird wist), wist ko orea.
M. A., p. 220.

orl, orioil v. tr.. to peel; ori uki, to peel yams;
yams are peeled with a shell held
between the thumb and index finger,
the motion being away from the body
and not toward it as with Europeans.
Viti ori, to cut; Fate ort, Motu oria,

OTO, orooro v. i., to bend down, to stoop, to
lean over; oro i *anOt to stoop to the
ground.
orohaHt oromal v. i.. to bend down, to
stoop, to slant, mwaoroka'i.

oropa (ko) U., ulcer; oropaku, the uloer on my
body.

orooro n.. the beetle that bores the yams,
orooro'a adj., eaten by yam beetles.

oru n., grasshopper, locust.

Ota S. 1. (ku) ulcer; uweli osa, cerumen, wax
in the ear. 2. to be rotten,
osanga v. n., corruption.

osani ksrskara U.. cliff.

osi 1. to cut, to score.

osi 2. nimeku e osi, my arm has gone to sleep,
pina-and-needles feeling.

'osi 3. 'o, thou; si, illative.

osioti to be lukewarm, wawdi osiosi.

osiosita'a adj., striped, streaked.

'o si'o'e exclamation of assent, yes; used in
response to a negative question where
English calls for no. *uri ngaini ka*a
*unuet *o si'u*e, did no one speak? yes
(scilicet, no one did speak).

ote n., open bush-land just above the beach.

'oto 1. adv., follows the verb; is used to denote
the preterite; expresses finality; ex-
presses emphasis; the demonstrative
na or ni may be added; used to connect
the narrative and to show consecutive
action, then, thereupon; marks cessa-
tion of action; used to denote a few, of
things just beginning or a few things
left, hire lae mango *oto, they all went;
me/ii ke*i tola *oto, are we to begin to
carry? ineu *olo, it is I; inge'ie *oU> Uei,
where is he? nou sa*a lae *oto, I shall not
go; ngaini *oto ka'a qaoa nga le*u, no

'oto 1 (continued).

one at all did anything; 'omm sa'a Uo
odo'ieu 'oto lo*u, ye shall not see me
again; *oto *nre md«, up till now; ngaini
*oto atn^u, one of us; wa *oto amolu, or
one of you; mwaanie *oio me'i oCona.
from that very thing; e homu eni ntinge
na 'oto ani wala'imMnge, full oC grace
and truth; to'olaka'elm 'oto, our own
pioperty; mala *oto non ka'a ketesie ike,
as though I had never done it; 'oto
inganite, when? 'oto wdi na'ona, right
before his face; 'oto i ge'nne, right on his
head; *oto hta'o, formerly; 'oto qdni, of
oU; 'ofo a, S.. 'ofo knn, U., forever; 'oto
wait4t long ago; 'oto ikei, laa. where to.
lad? 'oto mola, *oto moiana, at this
pceaent. now; nga liwe 'otona, it was a
cave; 'oto nou si teuru then said I; kire
si roku, ka'a sdunie 'oto, they then ceased
and left off beating him; hire ka'a kmt^
kata'inie 'oto, they no longer aooom-
panied him; e ro 'ata ini 'oto, just a few
as yet; e ta'a kde le'u 'oto, only a little
piece left; ko nisi 'oto ile'u, this is the
boundary; e no'i 'ada 'oto, it has become
bad; nonola 'oto wau, three days aco;
e ngaa *oto, did he eat it? *oni kuu *oio
ana, to be settled; ka'ike 'oto 'o'o, never
at all; e pde 'oto, it is of no avail; ini ni
ha'atarUana *oto, a person to be saved;
ko ne'ie 'oto i'oe, if it be thou; fia nesi
ne'i 'a$namu 'oto, and I shall be your
father; e kolai na'o 'oto wan, he led
the way first; a ola e na'oku 'oto. So-
and-so preceded me; 110*0 lae 'oto, I am
going; e la *otoi 'aela mwaani nonola, it
is worse than yesterday; koro 'a mono
*oto i Kalona, they two live apart in
Kalona; e molakie 'oto, it failed; a
ma'tisu *oto, it is all overgrown; wdi a
mapipi 'oke *oto ia'inie kolune mwakano,
whether the water had receded off the
face of the earth; e mango 'oto, it is
quite finished; mango 'oto, thereupon;
melu mango 'oto mdi, we are all here;
'tare 'oto mdi i 'aekolalaita, from the
beginning up to now; e lae 'oto ni mae,
he went like everything; e 'a'aila'a 'oto
mae ana, he is very strong; *oto 'ie, now;
'oto mola 'ienini. Just now; *oto iiUkou,
just now; ke'i 'tte 'oto, how shall it be
done? 'oto kire kosi 'unue, then they
said it; poo ke lu'i laiamoa ko 'olisie 'oto
a mwaena, the pig is the victim in
place of the man; awala 'oto kuu, U., a
full ten; wdi e kuukttu 'oto, water giuhed
forth; 'oto wdi lalo, in the inside; itoko
lapata'i ulo 'oto, I lament with aying;
le'une nou daa 'oto, I did that already;
likimaana 'oto, certainly. Wango oto,
' oto ku, forever; Vaturanga ttoko; Maori
noko, to sit.

oto 2. (ku) cooked food taken on a journey.
mu oto, otona laeka, food for a Journey.
Lau oso, Samoa om, Viti odho, Maori o.

'oto di used of indefinite space of time, past or

n

VAPk

'oto di (continued).

future, forever, from of old. *olo di *oio

di, forever and ever.
*«to 4« S., 'oto inihott U.. adv.* now; *oio moia

'it Cienini), just now, this minute.
•otomi V. tr., to spear, to pierce with a spear.
*oto '0*0 adv. , for all time. ta*aia*a ola *oto '0*0,

one and only one.
on 1 . pine ni ou, Nicobar pigeon ; ground-pigeon.
'oHi 2. the sandy land just above the beach.
'OHi 3. the site of a former village south of

Su'uholo, Ulawa. Wango gohu.
'oii'oii n., champion* chief, great person. In

M. A., p. 49, Ro uU*i S€u *ou*<m, are

said to be brothers of Qa^uh puine,

whereas they were only two warriors, ro

ramo nuAa. Mota moicrNl.
o«te U., ouUni nima, a group of houses.

paa S., n., bait, me'i paa.

paalahe v. tr., to praise, to bless, to apostro-
phize an isls^d as in ka*addhi; paalahe'o,
lucky you, blessed are you.
paalahenga v. n., praise, blessing.
paalahela-Cko) gerund.

paalahaa with personal article, a paalahea.
So-and-so.

paalt'o n., breadfruit. *apani paaU'o, nauti-
lus shell cut in triangular pieces for
inlaying. San Cristoval qareo,

paHwahii n., a small fish caught among the
shore rocks; hinou ni pa^asahu, a hook
for pa'asahu.

pa's n., yam poles; v. tr., to pole yams.

pa'elana gerund.; pa'elana hohola, poling
up a yam garden.

pa'owa 1. n.. a shark. « lapi ana pa'ewa,
changed into a shark. 2. alaala pa^ewa,
a croton with leaves like a shark's fin.
3. pa*ewa ko *ala tola, S., the last two
days of the moon. Mota Pagoa, shark;
New Guinea paowa, Mailu baea, Florida
bagea, Gilbert Islands bakoa,

piiy piipei U.. V. tr., to drive, to chase. Wango
bai,

pttaaa U., dialectic for q&inaa,

pliits S., piina U.. big. loud, to grow big.
ha'apaine, e pdina 'asi'a, needlessly
big; hiUheU pdine, ninth and tenth days
of the moon; kei ia*a pdine, poor lady;
lo'a wdi peine, March; mala Pdine, to
give oneself airs; mango pdine, to sigh;
< pdine mwaanie, bigger; ngdukana e
pdipHne, he is a great eater, lit., his
eating is big;
pMlnanga v. n., bigness, size.
piinesi v. tr., to be too big for.
plinaha used with poss. 3; pdinahaana, its
full sixe, adolescence. The root appears
to be pai on comparison with pdipei-
lesu*a, U., big; and na is probably a
verbal suffix. Alite baila, Lau baita,
Ceram maina. M. L., p. 80.

plip«flMii*a U., very large, pdina, Idsu.

pUpsinaHi adj.. very big.

pMHp^ti S.. pXaipMl U., strong, firm; hde
pd'ipesi, to grasp firmly; ooru pe'ipesi,
to blow strong.

pala to be light in color; niu pala, a coconut
with light-colored leaves; poo pala, a
white pig.

palapala 1. an omen, sign; palapala ana haka,
a sign of the ship (Southern Cross)
coming, the particular palapala in this
case is a shower of rain.

palapala 2. U., palapala ni i*e, a nose-ornament
of shell cut to represent the frigate-bird
(Cruise of the Curacoa. p. 254).

palapala 3. to be gray in color, whitish; qdukn
e palapala, my hair is gray.

Palanle an inlet west of Cape Z41€e in the bay
known as 'Olu Su'u. the other two inden-
tations being Apauone and Hulihuli.

pale 1. V. tr., to preserve, to keep, to main-
tain; pdlea hatanga, to keep fellowship.

psle 2. U.. Ngorangora dialect for qale, nega-
tive particle.

pale 3. U.. v., to chirp, of crickets.

pali S.. Pali kao, a drop left in the bottom,
dregs. Florida bait, part; Lau bali,
side.

palili v. i., to turn aside. Lau/a/<.

paUttgite V. tr., to set; e palingitaa maana, he
set his face.

palo, palopalo v. tr.. to do, to act officially, to
worship; e polo honoiaka, our mediator.
palonga v. n., act. worship; a palonga, the
officiant; na ni leesie palonga aku, and
saw my works; mu palonga rorodo'a,
works of darkness.
palola-(ku) gerund, palolana mu 'akalo,.
worship of the ghosts.

palopalo'a n., time, season.

pilupslu 1. the handle of a paddle, pdlupelu
ni hole. 2. U., the buttress flange of a
tree.

pilnpelu 3. sae ni pelupelu, red hot.

pKni 1. U.. V. tr., to drive away, hd'ipdni.
pttnllaHni tr., to drag, to draw aside, to

cause to drift out of the course.
pKiiil6'i]iila-(ku) gerund.

pftni 2. U.. n., the side walls of a house; qd*uli
peni, purlin.

pMnitora v. tr.. to eject, to drive out.

panga v. i., to wonder; used with poss. 3. hunt
*omu kesi Panga ani, that ye may marvel
thereat,
pangara'iai U.. pangataHni S., tr.
pangara'inila-(ku), pangata*inila-(ku)
gerund.

pangvpangtt raha U., big, huge.

pangott to be dumb, nguu, Mao. hangu, ngu,

pao V. tr., to make plaited armlets of haa, etc

paonga S., battlefield. U., qaonga.

papa V. i., to break by a sharp blow; paPa hdu,
to break stones by daishing one against
the other; papa naho, a fish that leaps
into the air dashing apart the water.
papali tr., to break by dashing down,
papatalni tr., to break in pieces.
papata4nila-(ktt) gerund. Maori papa,
Motu Papa, to burst.

PAPAKU'A

78

p«9aka*ft U.. adj.. foolish, demented.

papeU (In) n., dwek; 'atma ^paH, Jaw. Lau
haiit tide (of position); Viti mhalu,
cheek; Maori paparinga, Wango baba,
Bougainville Stnits papaU.

papanganmfvni to murmur, to grumble,
mutter; papangurungtaru oalana, mut^
teringa concerning, nguru,

papau U.. to be firm, hard, malapau'a'a.

para, paiapara v. i.. to fence, to guard; noho
para, I am making a fence; para kmo'
taka, defend us; para dku'i, to protect
with a fence; dtre unu ana para, between
the pickets of the fence; maai para, S..
maana Para, U.. a gate.
paraH tr.. to defend, to protect.
para^-(ka) gerund, ko We para*ilana
walumalaUf defends the earth. Wango
bara; Mota pala, set across; Espirit6
Santo Pala, fence.

para n.. para ni 'o'o, a set of drums.

paraH ki<iki4 U.. paw. of dog.

para*iaiaa hat, sunshade of plaited coconut
leaf worn when fishing.

paraH iilma U., knuckle.

paralta 1. U.» the indosure outside the men's
house (tooki) planted with dili and make;
areca skins are thrown into it for safety
to insure their not being used in witch-
craft.

paraHta-(]ra) 2. n.. a para*Ueku, my defender.
nanamanga para'iiana mu li*oa, power
over the spirits.

paiakoko U., suli parakoko, rib of the body.

parangaai v. tr., to maintain one's innocence
when accused, to make pretence, to
bluff, to defy, ngdsi.

psrapara S.. n.. side, loins; used with poss. 3;
parapara aku, my loins. Mota para*
para, beside, sidewise.

paraai (in) U. 1. prep., against, around, in the
way of. ha*aparasi. ddu parasi, U.,
to hinder. 2. v. tr., to protect, to
fence, to inclose. Wango parasi.

parHe ^. Pare 'ie, this side.

parikota U.. to be separated, divided, disturbed
in mind. Florida bali, side.

paro adv.. beyond; Paro 'ie (contracts to Par*ie),
this side; paro i la'ona, on the inside,
paro uri, over there; niparo, iniparo,
U., that; e dUngi paro, as soon as it was
day; *o du*una paro, move it on a little;
moro Utria paro i'ola i *€si, you launch
the canoe into the sea; Po*o paro,
beyond; qd*u paro, beyond. Florida
pari, Sesake Pah, Mota kalo, San
Cristoval haro,

pasa U., 1. paa S., n., bait for fish. mAsi pasa,
M. A., p. 316.

pasa 2. bonito hook for trolling, usually made
of the clam Cime) with a tortoise-shell
barb (imaa). ohooko ni pasa, basket
containing pasa.

pMsi n., a bow. if. Mu, lohe. ilolo ni pesi, a
bowstring, to string a bow; tdku ana
pUsi, to grasp a bow. GUolo Pusi,
Amboyna husul, apusa, Mota us.

pailaSU to be stiff (of the body).

paiihi n.. a small fish.

pXaipaai U., plHpafli S., strong, firm.

paav 1. ka'apasu, v. i.. to threaten the life of.

plan 2. to sprout; pHsu maomaopu*e, in full
leaf. San Cristoval basu.

pan 1. to jam, to be stuck, papau.

pAtt 2. pdusi, S., pdungi, U.. to be master over.
rakap^.

pa*ii 3. a corpse inclosed in the image of a
swordfish (ili) carved in wood and kept
in the house. M. A., p. 261.

paola'a U., adj., firm. hard. PaPau.

paule n., a tree which grows on the hills, alao
known as dalo ni me*esu, dalo of the
forest, makes good masts for boats.

pa*uwa'ata n.. a two-handed crescentic club
from San Cristoval. "head-splitter."
Guppy. "Solomon Islands.*' p. 74.

pawa kdu pawa, soapstone.

peapaa (ku) n.. footmark, sole of foot. U.,
example. Ta*a Pea, a female ghost who
causes yams to fructify. Malay ^m« foot.

paa* paapaa 1. v. L. to drive away; pee poo, to
drive swine out of gardens.
paaii tr. Wango beesi, Maori pei.

pe'e 2. contraction of pe*ie with him, with it,
withal, and.

pel 1. U., n.. a mortar for brajring areca nut.

paH 2.. S., V. tr., to assist, to help; used in the
sense of and; the equivalent of mmana of
units above ten; pe*ie often contracts
to pe'e; not a preposition of relationship
as sUted in M. L., p. 151. e i*o pe'i
tuke, he sat and begged; rApu lahoma'i
Pe*i po*npo*u, to crucify; i'o pe*i roe,
the mourning before buriBLl; saeda ka'a
tararuru pe'ie, their hearts were not
whole with him.
paHni tr., to be associated with; pe'inia,
mo r eo v er , and; ta'e pe*inie, but, never-
theless. Wango bei, Fagani fagi, fagini,
Qaloto ha*ini, Lau fai, faini, Mota sag 2.

painvU U., to go secretly. Wango biniku,
secret.

pale V. i., by mischance, by mistake, in error,
of no avail; e pete *oto, it is of no avail,
it is all up; nou deu peie, I did wrong;
nou ere pde, I spoke inadvertently;
kdli peie, to capsize in rounding a cape;
nou sa'a noruhe'i peie, I shall not be
confounded,
palaaga v. n., <ttbf pdenga, error, mistake.
palenga*ini tr.. dAu pelengaHnie nga U'u, to
do a thing in error.

pelal adv., precedes verb: by mischance; ho
pele'i tarokia governor, if it come by
chance to the governor's ears.

pall, paUpali v. tr., to steal, to rob, to steal
from a person, to kidnap, to recruit
labor without pajring a commission
{koli$€) to the relatives of the person
recruited; e pelieu, he stole from me;
lude pdi, to steal labor recruits.
paUaga S., v. n., theft.
paliha U., ▼. n.. theft.
paiila-(lni) gerund. Mota pain.

79

PONOAPOHOA

peiiapeaa n.. a roller; v. i., to roU outtaro
puddings.
penaii v. tr., to roll out, to flatten out.

p«iiata (kv) n., sole of foot, palm of hand.
penaiana 'a€, penatana nime. Florida
pera ni lima, Mota tawerai, Ambrym
vera, Malekula feran, hand; Malagasy
tanana, hand. M. L. p. 75.

papa n., butterfly, moth; pepe alaha, a large
butterfly; pepe ni weieu, a butterfly
(Omithoptera cassandra); pepe i eueu,
a butterfly. Solomon Islands bebe,
Polynesian pepe.

papelalni U., v. tr., to cause to drift.

peta U., n., house post. Mota PeU.

pato U., qeto S., to be feeble, weak, cowardly.

pe*n n., tarantula, mdsi pe'u, U.; called ramo
champion from its watchfulness and
from the dlfiiculty of hitting or spearing
it.

pe'nla n., a bird, the curlew.

pewa'ali v. tr., to rend, wa'a, kite pewa'ali,
to cleave.

pie 1. hdu pie, a precipitous wall of rock, a

pi'e 2. a palm whose laths are used as cross-
pieces for platforms. 3. a digging-stick
made of pi'e.

pi'o (na» ni) 3. a sucker of a tree; pi*ei hudi,
banana sucker.

piho ka*apiho, U., v. tr., to divide into two
parts.

pii 1. to cook with hot stones, stone boiling.
M. A., p. 316. pi'i *OHit to make coco-
nut oil in a wooden bowl (nime).
piinga v. n., yam soup; ilu piinga, U., to

sup 3ram soup.
piingi tr.

pii 2. V. i., to strain the milk from scraped
coconut (hero) with the net {unu) of the
coconut leaf.

pU 3. uie pii, torrential rain.

pile 1. the young areca nut in its earliest edible
stage.

pile (na) 2. the roe of fish. Motu bela, spawn.

piU, piUpiH V. i., to press. ka*anipili, S. pili
memeso, to break into powder; pili roro'i,
to preea down tight; pili tele, to oppress,
to tread down,
piliha U., V. n., distress.
piliagitr.
pi]ila-(lni) gerund. Wango biringi,

pilomo to be dented, to have a gapped edge,
to be pitted.

piaa S., pina U.. the name of several large birds;
pine awa, the hombill, so called from
the rushing sound (attfa) of its wings
in flight; pine ni *esi, the booby; pine
ni OH, the Nicobar pigeon (Geophilus
nicobaricus). Florida bina.

piola adj.. thick.

pipiai 1 (aH, ni). the eaves of a house, pipisine
nume. 2. pipisi ana m&nu, tail feathers
of a bird.

pipitn n., a bird, the shiny starling (Callomis
metallica), building in colonies.

pint 1. V. i., to close upon; e piru keli eku, sur-

plru (continued).

rounds me. 2. n.. an ornamental ooUar
made of dogs' teeth strung on cords
with intervening sections of shell
money (Aoa). 3. v. tr., to make such
a collar; e pirue mu 'usu ineu, he made
my dogs' teeth into a collar.

pimpim U., a sacred grove, altar. San Cris-
toval bimbiru,

pinitt S.. qimn U., black, grey, of sand as on
San Cristoval, one piruu,

pito S., qito U.. v. i., to grow.

poe 1. poe rare, to plait a mat out of green
coconut leaves (rare).

poe 2. U., poe hui, to pull wild taro, hui ni
maiawa. Mota koe.

poe 3. to cram.

poe 4. poe aro, a nose-stick of bamboo or shell.

poe 5. U., poe i*a, a poisonous fish.

po*a 6. to sprout.

po'e 7. ha*apo*e, n., yam or taro mash.

poepoa to sigh, to heave a sigh, to gasp.

poi 1. S., adv.. up. hither; lae k&'u poi, come
up here; hane poi ile*u, climb up, come
up, here to me; *omu he ha*ahu*o poi,
be here early in the morning; po*o poi,
up here. Wango poi, hither.

poi 2. to be concerned about; used with poss. 3.

pola, polapola v. i.. to jump, to assault, to
attack; pola likiliki, to leap; Pola
tnu/aani, to desert a ship; pola nguru, a
month, September; pola iala, U., to
fail; *ono pola, to gulp, to swallow whole,
polahi tr., to leap on, pounce on, to assault.

ha*apolahi, hd'ipolanga.
polahila-(ku) gerund.

polaha'i ha*apciaha*i, v. tr., to cast away, to
disregard.

poUhiroa to meddle in.

pdahiwasa to gad about, to be a busybody.

polale n., a bird, swamp-hen (Porphyrio sp.).
destructive to gardens.

polaU laio poiali, red ant, sugar ant.

pola S., qola U., ma'ahu pole, v. i., to dream,
v. tr., to dream of; ma'ahu poUnga, n.,
a dream, dreaming.

pola, polapola 2. U.. poUpoUi sesu, smoke.

polo poloi haa, a strand of shell money. 'aPfAo.

polopolo U.. wart.

pona 1 . a fountain, spring of water. NluC pnna*

pona 2. ha*apona, to interrupt with questions.

pono, ponopono, popono v. i.. to dose, to mend,
to be dosed, stuffed up; simouke ineu
e popono, my pipe is stuffed up; sisi
pono, to be closed over (of a sore);
to'ont ^ofio maa, patched dothes;
e popono PaPau i purida, dosed up
tightly behind them.
poaori tr., to stop up, to dose, to dam;
dUn ponosi, to put the lid on; hele
ponosie wawana, keep his mouth shut.
ponoaila-(kn) gerund, ha'aponosi. Mota

Vfono, Florida ^ofio.
pottopono n., lid, stopper, cork of bottle
(late use).

pongaponga to be loose, to fit badly.

POHOI

80

poaflt pOBgipoafI, foagi U<. 1. v. tr.. to promise;
n., a promise.
poacliiC* S., pODflponflto S.. poocikA U.,

V. iL. a promise.
poagila-Cka) gerund.

ponfi (ktt), qonfi U. 2.. n.. a time, season;
fongjUm^ my appointed time; i Pomgine,
in its day. Mota ^ong.

poo 1. n.. a pig. boar, barrow: any kind of
Qiiadmped; poo ka'aholo, a sheeted pig;
poo mae, a dead pig, given as the people's
portion {ioUnat) at a feast; poo mAuri,
a live pig; poo noro, the planet Mars.
M. A., p. 349. poo Pala, a white pig;
poo Pulu, a black pig; poo okaoka, a mis-
chievous pig; poo e sud4, the pig rooted;
poo tori, an ear-marked pig; dduddu
poot uunu poo saana mu*akalo to sacrifice
pigs to the ghosts; haka ni poo, herd
of swine; hunu poo, to cut up a pig;
keU poo, a little pig, shoat; ko'u-
kohui poo, a piece of pork; kakdli munia
nga poo, met., for a human victim;
mdnu poo, a bird observed as an omen,
called pig-bird from its note; poo ke
ne'i Uilamoa ho *oUsi4 *oio a mwasna,
the pig is the victim in place of the man;
w&si ni poo, a wild pig; upeta, a hog-
wallow. Mota ^oe,

poo (ko) 2. n., navel.

poo 3. to prop; h&u ni poo, a prop, a log to
prop with.
poota, poopoota (na) v. n., a foundation.

mu poopootana nume.
poongi tr., to prop up. to support with
props; poongie i kao, prop it underneath.
poong^-(ko) gerund.

po'o 4. side (of position) Po'o hao, S., farther
west; po*oi lengi, U-. south; po*o mAi,
S., po*o me'i, U.. hither, on this side;
po'o paro, beyond; Po*o poi, S.. up here;
po'o puri, at the rear, after, during one's
absence; po'o i sinaha, outside; Po'o
wau, on the far side; i welita po*o wau,
three days hence.

po'o 5. n., a part, piece; po*o ni U'u, partly;
nga po'o ni U'u, a piece; nga'eia po'o ni
ninime, ni paPali, the other hand, the
other cheek. Wango bo.

po'o, po'opo'o 6. to care, to be concerned about;
used with poss. 3.

po'o 7. po'o hiteli, to cause to burst.

po'o 8. po'o lulu, to fill the mouth with food.

poola adj., possessing pigs, Mnue e poola,

poona a village, a section of a village gathered
around a chiefs house, Ulawa, Qaloto.

poongalni U., v. tr., to carry, to act as porter.
poonga'i V. i.
pooaga4nila-(kv) gerund.

poopoo n.. a shrine.

po'opo'olilll'i to be wayward, perverse; lag
po'opo'oli'ili'i, heU po'opo'oli'ili'i, to
act perversely, li'i 2.

poopoota (na, ni) n., foundation. poo3, qooqqoia,

po'ora'a'a concerned about, po'o 5. non
ka'a po'osu'a'a ike ana, I am not con-
cerned about it.

po*ots*o to coDcem oneself about; used with
poss. 3. ka'a po'oU'e ada, ko 'anomira
mola, cared not for them, just buried
them, of the undistinguished dead.
M. A., p. 263.

popOf poponga 1. to be tight, dose-fitting;
ioUnga e popongc a burden awkward
to carry.

popo (kn) 2. buttock; popo ni homu, the tail-
piece of shell on the back of the hawk-
bill turtle, much prised at Santa Cruz
and used to make nose-rings.

popo 3. popo ana, the white (of egg).

popo 4. V. tr., to carve; kira *asi 'unua *e popoa
koi i^a kdu, they said he was to carve
a fish in stone.

popoloHi, popopoloSi v. i.. to be afraid.
popoloHuge V. n., fear, fright.

popopoHi adj., square-shaped.

popoaaiis*a adj., riddled with borings of the
white ants (sane).

pore n., an armlet plaited of grass.

poro 1. male, husband, person; a porona, S.»
a ponmi, U.. the person So-and-so; in
the folklore the men's names generally
begin with poro, a Poro kdnua raka, a
ghost, Mr. Big-land; a Poro maiou ni
wala, a ghost; Poro wauru i 'esi, a.
legendary person, Mr. Fall-into-the-sea.
a porona ko malamala Sa'a, So-and-so
speaks Sa'a; poro ni kaka, white man,
lit., man of the ship; poro ka'alu, a
bridegroom; poro repo, poro pdime, used
of important persons; poro kduU, male
frigate-bird; to'o poro, to have a hus-
band, to be married; to'o poronga,
marriage.

poro 2. poroi rare, a small mat plaited from
green coconut leaves used as a dustpan
or for holding rubbish.

pom U., to be short, little in stature, 'o'oru'e.

poto to be matted, tangled (of hair), curiy.
qd'une e poso.

potiki to rebound, to ricochet.

pota, potapoti V. i., to break by knocking one
thing against another; pota niu, to
crack a coconut.
potali tr.

pots]ila-(iia, ni) gerund. Mota Kioto 3,
Florida pota, Mao. pota.

potaa U., rubbish heap, refuse, dung.

pota 1. V. i.. to be replete with food, to have
had sufficient to eat; ngdu ni pole, to
eat to satiety,
potanga v. n.. repletion; Potenga ni sape,
bodily repletion; potenga haaki, plenty
to eat.

pote 2. used of phases of the moon; kara pote,
S., saro pote, U., the day before full
moon.

pote 3. n., a louse; uruuru pote, urunru qe'u, to
dean the hair of lice. Wango bole,
Nengone ote.

pote S., (ku) qoto U., 4. buttock; ki'uki'u pote,
a bird, wagtail.

potapoto U.. a pimple.

potoi U., a firestick, milsi Poioi.

8i

pmtA

pou 1. a block of wood, a log. hdi pau* pou
ni *ei, U. Maori pou, Samoa P<m, post.

pov 2. V. i.» to become hard, firm in consist-
ency, to set, to congeal (of liquids), to
heal over (of sores), to be solid (of
waves); susu pou, to run high without
breaking (of waves).

ponhim'e adj., raging sea; sasa*ae « pouhiru'e,
a raging sea is stirred up.

ponlolo U., n., the cross-beams of a house.

poupott 1. a green coconut. Wango poupou,
fruit, poupau kua, hen's egg.

ponpou (ku) 2. U., poupou ni *ae'ae, poupou
ni uli, heel. Wango poupou.

po'npo'tt 3. crossed sticks, a cross; rdpu
Ickoma'i pe*i po'upo'u, to crucify.

po'mni'iini S., qo'umHins U., v. i., to kneel
down, to stoop, to bend down. 'uru*uru.
poSunhmmge v. n. Wango bouru.

pQe S., pua U., areca nut, hoi pue, hou Pua;
hungutani pua, a bunch oi nuts;
maholota ni pua, a piece of areca; mdhiri,
to be intoxicated from eating areca;
hou tneme, the quid of areca, betel and
lime; hoi meuta'a, a hard ripe areca nut;
moia, S., pei, U., a mortar for pounding
areca nut; oka, ddmu, to chew areca;
pile, a young nut Just edible. Borneo
bua, fruit; pus is probably connected
with hue 1. M. L., p. 71.

pvla 1. n., a young girl; a pulena, the girl;
Pukna, vocative, you girl; kele puie ineu,
my litUe giri.

puis 2. to be dropsical; *ae pule, dropsical
swelling of the leg. Mota Pura.

pvli 1. a cowrie shell; puH 'eki*e, orange cowrie;
oa ni puli, a pair of cowries; talai puli, a
string of cowries for the forehead.
Samoa. Niu€ pule, ViU mbuli.

paU 2. v. i., to crowd, to throng. ha*aPuU»
puli ihu'i, to throng round; ruru puli,
U.. to gather in a crowd.
polltaa U., v. n., a crowd, a throng, a mob*
a company.

polo 1. ▼. i., to turn back, to return. ha'apuUK
melu pulo i ola, we only reached such-
and-such a place; pulo sa'asala ana,
came short of it, failed to reach;
Ul*ipulopulo, to come short of.
ptdoal tr., to turn about, to turn over, to
twist. Wango buro, Florida pulo.

polo 2. n.. a bowstring, pulo ni pesi,

palokl (English bullock) susu ni puloki, cow's
milk.

polOBgo &, v. i., to forget, to be forgetful,
puloagoai tr.

pttUmgotaHai tr.. Qaloto. Wango buron-
iosi.

polopido to'o pulopulo, specked.

polu 1. to be black; pulu nunu*e, stained; hdu
Pulu, volcanic rock; kuka pulu, a mud
crab; poo Pulu, a black pig; rodohono
pnpulu, pitch dark,
pain 2. gall, used in witchcraft to cause sleep
to enemies; dere pulu haahi, to throw
gall over them.

polo 3. pitch, gum, native cement; a nut, sale
(Parinarium laurinum) is scraped on
rough coral rock and darkened in color
by a mixture of charcoal (lo'ilohi) and
the juice of o'a, the cement hardens
almost immediately; pulu maai seu,
circular pieces of shell used in inla)ring;
soo Pulu, to gather cement nuts.
puluH V. tr., to calk with native cement.
Mota pulu, Polynesian Pulu.

Pulnlaha a district on Little Malaita at the
west entrance to Mara Masiki Channel.

puliipiilo n., a firefly; it is regarded as the soul
of a dead person and is killed when it
comes into a house, maaku e lakara
pulupulu, my eyes saw stars. Wango
buruburu.

pulnpulu's adj., black; natives as distinguished
from white people, mwala pulupulu*e.

punlponi V. i.. to smear the face with juice of
areca nut when chewing, to smear the
body with lime, to decorate the body
with strong-smelling herbs. San Cris-
toval buni, Maori pani, to paint.

pongn 1. to be deaf; a Pungu, the deaf person.
Wango bungu.

pungo 2. a bunch; pungui aleale, a bunch of
dyed aleale tied on a comb for decora-
tion or hung on the bows of a canoe;
pungui nume, a cluster of houses; au
pungu, a large strong bamboo.
pivoaga V. i., to cluster in a bunch. </.
hungu. Florida punguti, to cluster
round.

pu'o 1. to be ignorant, to be heathen (late use),
to have none; *o manata'inie hoi niut
nou pu*o, have you a coconut? I have
not; tola mala pu*o, to behave like a

po'onga v. n.. ignorance, heathenism.
pa'otal V. i.. to forget; noko pu*ota'i ulo

*oio, 1 forget to cry.
po'ota^ai tr.. to be ignorant of. not to have;
moro ho pu*oia*inie erenga hd*iliu, you
do not know one another's speech.
ptt*o 2. V. i., to return, to come back. ha*apu*o,
pu'o, pv'opv'o 3. V. i., to revolve, to turn round;
hdu pu*oPu*o, a grindstone.
pn'oalt pn^opn'oal tr.
pupo 1. to rest assured; saeku e pupu *oto ana,
I rest assured of it; pupu to*o, to rely;
used with poss. 3, to rely on.
pttpn 2. ta*ipupu*e, tangled,
pnpn 3. U., hoi pupu, the Southern Cross con-
stellation,
pnpulu pulu 1; rodohono pupulu, pitch dark;
*ala pupulu haahi, to surround in a
dense body.
pupulvsH v. tr.. to darken the mind, to
vex; e pupulue'ie saena, his mind was
disturbed.
pupnagula U., adj., marked with a rash.
pnpnpo to be whole, intact, safe, Vo pupupu.
Wango buhu, Florida mabubu,
pi9op«*e adj., whole, entire; hele pupupu'e,
keep intact.
pnpvte S., pupnta U., a bundle, a sheaf.
pura U., pule S.. to be dropsical.

PURAPURA

82

pari (ka) back of. behind the back, the ttern.
hd'tpuri, € TO ini tsi PuH mH, at the
last came two penons; ape Puri, to be
last, in the rear; *alo pmri, to turn the
back on; m w aam w aa PuH, tiepa&g.
beche-de-mer; oku i PuH, back wall of
house; po'o pitri, in the rear* after; su'e
puri, to fall backward and break the
neck; susu Puri, last bom, youngest
child; ioU puri, to turn the back on. to
leave; purine, after that: used with
locative i, behind, at the back of. after,
at last; purina lua, U.. nape of neck;
t purine maholo, after the time wlien;
f purimu, in your absence; i purine
maeta, after the death feast; qa'i Purina,
behind, in the rear; ini (laa) i puri, the
youngest; isipuri, to be last. Motu
muri, Maori muri.

Piirihaha a village on the hill at Sa*a.

pwifflwane n.. the last bom. youngest son.

puri ni 4ola 1. the lee side of an island, lit., the
stem of a canoe.

Pari ni <I6la 2. a district on the west side of
Little Malalta.

p«m to be dose, thick, frequent, hd'ipurunga,
*aPurunge. maenga kosi Puru, deaths
are frequent; puru hero, a dish of
pounded taro with grated coconut
(hero) on top. a Qaloto dish esteemed
poor cookery. Florida bum, the Plei-
ades; burungi, to crowd.

puntpum'a'a adj.. frequent; lae purupuru*a*a,
to go frequently.

putn 1. V. i., to spurt out, to squirt; pusu 'esi,
a whale.
pusneHnif putulslai, pvsull tr., to splash
a perM>n. to spurtle on. Florida puhu,
Mota pupus,

pusu 2. n., a latrine, mdpusu.

pata mapuiaPuta, U.. bruised.

pota S.. pata U.. a bundle, a sheaf; puie ni *oha,
a packet of betel leaf.

ptttt 1. V. i., to tread, to stamp, to rest, to stand
firm, to rely on.
pnuli tr.. to pounce on, of birds, to strike
with the talons; Puulie maonga, to tread
the dance; puulie mwakana, to tread
the earth. Wango buuri.

pnn 2. n., mason bee. wasp.

pn'u 3. mangrove borer.

punhara to stand firm, to get a footing. halO'
kola.

pvttUai 'uri putUisi, to tread under foot.

pmipmilisi poo a prickly shrub.

pnnto'o, punpoato*o to rely; used with poss. 3,
to rely on. mangona e puulo*o dliho'i,
his breath returned.

The sound represented by Q is that of pw;
there is an interchange of q and p in certain
words, which, however, is not critical of
dialectic difference between Sa'a and Ulawa,
qeio, S., pelo, U.. Pongi, S„ qangi, U., qale, U.,
pale, Ulawa-Ngorangora.

4a% ^a'aqaHi 1. ▼. L. to bt«ak« to

be cracked; 'ioia e fs'a 'oto, the
is wredoed; qa'a

to

oe
to

qa*ad tr., S.. ddu may be psefixed. dMu
qa'asi, to break; tere q^asi, to peck and

qa'adlaaa gemnd., the breaking of it.
qa'aU tr., U., ten may be

ka'aqa'aU.
Qa*ata*ini tr., to break to one's detriment;

e *6lu 'iola e qa'aia'inieu, three times I

suffered shipwreck,
qa'ata v. n.. with genitive «; mu qa'aiai olo*

shreds,
qa'a 2. to rise (of the heavenly bodies); waaro"

waaro e qa*a 'olo, the moon hais risen;

mdi ana waarowaaro e qa'a, ebb tide

at moonrlse; madala e qa'a, the day star

is risen; qa'aqa*a uweha, U.. a phase of

the moon-
qa'ali tr., saio e qa'alie kdnue, the sun has

risen on the earth.
qa'ala-(na) gerund; qa'aiana saio, east.
qa'aUta U.. n., a slab; qa'ahiia ni 'ei, a slab of

wood.
qa'aholQ'e adj., raffled (of the surface of the

sea), having goose flesh. Mota tiiiil,

hair; Maori hum.
qa'akora (na) the outer skin of the canariom nut.
qa'aUnga n., echo, 'alinge.
qa'aqa (kit) n., grandmotlier or grandchild;

the personal article a may be employed,

a qa'aqa: ro hd'i qa'aqana, grandmother

and grandchild, the two between wliom

subsbts the relation qa'aqa,
qaSiqa'a with genitive U; qa'aqa'aU naka, a

wave, a breaker,
qaaqi'a U., adj., stale or brackish (of water);

tono qaaqi'a, to taste brackish,
qaaqi'a'a U.. adj.. mawkish.
qa*aqlto v. i., to sprout, to spring up (of plants).

piio.
qa'arakan U.. v. i.. to break with a load noise.

as a bamboo bursting or a gun firing.
qa*arata n.. a blister, hou qa'areie, U.
qa'arongOy qa*aqa*arongo v. i.. to hearken, to

listen, to pay attention,
qa'arongoaga v. n.. listening.
qa'arongoisvU 1. v. tr., to listen to. to pay

attention to. 2. n.. a listener, a dia-

dple; ini qa*arongoisuU e ha'a Uuia'ama

ini ha*ausuli, the disdple is not above

his master.
qa'asnalana n., the brink, diff.
qa'atara n., a snaU; qa'atem a Ti, a very lai|e

snail.
qaaqaa (kn) n.. armpit. San Cristoval qqeqaa.
qlH 1. V. tr.. to lever, to priae. 2. to stir round.
qi4 3. U.. negative paitide used of indefinite

time, a short form of qa'ike, saPeku

e qd'i ntware'a, I am not in good health;

mm qe'i sore, I am unwilling. Wango

qai, Florida bei.
qa4 4. U.. to be dub-footed.
qa4 5. sane qa*i, a termite of a brownish color

used as buriy for the sea-bream.

83

QlRI

^H fto U.. a large hermit crab, ao 2.

4l4 okn second day after full moon.

qalke U.« negative adverb, used also as nega-
tlve particle; probably composed of
qi'i 3 and kg 1. wa qa*ike^ or else,
otherwise; Uhuna qaHke^ not that; mm
qa'ike Ufosia, I did not see it; e qa'ike
munia nga matnga, not unto death.

^aHlani S., the seventeenth day of the moon.
</. qA*i oku, the sixteenth.

^ftllnlu V. 1., to be dismayed. qd*i 2. saeda
e qH*ihdu eni me*ung4, their hearts were
dismayed through fear.

^Xinaa garden ground near the beach, used for
planting hana. pdinaa,

qtdio (na) n., a twist made out of a leaf, gener-
ally a leaf of wild ginger (aro), used as
a stopper for bamboo water-carriers, a
cork.

<qaka U., negative partide, used of present or
past time. qa*ike.

^ala V. i, to be empty, to be void of people.
ka^aqala, Mnu€ e qala, there is no one
in the village; nume qala, a cicada which
presages death, lit., empty house.
qalaai tr., to be left without friends, to be
alone; e qalasire» there is no one with
them. Nguna maso qalo, wilderness;
Wango qara, empty.

qalaqala mere, empty; for naught, U. lae mola
qalaqala, to go for nothing, ineffectually;
moola qaiaqalat things empty, valueless.

•qale (Ulawa, Su'uholo dialect) negative par-
ticle pale, qake. e qaU da n»*e odea,
I saw noUiing; mwai keni e*asi qale
wala*awala*a mware'at what drawling
wvMnen.

•qUi, qUiqali 1. to deceive, to be mistaken; nou
qdiqelieu, I was mistaken.

•qaU 2. U., qali ka'o, a drop left in the bottom.
Pali,

^m 3. qali iotUou, canoe-shaped drawings used
in ornamenting la'o, etc. toukm.

qaloqalo (kn) the right hand; with locative i,
i qaloqalo, on the right hand (late use);
position is shewn by hao, ta*au, paro,
Ungi, 'ono, etc. ana rao 'iola i qaloqalo,
on the right side of the ship.

•Qaloto the hill district above Sa'a. M. A.,
p. 50.

•qala dede qalu, an arrow.

-qiltt v. i., to be with child; qiUu huni, to conceive
by a person.

•qiliistt (ku) nose, beak of a bird; qdlusu *upu'e,
S.. a wood-pigeon with large wattles on
the beak (Carpophaga rufigula) ; An susu
qdusu, a bamboo nose-stick. Fagani
burusu, Wango qarisu, Mota ?ngiuui,
lip. M. L. p. 8s*

•qana 1. n., a pandanus with large leaves which
are split down to make mats. 2. n., a
sail; lili qana, to jibe; hdu liU qana, a
boom. Wango qana,

<qXni adv., long ago; precedes the verb; 'oto
qHni, formerly; nulu qeni lae *oto mHi,
we came here a long time ago. Fagani
qonit already; Florida dania.

qXnio, qHoiqanio U.. v. i., to play, to have a

qKnionga v. n., a game, play.

qinn n., a snare, gin; v. tr., to snare.

qango 1. n., mucus, 'urn qanff>, S., 'usu qongo,
U., to wipe the nose.

qango (na, ni) 2. tops of taro used for planting,
qangoi hui.

qango 3. U., qangoi sa*o, a measure, from finger
tips to wrist.

qango 4. manow, qango laloi suli.

qangoqango n., a nose-stick, an ornament of
clam shell stuck in the nostril, bored at
the outer end and decorated with por-
poise teeth. (One is shown in The
Cruise of the Curacoa, p. 246.) mumua
qangoqango, U., to apply the teeth
decoration.

qao, qaoqao S., 1. v. tr., to do, to do to a person;
to lay hands on a person, to appoint, to
ordain (late use); to worship, to prao*
tice religion, mu da hire ko qao *enU
eni, the things they do to us;- muini
litUa*ana a mwane *ie e qao'i ne, more
than those which this man has done;
qao danga, n., worship, prayers.

qao, qaohi 2. tr., to cover, to overlay.

qaoha n., ridgepole; snli *ei i qaoha, a ridge-
pole; snsu qaoha, to sew sago leaves for
a ridge covering.

qaohaH v. i., to be capsized, to capsise; mdn
qaoha*i 'olo, we are capsixed.
qaohaHni tr., to overturn, to overlay, to
lay on top; qadtaHnie kii*u haakie, lay
it over it.

qaohi n., a bird, the white-breasted fish-hawk.

qaoIaH S.. qaola'i walanga, v. n., deceit, lying.

qaona v. tr., to lay hands on officially, to
appoint, to ordain (late use).
qaonanga v. n., qaonanga ani nime, the
laying on of hands, qao.

qaonga U., battlefield, cf. paonga.

qao ola v. i., to do officiary, to do sacrifice, to
worship, to pray; a qaoqao ola, the
officer, the officiant; qao olanga, v. n.,
worship, prayer.

qaqa 1. v. i., to lay eggs. 2. female (of animals),
used to show sex as opposed to mwane,
male; *usu qaqa, a bitch, slut; poo qaqa,
a sow.

qaqaha U., v. i., to walk about; keni qaqahe, &•
a harlot. Wango qaqahe nwa, sole of
the foot.

qaqahinn U., to have glandular swellings under
the arms.

qaqaitengOi U., v. i., to be abandoned, left
desolate of inhabitants.

Qaqalaha the middle boat^harbor of the three
between Roasi Bay and Port Adam,
Little Malaita.

qaqaso (na) knot on a tree, knot in bamboo.

qara v. L, to be old, to be past child-bearing
(of women).

qarero S., to play, to have games,
qarsronga v. n., play, sport.

qXri 1. n., a small frog.

qMri 2. snli qeri i ngaena, backbone.

QAKO

84

to ham>, to
AmnU, to pot

ftfo 1. y. tr., to catdi in a
hitch; met., to kilL
a httcfa on; fvo #0
malawm, to catch riiarkt in a noose like
the Santa Cms people, 11. A., p. 294.
nga msdcU flMfif 'asa'i faroa 94lant*m,
wlwn the day ttar rises we dial! hitdi it
up for them, i. €., to kilL 2. n., a noose,
a hitch. SMS* faro, aiars— t fsro.
sooth-by-east wind. Maori Jboro. 3.
foro Jbaa, an annlet made ol Asa, kure'
and maJb strong in a pattern,
swat sMtewa fsrofsro. the Ulawa
name for Santa Cms men.

S., n., dust, ashes, ora U.

failla S., to run (of mucus in the nose, of water
in the eyes).

fMO annlet plaited of dyed cane or grass; qa9o
ni Kda, an armlet of dyed grass from
the western Solomons received through
Goadalcanar (Kela) ; kA*n «aso, to weave
an armlet; use fsjo, to plait an armlet;
Hi qaso, to make an armlet of shell

4l««, ^lk*wq<mu V. tr.. to tie up, to bind, a

qjtuqesu 'imrni, a policeman,
fata n., a large frog.

«i*n (kiO 1- the head, top, chief; Jboa «A*«. U.,
skull; qd*m 'apmU, U., a woonded person,
lit.. hkMdy bead; §A'mm4 kSm. the rwte
on shore as seen from sea; fi'ait Aoias,
the head of the community, the person
wfaoae duty it ia to approach the ances-
tral ghosts; fA*ui i*e, four porpoise
teeth; fi'aU *imomi, the name of a oer*
tain spear; fd'mm € laanar, with long
hahr; q^'uUmma, door Untel; t Qd*tms
Namo, the north cape of Ulawa; gd*u
ngmdu, blackfish; ffl'afta s paUpala, my
hair is gray; qd*u tU smmdo, four ftymg-
foK teeth; fd'a terotta, the second finger;
fi'a wi loUm§t, the chief portion at a
feast; qd'tmi ara, a phase of the moon;
fA'al 'msu, four dogs' teeth, a unit in
counting; qd*u ni waU pt*i, to consult
with; ikui q$*u, hair of the head;
Kikiri qe'u, a ^lost; wtcdaa ni qe*u,
meningitis; *cto i fe'ntu, right on the
head; rd'iqe*u, the top of a house post;
raafr'a, a stump; « UiU'inu fA'mw, he
moves his head from side to side; to'o
fi'a. to carry on the head; aaw «tf 'a, to
lift the head; kan ntwardei qd'u, the
skull; i ff'aaa 'apa'ap^mst on his
shoulder.

«1*« 2. used as adverb of direction; qd'u mei,
hither; qd*u wsa, U.. fd'u #aro. qd*u
nipan^, U., over there, beyond; qd'u
hdo, &, ffd'a toU, S., going north or west;
fi'a ta'w, S., 9^'i (^'u t) <Mig», U..
foiiig south or cast; qd*i *amo, U.* west;
td'i pnHna, U., behind him; 9d*i ptai,
17., in the tear; lo'oka*i qt'u anaf to be
entangled in. Mote fslal, Niu€ ^ala.
diief.

fl*a 3. V. i.. to snoke (of IM; daafs ko fs**,
the fire s in o hfa, ffatf ^aagc, smoke;
ffi'ali dbMfi mmm, ita SMoke.
«i«^a-<«i» ai). gmuML, fTalaaa^^ts smoke.

flHi 4. garden groond on the hills immediately
above the beach, the yams grown there
are tou^ and arc mainly scraped to

QiSA Onsnl a village of Uttle Malaita at the

head of the Walo Va River.
QViMmwm the west entiaiwe into Mara

qlSritpaal U., the top of the side-wall of a

of two s e cti o n s of
the village (pooum) at Mwado'a.

Qfiia Banro. name of the east end of San
CristovaL Akssi the west.

Qi'atoflina (in M. A., p. 4S. wrongly spdled
Pau-nlo) the anceator eleven geneiationa
back of Slnph a nw^ 'on'ou of Sa'a, who
died hi 1900 and wfaoae son Halutala ia
nofw chief at Sa'a. The geneak>gy ia
aa fbOowt: Oft*ah>piine begat Taheri-
"nm-'ou'oa. who begat "On'ou i Kela.
who begat S i nrh a nnr pftine, who begat
Docahanoe pAine. who bagat Wate>
hcrohero. Watehcnhero had only
danghteis and bought (adopted) Dora
ma es ing e d i. who begat Wate'on'oiu
who be^t Sinrhanne-*oo*ou, who begat
Dora hoeniaeu, who was the lather of
SiiMhanQe-*on*oii. Wate'ou'on also
begat Halumwane. who begst Wate*
'oQ*oa, who begat Halukeni (female),
who is now Uviag. Wate*ou*ou also
adopted Irokalani, who in recent timea
was the head of the heathen party.
Wateherohero had a daughter Halutoco.
whose son was Walakulu, who begat
Sofeto. who begat Halutoro (female),
who married Taheri'nsu; their adopted
daughter was U^ieho'i. whose daughter
Hahitoro is living. Dora maesingedi
also begit Lapaite'e. who begat Doim-
apcwe, who begat a daughter Wata*
'ou'on kenl. now married to P. Marita-
hJo of Ulawa. For Dot awe w e see
M. A., p. 50; the young chid
to in the note is Sinrtianne-'ou'ou.

4l*ul«agaiai S.. v. tr.. Uo fA'alanff'M. to
indisrinctly.
«i'ahmga1 partic., indistinct, of irregular
otttUne.

flHaga n.. a generation. Lau gamnifs.

qi'aqa'ala lieroe black smoke. fA'a 3.
la'oreca a knot in a line or rape, kon qa'wwo,

U. Motu fafaa. a knot.
qlHi ana agia fd'u raa, to gorge, to eat till

the head drops.

«fia ^'a raaafs n., gluttony.
4i*oto'n V. L, to hicline the head, to bow, to

duck the head. Wango foaloa.
fiHndaaga 1. v. L. to pillow; uaed with poss. 3;

^'aalaagt mt€, to make a pillow of*

8s

KAATAl

ql'mdonge (continued).

2. n.. a pillow, usually a piece of wood.

3. n.» a headland In a 3ram garden.
qiHdnnge'inl v. tr., to support as a pillow.
qo4 Au qe*i, a bamboo with dose Joints,
qela 1. a thousand, of coconuts, ^rda ni ni»,
qela 2. v. i., to place alongside, to lay parallel.

U.. V. tr.. to place upon,
qalaalnitr.
qeli 1. to be raveled.

qeU qellqeli 2. v. tr., to deceive, cheat; kh ko
taU'i qeliqdiki'e mola, we merely deceive
ourselves. qlUi 1.
qelo, qeloqalo v. tr., to betray.

qelola-(lni) gerund. Florida pm>.
qeltt, qeloqelo 1. to roll, to cause to turn over.
taiaqeluqdu. 2. to accuse, to put the
blame on, to charge with immorality;
fHu wala ilengine ngaim, to accuse
anyone; qdu oU, to accuse; qtiu oianga,
accusation,
qelnai tr.

qelnaila-(lm) gerund. Mota wtf. Malay,
Dyak, Tagalog giltttg. Viti wiri.
qera to be in flood, to be in abundance, gener-
ally of flood waters; kom e qera, much
flood waters; hu qera, spring tide,
qsraqcraha v. n.. used with poss. 3; qera-
qeraha ana mu 'fnoaj. enaeeding many
people,
qent U., n., lip; qeru '«^. to hate. lit., swollen
lip. stuck out lip; lio qeru 'upu, Ua qeru
ufcudu, to grudge, to hate,
qentqsru U.« n.. lip.
qeaa'a S.. adj., wet, damp.
qsto to be feeble, weak, cowardly.

qsilola-(na, ai) U.. gerund.; qeioUma dduii, a

wind decreased in force, gone down,
qsftoha S., v. n., used with poss. 3; qdt>-
kaama ddngi, a wind decreased in fotoe.
qstonga v. n.. weakness, cowardice,
qetosi tr., to be unable to do throogh weak-
ness. Florida Mo, still, calm.
qe*n 1. to be foolish, ka^aqel'u.

qe'nnge v. n.. foolishness; wdi td ^nagr.
strong drink (late use). Wango qeu,
Mota qure,
qe'n 2. to be deaf and dumb; a qe*u, the deaf

mute; qei'u ereere, dumb,
qe'n 3. nunutuH qe'u, to enter, to be entangled

in. qd*u 1.
qe'vq«*n*a'a adj., foolish, silly.

qe'aqa'n'a'anga v. n., foolishness; wAi ni
qe'uqe*u'a*anga, strong drink,
ql'e S., ql<a U., to be hi good health, to be fat,
chubby; qi'e dUko'i, to recover soundness
of health. Nguna qia, well, good;
Mota wta. good; New Gufaiea, hie,
qi*eqi'sla adj.. fat. whole, healthy,
^qil S.. n., mud, slush.

qiiqU'e adj., muddy, slushy.
qUo'a adj.. springy, pliable.
qiai'a U.. adj.. wet. damp, ha'aqini, maraau
wei qini, cast-by-north wind (brings
rsin). Lau gmini,
qira n.. a stalk of bamboo, iiga q^e, qirei eu,
qinni U., pinni, S., one qiruu, black sand.

q|ri V. i., to spurt, to splash.

qisihi U., qltlU S.. tr., to splash a perMNi.
Samoa pisi, Motu pisiii.

qito S., pito U., to sprout, to shoot, to begin to
grow; hohola e qiio, the yams have
sprouted. 2. n.. a growing coconut,
hoi qito, 3. n., a sprout; qiUma, its
sprout. Wango qUo,

qole U., pole S., to dream, ma'ahu qoUe, nau
ma*aku qoUa, I dreamed it; ma^ahu
qolenga, v. n., a dream. Mota qore,
Florida mahiru bole, to dream.

qongi, qonglqongi U., pongi S. 1. v. tr., to
promise, rodi qongi, to plight troth.

qongi (kn) S. 2. n., a season, time, i qongina
a ola, in So-and-so's day; ana qongme,
in its season; hduUqongi, one day of a
series; *o hoio onu'e qongiku hao, thou
hast cut short my time; qongi ko jirijbo
'oio, the time is at hand; e kuU UAakia
qongine, bom out of due time, pongi 2.

qooqoota S., foimdation. poopooia. qooqooia
ani nume, foundations of the house.

qote (kn) U., pot* S.. n., buttock.

qo*nni*ttni U.. po'nm'nm S.. to kneel,
qo'am'nnmga v. n.. kneeling.

ri 1. suffixed pron.. plural 3, used of persons

only; attadied as object to verba and

pr^KMitions; in Sa'a when rd is used of

a body of people or a company, and i or

u precedes, the d of r A does not change

into e, hahird diana, on the good.

Mota ra 2.
ri 2. forms part of rllru'e, rdruH, r&'eht, etc
raa* raaraa 1. v. i., to shine brightly, ha'araa,

nemo raaraa, S.. sun and rain, a sun

shower.
raahi tr.. to scordi (of the sun),
raangi tr., to shine on, to give Ugkt to. to

enlighten. 2. n.. the sun's liglit,

radiance, bright light; dunge ni raa, a

burning-glass; suuhai raa, drous^t.

Wango raraha, Florida raraha, Maori ra,

the sun.
raa 3. the name of a month, January.
Kaa 4. a rock near Arona, southeast cape of

Ulawa. </. Mu mado,
raapea a needle made of the midrib of the sago

leaf {mudi sa*o),
raaraa n., sunlight, radiance, brilliancy; raaraa

ani menrihe, the light of life.
ra'aranga-(kn) n., 1. the light of the sun. light

ra'arangaku, my light, met., glory;

ra'arangana sato, light of the sun.

2. md'uie'i ra'arangana, to be in awe of

it. ranga, cf, rara.
ra'aranga 3. because of, on account of; used

with poss. 3.
ra*aranga*a adj., lightened by the taya of the

sun; used of danllng light,
ra'arara U.. adj., nimo ra*arara, sun and rain.

rara,
natal partic regulariy, frequently; *emi ka'a

are'o raataH, we do not call upon thee

regularly.

KADB

86

rmd« n., a reed, maai r«dr. Florida ode.

radv 1. ▼. i., to break up; radu mo'umo'usie mu
Tdi, break the ropes in pieces.

lada 2. U.. V. tr.. kmru raduau^ to run stretching
out the body.

rae 1. n.. a corpse; used In Sa'a with poss. 3;
roe ana a ola, the corpse of So-and-so;
In Ulawa with suflKzed pronoun na,
raeua, his corpse. In M. A., p. 260. the
spelling is wrongly given as ra'e, kulu
rae, to bury at sea; lango rae, a blue-
bottle fly; «'o pe'i rae, S., the mourning
before burial. M. A., pp. 261, 262.

ra'e 2. n., a palm used for making spears; ra'e
ni toio, a spear with grass plaiting, made
on Big Malaita near WaisisL

ft 'sin suff. pron.. plural 3; attadied to verbs
and prepositions as object.

ra*«ra'e carefully, thoroughly.

faha adj., big; not in common use. laha.
Oa Raha, Santa Anna Island at south
end of San Cristoval; pangu^ngu raka,
\J„ big. huge; a Faro Hdnua Raka, U..
name of a ghost, Mr. Big-land. Florida
kaba, Borneo raya,

raharaha *apu raharaha, an issue of blood.

raha v. L, to be weary from work, to work hard,
to work to no effect,
rahsnga v. n., hard work, weariness of body.
San Cristoval rafe»

rahlto'n v. i., to be downcast (of eyes). to*u.

raho n., layers of thatch made of sago leaf
sewn on bamboo laths with waUwaU;
siki raho, a beetle, held upside down
against a strip of sa'o leaf.

rahofaho (kn) U., and Qaloto, n., sides, ribs
(of persons). Wango ragaraga,

rii 1. oontTBCtion of rdu t.

rXi 2. to clear undergrowth with intent to make
a garden,
rlingltr.

riitalnl tr., to dear the undergrowth away
from a thing.

ri'l 3. V. tr., to adopt a child, to keep a tame
animal, to keep a turtle in a bowl, to
nourish; honu kira rd'ia, the turtle they
kept; a Warahunuka r&*i i*a, a legendary

rK'Ings V. n.. an orphan, an adopted child.
ri11a-(ka) gerund.
rX4 4. rA't seu, a platfonn on the beach used in

connection with bonito (jAm).
rl4 5. verbal suffix used intransitively.

taherd'i, taratire'u
rilqa'o n., the top of a pillar or house post
cut into a hollow to hold the ridgepole.
rilmaa to cut and dis&gure the face in

mourning.
r&4ni verbal suffix used transitively, iarau'

re'ini.

rftHrehi to be under the lee, sheltered; i*o
r&'irehi, to stay sheltered. Florida
raki, hidden.

ralrahi's adj.. sheltered.

rfUlnge n. weapons, tackle, mu re'isinge.

raka U., v. i.. excessive, dunga e raka, too
big a fire; mwai hen* ana dunga rahanga.

raka (continued).

women who make too big fires; « piUna
raka, excessively big; nwe raka, to break
with a loud noise. Wango rakaki,
excessive.

rakaU v. tr., to cause to melt (of fire), to heat
and soften.

rakapin v. i.. to defend, to protect; used with
poss. 3 and with preposition kaaki,
pAu 2.

rakaraka U.. n., a rib of the body.

itki V. L, to catch with tongs.
rKkltitr.
Iraki n., tongs.

rako 1. V. i., to give a sensation to; used with
poss. 3. e rako diana, it causes a
pleasant sensation, it is pleasant; rako
'aeia, rako ta*a, to be unpleasant. Irk-
some; e rako 'ada akn, it goes «^tir^""^
my grain; rako 'aeiamga, n., trouble,
feeling of unpleasantness.

rako 2. v. L, to be quiet, gentle, dodle. easily
entreated, ka'arako. m an at ana e rako,
he is gentle in disposition; ddu rako, to
keep quiet; ioli rako, to be patient,
enduring.
rakonga v. il, gentleness; sae rakonga,
gentleness, docility of temper; iaU
rakonga, patience.

rako 3. adv.. gently, lae moiai rako, go gently.

rakomaH S.. partic, longitudinally.

nkona*inl S., lakomaHni U.. to place longi-
tudinally upon, to aiSSx; lupu rakt^
maHnit to nail upon, to crucify.
rakomaH U.. v. tr.. anoia'a rakoma'ia ia'ane
iolaka, to make advances in word.

raktt n., a canoe holding four men, *iola rakn»

rakoha (na) n., fat. caul fat; r akuk an a Poo, lard.

rama, ramarama n.. flotsam, floating matter
collected in a tide>rip.

Ksmsrama the village in the south end of Port
Adam, Malaita.

rams n.. the edible catkins of the male su*e tree.

ramo 1. v. i.. to be strong, to be renowned in
fighting, to be a champion; rafao snnsnu,
to be strong forever. 2. n., a champion,
a fighting man; ho lae ni ramo, goes In
his might,
ramonga v. n., strength of body, prowess;
ddu ramonga ana ngaini, to treat any
one with violence,
ramoha S.. v. n., strength; used with poss. 3

ana. ramohaana ddugi, a gale.
ramola-(na) gerund., used in Ulawa as

ramoha,
ramo'i tr., to force, to apply violence to.
ramoramo'a adj., mightily; ddu ramo^
ramo*a, to force, to compel, to do
violence; used with poss. 3.
ramoramo'anga n., dsu ramoramo'anga,
mighty work.

ranga v. i., to rise (of the moon), ra^aranga 1.
ranga'a adj., risen; waarowaaro e ranga* a,
the moon is up.

rangariro'a S., adj., sparkling. </. nangaUro'a.

rangaai ha'arangasi, v. tr., to blow out, to
distend.

87

RAKATA

nuBfo 1. V. i., to be withered, dry. ripe (of
yams when the vine withers). 2. n.,
mwai rango ni 'rt, dead trees; the mark
of a garden, the larger trees were not
felled but were killed by fire.

nrasco n.. S., a dead bough, a sfUke, a
horn (late use).

rangorango U., as taramgo, Wango tango-

rao 1. (na, ni) n., side (of things) ; ana too *iola
i qaioqalo, on the right side of the ship;
i raona wdi, U., by the side of the stream.

rao, rarao 2. v. 1., to be stuck, to ding to; used

with poss 3. ka*ararao, nimekH e rarao

*o4o ana, my hand dung fast to it. i*o

rarao, to be fast, stuck tight, firm.

raohi tr., to ding to, to adhere.

raohaHai tr., to place in conjunction with,

to attach.
raoha*ipartic,in conjunction with, joined to.

lao 3. exdam., *oA« rao, used of matters of
uncertainty when unwilling to commit
oneself to a positive statement; rao hire
sa*a silt *olo, they certainly shall not
enter. The demonstrative na is added
in questioning, raona, is it not so?
Mi raona, S., hai raoni, U., expresses
disapprobation; well I never.

raoiiiaa» raraomaa S., to act craftily.
raomaenga v. n.. craftiness, wiles.

naorlH n., a virgin, male or female; keni raori'i,
a virgin; mahoio ni raori'i, time of
virginity.

lapa khMu rape, a wagtail, hi'uhi'u kape.

rapeiy n^erapsH U., to stake, to prop, to
strengthen.
rapeHta (kn) n., a prop, a bdng strength-
ened; rap0*iiana, to strengthen it.
^. sap€*u

taipoa^ n., cross sticks, generally of waowao
on a platform {UAe),

rlpv, ri'orepa S., rttpvrftpii U., v. i., to strike,
to hit, to tattoo, rdpu kdule, to tattoo
the frigate-bird on the cheek; rdpu
lakoma*i pe'i po'upo'u, to crucify; e rdpn
ngurusie nihona, knocked his teeth out.
liynaitr.
riptttelni tr., to collide with; e rdpuie'inie

ioiohoia, he laid the measure along.
fttpvteH partic qa'une e rUpuie'i i *ano,
his head bumped on the ground;
e rdpuU'i saio mciemoU, a red sky.
rtpiiaila-(kn) gerund. Florida labu, Bou-
gainville Straits lapu,

Rapoanata a legendary hero of the Three
Sisters Islands; his thigh bone is cur-
rently reported to be in some place on
Malau Pftina.

raqa U., v. i., to be deceitful, hururaqa,
siho raqa ana, to exaggerate.
raqatanga v. n. (double noun ending),
deceit.

rafaai S., temporarily; i'o raqasi, to sojourn;
ma'ohi raqasi, to await.

raqanqa'a U., temporarily.

rtraf ra'arara 1. v. i., to be hot, pungent (of
condiments); with preposition kaahi, to

rara 1 (continued).

be gealous, to guard, to exercise super-
vision over, to be jealous; used with
poas. 3, to be greedy, to look after one's
own ends. hd*irara, e rara mea, it
burnt the tongue, met., it was unpleas-
ant, it was hot (of words of rebuke);
sato e rara mea, the sun shone with
scorching heat; meaku e rara, my tongue
is parched; me*i sae e rara, earnestness;
rara haahie lolaia inge'ie, guards his
house; « rara ana, he looks after his
own; i sapena i Ulawa e rara, apos-
trophe addressed to Ulawa. cf.ha'addki.
Wango rara, Viti rara, powerfuL

rara 2. v. i., to be shrivded up, withered, ripe,
parched (of trees and gardens); rara
moumou, ripe and falling to pieces;
miU rara, dead low water at spring tides.

rum 3. of days of the moon; rara talau, S.,
twenty-first and twenty-second dajrs.

rara 4. the coral tree (Enrthrina indica) ; winter,
the time of flowering of this tree; i
Mdutei Rara, name of a village on
Ugi (lit., in the shade of the coral tree).

raia 5. takarara, come undone.

laiada U. 1. v. i., to come to land, to ground;
hoi i*a e lae m&i i rarada i saini one, the
fish came and grounded on the beach.

laiada 2. sae rarada, indignation.

laiada 3. ka'ararada, v. tr.. to broil, to fry
(late use).

raradi'a S., ere raradi*e, correction.

xaiadtt V. i., to stretch the arms.

larahi 1. v. tr., to importune, to urge, with
dikn, S., tdu, U., e Ulu rarMra.

rarahi 2. d» rarahi, the third finger.

laimH 1. U.. v., to be rippled, of the surface of
th<^ sea.

raraH 2. U., to be beautiful.

raramaa v. L, to reprove openly, to be insolent,
wilful, barefaced; ere raramaa, insolent
speecn.
raramaanga v. n., open rebuke, insolence;
raramaanga ana Vonga UUa'ala, rebuke
for lasdviousness; i'o raramaanga, las-
dviousness. Wango raramaa*

raramaa v. i., to be hot, scorching; saio e rara-
mea, the sun is burning hot.

raranga n., the spine of the sea-urchin.

raranga'a adj.. open, exposed to the sun, of
situation.

rarangana noko me'nte'i rarangana, I am afraid
of it.

rarango ef. rango.

rarangi, rararangi 1. v. i.. to warm onesdf at a
fire; e *ure*ure ho rarangi, he stood
waiining himself. Mota rara 2, Poly-
nesian rara,

rarangi 2. v. tr., to be dose to. to surround.

rarapoupott frequently, often.

Rararo Cape Hartig, Little Malaita, west of
Cape Zdte.

raraai 1. v. i., to be shrivded, withering,
palsied. 2. U., a phase of the moon, tha
last quarter.

rarata n., a skull.

SAKE

88

rare 1. a sleeping-mat plaited of coconut leaves;

hd*u rare, poe rar€, to plait aach a mat.

2. V. tr.. to ainge a pig with dry coconut

leavea; an ordeal wherein the accuaed

atanding on a platform ia aiaged with

dry coconut leaf. M. A., p. 212.
raratalni, ra'araratalai v. tr., to tend, to care

for. to do chorea.
rarataH v. tr. *J*«rar<to'<.
rarata4nila-(lni) gerund,
raro 1. &• adv.. preoedea the verb, uaed of con-

aecutive action; then, conaequent upon,

constantly, ko raro ma*oki4 kA'u, they

are atill awaiting it.
raro 2. U.. mwai Uku raro, open plaoea. i^ea.
raro 3. raro tuu€*i, to turn a bag inalde out.
raraoi ▼. tr., to hurt, to do harm to; e sa*a

raronU amkenus ing^'Ut he will do no

evil to hia neighbor.
rlm*a S., riml U., pera. pron., dual. 3, aulfixed

to verba and prepoaltiona aa object,
rata a bamboo water-carrier; U*i raia, to fiU a

bamboo with water. San Criatoval

rata.
ratawaarl U., half and half, neither one thing

nor the other,
rata ta'atakai raU, taka i aka i raU, down (of

neatlinga).
rato 1. ▼. i.t to be full grown, of full age. 2. n.,

a full-grown peraon, an elder; nm ra»o

ni mwant, old men; mm rato ni keni, old

women; mani rato, for the elders.
ratOBga v. n., full growth.
rMo 1. n., a leaf uaed aa a wiapper for food to

be cooked; nnrarau, thin; *apai rtu, a

leaf; fiw 'apai ran ama ma danio, the

leavea of the treea; a Lulu rm, a proper

name (lit., folder of leavea). Mota

nau, Polyneaian rau.
ria 2. S. (fia, fit), bank, aide, of thinga; with

locative • bcaide. ro rdmi wet, the two

banka of the atream; i raume wHi, beaide

the atream. Wango rau, Florida lau,
rin 3. n., a plank; uaed with genitive I. rdmrm,

rdi kafa, a thwart; rHi dauio, S., rdi '«f,

U., a plank; riti MH, a atake.
rin 4. v. tr., to acrape up, to gather up with

the hand. Mota raa.
rlu 5. V. i., to heal over (of a wound). 6. n., a

acab over a wound, a acar.
rin 7. V. i., to adhere, to abide; rAa meku, to

abide.
rlnngi tr., to adhere to, to abide in.
rinhaini tr., to be constantly in a place,
rinal tr., to adhere to and apoil; e ka*a me'i

ola ke rdusU, pure, undefiled.
rK«ha*i v. i., to frequent; e taUH reuhe'i 'oto

ana, he frequented it.
rin 8. V. i., to be humble, lowly; mt^i hem rem,

a lowly woman,
rtvtal partlc, hnmble. i'o r^uUTi.
fin 9. riiui kdu, 10,000 oooonata. tf. 'apai nim.
Rinalni the pinnade rock at the eaat entraiice

to Mara Maaiki Channel,
ravka n., trigger of a gun (Engliah lock),
ri'vrapn 1. jellyfiah, Portugueae man-o*-war.

r&pu. 2. a whip.

rioram to abide oonatantly. rdu 7. Wedan
rau numa, to cohabit.

ra ^. ft 1.

ra*a adj., white rcrt'o, marar^a, rere,
hmhwnre^a. Wti rm. albino.

raka ▼. L. to Jump, to leap. Aa'araXw, ka'ard^ki,

rako eaculent hibiacna.

raaga'a adj., gHatening.

raorao the diambered nautOua, hoi reoreo;
pieoea of theahell cut in varloua pattema
are uaed for inlaying, rearm alaka, a
large variety of nautilna; hala reoreo,
hala kite, hala 'apam pa'aleo, to cut
nautilna ahdl for inlaying; toU reoreo, to
Inlay with nautilna.

rapa, rarapa v. L, to be dliptical in ahape, aaid
of the ahinbone, which ia of ten diatorted.
owing to theumatiam.
raparapata'a U., rounded in ahape.

rapl n., a harlot ha'arepi. Florida rebi.

rapo 1. V. L, to be ripe, full grown; ooic koH
repo, the nuta are Juat ripening; aau e
repo host hciaa, when the nuts are ripe
the weather la calm. 2. a fully grown
pefaon. refo ni nmane, an adult man;
repo ni ham, an adult woman; ^oro repo,
uaed of a peraon In authority,
raponga v. n., full age.
rapaha v. n., uaed with poaa. 3: repo h aa n a,

ripeneasi old age.
*al rapo a tree uaed to make peatlea for
pounding yams and taro.

rapo 3. V. tr., to auapend. to hang up (of things).

rare 1. v. tr., to shurpen by rubbing. ha*arere.
rare hAu, to sharpen an aace; rere Maaga,

rara'a adj., white, dean, aharpened; prob-
ably connected with rere. i/. re*a,
M. L., p. 97. re'are'a doea not appear;
in Viti rea albino the final a ia probably
adjectival.

rara 2. quickaanda; i rere, the beach at A'ulu.
saisai rere, a ahoal, bank, at aea.

rara*a adj., dean, white. ha*arere'a.

rarada 1. v. tr., to alip, to alide. 2. U.. a land*
alip.

raraha (na) U., rerehana nOieu, a achool of
bonito.

rarapata*a S., adj.. rounded in ahape.

rarapono v. L, to be thick, doady matted, of
buah. pono.

raraqalnqaitt U., v. i., to be laid low, recum-
bent, qeiu,

rata rete hdu, to gnaah, to grind the teeth; rete
hdunge, gnaahing of teeth, nunurete,

rau rf. rdu.

ri U.. U S., veri)al auffiz. Jka'afoiirl.

rida U., ride ni 'inoni, a dwarf.

riaaga hd'irieng^, ▼. n., a oonteat.

rlhn*a n., a diff. Wango rihua.

rlhangaHni v. tr., to pray to (a Waago word
introduced in eariy daya).
fOmagalnga v. n., prayer. Florida Uti-
U»uH.

rii the treble drum in the para ni 'o'o.

riiril 1. n., locuat, dcada, ita ahrilling ia takea
aa a bad omen.

89

RORO<A

ri'ixi'i (ku) 2. S.. n., finger. 3. ri'iriH ni Hnoni
(a) a dwarf, (b) a great number of men.
4. Vs ri'iri'i, v. tr., to break in pieces;
*oke 'o*i rVvri'ire, thou ahalt break them
in pieces. Vaturanga rtrtfct, Florida
nggiringgiri, Makuxa wiri-kikin, hand.

rike, rikarike S., v. i., to rejoice, ruks U.
rikaaga v. n., sae rikanga, rejoicings of
heart* Viti rikat to jump.

xiki L adj.. smaU; Oa Riki, Little Oa Island.

rikiU. 2. Hkl S.. rOf A»im, to loosen the bands
holding a canoe, to take up anchor.

Ripoo» Slpii, Rupoo S., a village on the west
coast of Ulawa: Maadi'a, its landing-
plaoe.

riiidi (na) eaves of house; riridine nume, i HH-
dine, under the eaves.

liriholo U.. a gap in the hills, a pass.

riro ha'ariro, v. tr., to entice with food.

ro numeral, two; used only in composition;
used also in exclamation of a large num-
ber; forms part of the pers. pron. moro,
koro. e ro ola, two things; e ro 'ata,
only two things; e ro ini, two things; ro
ola, vocative, you two, of husband and
wife; ro mwane, you two, exclamation of
surprise or vocative; ro mwane, the two
pointers of the Southern Cross, M. A.,
p. 349; ro Hnoni, you two, of husband
and wife; ro *inoni ineu, my parents; ro
hA*i ma'amanat ro ma*amana, father and
son; maraau ro one, east-northeast wind.

roa n., black-lip pearl shell used as a coconut
scraper; it forms part of a man's ordi-
nary baggai^.

roaroa windmill made of coconut leaf, a child's
plasrthing. Hedley, Funafuti Exped., p.
3o4.

rodi V. tr., to confirm, to make firm, to grip;
keU rodi, to grip, to hold tight; rodi
tfCMig>, to plight troth.

rodo 1. n., night, ha'arodo* hd'irodo, i rodo,

at night, by night; ladae i rodo, to go

till nightfall; nga rodo, last night; si'iri

i rodo, tonight. 2. v.. redup., rorodo;

€ rodo 'oto, it is night; nga rodo e rodo,

the night fell; kd'irodo e rodo, last night;

m4ia rodo, to be blind. 3. to forget;

sad rorodo, U., v. tr., to forget.

rodoil ▼. tr., to be benighted, e rodosVemelu.

rodoma^ni S., rodoha'lai tr., to be benighted.

rodomait rodohaH partic, till nightfall; Uu

rodoma*i, go tiU nightfalL Florida

rorodo, blind; Omba dodo, cloud; mala-

dodo, blind; Malo. N. H.. bong dodo,

night; Wango rodo, night.

rodo 4. S., the name of a month, 'dsi rodo,
February.

rodohono 1. v. L, to become dark, to be pitch
dark, kono, e rodokono pnpnlu, mid-
night, pitch dark; saeku e rodokono, I
lost consciousness. 2. n., darkness, of
day or night; me'i rodokono.

rohn, ro'tfohn v. i., to be silent, to cease

speaking; Udi rohu, to cease speaking.

rohvla'iai tr., to ignore, to hold one's

peace at; nmane *o ro*urohuU*inie ngar-

alaku, hold not thy peace at my tears.

roka, *aroka adj., open, set open wide.

rokad v. tr., to open, to open out, to unfold.

rokftrila-(na) gerund.

rokataH partic, open, unfolded.

roma 1. an oyster shell found in Maxa Masiki
Channel, the red peat at the base is
employed in the making of shell money
(haa).

roma 2. v. L, to poison fish with Barringtonia,
etc.

rongo, rwongo S., rongorongo U., v. tr., to
hear, to listen, to hear tidings of.
ha*arongo, qa*arongo, ka*a rongo Ids^
ngani, not hearing clearly; e rongo *oto
mola ana walana, listened to his word;
nou rongoa, I heard it; rongo *oda, U., to
make a din, to chatter and disturb;
ronfo keni, to inquire about a giri as a
wife for a boy, to betroth; rongp
keninge, v. n. t'ofa'f rongo kminga, to
set aboat a betrothal; rongo m 'dingfi,
to hear with the ear; rongp odoodo, U.,
with poss. 3., to bear tidings of; rongo
isnii, to be obedient to; qa*arongoisnli.
roagoaga v. n., hearing.
rongola-(kv) gentdd. Mota rongo, to
apprehend; Maori rongo, to hear; Lau
ro, to hear.

rongoroiigo U. 1. n., a measure, from the finger*
tips to the right ear. U. 2. n., itga nmgo-
rongo ni da, a multitude of things.

ro*o U., ro*o ma, to wind a fishing-line on a
board.

rorahl v. tr., to hasten a person unduly, to be
too soon for. rorora.
ronhila-(kii) gerund.

rori 1. v. tr., to ram, to load a gun. 2. n., a
ramrod.

rori 3. V. tr., to take the pith from laths of
palm wood, rori pi*e.

rori, ro'irori 4. v. i., to babble, to prattle.
Kirort, nvrort, trort,

nro 1. V. L, to be tied tightly, to incur a debt,
to render oneself liable; roro mae, to
strangle; roro lo'oni, a belt to hold up
clothes.
roroH tr., to tie tightly, to draw tight, to
brace, to hold tight; pili roro*i, to press
down tight.
roroaH tr., to have incurred a debt, to
involve oneself, to be placed in invid-
ious case. ha*aroroa'i,

roro (ktt) 2. bosom, the belly of a snake; i rorona
Abraham, on Abraham's bosom.
roroma'i roroma'i sae, used with poss. 3 and
locative i; i roroma'i sae ana, on his
bosom. Mota rorot, to carry on the
bosom.

roro 3. roro waaro, to be diffused (of coloring
matter in water), waaro,

nwo'a 1. adj., set on edge (of teeth).

roro'a 2. adj., liable, at fault. ka*arofo*a*L
e sa*a roro'a, there will be no fault; all
right; muel roro*a, we implicated our-

n., debt, fault.
roro'a 3. adv., precedes verb, nou sa*a roroa*

RORO'A

90

roro't 3 (continued).

ia#. I shall certainly not go; ana *oto *emi
ka'a roro*a M*iiaUa *amu, unleas we
seek It of thee.

refodara n., a fillet, band around the head,
crown (late use), data.

rofodo 1. to be lowering (of clouds). 2. n.. a
black doud; heU rorodo, to keep off the
clouds by magic, to jkrovide fine weather.
3. U., sae rorodo, to forget.

rorodo'a 1. belonging to darkness, cloudy; mu
faUmga torodo'a, deeds of darkness.
2. U.. a dark doud, inAst rorodo'a,

roroho Mu raroho^ a stone aaoe. Wango tofoko.

rorora hastily, in a hurry, rwciki, lot rorora,
to go in a hurry; hire tola rorora ana
tahingfit they fled predpitatdy.

rotanl U., v. tr., to rub in the hands.
rotanila-(na) gerund.

rotarotaH U., v.. to shuffle the feet.

roto 1 . to cut into lengths (of wood) ; roro dangq,
to cut up firewood. 2. n.. a piece, a
part; nga roio, a part, partly,
roto'itr.

roto 3. walo roio, the match-box bean, Queens-
land bean.

rotoaMni tr., to rub out seed with the hands.
Wango roto.

rott 1. V. i., to hum native songs, singing in a
monotone. Mota raw.

roQ 2. a large leaf (Heliconium sp.). used to
wrap up for food for cooking; do rou, to
gather leaves for use in cooking. Viti
roMToii, taro leaves cooked.

ru variant of ro, two; (f. proper names. Rupoo,
Ru'apu; added to personal pronouns,
dual, kireru'e, *omoru*e, raru*i, lu; ru
poo *emi ngeu, we had two pigs to eat.

niana second, the second time, anew; 'oto
ruana *€si tturi, then the second time
he said; ruana ke'i orea, the other shall
be left.

me S., ma U., numeral, two; used with 'e. *e rue;
reduplicated ruerue. *ala ruerue, two-
edged. Mota nirua, Motu rua, Poly-
nesian rua.

mema'a adj., doubting, sae ruerua'a, doubt-
ful mind; sae ruerua'anga, doubt,
double-mindedness; saeku e ruerua'a
suuTomu, I am in doubt concerning you.

nike» mkemka v. i., to be Joyful; more com-
mon in Ulawa. rike,
mkanga U., mkanga S., v. n.. joy, glee.

mmu (na, ai) n., oil, grease; rumu ni su, oint-
ment; rumu nue maa, eye salve. Wango
rumu, Viti lumu, oil.

mmit'e S., nima*a U., adj., oily, greasy.

ram, mmm to gather together, to collect, to
enroll. ha*aruru, kd'iruru. rum dunge,
to build a fire, to gather the sticks
together; ruru puli, rwru ha*apuli, U., to
throng; ruru wala, to make an agreement,
mmnga v. n., a gathering together,
ramhi tr., to throng, to press upon,
rarahelni tr., to gather together,
ramtal partic., gathered together. Wango
rurut Maori ruru, to draw together.

rani 2. U., ruru hare, landslip, avalanche,
rara'a S.. ruru'e ktile, a phase of the moon,
raraha U., n.» a company, ruru, Wango

raSi v. i., to draw back, to retire; ko ru'u i
mume, retires into the house.
raHMi V. L, to shrink, to shxivd, to con-
tract, to skMigh* Lau ruu, enter;
Wedan runt, enter; Fkirida rugu, Mota
Ink, to bend; Viti luku, to dendi the
hand.

raiiqa'tt U., vnqa'o S., a stump, ruu^u m 'eL

S

■aa- (ktt) 1. S.. noun used as pfepodtion; at the
house of. with, to (of motion to), to
(of offering or sacrifice to); in the singu-
lar used in third person only, in other
persons singular sia- is used; the locative
t may be prefixed, lae kd'u saana, go
to liim, go to his house; in^ie saada*du,
he is at home; uunu da saana mu *akaIo,
offer burnt offerings to the ghosts; loka
i saana, flew to him; mHurike e rdu
saana nume *ie, salvation has come to
this house.

sa'a 2. S., negative particle used of future time,
also as ddiortative; sa'a balanced by
wa is used as the negative oocrelativea
ndthei>-nor; probably sa'a is compound-
ed of sa and *a 4. </. ka'a. nou sa*a
lae, I shall not go; *o sa*a lae, you shall
not go; hole sa'a hole wa nga me'% ola
'erete'a ke'i i'o i sapeka, the paddles
must not rattle nor anything of light
color be about our bodies; ngami sa'a
liu ka'akireru'e, none shall pass in front
of them; sae sa'a makolo wa ke mou^
thoughts shall not be parted and shall
not cease. Espiritd Santo sa, negative
partide; Bugotu sa; Viti so, future
IMUtide.

Sa'a 3. the last village on the southeast coast
of Little Malaita three miles from Cape,
ZBit. i Sa'a ni menu, ^. ka'addki.
M. A., p. 4S.

•aai, saasaai S., v. tr., to know, to read, saai
bukanga, reading; saai ola, to know
things, to be wise; saai olanga, wisdom;
saai *ulu, to repeat by heart; aiei ke saai
suukeni, vrbo can enumerate? le'u mm
saaie nou saaie, what I know I know;
lio saai, to percdve; 'oke saaiaa miwane
waune, say that person's name.

laanan n., a young unmarried man, a youth, a
widower,
•asnsuhs (kn) youth; in sing. 3 the poss 3
ana is used: saanaukaana, its youth, his
youth, youthf ulness.

■a'asala to be clear, witliout support, not
touching the ground, sola 3. ^nlo
sa'asala, to turn back before reaching.

•ada S. 1. V. i.. to be fitting, proportionate to;
used with poss. 3. U., dado, ka'asada,
kd'isada, e sada amelu, fit for tliem;
soda pe'ini, equal, equivalent to. 2. leveU

91

SAISBSir

Mda (continued).

flat, mu U*u e lai soda, flat places; ape
soda, to be level; heU mdnu sada, to hold
level, u];>right. Wango taisitda,

■adanfa S., v. n., fitting, proportionate, «
sadanga ana.

Me (ka) 1. n., heart, mind, chest, liver: mwai
mesi sae, hearts, ef. lodosae, ne'isae,
*onisa4. sae esoeso, to have indigna-
tion; sae hanaHnge, covetousness; sae
hdu, hard heart (late use) ; sae kiru'a, a
mind engaged; sae huu, sae huunge,
grief; sae maleUdi, rage; sae mdlumunge,
long suffering; sae mamae, meek; sae
mango, mental satisfaction; sae mwa^uu,
mutiny, rebellion; sae nanau, wise of
heart; sae nanaunge, wisdom; sae ngisu,
lungs; oku Hnami oku sae^ many men,
many minds; sae ni pdupelu, red hot;
sae rakonga, gentleness; me*i sae e rara,
earnestness; sae rarada, indignation;
sae rikangat rejoicing of heart; sae rorodo,
to forget; sae merua'at doubt; sae susu,
confident; sae tahat happy; sae taia'ala
hunit to be evilly disposed toward; sae
to*o, to desire; saeku e hu*ite*i, my heart
is undone; saeku e lae haahe, I over-
looked it; saeku e likit I am nervous;
saeku e mode, I am listless; saeku e
mo'uholo, I have no spirit left; saeku
*oto ana, I love it; saeku e rodohono, I
lost consciousness; saeku e ta*ela*i, I am
exdted; saeku e iolongo, I have heart-
bum; mu oia saemu eni deuleni, thy
will; *unu takanie saemu, lay bare your
mind; ta'e ku*a saena e diana, there's a
goodhearted woman; koi saeka, in our
hearts; kaia*ai sae talani, to be careful
to; mamango i sae, metaph.. the heart;
odoni sae, moral righteousness; opa sae,
to be at variance; i roroma** sae ana,
on his bosom.

sae 2. S., v. tr., to talk about, kire saea vfala^

■ae 3. U., V. tr., to know, to read, as saai, Uo
sae, to perceive; lio sae to'o, to favor.

Me 'aala to begrudge, to bear malice,
sae 'aelasi tr.
M6 'aetanga v. n.. malice, spite.

Me 'asi V. tr., to put out of one's mind, to
forgive, to neglect.
Me 'asilaiia oraha'a forgiveness of sins.

Medami U., satisfied, enough, to repletion;
keU saedami, to have enough; ngdu
saedami, to gorge, to eat to repletion.

Mediana S., Mediena U. 1. to rejoice, to be of
good mind toward. ka*asaediena, 2.
to love, used with poss. 3.
Medlananga n.. goodness,
saedienanga n., love.

Ma haahi S., to be sparing, parsimonious, to
grudge.

sae hanali, sasMehaniU v. tr., to covet.
Mehanalinge v. n., covetousness.
saehana]]]a-(na) gerund.

•aehanenga n., covetousness, kanenga ni sae.

MahuQ to grieve, to be sad.
saefauunge n., grief.

Memango ka*asaemango, v. tr., to comfort, ta
settle the mind.

Menanau S., to be well instructed, wise.

Menaaaunge n., wisdom; sa*a kule*Uana ike
saenanaunge, never coming to wisdom.

Msni 1. V. tr., to grudge, to keep back, to
withhold, to spare. 2. U., to prize, to
think much of.

M'sMpe'a adj., in peace, in safety, sape.

Mstaha to have a clear mind about, at ease in
mind; saeku e taka, my mind is dear
about it.

Meto*o to wish, to want, to like; used with
poss. 3.
Meto*oa4 v. tr., to want, to covet.
Meto'callana coveting it.

MS uauhi V. tr., to bear a grudge against, to
be spiteful to.
sae nnuhinge v. n., grudge, spite.

Mewasu, Mesaewastt v. i., to be angry, to sulk;
ho saewasu ke'Uiu, angry with one
another; saewasu kd'isusu, continued
anger, grudge.
MewMunge v. n., anger.
Mewatuli tr., to be angry with a person.
Mswasulsna his wrath.

sahaU 1. v. tr., to put layers of leaves under
anything for its protection, aa at the
bottom of an oven. 2. to hire, as a
canoe; metaphor, of lining it with
money. Fagani tafari.

saho n., native-grown tobacco.

sUio 1. U.. lime, a lime gourd; koi seku, U., a
lime gourd; koi seku koto, lime gourd;
e kotokoio ana lo*u koi seku, to rattle the
spatula in the gourd; uunu sUku, to
bum lime. 2. a death charm {toU
loosi) prepared with lime and plaioed
in a path. Motu aku, lime; Wango aku,

sUmru to be mildewed, mouldy.

sXie S., a tree (Parinarium laurinum) ; the nut
(koi seie) is used for cementing canoes,
etc., the kernel is grated on coral stone
and plastered on the joint of the wood,
a stain composed of the bark of o'a and
charcoal ilo'iloki) is then spread over
the sdie.

sXilo n., a crab.

saini 1. U., v. tr., to put on, to draw down, as a
shell ring on the arm; saini mwado, to
throw dust over anyone.

saini 2. saini one, with locative i, on the beach;
koii*aelae miU i rarada i saini one, the
fish came and grounded upon the beach.

sa'iri kd*isa*iri, v. tr., to quarrel.

saisai rere a bank, a shoal, at sea.

sJUseffltt U., a creeper cut into lengths and the
bark peeled off and dried; when dry it
is cut into strips and twisted into
fishing-lines, the twisting is done on
the thigh with a to-and-fro movement
of the hands, beginning with the palm
flat and ending with the palm turned
toward the body; the i is inserted for
euphony, cf. i 5, sdmu.

■aisMn U. 1. n., a waterspout. 2. n., a gale of
wind, a squall.

8AISBSU

92

MiMMi U. 3. V. L, to smoke (of fire), redup. of
s&sut i 5. dunga # saisesu, the fire mokes.

•ftki 1. V. i., to be strong, to be powerful.
M. A., p. 192. 2. V. i.. to be hot (of
condiments).
sakanga v. n., strength, power; ddu sakaniB
ana, to pin one's fidth to. to make a lot
of; mdni ni'ilana siUtangat the complete
giving of power,
aakahi r. tr.. to strengthen, to enable.
Aneityum cap, hot. fire; Motn kak a k ak a ,
red; Maori kaka, red hot

sakaaaka'a adj.. firmly, vigorously, success-
fully; diu sakasaka'a, to do actively;
keU sakasaka*a ana, do it with vigor.

aala 1. the paper mulberry tree (Broussonetia
papyrifera). 2. doth made from the
bast of that tree. 3. European cloth.
maai sola, a piece of bast cloth; mi sola,
a piece of any cloth. Viti sola, a
wrapper.

aala, sa'aaida S., aaaala U.. 4. desolate, unin-
habited, wilderness; kdntte saia, desert.

aala v. tr.. to clear ground for a yam garden,
aalanga v. n.. a clearing for a garden. Mota
sara, open space, court.

aalaauH, aaaal«ma4 U.. v. L. to be wise.
aalamalaga v. n.. wisdom.

aaUngalni U.. aiagUeH S.. to unload a canoe.

aalo 1. n.. sky, heavens, clouds, charcoal draw-
ings on canoes at bow and stem repre-
senting clouds; ffiM solo, the heavens;
t solo, in the douds. scJo ko kokokono,
the sky is lowering; salo moUmoU, red
clouds; i hakana solo, under the sky;
mu hi*nne salo, the stars of heaven;
kohukokn la*ona salo, far-off douds;
nga ngoongoo ni salo # ngo'a, the tip of
the doud was broken off; t rdpuU'i
salo molemoU, a red sky; tans ta*i saio,
up in the sky. Wango aro,

aalo 2. V. L, to beckon, to invite with signs;
salo haaki, to make a sign to a person:
in beckoning with the hand the palm is
held down.
aalohi tr.. salohi lue, a crab. lit., beckon
the tide (Gelasimus sp.). Mota alovag,
GUbert Islands alofi, Wango aroki,
Samoa jta/o. Motu ke^kalo.

ailu* alHiaala'l. S.. v. i.. to be painful, to hurt.
sapssdlu. 'aeku ko sHu, my leg hurta me.
ailunga v. n.. pain.

ailtt 2. the ironwood (Casuarina equisetifolia).
kokoi sdu, casuarina needles; bodies
when expo s ed for burial {aoH) are
covered with these needles; from the
scraped bark of the tree a stain Is made,
thia is the coloring i patt^ seen on
fishing-lines from Santa Crux.

aama v. i.. to correspond to. to come in proper
order, to be abreast of; soma diana, to
correspond exactly, to be in keeiMng
with; ro 'tola ko soma, the two canoes
keep abreast of one another.
aamaagaHai tr., to lay in order, to arrange.
if. dama,

aamo to stutter. Viti sami, to liso.

almn 1. n.. a creeper, the bark is used for
fishing-lines, sd'isemn, 2. v. i., to
fish for deep-sea fish; kinou ni samu,
the hook.

aaaa the white ant; koi sana, ita nest; sane *aU,
the destructive white ant, capable of
giving a sharp bite Caia); sant qa% an
ant of a brownish color used as burly
for sea-bteam (t*« ni sane). Samoa
ans, Mota gan,
aaaa'a adj., eaten by white ants. Samoa
anea.

aiagllaHai S.. aaUagaHnl U.. to unkiad a canoe.

aangoni v. tr.. to nourish, to adopt a child.
Lau 5011^0.

aa'o n.. the sago palm (Sagus sp.); sa'o ni
*akolo, a kite made of sago-palm leaves
for filling for mwanoU with a cobweb
lure (lama). M. A., p. 318. ddu sa*o,
to get sago leaves for thatching; kokoi
sa'o, a frond of the sago palm; lokoiai
sa*o, a bundle of sago leaves; hlolo ni
sa'o, swamp in which sago grows; mudii
sa*o, midrib of the leaf; qangqi sa'o, a
meaaure. a hand's breadth; tdki sa'o, to
cut sago leaves; tdri sa'o, to split the
sides of leaves to make arrows (lopa)
us* sa'o, to stitch leaves for thatch
raapea, the midrib used as a needle
wede, to take out the midrib before
sewing thatch. Borneo sago.

aa'oai v. tr.. to catch mwanoU with the kite;
*olo e sa'onia mwanoU, then he caught
garfish. Mota sao 2, Polynesian kao,

aa*oha*Uii v. tr., to double, to place in tiers, to
fit a thing on.
aa*oha1 partlc.. sa*oka*i ro da, double, in
two Uefw.

aa'oitt egg of bird, koi sa'olu ni menu, Mota
Miu, Fkxidk ioln.

aa'oaa'ohaH'a U.. adj., double, in tiers; sa'osa^
'oka'i'a ani nima, an upper story in a
house, a doubled house.

aaoaaola 1. adj., yellow, turmeric 2. n., a
tree with yellow pods which curve in a
drde and are worn as ornaments in
the ear.

aapa (ku) 1. n., the body, trunk, maas, figure,
color, appearance; sape ni 'tnont, men's
bodies; sape we*o, to be bodily tired;
sapeku e ka'alawa, I am liatleaa; sapeku
e qd'i mware'a, I am not in good health;
noko kOe sapeku, 1 am well, lit., I per-
ceive my body; poienga ni sape, bodily
repletion; e to'o supe, to have the ahape.
the appearance, of. 2. uaed In apoa-
trophiring the varioua iaiands with the
locative f : t sapena i Sa'a ni menu, ^.
ka'addki. Wango abe, 3. n., duty,
belonging to, part: le*u i sapeku, S., my
duty; kolokolo i sapeku, U., my duty.
Florida sape, place, bed.

aapa 4. sapeUiku, sa'esape'a,

aapaH, aaaapaU S.. v. tr., to add to, to increase
in number, cf. rape'i.
aapa'itaKiui) v. n.. sape*iiana, the increaae
of it. its being increased.

93

sXn

upelMko to be safe, unharmed. Idku.

•apfrlUmnge n., safety, being unharmed,
undrcumctaion (late use).

•apemawa to be free from harm, unhurt, mawa.
■apamawanga n.

Mpaalln S.. to be in pain, sape hi'Uo*o, U.
■apaiMlimge n., pain.

■apOt aaiapo v. L, to chew.
M^olitr.
lapolila-(ka) gerund.

■ara U.. nima sara, a large food-bowl used at
feasts, the contents of which are assigned
as the portion of particular persons.

•araaara *iola sarasara, a canoe kept for bonito
fishing, adorned with inlay of nautilus
sheU.

tart V. !•• to wish, to want; nou qe'i sore, U..
I am unwilling; nou sore lae, I wish to
go; *o*a sore ngdu itm, what will you eat?

tirtH S., V. L. to be unwilling; nou sere'i, I
won't,
tirtini tr., to reject.

tart to'o to wish, to desire; may be used with
poes. 3. e sore to'o ana, he wants it;
$ scr4 io'o fhu, he wants a Jews-harp;
e sore to*o eku, he wants me for his wife.

tart 1. v. L, to face, to turn oneself; saro mii,
turn this way; e saro wau, he faced
about. Mao. aro, front.

taro (kn) 2. over against, reposing on: vnth
locative i. i sarona Alfraham, on
Abraham's bosom; i sarona moke Amu,
in your sight* lit., opposite your net.
tartha v. n.. used with poss. 3, ana, i
sarokaana, over againtt, opposite to;
• sarokaana wiU, on the face of the
waters; sarokaana Woa, under the care
of the spirit. Mota sarova, meeting.

tart 3. ^oro ni miwaa, zigag pattern in inlaying
made by putting triangular pieces of
nautilus shell face to face, the end of
eadi piece in the center of the one
opposite, i/. first and second patterns
in Guppy "Solomon Islands," p. 138.

taro 4. S.. adv.. used of consecutive motion.
precedes the verb; thereupon, ko ngeu
nuMio kesi saro 'unne, when he has
eaten he will say it; kh^ sa'a ngdu wa
ka inn na hire ka'a saro sAunU 'oio, they
will not eat or drink till they have killed
him.

taro pott U., a phase of the moon, day before
full moon.

ttrolui with locative i: i saroka^ in the roof
between the layers of thatch.

tira*t adj.. used at noun, a charm, incantation,
mu seru'e, M. A., p. 192. e walangia
ani seru*a, he muttered magic over it.
tlmH V. tr., to use a charm on. to make
magic; dUmnlaa kire saru*e, areca nut
which they had used magic on.

tata I. V. i., to fence with logs against pigs.

tata 2. sasa keUla, thin, lean.

I'at to be disturbed, stirred up; karokure
€ sasa'ai i ka*ona *asi^ the depths were
troubled; sasa* 04 « poukiru'e, a raging
is stirred up.

tataha (ko) n., thigh, lap. Borneo ^oAa, thigh.

tata httala U.. to subside (of swellings on the
body).

tatala U., for sa'asala and saU 4.

tatali U., V. tr.. to strain with the net iunu) of
the coconut leaf.

tataagota'a adj., light colored, fair, light
hair.

tatapoQ a log placed on top of the fence in front
of the canoe house {iaoka), a common
place for sitting.

tatara (kn) a limb, member of the body, branch
of a tree; mu sasarai saps, the limbt of
the body. San Cristoval roro, branch;
Malay dakan.

tatatt (ku) jaw. chin, beard. Wango taieie.

titv, tM'ntttii S., taitttn U.. 1. v. i., to smoke
(of fire). 2. n., smoke; sAsu ana wdi,
steam; silsu aUpono, dense smoke.
Mota asu, NiuC aku.

tMtn 3. ioU sssu, to cast unripe fruit (of trees).

titn'ala adj., tmoky; a sdsu*ala, it it tmok-
ing.

titnt'i v. tr., said of smoke impeding one's
vision; dungs s sdsue'ieu, the smoke of
the fire got into my eyes; e s&sus^is
maaku, the smoke got into my eyes.

tata (kn) 1. n.» a name; salana aisi, what (who)
is his name; ke mdni doiosU salada, let
him ask all their names; k>*okuungf*i
saiana* his real name.

tata 2. kuni saia, the heel.

tataaH v. tr., to chafe, to rub.

tatt sate unu, to overlap, sasaie,

tato sun, tunshine, fine weather, ka'asato,
e saio *oio, it is fine weather; saio *oio i
apau, the sun declines; saio e qa*alie
kdnue, the sun has risen on the earth;
sato e rara mea, the sun was scorching;
apai solo, afternoon; *iro ni saio^
drought; mwaa dili saio, a snake ob-
served as an omen; qa*alana saio, the
east; ra*arangana saio, the light of the
sun; suulana saio, the going down of the
tun. Fk>rida ako, Lau saso, Maori
ako, Mota loa. M. L.. p. 93.

taltal v. tr., to expose to the sun's rays, to
dry in the sun, to air, to be exposed to
the sun.

tin* tivttv 1. V. i., to kill, to pound taro, to
ram, to blow strong (of wind); sdu
mwane, to commit murder, sdu nswof
nenga, n., murder.
tftnni tr., to kill, to beat, to thrash, to hurt,
to punish, ka'asduni, kA*isenni. s^ne
kuni ke mae, pound it to that it be well
mashed; *aeku ko seunieu, my foot hurtt
me.
tllnnlla-(kv) gerund.

tin 2. S., n., a bonito, koi sen, Ro uieH seu^
a proper name. M. A., p. 49; mu sen
ko laka, the bonito play in tchoolt; rd*i
sen, a platfonn on the beach uted in
connection with bonito fisliing; Pulu
m^ai sen, circular sbeU inlaid.

tin 3. V. i., to dam, to mend holes in; sdu maa
ana mu 'ape, to mend the methct of tha
nets.

SiUKAI

94

•ittkii 1. V. I., to grate coconut oa a scraper,
sdukai niu. 2. n.. a coooaut scraper,
made of a txee trunk with two bnmchet
for lega and the butt resting on the
ground; a piece of clam shell with ser-
rated oige is lashed to the upper end
of the trunk; a man sits astride the
sduhtti holding a half coconut (Uu), rubs
the meat over the dam shell, and the
grated nut falls into a bowl (mme)
placed below. M. A., p. 338. Florida
taukai.

tiulahi n., evening, dusk, from about 4 o'clock
on; e s&uUhi *oU>, it is dusk; i seuUki, in
the evening; sdulehi mdumdut dusk.
Florida nulavi, Mota rawaw, Motu
odarahi, Wango suuraki.

•awnaata-Cna, da) U., n., used as verb, to know;
nau qa'ike saumaaiana, I don't know it.

Sltt mwa'elo the landing-place in the rocks
opposite Mwado'a. Ulawa.

■iaaga'hii v. tr.. to put the handle on an aze.

■Ihyiamn S. </. sdmu.

sl'tttattt S.. n., a whirlwind, waterspout, a
squall of wind. sAsu.

•awa n.. a fish, mullet, found in the lake at
Korea and in the lagoon at *01u Malau.
melu lai tola sawa i Malau, we went to
get mullet at the Three Sisters.

Mwalo n., the flying fox, a tooth of the flying
fox used as money. qd*u ni sawalo,
four flying-fox teeth, a unit in counting.

•awaoU*0 S., adj., darkened, black with clouds.

sawam, sasawam v. i., to whisper.

•awaninge v. n., a whisper, whispering,
sawanmgeinl tr., to whisper anything.
sawaninge'iaila-Cna) gerund.

•ese v. i., to fence, to protect; used with prep.
ahu*i,

sen </. sdu,

si 1. illative; then, thereupon; used with the
verbal particle ho as kosi, or without it.
*oio hire kosi tevri, thereupon they said;
*oke Uu mdi *osi teuri, when 3rou come
here say this; nge nest 'unue, then said
I; mu rato e ngdu na hire si mae, the
fathers ate and are dead. 2. adv., first,
first time, just, only; noho si lae mAi *ie,
this is my first time here; nou si keU
heU mola, I only Just touched it; makolo
nou si lae wa», when I first went.

si 3. U. dehortative; don't, 'o si ta'aia'a, laa,
don't, I say. Lau W, negative particle.

■I 4. genitive; in certain phrases. Iowa-
sipua. tangisi hudi, a hand of bananas;
qd'usi henue, the head of the community.

si 5. verbal suffix; mae, to die; maesi, to die of.

■ie-(kii) 1. n., used as preposition; at the house
of, with, to (motion toward), to (offering
or sacrifice to); used in Sa'a only in the
first and second singular, for the rest
saa is used; in Ulawa used in all persons;
the locative • may be prefixed, ro *u'u
maana siena a Ta'a Pta, his two eye-
balls to Ta'a Pea (a curse); i siidadu, in
their bouse, at their home. Nengone
5f, with; Sesake st, si, here; there.

ii'a U. 2. negative particle, used of future time.

also dehortative. *o si^e lae, do not go.

Savo sika, iMi, prohibitive; Vaturanga

jika.
sihaaa S.. with locative t, out cl doors, oustide.

sinaha,
siho, tiiiho 1. v. i.. to descend, to disembark.

to land, ka'asiho. siho kou, to de-
scend; siko i one, to land on the beadL

siho ioU.
siho 2. to be at hand, to befall, to happen;

qongi ho sisiho *oio, the time is at hand.
■Iholi tr.. to course through (of disease).

to assault; e sikolie safeku, it went sJl

through my body.
riholaH partic.. passed through. Motainpo.
siho 3. V. i.. to relate, to tell a tale; used with

poss. 3. siho *ada ana* to spread evil

reports of; siho 'adalamami, gerund..

our evil report; siho raqa ama, U.. to

sihodhonga v. n.. a tale, gossip.

rihoal partic, mu sihoa*i wala, mere words.

Just a tale,
siholl siholi wei, south wind, gentle breeae with

fair weather,
sihopultt ha'asihopulu, a stone sinker for a fish-
line.
sU 1. V. i.. to break wind. ViU dhi. 2. to fly

(of sparks), to flare (of fire); mu sii

dunge, sparks,
silri to-day, now; lit demonstrative may be

sufiixed and locative t prefixed. • sfiri,

i siHrini, to-day; si*iri *ie, in this day;

haidinge si*iri, today; nehesi lae si'tri,

let me go to-day; si'iri i rodo, to-night,
sikare n., a variety of yam.
sika 1. V. tr., to reject; 'asi 3 may be added*

sike hu*e to divorce a woman; sihe

hu*anga, n.. divorce; siha *asi, to reject.

Florida sika,
sika 2. n., a thorn; sihei hana, thorn on top of

the tubet of the spiny ymm. Viti siha^

needle.
sikeraHni v. tr., to reject, to condemn,
sikari 1. v. tr., to plait. 2. n.. a rope plaited

flat, a wick (late use).
siki 1. V. i., to come loose, to becom e detached;

mei *epu e siki ana, his seed,
sikihi tr., to undo, to untie, to detach, to

take off. ha'asikihi. e'a sihihia qd'utta

uhi, she takes off the heads of yams;

Aofio sikihi, to shut off by itself; susu

sikiki, to cast off. to reject,
sikite V. n.. mu sikitei ola, flakes, chips.

Wango sigi, Florida siki, Viti singi, to

move.
sikUelni tr.. to detach, to set free, to loose.
sikiloH partic. detached; v. i., to rebound.
sikite*ini tr.. to deUch.
siki 2. V. i., to tap. to toudi with the fingen.

siki raho, a beetle which is caught and

held upside down on a piece of thatch

(rako) which it raps (itJU).
BiUhi tr., to infect, to carry contagion to

person after person.
siklli tr., to twang with the fingers; to

95

so*o

vikl 2 (continued).

spurtle on; sikili maa, a tree (Ezooe-
caria sp.) found in estuaries, which
when cut squirts out a juice dangerous
to the eyes.

alkoa a bird, the black mynah. kikoa.

M9 riaiU 1. V. i., to enter; rao hire sa*a siU 'oio,

they certainly shall not enter. 2. to

go into the bush after; siU 'oka, to get

betel from the bush.

■Qinge v. n., an entry.

•ilihi tr.. to enter, to go into; ho sisilikie mu

nume, enters into houses,
silihe'ini tr., to sheathe, to insert. Samoa
silt, to lodge in; Wango siri, to enter;
Nguna sili, to be under; Mota sir, to
draw along; Florida sili; Fate sili,

■Oiihi V. i., to patch a thatched roof with sago
leaves.

iUitaha U.. v. i., to emerge, ha'asiliiaha.

time U., snme S., sandfly.

•imoiike S., pipe (English smoke).

•imwa V. tr., to flay, to skin.

•iaa U., sea-urchin.

tinaa v. i., sinaa uhi, to clean the roots off

newly dug yams.
iaaha used with locative i: i sinaha, out of
doors, sikana. nga hole s koru huUs
i sinaha, the shed was full right to the
door; po'o i sinaha, outside.

•inata U., n., a tabu mark.

sisei rara, dusk.

ainaH, tiriAeU 1. v. tr., to lighten, to give light
to; v. i., to shine, hoi he'u s sisindi
mei, the star has shone out. 2. moon-
light; i sindi, by moonlight.
sinaHhi v. n., used with poss. 3, ana; sin^
lihaana, its light. Lau sinali, moon;
Florida hinari.

flinala spedfic numeral, 1,000 (of yams).
inoltti uhi.

siiigD n., a littoral tree (Toumefortia aigien-
tifolia) much frequented by a butterfly
(Euploea sp.) which becomes intoxi-
cated and falls to the ground.

ai'o 1. V. 1., to collect, to gather. si*o aapa, to
separate, to reiSne; si*o honosi, to inter-
rupt with questions; if 'o koni, to col-
lect; si*o lilihen, to collect stones for a
wall; si'o maani, to gather together.
8i*ohi tr.
al'ohlla*(ka) gerund. Wango sio.

«l*o 2. V. L, to track; si*o isuli, to foUow the
footsteps of, to require reparation for,
si'o hili, to spy; si'o purapura, U.,
irregularly.

il'o 3. V. L, to practice magic; si'o hu'isi, to do
harm to.
ri'anga v. n., magic
•I'olii tr., to bewitch. San Cristoval sio/L

aiHfehaa 1. v. i., to be in evil plight, to be desti-
tute. 2. n. (ku), si'ohaakn UOa'ala, I
am in evil pUi^t.
liSihasnga v. n., destitution.
d'ahaaH tr. si'okaa'i mada, to be in
danger; ti*ohaa*i ola, to be in a poor way.
Lau sikcfa.

il'okani v. tr., to collect, to harvest.

d'okonliigt V. n., harvest.
si'ola esdamation of assent. ^. si'u's.
•ipa V. i., to prick, to let pus out of a sore.
■IpaDgl tr.
■IpangiU-(na) gerund. Mota sipe, to take

out; Florida sipa.
siri n., a parrot, siri alaha, Lorius chloro-

cercus; siri 'u'u, a lory that hangs head

downward.
tirin U., n., a cockle, if, henu, mwai keni

ana karo siriunga, what women for

collecting cockles.
sial 1. V. tr., to grin like a dog. to bare the

teeth; e sisie nihona, he bared his teeth

in a grin,
sid 2. sisi pono, to be dosed over (of a sore).
ridlt n., a shellfish.
iiilmidi S., mudimndi U., a bird, the yellow

honey eater.
Blaliiga-(ka) S., noun used as preposition; in

the way of, preventing, s hono sisi-

ngana, shut him in; < i*o sisingtku,

stood in front of me; ho'asi sisingana

li'oa, to swear by a spirit; e ho'asi sisi*

ngemn, bound you with an oath.
sisittgaH partic, used as adverb; over against,

in front of. hdi dango e i'o sisinge'i, a

tree stood in the way; ho'asi sisinge'i,

to dear with an oath; hono sisinge'i, to

shut out.
sisM sisiri hapa, a bird, swallow.
Bl*a*e S., si*n*a U., exdamation of assent.

si'u'e 'oto, 'o si'u'e, ta'ane si'u'e, cer-
tainly, verily,
sittte gun, rifle (English shoot), ko'uko'uha

ana siuU, report of a gun.
siwa 1. numeral, nine.

siwsna ninth, for the ninth time. Lau

siqa, Florida hina, Viti dhiva, Tonga

hiva, Indonesia sio,
siwe 2. blood-money, haa ni siwe, ne'i siwe,

to put out a sum as blood-money; tola

siw€, to kill and earn the blood-money.
so exclamation, to call attention; so ngt, well

then; so *oh€, perhaps.
soasoa native arrowroot, grows on the beaches.
soda V. i.. to encounter, to fall into danger;

used with poss. 3. e soda ana hu'o, he

fell into the net. Florida sodo, to meet;

Viti soia, to meet.
SO6 U., soe ledi, to question.
soi, soiaol 1. v. tr., to call, to summon, sot

ha'ada'inge, S„ soi ha'ata'inge, U.,

church, ecdesia.
soinge v. n., a calling; loU soings, to raise

aery.
soi 2. U., V. tr., to ask. to question; soi heri, to

question; e soia ada, he asked them

about it.
soi 3. V. i., to demand; soi Monga, soi kiriia'a,

to demand a fine,
soingalni tr., to call* to summon.
songo n., white shell discs tied as ornament on

the knee or round the wrist.
so'o V. L, to find, to pick up, to collect; so'o

so<o

96

'o (continued).

dangQ, S., jo'o 'd, U.* to pick up fire-
wood; jo'o UU, to build a •tone fence.
•o'ohi tr.

to'ohilA-Cko) gerund. Fl. sodo» collect,
til V. tr., to anoint; la^ ni su, coconut-oil

ointment; rumu ni su, ointment, salve.
■vhi tr., to plaBter the hair with lime.
•uhliica V. n., anointing.
iQhila-(ka) gerund,
■u'a U. 1. V. i., to move backward, to retire,

to retreat. Wango sua.
•o*a U. 2. su'ai honu, a summerset.
■iialta U., a foundation, suesudaa. a Poro

Sualaa Hdnua, a legendary person.

Mr. Foundation-of-the»Earth.
•ude V. tr., to root up the earth (of pigs), poo

€ sude. Mota sula, Wango sua,
■u'e S.. wn*tL U. 1. a tree planted in the villages,

the leaves and the catkins {rame) and

berries are edible, the bark is used in

Santa Crux for making fish-lines,
•u'e, to'eso'e 2. v. i., to encounter, to meet;

used with poss. 3. kire su'a ana, they

met him.
■a*ehi tr., to encounter difficulty, to have

hard work, to paddle against wind or

tide, 'ato *ae su'akia, to leap and

encounter; kire ho SM*ehiref they lord

it over them.
sii«elaH partic., ke'i su'ela'i mola haakU

q&*une, will recoil on his own head.

kA*isn*esu*€, po*osu*a*a. Nguna sua,

Wango sua, Lau suasna, encounter,
tn'e 3. S., used with locative i,* i su'e, out of

dooti, outside, external,
•tt'a 4. S., n., a spear,
so'a S., tii'a U. 5. v. i., to move backward, to

retreat, to retire; su's puH, to go back;

su's ngoli, to fall backward and break

one's neck,
■u'aau'a S., ra'a U., su*esu*e ni htmu, a

summerset.
BUMvalaa S., tualaa U., n.. a foundation.
•u'eau'elaH partic., mae su*esu*ela% to die of

hunger, to starve.
su'eta'a S., to'ata'e U., ne'isae su'eU'e,

adonu^i su'aie'e, to be anxious about.
■aU, Bo*inbi S., tuhisuhi U.. v. tr., to shave

the head or face; suhi kou, to tfhave the

head dean,
suhiaga v. n.. shaving.
•iihila-(lRi) gerund,
raha 1. a bung. plug, bung-hole. 2. v. i., to

fall throitfh a thing; e *uri suhu, his

foot went throtti^; mwalo suku hao, a

rock that pierces the bottom.
tuhoU tr., to make an opening in a green

oooonut, to take the plug out of a ca-

Sttke (continued).

to ask on his bdialf; masa suke, to be
ashamed to beg; e i'o pe'i suhe, sat and

•olsuli (ktt) S., n., a bone. suli.

talsimgl v. tr.» to btoO on a fire. Mota Iwt.

tn^tmigi't S., n., a hilL

■oka, tvaiika S., taka* ankasuka U., to ask
for. to beg, to borrow, to ask permis-
sion; suka hSriU'i, U., to question; suka
''inia, questioning; suke talana.

▼. n.

•okn (ttl) the vent of a fish. Viti buku, tail.

tolaapoa U., v. tr., to cause to lodge.

tulahlta U., to be firm, rigid.

sola S., nda U., v. tr., to roast on the embeza.

ko suiaa mu uki, roasts yams.

•vlaiiga v. n., a roasting, yams roasted in

the coals, ngdu suianta, the food eaten

at a betrothal consisting of roasted yams.

•nil (lu) 1. prep., after, according to; not used
as dative as stated in M. L., p. 151.
suli keidinge, daily; lae mSi sulieu, come
after me; ieiai suli wala, to obey com-
mands. Mota sur.

•vllt inlavli S., aasali U. 2. n., a bone; suit
qeri ngae, suli qeri i ngaena, the badc-
bone; sulitciailuanaf his shoulder-blade;
laloi suU, within the bones; mu lalamait
da ana suli, the marrow of the bonesa
qango laloi suli, the marrow. Motg»
suriu, Florida kuli, Borneo tulan
Nine kui,

•all 3. ^t *ei, wall-plate of a house; suli 'ei i
qaoka, ridgepole.

taU 4. suli kaia, forty dogs' teeth, a sum of
money considered equivalent to ten
fathom strings of shell money (kaa
takanga).

•aUtam a bone needle.

tolo 1. V. i., to lift, to carry up canoes to landt
to start on a sea Journey, to launch a
canoe; sulu kaa, to collect money; suln
la* a ana, to lift it up; sulu *epu, to adopt
a child; suiu *epunge, n.. adoption; sidn
wdlanga, gossip; mu iale'i suiu wokmga,
mere gossip: sulu walanga ia'eiaie, bab*
bling words.
tvlnha U., v. n., a landing.
aohiHtr.
■■^^^-(iRi) gerund. Wango sum,

nhh raavla 2. to sing, to make music; sulu 'ato,
a song sung as an ordeal; sulm 'aUmga,
ordeal singing; sulu dduddu, U., to
make songs on; sulu kananga, siiujing
of songs; sulu moo, to sing in company
with men dancing; sulu '0*0, to beat
dnmis. Mota sur, to sing.
anlvha (kn) n., song; sulukeku, my song,
•ntnl tr., to sfatg a song.
aalala-(kn) gerund.; sululana, its being
song.

solo, taavlv 3. v. tr., to follow, to do according
to; sulu isuli, to obey, to walk according
to; sulu odoodo, to go straight; sulu
odolaH, to act righteously.

aula 4. with poss. 3 atia. to please, sulu i
lokona, loikomu, pleasing in his sight,
thy sight.

•nln (al» ni) 5. liquid, water, madamada sulu,
ONctGber. Nguna sulu, Mota sur mala.

sola'a adj., with liquid, watery, containing
too much water.

97

sun

raliiheu 1. the stone walls of iaoha,

Snlvliaii 2. the artificial islets off the coast of
Malaita. Lau sulufou.

lulota'e U., V. i., to rise up. arise.

•vliita'eiiga v. n., a rising up. resurrection.
Wango stmitae.

tome S., time U., n.. a sandfly. Alite sumi,
mosquito; New Guinea kimu» simunikaf
sumoniku,

wmng9 sunge luuluu, elkhom fern.

■vagi S., V. tr.. sungie mawataa, lift up a shout.
Florida sungi.

wofi n., a short club, diamond-shaped, with a
broad face and a rib down the center.
Wango subi, Bugotu supa.

tttpn V. tr., to compose (of songs), supu kana.

m^imgi S., V. tr.. to offer, to intreat; supungie
ngduhana, to offer food to.

■ i iptt'up o (na) S.. V. tr.. to build.

■vraa'i, tnsuraaH S.. v. tr., to revenge, to
retaliate, to repay injuries; mwane *o
susuraa'ie mu oraha*a i'emi huni'emit
deal not with us after our sins.

rant 1. V. tr., to suspect, to have suspicions
about.

■uni, surartt 2. v. 1.. to plane, to scrape with
a flint or shell or glass,
ranuni tr.

van (kn) 1. n.. breast, paps, dugs of animals,
milk; stun ni ptdokit susu ni keu, cow's
milk; tori susu, to wear over the left
shoulder as a bandolier. Mota sus,
Wedau susu, Maori u.

wntUf rastwii 2. v. i., to suck the breast, to
have children at the breast, ha'asusu,
susu puri, to be the last bom; a susu
puri, the youngest child.

mil 3. V. i., to prick, to pierce, to impale, to
sew. susu *asi, to take out (of a thorn) ;
susu 'elinge, an ear-stick; susu hara, to
lean firmly on a staff; susu kumara, to
plant sweet-potato vines; susu opa,
ornamental ridge covering; susu qaoha,
to sew sago leaves for a ridge covering;
Alt susu qelusu, a nose-stick; susu sikihi,
U., to cast out, to reject.
tiisiiH tr.

misuHte v. n., a seam, sewing, an awl;
ta*ata*a maai su*isu*iU, one seam.
Mota sis, sus, to pierce: susur, to sew;
Samoa tut, Viti iutui, NiuS tui, Motu
turi.

sura 4. V. i., to be solid, whole, unbroken, to
heal up, to close over. ha*asusu,
hd*isusu, susu eliho'i, to be filled up
(of rounded shape), restored whole;
susu harehare, to cram; susu hono, to
heal over (of an ulcer); susu honosi, to
close in on; susu pou, to rear up without
breaking (of waves); 'ae susu, swollen
leg; Mu susu, an immovable rock;
t'o susu, to continue in one stay; lue
susu, throat stuffed up. voice gone; sae
susu, to be confident; S4U susunge, n.,
confidence, to be of firm mind toward,
to reject; saemu e wana he susu ha*ahire,
be stem towards them in thy wrath.

sosu 5. v. i., to approach; na*o susu ana, to
make straight on toward.
tusuhi tr., to approach; na'o susukire, draw
toward them.

■ustt 6. ha*asusu, to gossip, to tell tales about.

■uu 7. susu 'ano, to choose ground for a yam
garden.

•uaiia'ili S., susua*iH hunt, to suggest to a
person, to urge.

iustt'e adj., throughout; susu*e alowaa, all the
day long; susu'e ddngi, every day, in
the daytime.

snsue'lni tr., to stretch out, to hold out in the
hand.
stifltieH partic, stretched out; susue'i ki'i,
U., to stretch out the hand. Mota sis,
to point.

Sttiuhaa'i v. tr., to plant a yam garden.

■iwiihara to lean firmly, to rest upon.

susuhono V. i., *ulu susuhono, stone blind.

tntnimi v. i.. to have roots, to be rooted, imi imi.

raittlte n., a seam, an awl. a pricker.

■nralelni v. tr., to affirm, to maintain.

sutuleH partic. firmly, fixedly, forever.
dsu susuWi, to work unremittingly;
toli susule'i, to endure firmly, to be
steadfast.

■hbuU (fttt) 1. prep., in succession to. suit 1.
hele susuli, to inherit. 2. v. i., to follow
along; ntelu sustdi uwo, we kept along
the ridge; a Poro Susuli Uwo, a legend-
ary person, Mr. Follow-the-Ridge.

tntuli 3. U., n., a bone.

■QSiunaa a projection from the ridge of a
house, a pinnacle.

tnsimgi 1. V. tr., to approach, to draw near to.

aiurangi 2. U., v. tr., to cook on embers, to
broil, su'isungi. Wango susungi.

■usuru'ii a pent-house, a lean-to.

SQSiiau 1. tdutnanga sususu, taro pudding not
cut up into squares but left whole.
susu 4.

tiirasQ 2. a disease of the lower limbs accom-
panied by swelling.

■twnto'o V. i., to be firm, assured in mind, i*o
jMJttio'o. ma*ohi susuto'o, h&*iMari
susuto'o, to hope (late use).

■nil 1. V. i., to sink, to go down, to dive, to
dip (of the sun), to die out. to become
extinct; suu deki, to dive for pearl shell;
suu leuki, to dive for turbo shell;
at suu, U., to die out, to perish, to
cease; hdnue e suu, the village is unin-
habited ; mAi ana waarowaaro e suu, ebb
when the moon sets; mangona e suu,
his breath has gone, he is dead; ng&u
qe'u suu, to gorge, lit., to eat until the
head drops; uununge suu, burnt offering,
■nuhi tr.. to dive for.
•unhilana gerund.
•uiilana sato the going down of the sun;

with locative t, the West.
•utteHni tr., to go down and leave (of the

mm).
Bttohe (ni) v. n.. atei ke saai suuheni, who
can enumerate. Wango suu, Florida
hu, Mota sus.

suu

98

rau 2. SHU IM. to appear above the hofiaon;
SUM tai Umgi, to rise up; idtmu k€ sum
i kaUma, the lime spatula ahall pieroe
his gums.

•ttttS. to revenge, to repay; suu oianga, n..
revenge; ni'i suu, to make a free gift
expecting no return; ni'i suung^, v. n.
•uala-(lni) gerund., horo iuulama, to kill
in revenge for; e ga'a hdrikmnie lo'u
suulana, Wango tun.

•nil 4. suu leku, a certain kind of arrow.

B nn 5. harbor, bay. landhig-place. mfoioH
i su*u, the west wind; i su'u u^tmma,
the opening in the reef at Sa'a; i LaM
Su*u, Mam Masiki Channel; 'Olu Su'u,
the three inlets, a name for a number of
inlets.
•ii*ale-(ni) mu su'uUui *ui, the paths of
the sea. San Cristoval sugu.

■u'u 6. S.. V. i.. to move position; su*u weu,
su*u met, i'o su*u vteu, dAu su*u weu,
dudu. hd'isu'u.

■Utte'i V. tr., raro suue'i, to turn inside out
(of a bag).

•tt«lia U.. suukai raa, drought.

smiheHiii v. tr.. to destroy, to kill out. Jbro
5uuke*ini,

SnSihaii Li>Po Suuheu, a gorge above
Su'uholo.

SaSiholo a village on the east coast of Ulawa;
its landing-place is i Su*u maea.

tn'olel U., to bulge, to project.

•ouH (In), tnusuttH (Mu) prep., around, about.
ddu suu*i, to intreat, to importune, to
compel; i'o suu'i, to be present with;
maahusuu% to guard at night; lolasuu%
to importune; *ure suuH, to attend on,
to serve; saeku e ruerua*a suu*iomu, I
am in doubt concerning you. Wango
suusuui.

Sn'tt Moll a boat harbor at the northwest
comer of Ulawa.

Stt*tt Peine a harbor on the west coast of Little
Malaita; su*u peine, U.. a boat harbor
at Su'uholo.

•onraaH, snure, sunrei, iousoure (na) S.,
foundation, comer.

•u'isri dehortative; don't; used also in sup-
posititious cases, su'uri na, not so;
'oke su'uri lae, do not go; huni 'oke
su'uri 'unue ha'alae diana, had you not
mentioned it it were well; ta*e waio *ie
he su*uri, save for these bonds; ke su'uri
urine, God forbid.

8ii*nrodo the Mara Masiki Channel. </.
LaloiSu'u

luosoa (ktt) 1 . elbow, comer, angle; hdu suusuui
karo, comer stone; suusuu nime, elbow;
dni suusuu, v., a cubit. Mota susiu.

•ttuauu 2. heU suusuu ana, to do in succession,
continuously; ramo suusuu, to be strong
forever.

■ante 1. v. tr., to wind a fishing-line. 2. (nA,
ni) n.. a place on a fishing-rod for wind-
ing the Ikie.

Bswa U., V. L, to back, retire, to draw back.

tft 1. U., to speak; iSuri, iduritaka, of reported
speech, to speak thus.

tt 2. noun suffix; maa* mtUk; waa'i, waa*it§.

ta 3. adj.. prefix of condition; iakirukriu,
takisuhisu, taia 1. Mota to, Maori te.

taa 1. noun suffix; horo, korotaa; puU, puliiaa,

taa, taataa 2. U., daa S., to give, to take; to
receive, to do. tea kd*u, let me see.
wait a bit. Wango haa, NiuC te.

taa 2. S.. interrogative pron.; a shoctened form
of loAa; ^p^iat? why? wga inttt tea, what
things? korana nga too, what for? Mate
nga iaa, like I don't know what; nga tea.
what? nga taa ni *o ere urini, why did
you say this?

ta% ta*ata*a 3 S., n., numeral, one; te'a te'«,
a one-man canoe; ia'ata'a mwane, one
person; *eni$e oiat te'ote'a. how many
things? only one; te'ste'a ote *cio 'o'o,
one and only one; nga ta*aia*a imi moia,
only one person; e ta*ata*a mwane* one
and the same person; ia'aia'a ini, one
person at a time. hMuta'a'i, onoe.
Nine iaka, Bugotu sa, San Criatoval
te'a't. Polynesian teJU.

te*a 4. S.. contraction of taka, adj.. out. isi
ta*a, to come out; te te'a. to debouch;
ulu ta*a, to emerge; ere ia'anga, jdain
speech; kali te'a. to emeige; lou ia*a,
to come forth; suu ia*a, to appear above
the horizon; e hure'i ia'a ana hdu, to
gush forth from the rock; mawa ta'a, to be
exposed to the air (of a sore.) Lau tafa.

ta'a 5. adj.. suffix; rerepaia'a, osiosita'a.

ta'a 6. adj.. bad; used in commlaeratiiig.
tete'ote. mwae ia'a, poor fellow; mm
mwae ta'a, poor fellows; rako ta'a,
unpleasant, irksome; kei ta'a, poor
dear (of women); kei ta'a pUne, dear
lady; loo ta'a, to be immodest, to offend
against propriety; mwei ta'a aiaka, dear
k)rd. Lau tea, Mota taias, Wango te'a,
Malay jakat,

ta'a 7. U., adversative, but; commonly na ta'a;
probably ta'a 3.

ta'ahu U.. v. i., to pull up weeds in a garden.
Wango tefv.

taalenga face upward; eno taalenga, to lie on
one's back,
taalengaai v. tr.. to lay flat, to lay face
upward; taaiengasie nimemu, open your
hand out flat.
taalangsana*(kn) gerund. Samoa taiianga,
to lie on one's back.

taaln n.. shoal water, a coral patch; i Taalm, a
patch of shoal water off the eaat coast
of Ulawa. Kaliiaaim, a proper name;
tonohaana a Kalitaalu, his drinklng-
place at Lenga, Ulawa: he was one of
the legendary people of 'Olu Malau.

te'ana, ta'ata'aaa U.. pron., every, each; te'afia
nga 'inoni, each man; ta'ana ngaite,
every one. Florida teteaa.

ta'ana 1. adv., certainly. Indeed; foUowa the
verb, ineu ta'ana, yes, me: I am here

99

TASALAA

TA*ft

ta'fliM 1 (oontlttued).

indeed; ia'ans H*u*t, certainly; nduH
U» ta*ame, I am rarely going. 2. in
Ulawa used in mnditional affirmation,
as ka*al4$at S. fnimf ne*€ Joosia, ia'am
na'a 'unua, if I see him I shall tell it;
ho mrine ta'&ms no, S., even rapposing
it woe so.

Pea a female ghost who makes yams
fruitful; her name was given in Ripoo.
Ulawa. to a natural formation in flint.
This was placed in the yam gardens.

ta'aait taata'asi v. tr.. to throw away, to
remove, taa 1; asi 3. Wango taoH.

taataa 1. v. i., to defecate. Samoa iaid, to
have the bowels relaxed.

ta*ata'a 2. S., numeral, one, a. ia'aU'a m^i
lo*u'4, one veise; ta*Qta*a maai ftfm. one
meal; ta*ata*a mw€la matUe'i, only child;
ta'aia*a ola moumoMie'i, one thing only.

ta'ataha n.. an opening in the shore reef, a
chasm, iaha 1. ukui ta'aiaha, a break
in the reef, a canoe passage. Maori
krwka, chasm.

to'ataka ta'aiakai raU, takaiakai raie, U.. the
down of nestlings.

ta'atala n., a line, a row; ia'aialai mm a row
of coconut trees; uku ni ia*ataia, a row,
a line.

ta'atara 1. successive; mu wala ta'aiara, tradi-
tion; *unH ia*aiara, to relate in order.

ta'atara 2. ia'atara wdi, the dragon-fly (Libel-
lulasp.). iarasi.

ta'ataran mu wala ia'alarau, gossip, tarau,

taateH S., v. L, to be at a loss, to be ignorant,
to be unwise.
taat»*inge v. n.. fault, ignorance.
taatelngeHni v. tr., to deny, to repudiate.
taate1nge*inila-(kn) gerund. Florida iaU.

taatewe &. to be at fault.
taatewanga v. n., a fault.

ta*att S., adv., of place, demonstrative nt may
be added; onward, further, east, south.
apai loa ia'au, the heavens above; « odo
*oio to'otf, he went right on; po*o ta*aiii^
farther east; qii*u ta*au^ go east or south.

ta'a 1. U., numeral, one; Sa'a prefers <a*ii but
has k}*oia'€, ta*a ta'e, one-man canoe;
ia*e ku'a saeua e diena, there's a good-
hearted woman; to'oia'e otot io*oia*e M,
one here and there; e ta'e ro ola, only
two; nga ia'e, exclamation. Probably
metathetic upon 'eia.

ta'e 2. adv. of direction, up, inland; when used
with locative • contracts from ta*e i to
la'f . to'f Sa'a. up at Sa'a; ia'i lengi, up
above, in the sky; 'tare ta'i loUma Mnue,
from out of the hills. Mota #afe,
Motu da*, Maori aJu.

3. ▼. L, to rise up. to stand.

4. V. tr., to raise up. to'« 'aJkolb,
a ghost. M. A., p. 219.
stand.

ta'a 5. V. L. to embark; Mrsef]
'oi»e't. they embark
journey; ta^e iUngjima
ha'akoio, to be astride;!

ta'e
ta'a

ta'e 5 (continued).

man canoe; ta*€ kai, four-man canoe;
ia'e *olu, three-man canoe. Ta'a '(Kn*
Belt of Orion.
ta'eU tr., to embark, to get into a canoe.

ka*aia*di.
ta'eli]a-(tta, nl) gerund.

ta*e 6. S.. advenative. but. probably ta*€ 1.
ia*0 walo *ie he su*iari, save for these
bonds; ta*e peHnU, nevertheless. Araga
taJu,

ta'elaH 1. v. i., to set out. to arise, to start.
ta*9 2. ta*ela*i i da, beginning from.
2. to be excited; satku e ta*Mi, I am
excited.
ta'ataini tr., to cause to arise.

ta'ena, ta'eta'ena S., pron., eadi. every. faV 1.
ta*ena nga Hnoni, tvery man. Motu
taina, some.

ta*ero v. i.. to dribble (of spittle) ; wawe ko ia'ero
ana, he dribbled at the mouth.

ta'etate v. 1., to chatter; stUu walanga ta'etaU,
'tis naught but idle chatter.

ta'ewau wantonly, carelessly, any how. a
ta'ewau mola, e ta*$ mala wau, it's all
one, it makes no difference; ta*ewau mu
Hnoni, S.. the common people.

tahtf ta'ataha 1. to be open, to have a channel,
to emerge; taka maa, to open the door;
hire taka maa *oU> nge mdu la4, we left
as they were opening their doors (at
daylight); taha ana nga *inoni, to pay
a visit to a person; taha odo'i, to come
upon, to find; iaha *o*o, the tenor drum
in the para ni *o*o, the first notes are
struck on it; mwOri taha, to recover from
wounds; sae taha, happy; sae tahanga,
happiness; saeku e taha, my mind is
clear about it; 'tffiii ta'ataha, to pro-
nounce aloud; wdi e taha, the river
mouth is open, navigable,
tahani S., tr., to open, to be a pioneer; ana
€ tahanie maamu ne, in that he opened
your eyes; 'unu tahanie sa*mu, lay bare
your mind, (b) to emerge, to go
through; tahanie *aH, get through the
surf, (c) aha tahani, tola tahani, to
warn,
♦fh^^g* U.. tr., tahangia MUisi, to eat the
first fruits of the harvest; tahangia w&pu,
to be the first to dear a piece of thick
bush and thereby acquire a rifl^t over
the land: prov., to be a pioneer.
ha*aisita*anga*ini, ha'aisitahanga'ini,
San Cristoval tafa, Lau U^a, Tanna
tafa, outside; Maori tawha,

taha 2. interrogative pron., what, more com*
mon in Ulawa; nga taha, what? ingi^ia
taha *oio, U., that is it, just so; nga mdsi
taha, what thing? munia nga taha, what
for? *oH heU hinoU*a taha ine, hovr wtXL
have done it. Mota losa, Maori
M. L., p. 133.
adv., clearly, plainly; ere taha'ira'a,
[speak distinctly.
t, an opening in a reef, a way out.

TAHAHOA

lOO

taluuifa n.. a fathom; v. tr., to measure a
fathom, iahanga awa nusif U.. a mea»-
ure. just a fathom kmg; haa iahanga,
a sum of money, ten strings each a
fathom long, the sum equivalent to
40 dogs' teeth (suli kata).

tahmgiSni v. tr., to set wide open, ha'aisita-
kanga'ini, ka*aisUa*anga*ini.

taharara'a nuiwasidengi e taharara*af a storm
swept down.

tahavnvtsra through, from one side to the
other; used with poss. 3. Mint 3.

tahs 1. n., a platform; hd*u take, to make a
platform; iaht ni maiaohu, a platform
on which ceremonies are conducted in
connection with malaoku, a boy's catch-
ing his first bonito.

tahe 2. v. i.. to be abundant; hohola e take, the
garden produced abundantly.

tahs 3. to flow, to be in motion (of water) . *ahe.
luelue e tahe, the flood came. Poly-
nesian tahe, to flow.

tahe 4. tahe *upu*Mpu, to be halfway in a
Journey.

tahe U. 5. tahe tongo, to sip.

tahelaHiO, ta'etahelaHai v. tr., to lift up to
view, to exalt, to mount, to ascend.
tahala'i partic. up, upward; ngara tahela'i
ana, to call upon him with weeping.

tahera'i v. i., to thatch with layers of sago-
palm leaf (roAo).
taheralttge v. n., thatching.
tahera*ini tr.

tahari v. tr., to wear across the shoulder as a
bandolier, a Taheri 'Usu, a proper
name.

tlhi, U*itehi v. i., to flee; tdhi ke'u, be off. get
out of the way.
t&hinge V. n., flight; *o*o ni lehinge, to be in
flight; hire tola rorora ana tahinge, they
fled precipitately.
tXhisi tr., to escape from; tapo tAhisi, to
grab and miss. Lau taji,

tVhi 2. to rend; tahi sa'o, to cut sago leaves.

tahilrahlka U., adj., Ungled. raveled, hiku-

tMhilo'ini v. tr., to flee away and carry with one.

tahiroUro n., a large fish that swims round in
circles, hiro.

tahisnhiso, tatahisuhiio said of a canoe, to
run along on the top of a wave.

taho 1. to purchase a man, to buy a dependent.
2. to pay money to one who avenges a
death; he'i taho nana mwala e horo'ia
mwaena, will make payments to the
people who killed So-and-so, M. A.,
p. 243. hire tahoa nana mwala e horo,
they paid up to the people who had
killed; tahoa lalamoa, to pay for a man
killed by violence. </. dalo, 3. taho
ta*a, the ritual placing of a coconut in
a canoe containing a dead body, M. A.,
p. 136: iaha, there should be taho.

taho 4. taho ta*a, used with poss. 3. to arrive at.

laholaH v. i., to wave in the air as a sign of
triumph; tah6la*% mala, to wave the club.
tahoUtai tr.

tsha awa iahu, U., to slip, to oome loose (of
bands).

tahnH v. U.. to take to pieces. Fkirida tawuii,
to remove.

tlhiila S., n.. a mosquito.

tUmhi the black mussel employed in the manu-
facture of bonito hooks (le'O. W&i ni
Tehmlu, the lagoon at Ngorsngora.
Ulawa.

tttH 1. prefix of condition. tA'iere. 2. contiac-
tion of ta'e i, up at; noko lai td'i Sa'a^ I
am going up to Sa'a; idH knU, shore,
beach, dry land, dinge ta*i hakona, the
day after. 3. partidpiai ending: rApn,
rdfiMte*i. 4. verb suflSx used intransi-
tively: aite'i, md'nteH. Mot^ tag.

tlHars adj.. dizzy, faint; maakn e t&^iere, I am
giddy.

tal*6ii neap tide. Maori tai, taia.

tii«ihikQhikn S., tangled, raveled.

tMHni verbal sufifix. used transitively. rA^,
r&puUHni; wdi e mapipi 'ohe *oio td*ini€
holune mwakano, ^x^ther the water ha»
receded off the face of the earth.

tXMngeln S., ti'ingila U.. adv.. all together.
tl4ng^nte n.. used as adv.. all together.

tll4pido adj., reversed.

tilpnlosi V. tr., to reverse.

tM'ipolopnlo U.. adj.. to come short of.

tX'irara adj., to be earnest over, to use per-
suasion.
tftHrarangan.

tMitai 1. U.. V. tr., to dose the esres, e tdiieia-
maana.

ti4tsi 2. V. i.. to deny; used with poss. 3.

tiHtaii n.. flowering hibiscus of many varieties.

ti*itelihe-(na) n., a border, tm 1. td^UeU-
hana hdnue, boundary of land.

tX'iteUhita to be spUt, to have cracks in. Mit 1 .

tM'itssi S., n., flesh meat; mm U'iUsi ola, flesh.

taka, ta'atska 1. v., to come into flower; tak^
mala mdimepnsu, to flower like the
mAimepusu. n., takai dango, a flower;
ta'alakana, its flower. Wango toga, to
be in leaf.

taka 2. prefix of spontaneity, takaluhe, Mota
tava, Maori taka, takake; Malagasy tafa.

taka 3. taka *irori, proverb of confusion of
voices.

takalo, ta*atakalo S.. takatakalo U.. to be lost,
astray, to go astray. ka*alakalo. non
lae takalo, I am lost; liu takalo, to take
a wrong road.
takalonga v. n., an error,
takaloha'ini tr., to mislay. Maori i»gsro»
NiuS ngalo, lost.

takslohs to be loosened, to come loose.

takara 1. to come unraveled, malakara. 2.
to abound, to prosper. 3. maaku r
takara pulupulu, I saw stars,
tskirasi tr.. to unravel, to unwind, to-

unlace,
takarara to come undone.

takaramm in a bunch, together, hde takarum,
hold in a bunch; taka 2.

ttkaninime4ni tr.; hane takamrume'inire, to

lOI

TALO

takarnmmeliii (continued).

ahoot a mfmber at one shot. Mota
takar, to take between the fingers.

tM]dhe-(ktt) a relative, a member of the same
family; a tdkihekn, a kinsman of mine.

tako, tatako to bewaU. to lament. hd*iiako*i,
tahonga U., takolt S.. v. n., lamentation.
takoai tr.

tako'i-Citt) prep., toward (of persons and
things), of swearing by. ere ni ha'apu
tako'ie, swore by him.
tatakol V. tr.. to approach a person.
melu kUako'ie paro.

tMkUf ti'utekia v. i., to receive, to entertain;
used with poss. 3. tAku ana pUsi,
grasp a bow.
tftknU S., tXknsI U., tr.
tlkiihi]a-(kn) gerund.
UUnunelni U.. tr.. to dun.

tXkvme S.. n., a yam with fruit on the vine.

tikmnihi S.. v. tr., to crowd.

tala 1. n., path. road, way; tola ineu, my path;
tola fU liut path to travel; TcUa Odo, the
main ridge of Little Malaita; hdrii tala,
S., hdri ni tola* U., forks of the road;
t kerekerena tola, beside the path; maai
tola rue, street comer; nga mni tala,
paths; *uri odokaana tala, walk straight
along the path; walu tida ni TcHo, all
the villages of Tolo. Mota sola,
Florida hala, Maori ara,

tala 2. (ku) n., place, room. &su talai nge'ulaa,
work for food; *eli talana, dig his grave;
M'itaU talaku, make room for me; horo
i tala, to kill in revenge; horonga i talada,
revenge for them; holi talaku, buy my
footing; Wu talaku, my place; lio tala,
beware; na*o talana, lead the way for
him ; e to*o talaku, room for me. Florida
talana, put it.

taUf'^ta'alala 3. n.. a row, a string; talai heune,
a row of teeth; talai jmli, a string of
white cowries; kulaa talai keune, to
loosen the teeth.

tala 4. to miss, to fail, dAu tala, ku'utala.
pa*€wa ko *ala tala, the shark bites at
and misses (the last two days of the
moon) ; pola tola, U. . to fail. M ao. hara,
talahi tr., e hute talahie qongine, born out
of due time. Wango tara, Viti dhala.

tala 5. V. tr., to sweep; talaa nume, a besom.

talaa a littoral tree <rf hard wood.

tala'aa v. i., to begin; used with genitive i, ni.

e tala*ai 'aela, e tala*aeni 'aela, it is

beginning to spoil; tala*ae ni lae, begin

to go.

tala*aelia-(na) U., n., the beginning of,

because of.
tala'ae (na) S., beginning from.

tala'aehota S.. v. i., to begin, 'aehota.

talaiUiii'e v. tr., to guard, to protect, to catch
a balL dhu.

tala'aala'a v. i., to frolic, to play.

talahi U., v. tr., to miss, kula talahi, U., to fail
to find a person at home; lio talaki, U.,
to look for in vain; ma*aru talaki, to go
like winking.

talahnli the place of; with* poss. 3. tala 2.
t talakuli emu, in your right place; mu
Wu talakuliana, his wonted place.

talaH V. tr.. to entice. ka*atala'i. tala*i keri,
to catch octopus.

tala'iliii continuously; kuni pah talaHlisi
kuni*o, to worship Thee continuously.

talamal v. i., to prepare for a feast, to collect
materials. talama*i wala, U., to act as
mediator,
talama'inge v. n.
talamalni tr.

talani kataa'i sae talani, to be careful to. tala 2.

talan 1. U., to be alight (of fire), to blaze, to
spread (of ulcer), rara talau, twenty-
first and twenty-second dajrs of the
moon. Florida talau, continually.

talau, tatalan 2. v. i.. to walk along a log.
tatalauke. San Cristoval tatarau.

tale (Mn) 1. U., prep., to, toward (of persons
and things); lae talea, go to him; tale i
ola, on the side of what you may call it.
Malo tele,

tale 2. V. i., to lack; melu tale ola, we lack
things,
talenga S., talengaha U. (double noun
ending), v. n.. a shortage, famine.

tale 3. to miss, to look in vain for. k&'itale.
lio talea, S.. to fail to see.

tale'i mere, inferior; mu tale*i ola, inferior
things, merely, wantonly; nou tale'i
lae mola, I just went for no reason; taU*i
teu, to act wantonly; tale'i teunge, wan-
ton mischief; taU*i *o*i*o*i, to trouble
oneself; e taU*i meimeile*ini, he was in
destitution; tale*i inu mola* a, just drink
without price.

tMli 1. V. i., to be bounded by, to end, to begin.
ta'itelike, lai teli, up to, until. San
Cristoval tari, to reach; Florida taligu,
back, again; NiuS tali, until, since.

tMli 2. lama tHi, to free a tree of creepers; tdli
wale, to strip the skin of cane (wale),

tXlihe (ku) n., ere tdlike, to defend oneself in
speech, to deny, ere (Jlado) tdUkeku, make
my defence; ne*isae tdlike, to reach in
thought.

tMlihite cf, td'itelikite.

tMlihuu *ano tdlikuu, to sink out of sight, to
go down for good.

tXlili V. tr., to transgress, to work wickedness.
kH'itelili,
tililinge v. n. Wango tariri.

tallmaa v. i., to start, to come to an end;
talimaa ana maholo *ie, S., from now on;
talimaa 'oto nihou, U.. up till now.

tftlisi U., V. i., to be awake, to wake up.
ka'aliUisi,

talo 1. a shield made of wood.

talo 2. a tree whose bark is used for cerements.

talo 3. V. tr., to tithe; talo dku, to amass;
e taloa kuekuana dangona mwakana, he
gives tithes of the trees of the field; talo
lilisi, to offer a certain portion as a
sacrifice.

talo 4. U., talo wau i *esi, to follow the coats
by

TALO

I02

talo 5. kUo muuu, to photognph.
talo 6. U., V. i.. to spread (of news). &• taro.
tilolui (DA), tataloha (aa) v. n.. news.
tiloluiHiii tr., to •pread newa, to prodalm.
tidohal ▼. i. and partic. Wango faro.

Samoa iaia.
talo 7. kilo H*isi, at irregnlar intervals,
talo 8. ialo aku, a fighting company, a war

band. t4ilo 1.
tsloU V. tr.« to guard against a blow, to ward

off. to shield,
tslolli U.. tstoHri S.. a paddle-shaped dub

with a long handle, used also as a shield.

Guppy, "Solomon Islands*' p. 74.
tflubi 1. to draw out water, to draw at a well.

</. ddnu, 2. U.. Su'u i Teluki'a, the

boat harbor at Mwado'a, Ulawa.
tamwa prefix of condition. Mota lofiia.
tamwaodo ▼. L, to be clear, straightforward.
tf**"^< ka'a tanaM kit v. tr., to decoy a ghost or

animal by food,
tana S., adv., of place; iane nUU, here; tans won*

there; iane ia'i solo, up in the sky.
tanga (kv) n.. the crotch of the legs. maUmg^.

Mota sanga, Sulu sanga, branch; Viti

sanga.
tangaa n.. a span; v., to span with the hand.

ViU dkamga.
tangahidu numeral, ten: used only in counting;

ioMgahulu ana, tenth. Mota sangamU,

Florida hangavulu, Maori ft^aAara,

NiuC kongofulu.
tangalao 1. numeral, one hundred: used with

genitive f, ni. iangalai mwane, an

hundred men. San Cristoval iangarau.
tangalan 2. niu tangalau, a heavily laden coco-
nut. 'Akd i Niu TangaloM, a tide-rip

between Ulawa and Sa'a.
♦•*g***«f n., a forked stick, tango.
taagl 1. a basket made of split cane to bold

canarium nuts for drjHng in the smoke

ingUli maa).
tangi 2. a hand of bananas, used with genitive

si, tangisi hudi, Mota tingiu,
tftngl 3. to cleave, to rive, to split a log in two.
tango S., used with genitive at; tangoni mwda,

all the children.
tao V. i., to be upset (of the stomach); 'iskn

€ too, I am sick at the stomach,
taoha n., men's club-house on the beach used

for stowing canoes. Wrongly spelt oka

in M. A., p. 174. hvJU € *a*a haakia

taoAs, the creeper had climbed all over

the club-house; niu ni taoha, a palm

(Nipa fruticans). Wango oha,
taotaoro n.. a tree from San Cristoval planted

in the villages for shade.
tapa, ta'atapa 1. v. i., to cut with a blow, to

reap; tapa tekela'ini, to cut off and

destroy; nahi ta*alapa horn, a sickle,
tapali tr., tapali kui, to cut off the stems

of taro. San Cristoval taba, Maori

taPa, tapaki.
tapa ta*atapa 2. tapa ki'Votisi, to exdiange

words, to converse.
tapa 3. prefix of condition. tapa'oU, tapamtu.

MoU tata, Lau taba.

tapaa a tree of soft wood used for making food
bowls, the milk tree of North Qoeois*
land.

tapaika tobacco (Bn^ish); afia tapaika, to

tapala*a U.. adj., abounding, ka'aiapaia'a.

Wango tabarasi,
tapaUn v. L, to pass by. to pass across, to cross,
tapa'oll V. L, to exchange, to ransom.

ti^a^alita (km) v. n., tapa'oUtekm^ in

exchange for me.
ti9a«olial tr.
tapa'oliaikKkn) gerund,
tapanan v. L, to pierce, to go light throagli;

used with poss. 3.
tip! U.. V. tr., to chop, to cut down. 'aiUpL

San CristovalloM.
tapo V. i., to grab, to catch hold, to lay hands
on; tapo mae, to seise weapons; tapo
tMkisi, to grab and miss.
topoUtr.

tapolila^(ktt) gerund,
taqaoal S., to happen to, to do harm to.
taqarom U., bronae-wing dove, 'a^a 1.
tara 1. v. i., to drift at sea. to be set by currents.

tara 2. adj., prefix, tararuru.

tara 3. v. L, to skim, to pass over the suxfaoeo

ta'atara wit, to sldm thewater, drsgon-fly.
tara'a adj., nnnu tara'a ku nilnmt , bum up the

village.
tara'aal continuously, straight on; lae tarm'a$it

to go straight on.
tarakoni v. tr., to collect, to gather together,
tarapla to be blistered (of hands or feet),
tararam v. L, to be gathered together, to be

associated with, to be united with; ksU

taramru, take bold all together; saada

ka*a tararuru P€*i4, their hearta were

not whole with him. Wango lamra.
tarad v. tr., to skim along the aorfaoe of;

tarasie *asi ana kot€, feather the oar.
tsraal oko a bird, cuckoo,
taraaimwa'a adj., skinned, broken (of sUn).
taran, tataraa v. i., to go straight on, to ooo-

tinue; continuously. Uu taram, to go

strsight ahead. Florida talam,
taravhaiai U., v. tr.. to continue with, to

persevere in. taiau, 2. to lig^t a lamp.
taranraH partic, continuously, continually;

to continue on, to go strsight on. • i)
taiauraiai U., v. tr., used as a preposition;

right on through, throughout.
tIrU tftHtari 1. v. tr., to gain, to obtain. fM

olanga, U., tdri'e oianga, S., riches,
tiri 2. V. i., to stidc fast In a tree or a noose.

Mota tali, a rope; Maori tori, a noose,
tiri 3. U.. V. tr.. to launch a canoe; moro tdHa

Paro *iola i *4si, you two launch the

canoe into the sea.
tiri 4. titri sa'o, to split the sides off sago-palm

leaves to make bird anows (fofs).
tariaini wala U.. to commit fomfeatioo.

tsriaini walaaga v. n.
tariho V. tr., to watch for turtles coming np

to lay. tarikoa konm,
tariU U.. to stride.

I03

TAUTO'O

taro, tataro S., talo U.. to spread (of news), to

proclaim.
taroha, tataroha (na) v. n., newt; iarohana

e taro poi, the news has reached here,
tatarohal'e adj.. used as n., news,
tarohi tr.. to come to one's ears,
taroha'ini tr.. to proclaim.
tarohainila-(lni) gerund.
taro*lri S. </. UiIo*ili, U.
taroisuU U., to add to.
tttai 1. V. L, to slip, to slide, to glance off.
tial 2. V. i., to strip off the outer skin; niu tesi,

a thin-skinned variety of coconut,
tata 1. adjectival prefix of condition, foto-

qeluqelu, Wango ia, Florida ia, Viti to,
tata 2. V. i., to scatter. dhuUUa, iaiaa'ini,
tataa S., to fade away, to wither.
tataalni v. tr., to scatter, to sow broadcast, to

shake out, to unfurl; tataa'i *asi, to

shake off; ere taiaaHni, to curse. Wango

adaraini.
Uta'ala adj., bad. ta'a 6, la 4. ka*ata$a'ala,

raramanga ana Vcnga tata*aia, rebuke

because of lasdviousness; si*okaakn e

taia'ala, I am in evil plight,
tata'alanga n.,' evil; mwaanU mu loto-

'alanga, from evil.
tata'alaha n., used with poea. 3. toto-

'alahaana mu i*e, the bad fish, lit, its

badneas the fish,
tata'alaai with ddu, hele, to do harm to;

horo taia'alasi, to kill without mercy.
tatahana S., adv., in a little while, almost;

iaiakana *oio muini ke'i helesU, some

almost did it.
tatahiohio to stagger about,
tatahlmhini headlong.

tataipalpa v. i., to wallow, to roU about in a fit.
tatakoian to run along atop a wave (of a canoe) .
tattitav S., lio taiaiteu, to appear beautiful,
tataka S.. to be effeminate; hele tataku, to be a

novice,
tatalav 1. as kUau 2. 2. U., in succesaion; kde

iataiau, to do in succession; 'unu

iatalau ana, to rehearse in order.
tatahoradi U.. adj., falling, of a meteor, lata 1 .
tatalanhe v. n., a means of crossing over, a

bridge, a log over a stream.
tatala U., v. tr., to go through or cany (of the

sound of a conch); walana 'dhnri e

taialea walu tala i T<Ao, the sound of the

conch went through all the vUlagea in

Tolo.
Tatamwana a Tatamwane, a proper name, lit.,

scatter men.
tataaga n., used as v. i., to be scattered, dia-

peraed.
talangaai tr., to be scattered over; lakh

ngasie mu oie, scattered over the low-

tataagaini tr., to acatter, to disperse.

ha'aiatanga'ini,
talangaH partic hd'Uaianga'i.
tatangalongalii U., to be excited,
talaqalttqahi headlong, head over

ha'aiaiaqdu.
tatara S., *unu taiara, wala UOara, tradition.

tatara'a adi.. straight, tara'a.

tataraaraa fioronga tataraaraa, indiscriminate
slaughter.

tatarao 'liiiii taiarau, gossip.

tatariil U., the monitor lisard (Vaxanns
indicus).

tataro v. 1., to stumble, ha'alataro. *aeku
e tataro ana, my foot stumbled thezeon.

tatata'ata'a v. i., to bump, to collide.

tatau U.. V. i., to hurry, to hasten; kira'elu 'asi
taieu weu, they then scurried away.

tatawafo'a S., adj., for naught, in vain,
unprofitably.

talawisi, tatawialwial v. i., to run along on the
top of a wave, to speed along.

tin U., dla S. 1. V. L, to do, to act, to make, to
be about to do. to endeavor, e tllu ni
lae, he made to go; tHu muni, to en-
deavor; tdu ha*aro'it to find; tdu *ei, to
break fiivw(M>d; tAu 'ae, to hurry; tdu
lakdake, to give oneself airs; tdu raraki,
to urge, to incite; tAu rarahinga, impoi^
tunity; tale*i ten, S., to act wantonly;
taU*i teunge, mischief; no'iteu, to delay;
'oniieu, to delay; kd*iteu, to hasten.

tin 2. V. i., 'ape e tdu, the net has fish enclosed
in it.

tin 3. tdu ta'a, to issue, to arrive at; used with
poas. 3. e tdu ta'a ana, it issued in;
raa tdu ta*a mala sato, shine out like the
sun; tdu taka, M. A., p. 136. *au 4.

tan 4. ha*aiau, v. i., to be far off, distant.

tlnhe S., n., a feast

tltdalni V. tr., to get ready things for a journey,
to make preparations.
ttnlaH V. i.
tftvlelnge v. n., preparation.

tiomlH, tftomel U., conjunction, used in sup-
posititious cases; if, supposing that.
a$ui kira 'a tdume*i lae, supposing that
they go.

tinmanga n., a pudding made of pounded taro
and coconut milk (oni) cut up into little
squares; the taro is first roasted on the
coals, then pounded, then rolled flat
and the coconut milk added, the squarea
are then rolled in leaves and roasted;
tdumanga sususu, taro pudding not cut
into blocks but left whole.

ttmigaini, tintanogaHni v. tr., to persecute.
tivnga'inila-(kv) gerund.

tivriy tlttiitaha» tKvrini U. 1. v. L, to speak thus,
to do thus; nsed of reported speech.
nge na*asi tduri, then said I.

tXuri, tintanri 2. v. tr., to sew, to stitch; tduri
to'oni, to sew clothes; tduri to'oninge,
V. n. tdurilana, gerund,
tltttamita v. n., a seam, a sewing; maai
teuteurite, a seam.

tfnttpanga n., dander.

tintan S., adv., carelessly, wantonly, unguard-
edly, blasphemously. Wango tautau,

Tanto'o U., a Poro Tauio'o, a legendary person
belonging to Su'uholo and killed at San
Cristoval in a raid. His head is said to
have arrived back at Su'uho'o by
magic isdru'a) and to have been found

TAUTO'O

104

Tanto'o (continued).

on the beach. A representation of him
cut in coral formed one of the sacred
things at Su'uholo.

tawa an opening in the shore reef, used in the
names of landing-places. madUawa,
matawa. Tawaodo, Tawaideu. Tawa
ni Mae, Tawa ni 'Ehi'e; names of har-
bors. Mao. awa, channel.

Tawaina an inlet in 'Olu Su*u, west of Cape

Tawana a small pass just south of Roasi Bay,
LitUe Malaita.

tawari V. i.. to strike out with the hands in
swimming.

TawaMpna U.. a landing-place at 'Olu Malau.

tawaa n.. a shrine, a sanctuary. San Cristoval
taiwao.

ta S., to speak, to say, to do; used of reported
speech, idnri. $ Uuri, he said; e Uuri
taa^ what did he say. nge nesi ieuri, then
said I; nehe teurine to'aiM, I shall cer-
tainly do thus.

tea 1. V. L, to make speeches, to cry out in a
loud voice, to declaim. Lau Ua, to
speak. 2. to bark, of a dog.
teangi tr., to bark at. to bay.

taanga'l U., v. i.. to offer prayers to a ghost.
taanga'lnga v. n., prayer, worship,
taanga'itti tr.

tee, taataa 1. v. 1., to tick, to tap, to smite, to
hammer, to throb,
teali tr., Udi pelo, to ring the beU.

te*e, ta*eta*a 2. adv., for good, completely;
U*eU*e huu, for good, finally, forever,
abiding; maiifo U'eU*€, finished for good
and all.
te'ala'i partic. manio U'ela'i, quite finished.
Lau tee fuu.

ta'a 3. poo ie'e, hire ka*a poo We ada, they did
not trouble about them; su'asu'ate'e,
to be anxious about. Lau teie, manaia
ieiea, to be anxious.

te'e 4. hd*Ue'e, with whole skin, unpeeled.
U'eU'e 2.

te'elaH v. i., to set; melu te'elaH *ae, our feet
stand; mala nga poo ko ie*ela*i ana, even
if a beast come into contact with it.
ta'alalni tr., ko susue*inie nimana ie*ela*iHie
ngidune, stretched out his hand and
touched his lips.

teetaa 1. a sacred indosure planted with dili
at the door of the dwelling-house or
toohi or an inclosure made round the
central pillar into which scraps of food
or fruit skins may be thrown without
fear of their being used for purposes of
witchcraft.

te'ete'e (ku) 2. n., skin, bark, husk, rind.
hd*ite*e. te'eie'ena sapeku, skin of my
body. 2. n., a marine shell. Santa
Cruz be.

tahe n., a bird, the chicken-hawk. Scm Cris-
toval Uhe,

tai S. 1. n., the place where; with locative »,
Uei. U.. hei. itei ngeena, what place
is that? 'o *ure Uei, where are you from.

tei 1 (continued).

whence come you? *oko lai tei, whither

are you going? kai tei, down wliere?

mwaia *wrei tei ni *i€, from whence axe

these people. Mota vea, Maori kea.
teH 2. to draw water; te*i wet, to draw water;

te*i weinge, a drawing of water; te'i€

rata, to fill the bamboo water-carrier;

nou te*i€ i *Ei*ei, I drew water fnmi the

spring 'Ei'ei. Mota taw.
taH 3. n., the booito hook, made of tihulu or

hapm or roa or *ime, used with a rod in

the bow of the canoe.
taflaHai v. tr., to wag, to move from side to side.

e teile'inie qd'une, he wags his head,
talagalni v. tr., to proffer, to call attention

to, to point out*
teitai mother, aunt; used in the vocative; used

in affectionate address by a parent to

female child. </. mama*a. a teitei,

mother, when speaking of a particular

person; teitei ineu, my dear mother.

MoU arse, Efat6 tete, Alite teteiia, Lau

u.
take V. i., to fall, to drop to the ground.

ha*ateke, ngdu teketeke, to drop crumbe

of food when eating, to eat like a

cockatoo,
tekala'ini tr., used with preceding verb, aa

ddu, kite, tala, etc.; to knock, to sweep

and lose; km'e tekMitd, to uproot and

destroy; tapa tekda'ini, to cut off and

destroy.
tekalaH partic, fallen and loet. misplaced

and lost. Florida toga, Wango teg^aini.
takumhi S.. v. tr., to doae in on a person,
temwari U., kele temweri, to touch,
tangotango v. i., to droop, to fall to one side,

to hang looae. ka'aiengotemgo.
tec V. i.. to be humble, lowly, helpless; used

with poss. 3. muini e teo ado, the

humble; i*o ni teo, to be humble in

demeanor,
teqa n., a bamboo, kdi teqe,
tare 1. v. i., to peck; tere ga'iut, to peck and

break,
tare 2. to flap; tere *apa*apa, to flap the wings.

tarahi tctareU, tr., to fan. tetere.
tarahaMni ^. mwakaterekaHni, to flout, to put

to scorn,
tare V. i., to hang down, to depend; lo*oiw e tero

i *ano, robes hanging down to the

ground; tero ngidu, to pout the lip.
tarolin excessive, beyond what is fitting; qd'u

teroliu, the second finger,
tern cf. suliteru, needle,
tete 1. V. tr.. to pull out the contents of a bag,

to rifle; tete *asi, to empty out contents.

Florida tete, Mota sese.
tete 2. to give money, to make a subscription.
teta 3. to flutter; teU *apa*apa.
tete 4. to be spilled; kena e tete *nru*nru, the

lime is spilled. Fagani tete, loose,
tete 5. V. tr.. to lead by the hand,
tata 6. a stone fence; so*o tete, to build a stone

fence; kumwesie tete, to take down a

stone wall.

los

TOU

tete 7. S., pili tete, to oppress, to tread down.
t«tebi-(ko) gerund., with ku, mu, na, etc..
pili Utelara, or pili teUlada, oppress
them.

Tetele the ridge at the head of the river
Wa'o'a'a.

t«talaaga U., a tabu.

t«tere n., a fan.

tetawa'a S., adj., very long, very tall. tewa.

ten n., the half shell of a coconut, cf. sdukai.

taiui, taurine, teuritaa. </. le, nge nesi teuri, then
said I ; *oio nge a Dora esi teuri» then Dora
said; 'olo fM>K jt <mr», then said I.

tewa to be long, tall; okolu tewa, twelfth day
of the moon,
tawanga v. n., length, height. Wango tewa.
tawatewa U., very tall, very long.

toha to rejoice.

tahatnl tr.. to give oneself airs, to be proud,

to speak weU of. ha*aiohai*ni.
tohaUH partic., rejoicing in spirit.
toluUa*iiiga v. n.. rejoicing; Vo ni tohala*inge,
to be rejoicing; tolaha ni tohala*inge,
exultation.

toha, bKHIobe tp dispute. Wango tohe, to
deny, to reject.

toho, totoho S., tohotoho U.. 1 . to measure with a
rod, to measure.
tohola-(lni) gerund.

totohota S., tohotohota U.. v. n., a measure;
e rApuie'inie toiohota, he laid the measure
along. Mota Ioim>.

toho 2. V. i., to quarrel, to scold.

tohu, to'atohu S., tohtttohii U. 1. v. tr., to chop
down, to fell; toku hiteli, to cleave
asunder, to rive.
toliii]a-(lni) gerund., ro maai tohulana, two

choppings.
tohole'ini tr.. to chop down, to fell.

tohu 2. V. tr.. to build a house; noho to'uiohu
nume, I am housebuilding; noho tohue
nga nume, I am building a house.
to]iiila-(ku) gerund.

tohtt (ku) S. 3. used to express initiative in
action, of one's own accord. ha*atohu.
tokuku, of my own accord; e i*o tohune,
he lived free, under no restrictions, his
own master; *ure tohune, to desire.

tohnlalni 1. v. tr.. to chop down, to fell. 2.
v. tr., to point at, to accuse.

tof V. tr., to suspend, to hang up; likisi to'i, a
mouse.
toHnga V. n., something hung up. San
Cristoval tofU.

told U., V. tr., to hold fast, to grasp tightly.

tola, tot(^ 1. V. i.. to carry, ka'aiola, tola
ki*e, to be heavy laden; tola siwe, to
kill and earn the blood-money; tola
mHurii with poss. 3, to carry captive; tola
hd'ilekut to carry in one piece; suli tolai
lue, shoulder-blade; ka tola (Uiho'i ana,
to recover. 2. tola keni, to marry; tola
keninge, marriage; tola rue, tola *olu,
to have two. three, wives. 3. to be in
the doing, in the making, being carried
out. 4. to obey, to give attention to;
used with poss. 3. tolai suli, to obey;

tola (continued).

tdai fuH wala, to obey orders; toiola i *ae,
to follow a master; tola koni, to receive;
tolai sulie manatana, according to his
nature. 5. to affect adversely; nunu e
tola, there was a famine; hVolonga e tola,
there was a famine; e tola *aela aku, it
was bad for me. 6. to set (of a current) ;
*ah9 kosi tola, there is a strong current.

7. to act; tola mala pu*o, to behave like
a heathen; tola ku*o, to lay a snare; tola
lilisi, to walk about; tola takani, to
proclaim; tola ahonga, with poss. 3, to
tempt; toiola *oki, to search for; tola
suu*i, to importune; kire tola rorora
ana tahinge, they fled away precipitately.

8. tola *idtalo, to exorcise spirits; tola
ka'area, U., to send out an odor on all
sides; e tola liuliu, it has become general.

9. to curdle (of coconut milk ofif).
tolmgi v. n., a burden, a carrying; tolanga

e poponga, a load hard to carry.
tolala-(kii) gerund., carrying. Wango to>ra.

tolaal V. tr.. to entreat, to importune, to vex.
tola,

tolaha (ka) v. n., custom, way, manner,
example, kind, disposition; tolaha ni
tokala'inge, exultation.

tolaka a banana with the fruit bunch growing
erect, a plantain; hudi tolaka, a plan-
tain.

tdlana S., tolani U.. tdlanaH, tolangani U.,
adv., immediately, forthwith; precedes
verb. Wango tora.

tolOi toiola v. tr.. to fetch, to carry, to bring,
with directives mdi and wan; to affect,
to be the matter with; hire mwa*e tolea,
they consented to carry it; hi* donga e
tolea hdnue, famine was over the land;
tole soinge, to raise a cry; tole mango, to
hold the breath. San Cristoval tore.

toll, to4toli S., totoU U. 1. V. i.. to sink, to go
to the bottom, h&'itoli. 2. to fish
with lines in deep sea; hinou ni toli, a
hook for deep-sea fishing; i*e ni toli,
deep-water fish; lai toli, to be going to
fish out at sea. 3. to shed leaves;
*aPalolo e toli, the bansran has shed its
leaves; toli sesu, to cast unripe fruit.
4. expresses downward motion; siho
toli; lio toli mei, look down here; ooho
ioli, to fall headlong; qlL*u toli, to be
going north or west. 5. to lay a snare;
toli hune, to set a snare; toli loosi, toli
loosinge, a charm set in the path; toli
sehu, a death charm prepared with lime
and set in the path; toli uraa*inge, to
offer sacrifice; toli pari, used with poss.
3, to leave, to turn the back on; toli
*iola, with ana or t, to steer for. to lay
a canoe on a course; toli reoreo, to inlay
with nautilus shell. 6. of enduring
state; i'o toli, to be quiescent; toli
susuU*i, to endure; toli maai, to allow;
ddu toli kuni, ddu toli mwaani, to be
subject to, to submit to; toli to*o,
to be patient; toli rako, patient; toli

TOU

io6

toll (continued).

r^koHga, patience; toU rokm, to cease
•peaking; mango tali, to faint; toU eretrt,
to cease speaking; momUMt to cease.
7. €r€ ioli, to revile. 8. to refnin from
certain foods in monming; toU oia, toU
nM. toli ffffaloa. 9. Uie bass drum in
para ni Wo, 10. lolt V^. to fast, to
observe a tabu; kdnua # ioU 'epm
isnlird'elu, the village was fasting on
their aocomit.

toUaa V. i.. to leave off, to cease, to desist.

tsll*ail V. tr.. to 3ridd. to renounce, to remit,
to grant. talVasilana, gerund.

toHmas S.. a mark. sign, proof.

toUnga (ku) a porticm. a share (of food at a
feast); qlk*u ni tolingfi, the chief portion
of food.

tollDgl 1. V. tr.. to assign a portion of food to
a person at a feast. 2. to permit, to
grant. 3. hde toUngi, to hold in sub-
jection. 4. to inlay with shelL

tolo (na) 1. a hill; the hill country, mu toloi
kenms, the hill folk; *«re ta*i tolona kdmms,
from out of the hills; * Toiona Hdnue,
a district of Little Malaita; mu TaUma
HAnue, the people of that district.

2. i Tola, in stiangers' country. Big
Malaita; mu Toio, people of Su'u Rodo
or of Big Malaita; ro'e ni Tola, a spear
covered with plaiting of cokxed grass.

3. to be a bushman. to be ignorant,
uncouth, mm toio, mm toiona k&nue.

4. the languages of Big Malaita, # mala
Toio, Wango kwo, hill; Maori loro-
puki, mound; Viti Jboro, heap of sand;
Mailu oro, hill; New Guinea loio. Ma,
kola; Florida toio, to rise up. cf, toioio,

tolo 5. 'u*u toio, a piece of bread.

Tolod a district of Little MalaiU above Mara

Masiki Channel,
tomwa, tomwatomwa y. I, to walk on tiptoe,

to limp.
tomwaso a shrub with large leaves which grows

in clearing; huui tomwaso, a thicket of

the shrub.
tono, totono U.. v. i., to drink, to drown.

ha'aionoM, honohono. tono qaa^'a, the

water tastes brackish; tonohaana a

Kaliiaalu, Kalitaalu's drinking-place at

Lenga. Ulawa.
tononga v. n.

tonohl tr., to drink anything.
tonola-(kii) gerund,
toago 1. v. i., to begin to rise, to turn (of tide);

e tongp *oto, the tide has turned; 'est hd€

tongo, the tide is rising a little. 2. tatu

tongo, U., to sip.
tongoUli V. i.. to straggle, to be long drawn out.

one after another, irregular. Mota Hi,

astny. fall away from.
too, tootoo 1. to be shallow (of the sea); mu

ie'u 4 tootoo, shallows, shoals.
to'o, to*oto'o 2. to hit, to encounter, to succeed,

to have, to be rich, to heal up. ha'ato'o,

ddu to'o, with posB. 3, to hit; sae to'o,

with poss. 3, to desire, to wish to have;

ta'o 2 (continued).

to*o dedena, its tip, the top; to'dtaa, mm
lo'oAaa, money; to*o hu'e, to have a
wife; to'o hu'anga* marriage (of a man);
# lM*a to'o kaona, bottornkss; to'o
mango, to have breath; to'o oia, to'o
olanga, to have possessions, prosperity;
to'o poro, to have a husband; to'o
forongOt marriage (of a woman); to'o
qd'u, to carry on the head; to'o sap€, to
have the shape, the appearance of;
€ to'o talaku, room for me; hire to'oana
hem mmal m ko koHe, they own the giil
vrtio is being bou^t. 3. to be, to be
fixed, to set (of colors in djreing); i'o
to'o, to be fixed; i'o komiio'o, to remain,
to rest assured; e to'o mou^ e to'o mou'
tana, to cease, to be broken off; toU
to'o, to be patient; cr» to'o, to be correct
in statement; *o ere to'o, verily; to'o
idengana, not aroused from sleep; Ho
to'o, to find; Ho sae to'o, to favor; e to'o
i saena, it came into his mind; fomgiku
e to'o mone 'oto, my time has come;
to'o m&'umtuiama, terrifying; to'o
nunu'e, spotted, speckled; to'o puio"
pnio, specked. 4. to be related to;
mdu to'o ada, they are our relations.
5. to'o kiU, with poss. 2, to'o kiU nada^
they alooe apart from others. San
Cristoval too*
to'obi tr.. to desire, to be set upon (of the
mind); saelm e to'oide, my heart is set
upon it.

to*o 6. prefixed to numerals, at a time; to'o
ta'e ini, one at a time, singly; to'o ta'e
oia, objects singly; to'o ro oia, objects
by twos; to'o ro nime, with just one's
two hands, unarmed; to'o ta'e staJbolo,
scnnetimes; to'o 'eniie 'oto, haw many
altogether? Mota sogo, Samoa to'a.

to<o 7. 1.000 (of fish teeth), lo'osat i'e. Lau
too, 1.000.

to'o 8. to desire, sareio'o.

toHiaH 1. V. L, to be desirous; sas to'oa'i oia,
avarice.
to'oa*ila-(kv) gerund., sae to'oa'Uana,
coveting.

to'oaH 2. hd'u to'oa'i ke'iiiu, wandering stars,
planets.

to'ohaa money, whether shell or teeth of dogs
or porpoises, mu to'ohaa, 'oiisi to'oliaa,
to exchange money for goods, to buy.

to'ohaH to'oha'i qe'u ana, to be entangled in,
to be mixed up in.

toohe'o small hooks oif shell (roa) used without
bait for catching sardines (asaunge);
the fishing is conducted from a stage
built out hi the water (Jbsa); ItotolooAs'o,
to cut the hooks.

toohi men's dub-house in the village; the
unmarried men sleep and eat there,
strangers are entertained in it and the
married men foregather there. ^.
^ora'tto.

lo<ohiHdiiSda'a adj.. spotted, variolated in
color.

I07

TOTOHGA

o'ohvii 1. V. !.• to be true, real; mu da *oto
to*6huu, real true things; < to*ohuu *oto.
It is a fact. 2. S.« exclamation, truly.
to'olittaiice (ka) S., n., being true; U>*ohuU'
ngitmu, your very self; to'ohuungana
me'i oia, the real thing.
to'ohnvngeH S. 1. adv., cx p rcee ee certainty,
precedes the verb, nou io'okuumge'i
lae, I surely went; mm ka*a to'ohuunge'i
leesi0t I surely did not see it. 2. adj.,
real, to'ohuunge'i Umi, full moon;
to*okuunge*i oku, third day after full
moon; to'ohuung^'i sckma, his real name.

to'ola-(kii), to*oto*oU-(kii) n., property;
to*olamu no*one ada, thine they are;
io*olana 'oio, his property; meaka'du
to'ola ka*du, our tongues are our own;
noko koni'o ana to'cUdku, I endow thee
with my property; hunt ngoU$ lo'olO'
'donatio destroy his property after death.

to^oUtt U., v. i., to exceed, exceedingly.

to'olivu U., with posB. 3, to hit, to come into
contact with, lu^

to'omal V. i., to gase at, to stare.
to*omaHla-(kii) gerund.

to'oiii 1. to clothe, to put on, to wear; to'ani
haaki safie, to dothe the body; to'oui
ana mu to*oni, to clothe with dothes.
2. to pack, to stow. 3. n., clothes,
vestiture. Hddi to*<mi, to wash dothes
by pounding; mu leku ni to'oui, worn-
out dothes, rags; to'oui pouo maa,
patched dothes; to'oui 'o*omae, mourn-
ing dothes; roro to'oui, a dothes bdt;
tduri to'oui, to sew dothes. tAuri
to'ouiuge, V. n. Mota sogou, Fagani
togoui, Florida kogpui,

toHud 4. V. L. to plant taro, to'oui kui.

to*oaimii'e adj., spotted, speckled.

toonga U., n., mark, seal, tabu mark.

to'ongaH to'ouga'i omo, to draw an arrow on a
bow.

to'ongaini v. tr., to dip, to insert.

to'oagl V. tr.. to dip, to dye.

to'cqlSi with poss. 3, to carry on the head.

to'oni-(na» ni) U., laa e to'oroua, a rich man.
to'ola.

to'dfalni U., v. tr., to appease.

toorao S., toowao U., a pigeon with crest and
long tail (Turacaena crassirostris) which
cries in the morning and the evening.

to'orodo U., blue, black, dark in odor, rodo,

to'Mv^a U., with poss. 3, to stumble, to be
offended, ka'ato'osu'a.

to'ota'e one at a time; to'ota'e ola, one thing
here and there.

to'ote'a S., to be careful, anxious; ue^isae
to'ot4*9, to be worried.

tootoo 1. a small shell hook used for whiffing
sardines-

to'oto'o 2. V. L, to be rich, to'o 2.

to'oto'oaH S., 1UU to'oio'oa'i wala, real words,
fit and proper words.

topa 1. n., a bird arrow made from the midrib
of the sago-palm leaf. ^. tdri sa'o.

topa 2. V. tr., to cut into slices; topa uhi, to
slice yams for planting.

topo V. tr., to appoint, to assign; « toPoa

hd'idinge, to appoint a day.
topo*i U.. V. i., to omit, to fail to do; e topo'i

*uuua, to fail to say.
torangi v. tr., to urge on, to indte. hd>*itorang^.
toretore U., ha'atoretore maa, to act stealthily,
tori 1. V. i., to cut the end off, to earmark pigs;

to circumcise (late use); tori poo, to

earmark pigs; poo tori, an earmarked

pig. Maori tori,
tori 2. n., a stick with which to cany burdens,

a yoke; tori iueu € hata, my yoke is easy,
tori 3. V. tr., to wear over the left shoulder as

a bandolier.
toro 1. n., the daughter of a chief; toro i'tmdu,

our chiefs daughter; keui toro, the lady.
toro 2. V. tr., to exalt, f/. toio,

torola-Cku) gerund.
toro 3. V. i., to thrust; toro wawa, to shoot out

the lips. Maori toro.
toro, totoro 4. to transfix with a spear,
toromi tr.

toromlU-(kn) gerund.
Toro'a the hill at the head of the river Walo'a'a.
Torokoii the village on the hill above Sa'a.
torokott'o, totorokou'e n., a hill, eminence, kou,
totott V. i.. to cackle (of fowls).
toto 1. V. tr., to pay a fine, to pay a fine to a

husband's relatives when his wtfe leaves

him; hu'eua kke totoa, they paid the

fine for the woman; toto tpa h&uue, a

sacrifice on behalf of a sick person.

M. A., p. 137. toto *akalo, to exorcise

a ghost; toto dhu'i, to pay a fine oo

behalf ai; ni'i toto, to make a free gift;

tuU toto, to get for nothing.
totonga V. n., a fine, a ransom. NiuC totougi.
toto 2. V. i.. to be lacking; uga me'i oia e toio

*amiu, lacked ye anything?
toto 3. to diy up, to soak into; iiiff wei e toio

maugq *oto, the water has dried right

.up; toto oaoa, to permeate; toto aropu,

S., to sip. Motu dodo, to subside;

Viti toto, to saturate.
toto 4. V. i., fitting, proper; makolo e toto, the

proper time.
toto 5. maa toto, to expect, to await.

totoriU.,tr.,ffiaatofor<. to await, hd'itoiori,
totorila-(kv) gerund. Wango toiori.
toto 6. prefix of condition, toiotala, toloweru'e.
toto'ala adj., resinous, glutinous. Polynesian

Mo, blood.
toto'alala S., adv., in vain, tola 2.
totoU 1. to sink into, be absori)ed in, of liquids.

toto 3. 2. U., tr., to sip. </. toto aropu,
totohoa n., ndse, sound,
totola specific numeral, 400, of dogs' teeth;

toiola ni 'usu, 400 dogs' teeth; totola

mwaua hai, 440 dogs' teeth.
totolo V. i., to cry aloud.

totokngaHni tr., to cry to a person.
totokmgaH tr. Wango toioro.
totoniho n., a tree, its yellow berries are eaten

by pigeons,
totooga (na, ni) 1. n., resin, sap, glue, toto'ala*

Pol3medan toio, blood.
totooga 2. a fine, ransom, toio 1.

TOTOHGA'ALA

io8

tetonga'aU adj.. resinous, gummy. Mo'ala.

totoaciiii 1 . V. L, to water at the mouth, ngisu,
2. U., to sip.

totoaco V. i.. to smart; saeku t iokmiOt I have
heartburn.

totopula n., the black ground-lixard (Nanno-
scincus fuscus). ^u 1.

totoqini U.. V. i.. to soak into, to soak up. 9»ii«.

totori U.. V. tr.. to expect, to await. ^. Mo 5.

totoro 1. a fish spear, a goad. 2. the crest, the
comb, wattles, of birds, loro 2.

tototala adv., in vain, to no purpose, (oto-
*aiala% S.

totowa'« wasted, lost, toio 6.
totowa'enga n.. waste, futility.

totowem'e hdaa iotowenCe, flat calm.

ton 1. n.. a bird, the bittern.

Ton 2. the name of a ghost at Sa'a, "the
pecker"; a piece of wood carved in
the likeness of the head and neck of
a bittern; it is reputed to have the
power of causing death; it la never
carelessly pointed at any one, but car-
ried over the shoulder with the beak
to the rear; when laid down the head
is faced away.

to'n 3. V. i.. to be lame, to be crippled in the
feet, unable to bend the limbs.

to'tt 4. qd.*uio*u, to bow the head; rahUo'u,
downcast; *urMto*u, to bend the knee.

to'tt 5. t to*ulan4i *Asi, on the surface of the sea.

totttott n.« the prow of a canoe, tied with cane
to the hull; qdli toutou^ canoe-shaped
drawings cut on la*o.

U. cf. ue.

oalapoa U., v. i.. to crack with a loud noise.

ttdi, ttdittdi V. i.. to be rotting, wasting; udiudi
*€ui*af rotting away.

ttdi S.. specific numeral. 100,000, of coconuts,
udi ni niu.

'odtt, 'ttdtt'ttdo to drip, ha'a'uduki.

'ttdtt'ttdnhe v. n., a drop, drippings;
*udu*uduha ana, droppings from. Flor-
ida tudUf Borneo iudo.

ue S., ua U. 1. adv., yet. as yet, still, to spare.
ha*ike ue, not yet; e lae ue, not returned
yet; e ro *ata ini ue, as yet only two;
kire ue, some left; < mou ue ena, still in
desuetude; wdi e lama haahi ue kolune
mwakano, water still covered the face
of the earth; mangqna ue ana, he is still
alive; ngeitei ue ena, that's just it;
Florida iua, already, again, in addition;
Mota tuai; possibly pronounced ue and
not *ue to distinguish it from *ue 4.
</. hau 1.

ue S., va U. 2. of price in bargaining; ue ta*a,
for how much? uaanangataa, for what?
ue holi, for sale.

o6 S., ua U. 3. rattan cane; *aioni ue, to dye
strips of cane; hikei ue, a roll of cane,
dyed red for plaiting into bracelets;
kinui ue, the bark of cane, dsred red;
ko'i ue, to roll dyed cane into bundles.

Hia S.. *tta U. 4. how. why; used with *e 4.
V *ue, how; *« *ue *oUma, how is it; imdu
*uara, what did you do to them; mwame
*e *ue, why not; *e *ua ata, exclamation of
disapproval; ke 'ue *oU>, how shall it be
done; Matnt *ua, why. what for; ngie ke
'ue kA*u fK, how shall it be.

*tta S.. 'oa U. 5. of course; ana ngoini ka'a
ha*ara*i 'emdu *e *ue, why. because no
one has summoned us; ta'ala'a me'iolaMa
'e *ue, why. it's just that very thing; wge
iUi 'ue ena, that's just it. Lau tOa,
Florida gua, Wango uai Efat6 gna, how.

'«'• S., koka U. 6. the mud crab.

ttU !• me'i uki, S.* homki, U.. a yam (Dioscorea
•p.); muuki, mwauhi, plural, coalescent
vowels; uki ni kakma, upland yams,
of good quality; uki leoleo, a variety
of yam; uki maleu, April; uki mwaka,
January, lit., yams unripe; uki o^uopu,
v., February, lit., srams rounded in
shape; uki ni qe'u, yams from near the
beach, inferior in quality; kara uki, to
grate yams; molai uki, 10.000 yama;
mwadi ni uki, the mother yam; nga
fMO fit uki, 100 yams; nini uki, a jmm;
olopa'i, U., a yam with fruit on the
vine; e'a Hkikia qd'una uki, she takes
off the heads of 3rams; sinaa uki, to
dean the rootlets off yams newly dug;
sinolai uki, 100 ytans; sulaa mu uki, to
roast 3rams; susukaa'i, to plant a ysm.
garden; tdkume, a yam with fruit on
the vine; topa uki, to slice yams for
planting; wakma mu uki, yam vines.
Florida upi, NiuS uji, Mao. uki.

tthi 2. warts on the hands.

•obi, <iihi«tthi 3. V. tr.. to blow with the mouth,
to shoot with a gun, to buxs; mu
matawa 'nki'uki, white men: lit., men
of the sea who blow with their mouths,
owing to the idea that guns were blown
in order to discharge them,
'nhlnge v. n.
'tthlla-(ka) gerund.

•ohfleHal tr., to breathe on. Wango uki,
Viti U9U, Mota pupus, wuv; Maori puki,
Maiain rmtu.

oho (ku) S., IhttU. 1. hair; uku ma«, a wig; uhune
e lai mero, his hair is white. Motu kui,

uho 2. to husk coconuts,
uhn'i tr.

Uho 3. the cape on Big Malaita northwest of
Pwaulimwaa, ngprangora i Uku, the
lagoon shoreward is also called Uhu.

*ttH, 'uH'ttH V. tr., to throw (of a spear, a
stone, etc.).
'ulnge V. n.

*tt*lle*im tr.. mala e 'u'iU'inie nga koi heu,
about a stone's throw. Florida tupi,
Mota vivir.

Uki Ugi. an island off the east coast of San
Cristoval.

ttkn n.. a row. a lajrer; ukui keu, a layer of
stones; uku ni ia'ataka, a channel in
the reef, a chasm; uku ni ta'aiala, a
row, a line. Wango uku, a generation.

109

'UPUTAKA

'Qkn 2. ka*a*uku, to lower, to let down.

vlio harlot, keni ulao, 'akeulao, heulao^

ha*aulao. kale ni ulao, baatard.
ttlftpo U., V. i., uaed with poae. 3; to be ignorant

of.
Ukwa t saptna i Ulawa e rara, apostxoiihe

addressed to Ulawa. ha'addhi.
*iil»-(kn) U.» n., brother, sister. Florida kmla.
'idehu a fish (Oligorus gigas).
nlenle S., nlanla U.. n.. sinew, tendon, vein;

uleuUni 'e«, U., twigs. Maori uaua,

sinew,
nil 1. n.. a tree (Spondias dulds); hau uli, its

fruit. Mota us, ur; Oceanic uri.
hH 2. U., hmkou ni uli, ankle; poupau ni uli,

heel.
vU 3. V. tr., to rub, to massage; ulie sapena ani

heu, to apply hot stones to the body as

a foment.
nU 4. uli 'et , a wooden mortar for braying yams,

etc.
nlo. nloiilo 1. to lament; ngara uloulo, to weep

bitterly; noko pu*otaH uio 'oto, I forgot

to cry; noko lapata*i nlo *oto, I complain

with lamentation.
nloiilonga v. n.
iil(^-(kn) gerund., nlolada mditaU, the cry

of the poor.
nlo 2. V. tr., to wrap up, to make a parcel of.
nlovtolto (na) v. n.. a wrapper, cover, husk.

chaff.
*vla 1. to be blind. ha*a*nln; a *ulu, the blind

man; saai *nlu, to recite by heart; hunie

est huie *nlu 'ie, that he should be bom

blind thus; kakalo *uln*ulut to grope

blindly with the hands; *nlu susuhono,

stone blind.
'vltt 2. V. tr., to close the eyes; *oke *nlue maamu,

you dose your eyes; *ulu mwaani, *ulu

kcahi, to overlook. Wango kum.
vka 3. v. tr., to carry in the arms.
iiltt 4. v. tr.. to wade; nlu hoh, to wade across;

nlu to'a, to emerge.
Hdvhelni tr., to wade and carry a person

across the water. Wango urn.
idiione a sandy tract above the beach,
nlinife 1. v. tr., to serve as a pillow; nlungaa

qd'n, to pillow the head; *dsi ko nlungaa

kdnne, Uie sea under the earth; hele

ulunge, to uplift; ewe e nlungaa mAuri-

haakn, the floods have covered my soul.

2. a pillow.
vhnce'iiii tr., to serve as a pillow. Mota

nlnnga,
vlmge'iiii tr., to sell; konlnnge'inieto'oio'olana,

he sold his goods.
tthmgeH v. i.
*«hi*iilQ 1. a full-grown coconut, koi *ulu'nlUf mu

'nlu'nln, hum.
'vln'nla 2. U., *nlu*nlu ni '»', twigs, leaves.

vlttoln'a U.» adj., leafy.

«ma U., indsor teeth.

vara 1. U., native oven; a fire is made inside a

ring of stones level with floor ol house.

Mota mil, Motu amu.
vmtt 2. to gather; nmu i *ae, to gather round

the feet of.

nmn 3. v. L, to weed.

umn 4. nmu kum, to mutter.

uneU (nM) n., the scales of fish; v.. to scale a
fish. The final ki was probably a
verbal suflSx originally. Motu una*
nnahi; Gilbert Islands ina; Samoa una,
nnafi; Maori nnaki,

'tt&tt* 'min'nnn 1. v. tr.. to say. to bid, to tell,
to assign, to suppose, to reckon, nou
*nnne uri, I thought that; nan *unua
uri muni ne'e mae *olo, I thought I was
done for; nou kola*i *unue, I first said
it; *oio hire kosi *unue, thereupon they
said it; iopoH *nnu, to neglect to say;
*unu lalaunge'i, to tell beforehand;
*unu lelengana, to speak clearly; *unu
lete, to afiirm; a mama*a e *unve, father
said so; *unu mengini, to tdl everything
out; muni ne*e loosia, ta*ane na*a *unna,
if I see him I shall tell it; ana muni
kvr*e 'unua, if they say it; e *unu oreta
ana mu wala, he spoke and finished
his words; *unu ia*alara, to relate in
order; *unu ta'alaha, to pronounce
aloud; *unu takanie saemu, lay bare
your mind; *unu tatalau ana, to re-
hearse in order; *unu iatara, tradition;
*unu taiaran, gossip.
'nnala-(lns) gerund. Wango unu.

nnu 2. n., the fibrous spathe of a coconut
frond used {sasali, U.) for straining
milk (qni) from grated coconut. Samoa
tifiti, to strain.

nnu 3. sate nnu, to overlap; dere unu, U.. to
get in between; dire unu ana para,
between the pickets of the fence; "u'i
dere unu, to pierce with a blow; taka-
unutara, through from one side to the
other.

onnmeH partic. frequently, experienced; hele
unume*i ana, to do a thing in a masterly
fashion; sapesAlu unume*i, to suffer
many things.

u*o 1. n.. the green lixaid.

tt'o 2. n., fishing-float for flying-fish. Mota
uio, Maori panto. M. A., p. 317.

ope U.. n., a hole in a tree where water lodges
in the rains.

npeta U., ipata S.. a wallowing-place for swine.
upeta ni poo,

'upttf *upo'nptt 1. to swell; ngora *upu, tSu
ngora 'upu muni, to hate; ngidu *upu,
to hate; qeru *upu, lio qeru 'upu, to
grudge, to hate. 2. the center, middle.
tahe *upu*upu, to be half way over in a
journey; *upui lue, high tide; i'upu*upui
dango, among the trees; i *upuderu*e,
midway between the two; maraau i
*upu*upu, the east wind. Maori tupu,
to grow; Viti iumlm,to swell; Motuiubu,
to swell; Mota ton, to grow.

'opn'e adj., used as n.; a swelling, a boil.
qdlusu *upuU, a wood-pigeon.

*upiuii adv., some time ago. long ago; precedes
the verb, melu 'npunilae, we went long ago.

'i^ntaiia with kxaitive i; i *uputana hUnue, in
the center of the land.

VQB

IIO

^itf Wfnqp V. i., to complain, to have ill
feeUng toward; ere uqe, to talk enviously;
ere nqamga, malldoui talk.
vtanga v. n., envy,
oqeal tr. kdHu^eufeni. Wango uqa,

ora U.. 1. crayfish, piawn. ore 3. Mota ura,
Maori ibottTtf.

ara U.t 2. ura mcasUima, the second day of
the moon.

oraaH S., v. L, to make an offering to 'akalo or
U*oa; uraa'i ola, wraa*i olanga, making
offerings; Mraa'i saana mu *akalo,
uaalnga v. n., an offering, a sacrifice;
toU uraa'inge, to offer sacrifice. San
Cristoval «ra».

wate uraiei ola, a piece, a crumb.

^vre S., Hffa U., 'nre'nre 1. v. i., to stand up.
ka'a'wre, 'ure kanosi, to oppose; e
*ure*ure ho rarangi, he stood warming
himself; ho 'ure para*ilana walumalaM,
defends the earth; *ure suu*i, to attend
on, to serve. Mota /mt, Viti /«, tura.

*UK9 2. used of motion from and equivalent
to place whence. *urei Sa*a, from
Sa'a; *vrei iei, where from, whence;
tnelu 'uraana, we are his offspring;
'omu ha'a *ure ike ana pulUaa intu, ye
are not of my flock; *oto *ure mdi, up
till now, henceforth; nou *ure ami 'eta
kdnue, I am a stranger; *ure tohune, to
desire; 'tire ta'i tolona hdnue, from out
of the hills; *wre *oto m&i i 'aeholalanat
from the beginning up till now; 'oho
lae mdi *ure Uei, where are you from,
whence come you; nou 'ure mlU i 61a,
I am from such-and-such a place;
mwala 'urei tei ni 'ie, from whence are
these people.

'ore 3. mwimwidi 'ure, S., mudimudi 'ura,
U., to drip.

'ore 4. to come into leaf; mu 'ure'urei dango,
shoots of a tree; 'ure'urena, its top shoots.

Urehi S., a local spirit. M. A., p. 124.

'nreipasl first fruits, betrothal money.

'nrenga'iai v. tr., to accompany a person on
a Journey, to set him on his way.
ha*a*urenga*ini.

^nremni S.. to be in accord, concord, ha'a'ure^
ruru.

vrotohn (na) S., nou sa*a ureiohune nga ola, I
shall not desire anything.

'vri, 'iffi'iiri 1. V. tr., to tread on, to pace, to
measure, to stamp on; 'urie maonga,
to tread the dance,
'nri'ttrite v. n., a pace, a foothold.
'iirila-(kii) gerund. Florida turi.

vri 2. adv.. thus; used also of reported speech;
na, ni, are added, e ie uriiaa, uri 'oke
lae, what did he say? that you were to
go? na uri, I mean, that Is; nau 'unua
uri muni ne'e mae 'oto, I thought I was
dome for; uri qd'une nge mwane, I mean
that the male is the head; tirt ana, if.
that is (in explanation); paro uri, over
there; wa uri, of an objection advanced;
na'o uri, to go on this course; uri mala,
if.

«1 3. ha'amri, v. tr.. to save, to make alive.

vfllui-(m«, oa, da) like, as if; uHhamm,, Uke
him, Jttst hie way; e urihama nga ome,
tike the sands; urihmda, their style.

ttflme S.. wlna U.. oiiai U.. adv., thos. Aa'«*
urine, ka'aurini, ho urine, that bein^
so; ho urine ta'ane no, even supposia^
it were so; he su'uri urine, God forbid.

vriaena S.. adv.. therefore, thos. on that
account; isulie e urinena, wfaerefore.

ttritaa S., vritaha U., interxog. adv.. how, what
sort ci, e ie uritaa, wbmt said he; iia
uriiahOt what one; e lae uriiaa^ haw
did it go?

vnm S.. a wood-pigeoo with large wattles
(Caipophaga nifigola). qdlusu 'ufu'e,

'ura 1. V. L, to collect, to wipe, 'aim soma, to
gather ants as buriy for aea-bream;
'uru'uru mwado, an anklet of shell
money, etc.. strung on a cord, lit.,
collect dirt; 'uru'uru pole, to dear the
head of lice; *uru qango, to wipe off
mucus, to dear the nose; a Poro 'uru
maiawa, the man who tours the sea*
a legendary ghost said to mohe anm
fusu 'est, catdi whales in a hand net.
Mota surung, Mao. siiirM.

am 2. qd'uni uru, U.. a phase of the moon.

nni 3. white fleecy douds; evening douds
painted in wavy lines on the prow of a
canoe.

*nm 4. 'uru'uru (hu), knee.

'nmtoHi to stoop, to bend the knee, to kned*
San Cristoval nfrs, Viti duru, Florida
ImImtm, Samoa tuli.

*niii*iini ieie 'uru'uru, to spill, to dribble out,
as lime from a gourd. Fagani Ms,
Mota sur-maia, tear; Tonga tulu; Borneo
iuru, to drip; sulu, liquid.

use, naense v. i., to plait, to weave; mm foso. to
plait armlets of dyed cane; use sa'o^
to stitch sago leaves on a reed for
thatch.
iiieli tr., uselie moke, to make a hand net.
uselie 'ae, to plait an anklet of dyed
cane (ue) on the leg.

vsi» Qslnsi V. tr., to barter, to hold a market,
vaiage v. n., bartering, marketing; herai

usinge, market-place.
nsl'e adj., used as n.. hera i usi'e, market-
place.

QStt, vsunsii 1. V. tr.. to push, iapausu^
usutaha. molu usu, push; usu 'asi
mwahule ana, to reject him ignomin-
iously. 2. to write. 3. n.. a writing,
a Ittter. mu usuusu; mm maai usuusu,
alphabetic characters.
aanntttelni tr., to pole, to shove, to push,

to compd.
usuaHni tr., to send, to dispatdi.
nsnngeH v. 1.. usunge'i 'asi, to dispatch.

hA'iusunge'i,
tttttago'ings v. n., a commandment,

ordinance.
nsnngsHai tr., to send, dispatch.
nsttsgsHaita-Cka) gerund.

Ill

UWOLAUR

lira 5.

'vsiSt

uitt 4. U.. one; h&*u met nga usu, give me one;
usu tnAu^ mine.
S., usu 'H, a firatick.
'nra'ttra 6. v. i., to rub, to daub, to
flcrape, to wipe, to giate; *usu kara,
to grate yams; *usu kui, to grate taio.
7. ag rater; *usuri, tr., to wipe. Wango
usu, Lau usu, Florida guduri,
'oraHini 8. v. L, to point, to accuae; to
point at the rainbow brings bad luck.
*usu keuue, the first finger; *usu meuia*a,
to affirm; *usu iUugine niaini, to accuse
any one; *usu maa (Jku), to accuse.
HiaaH tr., to point at; suisui, M. A., p. 192,
should be *usu*usu*i,
'usu 9. n., a dog; *usu qaqa, a slut; *usu # kueu,
the dog barked at me. Mota kurut,
Maori kuri.
Sun 10. n.. a dog tooth; the two teeth in the
upper jaw immediately behind the
canines are used as money. M. A.,
p. 325. qd*ui *usu, 4 dogs' teeth;
toiola ni *usu, 400 dogs' teeth; piru ui
*usu, a necklace of dogs' teeth; e pirus
mu *usu iueu, he made my dogs' teeth
into a necklace.

'usu 11. V. i., to fall down; in Sa*a not used of
persons, in which sense it is replaced
by domu, ha'a'usu, ha'a'usuli, Florida
kuiu,

*VMU 12. U., to wipe off mucus, 'usu qango. uru.
Mota surung.

'ttsule adj., possessing dogs.

vauli tr., to copy, to follow, to succeed to.
ka*ausuU. kira *asi usuli ons, they went
along the beach; e usulie *amana, like
his father. San Cristoval, usuri, follow;
Malekula usuri, to go along the coast;
Mota usur, to pass on.

oaiitaha U., to emerge.

vsiiiira S. 1. usuusu ana, because of, through,
owing to. 2. handiwork; usuusuama
nimeku, my handiwork; usuusu ana
dkuiana manalanga a God, all the powers
of the godhead.

ittakoia U.. ▼. i.. to burst.

«te 1. V. tr.. to rub. to polish; maio uU, beads
rubbed down to sixe.

ute 2. tUe pit, heavy rain. Lau uta, Viti udka,
Poljoiestan uha,

ote'i to gut fish, ro uie*i sen, M. A., p. 48.
ttte<iiii tr.

ato-(na) n.. pith. core. Mota alot; Maori uho,
heart of a tree; Motu tido, navel; Samoa
tiso, pith, heart of a tree, umbilical
cord.

^'ii S.. kakn U. 1. to hang down, to depend;
siri *u'u, a lory that hangs upside
down.

'ttHi (aa) 2. a round ol^ect, a lump in pounded
food; 'u*u loio, a piece of fish; 'u*ui one,
S.. 'u'una MM, U., a grain of sand; 'u'ui
ke'u, S.. '«'« ni he'u, U.. a star; 'u'ui
seku, U., a lump in the lime of betel
chewing: 'u'ui maa, eyeball; ro 'u'u
maana siena a Ta'a Pea, his two eye-
balls to Ta'a Pea (an imprecation) ; Vii

«V (continued).

maai dehi, a pearl; 'u'u ni mae, heavy
rain. Florida pugu ni pari, dust;
Maori puku, knob.
<tt«o-(aI) 3. real; 'u'une kdnue, the real land.
4. beginning, source, inge'i ni 'oio
'u'une, he is the source. Florida Puku,
reaL
*a*iiheal S., to stand firm.
'««uH-(aa) n.. taU of an animal. ViU mbui,

Maori kiku, Malo nine, Samoa i'u.
Ht'nle n., a tree of hard wood. Florida gugula,
HtSiloa U., loulov S., to thunder.
^Himwado U.. dust.

ttuav, nunoantt 1. v. tr., to bum in the fire,
to roast on the embers; used with saa,
sie, to sacrifice, uunu hena, uunu keu,
uunu s&ku, to bum lime; ora ni uunu,
altar of burnt offering; uunu poo saana
mu 'akaio, offer burnt offerings of pigs
to the ghosts, uunu roe. M. A.,
p. 263, to cremate a corpse. Only one
case known, that of Taramaesipue
is the one mentioned.
vnnunga v. n.. burnt sacrifice; uununge

suu, whole burnt offering,
ttmmhi tr.

va&ahi]a-(kii) gerund.
utULU 2. to raise cicatrices on the arms by
burning. Maori tunu, roast; T.>am«nak
(Borneo) tunu.
vmiv 3. a large tiee-lisard (Corada aebrata).
nwmhi v. tr., to envy, to grudge, to vex, to
grieve; sae uunuhi, to bear a grudge, to
be spiteful to.
ttomihiiige V. n., a gmdge, sae uunuhinge,
'tt'ul 1. V. tr., to detach the betel vine from
the stem of a tree by pulling it all down.
ku'usi. 2. V. L, to slip off, to become
detached,
uwatohona U., air, atmosphere.
nwo S., vwa U. 1. v. tr., to lift up; uwaa qd'u,
lift up the head; uwe 'aHnge, to give ear
to, to prick up the ears; uwe 'alenga,
to look up. 2. to brandish a spear;
uwa ma'e, U., a measure, a yard and
three-quarters,
uwe 3. to inclose (of a net), uwe haaki, kire
ko uwaa 'oio ta'eia'ena nga i'e, they
inclosed every kind of fish,
uwe 4. uwe daio, to dear the throat,
owe 5. U., uwe raka, to break with a loud noise,
owe 6. uweli osa cerumen, wax in the ear.
ttweha a fishing-rod; qa'aqa'a uweka, U., a

phase of the moon,
aweli (ktt) U., well S. 1. maternal uncle.

M'iuwiUne, mauweUne.
uweli 2. V. tr., to castrate.
ttwerikaUte tatters, rags, kakakiie.
vwmI to curse, kd'imeesi,
iiwo 1. a ridge of hlUs; melu sustdi uwo, we kept

along the ridge.
vwo-(]ia) 2. pith. uto. Niu6 uko.
ttWoCa V. L, to appear on the horison; mu tdUA
kenue *esi uwoia, the hills appear on
the horison. Mota vote.
vwolaHai tr., to rear up on high, to uplift.
1.

WA

112

w« adveraative conjunction, or; used at the
end of sentence to express doubt or
ignorance; used with «rt to denote an
objection raised; in correlation with the
negative particles ka'a and ka'a in the
sense of neither — ^nor. *ok€ ke*i lae
ptdi wa, will he come do you think?
wa uri *o *unue, but you said; k$r€ ha*a
manaia'inie wa kire he leesie^ neither know
him nor have seen him; wo *oAe, unless.

waa, waawaa 1. to be empty. hoUow, to have
open doors, to have a hole in; laUmc
t woawaa^ nothing inside it, to be open
(of a door), to be desolate (of a place);
q9Xuswn€ e waawaa, his nostril is pierced.

wa'a 2. to be split, to be cut into sections; to
split. wa*a uhi, to cut up yams for
planting; mu wa'a, sections <A yams for
planting.
wa*ali tr.

wa'allla-(na) gerund. San Cristoval waa;
Maori mawawa cracked; Mota waka,
open.

wa*a 3. to be profaned.

wa'a 4. *ahewa'a, to vanish. ha*awa*a,

wa'ahite v. i.. to be cracked, to split (of
timber); n., a crack,
wa'ahiteli tr., to split, to divide.
wa'ahit6]ila-(ku) gerund.

waa'i, waawaaH v. tr., to reward, to hire; waa*i
'iola, to hire a canoe,
waalta (k«) n., reward.

wa'aU'e adj., to be daybreak; n., daybreak,
dawn; t wa*ali*e, at dawn. Wango
waaria. wa*a 2.

wa'aUnga U., to give attention, to turn the
ear to. *alinga.

wa'araa to appear (of a vision) ; anoa e wa'araa
mdit an apparition came into view.

wa'arao a very strong creeper used in lashing
canoe planks; wire nails.

wa'arara U. 1. to be timid, nervous.

wa*arara 2. to be cold, chilly (of weather).

wa'aran'a U., cold (of the body).

wa*ariii S.. to flash (of lightning); n.. lightning.
maniali'a,

waaro around, about, of position; kdri waaro,
to go a roundabout way; roro waaro, to
be diffused (of coloring matter in water) ;
maana e waaro, goggle-ejred.

waarowaaro 1. the moon. 2. a month. 3. a
biscuit, waarowaaro e ranga'a, the
moon is up; waarowaaro e qa*a *otOt the
moon has risen; waarowaaro e mdnu
'a*a mAi iUngi, the moon floated clear in
the sky; tndi ana waarowaaro e qa'a, ebb
tide when the moon rises; mdi ana
waarowaaro e suu, ebb tide when the
moon sets.

The names of the months in Sa'a
beginning from July, the harvest
season, are; ngdli maeh, hure i lade
aau; (^tn lade; okn mwaa; oku denu
oku peine (cf. Viti mbalolo levu); raa
*Asi rodo; lo*a wHi mweimwei; lo'a w&i

waarowaaro 1 (continued.)

peine; lo'a malVe; Wa madaU; kuiokuio.
In Ulawa. beginning from August,
they are: ngSU maelo; poia nguru;
madamada sulu; okn i lade; okn denu;
oku Peina; uki mwaka; uki opuopu;
ka'asusu uki; uki repo; uki maUu;
*eUnga; aau marawa*

The phases of the moon in Sa'a are
designated: waaromaaro e ranga*a; kudi;
alanga*i roa; aianga,*i Vela ni taio;
keiekeU mwiUmwei; kdekde pdine; okolu
tewa'a; kara poU; rwru'e kuLe; qa*ileni;
io'okuunge'i lemi; rara talau jkuiaakolaa,
full); pa*ewa ko *ala taia; qd'i oku;
io*okuunge*i oku.

In Ulawa they are: waarowaaro e
ranga'a; kika kaio; *ura maasiUma;
rua *apala; daki; alangaH kapa; kapa
ni na*o; saro poie; kdu ni lend, iemi
mwaa (full); AAtt ni mwda awara;
ruana kdu; qa'uni *uru; danu oku;
demudemutoioria; qa*aqa*a uweka;rarasi.

waato n., a digging-^ck used in making holes
for yam planting. Wango riwaaio.

waawaata 1. an opening, hole, aperture.

waawaata 2. U.. waawaaiani i'a, pieces of fish.
Maori wawaia, small lumps.

widi, wM4w6di S., widiwidi U., to whistle.

wadn-(nll, ni) n., point, tip.

wa'e 1. to waste, wa'e *ake. 2. to do in vain,

to ruin oneself; used with poss. 3.

toiowa'e, kire wa*e ada, they ruin

themselves.

wa*eta*ini tr., to waste.

wa'staH partic, wasted, put to no good use.

wa'eli tr.. to do damage to; to pull up

growing coconuts that have rooted

themselves after falling from the tree.

wa'ewa's U., adv., excessive, very, much;
follows the verb, wala'a wa*ewa*e ana
ngaile, to upbraid anyone excessively.
Wango waewae.

waha to be foggy, dim, to darken; n., fog,
vapor, mist, waka kaakie maada, make
their eyes dim.
wahawaha U.. wakawaka ni mwado, dust,
wahawaha'a adj., dim.

w&i 1. water, me'i wei, mdsi vfti. 2. fluid, urine.
3. bamboo water-carrier, nga wdi;
coconut or bamboo water-bottle, glass
bottle, kou wei. 4. tears, wdi ni *akalo;
wdi kulakula, a spring, a fountain; wAi
e kuukuu *oU>, water gushed forth; wdi
ko kone, the river is in spate; wdi ni
qe*unge, strong drink; wdi e taka, the
river mouth is open; Wdi ni Tekulu,
the Ngorangora lagoon, Ulawa; mu wei
e toio mango *oto, the streams are all
dried up; ddu wei, to catdi fish in low
water pools; kulaa ni wei, a spring, a
fountain; kuuna wdi, U.. fountain head;
• kekena wdi, beside the stream; kilu
ni wei, a well; koukou wei, to gargle
sweet water; h'a wdi mweimwei, Feb-
ruary; lo*a wdi peine, March; Mamala

113

WALENGA'I

wli (continued).

Wdi, the Milky Way; mwakana wdi,
moist ground; wdi wawai, cold water;
wai 9 mahitto* the water is muddied. *
raona wdi, i rtune wfti . beside the stream;
ro rHui wet, the two banks of the stream;
sSsu ana w0f, steam; sihoU wei, the south
wind; ta'aiara wai, a dragon-fly; UUuhi,
to draw water at a well; U*i wei, to draw
water. Lau qai, Poljmesian wai. M.
L., p. 96. kuai should be qai,

wli 5. contracted form of wdu i; wdi nume, in
the house; maraau wei hata, qini: w&i
la'ona, within, inside; 'oio wdi lalo, in the
heart; *oio wdi na*(ma, right before his
face. Tanna wei, to fare into the house.

wl'l, wiHwe4 6. to drag, to pull, to draw, to
pain; wd*i haahie ana hu'o, to draw a
net about; wd*i oda*i, U.. to quarrel,
to fight.
wft*ini tr.

wilnge V. n., pain.
wl*inila-(kii) gerund.

wli 7. tetanus; huhu la'oia'o ana wd% to be
contorted with tetanus spasms.

wiien U., n., a bonito; honi weieu, one bonlto;
rerehana wdieu, a school of bonito;
pepe ni weieu, a butterfly (Omithoptera
cassandxa). San Cristoval waiau.

WilU a creek in Mara Maslki Channel used
for the ordeals by swimming. M. A..
p. 213.

Wllngile a rodcy promontory near Mwarada,
Ulawa.

waSailni S., with diligence; hele wa*ini*ini,
to do diligently.

w«iro-(na) U., n.. a brim.

wahe S.. 1. adv.. of old. a long time ago. some
days ago; 'oio waiie, long ago.

wi'ite S.« wMUta U.. a. adv.. the day before
yesterday; i we*iie, two days ago; wd'iie
vast, three days ago.

wlitmi, wiiweitau v. i.. to quarrel. ha*awdiUu,
wiitatinge v. n.

wiiwei 1. to wave to and fro (of a fire-stick).
wdiwei dunge.

wlhr«i 2. to collect; wdiwei lo'o ro me*i to'ohaa,
collect the two pieces of money from
everyone.

wliwai'a'a adj., watery, with too much water,
thin (of soup).

wakaUl v. i.. to appear above the horison (of
a canoe coming into sight).

wlki« wXHweki v. L. to hang up in festoons
(of skulls hung up in taoha) ; used with
poss. 3. e wd'iweki ana, he hung it up
as a decoration.

wtUo a bird, the gray osprey; a Poro Wakio
Mali, a legendary person.

waU (kn) 1. a word, speech, voice, language;
m€*i wala, S.. kdi wala, U.. nga hdiwata,
U.. a word, the word; a nuH Wala, S..
the Word; walaku, my word, hire
saea wda, they talked about; qd'u ni
wala pe*i, to consult with; walana e Ma,
his word is great; haUmga'i wala haaki,
to accuse; ko toJboAo haahi wala, deceitful

wala (continued).

in speech; laeli wala, to make an oration;
laeli walanga, oratory, address; lalani
wala, to make an oration; hpoH wala,
to feign; madou ni wala, a phrase; mdni
wala, S.. to take counsel; a Poro Matou
ni Wala. a ghost in folklore; mu odo-
haana wala, words to the point; qelu
wala ilengine ngaini, to accuse any one;
ruru wala, to make an agieement; mu
sikoa'i wala, mere words, just a tale;
sulu walanga, gossip; mu taleH sulu
walanga, mere gossip; sulu walanga
ta* elate, babbling words; mu wala
ta*aUtra, tradition; mu wala ta*alarau,
gossip; talama*i wala, to act as mediator;
tarieHni wala, to commit fornication;
walana dhuri, the sound of the condi;
wala taiara, tradition; tolai suli wala, to
obey commands; io*oio*oa'i wala, fit
and proper words. 2. v. i., to speak,
used with qualifying words; mdni wala,
to consult, to take counsel; wala odoodo,
S.. to speak in one's own defence, to deny ;
with poss. 3. 3. ddu wala, to be at
fault, to transgress; nou deu walaku,
I transgressed. Wango hara, mouth;
Mota 9alai, mouth; Tubetube. N. G.,
wala, word.

wala 4. V. i.. to be scared, to be on the alert,
to have learned a lesson, kire wala *oto,

wala'a, wala'awsla'a U.. adj.. used as verb;
to speak, mwai keni e*asi qale wala*ar
wala*a mware*a, what drawling women;
wala*a wa*ewa*e ana ngaile, to upbraid
excessively any one.
wala'anga U.. v. n.. speech; wala'anga
mwamwasu, upbraiding words.

walanga v. n.. words, speaking; *i*ile*i walanga,
strife about words; qaoiaH walanga,
deceit, lying.

wala'asi to speak.

walaha (da, nl) n.. speech, sound of.

walahiHnge n., dispute, strife, hdli.

walaimoli. to be true (lit., to speak true);
exclamation of assent, verily; hiiwalo'
'imoli, to believe.
walalmoUnga n., truth. NiuC moU, true;
Efat6 ta-moli, real man.

walamango prepared, ready; hele walamango,
to get ready, to perfect; i*o walamango,
to be ready.

walangi U.. v. tr.. to address with words; e
walangia ani seru'a, spoke an incanta-
tion over it.

walawala U. 1. adv.. in excess, too much.

walawala 2. v. i.. to have the tongue hanging out
by reason of the heat (of dogs), wana-

wala 1. du wale, a reed flute. 2. a tho m lcse
cane, the bark used to sew the leaves
of thatch on to reeds or to fasten the
layers of thatch on to the bamboo
rafters; tdli wale, to strip the bark of
the cane.

walangai to carry burdens; waUnga'i heu, to
cairy stones.

WALl

114

waH a'space of time, long ago. ha'amali. 'oio

» ^ 1^ 'ure wali, from of old.

wifita U.. wilta &, day after tomonxm, with
locative i; % wdUa, two dajrs hence;

' i i welita po'o watt, time days hence.

'<^'^' Florida valiha, Scunoa alivu, Maori

^ kareha, Malay lusu.

walo^l. a cr ee p er, rope, string, line, vine.
' hd'iwalo. walona mu uki, yam vines;
hahai walo, a thicket; nga walo e kikusie,
the creepe re twined round it; walo
kdukeu, a thorny creeper; walo ni
pa'asahut a fishing-line for pa*asahu;
walo ni *u% a sling; ta'e walo *U he su*nri,
save for these bonds; walo roto, match-
box bean. 2. ten strings of shell money.
3. ten coconuts made into copra and
strung together in halves. Florida galo,
Wango waro, Motu varo.

walo 4. susu walo, an abscess; to suffer from

WaIo'a*a the river that discharges into
Road Bay. Little Malaita; Tetele, the
ridge on which it rises; Toro'a, the hill
at its head.

walokXuken a thorny creeper.

walolin, walowaloliu to travel about, to make
ezcursions.

walopasa ten flying-fish.

walowalo walowaloi *ehuri, the sound of the
conch shell.

waitt numeral, eight; used also to express an

indefinite number. waZttota, everything;

walu moia ni ola, all things; walu tola

ni Tolo, all the villages of Tolo.

walttta-(na, nl) wahUana nga ola, S.,

walnieni ola, U., everything.
walone eighth, the eighth time. Lau qalu,
Florida alu, Viti walu.

walomslan the world, all the islands, malau.
ho *ure para'ilana walumalau, defends
the earth.

waoa, wanawana v. i., to sparkle, to shine, to
be incensed; saeku € la 'oioi wana, my
heart was hot. Lau qanga, lightning.

wanawana 1. v. i., to scrape and dean, to file;
wanawana kinout to make shell hooks.

wanawana 2. S.. same as walawala 2.

wanga U.. to have fever, malaria.
wangaha n.. an attack of malaria.

wangawanga S., to be bright, to sparkle.
wanawana,

wa'o, wao'wa'o U. 1. to catch fish, to go
afishing.

wa'o U. 2. a mast, hou wa*o,

wa'oni'a U., adj., damp, dew.

waowao 1. n., a shrub growing on the beach,
has white flowers, grows best on rocky
soil; the sticks are used as seat of plat-
forms.

waowao 2. (na, ni) tentacles, feelers.

waowaoln wild dog.

wXpn forest land which may be cleared for
gardens and thus becomes the property
of liim who dears it. tahangie wHpn,
to dear fofest country, met., of difficult
work Just started.

wan to be very large, hira wara.

Warahnnvka a Warahunuka RH'i Pa, a legend-
ary person.

waraihtt,U.,ihttS., hair, feathers. SanCristoval
waraihu.

waranktt U., hair, feathers.

warawara'a adj., ere warawara'a, damorous.

ware U. 1. v. tr., to destroy, to be mischievous,
to pull up self-rooting coconuts.

ware U. 2. adv., neariy, almost; precedes the
veri).

ware 3. warei hen, ware ni Mu, a short dub
used in central Malaita on the west
coast; it is carried on the back, depending
from the neck; its stone head is lashed
to the haft with cane and the haft is
inlaid; this is the dub mentioned by
the Spanish discoverers, see the Journal
of Gallego in Guppy's Solomon Islands,
p. 219; the port mentioned in the note
is probably WaisisL

wMxiha (na, ni) S.. *unu weriheni, to tdl deariy.

waiihiteli v. tr., to burst open, kite,

wlm 1. V. i., to be scorched, to bum, to get
burnt; mu nume e wSru *olo, the houses
are burned down; mwado wOru, U.. red
earth; niu wUru, a coconut with short
stem, yeOowish fronds, and reddidi-
sldnned nut; i*e warn, a fish of red
color caught in shore reef.
wVrufal tr., to bum.
wKruhila-(kn) gerund. Lau saru.

win 2. V. i., wOru ta*a, to emerget to show up
dear, to reach a place; tola ho weruia'a
i Sa'a, the path emeiges at Sa'a; 'dpu
e wdruta*a ana qalusnku, blood gushed
from my nose. Lau qalu.

wamna U., adv., as if.

wampe U., to be stringy, of hana,

wintwem'a U., adj., red.

wasawasa'a adj., indistinct, bluired; lio
wasawasa'a, to see indistinctly.

wttii 1. V. i.. to be wild, not tame; n., a wild
animal, ha^awdsi. wdsi ni poo, U., a
wild pig; nga wdsi, mu wesi, a wild pig
in contradistinction to nga poo ni nume,
the domesticated swine. Florida asi.

wXalt wM'iwesi 2. v. tr., to wash dothes, wAsi
to*oninge (English wash).

wfttri* wi*iwesi 3. wUHwesi henue, to visit the
villages.

wisvy w&'ttwestt 1. V. i., to smell, to smell of;
wdsu *aela, to stink; nimeku e wOm i'e,
my hand smells of fish; w&su mangom,
to emit a rich savor; nonowdsu, to sniff
at, to smelL
wVsnH tr., to smell too strong for.
wisniana its smdL

waso 2. saewasu, to be angry, to sulk.

watamea U., to crackle (of fire), nua.

Wate a proper name very common on Little
Malaita.

wate, wa'ewate to distribute food at a feast
after making an oration.
watenga*ini tr.

watengai v. L Wango vols, donate; Lau
UUi qate, to make an oration.

"5

WOWALA'A

-Willi 1. adverb of place, there; ne or tU may be
added; whoi followed by the locative <,
wfltt i contrecta to wAi. a nmoHe wdune,
&• that person; wAi nume, in the house;
* we'iU wau, three dasrs ago; i wdiia
Poo wdu, three days hence; hoUU na'o
*oto wdu, he has gone on some time ago;
nonola wdu, day before yesterday;
nomola *oio wdu, three days ago; talo wdu
i 'cfj. to follow the coast by sea. Wango
wou, Lau go, Dobu wa.

^Vu 2. to be excessive (of pain, work, plague);
ho esu we*u, me'i esunge tse'M, strenuous
work.

^ravm U.. to fall, to stumble and fall; a Faro
Wauru i *Esi, a legendary person,
Mr. Fall-at-Sea.

-wittwa (kit) grandfather, grandchild; ngddi
weuwe, a stone axe (grandfather's axe).
wivwana n.. used with mu he*i; mu he*i
wrmmtno, grandfather and grandchild.
wKnwananga n., m% he'i weuwananga, de-
scendants (double noun ending).

wauwan U., to dispute, to squabble.

^awa (kv) n., mouth; in Sa'a ngidu is used of
the month of persons, wawa ehoeho,
to boast; kele ponosie wavaica. keep his
mouth dittt; toro wovo, to shoot out
the lips. Mota vava, to speak; Maori
waha, mouth; Lau/aga, Maisin kawa.

"wawaa to be empty; ola wawae mdUit only a shell.

wawal to be cold; to be cool, of water, wdi
wawai; safeku e wawai, my body is cool;
e wawai osiosi, lukewarm,
wawaingo v. n., moisture.

Wawaka Mana a ghost of the open sea, 'akaio
fw maiawa. M. A., p. 197. ingeH i
sapena rikue i Qe'ulo, hole sa*a hole wa
nga me'i da treU'a ke i*o i sapekot he is
near the cliffs at Qa'ulo; paddles must
not rattle nor anything white be on
our bodies.

^awala v. 1.. to carry, to act as porter.

^awanv^e adj., sharp (of edge).

wawe froth from the mouth, to slobber; wawe
ho ta'ero ama, the spittle dribbles down.

wawata'a adj.. vexed, lashed. ha*awaweia*ai.

-wada to take out the midrib of the sago leaf
before sewing the leaves for thatch.
wedaH tr.

^•ad, waawaaal v. 1., to fish, to catch a fish,
to get shellfish at low spring tides

weesi (continued).

(mdi rara); noho lai wetiirj am going

fishing,
waaalnga S.. v. n., fish caught; ngftu

weesinge, to eat things caught (fish or

flesh), as a relish with vegetables,
waealngiha U., v. n.» double noun ending;

as weesinge.
waawaa S., a baby, infant, mu weewee. a Wee

contraction of a Dora wmwm.
walewela a rod, a stick, maai welewde, S„ MU

wefewcEf , U.
walawala'a adj., ngara weUwele'a, to have a

firm, solid sound; to ring solid,
wall (ko) S., ttweli U., n.. maternal unde;

a welit my unde.
wa*o, we'owa*o v. i., to be tired, ha'awe'o.

sape we'o, to be bodily tired,
wa'onga v. n., weariness; sape we'omga,

physical weariness,
waraware small (of children), ff. weewee.

mwda werewere, an infant. Mota ««rs,

to make an inarticulate sound,
wata 1. V. i., to hit; e wete i sapeku, it struck my

body. 2. to reach; wete i ola, reach

8uch<4uid-8udi a place. Wango weto-

vwte , firm,
wawav U., v. i., to squabble, ka'awewetu

Maori wawaa.
wiU 1. V. tr., to give tribute, to contribute

money to a chief at a feast; haa ni wiU,

tribute money; wiU to*ohaa, wiU to'oha-

anga, contributing money,
willnga V. n.. a giving of tribute.
wHilana gerund.
wUl 2. to string, to thread; wiU dttdudu, to

string beads; wiJi haa, to string shell

money.
Witt 3. to chip, to flake, to break off chips ol

flint,
winiwitti 1. V. tr., to handle shamefully, to

maltreat.
wlniwinila-(ku) gerund,
winiwlni U. 2. carefully; kele winiwini ana,

deal carefully with it.
wiro a steering-paddle, a rudder,
wlal a small gray l^rd, observed as an omen.

wisi bo orea, the wis* chatters. M. A.,

p. 221.
wowo (ko) the shinbone.
wottwou a wooden ear-plug,
wowala'a S.. mwala e wowala'a, glorious.

INDEX.

« hai 4., mfisi. me'l, nga. ta'a 3., ta'ata'a, ta'e 1.

abandon lae mwaani. qaqaltengill, toU'ad.

abhor h&'fldedl. leledL

abide nSLku. i'o, To konlto'a I'o mua, 'o'o 3.

able mwadauai. nanama, aaka.

aboard la'o 'lola, nl'i 'ae ila'ona 'iolat ta'e ana

haka. ta'eU 'iola.
abode lea tala. leu talahuU.
abound ahuxara, aiielimui, hunge, takaia.

tapala'a.
aboui ana, haahi, i maana, la'arangana; kfllL
aboae haho, i haho, i lengl; liuta'a, Uataha.
abraded aho, dalao.
abreasi hora. i odoluu sama.
abroad km. mbe^.
abscess epa 1., likita'a, mwaa 2., oropa, oaa,

qaqahinu. sususu. siisa walo. 'upn'e.
absorb totohi, totoqinL
abundant 'a'a 3., lolo. mwacfa, tahe 2.
abuse ere leledi, ere mama'Ua'a. ere mama'ingi.

ha'aaa'eri; »., maleledinge.
aceideni dftu (tflu) pele.
accompany hA'ipulonga'lni, hAku, hata, 'iiren-

pi'ini.
accomplish ha'aahu, ha'aoa'i, ha'ato'o.
according hfl'idadanga ana, lauU, Hula ana.
accumulale koni, ai'okoni, taxakouL
accurate diana, hfihuroto. mftngine. wftrihana.
accuse qelu. tohule'ini, 'umi 8, 'u8u maa.
accustom ha'anina, husingi, manata'j, nanoa'i.
ache hi'ito'o. sSlu 1.. wtt'L
ooiahaa.

acknowledge 'alama'ini.
across ha'aholo.

act arikosi, dada, dftu, hde, qao, tftu, taa 2.
active dftu aakaaaka'a.
add maai 1., pe'i, aape'i, tarolsuU.
admire ane.

adopt koine, koni, opa, rfti, sangooi, sulu'L
adorn ha'alauni, laonL
adornments Ufjoni, Uliinihe.
adrift ahed. hataxa. kone, tara; mataraha.
advance ara 2., dudu, nanawhi, 'o'ohi* tmwmgl.
adversary maek)onga.
adult rato, repo.

adultery 'amo'amo, mflai 1., tarle'iniwala.
adae dahe, v.; kaumota, hftn.
afar 'aho'a, ha'atau.
affirm one lete.
affix lakoma'ini, rakoma'inl.
affiicted ha'alete, ha'amotahi, ai'oliaa.
ejfright ha'amamakine, ha'amansL
afloat mflniimenu.
ttfoot UvL i henue. llu i tabu
e^aid maa'u, mft'ume'u, popolo*n, qftiliilii.
e^esh h& 8. 'i k>'u 5.. ftUoh'L
e^Ur hunt, 'ohi, 1 puri, isoll, po'o purl* qfti pari.
ifftemoon apau, apai aato.
afUrmards mango ena, mango nrina.
again Aliho'i. k>'a 5.
against hatare, hooosi* paraai, tuU.
aged ISau, repa

agp ina'o, 'oto. 'oto dL

agree toko, rum wala, lania diena.

aground ape 1.

ag^e mata'i, wanga.

aid miihl. maal 1., pe'L

aim hana 2.

air maalau, mango, ooni, nwatohuna.

oiktfi tftkihe-.

alarm ha'aaaire'i, ha'apaiasL

alight Va 5., pun.

aiigfU adj., akau« eso.

aUhe h&'idadanga, hfl'iaada, Mda.

oUw mfturi, m&omeiiri'e, mamanrita'a.

all ahuta-, hauni, mftni, mango.

aOat 'alali, ha'aado. ni'i. wate.

aUow lio maai, maai 1.. toU 'ad, tolimaaf.

almost hini'i. kara'L

aloft 'ala'a, 'alenga, la'a, ilengi. ta'e.

atone hale'ite, hftU'ite. hahaltelL

along i epine, i suU, rail.

oloqf' aho'a.

aloud ha'ada'i. ha'ata'i, flengl pSIne, toto-

longa'ini.
already 'oto* qftni, 'upunL
also lo'u 5.

alter hele aopa, hl'une, hl'iiM, hnHri.
altercate ere ha'isuni, ha'aere, wSiteo* wetnven*
dltemate\a:itidA,
altogether ha'ahuu'anl, ha'ahntt'ei, haiini, mSnlt

mangomango, to'uhmingana, to'ohau*

nge'L
always 'oni'onl, suli he'idinge.
amidst i denume, i matola-.
amiss pele, tala 4., tototala.
among hike, i matola. 1 Mar, i ale*.
amulet mfingite.
aiKcstor wftuwe.
anchor hftu ni hnne, hunata.
and na, mana, pe'i, mwana.
anew ha'alu 2., ha'olu, lo'u 5.» mana.
anger hft'iore, saewasu.
antjle suusuu 1.
oMe koukou li 'ae,
anldet 'uru mwado.
annoy SUte'inl, ba'asauni. kotaahi.
anoint nue, ra.
another nga'eta, ngaite.
answer 'ala, 'alama'ini, 'alamL
ant duidui, hulihuli, lolo, sane.
antennae kakawe, waowao 2.
anticipate kokela'ini. rorahl.
anxious adoma'i su'asu'ate'e, ikule'l* neliae

to'ote'e.
any ngaile, ngaini, nga mwaile^ nga mnlnl*

ta'ana, ta'ena, iteitana.
apart 'aho'a, ftuhora, hoka, sild 1.
apiece ado, oa 1.
apparition anoa, haeta.
appear haata'i, haeta, mannmenn, mm ta'a,

uwota.
appease ha'arako, to'ora'ini.
apply raoha'inL

117

APPOIHT

ii8

appoitU baVured. holoai. bolota'ini. topo.
appoHUm '«laU. ba'ado. ni'i, opa. wate.
approach aori 2., duduhi, nanauhi, Voha'inL

'o*ohi, Busuhi.
areca 'e'e, kuru. mftuta'a, pile. pua.
arm nima, nimanfma. nime, nlnimc
armiei hato, kakamiml* kokome. ngfluiiceu

nime, pore, qaio haa.
armpii qaeqae.

around haahi. honota-, kflli, kftlikeli, paiaai.
arraMg4 koni. ne'i. aamanga'ini. si'o kooL
orrtM arapuu. hole 1.

arrom dede qalu* omo» oa 4., •uutefau, topa 1.
as domana. mala 1.. urihana, waruna.
ascend hane, haneta'a, tahda'i.
ashamed mamakine, maaa.
ashes ora 2., qaaaora.
aside 'e*eli. liu aopa, palilL
ash doled, ha'atohu, hftii, aoi. suke.
assanU arial. polahl, puiiU. sibolL
assemble ahdidu, loko. ruru.
assent 'alama'inl, 'alaqa'u. mwa'emwa'e.
assert unu lete. uau meuta'a.
assign ha'aado. holoti 3.
assist maai, pe'l, pe'ini.
asthma malo.
astray 'e'eli. takalo.
astride ta*e odoodo. ta'e ha'aholo.
asunder makaka.
ol hai 2., i 1.. ta'i 2.. wii 5.
at aU ba'aisi. ike. 'oto Vo.
aionemeni hiri. tapa olisi. uraa'l.
attach raoha'ini. ]akoma*ini, nkoma'iiii.
attach mama'ingi, polahi.
attain hulaana. su'aana. tflu taha, usu ta'a.
attempt dftu adooga. dftu ni. hala.
auni nike. teitd.
avenge hon> i tala, miu ola.
aeoid peinuhi.

awahe ha'aUo. ha'ataliai. lioUo. tftlid.
away mwaani, wflu.
awe mftute'i ra'aianga-.
awhile ha'awall. kft'u 4.
awhward mftttmeuli'e.
axe h&u 2., 'lie 4., ngftdL

habUe ro'irori.

baby 'elekale. mwela werewere. weewee.

bach kolu. purl; adv„ ftliho'i. 'oil. 'olle'i. hft'i'oli;

taalenga
bachbone suli odo. suU qeri 1 ngae.
bad 'aela, tata'ala; kftsu. mftpusu.^^oMU
bag anga, mwfl'i.
bait paa. paaa; 'alata'ini, f.
bahe hflhi. haali.
bale pute; v., dftnu.
baler idenu.
baldhalad,
ball hou meme.

bamboo &u. dana, qirei eu, rata.
banana hudi. piei hudL
6aaJ walo.

bang kokohu. makulu; a., koiikoiihe.
banh 'akere. keke, rao.
barb, nanga.

bare mwakule, qala.

barefaced moMDMa.

bardy aaa. am*!, hinl'i. m 1.. kaia'i. otd 2.

bargain hc^ioro. 'oUai. uaL

barh te'ete'e a.; ku, leko'L

ftarmi amaia. qala.

barter ba'ahoU. boboco. lioU. vuL

bashful maaa, mamaaa'a.

frojJk ha'axaa.

bashet aaga. ite, lu'alu'a, lu'e 3.. mwft'i, tangi 1.

bai ninginingi. nwaJo.

ftollM k>to.

boMefidd ^aoot^Bu

bawl aiai. awanu kakau. tea.

be i'o. la 1., lae. 'o'o 3.

beach i kule, i one, one. qft'ime bftn.

beah q&lumi. wawa.

bear anga'l. hde. kftni, walenga'i; ha'ahatc,

hungu.
beat daro. hide. horo. iftpa, dltuii; lili qana.
beating daro'Uaiuu maai repudlaiia.
beautiful hinoli'a, kohi. mwane diSna. laia'L
because ana 7.. 'aehotalaiia. i »'*i^'^*'*^. i nimn-

haana. tala'aefaana.
bechon 'aia qft'u, 8ak>hL
become ne*i, no'i; oifilifli.
beetle mftnu. orooro'a.
b^ore hola*i na'o, i na'o.
beforehand kokela'i. rotahi.
beg 'a'ada'ini. ftitana'i ha'atohu.
beget 'aehota. ha'ahute.
begin 'aehota. tala'ae; ad». al 1.
beginning 'aehoralann. tala'aebana.
beguile ero. kae.
behave i'o. nftku. 'o'o 3.. tola.
behavior i'ola-. i'onga.
behind i puri.
belch ora lulu.
believe hiiwala'imolL
beUy 'aqa 2.. i'e 3.. 'oqa*
belong ana 3.. to'oana. to'ola-.
below haha 1.. i'ano. i haha. i oioha-, i ka'o.
belt lokoqaio, loro to'oni.
bend lolo 1., lo'u 4.. lo'une, oroha'i. oRMna'i;

a., 'alo'u. lo'u'e.
beneath i 'ano, 1 haha. i kao.
bent 'amaoro, mak>'u, matoa, mwahiohio*

mwaoroha'L
beseech fiitana'!. tola tuu'L
beset 'aqata'ini.

beside i epine. i keke, i raona. i reune, iaulL
besom korekore. tala 5.
betel oha, oha ni me'esu.
betray qelo.

betroth aharo, ngftu ni sulanga, rongo kenL
between i matola.
beware lio tala.

bewilder lole. pangara'ini. pu'o.
bewitch si'ohi.
beyond li'ite, likite, 'oto wftu. po'o wftu. qft'n

ni paro. qft'u wftu.
bid ha'atola, hft'iusunge'i. 'una.
big pftine. pftipeina'a. pangupangn raha, loa i.
bill qftlusu.
bind hiri, hoo, qftau.
bird mftnu.
birth ha'ahutanga, hutda.

119

CATCH

bit fthuhue*i ola, dodoago* 'ele. kflrikeri. kde

me'it ko'ukohui poo. maapou, mflsi 2.,

me'i. musii 'elili, 'u'u tolo, waawaatanl

I'au
biU 'ala 3., sapo.
Mferahaa.

black lo'ilohi'e, piilu. pulupulu'e. aawaoli'e.
bladder mind.
blade maa4.
blame 'i'ite 2„ Tite'lni.
blasi esoesoha, mawaha.
bUue eao, ngangau. talau.
bliss dflhi, dfl'idehi'e, ba'adahi, ha'adiana.
blind ha'a'olu. 'ulu.
bUsier qa'arete. tarapiu.
block h&u 3., hai 4., ape bono.
Nootf ftpu.

bloody ftpule, M 'epule.
blossom taka.

Mow mawa, ooru* 'uhi 3.; fi. maai repusUana.
blue melumelu'a'a, pulupulu'e, to'orodo.
blunt kumu. ngo*a.
6oar ora4.

board hapa, r&i dango, riU *ei, riU hapa, rflureu.
boast ere ani leu honu, ha'atoba'ini, wawa

efaoefao.
6ody npe.

boil ha'aohu, koo. ohu 1.. pii; n., 'upu'e.
bond'WBk}.
bone Bu'isull, susuli.
boom h&u lili qana.
border 'akerena, i keke, i ngoongoo, 1 raona,

1 reune.
bore halo, hoto'i.
bom hate.

borrow Uhue'ini, suke.
bosom TOTo 2., lotoma'i sae, saro*
both ahutaaa ro ola.
bottle hou 'atea, hou wel.
bottom kao>
bougk SBoaxtL.

bound pola liliki, reke; ho'o.
boundary honohooota, nisita, ta'itelihana.
bow If., pAsi; v., qfl'utou, Vonuto.
bowels 'oqa, sae.

bold nime 2., nime aarasaxa, maraohu; v., 'a'a 5.
bowstring ilok>, pulo 2.
boy 'eiemwane. mwane, m^vau, mwda, mwela

mipvane, mwemwela, filural.
boyhood haoraha-, mw£Umweiha.
brace lape'i, roro'i; n., ro.
brackish 'fldle, maraohu'e. qaaqi'a.
brain qango 3.

branch luluhu. saaara, 'ulu'ulu 2.
breadfruit pa'ale'o.
break aaio, *ala 4., ba'alede, ha'amousi,

ha'aqa'ali, h&li, bite, lede, makasi,

mousi, nisi, papali, papata'ini, pota,

qa'ali, qa'asi, radu.
breast susu. rotoma'i aae.
breath mango 2., mangoi ola.
breathe mamango, mangomango 2., malo 2.,

poepoe.
breed ha'ahute.

bride hu'e ha'alu, keni ha'alu (ha'olu).
bridegroom poro ha'alu (ha'olu).
bridge tatalauhe, huruhuru.

bright marariro'a. raa, rere'a, wana, wanga-

wanga.
brilliant huhurere'a, maiare'a, nuenuala, laia-

nga'a.
brim maa 4., wairona.
bring tola, tole.

brink qa'asuUlana, i raona, i reune.
bristle n., uhu. waraihu. warauhu.
broad 'ahola, lalo'a.
broU ausungl 2., su'isungi, uunu 1.
broken 'a'o'i, ma'o'i, mari'iri'i, ISlngu holo,

madou 2., makaka. makaka'a.
brood v., aro 2.
broom korekore, tala 5.
brother 'fi8i-2., 'ule-.

brother^inrlaw 'ftsi-, ihe-, ro aihana, ro mwalhana.
brow dara, na'ona dara.
bruised hudJhudi'e, maelupu'e, maputaputa.
brush kore, tala 5.
bubble hutohuto. ohu 1.
bud'vae4t.
buffet hideli, lomoai.
build dflu nime. tftu nima, ha'auresi, tohu nime;

800 tete.
bulge suule'L
bump lupunge'ini. taate'e, tatate'ete'e, to'o-

lupu.
bunch adai, hungu, hunguha, hunguta, huu.
bundle lokota. ihoo, putaputa, pute.
burden ludaa. ludanga.
bum eeo, ha'amamu'i, mSlmu, raahl, talau,

uunu 1., wftru*
burrow 'ell. hfti 5.
burst qa'a, utakoia.
bury 'anomi. aori, 'eti tala, hft'itoli, hfi'itoli-

nge'inL
bush *Sd 1., dango, ma'usu, me'esu, mou, tolona

hfinue.
busy him. hinmga'a.
busybody polahiwaaa.
but ta'a 7., ta'e 6., ta'e pe'ini.
butter Jly pepe.

buttock moro 3., popo 2., qote.
buy holi, holoholo 3., hohoro, uai.
by ana 2., ftni 2., i keke. i raona, i reune. i saa,

i sie. i 8uli.

cacJde tatarao, toteu.

call arai. awara, ha'ara'i, sol.

calm holaa.

can mwadausL

cane 'ohu 3., ue 3., wale.

canoe 'iola, 'iola saxa, lusuinume, ta'a ta'e,

ta'e hai, U'e 'olu.
capsite 'akeu. kflusi, oha'l, qaoha'inL
careful ha'akeneta'i, h&'ikeneta'i, keneU'i.

kineta'i. raerae.
careless tftuteu. ta'ewau.
cargo ludaa, ludanga.
carry anga'i, anga'ini, 'apala, hu'e 3., lude,

poonga'ini, tola, to'o q&'u, walenga'ini,

wawala.
came fldu. Sldumi, diu 2., didi.
cast 'a'a 5., 'asi 3., daro, dere. 'u'i, 'uik'inl*

eikera'ini.
castrate uweli.
catch kftusi. talaahu'e. tapoli.

CATERPILLAR

1 20

caUrpiUwt muno.
ca9€ hahale, Uwe.
cauik pulu'i.
.caus€, v., dftu 1., ha'aola, tftu; n,, 'mt'mtim,

'aehotalana, tala'aehana.
cease mon, moutoU, noto. rohu* toli cracre.

to'o moutana* toll roha, tuu 1.
cement puiu 3.
centipede aliha. flluhe.
chafe haraai. rotoa'lni, Mttaa'i, all 3.
chamber fthi, 'atohono.
champ kokolu. sapolL
change Aiu. ha'alUi. hl'iui. bo'itana, ho'ite'L

hu'isi. hu'itana. hu'ite'l. lapi, lie 2^

'oU. 'dUsi.
ckannd ta'ataha, taha. tahalaa. iikui ta'ataha.
charcoal lo'ilohi.
charge ha'atolaofa'liii, 'luu llengi, *usa naa;

rari.
charm fi., mfingite. sShu 2., ri'onga; 9., iBru'l,

toli loosi. walaagL
chase p&i l.» pftni. pee 1.
chaUer 'e'engo, diodioru, kotaa, ona* 101190

'aeia.
cheai ero, kae.
dbM^papaU.
cheer ha'aape, ilenimwa'e, rike, ntke, «ie dodo,

sae rukeruke.
chest duni, toitoi; mango 2., Me.
chew daweri, koikoi, kokolu. ngflai. nffero'L

aapolL
^Am/ alaha. inemauri. latOb
child 'elekale. 'elekale were were , kalet mwela,

mwda werewere, wee wee*
chUdrhearing ha'ahute mwela, kale'a.
chin saaate.
chinh waawaata.
chip dahe, didi. diu, tere, will; «., masi 'ei,

ngangai dango. nganganJ 'ei, dkitanj

'ei, rikitei dango.
chipped 'apaiu.

choose hili. 'iUsi. Uo hiliai, lio huni.
chop huule'ini, kobu 2., tapa, tftpl, tohu 1.
chorus hfl'ioangL
cinnamon madou.
circuit kflli. kftri waaio.
dam *ime.
dap bide.
daspBko,
clatter kole.
daw ki'iki'i.

day 'ano mola, mwado wftni.
dean rere'a; r., ha'arere'a.
deanse hoda.
dear fthurefaa, dingadinga, hahuroto, haha'iteli,

langalanga'a, manola, mataqa, tam-

waodo; tr., rfti, «de.
deave hite, bite pewa'ali, tftngi, tohn 1., toha

hiteU. wa*aU; hataa'inU rilnbe'L
d^ ta'ataha, tahalaa.
dinch lokune, rete hflu.
dever aaai ola, salema'i.
diff haneta'anga, hanetahanga* o«uii kaiekaie,

qa'asulilana.
dimb hane, hane'i, hanenga'inL
ding lalako, nanako, rftuhe'ini.
cUp olo 3.

doae Ihtt'i 2., dftn kell, ha'apuU, lioiiono> para

ahu'i, ponoii; mitmu, a4/-t kara'ini.

pum, puruponiVa.
dosa-^ut kou.
doth misala^Mla.
dioud mamah wal, ixModo. rorodo'a, mIo.

tira3.
douded kokolioiio, iqixkIo, rarodo'a.
dmb ahtil 1., die, kiakia, mata. pa'nwa'ata.

•upl, tarairi.
dmb^oot qa'i 4.
dump huu 1., lolo'a ni 'eL

coati v.. batale; «.. hatale'a.

a>6««fr lawa.

cochatoo eke.

eochle hadonga, hena, meogo, iiangoda.

eochroach mwaidL

cocomta niu; kokola, madell, opu* poitpoa l.»

'nlu'iila 1.
(ojlere 2.

colled aio 1., oio konl, ilo maanL
color oape.
oMi^arapa.
combine loko.

come dudtt, hule, lae, aiiralil, wa'u 6.
come out ftu ta'a, man, t§u ta'a, am taluL
contmand ha'atolanga'iiii* uaniige'liiL
common ta'ewaa, ULutea.
compad ea'oha'inL

companion dama, maHa-, oa 2., peile-.
company Mlidanga. HMdangalMU benlMMUU

pulitaa, korube, laelia.
compassion 'amaai, hfti'amad.
compensate hiri 2., tolo 1.
complain uqe, ngara tahela'L
compete ftbu 1., mango 1.. ma]igomaii0ii»

mouqeli.
ecMitfM< mumiinL
omkWw 'aehota, lodo.
concerned poi 2., po'ote'e.
concerning ana, haabi, xa'aiangaiia.
conch 'Ahuri.
condition tolaba.
condemn Ti 1., leL
conduct v., ba'apulonga'ini, na'o, tole* 'nre-

nga'ini; n,, tolaba.
confess ha'abou, una tabanga'InL
confident oae moute'i, aae suau.
confirm ba'asumi, ha'ato'o, lape'L
confused k)le, pu'o, qft'alange'i, waaawaaa'a.
consent 'alama'ini, mwa'emwa'e.
conspicuous langa'a. langalanga'a.
constantly 'oni'oni, taraa, taraure'L
consult mftni wala, qft'u ni wala.
contend hfl'itobe, bft'ipani'i. bftukama.
continue konito'o. sura 4., •uusuu, taraasi,

taiao. tarau, taraube'lnL
contort bubu laolao ana wa'L
contrad laraai, ruuai.
conlradid ere ha'itobe.
contribute tete, wilL

convey ba'apak>nga*ini, tole, 'uienga'inL
cook ba'ali'e, ha'aopo. bflbi, koo, tale, tuaungi;

su'iaungi, uunu.
cooked mali'a, madoo.
cool wa'arara. wa'arau'a.

121

DIFFER

copy ha'amaani bft'lmaani. ha'amala, maant

coral bfta haa, kftu 2.

cofd *m 3., i'eU. walo.

core nini, uto.

cork qaito.

comer suiaa'i, auusuu.

corpse kUamoa. qft'u 'ftpula. rae.

correct ha'aodo, odo.

cougfi htt*u 5.

counsel kw'inge.

coumt idu 1.

country hftnue.

courtyard 'amaa. lolata. maia ntune.

co9enant «., ha'alunge. hft'Uiolota'inge; #••

ha'alu.
cover v., aluhi, mwana 1., ponod. qaicdia'l; «.,

maa. ponopono.
covet aae hanali. sae to'oa'i ola.
covetous malalahtt'e.
cower 'aqa 1.
cowry pull 1., puli 'ehl'e.
crab ao 2., 'ahe 3., Icuka, qft'i ao, 'u'e 6.
crod^ kokohu, makulu, ngaangaa 2., qa'a 1..

qa'arakau. ualapoa.
cracked lo'a 3., qa'a, wa'ahite.
cradde watamea* tU.
CTds^y laomaenga.

cram poe 3., sum harehare, to'oni 2.
crojA makulu, ngaxa loulou.
crawfish ore nl 'esi. ura.
crawl 'anco 1.. Udu.
creak awaleo. ngangadi.
crease hirorl 1.
create ha'ahola.
creep ango, huto 2.
creeper walo.
cripple lilidu. to'u 3.
crocodt^ huasa.

£rooA ikeu, mud! 2., tangatanga.
crooked mwa'elu, mwahi. mwalwto.
cro^ 9.. *iiil 5.
cross v., holod, la'onl, la'oogi, likW. tapallu.

ulu holo; adv., ha'aholo; »., ftUipo'u,

po'upo'u.
crotch tanga.
croton alaala.

crouch adaoro, 'fthihi, 'aqa 1., hihi.
crow kokorako, tatarao.
crowd ha'apttli, ruungi, tftkuruhi; 9»., honulaa,

mwala, pulitaa.
«rvwfihalaltaiia,ho'odara, roiodara. 'uie'ttrena.
crumb ahuhu'e. nganga, urate.
crush hlte menasl, pilL
crushed maldede. main<*nam<*na, ma'oTo'L
cry arai, awara, kakau, ngara, ulo.
ofdboo tazasioko.
cuU hu'vuL 'ini.
cup kaokao.
cupboard duru.
cure kure 1.
curl ftli, loiod.

curse ere hfl'ihonoa'i, hSldi, id, uwesi.
curve tepeu
cuscus huto 1.
cut aha 2., hoa 1., hurl, kala, kohu 2., Usi, nisi,

topa. tori 1.

cuttlefish monaki.

daily sull haudinga, sull he'idinge.

dam «.. koho; v., ponqsL

damage mala maal, wa'eli, ware.

damp makina'a, qesa'a, qini'a, waoni'a.

danu mao 1.

danger maelaa, aiohaa'i maelaa.

dare adoma'i mousi. ne'iaae moute'L

dark rodo, rodohooo; rodoha'i, rodoma'i,

rorodo'a.
darken ha'arodo.
darkish marawa, maramarawa*a.
dash papata'ini, pola.
daub mole, 'usuiL

daughter 'etekeni, kele keni, pule, teiteL
daughter4n4aw hungao-, kenL
dawn ha'ibora'i. mahu'ohu'o, wa'ali'e.
day atowa, dftni, dftngi, h&*idinge, hftudinga.
daybreak maiawani dent, mahu'ohu'o, wa'ali'e.
dtuide manure'a.
dead inae*
deafpuaga.

deal hohofo, hoU; 'alali. ha'aado, ni'inl'i, Pirate.
dear diena, maa'i 2., madu.
dearth hi'cdoiiga. talenga.
death maenga, maeta.
iMl roro'a, roro'anga.
decay kfisu, oea.

deceit etongiBL, kaenga. nomaeoga.
deceive ero, kae, lopo'i, qftlL
deck ma'emahe; »., mwanamwana.
declare ha'ahou, ha'ata'inl, hoa 4.. 'unu 1.
decorate ha'alauni, Iftuni, muma.
decoy ha'atanauhi, ha'amamu.
deep aaa. dodo, kokoro, lade mae.
d^ecate he'a 1.
defend ere talihe, Iftu haahi. para'ite-» talohi,

'ure ahu'i, 'ura paraaL
deficient ore 1., tale.

defile ha'awa'a. lo'u 3., louhanga'a, mafaa.
d^y parangasi, hankama.
degrees duuduu. raqaiaqa'a.
delay ha'ahiru, ha'awali, hiruai, 'oniteu; «••

hirunga'a.
ddirious *ot*oc.

deliver hft'i'a'auhi, hfl'iteuhi, luhek>k>.
dense pono. rerei)ono.
deny ere talihe. taate'inge'iiii, ulapo, wala'a

odooda
descend siho, slhola'i. aiho toll.
descendant wfluwe.
desert n„ hanue aala, hflnua aaaala, maana'o*

na'onga; v., pola mwaaxii, tiUd.
desire hft'ihuni, hfirihuni.
desist noto. rohu, toll 6., toUaa.
desolate Vo nl leu qala, maana'o. na'onga, aala

4., al'ohaa, waa 1.
despise adairi, hii'aela, mama'ila'a, mama'ingl»

mwaka 1.
destroy duuhe'ini, ngoli, suuhe'ini. ware.
detach aikile'inl.
device loo'inge, loona'inge.
dew ara 1., waoni'a.
diarrhea tao.
die fti 8UU, mae, miu 1.
differ aopa.

DIFFICULT

122

dijM^ni manra.

dig ftbitre, 'eU. 'ellhe'i.

diUginU ha'ainta. mwa'emwa'e. rara 1.

dim wahawaha'a. waaawaaa'a.

diminish kumwe, lueli. luengl.

din 'e'engo. kotaa, rongo 'aela.

dip ha'adodo, lotoma'ini, sua 1., toongl; ii.,

ftliholo, ririholo.
dirt 'ano. mwado, mwakana* mwakano. qiqi.
dirty mada'a, mwadola, mwakano'a, qiqi'e.
dish nima. nime.

disobey ahilu. hft'itohe, lalawa, aSre'L
disorderly mwa*uu, teroUu.
disposition manata. manatanga.
dispute ha'aere. haore. ha'isum, wftiteu, wala-

haii, wauwau.
distant 'aho'a. ha'atau.
distinct maopaic^MU
distinguish haha'iteU. hahiteli. UeU. Uo aaai.

opa.
distress ha'aletehinga, motaahinge, ai'ohaanga;

v., motaahi, kotaahi. had kokoai.
distribute ha'aado. ha'aohum, m'U wate.
disturb hurosi, ikule'i, iolaha. aasae; adj.^

mahuro^
dive 8UU 1.

diverge flliu. 'e'eli, liu aopa,
divide hiteli, opa, nisi.
divine dflu dunge. dunga ni bftu. hahuto'o.

ilala.
diny ta'iere.

do arikosi, da, dflu. hele, palo, qao. ta, tftu.
docUe manata. rako.
dodge talohi.
dog 'uau 9.
door hohono. maa.
dot pulu maai sen.
doubU lo*u 4.. kftUtei'a. aaoha'ini.
doubt adoma'l ntama'a. ne'iaae ruenia'a. tae

merua'a.
dove heheoku, hiroiku, taqarum.
down hao, hou. i'ana qa'i 'ano, aiho.
down fi., ta'atakai rate.
drag oke, pOnlle'ini, wft'L
dragon-Jty ta'ataxa w&i.
draw oke; kere; tftluhi.
dread niniko'a.

dream ma'ahn pole, ma'ahu qole.
dregs hero, pali kao.
drift hatara, koeola'ini, tara.
drill halo; n,, hak>« idu 3.
drinh ilu, inu.
drip ha'auduhi, mudimudi 'ura, mwimwidi

'ure, 'udu; ii.. 'udu'uduhe.
drive pani. panitora, pee.
driale nemo ra'aiara.
droop fthuhu. maia'i heutaa, tengotengo.
drop domu, ha'ausuli 1.* teke, tete, toll, toli

semi, 'ttsu 11.
dropsy pule. pura.
drought "tro ni sato.
drown ha'adodo, ha'a'o'oni, ha'ainuhi, ha'ato-

nohi.
dr ow sy mamaum'e.
drum Vo 2.. paia ni 'o'o. ri'i. taha Vo. toU 9.;

v., 'iki 2.

drumsiich kokol ta'o.

dry adj., 'a'ate. 'ate'ate. rango. laia 2.; v.,

ha'alaaga; ha'amaa. ha'araa, raiasL
dmckn., aianga.
duck v., ha'adodo, qft'uto'u.
Alii knmu, rorodo'a.
dumb 'amumu, panguu. qe'u eraere.
dun 'a'ada'ini.
dung 'ae, oraora 2.

duration di. ha'awali, qftni, wftlte; n., mahola.
dusk aAulehi mdumeltt.
dwt mwakano loho. mwamwatekola, 'u'a-

mwado. wahawaha ni mwada
dusty f ., ahuoia.
dwarf did! 1.. U'lki'i ni inooi. mftsi 3.. ride nl

'inonL
dwdt nOku, i'o, i'o ni deonge. 'o'o 3.
dwindle kumwe.
dye 'atoni, to'ongL
dyseniry 'ftpu.

each ta'ena. ta'ana, iteitana.

Mgifhada.

ear 'ftlinge.

ear ornament flu tusu, eha wou wt m .

early ha'ahu'o. mahu'ohu'o

earnest n.. ha'a i mwe'i; hfl'Irara.

earth 'ano, mwado. mwakana. mwakano.

earthquake nunu 1.

east i matawa, i qa'alana tato. ta'an, ta'e.

easy mwadau.

eat 'amadi, ngaa, ngangau, ngfla, oka.

eaves pipiai. riridi.

ebb kumwe. mfli 2.

echo qa'alinge.

eddy 'ahe him, flU lo'a.

edge flpi. keke, maa 4., rflu 2., wairona.

ed hauho.

egg apota, hoi kue, hoi menu, mwaopu. saolu.

^ect 'asi 3., dere, 'u'Ue'ini.

dastic mwaeroero, mwaohe; «., walo lala'i,.

wak) dududu.
elbow suusutt 1.

eloquent ere taha'iraa, saai eie.
elsewhere ana nga'eta le'u, ana ngaite lehu.
embark ni'i 'ae. ta'e 4.. ta'eU 'ioia.
ember lo'Oohi.
embrace ako'i, 'apala 4.
emerge flu ta'a.

empty oreord ola, qala, waawaa, wawae.
enable nanama'ini, takaahi.
endose dflu keli. hono aiainge'i. para ahu'i. tftti

kflli.
encounter dflu to'o, hfl'iodo'i, hfl'isn'esu'e, 0oda«
encourage ha'aape ne, ha'amauta'a aae.

ha'aaufu ne.
end ha'amangolana* ngooogoo, to'o moutana;

v., ha'amango, niai, tflUmfia; ha'a'uresL
endeavor dflu ni, hala ni, tflu muni.
endure Vo suau. i'o auaule'i. toii aeau.
enemy maeloonga, 'apani mae.
energy v., hfl'irara, hde winiwini; ik, aakanga.
engaged hiru.
enlighten ha'amataqali, ha'amataqasi, raangi»

ainelL
enlightenment mataqanga ni aae.
enough adona, hfl'idadanga, hunge, aada.

123

FIT

tn^uire dolosi, sol. aoi heri.

enkmgUd 'ftiwald'a, t^'ipupu'e; v„ hikusi. ULri

2.. to'oha'l qe'tt.
enter OIL
entice ha'amamu. ha'ariro* ha'atanauhi.

entire h&'Ueku. UUni* mangomanso, pupupu.

entraUs'oqtu

entreat aitana'i. tolaa'i, tola rau'i.

envelope v., fiho'i, ulo; «.» bulehule, uloulo-

'itana.
envy lio i kekeni maa, lio i ngaei inaa* sae

iinuhi.
e^ual n,, dama; adv., hft'idadaosa, sada.
err aopa. 'e'eli, pele, takalo.
error dflu pelenga, takaloba.
estahlisk ha'a'ure'si.
eternal huu 2., 'oto di.
even h&'idadanga, iada; noone.
evening BBLukM.

ever huu 2., 'oni'oiii* 'oto di. 'oto 'o'o.
every ahutar, ta'ana, ta'ena.
everything ahutana mu ola, ta'ana nga ola.

ta'ena nga ola, walnmolani ola. walu-

tananga ola.
everywhere SUiusie mu le'u.
evil 'ada. dft'ita'a, UU'ala.
exact odohana, odohaana.
exalt tahda'ini, toro 2.
example 'ae. peapea, tolalia.
exceedingly^wopa^ hi'ito'o, Uu. liuta'a, oiaha'a,
> 1m to'oliu, wa'ewa'e, walawala.
excessive Jwft'u, hunge.
exchange h&'ilu'u. 'oliaL
excite 'akolu, ikule'i. iolaha, ta'ela'l, tatanga-

lungalu.
excrement 'ae, huui 'ae.
excuse ha'a'inoni, lopo'i ere, lopo'i kae, lopo'i

wala'a.
exhort hfl'itorangi, torangL
expect totori, maa toto. ma'ohi.
expire mango suu, toli'asi mango.
explain hatooga'ini, lado diena. 'unu taha-

nga'inL
extend &huai, lala'inL
exuU manawa, tahola'i mata.
eye maa; v.. ba'akale, ha'amaesi 2.
eyelid hinuhinui maa, hiruhiru ana maa.
eyebrow maranga i maa.

face maa. na'o; v., na'o, saro.

fade fthuhu.

faggot iho'oi dango, iho'ol 'ei.

fail huutala, pele, mwamwasu'i, tala. tototala.

faint mango toll, olo ana hi'ola ta'iere.

fair eke, erete'a, aasangota'a; odo.

faith hiiwala'imoUnge.

fall 'SJhu, 'duru, ftnguni, domu, Iada, maia-

pute'i, r&pute'i, teke, toll, 'usu 11.,

wa'uru.
false ero, ha'akae, ha'amenamena, kae, rao-

falsehood eronga, kaenga.

fame houla-, taloha, taroha.

family komu.

famine hi'olonga. talenga, talengaha.

famish mae su'esu'ela'i.

famous hou keli, hou lilikeU, mftnikulu'e.

fan «., tetere; v„ terehi.

far 'aho'a, ba'atau.

fast Ululeu, Iftuleu'a, nanamu, tatawlsiwisi;

mftuta'a, papau, pA'ipeal, pasipaa; v„

ha'ahili, ma'ahu mala 'iola, ma'ahu

qalawala, olo ngau, toll ola, toll ngeulaa.
fat mangoni, mwomwona, qi*e; «.. rftkuhe.
father 'ama-, ma'a, mama'a.
faihom tahanga.
fatigue rahe, we'o.
faidt dftu wala, roro'a.
favor lio maai, lio nanama'ini, lio sae to'o.
favorite kale madu, mwane diena, mwane

maa'i.
fear maa'u, mft'u, mA'u la'aranga.
feast kioulaa, ngftuhe, t£Luhe.
feather ihu. waraihu.

feebh mamaela'a, peto, qeto, qake mware'a.
feed ha'angau, ni'i, sangomi.
fed hii.

feign lopo'i deu, lopo'i teu.
fdlow dama, oa 2.
female keni, qaqa 2.
fence Uliheu, para, sasa, suluheu, tete 6., 9.»

paza, aeae, sio tete.
ferment hane 3.

fern dimwe, laqa, minge luulkra.
fester oropa, oea.
festoon 'ama'ama, mahe, wftki.
fetch lae 'ohi, 'ohi 1., tola, tole.
fever daohanga madoro, maenga mamadaO*

madoronga, mata'i, wanga.
few mwamwanga, mwanganga.
fiber mwarite, sSiaemu, s&mu, sn'e, walo.
fierce mama'ingi, mamakola, melaha.
fight ha'ihoro'i. hft'laeuni. oho, wft'i oda'i.
figure sape.
fiU dede'i, ha'ahonu.
jSZmahoaho.
filth mada'anga.
fin nangananga.
final ha'amangolana.
find odo'i. ha'aro'i, soohL
fine hiritaa; sato.
finger ki'iki'i. ri'iri'i; Ist, 'ini hite; 2nd, 'usu

henue; 3rd, q&'u teroliu; 4th, ftu rarahi;

5th, kftu lomolomo.
finish ha'amangOt mango 1.
fire dunge; hana 2.
firdfrand potoi, usu 'ei.
firefly pulupulu.
firewood 'fti, dango.
firm halahala. mauta'a, nga'ingedi, papau^

sulahita, susu 4.; v., ha'amauta'a*

ha'asusu 1.
first 'etana, hola'i, holai na'o; v., ha'ana'ola'inl»

na'ola'ini.
first bom hola'i hute, na'ohai kale, na'ohana kale.
first fruit ha'ana'o, horahora'apu'i.
first time aani, hola'i, d 2.
fish i'e 2.; v., 'aholo, 'a'o, daro 2., hunu 3.,

kfilu. lilie'i, lou 2., ma'ae, moke, aftmu,

toll 2., wa'o, weed.
fist lokunaa nime.
fit adj„ hfl'idadanga, hatonga, mflliai, aada;

v„ daraha'ini, aa'oha'ini.

9LAKB

124

JMe sOdte; t.. didi, will.

/lame enghaana dunge* mf imnhana dtt&fe,

melahai dimge; v.. eso. mca 2., ocm 3.,

talau.
/aM^ poxapaia, nhonho.
jla^ hideli, lopalopa.
JUir€ eso. ail 2.
Jiask nangall'a, nangariro'a.
jfol dadada'a, hu'idada; ape dao. ape aula;

/Uiiien ha'adada. ha'aoada, peaad. faalengail

JIatUr ftpu'i. ha'anko.

/ay aimwe.

>ltapote3.

JUetabL

JUsh hftsi'o. hineau, t&'iteoi.

/csiby hftai'ola.

fiick kopi.

jfincfc mama, niniko'a.

Jling 'asi 3., dere, 'a*i

floai mftnu 2.; n., u'o.

Jlock 'alaa, haka 4., koruhe, konitaa, pulitaa.

jfoff daio. iftpuaL

Jhod koae, luelue.

Jhisam mataraha, ramarama.

Jlow 'ahe 1., kone. lue 2., onuu ramarama,

tahe3.
Jhwer taka 1.
/»ttf rumu, aulu 5., wfti 1.
JhOier k>ho, tere 'apa'apa. tete 'apa'apa.
Jly «.. laitgo, lango nl ne.
jly v., loha
/oam hutohttto.
fold lulungi. nukumi.
fottow 'ahe isuli. lulu iauli, aulu iauli* tuauli,

'usuli, totola i 'ae.
food ngauha. ngaulaa.
fool herohero, kflni oe. papaku'a, qe'u 1.
fool 'a'ae, 'ae, peapea.
fooihold 'uriurite.
fooiprini 'a'ae, peapea.
forbid ere 1.. ere luu'i, ha'a'apu. hAdi.
forefather wftuwe-.
forefinger 'usu henue.
forehead dara. na'ona dara.
foreign haka 3., matawa.
forerun hurulaa, na'ooa'o.
foresi ma'usu, me'esu. mou 2.
forget pulongo. aae rorodo.
forgive ne'isae 'asi, sae 'asl.
fork matanga, tangatanga.
form lioha-, liota-, aape.
former holai na'o.
formerly hola'l, i na'o, 'oto di, 'oto qanl, 'oto

waite* waite.
fornication 'ae'aeniolanga. tarie'i nl wala.
forsake lae mwaani, tfthi mwaani, toU'aaL
forth kei ana, ta'a 4.. taha !•• 'ure ana.
fortieth haine nga awala.
forty hai awala ha'ahuu.
forward ada wau. ata wau, odo. paro» ta'au,

taraaai, taiao, tarauie'L
/osier aangoni.

foundation, poopoota. qooqoota.
fount hulaa, hulahula, huuna waL
four hai 1..
fourth haine.
fowl kue.

fragment ahuhu'ei ola, ngangai ola, maapoa.

maholo.
free Vo tohu. mamaware. aapemawa; ».•

luheloki. Inhed. toU'aat
freely mola'a, ni'i mo, ni'i toCo.
freight ludaa, ludanga.
frequent ha'ahunga'a, ha'ahaiife» hungehunga'a.

purupuru'a'a. rarapuupuu.
fresh ha'alu. ha'olu.
friend ha'imalahu-, malahu-.
frighten ha'amalu, ha'amamakina, ha'ama'uai.
fringe mwirimwiri, ngooogoo.
from i 1.. kei 2., mfti 1., mwaanl, 'me.
frond ahrake*
front maa, na'o.
froth hutohuto.
frown 'ala ngingita.
fruit hoi 1., huftal 'ei, hue, huehuei dango;

v.. hungu.
fuel 'fli, dango.
fuU-grown rato, repo.
fungus 'ftlinge 2.
/MrHulungL
further adv., tarao. taiaaai, tarauie'L

gain tfiri 1.

gall loka. pulu 2.

gapped makere. pilomo.

gape awanganga, kakahite.

garden hohola, lalo 4., qftinaa, qft'u 4.. kalona.

gargle koukou 2.

garland mahe.

gasp ilele malo, mango mek, poepoe.

gate maai para.

gather aheUdu, loko, rum, a'io 1.

gaae aonga'i, lio hahuroto. maakahl, to'oma'L

gentle mahuru, mfllumu. rako.

gently anene.

ghost 'akalo, eai, uiehi.

giddy U'iere.

gifi ni'inge.

^^langaai-.

ginger aro 1., lie.

gird ho'o, roxo'i.

girdle lokoqaio, roro to'oni.

girl 'ele keni, kde keni. keni. pule.

give da, ni'i, ta. toU'asL

gUid ilenimwa'e, sae diena. Me diana, aae tike.

aae ruke.
glance tftai.
glide nanamu.

glisten huhurere'a, marare'a, nuenuala.
globe hoLl.
glorious mflnikulu'e.
glory mflnikulu'anga.
glue pulu 3., totonga 1.
glutinous toto'ala, totonga'ala.
gnaw kolu 4., ngero'i.
gnash ngangadi, rete h&u.
go ha'iteu. la. lae, Iftu'ae. tau'ae.
go-4>etuteen ha'a'ureruru, talama'l wala.
good diana, diena.
gourd hena, hena hoto, aOhu.
graft lado.

grandchild qa'aqa, wftuwe.
grant lua. ni'i, toU'aaL
grasp hele, tapo, toki.

125

HUMP-BACKBD

gr^ss hahaliait hfllisi.

grcsshopper oni.

graier 'luu kara.

groiis mola'a, mwakule, qalaqala.

ffraoe »., didi; n., kftlinge, kilu, kiliqe'u. pa'u 3;

adj., maenota
gray crete'a, palapala.
gray hair q&'tt palapala.
grease rftkuhe, rumu.
greasy madali, nimu'e, rumula.
great p&ine, paipeina'a, p&ipeilesu'a, raka.
green arawa, araarawa'a, kohu; marawa,

xnaramarawa'a.
gri^ aae huunge.
frtfi aid niho.
grip puuhara. rodi. toki.
groan awasirahe, la'alapa. ngunguru.
groin tanga.
grope kakalo.
grove huu l.» lolo'a ni 'd.
ground 'ano, hftnue, mwado, mwakano.
grow p&ine» pfisu, pito, po'e 6., qito.
growl ngora i lue.
grndge sae haahi, saeni, sae unuhi.
grumble papanguraaguru, uqe.
gruni ngongora.
guard kakali, noko l.t lara 1.
guesi awata'a.
guide na'ohi.
guUet konokono.
guUy da'ideri'e.
gum hale 2.; pulu 3.. aSUe.
gulp 'ono pola.
gHsh hure'i, pusu.

habit ha'anina, nanoa'i. manata 2.

hades h&nue ni 'akalo; Mah^a. 'Olu Mahiu,

hair ihu, uhu, waxaiha.

hairy hulumota'a, poeo.

half 'apa 1., 'apcto, po'o 4.. ratawaari, teu.

ham 'apahee.

hammer tee 1.

hand nima» nime.

han^ul rftu 4.

hamdiworh talana nime, uauntuana nime.

k^ndU kakata. ki'iki'i; t.. heleaL

handsome hinoli'a, kohi.

hang 'aroro, ha'akuku, knkii 1., U'o 2., repo 3.*

to'i. 'n^n 1.
hanher aae bunflW-
happen taqaoai, tole, to'o.
happy dfihi 4., sae rike, ne nike.
harass ha'aahala'ini, kotaahi, aae ahala'L
harbor au'o 5.. bde 2., namo.
hard hflflipe'iile, mftuta'a, nga'ingedl, ngSai*

papau.
hardly aaa. aaaasa'a.
harm dau hu'iai, ha'atata'alasi, mala maal»

xarool. al'o hu'id.
hannUss manata. maneko, nanakiimae.
hasU ba'iteu. Ifiu'ae, koke, kokela'ini, rorahi.

fOfOFa, tftu'ae.
hat para'imaa.
hatcha hftu 2., 'ile 4.. mILsi ngedi, ngfldi, nini

ngedi. hama.
hate lio qeru ngidu, ngidu 'upu, ngora 'upn.

tata'ala.

hax)e akauri, akaurisi, manata'ini, to'o 2.

hatwh aiakau. kiito. qaohi. tefae, wakio.

hoM laho'a, waha.

he inge'ie. nge'ie. nge'l, nge, e.

head qft'u, rarata.

headlong ladama'i, marapute'i, tataqelaqelu.

heal ha'auri. mola 1., susu 4., to'o 2.

heap koru; »., koniha. korute.

hear rongo, kawa'i.

hearhen qa'arongo.

heart opu 2., aae.

heat madoronga.

heaven apai loa taa'u, i lengl, maalau, aalo.

heavy hi'e.

heedAess ftlunge'L

heel huui aata, kolune 'ae, poupou ni 'ae'ae.

heir oliolite.

help Ifiubi, maai 1., pe'i 2.

helpless i'o ni teo. i'o ni leu qaUu

hdve halo 3.

hence kdkei ilehu, mwaani ilehu* 'ure ile'u.

her inge'ie. nge'ie. nge'i* ft 4.

herd haka 4.; «., kakali.

here 'le 1., ildiu, ile'u, inihou.

hesitate 'i'iloha, maranu

hew ftdu, didi 2.. diu 2., kftni 4., tflngi.

hibiscus leo, reko, t&'itelL

hiccough ikule 2.

hide mumuni. peisuhi; n„ te'ete'e.

high tetewa'a, tewa, uwola'inL

hill hoiliwo, houliwo. toloi henue, tolona hanue.

hilloch hungehunga'a, kokoho'a, au'isungi'e.

torokou'e.
him inge'ie, nge'ie. nge'i, ft 4.
hinder ape hono, ha'ahirud, hiruai.
hinder adj., i puri.
hinder part i purl, kolu- 2.
hire sahali.

his inge'ie, ana, 'ajia, to'oto'olana.
hit dftu to'o, horo, kumu'i, aftuni, to'o.
hitch maai qaro; v., qaro.
hither m&i 1.
hoarse auau 4.
hoary palapala.
hoist hele 'ala'a. ha'a'ureal, aulu la'a, tahda'inl,

wft'i Uengi.
held ako'i, bele, rao 2., tapo.
hole kftlinge, kilu. kiliqe'u, maa. waawaata*

popoaane'a, malamalaii.
hollow kftru'i, waawaa; ».. dft'ideri'e. upe.
holy 'apu. kookoo, maa'i, maea, ola ni mwane.
hooh aroro, hinou, paaa. te'i, toohe'o, tootoo 1.
to^ tomwa.

hope hfl'itotori, ausuto'o, ma'ohi ausuto'o.
hospitable tftkuhi 'inoni, tola koni.
hot madoro, raka, aae ni pelupelu, wana; «.»

ha'adoro, ha'amadom, ha'aopo, mea 2.
house haJe, nima, nume, taoha, toohL
household 'aeinume, ftuhenue, ftunganl nima.
hover aro 2., ha'adau.
how e 'ue.
how many nite.
howl ku 4.. tea. ulo.
hug ako i lue.
hum rou.

humble mfid 2., me'i; i'o ni teo. rft'u 8.. iftute'L
hump-4>ached kosu.

HUHDRSD

126

hundred 'alo, nao, tangalau.

hunger hi'olongiu mae su'asu'ala'L

hunt ha'awaaL

hurry hfl'iteu, koke. rorahi, roconu ttu'ae.

tonogL
hurt hi'ito'o. ittlu 1., aftuni. wft'i 7.. wa'eli,

ware 1.
husband poro.

hush te'ete'e; v.. Ufcai 2.. uhu 2.
hut apaapa 2.. hale.

/ ineu, nou, no, ne; inau. nau, na, ne.

idle alcohe, ka'alawa, lalawa.

if ana 7., mune'i. tftume'i.

ignorant pu'o. ulapo.

ignore rohute'ini.

iguana ihei 3.. tatariaL

ill daoha. mae, mamaela'a, aape 'aela.

illness daohanga, mariaa. maenga.

image nunu 3.

imitate ha'amaani, hfl'imaani, maani. uauli.

importune *a'ada*ini, dftu suu'i.

impudent zaFamaa.

in hai 2., i 1.. Ualona, ila'ona. la'ona, wfti 5.

indistinctly q£l'ulunge'ini, wasawasa'a.

infect sikihi.

inferior ta'ewau. tfluteu. tale'i.

inhabit i'oai.

inherit hele huu, 'olL

initiate ha'amalaohu. ba'ananau.

injure ha'atata'alaai, mala masi, wa'elt ware.

inland i henue, ilengi, ta'e 2.. ta'i heanCt wai

henue.
inlay toll reoreo.
inlet 'aqa'aqa.
innocent mwadalo.
insect mftnu 1.

insert dereha'ini. deresi, sUUie'ini.
inside i lalo; hai name, wai nume.
insipid qaaqi'a.
interchange hft'ihe'i'oU.
interrupt ha'apona, sio honoai.
interval 'apolo, duuduu, hdobolo. maMto*
intervene liu hono, talama'i wala.
intoxicated mfthiri.
intricate tfl'ipupu'e.
introduce silihe'ini.
involucre uloulo'ite.
involved tatahiruhini.
inward hoi aae, i lalo. i aae, paro i sae, wai lalo,

wai ne.
iron hftu 2.

irregular holoholo. talo li'iai. tansolilL
irritaU 'a'ada'ini, ha'aahala'ini, kotaahL
island malau. malau mou.
it inge'ie, e. ft 4.
itch aramu, kakamu.

jab ladani, totoro, uhu'L
jagged 'alopi, malopi.
jaw 'aena papali, aaaate.
jealous heota'ini, rara haahL
jeer ku 3.
jest ha'aero, koe.
join hataa'ini, lado 1.

joint ladoha; out nf joint 'ftdiu, 'fthini. duuna,
hjauhiau. U'i 2.

johe ha'aero. koe.

journey aimtoto. 'ato l.« lal hemie; «., iaeluu

joy ilenimwa'e, rikanga, nikenga, aae diananfa.

judge *i% leileL

juice aultt. totooga 1.

jump pola, r^e.

just ado, odo, odota'i; ad»^ aanU 'de, kele, ai 1.

heep keneU'ini. kineta'ini. kooL

^^m^ZninL

hich koma.

hidney hoi dango, bou 'ei, hneai dango.

hill ha'amaeai 1.. hoco. aftonL

hind ne diana, manata; tolaha.

hindred takihe-.

hinhed hiroii.

hiss none, nono'i.

hile n'o ni *ahola

hnee 'uru'uru.

hneel po'uru'uru, qo'uru'uni.

hnife nahi, naihi.

hnob qaqasu. uhi 2.

hnoch hide, 'iki, papa.

hnot qaqasu, qft'uroro; ff., qaro.

hnow manata'ini, nai, aae, numaatana.

ladder hunxhuru.

lagoon haho 2., lama, namo.

lame to'u.

land fi., hftnue; v.. sulu.

landing-place maalitawa. aixluha.

landslip ma'o'i, rerede.

large loa i.. pftine, pftipeileau'a, imka.

lash qaro, qftsu, rftpusL

last alipuri, ha'amangolana, hft'ipuri oreta.

late ha'ahini, ha'ipuri.

latrine pusu 2.

laugh mwaai.

launch ULri 3., oke 1., sulu 1.

lay ha'aqaha'ini, koni« no'i. qela 2.

layer saoha'i. saonoha'i'a, uku.

law ha'atolanga.

laay akohe. lalawa.

lead ha'alaelae, mftu 1.* na'ooa'a

leaf *apa'apa 1.

leafy lumwe.

leah huhu 1., tete 'uni'uni.

lean *akeu, hatanu nooni, miHngI, matok^tee,

malakett, oroma'i, orooro.
leap pola. reke.
leave lae mwaani. toU'aaL
lee rft'irehi, purine hanue.
left n^umeuli; oie.
leg 'a*ae, *ae. 'ae'ae.
lend ni'i ha'awaU. Uhue'inL
lengthen donga 2.
lest mwane 4.

let maai 1., toU'aal, tolimaai, toliaa.
level apectoo. apenda. dadada'a* hft'idada,

hft'iaada. hu'idada, mftau odo, mftiui

lever apo 3., qft'i 1.
lich mealL
lid maa. ponopono.
lie *aqa 1.. eno.
lie ero.

127

MOTH

lift mfturihe. mfturinge.

lift heJe Umga'a. aula 1.. tahela'ini. totolo-

nga'ini.
ligkl »., dftoi, dftngi; v.. erefaa'ini, ha'aakaimi,

koni dunge, tarauhe'ini; ad»„ mwala-

mwalaobet mwamwatet mwamwa-

kaula'a.
lighien aneU 1.
Ughitting nangali'a, wa'arirL
like hfi'idadangat domaiuu mala, aada, wdanga.

urihana. waruna.
lihi v.t nieni. sae to'o.

liken alahuunge'ini, alahuute'ini, ha'amala.
limb aaaanu

Ump adj„ akoako; v., tomwa.
line ta'atala. uku, walo; ftdi'o. sttmu.
linger ha'ahiru. no'iteu. 'onlteu.
lintel qft'ime maa.
lip ngidu, ngora. qeruqeru.
liquid sulu 5., wiU 1.; v.t ewe; adj„ wftiwei'a'a.
listen qaanmga
listless akohe, ka'alawa, mode.
little haora* mwaimwet
live mfluri; i'o, nftku. 'o'o.
ttwraae.
living 'amauri-.

load n„ ludaa, ludanga; v., lude.
loothe lalawasi. Bftre'lnl.
locust mapo 1.
lodge sulaapoe. tflri 2.
lofty l&ngUengi'e, tetewa'a, tewatewa.
log hfti datugo. Mi pou, h&u 3.. pou ni 'et
loin karokarot jyarapara, rahoraho.
lone maraa-, qaqaitengill.
long tewa.
look aonga'l. hft'iade'i, 'iro, Uo 1.. bxMi,

to'oma'L
loom wakala'i.
loop maai qaro; v., qaro.
loose alo'i. Snuenu, amwada, SLngire'i, ftsueau.

Sauoloolo. kulekule. luheta'i, po&ga-

ponga; v., luhed, siki, toli'asi.
lop luhiui.

lopsided 'akeu, malakeke, malakeu.
lose 'ai'aa, ha'atakalo, takalo, tale, tekela'i.

talahl.
lot hahuto'o. ilala.
loud Tik'i. p&lne.
louse pote 3. '^

love manata diana, sae paina.
low lai 'ano. wai 'ano.
lower v., ha'asihoU, ha'a'uku, oohoai; I 'ana

i haha* 1 orohana.
lump *u'vL 2., onanala.
lungs sae n^^.

mAd herohero, 'oe'oe, qe'u 1.

madrepore h&u haa, kflu 2.

maggpt mwaamwaa.

maiden 'ini'iniqaa. raori'i.

mainland hftnue huu.

maimed ko'u 2.. to*u 3.

maintain snaule'lnU toll susule'L

make da. dflu 1., qao. ta, tftu 1.

iiui2«mwaiie 1.

malice maapala. aae'aela, sae ngora'upu.

man 'inoni. mwane 1.

manifest ha'aU'ini. te'inge'ini.

manner tolalia-.

many ha'a 4.. nite, ta'e 5.. to'o 6.

mark ha'axa. hahuUala. tolimaa.

marriage feast ahaxota.

ifMfTow lalawa 3.

marry tola keni. to'o poro.

marvel aae; tk, anoa. anoaraa.

mask fthuqa'i. ha'apoe. kaia 5.; v.. sftu 1.

mast himu 2., wao.

master alalia, ftunge-; v.. pan 2.

masticate memela'ini, mwadamwadamu, aapoU.

mat ni'e, qana. xaia; v., hft'u 7.

matck ha'idadanga. aada; maai dunge.

mate dama-. oa 2.

matter aqalau; holoholo 1.. ola, mahoio.

mature mena. qi*e. repo.

mawkisk qaaqi'a.

me Inau. ineu. &ku 1.. &u.

ffMoly makahu.

measure tohotoho. 'uri 1.

mediator ha'a'ureniru, talama'i wala.

medicine wfti ni maelaa.

meddle polahiroa.

meek mamaeko'a. mwaadalo. sae mamae.

meet ha'iodo'i, ha'tsu'esu'e. odo'i. niru.

melt 'ahe 2.* rakahi.

m«m6«r aaaara.

mend ponosi. aftumaa.

merciful 'amasi, hft'i'amasi.

mere hale'ite, hflli'ite. ili 1.. mola 4., mwakule.

mesk maa, tftu 2.

messenger ha'atola. hurulaa.

middle dftnume, 'upu'upu 2.

midrib mudi; wede aa'o.

midnight rodohono pupulu, upui rodo.

midst matola-.

mildew kauwa'a, afthuru.

mind adoma'ini, keneta'ini, kineta'ini. ne'iaae;

n., aae.
mingle aroqa'i, q&'i. roro waaro.
mirror 'ixo'iro.
misciUef lede ola, malamala.
miserable ha'a'amaai, ai'ohaa.
mislead ha'atakalo.
miss tala 4.

missing 'ai'aa. takalo, tekela'i.
mist laho'a, waha.
mistake d&u pele. pele, takalo.
mix aroqa'i, qft'i.
mixed dodola.
moan la'ali^ia.
mock ku 3.
molest t&unge'ini.
money haa 1.
montk moon, waarowaaro.
moonligkt ainelL

moreover ta'a 7., ta'e 6., ta'e pe'ini.
morning dftni. dfingi. wa'ali'e.
morrow dftni ha'ahulee. dftngi hoowa. hftudinga

po'odanita'i. i deni. i dengL
morsel ko'okohu, maai 2.. me'L
mortar hohoto, pei 1.. mota. uli 'eL
mosquito aime, aume, tfthule.
mossy lumu. lumu'e.
mote ngaangaa.
moth pepe.

MOTHBK

128

moiktr nike. teitcL

imetdd mwado. mwakano; sfthuni. kauwa'a.

immmiain hoiUwo. houliwo. tolol henue, tolooa

banue.
momm ha'afaill, tako. toU iifeulaa.
momtk dawa. ngidu. wawa.
moBe >d«ad«. aia. aiana, duda. duu* hft'itale 2.,

]ae, ng&li 2.« naaamu, sa'u 6.
m$uk hi'ito'o. liuta'a. pAine. wa'ewa'e. wala-

mucus qango 1.. urn (usu) qango.

mud lolongOf mwado, mmkita'a, qiqL

muddy lolongo'a. qiqi'e.

muUiph ha'ahunge, mwaera, mwaora.

muUiiude mwala, pulitaa. rumha.

mumhU ngunguru.

murder horo mwakule, horo ta'ewau, tale'!

horo.
murmur hft'itohe. papangumngiiru, uqe.
muscUs uleule.

my inau. ineu. aku 1.. 'aku 2., nfiku'e, nftku'L
mysterious asa, anoa. anoaxaa.

nail mitai, misi; wa'aiaa

naked mwakule. qalaqala.

name nta; a ola; t., ha'aia'ini. baora'ini.

namesake malabu-.

narrow koko. koko'ie'i, kokohisi.

nature manata 2.

na uH lus reoreo.

navel poo 2.

neap ta'i 'cai.

near duduhi, du'u md. kara'ini, su*u mel.

neck hit 1.

needle raapca. auliteru.

neglea 'adulu. akoheta'iai.

neighbor auhenue.

nephew uweli, weli.

nesi niuL

net 'ape 2., hu'o. kfllu. moke.

nettle ftpune wai, nunula'o.

new ba'alu. ha'olu.

newcomer mahoo.

news tataloha. tataroha.

nibble ngitro'i.

night hfl'irodo, redo.

nine aiwe 1.

ninth aiwana.

nip 'ini.

no ha'ike, qaake, qa'ike.

nod 'ala qa'u.

noise awaawatana, koukouhe; r., awa 2., uwe

raka. mangulungulu.
noisy 'e'engo, hata kolila'a.
none ka'a, qale; ka'a iteitana, 'etc 'o'o.
noon 'upui atowa.
noose qftnu, qaxo.
nose qflluau.
nostril maana qalusu.
not ka'a, qa'ike, qft'i, qake, qale; sa'a, ai'e.
notch ahasi, kere.

nothing ha'ike, qa'ike; ka'a ola, qale ola.
nourish ha'angau, sangoni.
ncaice mahoo, tatltku.
now 'ie 1., inihou, oihou. hou; 'oto *ie, 'oto

inihou.
numb 'fti 2., mae 1.

number ida 1.

am hoi 1.. 'fiitepi. 'ftUte 1.. 'e'e. nia. ngftli, pue.

bote.

oolib ha'a'aponge. boaainge.
obey 'ala 1., lulu iaali. tolai auli.
obsidian ngftdL
obstinate ha'itobe, hefaeaL
obstruct ape hooo. dftQ aiainge'L

occupy lAunga'L

occur to'o 2.

odd 'a'ataai.

c/ni 1.. i 2.. U 1.. ai 4.

of ha'atau. horana, mwaani; i odohaana.

of end dftu wala, ha'amau'o, ha'atataxo; mfta'o»

tataxo.
offer ha'iare, aupungi. teinge'iiil, uiaa'i.
offering uraa'inffe.

^len ha'ahunge, hungdnmga'a, laiapirapua.
oh ai 7.. ai'aa 2.. hai 3.
0*7 rumu. aula.

ointment laqi ni auu, rumu ni nue maa.
old ina'o, Ifihu, Uau. moka, qaia.
offMa hahuto'o. palapala 1., mftnu poo. hada»

wiai.
omit dflu haahi.

on ilengi, taiaaal, taxau. taraure'L
once hflutaa'i, h&uta*e.
one 'eta, hue 1.. ngaile. ngaiiii.~maa 7.. ta'ata'a»

ta'e.
only hale'ite, h&li'ite, hahaiteU.
onward tarau. taraure'i, auaak'L
open awangi, lakata'ini. mawa ta'a* aiihn»

taha 1., wa'awa'a.
opening maa, wa'awa'ata. maalitawa, tahahia
operculum muai.
opinion aae.
opossum huto 1.
oppose haukama.
opposite i odohaana, aiainge'L
oppress pili tele, tfiunge'ini.
or wa.

orate laelae ni wala. laeli wala, aaal ere. tea.
oration laeli walanga.
orchid ito,

ordain ha'atolanga'ini, qao, qaona.
ordeal atoato, hftu, dftu dunga, dftu heu.
order ha'atola; in order huni. ta'ataia 1.
ordinary ta'ewau. tftuteu; mohu
ordure 'ae 4.. he'a 1.
ornament Ittunihe.
orphan inemae. ra'inge.
osprey wakio.

our ka, ka'elu, iki'e, 'aka 2.
ours 'aka, 'aka'elu.

ourselves i'emi maraamami, iki'e maraaka.
out kei ana, mwaani, ta'a, taha 1., *ura ana.
outlet maa. mau 1.. usu taha.
outright 'o'o 4.
outsail talc li'isi.
outside kolu- 2.. 'amaa, i su'e.
outstretched lala'i.

oven ha'ahite. laqitaa. ora 1., umu 1.
over haho. la'ongi. likite-, li'ite-. po'o parow

po'o wau.
overcome a'aila'asi. huleai.

129

prsgnaut

cwflam honu makeato. kone, malingi.

overlap dama diu, madiu, Mte anu, teroliu.

overlook liohaahi.

oHrmueh hi*ito*a Uuta'a.

owerikraw hu'e 'asi. hu'e tekela'ini.

09 trimr9i kflusi, qaoha'ini.

oawroro'a.

cwl 'ahu'o.

o«pii f., to'o 2.

oyster lie. loma.

fvdtm ne'isae 'asi, aae 'an.

jarful ro ha'i tna^^^^ ^ .

fwf<4 Va 2.. ikiUo'a. kilddle 1.. kiiori. siri.

^orry tatohL

paH »., 'apa 1.. 'apola hok>holo. maholo, po'o

5., roto; f ., ba'apiho, hiteli, wa*ahlteli.
Partake ado. oa 1.
PartiadaHu haba'iteUnge'inL
PartUvm 'atohooo.
Partner dama-, oa-.
Party fllidanga, laelia. mae 5.. puUtaa.
pass li'iai, liu. mahoro, taro; «.. &liholo 1..

ririholo.
#051 liu, mango 1., wftite 1.
PasUm popa
patch kmmnuk, pono.
^oUtala.
Paience toll niko.
patrol v.. UUi; n., kakallhe.
Pattiem mam 3.. ha'amalalana.
Pay hiri, hoU, waaL
Piacf *W<1mnai hSnndanuu
P e a c e a b ie ha'a manola .
#«aft tolol heniie.
Peart 'u*u maai dehl.
pMIe hoi liett, Va 2.
peek ten.
PeA ofi*
peep maakahi.
#Mr aooga'i.
pat 'ato. u*i.
Pemhumla ngofanfoca.
pemiUfU adoma'i oli. 'onlaae.
people apoio'a, lifinua. mwaUu
pereehe lio saai. Ho 8ae.
per€k 'o'a 5.

parfeti alin !.• ha'aahu, manire'i, menanga'i.
perfume tautrana.
perhaps 'ohe. 'ohi'a.
#frt< madaa, mafnga.
perish ai suu, suu 1.
permaiaenl ha'ahuu'e, huu 2.
permU maai 1., toU'aiL
persecaU ha'aletelii. tAimge'iiii.
person ile. ini. 'inoni, laa.
p er spir e madaxa'a.
persuade ere ha'aola, ta'irara.
^emo^ loro waaro.
pei kooi. la'L
Phoioi^aph talo nonu.
pkk liili. 'ini. kaio 2.. soohi.
^c« 'apolo, le'u. maholo. musii 'elili, polo.

qft'u iihinga. roto. waawaata 2; makaka,

mamenamena. maxi'iri'i; v., tahu'i.
pierce halo* mwakoli. toromi.

pig poo 1.. wasi; ora 4., qaqa.

pigeon kolokolo. kurukuru. pine ni o'u. toorao,

uoru.
pile 9., koni; koruha. korute.
pillar qft'u ulunge. ulunge.
pinch 'ini.

pioneer hola'i. tahangi.
^^Ute.

pipe ipeipa, simouke.
pish akuu.
piss mimi.
pU kiUinge, kUu.
^JtoA pulu 3.. totonga 1.
^itoiby totonga'ala.
pUh uto.
pitted pOomc
pity*amaei,
place lehu. le'u.
^fMliunge.
plain apedao. apesada; ha'ada'i. ha'ata'i,

mwakule.
plait i'eli. pao. sikeri. use.
plan 'alaa'ini.
plane didi 2.. susuni.
plank hapa. rttu 3., rftuieu.
plant lifisi, suau'i. to'ooi 4.; «.. '&i. dango.
platform ha'a 3.. tahe 1.
^oy qftni'o. qaxero. tala'aela'a.
pleasant lako diana.
#l«df« haa i mwe'L
^Mokcr 'apunmge.
plentiful hunge. hungehunga'a. mwaera. mwa-

ora. takara.
pliahle mwadau. mwaohe, mwaeroero.
plot tod kxm.
pluck do. hisu. 'ini, Iftngu.
^f qaito. auhu; v.. ponoei.
^liMii^ qi'e.
plunder l&u 1.
^iMffdio.
^yUu.

pocket mwft'i 3.

point ngoongoo, w&du; v., teinge'ini. usu 8.
poison hunu 3.
poke toromi.
pole umie'ini.
polisk ute.
pond iqe. lama 2.
^oollopo.
#oor nUUtale.
porpoise 'iri'o.
port su'u 5.
possess akauri, to'o 2.
possible mwadau. 'ura mwan^.
pounce polahi, puuli.
pound ha'amae. aftu 1.
pour lingi. ute piL
pout terongidu.
/owdff wahawaha.
power nanamanga, sakanga.
practise oho.
praise ha'amanikulu'e.
frown ore a*
^oy are. qao ola.
preach laeU wala. tea.
precipice hftuheu'e. pie.
pregnant hi'e. qfilu.

PRXMATURB

130

fremaiur€ kokda'l, rofoia.

prtfart akau. mwftU, talama'ini. tftule'inL

present 'ie 1., 'ienJni, IsUiou.

press momo. pili, roro.

pnUnce dftu hafaota, lopo'L loqe'L

fnUy kohi, mwane diana, raia'L

preweni ape bono, dftu aigUise'i. UdL

pries hoUte.

prick mwakoU, sipengi, suaii'L

pricUs aike 2.

prias apo 3.

proceed isi ta'a, 'ure 2„ tftu 3.. umi taha.

proclaim ha'ahoa, hou 4., talo 6.. taro.

profane ha'awa'a, wa'a.

proffer ha'iare, tdnge'inL

promise ha'alu 1., faft'iholoU'l. holota'L

prop mudi 2.. poo 3., tansatanga.

proper adona, hSL'idadanga.

propUiaU Upa'oli.

^ros^ takaxa.

prosiraU ladama'i.

prosiituU heulao. keni qaqahe. tilao.

proUct lio ahu'i, rakapau. aete ahu'i, talaahu'e.

proud ale, toha'ini.

proeerb alahuu.

provide ha'aakaurisi, ne'ikooi. talama'iiil.

propoke ha'ahala'ini. ba'atala'L

prow hftku 2., na'o, toutou.

puddle ipata, upeta.

puff ha'arangaai. uhi 3.

^110 aka 1.. oke 1.. wft'i 6.; hote.

pulp memeao'a.

pumice hflu menu.

punch kumu.

punish ha'aletehU ha'aloo'i. ha'ananau.

pupil qa'arongosuli.

pure manola, manomanola'a.

purge ha'amanola, laeli.

purlin soli 'ei.

purple melumelu'a'a.

pursue pee, ohe 1.

pus 'aqalao.

push usu 1.

put ftlu, koni, ne'i, no'i. to'oni.

quake asoso.

quarrel ha'iaa'iri, ha'aweweu, hfllinge, wftiteu.

quench kumuri, mwaasi.

question dolosi, h&'iohi. hftri, ledi, aoi.

quich ha'iteu, l&u'ae. Iftuleu.

quicken ha'auri, lAu'ae, tftu'ae.

quiet mftlumu, mwamwadoleta, mwamwanoto,

noto. rako 2.
quite 'o'o, te'ela'i, to'ohuungaiia.
quieer »., pupute.

race bft'ipani'i, ohera.

raft aqaqot aa*o.

rtifler *ato 2.

rage sae maleledi, laewastt.

rail t.t ete maleledi; n., xaporapo.

rain nemo. nimo.

rainbow huuraxo.

raise hele 'ala'a. sulu la'a, tahela'ini.

roJkr kata4.

ram rori 1., ■ftiinL

ramrod rori 1.

roiiJkdamaa.

ra^ikL

rasp n., naa kara; p^ nmx 4.

rai 'aanhe. UkUL to'L

rather 'de. kde.

rattan mt 3,

roltff 'ikioKL kole.

raee herohcio, o'e

road qdi. tftHpapa'e.

rmvarawa.

ray ball 3.

rotor ^w 2.

readt arapaiL hule, tem.

r#«dMe, naL

ready okBu, mouqdL

real ha'ahua'ana. hutt 2., to'chaniigana.

really ha'ahuu'ei, to'channfel.

rear purL

reap tapa, ■iokonl.

rdfound pola. poeUcL

recede aha 3.. mapipl.

receive ht^ t&ktu

reckon idu l.« 'nno 1.

recogniae hahaitdloge'lni, lie taaL

rc£OflposikL

recollect Bsnatito'o.

reconcile ha'a'ureniru.

recover awaa. mauil.

red noro, wftru. wftruwetu'a, awalaa*! 'epule.

redeem tapa 'oU.

rMdrade.

reef habo 2.. mwalo; liilimgt

red 'olo'oloa'L

rejiea altisae. ne'iaae; nana 3.

refrain nihisL

r^esh ha'amango.

r<fMff le'u ni su'e pari ana, aa'tt 5.

refuse f .. lalawa. sftre'l, aamL

refuse »., ftlitdia. hero, mamatefcola, oraonu

rejea lalawaai, rike.

rejoice ilenimwa'e, rike. rake.

rdapse 'oli. toUaa.

relate lado, 'una 1.

rdish *amadi.

remajfi i'o, n&ko, 'o'o 3.

remember filusae. amaolto'o.

remnant oietaiola.

remove hft'lsaa, sola. ta'asU ta'ela'L

rend Vari. haka 1.

renew ha'aha'alu, ha'aha'olu.

repair dflu diana.

repeat ha'amaani. hft'lmaanl, 'ooL

repent adoma'i 'oli. 'oniaae.

reply 'ala 1., ta 1., te.

re^orl talo, taro.

reproach \ti 1., keta.

re^rope 'i'ite 2.

reserve 9j^

resist hftukama, 'ore honooL

resolve sae suou.

resound m^vakula, ngara loolou.

respond 'ala 1., ngua.

rest mamalo; ofe.

restrain hele haahi, nlhliL

remft ftu ta'a.

retire duu'e, ni'a, tu'e 5.

return aiiho'i. ha'apu'o. 'oil. pa'o 2.

131

SHBLTBft

rmal faa'atft'iiiL

f€Miiff tnisft'it Witt oiUu

fVMTM ftliho'iri. flUhu'isL ttUu. hi'oii, hu'iii.

liuUune, qaoha'inl.
r€9i9$ h&i meuiL
rtwiM lUxo. pu'opu'o.
rnmtd waaite.
f AMMMoMsfn lill'e.
rjft luttt.

fidb mwft'i, toonr.
rMff ttwo.

fidg^poU qaoha, suU 'd i qaoha.
HfM odo> qaloqalo.
r»f<d halMi. ralahlta.
Will IcekCt kerekcFCt wain^*
Hmd te'ete'e.

ringworm huni 2., kflni 3.
ripe mado. ran 2.
fif« ta'e. ta'da'i, suu ta'a.
rJMT wfli peine*
■road tala.

roar awa. mwakulu. ngunguru.
roasl hahi. su'isungl. sule* auningl, uunu.
rofrpeli.

ro€k hflu, h&u mou.
rod *9X nehunefau, hftu welewele.
roe pile.
roU 'akeu« malalrrlrr, malakeu, tataqelu; ere 2.«

ho'i 3., i)eDa8i, qeluti; ereerea'lle,

ereereta'a; «., hike.
roof koluhe. qaoha. auoha.
room 'atohono. duru.
root imiimi; ine l.» aude.
rope 'ftU. i'eU.

rol hou 3., kftsu, mftpusu, osa. nne'a.
rougfchftnle.
rotciul ereerea'ile. ereereta'a. hotohotomolita'a;

ahu'i. haahi.
rouse ahala'i, ha'alio. lia
row bote, hotela'ini; »., ta'atala. uku.
rmb nanala'i. rotoa'ini, uniri, ute.
rMnsh ftlitdiu. mamatekola, potaa.
ntdder wiro.

nUn maana'o. na'onga; rauhe'iiii, wa'eli. ware,
•mlf alaha haahi.
rump moro- 2.
rMH hiiru.

rusk pola. nanamii, tatahiruhini.
rusl he*a, kauwa'a.

^odk 'anga, mwft'i.

sacred maa'i, inaea, mwane.

^od 'ala ngingite, rahito'u. aae huu.

safe Iftkii, mamanuto'o. mamaware, pupupu.

sa'eaape'a, aapelaku, aapemawa.
safeguard keneta'ini, Uneta'ini.
^sag makuku.
Mfo aa'o.

sake 'aena. i noonihaana.
^aliea ngisu.
UU 'ftsl l.t hu'i 'caL
saUy 'ftsUe.
•jofidoiie.

sandbank rere, aaiaai rere.
^andfiy noxio 'ftsL
.ffoiidlfloiM hflu hana.
^a^totonga.

saUrfy ha'aahu, mangoa'ini, pole 1.. WMNJamJ.

saeagie mama'ingi. mamakala.

save ha'auri, loloha'ini. ne'i kooL

say ere !.• ta 1., te, 'una. wala'a.

scab riltt 5.

M4#bM ha'ana

icoicf unehL

scared lete. loo, wala 4.

scatter ha'atatanga'lni. koetana'a, tatanga.

«£Ml nono waaa.

scoff mwasie'inL

scM ere, haa'ere, ha'ore.

score aha 2.

scorpion h&riherl, ha'awarasi kale.

scrape 'arasi. kaiasi, ole.

scraUh hfti 5.. kfiru 2.

scream awanu ulo.

screw hiro.

scum hutohuta

sea 'ftsi 1., matawa.

seam tftuteurite.

search hft'itale, totola ohi.

seaside i oioit,

season hftliai2.

seat i'oi'oha, nfl'unekome.

second Tuaaau

secret mnmttiiL

secure daidiena. mammarape'a, M'enpe'a;

mftuta'a. papau.
see aade, leeei« lio, loo 1.
seed lite.

seek ha'ltale, loohL

seem lio 1., loo l.» doniaiia, mala, urihana.
seine hu'o.
jefedhilL
«W/ maraa-.

sea ha'ahoU, hohoro. hoU, taho.
send uminge'inL
sensation hiL

separate opa. ohn 2.. ak) aopa.
serve rareta'lni.

set ha'ai'oai, ne'i. no'i. sua 1.. tola 6.
settU i'oai. Va 5.
seeenty hiu awala.
sever holoei. mousi. tapali.
sew suau 3.. tfturL
skade mamalu.

skade maiu. para'imaa. mamalute.
skadow niiau 3.
skoft kakata, ki'iki'L
skake aaoao. Asuolook>. hotoholo'i. kulekule.

mwaolaola. ok)oloa'i. tata'inL
skaUow too 1.

skam dau hahota, lopo'i kae.
skame maaa; ha'amaaa.
skape aape.
skare ado. oa 1.
skark pa'ewa.
skarp 'ala 1., rere'a.
skarpen rere 1*
smaller memeao, morumoni.
ilkiM apo 1.. auhU

5Aea<ltf daraha'ini. dereha'ini. sftlni. aOihe'lnL
sked hale, taoha. toohL
sked v., toll.
skeU hinu. te'ete'e.
5Mfor i'o ra'lrehL

132

shnf 'ae 5., ha'ata'ini. hatooga'ini.

skidd talo. talaahu'e.

shift 'oUsi, aikile'i.

shiu wowo*

sktmsTBtL, wanawana.

skip haka 3.

skipwnck ape !.• qa'ata'inl.

iteal taalu. tootoo.

skotd liaiia2.

sktws i kttle, i one. Mini one.

skoH koukoiile. 'o'oru'e, pulo sa'aaala.

skoiiem ape hite, kumwesl. onu.

skomidsr huui lue. qft'uli 'apala.

skomi kakau. tea, totolo.

skomvmi 1.

skower hoi nemo, hoi nlmo.

skHmk 'amasi meuii, niniko'a, rarasi.

skHwd nuku. lara 2.. ruuti.

skmn peinuhi.

skmi hohono.

skymaasL.

sick daoha, mae. maemae'a,''mamaela'i

sickmess maela, maenga.

side parapanu rahocaho.

si^ Ihimawa. mamango, poepoe.

itfMlionga.

sigm ha'aluelu, ha'ara, hfthuilala.

fitmlftmute.

jIB 'aena maa.

siOy qe'uqe'u'a'a.

«lMaar ha'idada. Ada.

WmKoriy aitana. alihana,

simpU qe'ii, teo.

Wiioiaha'a.

since kei ana. mwaani. 'uia ana.

WfMwuleule.

i<i»f kana.

sin^ to'ota'e.

sink dodo. 'o'onL

sinker ha'aaihopulu.

simnei mwiritei niu.

sip tahe tooio. toto aiopu, totohl 1.

sister 'ftai- 2.. inie-.

sisier-in^lms ihe-.

sii dodonga'i. i'o, nftku.

H«ono.

ski^mi nai ola. aalema'L

skim tanwL

skin v.. dmwe. tad 2., uhu 2.

skin n„ te'ete'e.

skip pola, reke.

skirt kakamu. nfoongoo.

sky apal kMu i lengi. maalau.

slab qa'ahida, wa'ahite.

dock mwakuku.

slander heota'ini. tft'utepunge.

dap dato, hide.

siay hofo. •uuhe'inL

sleep ma'ahu. ma'am, mft'uru.

sleepiness mama'uru'anga.

sUu nlai, wa'a.

aide ferede. tfld.

slip awa tahu. dile, reiede.

dippery mamauwa'a.

slU

slope haneta'anga.

sionffc ranaL

5lo« ha'ahiru.

dumber niA'ahitnge Aliauu.

smaU haonu hatonga, momoru. mwjiimweU

MMTf totoogo.

smask makaka'a. makairi. potaU. qa'a.

sm£ar punipuni. rtUmaa.

smdl nooo warn, tola haarea, wflau.

smile wmfktL

smile bofo» rtlpu.

smoke ha'aaao. sftau; omL

smoolk dadada'a. maumau'a'a.

snail aropu. qaateru.

snake mwaa 1.

snap mottsL

snare hune, kilohuna, qSnu. qaro.

snaUk l&u 1.

xuMMfisihe. ftainge.

jnore ngora 3.

snout qftlusu.

snng nono wfiau.

so uri 2., urine.

soak to'ongi. totohl. totoqinL

5oar aro2.

sciber maenoto.

soever ta'ana, ta'ena.

soft nUUumu. mwadau.

scften ha'amwadausL

soU 'ano. mwado. mwakana, mwakano.

sde penatana 'ae.

solid ngara welewele'a; hfti pou. niau 4.

some hftlu. muini, mwaUe. mwaite.

jofNdbow uritaa.

sometking holoholo, le'u. mfiai ola, me'i ola.

somdimes hfllul maholo, to'ota'e maholo.

son 'elekale, kale, mwela mwane.

jofif kana.

soon Iftuleu. Iftuleu'a. molana.

sooike ftpu'i. ha'aiako.

sore aplte'l. hi'lto'o. ini 2.. malaka'a, oropa,.

o«u ittlu.
Mffov fladraunge.
sort urltaa; komu. manata 2.. ta'ana. ta'ena,.

walute-.
soul mfturihaa'i.
sound hft'ileku. Iflku; awaawatana. kottkoiihe»

kilou.
soup pllnge.
sour maladl, tola 9*
soutk po'l lengi, qft'i lengi. taa'u. U'e.
sow hftd 1.
sow «., poo qaqa.
space ahowa, maalau, maholo.
spade yntMto.
j^ii tangaa.
spare ore, ue 1.
spare 'amasl. aaeni.
spark di dunge.
sparkle rangwiro'a. wana.
^^ollcr qiai.
spatula idemu.
j^tfwfipile.

speak ere. ta 1., te. wala, wala'a.
spear lula. noma, qft'uli 'inoni. ra'ei tolo. su'e 4»
speckUd to'o hi'uhi'ule.

133

sxnutonnD

speech erenga, wala'aaga.

speed lOJiBmu.

spew 'a'ana, moa.

spider lawa, pe'u.

spill huhu, malakekeei. malingi.

j^ff hlrohiro.

spine soli odo.

spirU 'akalo, hi'ona. U'oa. urehi.

spit ngisa.

spiie 9BDt ngonL.

splash Idlokilo, qisi.

splice donga 2.

spin hite, tangi, wa'a.

spoil wa'eta'ini, ware.

sponge hulo 1.

sponianeous maraa-, tohu-.

spotted pulu nunu'e, to'o hi'uhi'ule, to'o nunu'e.

sponl pusu.

sprain duuna, li'ite'l.

spray 'ftd 1., naho.

spread 'a'ala'i, epasi. holaBi, ngaangaa, nga-

ngau, takara, talau.
spring hulehule, hiUaa; pola liliki.
spring Hde lue qera.
spnnkU tata'ini.
sprout pito, qito.
spurt pusu.

squabble hfl'isa'iri, wfliteu.
squall dJonga'i, hoi nemo.
square popopo'a.
squash makaka'a. pill memeso.
squat Va 5.
^^MtfoJit ngangadi.
squeewe lo6i> momo, ni*i losi.
squint lele.
stab toromi.
staff 'aili'apaa, 'apaa.
stogf tahe.

stagger 'olo'oloa'i, tatahiohio.
Steffi mftua, o'a'l.
j<4i«r hunihuru.
4<aJik mwaramwara.
stanttner samo.
stamp puu, 'uii 1.
jfiMi^'ure.

star hcA he'u, 'u'ui he'u, 'u'u ni he'u.
stare aonga'i, to'oma'i.
start 'aehota. ta'e 5., U'da'i, tala'ae.
startle apara'i, ftsire'i. ha'aapara'ini, ha'aaire'inl.
staree hi'olo, maesi hi'oiooga, mae su'esu'ela'i.
stay Vo, nftku, rftuhe'i; ba'aansu, rape'L
stead 'olite-.

steadfast halahala, mauta'a, nga'ingedi, papau.
steal peXi.

stealthy ha'atoietote maa.
steam sftsu ana waL
ifeer na'ohi.
stem kakata. ki'iki*i.
step 'uri'urite.
3lcnipuri.
stich 'ai nehimehu. 'apaa, dango welewele,

qire; pau 1, rao 2.
sticky totonga'ala*

sHff 'fti 2.. halasi, hfiaipeale. paaie'iU.
still maneko, nolo, rako; ue 1.
sting 'ala 3.. niinuli.
stingy ha'ahehe.

stinh wflBu, wftsu 'aela.

stir aroqa'i, ngailngeli, qft'i 2.

stitch mua 3., tfluri 2.

stock Ohu'ine.

stomach 'le 3., 'oqa.

stone hftu 1.

stony hfiule.

stoop mwaoroha'i, oro.

stop noto, rohu. toll; dflu 2., i'o, i'o konito'o,

Vo 3., Busule'i.
store dura, haangi, loha'inl, ne'i koai, no'i

koni, 'onime'inL
storm mawa, mawaaidengL
story laladonga, 'oni'oninge.
straggte tongoUli.
straight odo.

strain pii. sasali. wft'i hatohala.
strait tahalaa.

strand akeake, kallte'i'a. kawe.
strange aopa, ha'akolo, kolokolo.
stranger awata'a, mflhuara.
strangle ha'ali'o. li'o 2.
stray 'e'eli. liu aopa, takalo.
strength 'a'aila'anga, nanamanga, aakanga.
stretch aheta, kftlu 3.. lala'ini, raradu, susue'ini,

tawarL
strihe daro, hide, horo, lupu. rftpu, s&uni.

to'olupu. wete.
string walo, will.
strip 'aeU, hu'esl, ta'asi.
stHpe hudidudi.
strM awe, qaqahe.

strong 'a'aila'a, malapau'a'a, m&uta'a, ramo.
stubborn hfl'itohe.
stuff 8U8U harefaare.
stumble hSUidu'u'a, mftu'o, tataro.
stump fthu'ine, ruuqe'n, uniqe'i dango.
stumpy koukoule.
stupid papaku'a qe'u.
stutter aamo.

subdue ha'aoonl, hde toUngi.
subside kttmwe, mapipi, saaa hetela.
succeed *oli, 'olisL
succor anahi, Iflu 2.
such iiri 2., urine, orinena.
such omi, 8U8U 2.
sucker pi'e 3.
suclde ha'asusu.
successive ta'atara.
sudden ULuleu, maarusi maa.
suffer sape hi'ito, aape salu.
sujfice ado, ha'idadanga.
sugar-cane 'ohu 3.
suit ado, hatonga.
sulk eaewBBVL,
summer oku 3.

summerset su'ai honu, su'emi'e ni honu.
summon ha'ara'i, ha'arongo.
nmsato.

sunrise qa'alana aato.
sup ilu, inu.
supple qilo'a.
support poongi, poopoota.
sure 8U8U 4.

surf 'a'aronga, naho, qa'aqa'ali naho.
surprise ha'aapara'ini, ha'akakahuru.
surround dSlu keli, kftli, pirn kdL

SV8PBCT

134

nii#fd hiiiife'iai, mni 1.
smptmd lepo S., to'L
jwflffow '0002.

1^ loloip. lolOBSO.
huto2.
swaying mwahJohig

jVNMr ha'aaau ha'a'apu. hft'liiweti, hoML
jwMl madara'a.
iwMi mfilimeU.
swM 'upii.

jvnlltfif cpa, likitaa, qaqahlnu. 'nim'e.
swVi lauku; it.. Tl 2.
swim ola
swoop diOa

to&ooftdif tetelenga.
todHiliqana.
fodUf iftiflinfe.

foAe da. dfln !.• hde. ooho* ifta 4., ta, tete,

tolat tote«
tdU laladonga. 'ooi'oolnge.
talh ere, wala'a.
UU tetewa'a, tewa*
fa% ha'aawala.
fMM kooi. rft'L

teaiM hiku. tft'ihikuliiku. tlxi
Uf elkl 2.. tee 1.
terry i'o ni deunfe.
teste uiami* meali* namelL
teftoorflpii.

Uack ha'aloo'i* ha'ananau. ha'aofoU.
tear f., baka 1.
tear wfli nl 'akala
Umss ha'aerot ha'atalaa'l* koe*
IMW ilielimiii.

tett ha'ahou* houle'iiii. lado 2., riho. 'una 1.
Umpssl inawa, mawaaidenffL
tem^poopoo.

toMfi vFvt^% atwii^g a, uuJa ohoQsa*
UmfioHom mala otionginta.
tew awala, taafahulu; ifdcrl, i'nla, wak>.

wak> paM.
tendril kakawe, waowao 2.
tenlik tangahulu ana.
terrlftte to'o maumetttaiia.
Un^y ha'ama'iiaL
tekmms wft'i 7.
MAcr qaio. qfltu.
fteii mwaaai.

ikosik ha'adahi, ha'anediena* paalahe*
thai hotohoioni. ine 3., le'mie. olanat maholoni,

tkoUk dfture'ini, taheta'inl; laha

IA# a 1.. hfti 4., hoi !•• lioa 1., niAei 2., me'l. mui.

mwaL Bta 1.
1*4^ peliha, peUnge.
ih€w ada 1., 'ada 2., ada'ela. adaru'e, 'adani'e

ikire, ikiia'du, Udieni'e.
them Ikire, ikiia'elu, la'elu, ta; daal, iftni'e.

xftni'l.
then mehotoni, li 1.
ihemu mwaanie Ue'ime. 'urd Oe'ime.
then Uehtuia, ile'une, wftu 1.
tkmrAy ana 2., ani 2.
then^ort 'aena le'nne* 'aena nfeena.
Omem hai la'ooa. bai ie'nne. ilakioa.

tksrsupom haia, haro. laio. mo; manfo mine.

tkess ikira inlhoa. muini 'ie.

they ikire, ikireru'e. Un. Uieni'e, koio'i.

tkick ioqo, piofau poeo; pooo.

tkickti kilo'a ni 'ei.

I*te«f pelL

tki^mmiuu

iMa mwanui. mwlne.

thins i'oe, nftmu'e, nftnra'L

thing ola, le'u. holohoto, maholo.

thinh adoma'inl, ne'ine.

fMrtf'olune.

iMrjf maroa.

thiftssn awala mwana 'ola.

thhny 'olu awala.

this ie 1., inibou. mAi 1.. mlioe.

thithsr ilenne.

thorn sike 2.. walo kakara.

thorny kakau'e. mwakomwako'a.

those muini nfeena, ntwaflenL

fteai'oe.

Uboaffc maala, mala 1.

thongfU adoma'inta* ne'incnga.

thousand alo, mola 3., qela 1., iiaola, to'o 7.

ihrsed wak>; 9., lii 1.. wilL

threaten ha'apanili, maraia'L

lArw 'oin.

thrssh mwamwada.

thrsshold 'aena maa.

thrice haVoln.

throai lue 1., hanliu.

throb toe U

throng tabaunutaia, tapanen, taianie'lai.

throw 'a'a 5., dere. 'u'L

Ubraillada, toro3.

thumb *ini bite.

thmmp kumu,

thus iiii 2., urine.

ihwart bapa. lueu.

thy Amu'e, i'oe, nftmu'e, nftmu'L

lte*teel.

tide kumwe, lue 2., mfti 2., toafo; lue qera,

mfti rara.
tie bo'o, qaxo, taberl.
Hghi banfa, koko. popo.
till bulaana.
KttkftuaL
l^mftw' 'fli. daafo.

time mabolo; takanirume'ini, to'o 6.
iime4o4ime dundun.
tip noonoo, nfoonfoo, to'o dede, wadu*
If^fMmwaiki.
Ursd ba'awe'o, we'o,

to bunl, muni, i 1., ni 1., eaa-* d»^ tako'i. tale.
tobacco labo: bade'lel. blohia hnri.
togtther mra, ta'lncelute, takarmme'inL
loa^i IrekL
loftfiMmea.
too k>'u 5.

tooth nibo, to'o na'o.
toothl ess dawa 2.
top lengi, qango 2.

w^0w a^w ^aaaaw^v

torment ba'aletdii, ^ ^rt fia^^ i miHaahii
terrvnl dftrl mwaa.
tortoise-^hdl bapa 2.
totter 'olo'oloa'L

135

WAHT

taucoH plneawa.

totuh hele temweri, kopL

fOMfik ngfifli 1.

lowoke 1.

kmard tall, Uko'i, tale.

town hftnue, huuilume, poona.

toy qflniomga roaroa.

track d'o tali.

Iroilor qelo.

irain ha'aanfo.

tramfU *iire puuli.

tramslaie 'oUsi wala.

Iratd ftlide. laehi, lai benue, Ua.

tnad puuli, 'uri.

Iree 'fti, danga

intfem dimwe.

trtmbie ftriii, asotOk nunurete.

Irmdii Aliholo.

trepang mwamwaa pari.

trickie mudimudi 'nrm, mwlmwdl 'ore.

iroMbU hu'ihtt*!. kotaha, mohiage, xako

'ada, su'eliL
inu to'ohua. wala'ImdU.
trumpet 'fthnri.
trust nonito'o. puuto'o.
truth walaMmoHiige.
try ahooga, dflu adonga, dftu ahonga, oho 1.,

ohongi.
tub niine 2.
tug oke 1.. wft'i 6.
tumbU a'oho. domu, 'nra 11.
iumuit hft'ipolaiiga, kotaha.
turn fllihu'isl. ftUha'lte'inl, 'lUv, 'Atomaa.

'atopuri. hiio» hi'iid. «oU; hAToU,

pulo, pu'o 3., «fo 1.; lapi, ha'aUli.
turn mena. ne'L
turtle honn 1.
tuskjoSbo*

tmdrn awala mwana rue, awala mana rua.
family lo awala.
twice ha'aru'e.
twig akeake. *ula'ulu ni 'd.
twtUgjh$ aftuklii, mdumela.
fwlaiu.

twme haVangohl hikii, lolo 3.. ta'iUkahiku.
twimkUug ma'am talabi.
twirl hixow

fwiif 'ango 2., UliteTa, pnk)d.
two nw.

ugly lio mamataku, loo mania'a.

idcer onptL, emu

umbr^la hft'u 7.

umarmed to*o ro nime.

muawakeued to'o Id rn g aiw i.

wMudlvhetL

wude ama-f nweUf-, wdK

umdeau lo'u 3 ; mada'a, malpa

uueoiled awa tahu.

umcorer 'ae 5., hu'oL

undo tube, tahu'L

wmdoue *ada, akera'l, tnlietat

uuf astern alklte'liiL

m^oid 'aroka, lokaai.

m^url tOLtA'laL

unMtch siki 1., takaraxa.

tMiAtcrf aapemawa.

afdoff takaraai.

uuless 'ai'aana, wa 'ohe.

unload nlenga'ini, sAngile'iiiL

unmarried laori'l, Maiiau.

uura9ei matakanu

unripe kohu, mwaka.

unruly teroliu.

unski^ul mftumeulL

unHe 'aluhe. lube.

unta bulaana. lai telL

uutoward po'opo'oU'iU'i.

unwilling lalawa, sftre'inl.

up 'ala'a, la'a. i liaho» 1 tengi. ta'e, tfiUmaa,

ta'au.
upbraid ere, wala mwamwani.
uplift haVuxe, aulu 1., tabda'ini; a^j^, lAngi-

lengi'e.
a^ofi habo-, lengi-.
uprig^ odo. odota'L
uprooted Aihu, 'ft'uru.
upset kSluai, qaoha'inL
urge toiangL
urine mimi, wfti.
Ml ka'eltt, kolu; aka, aka'elu.
uMbdeii.
useless tototala.
utterly *o'o 4.

waMy mwakule, tototala.

9alley dftideri'e

vanish fthutata, wa'a 4.

ponity 'fli'aa, 'abewa'a.

vapor labo'a, waha.

various dodola, hfl'iaopa'i, ngdute.

vary aopa, hu'ite'i.

vergf ftpiepL

verse 'alo'u, lo'u'e.

very ha'ahuu'ei, ha'abuu'ana, laka, to'ohuu-

ngana, to'ohuungei.
ven 'a'ada'bii, ba'aaanni, feotaahi, waweta'a.
village huuUnme, oateni nlma, poona; met./kilau
WiM walo.
violate mmhau
virgin keni raori'L
visit maakali, maatoli, maatoto.
voicevniau
floitf qala, waawaa.
vomit 'a'ana, moa.
vow ha'a'apo.
voyage ftllifamga.

ulu4.

wag hi'ute'ixii, teUe'iiiL
wafsf bolite, waalte.

waguM hl'ttbi'tt kape, U'ubi'u qote, kiukiu rape.
waU ngajraai, ulo 1.
wait i'o looei, ma'ohi, totori.
wake ha'alio. Uo 1.
walk awe, qaqabe.
waU liliheu, para, tete.
woltar sude, tataipdpe.
wonder bie h&iliu, takalo.
wane kumwe.

vram 'U'aa. mei]]ieile'iiil,lta]e; eae to'a tare
to'a

WAHTOH

136

wanUm mwunwaki, tale'L

W€r ipf Iwnga. ohofa

ward talaaho'e, talohL

warm madoco. wawai. oaSoai.

warn aha tahani, ha'apaau.

wari uhi 2.

wary loo 2.

wash hoda, loto^

wasp ninlho. pun 2.

wa ste totowa'e, wa'e l.« wa'eta'ini, ware; aala.

waUh ha'akale. ha'amaeai 2.. Uo iauU. kakali.

water wftl i.; v.» hu'i 3.. korukom. mimi.

waierfaUv^l.

waierkoie kakalu* kUu.

waierspomt aaiaeau, aa'uaeau.

'a'arooga, hftl iiaho» hftu ni 'eai.

9., aalo 2., wttiwei 1.
aaenienta'a.
way tala 1.

waylay 'aqata'ini. toli looai.
we t'emelu. ika'du, ikolu; i'emere'i, ikanu ikure.
weak maleqeleqe. mamaria'a, qeto.
weapon mac 7., rtUaiiice.
wear to'oni 1.
weary ha'awe'o. we'o.
weave hA'u 9.
«if6 lawa.
wed tolakenL
wedding BhBXdau
weed flmu 4.. ta'ahu.
weep ncara, uk> 1.
weil awaa, mware'a.
west hao. i 'ano, auulana sato.
wei ha'amedo. ha'aqini; medo. qeaa'a, qini'a.
whale puatt *eaL
what taa 2., taha.
when i nganite* maholoiia.
whence kd hd, 'uid td.
where ihd, ltd, lehiina, le'une.
whetdSambl
whether 'ohe. 'ohi'a.
which ibd. itd.
wMlf ha'awali, maholo.
whip rftpu.
whisper aawaru.
whistU wfldi.

white erete'a, mero, rere'a; haka, pofo ni haka.
vAoatd.

wMf bA'ildcu, Uku, pupupu.
whose atei, 'ana atd, nana atd.
why ana e 'ue, e 'ue. uritaa.
wick aikeri.

wicked 'ada. tata'ala. tfllili.
wickedness oiaha'a, tftlUinge.
wide 'aroka, atalawa.
widow na'o 6.
wife hu'e 2.. keni.
wig uhttmae.
wHd loo 2., looloo'a.

w»2< makrmakrta,

ttfitMtUili.

iMtfaae.

wiUing mwa'emwa'e.

vMMf ninlko'a.

wind dftni, dtofi. ooru.

v»iMAomi^ norulMMio.

wing 'apa'apa.

wtfiik ma'aru.

wtaler aau, raia 4.

wipe 'uauii.

wise aaai ola* aaa t^^^Mi aalema'i.

wisk aae to'o, aare to'o.

witchcraft aftiu'e. d'ooca.

wiiker hdco, nnniiln, lara 3.. racaai.

with ana 2.. fini 2.; mii 3.. pe*i 2.

v»«M» hfti 2.. i lato. ta'i. wfiL

withomt i 'amaa. i au'e; 'aho'a.

withstand dftn hoiioai, hgnkama. 'itre iKmod.

woman hu'e 2., keni.

womib i'e 3.

wofuier ane. pangata'ini; »., anoa, ha'ihn'ite.

wood 'fti, danfa

worik ftm, daumwa.
worM wflliunalau.
worm mwaamwaa, mwaadiile.
worn Ifthu.

worship palo, qao ola.
worry 'a'ada'ini. tolaa'i.
wonnd halata, hilrhili*. malaka.
wrap ftluhi, dele, inehu'i, iilo.
wreath mahe.
wrestfeako.
wreck qa'ata'ini.
wring loei, ni'i k)d.
wrinkle nuku.
vprite uau 2.
writhe huhu laolao.

wrong dftu hu'id, dftu pele, dftn wala; aopa,
takakk

yam haaa 1., olopa'i, uhi 1.

yard qft'uU 'apala; lolata; i 'amaa.

yawn fthimai

yaws alo'a.

yrarhfiliaL

ydlow

yes 'a'u, i'au. 'o d'u'e. ai'ola.

yesterday nooola; day b^ore nonola wau.

yet ue 1.

yoke tori.

yonder paro. wttu 1.

yon i'oe, i'ama, i'omu, i'omolu; dual, i'omoro'i.

i'omoni'e.
yoMlik aaanau.

tigisag aaxo ni mwaa.

APPENDICES

A BRIEF GRAMMAR OF SA'A AND ULAWA.

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIHC.

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

HISTORICAL NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION.

"YACHTING" IN MELANESIA.

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

SANTA CRUZ.

137

A BRIEF GRAMMAR OF SA'A AND ULAWA,

THE ALPHABET.

No letters are used in this dictionary with arbitrarily assigned values.
In all the books printed in the two languages for the use of narive
readers two italic letters are used, n and m; n is printed for ng the palatal
nasal to which n frequently mutates, and m is printed for tnw which
represents a lightly vocalized m. In this grammar and in the dictionary
these two letters are given in full as sg and mw which are to be under-
stood as representing those sounds of which the value has hitherto been
represented in Sa'a and Ulawa texts by the italic letters n and m.

The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, with the Italian sounds. All of these
vowels may be long or short, the long sound being represented by
doubling the vowel. Both Sa'a and Ulawa are fond of vowel sounds;
many words consist only of vowels. The habit of dropping certain
consonants is largely responsible for this excess of vowel sounds.
Closed syllables do not exist and every word ends with a vowel.

In Sa'a the vowel a in certain words changes to e when i or u or the
verbal parucle ko precedes it; the vowel following this a is always
either i or u, this a is marked in the grammar and in the dictionary by
the employment of the dieresis, M. In many words where the differ-
ence between the Sa'a and Ulawa forms consists only of the change of
this I to e the Sa'a form is the only one recorded. This change of
vowel is known to the people of Ulawa, but they are not so careful
about its observance as are the people of Sa'a; in certain words they
change I to e where there is no preceding i or u, thus mai hither, Sa'a
po*o mat on this side, Ulawa po*o met. The change of vowel may be
made in Ulawa at the beginning of a word, but the genius of the lan-
guage is to refuse to make it at the end of the word; U. hdnua village,
i henua in the village, S. t heniu, but in Ulawa the addition of the
demonstrative ni causes the final a to change to ^, i henueni in that
village. The suffixed pronouns au of the first singular and a of the third
singular change in Sa'a to eu and e respectively after i or ii, but Ulawa
does not observe this rule. In some words where Sa'a changes final e
to a Ulawa keeps to e; nike mother, S. nikana his mother, U. nikena.

The diphthongs are ae, ai, ao, au, ei, ou, as in sae, maij hao^ raUf mei^
houj pronounced respecrively as in the English words eye, iron, hour,
how, hey, oh.

The consonants are h; k; d, t; p, q; w; 1, r; s; m, mw, n, ng.

The k is hard and there is no g; where the Melanesian g occurs in
other languages, there is a decided break in the pronunciation of the
cognate word in Sa'a and Ulawa; e. f ., Mota iga fish, Sa'a tV, Ulawa Va.

Note. — Thii srainmar hat been compiled from the larger separate sramman publiihed by
the present writer.

139

140 GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA.

There is no preface of n in the sound of d, which holds of all the lan-
guages of Malaita and is in contrast with the principle of prefacing the
mutes with the nasal of their proper series which extends in Melanesia
as far as Fiji. The nearest English equivalent to the sound of d in
Sa'a and Ulawa is dr; before i d is sounded as ch in church.

To pronounce the t the tongue is pressed against the teeth and the
breath forced outward, the teeth being kept fairly close together, then
the tongue is relaxed and dropped and the breath escapes with an
explosive sound. Sa'a often prefers d where Ulawa has t.

The sound represented by q is ^ and p and q are interchangeable in
certain words, e. g,, pongiy qongi to promise. In some words Ulawa has
p where Sa'a prefers q, r. f ., U. pito^ S. qito sprout.

The sounds of 1 and r are distinct, and both are trilled. There is a
change of 1 to n in Ulawa, i daluma for i danuma in the middle, and Ulawa
at times has 1 where Sa'a has r, U. tatalohaj S. tataroka news, report.

In addition to the three nasals ng, n, m there is a variant upon the
labial nasal, mw a semivocalization of the clear m. The pronunciation
of the palatal nasal ng is that of ng in sing.

Beside the loss of the Melanesian g, as shown before, the t| 1, k and
h are likewise dropped in many words and the loss of the letter is shown
by a break in the pronunciation and indicated to the eye by the employ-
ment of inverted comma *; *o*i to break, Fl. goti; *a*a green parrot, San
Cr. kaka. This break has not been marked in the books used by the
natives, but because of its importance in comparison of the languages it
has been indicated in this dictionary. In the reduplication of verbs
the inner consonant is often dropped in the former member of the dupli-
cated form and there is a corresponding break in the pronunciation;
Florida also drops the inner consonant in reduplication ,but one does
not hear any such break in the sound as in Sa^a and Ulawa.

Contractions are common, especially when the locative i is used;
lai for lae t, ia*i for ta*e i, ke*i for ke*u i, pe*e for pe^ie^ sdune for sdunie
kill him.

ARTICLES.

Sa' a {a) Demonstrative Sing, nga^ m^'i, wi, Aot, houy kdi.

Plur. muiy muj mo.

(b) Personal a.

Ulawa (tf) Demonstrative Sing, nga^ masiy holy houy hdu

Plur. mwaiy mway mo.

{b) Personal a.

I. In Sa'a nouns in the singular are used without an article, in Ulawa
there is a more frequent use oinga in the singular, and parts of the body
are preceded by nga, which is not the case in Sa*a. In Sa*a nga signi-
fies a or any and is used only in this sense. This detail is characteristic
of the language as a whole, Sa'a is far more particular in its usages and
is more highly specialized than Ulawa. Nga is used with the inter-
rogative tady taha what, with ihei U. where, ngaihei who? The nouns
ini S., He U., both meaning one, are used with nga; ia^ena ngaini S.
ta*ana ngaile U. every one; laa U., a person, is preceded by nga.

GRAMMAR OF SA*A AND ULAWA. I4I

2. meH and mdsi denote a part, a piece; both also serve as diminu-
tives in either a depreciatory or an endearing sense, meH keni reu a
handmaid, mdsi mwane inau dear lad. The form mesi may be used even
when the preceding vowel is not i or «, mesi kaleku my child. Nga
and mwai may precede mdsi; nga mdsi taha what thing is it, mtvai m^si
sae different minds.

3 . mi is found with salay mi sala a piece of cloth.

4. hoi is used of things spherical in shape, hoi niu a coconut, hoi kue
a hen's egg, nga hoi tahani what fruit is that? Also in connection with
other substantives naming objects not globular, hoi Ve a fish, hoi nemo
a rain squall.

hou is used more commonly in Ulawa, hoi hudi S., hou hudi U. a
banana; houhi a yam, hou pua an areca nut; but Sa'a has hou ^atea a
coconut water bottle, hou tvei a bamboo water-carrier.

5. hdi in the sense of a, an, one, is used with certain words; hdi seulehi
an evening, hdidinge a day, hdi lama a pool, nga hdiwala a word, hdi
holaa a calm. In some places where Sa'a has hdi Ulawa uses hau;
hdidinge S., haudinga U. a day; and this hdi may be a contraction of hau
if where i is the genitive and hau denotes a period of time.

6. maa eye or point is used with nga to indicate one, of sticks or
matches; also with the genitive i S. or ni U., maai laenga^ a going (Ulawa
generally has nga preceding maa) ; *olu maai qaoolanga three prayings.

7. muif mUf mwaiy mtva all show plurality; nga may be prefixed; mu
is the form commonly used in Sa'a, and, as is true of mtvoj is always
used before a vowel or h; mo is used with words beginning with the
vowel 0, and is more commonly used in Sa'a than in Ulawa.

8. The personal article is a. This is used with all proper names, male
or female, native or foreign, and also with nouns expressing relationship
or kindred. Any common noun becomes by the use of the personal
article a a proper noun; a palopalo the priest, a me*i tvala the Word, a
porona the person, so-and-so. After the usage common to the Oceanic
family the employment of the personal article with the common noun
meaning thing supplies the locution for an indefinite personality, a ola
so-and-so.

NOUNS.

I. Nouns with possessive suffixes: Certain nouns take the suffixed
pronouns denoting the possessor. These are nouns denoting:

a. Parts of the body: maa eye, maamu your eye; nime hand, nimana
his hand; qd^u head, qffuku my head.

b. Certain states or doings of men, life, death, speech, custom, goings :
mae to die, maeiana his death; wala word, toalaku my word; lae to go,
laehana his journey.

c. Position, end, middle, top: ngengedena its end, danumeku my
waist, i hahona on top of it.

142 GRAMMAR OF SA'a AND ULAWA.

d. All the words expressing relatiofiship or kindred except those for
wife and husband and also mwela S. *eUkdU U. chUd.

These nouns are marked in the dictionary with {ku). Certain of
this class are marked with {na^ nt) which denotes that the pronoun is
suffixed only in the third person, and in the case of ni is used of things
only. In the case of the remaining nouns possessicm is denoted by the
addition of the ordinary personal pronouns.

2. Formation of nouns: Nouns which have a special termination
showing them to be nouns substantive are {a) verbal nouns, and (b)
independent nouns.

a. Verbal nouns are formed from verbs by the terminations ngOy tdy
la^ lodf kSf haaj a: mae to die, maenga death, maeta death feast, maelaa
S. nuuka U. sickness; sfo to harm, si'ohaa evil plight; hataU to go along
the beach, hatdUay shore, coast.

The form la generally denotes the gerundive and always has the
suffixed pronoun attached. Similarly kd generally denotes a gerundive
and is seldom used without the suffixed pronoun. In the dictionary
words ending in Ai, la^ td, which are never used without a suffixed pro-
noun, have the hyphen attached.

There are certain adjectives to which the termination nga is attached,
diana good, diananga goodness; ^aela bad, ^aelanga badness, pdine
pdinanga badness; but it is probable that these adjectives are really
verbs. (See diana.)

h. Independent nouns: The only termination is na, and this is
(i) added to nouns which express relationship or kindred, and (2)
appears also to be attached to cardinal numerals to form ordinals.

1. Nouns so formed are always preceded by certain prefixes which
mark reciprocity of relationship or of kindred, ma, mtva^ kffi^ the nu-
meral TO two, or the plural articles mu and mwa: nike mother, ro kd^i
fiikena mother and child, ro kdH nikana ineu my wife and child; mu
mwa *asine brethren.

2. Numerals: *olu three, *olune third.

As stated before, gerundives are formed by the addition of the suf-
fixed pronouns to forms in /a, kd. Tala^ae to begin, tala^aekana its
beginning; ka^auri to save, ka*aurileku my savior. The third person
possessive is added to noun forms in kd: repo ripe, repokaana its old
age, maturity. To neuter verbs the suffix nt or *t is added : koro to
kill, koro^i v. tr., koroHlana the killing of him, sdu to kill, sduni v. tr.,
sdunilada the killing of them.

In Ulawa certain nouns have double noun termination: toeesi to
catch fish, weesingaka fishing; alida to travel by sea, alidangaka a voy-
age; tale to be short of, talengaka a shortage.

3. Genitive relation: The genitive relation of nouns one to another
is effected by the use of the preposition ni or the shorter form t, the
latter being used more commonly in Sa'a, mwane ni Sa*a a Sa^a man,
walo ni *a*a'o a fishing-line, poloi kaa a piece of money, *u*ui ke*u a star*

GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA. I43

Both of these forms are also used to denote purpose: noko deu ni lae
I am making to go, *oke lae wax {wan x) leesie^ go and see it.

Other forms of the genitive are lij si: haulihafUj maaliholOf qS^usi
henuej iangisi hudi.

A genitive relation is also shown by the use of the suffixed pronoun
of the third person singular or plural in agreement with the idea
expressed in the second noun of the pair; i reune tala by the side of the
way, ulolada mditale the cry of the poor. The suffixed pronoun may be
used in the singular when the idea is collective or the second noun car-
ries the sense of totality, ilengine mu nume on the tops of the houses.

The ordinary possessive idea is shown by simple juxtaposition:
nima inau my house, *iisu inge*ie his dog.

The instrumental prefix i is common : kau to hook, ikeu a hook for
gathering fruit; danu to bale, idenu a baler.

4. Plural: Definite plurality is marked by the presence of the arti-
cles muiy mUf mwaij mway used of both persons and things; nga may be
prefixed to these and the word hunge, many, may be added : mu 'inont,
nga mu Hnoniy men, mtoa hanua hunga the crowd, everybody.

The numeral toalu eight is used to express an indefinite number:
toalu henue all the lands, tvalu malau all the islands, the world, toalu^
tana ola S., tvaluUni ola U. every thing.

To a noun ahuta- denoting totality {dhu to be complete) the pro-
noun of the third person singular and of all persons in the plural is
suffixed in agreement with the noun: dhutana sapeku my whole body,
dhutana sapeda all their bodies, sapeda dhutada the bodies of them all,
dhutakaraH both of us, dhutamelu all of us.

To to^ohuu S. real, nga is suffixed and the personal pronoun na is
added: to*ohuungana nga ola, the real thing, mu to*ohuunge*i ola real
things.

To itei S. which, ta is suffixed and the personal pronoun na is added:
iuitana one, any. This is used only with the negative particles ka*aj
sa*aj and thus comes to mean, no one, nothing: e ka*a iuitana nga me^i
ola there is nothing at all. With this may be compared the use of
isei in Mota as the indefinite pronoun, some one.

A noun hike is used with the suffixed pronoun to express of, from
among: e to ini hikada two men of them.

Two nouns, mwai U. mwei S. and kei^ are used with the adjective
tata'ala or with its short form ta^a to express an endearing or a commis-
erating sense; mzoai, mwei being used of men, kei of women: mtvai
tata'ala inau my poor fellow, kei lata pdine dear lady.

Sa'a has a plural in maeni which is generally used in the vocative:
maeni Hnoni sirs, maeni mtvela children.

In mtvela child the plural is formed by reduplication, mtoemwela S.
children.

A unit is expressed in Sa*a by *aia: 'enite *ata how many, V ro *ata
two.

144 GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA.

Certain nouns meaning one» iu U., He U., Vto S*, ini S., are used with
or without nga^ and with nga tnu or nga mwa: ngaiu ola a different
thing, ta mat ngaiU give me one, nga mwaiu *inoni certain persons, nga
mwaili some, nga* eta ^inoni another, a different man, nga muini some.

Alai U., ala U., alei S. is used as a noun of multitude: alai Mtoado*a
you people of Mwado'a, alaiU inau my people, ala mwane you men,
alei Hnoni you people, alei ola the persons, alei saanau the young men.

The word ngdu is used familiarly to children of each sex as a voca-
tive: TO ngdu you two children.

5. There is no grammatical gender: The words mwane male, keni and
qaqa female, are added when the noun does not carry a sex distinction.

6. Relationship or kindred: With the two exceptions of mama'af
mcCa father and nxke mother in vocative employment, the nouns of
relationship are always used:

a. With a suffixed pronoun, *asiku my brother, never *asi\

b. With the termination na and with a reciprocal prefix hd*i or mwa:
TO hffi nikana mother and child, ro mwa *adine brethren, mu mwa*asine
brothers.

The terms mama*a father and teitei in the vocative are addressed by
the parent hypocoristically to the boy or girl.

The word denoting friend is always used with the suffixed pronoun^
malahuku my friend, ro hffi malahune the two friends.

PRONOUNS.

According as they are employed, pronouns may be classified as,
(a) those used as the subject or object of a verb; (b) those suffixed to
a verb or to a preposition as objects; (c) those suffixed to nouns
substantive.

A PRONOUNS U^D AS SUBJECT OR OBJECT OF A VERB-

Sa'a. Ulawa.

Singular: Sincular:

1. iiuu, noUf nOf m, i. tiuiti, nau^ im, ne»

2. f*or, '0. 2. Coe, *o.

$. ing/ie^ nge'u, inge'i^ nge*h $* ing/iOf ngi'isj nge, e.

nge, e.
Dual: Dual:

Indutiye: i. ikwt^ hwe» Indusive: i. ikara'u karm'if ikw^ kara,

Ezdunve: i. Cfmtrt'u '/m/r/'t, 'emeru'e. Exclusive: i. i^efiUTi%*imire%mtri*ifmeft.

miTu'tf men' if mere.

2. Comoro' if 'omoro% moro't^ 2. romoro't, 'omoro'if mon't^

morop i'omoru'e, 'omoru*^^ moro.

moru'f,

3. ikirnu'ff kinru'ft kiteru'e, 3. ikoro'iy koro'if kcfo.
Plural: Plural:

IndusiTc: i. tJh''/, Jb**/, ikoluy kolu. Indusiye: i. ikTa, ki'a^ ika'elut ka'ilu.

Ezdusive: i. t'/nit, *emif i^emelu^ 'imelu^ Eidusive: i. rams, 'ami^ i^emelup 'gmdut

melu. melu,

2. i'omUf W«» i^omolu, 'omolu, 2. i'amUf 'amUf f*omo/if, *omol%f

motu* molu.

3. ikiff, kiUf ikira'fiUf kira'elu, 3. ikire'if ikirOf kirOf iktra'elu^

kira'flut kflUf kilu.

I. The use of the initial i gives distinctness and force. The forms
beginning with i are never used by themselves as the subject, but are

GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA. I45

always accompanied by the shorter forms without t, these latter are
used as subject. Similarly inge*ie is always followed by e.

2. The forms in the singular are never used as the object of a verb or
of a preposition with the single exception of '0. Forms without i are used
in the dual and plural first and second persons as the object of a verb.

3. The forms no and ne are used with the verbal particles of the same
vowel faciesy no with ko of general time, ne with ke and ke*i of future
time, na with *a of general time, and ne with V future.

4. Nge is used before proper names, and the personal article a
coalesces, ngea Awao e lae Awao has gone. It is also used in phrases:
so nge well then, nge ni *oto that is it, e mae nge he is done for now.

5. E is used as the subject of a verb. It is also used following the
longer forms for the sake of emphasis: ingeHe nge*ie e *unue he said it.
It is equivalent also to there is, it is : ^ madoro it is hot, e qale ola there
is nothing. It follows a noun as a secondary subject: nemo e nemo
the rain rains, mwa hanua e rum the people came together; similarly
it may follow a pronoun, kiratei e lae who went ?

6. The forms in -In denote a more restricted number of persons,
but they are not used to form a trinal number. Sa'a is more careful
than Ulawa in the proper use of these diflFerent forms.

7. The pronouns of the third person singular and plural may be used
of impersonal or of inanimate objects. Kite is used to form a passive:
hire *unue it has been said, lit. they have said it, mu fe kite hahi*i *oto
have the fish been cooked? Kite followed by the personal article a
and ola thing or a proper name is used also to denote a company or
party: kiraa ola. So-and-so's party, kiraa Dora Dora's people.

8. The forms in t are used to denote possession: poo ineu my pig,
'elekale i*emere*i the child of us two, poro inge*ie her husband, hu^e i'oe
thy wife.

9. A chief or person of importance is always addressed in the dual,
moro or molu; and a mother, either by herself or with her child, is
addressed as moro.

B. PRONOUNS SUFFIXED TO VERBS OR TO PREPOSITIONS AS OBJECT.

Sa'a. Ulawa.

Singular: Singular:

I. au.

I. au.

2. *o.

2. '0.

Dual:
IndusiTe:
Exclusive:

3. «.

I. kure,

I. *tmiri% *imefu*e^ nure'i, nure.

Dual:
Indutive:
Ezdufive:

3. a.

I. kara'h kara.

I. 'imm'if mifi'ip mere.

2. 'omofo'f, maro'if moro.

2. 'omoroH, moro'it moro.

Plural:
IndutiTe:
Ezdutiye:

3. raru'if riru*u

I. kCi, kolu,

1. 'tmif wulu.

2. *omUf 'omolut molu.

3. rif ra'^u, '*•

Plural: ,
Indudve:
Exclusive:

3. raru'ot raru'i,

I. kCOf ka'elu,

1. 'amif melu.

2. amUf 'omolu, molu.

3. f<i» ra'dut '».

Examples of usage are : noko leesVo I see thee, e *unue hunieu he told
me. When the verb ends in a and au is suffixed only one a is sounded.

146

GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA.

The form a is suffixed to a transitive verb as an anticipatory object :
nou ka'a leesie nga 'inoni I did not see-him a person, nulu heUsie 'oto
mu ola we have done-it the things.

The forms d^ rd may be used of inanimate or impersonal objects.

The form *i is used in place of rd when things and not persons are
the object of the verb : lae wau huni*i go and fetch them.

C PRONOUNS SUFFIXED TO NOUNS OR TO VERBAL NOUNS USED AS PREP-

OSITIONS. OR TO GERUNDIVES.

Sa'a. Ulawa.

Singular: Singular:

!• kHm

I. ku.

2. m«.

2. mu.

Dual:
Inclusive:
Exclusive:

3. nd,

I. kara*u
I. nur/i.

Dual:
Inclusive:
Exclusive:

3. ua.

I. karaHt km-a,
I. mere'if mett.

Plural:
Inclusive:
Exclusive:

2. moro'if moro.

3. ddru'f,

I. kdt ka*elu.

1. mimt, melu.

2. mi%y molu,

3. ddf da'elu; ni.

Plural: ,
Inclusive:
Exclusive:

2. OTOfo'i, moro.

3. dan^i.

I. kot ka'elu.
I. mAmif melu.

3. dot da'Hu; ni

1 . These are the pronouns denoting possession and they are suffixds
to a certain class of nouns only, those which denote the names of paret
of the body, or of family relationships, or of things in close relation-
ship to the possessor; in all other cases possession is denoted by the use
of the ordinary personal pronouns.

2. Of the plural forms those ending in lu denote a restriction in the
number of the persons concerned.

3. When things are in question ni is used in place of dd: lai ne*i i
talani put the things in their places.

4. Verbal nouns used as prepositions: honotaku opposite me, to
meet me, honota is in form a verbal noun but it is not in independent
use as a word.

5. In words like sieku at my house, saada*elu at their house,
maraamu by yourself, sisingana over against it, the roots are evidently
nouns but they do not occur in independent use. In the dictionary
all such words are followed by a hyphen, e. g., saor.

D. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

These are SV, Heninij ni S., inihouy nihouy ni U., this.

ngeena^ waune S.; iniwau, niwauy wauni U., that.

1. ^ienini is more forcible than He; ni is used suffixed to nouns, to
personal pronouns, to uri thus, and to si^iri today, in Ulawa it is also
suffixed to adjectives and adverbs.

2. ena is used by itself in Sa'a as a demonstrative, nge nou lae mdi
ena that is why I came; wau is the adverb meaning there. In certain
villages in Ulawa a demonstrative ini is used in the sense of that is it.''

GRAMMAR OF SA*A AND ULAWA. I47

3. na is suffixed to nouns and pronouns and to certain adverbs to
give point and directness, its use is more common in Sa 'a than inUlawa :
mwalana the people; a mwaend that person, mo ola *oko qaoH ne the
things that thou doest; ta*aune over there, uriney urinena thus, in that
manner.

Na is also used after the negatives ha^ikej qa*ikey ha* ike nay ha^ike ena
no, not that; and after *otOy inge*i *oto na that is it.

E. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

The words used are tei who; taa S., taha U., what. The personal
article a makes atei who (singular) kiratei plural. Both of these words
are nouns.

1 . atei is used for whose, ola atei whose thing, atei ola He to whom does
this belong ? Tei stands for the name of the person and atei means,
what is the name ? atei moro lae mai who came with you ? The demon-
strative ni may be added: atei ni satamu what (who) is your name?

In Sa^a atei has an indefinite use, atei e manataHnie who knows!

2. With taay tahay the definite article nga is used; nga taay nga ola
taay nga taha what? The demonstrative ni may be added; nga taa ni
e 'unue what said he? Taay tahay may mean of what sort? hoi Va
tahani what sort of fish ? With the adverb uri thus taay taha, make
uritaay uritaha of what sort? how? in what way? In Ulawa assent is
shown by taha with *otOy 2l particle denoting completed action; ingeHa
tahato *o ^unueni it is as you have said.

3. In Ulawa the interrogative adverb ihei is used as a pronoun:
nga mwane ihei ni what man ? ngaihei nitveu who is that there ? When
the question is which or where of two things Sa' a uses itei and Ulawa
ihei: *oko sate ngdu itei what (where) will you eat? In Sa*a nge is
prefixed to itei: ngeitei mwane what man? ngeitei Woa what spirit?

F. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

The uses of tni, *eta S., iUy ite U., one, have been dealt with under
nouns. With the exception of He these words prefixed by nga, nga muy
nga mtvaiy are used as signifying some, other, different.

1. Halu means some. In Sa'a the genitive i is suffixed: nga mu
helui Hnoni S., nga mwa halu *inoni U., some men. The pronoun na
may be suffixed : hdluna ngainiy hdluna ngaile one here and there.

2. Iteitana is used in Sa'a with the negative particle ka*a as meaning
no one: e ka*a iteitana ngaini there is no one.

3. Ta*enay ta* eta* ena S., ta*anay ta*ata*ana U., mean every: ta*ena
ngaini every person. Ola thing and le*u S. lehu U. are used in the
sense of any: nou ka*a to*oana nga le*u I have not an3rthing, e ta nga
lehu ana he took some of it.

4. Mwamtvanga S. manganga U. are used with tnt, iUy to express the
:sense of a few: mwamwangaini e saaie only a few know it.

148 GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA.

a RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

There are no relative pronouns. Their place is supplied by various
locutions.

1. The suffixed pronoun: inru S> kire usunge*inieu met I am he whom
they sent. The addition of the demonstratives na S. ni U. serves to
make the meaning clearer: inge*ie a porona kire ko *unue he is the person
whom they speak of.

2. By the use of a coordinate clause : femi *u mtvala e takangie *asi we
are the people who came through the sea.

H. POSSESSIVES.

There are three possessives in Sa'a and Ulawa.

I. The first is used only of things to eat and drink, with the stem *a
to which the pronouns are suffixed. In the first and second person
singular V S. *a U. is added, and this *e or *a is replaced by S' when
several things are in view for one person to eat.

Sa'a.

Ulawa.

Sincular:

I. 'aku'ff *£ku'u

Singular:

I. yku%'fku'i.

Xt MUM 4y tfNMI t»

Dual:
Inclunve:
Exduaive:

3. *an€,

I. *akm'a*h *dkaru*i.
I. *mmiri*u *mmiru*e.

Dual:
IndunTe:
Exdutive:

3. 'iMM.

I. 'aUrm'i.
I. *Mmiri*u

3. 'amoro'u '^mioro.

%• tnHOfO ty iMKOfOi

3. ^adaru'i^ *adaru'u 3. *ad^ru% 'iuUiru'i,

Plural: ^ Plural:

InduiiTe: i. '«!«» *aka'elu, Induave: i. 'aka, *4kd*d%.

EzdutiTe: i. '««#«», *awul%. Exdufive: i. 'jirmi^ 'amdu.

2. *iimUu 'itmoliL 2. 'jMf «» mmolu,

3. Wtf, Wa'//«. 3. 'sda, 'ada'iiu.

Examples : hoi niu *eku*e a coconut for me to eat, *o ta *amu*i take
them to eat.

In Ulawa the change of *a to V after t or ti in the first and second
singular is optional.

When the sense relates to food in general and not to a particular meal
the ordinary personal pronouns are employed : mu ngeulaa i^emelu our
food.

2. The second possessive is na with which a suffixed pronoun is used
only as meaning mine, or, for me, and never with a noun, as e. g., Maori
tokuy toku rima my hand. It is declined in the same way as the pre*
ceding: moola nana aUi things for whom? moola namuH things for you,
da nakara*i take for you and me, dsu nemu^e work for you. In the
third person plural an additional form nani is used.

3. The third possessive is similar in form to the first, but is used
without the final a in the first and second persons singular, and the
stem is a and not 'a; likewise dni is found in place of ada in the third
person plural when the reference is to things and not to persons. The
meaning is belonging to, with, at: nga naihi emu have you a knife with

GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA. I49

(on) you? *o ta ana atei from whom did you get it? ^ tono ana tvai
inihou he drank of this water. This possessive is also used —

a. as the object of certain verbs to which the pronoun is not suffixed :
nou hiitvala*imoli ana I believed him.

b. when the object is separated from a transitive verb: e ha*ara*i
mumuni ana he called him secretly. In cases where a verb has been
rendered transitive by the addition of a suffix this suffix is omitted when
the third possessive is used, owing to the object being separated from
the verb : horo to beat, horo^i transitive, kire ko horo lata* (da aku they
beat me unmercifully. Certain verbs also employ this possessive as
the object instead of using the suffixed pronoun. Cf. to*o 2.

c. to show certain differences of meaning: e ere aku he forbade me,
e ere naku^e he spoke for my benefit; e dolosieu he asked my name, e
dolosie aku he asked me about it; also idiomatically ha*ataHnie aku show
it to me. The adjective *aho*a, apart from, is followed by this posses-
sive, *aho*a aku apart from me. So also is the preposition liuta'a S.
liutaha U. beyond : e lae Hula* aku he went beyond me.

d. in the third person plural dni is used of things: mu maholo dni the
times for them, ne^isae pdinadni think much of them. Cf. dni 2.

ADJECTIVES.

1. Words which are qualifying terms may also be used in the form of
verbs, but some may be used without verbal particles, following the
qualified word : poro pdine big man, 'elekale haora small child.

2. Some words have a form which is only used of adjectives, either of
termination or of prefix.

a. Adjectival terminations are 'i, /a, la*a, tdy ta% of which *d and
Id are suffixed to nouns as well as to verbs but the others are suffixed to
verbs only.

*d: sane white ant sane*d infested with ants. An intensification of
meaning is given to certain adjectives by doubling the first syllable or
the first two syllables and by suffixing *d: manola pure, manamanola'd
very pure, diena good, didiena'd very good.

'ala: sasu to smoke, sasu^ala smoky.

Id: *usu a dog, *usule possessing dogs, kohi to be beautiful, kohikokild
beautiful.

id: ta*tngelu with one accord, taHngelute all together.

la* a: mae to be sick, mamaela*a weakly, sickly.

ta*a: repa to be curved, rerepata*a curved.

h. Adjectival prefixes are ma, mway mala^ taka, tata^ toto.

The prefixes ma and mtoa are common in words which may fairly be
called adjectives; like mala they show condition and are prefixed to
verbs : *o*i to break, ma*o*i broken, hiohio to bend, mwahiohio swayed by
the wind, keke side, malakeke on one side.

*a is prefixed to verbs and forms participles : Idngu to pluck up, *aldngu
detached, hdli to break, *ahdli broken off.

I50 GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA.

taka denotes spontaneity: luhe to loose, takaluke come adrift.

tata^ toto denote condition: qelu to roll, tataqeluqelu headlong, qini y/et,
toioqini soaked.

3. Comparison: Degrees of comparison are shown by the use of
prepositions or adverbs, or by a simple positive statement. The prepo-
sitions used are mtvaani from, which always has the suffixed pronoun,
and li%Ua*a S. liutaha U. beyond, in excess, which is followed by the
third possessive.

The adverbs employed are kele S., V// U., walawala U., woLCWoie U.,
hVito'o S., ha^akuu^ei S., ha^ahuu^ani U.

A positive statement carries comparison by implication: He nihou e
dienay He nitveu e *aela this is good, that is bad, i. ^., this is better than
that; inihou e diena this is best.

VERBS.

Almost any word may be used as a verb by prefixing the verbal par-
ticles, but some words are naturally verbs as being the names of actions
and not things. There are also verbs which have special forms as such
by means of a prefix or termination. Verbal particles precede the verb,
they have a temporal force.

1. The verbal particles are ito, ke^ ke'i S.; 'a, V, *anaH U. The par-
ticles are written apart from the verb, but the speakers like to join them
to the governing pronouns of the first and second persons singular, and
the 'a of *anaH is joined in the same way.

a. The use of ko S. *a U. marks the time as present, but only in so far
as the action is not regarded as past or future. The time having been
shoym to be past ko and *a take up the narrative, and the illative si may
be added. After ko the vowel a in certain words changes to e as it does
after a preceding i or u. The illative si may replace ko.

b. ke expresses a certain amount of futurity in the acrion, ke*i is used
of the definite future; *e conveys the sense of let, as also does ke; *e and
ke are also used following a negative, e ka*a ola neke manata^inie I know
nothing.

The adverb muni U. to, in order that, is used as a subjunctive or
optative and is followed by ^e; muni ^e contracts to mun*e, and similar
contractions occur with the pronouns kira and ka^elu when followed
byV.

c. 'ana'i U. denotes the time as more or less future, the illative si
may be added.

No particle is used when the time is past, but *oto and ka*u follow the
verb to denote a preterite. For the imperative no particle is employed.

2. Times and moods: A subjunctive is formed by ana if, when, used
in Sa*a with ko or ke^ in Ulawa with *a. Kosi by itself also denotes the
subjunctive.

Conditional affirmation is expressed by ha^alaa S. tdume'if mune*i U.

GRAMMAR OF SA*A AND ULAWA. 151

MuneH U. and haro S. denote subsequence of action, the particles *a
or ko precede them.

The illative is si and means then, thereupon, in that case, following
on, for the first time; the verbal particles ko^ ke, 'a, *ana*i may precede it.

The particle kd*u follows the verb : (a) it denotes a preterite, (b) it
gives a sense of incompleteness to the action described, (c) it mitigates
the directness or harshness of a request or of a command.

3. Negative particles: The foregoing particles are not used in nega-
tive sentences. The negative particles are ka'a, sa*a S.; qaHke, qake^
qa*iy qaUj si*ej si U.

a. Of these ka*a^ qa^ike^ qahy qaH^ qale may be used either of present
or past time.

b. sot ay si*e are used of future time, and si*e and si are used as strong
dehortatives.

r. A negative imperative is used with mtvane lest, and with the dehor-
tative su*uri don't. In Ulawa the particle *e may be added after the
subject. Both su*uri S. and sVe U. are used in negative conditional
sentences. In Sa'a the particle ke is used preceding su^uriy but it is not
used before mtvane.

d. The genitives ni, t, are used to denote purpose.

4. Suffixes to verbs: There are certain terminations which, when
suffixed to neuter verbs or to verbs active in only a general way, make
them definitely transitive, or determine their action upon some object.
These are of two forms :

a. A consonant with i: Ai, /i, mi, nij ngiy sij or *i by itself; e. g.,
tonohiy potaliy ddumi, raangiy maesiy hoa'i.

A less common suffix is na: aray arana; this suffix may possibly be
the ending of the word diana good or of pdina big, to each of which
words the suffix is added.

b. The termination d^i which is suffixed by itself to nouns to convert
them into verbs, sato satoa*i. The forms in S' and d*i are also used
intransitively: pele by mischance, peUH by mischance, *olo*oloa*i to
stagger. When d^i is suffixed to verbs the genitive ni is also added;
su'uy su*ueUni; and d'ini forms a transitive suffix. To this form d*ini
the consonants A, /, m, n, ng, r, t are prefixed; e. g.y *ufihe*iniy taheUtiniy
onomdHniy loondfiniy hi*inge*iniy sikera^iniy papatd^ini.

c. When the object is separated from the verb the suffixes *i. At, etc.,
are omitted and the third possessive is used as the object.

d. When the verb is used intransitively the ni of the compound
suffix is dropped.

e. Certain participles are formed from verbs by the addition of the
compound suffixes, ni being omitted; e. g.y oroma*iy fdpvie*iy luhetaHy
ntoute'i. The compound suffix without ni is used intransitively, ta^e,
ta*ela*i.

Some verbs take both forms of the suffix: rdpUy rdpusiy rdpute'ini;
*alay *alamiy *alamd*ini; sikiy sikihiy sikihe^ini.

152 GRAMMAR OF SA*A AND ULAWA.

/. The syllabic suffix ha*ini is used with certain verbs as meaning
with : olo to swim, oloha*ini to swim with a thing.

5. Prefixes to verbs : These are causative and reciprocal.

The causative is ha'a; it may be prefixed to almost any word, and it
may be used with verbs which have a transitive suffix.

The reciprocal is hd^i. This sometimes denotes repetition or contin-
uance of an action. With the addition of the adverb lo^u again, ha^i
denotes a change or an addition. In ha^i^amasi to have compaissionate
feelings hafi is comparable to Florida vex in veiarorn to take pity on.

6. Passive: The passive is expressed by the use of the third personal
pronoun plural kire S. kira U. as subject with the verb and the adverb
*oto already; kire, kira, are also used impersonally.

The gerundive is used with the verb loff to go, in expression of the
passive : sdunilana e lae *oto his being killed. This usage is more com-
mon in Sa'a. The force of the gerundive is either active or passive.

7. Reflexive verbs : The word fnaraar- with suffixed pronouns denotes
reflexive action: e sdunie maraana he killed himself.

8. Reduplication: Verbs are reduplicated in three ways. There is no
diflference among the various forms beyond an intensification. In the dic-
tionary the reduplicated form is presented under the entry of the stem.

a. By repetition of the first syllable or of the first two syllables:
suluy susulu; qdnioy qdniqenio.

b. By repetition of the whole word : dsu, dsuesu.

c. By repetition of the whole word with the omission in the former
member of the inner consonant : domuy do*udomu. This is found only
in Sa^a. In Ulawa there is also a repetition of the first syllable with
the addition of euphonic i: sdsuy sdisesu.

ADVERBS.

There are pure adverbs in Sa'a and Ulawa, but many words used as
adverbs are truly nouns and others are verbs, adjectives also may be
used in this employment.

The locative i is used with adverbs of place and time and it precedes
every place name. The demonstrative nd S. ni U. is suffixed.

Place where is regarded as place whence, after the habit of the usual
Melanesian idiom; *urei standing at, has the force of from.

PREPOSITIONS.
I. Simple prepositions:

Locadye, 1. Instnimental, tffM, Sm. itd S.

Causatioii, kadki, Rebtion, mo, int, *ni o.» f^i S., mil U.» kHu^ ne-^ xai- S.

Motion to» teito't S., taU U., isnli, 'oki, Gemdye, nifU ^

Modon from, mwaani. Poddon, parasif U.» xisingi $•» hora U.f Ao«ojt» 5k%*u

Dadve, Aunt S.> muni U.

The locative i is seen compounded in iuiy ihei where.
With the exception of the locative, the instrumental, and the geni-
tive all the foregoing prepositions are used with a suffixed pronoun.

GRAMMAR OF SA^A AND ULAWA. 1 53

Of the two instrumental prepositions ana is the ordinary one, denot-
ing with. When the noun denoting the instrument is not preceded by
an article, or when the noun is used in a general sense, dni is used in the
place of ana: lae dni i* ola to go by canoe, dni eu with music, ana nga
taa why, dni taa with what things. Ana also denotes at, in, place
where, from among; dni is also used as neuter plural, from among, da
nga muini tni take some of them. Ana denotes the actual instru-
ment, dni denotes the method of action: sdunie dni noma kill him
spear-wise. In Sa'a dni is used in the composition of nouns, supi
eni heu a stone club.

From meaning at saa-^ sie- comes to have the meaning of motion to.
Cf. 'ure.

2. Compound: These are mostly nouns used with the locative; the
pronoun is sufl&xed as the actual object, or as anticipatory object when
a noun follows: i kaho above; i haka S., i aroka- U., below; i lengi
on top, above; i keke U., by the side of, beside; i la*o-f i lalo within.

Some are constructed from verbal nouns to which the suffixed pro-
noun is always added: 'oliteku in my place, in place of me; konotana
on his behalf.

Certain verbs are used as prepositions : loosi to await, karaHni near
to, ka*atauli far from.

CONJUNCTIONS.

Copulative, no. Di^unctiYe, fp«.

Adversative teV, teV p/ini S., ta'a^ Conditional^ ana,

na ta*a U. Sladve, si.
Connective, 'oto.

A mark of quotation is uri. Neither .... nor is expressed by a
negative followed by wa. The reason for an objection is introduced
by toa uri. Until is kida ana or lai kula ana. Sato shows consecu-
tiveness of action.

NUMERALSr

The numerical system is decimal, all numbers above the tens are
expressed in tens.

The cardinals are:

I. 'eta. ta'au'a S., ta'e U. 5- V limi S., V lima U. 9* V jwv S., V siwa U.

a. V nUf *i rua U. 6. V ono. la V UmgahiUu, aafola.

3. V 'o/«. 7. '/ Af«.

4. *i hoi. 8. 'gtoaln.

In numbers other than *eta one the V is omitted in quick counting;
V is also omitted as a general rule with ro.

In composition one is ta*ata*ay two is ro.

The prefix to*o forms distributives, to*ota*e ola one thing at a time.

Walu eight is used also as an indefinite number, as also awala the
tally of ten. Tangakulu is the tenth of a series.

154 GRAMMAR OF Sa'a AND ULAWA.

To express units above ten mtvana S., mana U., is employed : four-
teen ataala mtvana hat. An incomplete tally is expressed by da*adala.

Special words are used as nouns for tens of different things : a^ulu lo
coconuts, dideri lo parrot-fish, hike lo garfish, walo pasa lo fljring-fish,
walo ID native moneys.

Tangalau is lOO. The sum above the hundred is expressed by
mwana S., mana U.; tangalau e hat awala mtvana hat 144. A word pe*i
S., mdi U., with, in addition to, may be used following tangalau.
Occasionally the tens over one hundred are expressed simply as units :
tangalau mtvana 'eta may mean one hundred and ten.

Special words are used for hundreds of various things: nao 100
yams, alo 100 taro, tV 100 porpoise teeth, suit hata 40 dogs' teeth^
totola 400 dogs' teeth.

Sinola is 1,000; this is used correctly of yams; qela 1,000 coconuts.

Mola signifies a countless number when used of men, molai uhi
10,000 yams, molai hui 10,000 taro, raui helu S., *apai niu U., 10,000
coconuts.

2. Ordinals: The cardinals with a substantival termination na form
ordinals.

First, *etana» Fourth, haine S., kaina U. Seventh, hiuiu S., hiuna U.

Second, numa. Fifth, limana. Eighth, wdyme S., waluna U.

Third, *oluni S., 'oluna U. Sixth, onona. Ninth, siwana.

Ordinals precede the noun: ruxina nga mtvane the second man.

Ordinals are used to express the number of times : ruana kira *asi
soea they asked him a second time.

Tenth is expressed by tangahulu ana; the twelfth day atvalai he*idinge
mtvana ruana; one hundred and twenty-first tangalau *e ro atvala mtvana
*etana.

*Enite how many is used with the substantival termination na:
^enitana what number, howmanyeth.

3. Multiplicatives are formed with the causative ha* a: ha^arue
twice, ha'atangalau a hundred times; hduta*a*i S., hduta*e U., once.

The word ta*e is used as a kind of descriptive prefix with the cardinals
/aV, *oluy haif and with 'enitfy when the holding capacity of a canoe is
in question.

THE LORD'S PRAYER,

In Twenty Languages, as used in the Diocese of Melanesia among the

Islands of the South Pacific.

■NQLISH.

OUR Fftther, which art in hearen. Hallowed bo
$fhj Naino. Thy kingdom come. Tfa j will be
*doiie iix earth, Aa it is in heaven. Give us this day
o«r daily bread. And forgiye as onr treepasees, As
we foiigiYe then that trespan against ns. And lead
vs not into tenptafcion ; Bnt deliver ns from evil :
For thine is the kingdom, the power, and the
glory, For ever and ever. Amen.

RAQA, N«w H^britf^s.

FTTATA^ amare, ihama na sabnga. Kom ate na
X. maa. Nom doron na dnm ataa kon amaro.
I4U gang lalai kamai ginaganiana Vi dadariha hnri
SarigL Goi binihi kabnrai vnromai, knn kamai
gam binihi kabnrai vnrora. G6vav hu te kamai lol
kalkaliana ; gov lai kamai nin qatigoro. Hnri nom
nte, i roroRo, i sarisari vi togo vai toaL Amen.

LAKOMA, Banlw talMid

EMAM maken, Hahaw ui roti. Moa vitiga ni
van ma. Mom mares ni wesis vaan- mere ,
maken. Le ma qirig man game en sinag ga ta ehe
qirig. Ke tretremwate p<^me, mere game ga
tcetremwate en poge. Sao nknkrag game le gal-
galve ; Ke la game tren ea gasgasa. En mo» eu
vitiga, sa en man, sa en heHhe/*, ti ti tie. Amen.

TORRES ItLANM.

MA raina, Nc lo ni ruar. Nc gamili ui ven mc.
Ke dotme ui mena na daw<t na raina. Ola
me dome bi kemam ne hinega ta bine dome. Ke
dnamvita ns heme keniem dawa kemem van dnam-
vita ne bemehe. Tate vaMvairme kemem li dagaro
kemem ; Wola kemam du ne hiwhiw. Ne gamili,
ni mena meke, mi ne heri ni toga ni toga. Amen.

MAMA anln, Nahema vi gogona. Noma nte
TI himei. Noma tarani vin lei lolovavsgi
mere aula. Lai himei gaqarigi a hihaga vi eno
hori gaqarigi. Gon ladovohogi nabagnmei, mere
gamai gam ladovohogi nabagnre. Go meee siregi
gamai lolo galegaleasi ; gon lai gamai dena ginen esi.
Noma a ata ko noma a mnremare ko noma a vara-
Tans vi eno vi eno. Amen.

8ANTA ORUZ.

MELEUVGE mako wan, Nep ka Te. Maboielen
na om Ma tati detaem nawida maka io na
apnle waa. Tnam abunaga ba^e dakanano na
taplete ma abanaga. Ava aipteo alnei^e apale ni^a
aipteo alnedc, Bakn vele bame rnge mana vaika ;
Amilaa nige mana vaioajal. Mabonielen, ie malet,
ie nile, ti io ti io. Amen,

MAKWa N«W H«brl«tes.

rpATA a woaana, Naaasana na roHorono. Nona
\ _L toaoqe na samai. Nona tarani na lai le veioa
mwea womaa. Lai snmai qariki min kami na sinaga
a tarisa be qariki. Go tigi gina bagami, mere kami
mo tigi gina bogara. Go kare tektekerag kami tea
ale galeana ; Ck> lai' kami dani na anseseta. Anofta
a tanoqe, ta a son, ti i| sinara, na toga na toga.
Amen.

VANIKOLOb

All A wan. Netteifo e tapa. femie mare i^aima.
lemie wameno ipiaine ino leno. neife eaa.
Kama neii damoida iemie toro nane pe damoida.
Ayo kalameua f/amita, tekamaoli imetore neue
f/amita nape pianoa tekamaoli iedietore. Igai
karekare f^amita aka bo^ila; tjo kala f/amita mena
mamane fisale. lemie mare, tjtk aaka, gm iremare
ila ila. Amen.

MOTAt Banks Ittatni

MAMA avanana, Nasasam^ ni ro90. Nom o
marana ni male ma. Nom o maroe ni lai
alalaitana tama avanana. Le ma qarig man kamam
o sinyga. we tira ape qarig. Ka nomvitag napnga-
mam; tama ikamam we nomvitag napngara. Nipea
akeokeg kamam ilo galeva ; Ka lav kamam nan o
ganganor. Anoma o marana, wa o mana, wa o lenas
ti toga ti toga. Amen.

RUMATARI, S. Orf«tov«l.

MAMA hahaha, Naatama ni apana. Narahana
ma ni rao mai. Naheoqaniama ni mataka
mai tano majia haha taawa mai rikini tana gami na
moro ni uaa ni arari rikini. Kato kasta nsginomi,
maita i gami m'e kato kasia naginota. Kaeiana
watea gami oho»i gami; go teua gami tenia na
oraoraga. Pasimn narahaama, maua menaama,
mana togatogaama tare tare. Amen.

WAMOb t. Cristoval.

A MA vioami noai an>, Naatama na maaea. Na-
hoarama ai boi. Naheiirisiama ai madaa noai
ano t bahai ona noai aro ; Hamai deini tanaami ta
.hereho itiaa ai oraoa i dieini ; Oi adomai nagasia ni
iBomami, ona iami mi adomai nagaeia ni inoda ; Oi
abai wateami ini ohoHiami; Oi waiami bania i
oraoraa. Na honrama, mana menaamo, mana zova-
hama, ai taro orea urea. Amen.

riu, Aflala.

MAA kami ilani, na satama e aaba. Na taloa
oe leka mai. Kami sasii ra ko oj/ai, iano
diia kira sasii ilaiii. O qatia mai taena f aamia fana
ki bolo faidia taena. O luge aiania easii taafia kami
ka, diia kami la^jre aiania sasii taana kiia Id. Alaa
dsMa ani kami eaena oiia. nalia olitai faumi fasia
r« tMk Amen.

155

156

THE LORD S PRAYER.

MAMA ami afiMfa ; If» aUmu ni apiiiift. Ant-
fM» un« «i rago mM. Faigirisii ama si
maUku nQgai tton niara afaafa. Tana mai itaini
taira^ami na iiiaraf|o niNaa ai gorana itaini. Oo
katomagi kaaia na ginomi,nnaFa igami mi katomtgi
kaaia na ginota. Apaiia go watogami agi ofoMigama ;
Qo tao garni bania na oraoraga. Faginigo arafaira
mana manai maik» rarafamu, tewasia Wwaiia.
Amoii*

ULAWA.

AM AMAMI aeni, na Satamn moni maM. ^a
Alalmita ioa rnoni lae mai. ^a haihanilamu
maui madaa oto, mai i orohana mala oto ilmi. O
ta mai niri mwiiami mai waalaa aa' haidadawa ana
aiirini. O aaa aaia na fuai ntroaita iami, mala iaml
a Me aaia na mai rdtoaua alaile ami baaroroaira aai.
O aaQri totoliasiami ilaona malaluwana ^ O tola ami
maania na laa ni orahaa. Ana o tooana na aTahana,
na aa naoamaii^, na aa manikalnaaa, na aaia maao
oto 00. Amon*

AMAMAMI ila»i, Satama ka maai. Alakaaa
ioa ka laa mai. Mo ola Mtema ani denleni ka
■ladaa oCo^ iano ilahn mala oto ilawi. Da mai aiiri
li ma nanla ke adona atiri. Oka taa aaia mai
iami mala ami ko lai «aia ma roroana bania
•lala ami baaroroaira ani. Ifaanie o toliaaiami buma
mataboaaoa; Tolaiami aiaania orabaala. Ana o
tooana alahaM Da nanamafia na raiaa, oto di oto di»

MAA igami ilai.i, na Satama ka aba. Ka ala-
ialaa* oa ka laa mai. Na doo ragamn ani
adealana ka inalnda na, iano iaa ilitfti* ilaiiL Falaa
mai taraina faagami na faiiala a bobola fai taraiua.
O amaala aaia na aalilaaa gami iliai garni mi raanata
a«a na italtlaira gara. Faaia lagaai gami laona
iUtoola ; O laf aa gami iaata faalajtaa. Ana do oa
na ablalaa, ma na mamana, ma na raia, ka loo ka
tao.

VATUHAMA,

MAMA ihoto, ka ba taba Kaaoamb. Ka mai
natotnmn. Ke mana na otjabama • Tavana
ekoaia ihota. Ko iaaa Tauibami mai ke aanL Ko
molotabani na kibomami a luMwa ibami ami molda-
hani na kibodira. Ko jika na mololaani hami tana
na gngnre. Kp laho talUni hami taai aa taaotobo.
Anuna na totoia, ma na jnana, ma na totora ka ba

UMU, CNMMlaloi

MAMA^ I Laai, eaba na thatamo. Oa la^a
na ilo amn. Qe taaonama na aaoama i Taa
aliTana i laai. Vawatea mai i none na Taaa gt tba-
danaaa i nene. Oo nai ^atan na roolai palnmami
eliTaaa i amiami nai vataa na molai palnda. Ooya
lini ami tana torotoro, go ada ami vataa tana
Namcanavnla'mana nanama, mana ladi^
^ laa me lae. Amen.

MAMA i kokoa, ke taba na ahama. Ka tooa
mai nimna na kinakaba. Ke taaoaiine na
lioma i pari te Taga i Jcokoa. He gami mai taeni
na Taaa te manana i taeni. Mo ko talakabai na lei
palnmami ke vaga igami kai talakabai na lei pala«
dira. Ko bei labatigami ta na tabotabo, mo ko lari
gami ta na laMOtaNcdika. Nimna na baba, ma na
maaa, ma na lada, ka ^aa me Taa.

MAMA, Ko mono i popo i Keda taba na Abama ;
Keda mai na nagntamn ; Keda legna na
behema i thepa ke vagagna i popo ; Higami mai
legamagaTa na ^ana ke nftbamami ikea^aieni ; Ko
talataroga na palnhamami ^ vagagna igami Iriti
talotaroga na palahadia ; Ko aagotJabatigami bori
piapilaa, mo Ko hatt an gami kori koakoa ; cigna
na nimna na bngata, ma na tbaba, ma na ailada, ke
ban BM baa. Amen.

MTuaaauM MnsioM Pasn, Noarouc Iilaxr. lau.

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC

The native peoples of the western Pacific (excluding the Australian
aboriginals) are classified ethnologically in four divisions : Polynesian,
Micronesian, Melanesian, Papuan. The languages of the first two
divisions may be regarded practically as one and may be called, roughly,
Polynesian. In Melanesia there are certain communities who do not
speak Melanesian and whose language is reported to be allied closely
to the language of Tonga, and who in consequence belong to the Poly-
nesian division of speech. With the exception of these communities,
all the other peoples in Melanesia use one type of spech. In Papua,
at any rate on the south and north coasts, two completely different
types of language exist — ^the one closely allied to Melanesian, the other
separate and distinct and but slightly akin, if at all, to the languages
even of the peoples in the neighboring islands of Torres Straits.
This latter type Mr. S. H. Ray has named Papuan.

In Poljoiesia proper there is but one type of language, and the
Polynesian peoples inhabit the following group of islands: Hawaii,
Marquesas, Tahiti, Paumotu, Mangareva, Nine, Samoa, Rarotonga,
Tonga, New Zlealand (Maori), Futuna and Uvea (Horn and Wallis
Island), Tokelau (EUice Group). In Melanesia, Poljmesian-speaking
peoples are found at Mele and Fila in Sandwich Island and on Fotuna
and Aniwa in the southern New Hebrides; on Uea in the Loyalties;
on Tikopia and Anuda; on Matema, Pileni, and Nukapu in the Reef
Islands oflF Santa Cruz; on Rennell and Bellona south of San Cristoval;
on Sikaiana north of Ulawa; on the coral atoll Ongtong Java north of
Ysabel, and on Nukuoro in the Carolines.

Mr. Ray reckons the number of separate forms of Polynesian speech
as 19 or 20. With the Polynesians each group or each separate island
has practically only one language, and the languages of all the Poly-
nesian peoples (with the exception of those in Melanesia) have been
reduced to writing and grammars and dictionaries of them have
been published. The Presb3rterian missionaries in the New Hebrides
have made certain studies of the four Polynesian languages in their
sphere, but no linguistic work has been done on the other Polynesian
languages in Melanesia and there is no way of knowing what peculiar
characteristics they present, if any.

It would be of considerable interest linguistically to know whether,
in the case of the languages of Matema, Pileni, and Nukapu, the influ-
ence of the neighboring Melanesian peoples has in any way altered the
characteristic Polynesian features of speech, and whether there is any
sign of a mingling of Melanesian peculiarities of speech with the radical
characteristics of the Polynesian stock — any cross, so to speak, such
as was effected in English by the introduction, e. ;., of the romance
prefixes and suffixes.

IS7

158 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

However, since the Melanesian language in the neighboring island of
Niiilole shows no sign of Poljmesian influence at work, and since the
tendency always is for the later and the more decayed types of speech
to affect adversely the older and more complicated types, it can hardly
be expected that the Polynesian languages in Melanesia shall have
been affected by the Polynesian.

Certain Papuan languages in New Guinea show very distinct signs
of such a cross. Thus, Mr. Ray writes of Maisin (Cambridge Expedi-
tion to Torres Straits, vol. in) that it appears to be a Papuan language
which has adopted an abnormal number of Melanesian words. ''It
has also adopted some Melanesian particles, the verbal auxiliaries
entirely, and the use of possessives with post-positions; but in other
respects its grammar is Papuan." The language of Mailu on the south
coast is in the same mixed condition as regards its vocabulary. Maisin
may represent a survival of a former Papuan population in Eastern
Papua.

Micronesia has six groups of islands, Carolines, Ebon-Marshall,
Gilberts, Nauru, Palau, Tobi, and with the single exception of the
Carolines each group has only one language. Mr. Ray states that in
the Carolines there are at least five distinct languages, Ponape, Kusaie,
Mortlock and Ruk, Yap, and Uluthi. In certain parts of Micronesia
a jargon called Chamorro is spoken, presumably a mixture of Spanish
and Micronesian.

While reckoning the approximate number of Polynesian languages
as 19 and of Micronesian as 15, Mr. Ray says that Melanesia has 180
and New Guinea (Papua) certainly 150, with many others still un-
named. He states also that in many of the Papuan or non-Melane-
sian languages of New Guinea ''the extraordinary difficulty of the
grammar and the limited area in which the language is spoken make it
extremely impossible that any one will ever take the trouble to learn
one." As an example of a difficult language Mr. Ray quotes the
Kiwai of the Fly River, the grammar of which he says is "awful,"
thus, e. g.y supposing that three people share a coconut between them
and one of them says "we three are eating a coconut," nimo-ibi nao oi
n-^ruso-ibi-duru-mo; the literal translation of this is "we three one
coconut we-eat-three-now-we." If a man eats three coconuts he says
mo netowa naobi oi potoro n-iriso-ibif i. ^., "I two one coconut three I-
eat-three."

As to the New Guinea languages, it is enough for our present pur-
pose to state that they seem to be of two types, viz. Melanesian and
Papuan, u e.y non-Melanesian. The Anglican Mission in New Guinea
has to deal with both types of these languages. The language used at
Wedau, the headquarters of the Mission, is of the usual Melanesian
type, and Mr. Copland King, the original investigator of Wedauan,
has also published a translation of the Gospel according to St. Luke in

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 1 59

Binandere, an extremely difficult non-Melanesian language spoken on
the Mamba River. Mr. King has stated recently that on the coast of
German New Guinea both Melanesian and non-Melanesian languages
occur. Both types also occur in the sphere of the London Missionary
Society.

Melanesian languages are spoken in Fiji, Rotuma, the Loyalties, New
Caledonia, New Hebrides, Banks, Torres, Santa Cruz, Swallow Group,
Solomons, New Britain and New Ireland, Admiralties, in the islands
lying off New Guinea to the eastward, and in New Guinea itself. With
the single exception of Savo in the Solomons, all of the Melanesian
languages are practically of the same type and the grammars of all of
them may be made up on the same framework. Santa Cruz contains
the greatest number of exceptions to the regular type and is confessedly
the most difficult of the Melanesian languages. Savo is regarded by
Dr. Codrington as Melanesian, but of a more archaic type than the rest,
as is shown by the absence of prepositions in it and by its failure to
distinguish between parts of speech and also by its use of demonstra-
tives as both pronouns and adverbs.

PROMINENT LINGUISTIC PECULIARITIES.

It will be of use to summarize here the most prominent linguistic
peculiarities common both to Melanesian and Polynesian languages
and to add further some special marks whereby the differences between
these two types of the Oceanic languages may be readily recognized.

1. POSSESSIVES.

Possession is shown in the Melanesian languages by suffixing pro-
nominal forms in kuy muy ncy to the noun: Mota qatuky my head; Sa'a
nimemuy thy hand; Florida tinana, his mother; and also to radicals no
{na), moy thus forming an expression answering to my, thy, his, in
English, while another pair of radicals ga, may with the pronouns
suffixed, represent, respectively, a thing belonging more closely to a
person, and a thing for a person to drink.

In Melanesia these pronominal forms are suffixed only to nouns of
a certain class; those, namely, which signify parts of the body and
degrees of relationship or a man's belongings. In Malay these pro-
nouns are suffixed to nouns without any distinction of class, while in
Maori they appear added to the vowels and a or to these vowels sup-
plemented by n or m : nOy nay mo, ma, and are used preceding the noun.
In Maori the differences in meaning of these possessives are shown by
the changes between a and 0, a signifying that the thing referred to is
regarded as acted upon by the person with whom it is in relation, that
the action is from the thing on the person. "What the Polynesians do
by the changes of a and the Melanesians do by the use of four dis-
tinct words, and in these it is the consonant and not the vowel which

l6o LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

gives the particular diflference in signification. But both Polynesian
and Melanesian have a stem, a noun, to which identical pronouns are
suflhced to give a possessive sense." (Mel. Lang.» p. 133.)

1 PRONOUNS.

All the Oceanic languages have inclusive and exclusive forms in the
first person plural of the personal pronoun; in one case the person or
persons addressed are included with the speaker, in the other they are
excluded. Polynesian languages have no trinal number as apart from
the plural; indeed, the Polynesian plural is practically composed of a
plural to which the numeral tolu^ three, has been added, and the so-
called trinals in Melanesia have the same explanation. All Polynesian
and Melanesian languages use a dual.

3. VERBS.

Verbal particles are used in all the families of Oceanic language. It
is by means of these particles (which precede the verb) that a word
expresses itself as a verb and also that the verb exercises its power of
expressing tense and mood. Madagascar, Polynesia, and Melanesia
all show the presence of these verbal particles in their languages.

(a) In Melanesia the pronoun when used as object is suflixed to the
verb, certain shortened forms of the pronoun being used; and in some
languages iR^the Solomons the regular object is preceded by an antici-
patory object consisting of this suffixed pronoun in the third person.
Thus in Sa' a, I paddle a canoe, noko koUla * inie * ioloy t. ^., I paddle it
canoe. With this may be compared the '' pidgin *' English use ''How
many boy you catch 'im?" — where *ifn seems reminiscent of the native
idiom.

(b) The Melanesian languages freely add consonantal and syllabic
suffixes to verbs in order to make them transitive or to give them a
more definitely transitive force. These verbal suffixes can be found
present in all the Oceanic languages with the possible exception of
Malagasy. Their use is seen in fullest force in Melanesia. Many
words in the Polynesian and Micronesian dictionaries show their
presence, but Samoan is the only Polynesian language which uses them
with anything like the fullness and freedom that obtains in Melanesia.

(c) In all the Oceanic families of language a causative is used when
a verb comes to signify the making to do or be. In Melanesia the
causative prefix is va, pOy fa^ either alone or with a second syllable
kCy ga. In Polynesia the causative is tvhaka^ fakoy and this is plainly
the same as the Melanesian forms. Identically the same forms appear
in Malagasy, but Malay does not possess them.

{ji) Reciprocity of relationship or of action is marked in the Mela-
nesian languages by a prefix to the verb. This prefix has two forms,
vat, and ha^i (vag) or fe (ve)y and the latter form appears in Samoan,
but nowhere else in Polynesia.

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. l6l

{e) The adjectival prefixes showing condition muy tUj are almost
universal in Melanesia, and the dictionaries show them as appearing
also in Fiji, in Polynesia, in Malagasy, and in the languages of the
Malay Archipelago, though the grammars of the various languages
do not recognize them.

4. NOUNS.

In the Oceanic languages generally, Malagasy, Malay, Melanesian,
Polynesian, there is a common practice of forming nouns by the
addition of certain sufiixes : nga^ nay an, ana; ha, la, a; and in Mela-
nesia nouns are formed also by prefixing i to the verb; Fiji seU to cut,
isele a knife. Sa'a damn to eat areca nut, idemu a lime spatula. The
only noun suffix regularly employed in Polynesia is nga, but several
of the Polynesian languages show examples of verbal nouns formed by
adding a or fa or la to the verb. Melanesia regularly employs all the
noun suffixes stated above.

5. ADJECTIVES.

Melanesia also makes an extensive use of adjectival suffixes; these
are added both to nouns and verbs. The forms are ga, g, a, ra, la,
la^ay liy tay nay ina. Malagasy has forms in nay anay ina, but Malay
shows no sign of them, nor does the Maori of Polynesia. Tongan
and Samoan both show the use of a as an adjectival suffix and odd
instances occur in Pol3mesia of the use of na, and Maori has a few
instances of a thus used.

d. GENITIVE.

The Melanesian languages employ a genitive preposition to convey
the idea of possession when two nouns are in apposition, e. ;., Ulawa
*apa ni menu wing of bird, or else they suffix the pronoun in the third
person to the first noun: Ulawa *apa*apana manu its wing bird, i. e.y
bird's wing.

The common genitive used throughout Melanesia is ni; in certain
parts of Melanesia ni changes to li and si appears there ako as a
genitive. In Melanesia the juxtaposition of two nouns also conveys
a genitive force: Sa'a nime hau house (oO stone, and in certain
languages a genitive relation is conveyed by modification of the final
vowel when two nouns are in juxtaposition: Mota ima house, ime
vui house of the spirit. In Lau, Malaita, Solomons, an e is added to
the first of two such nouns giving a genitive force : tolo hill, toloe fera
heights of the land. In the Polynesian languages genitive relation is
expressed by nouns in apposition or by the use of the possessive as
above (i), and there is no special genitive preposition.

The Polynesian languages on their side have a large and varied use
of prepositions and there is much nicety in the use of them; this is
partly owing to the distinction in the sense of a and o already men-
tioned, a being used as active and o as passive.

l62 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

7. PASSIVE FORMS.

In Melanesia no passives are found, whereas all the Polynesian
languages have regular passive endings to their verbs. In a pamphlet
entitled ''Certain suffixes in Oceanic languages'' the present writer
has shown that these passive suffixes are composed of adjectival suf-
fixes (ncy inay a) added to transitive suffiixes.

CERTAIN DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE FDRMS OF SPEECR

From the following note, supplied by Mr. Ray» it will be seen how
great is the difference between the Polynesian and the Melanesian
forms of speech and the Papuan or non-Melanesian of New Guinea.
In the Papuan languages : Nouns and pronouns are defined by means
of suffixed particles, e. g.^ "my hand" is not "hand my," as in Mela-
nesia, but "me of hand"; "bird's wing" is not "wing of bird" or "bird
its wing," as in the Melanesian examples above, but "bird of wing."

Similarly, nouns have various case suffixes instead of prepositions:
house-to, house-of, house-at, house-from.

Adjectives usually precede the noun.

Tenses of the verb are expressed by means of suffixes, not as in
Melanesia or Polynesia by a variation in a preceding particle.

Number and person in the verb are expressed by: {a) a prefix, (i)
a change in the suffix, or (r) shown only by the pronoun.

Number and person of the subject or object are indicated sometimes
by a compound prefix.

METHOD OF LEARNING A MELANESIAN LANGUAGE.

To leam Mota is easy enough, since both a dictionary and a grammar
have been compiled by Dr. Codrington. Ulawa and Sa'a are the only
other languages in the sphere of the Melanesian Mission which have
full grammars, and probably they are thus the easiest to leam after
Mota, since good material exists for study in the shape of translations,
etc. In learning any of these three languages, which may be regarded
as typical Melanesian languages, the special points to be studied are:

PRONOUNS.

The personal pronouns should be written out and learned by heart;
the inclusive and exclusive forms should be carefully noted in the first
person plural. It is quite easy to make a blunder over these forms and
to say, e. g., inina in Mota for ikamafn, and the story is told of a
certain missionary who on describing his experiences in England to a
class at Norfolk Island kept on saying inina when he meant either
ikamam or possibly ikarOf i. ^., presumably, his wife and himself. His
hearers protested sotto voce^ inina tagai amaia ''we were not with him.''
The suffixed pronouns and their uses must be carefully studied.

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 163

THE VERB.

Under this heading come verbal and negative particles, transitive
suffixes, the native view of time, etc.

PREPOSITIONS.

A list of these should be made in Mota according to whether they can
be followed or not by the demonstrative na before the noun.

GENERAL DIRECTIONS.

Many missionaries have to learn new Melanesian tongues and have
to commit them to writing for the first time. It is always important
to remember that practically one grammatical framework will serve
for all the Melanesian languages; the style of the languages is the same
throughout.

One system of orthography will avail throughout and special pro-
vision can be made for rare or exceptional sounds. Generally it will
be found that the sounds in the Melanesian languages are not very
different from the sounds in the well-known European languages, and
in representing them it will be sufficient to take the ordinary sounds
of the English alphabet and by the additional use of italic letters
make provision for nasal or guttural variations of well-known sounds.
Modifications of the vowels can be shown by the use of the diseresis.
The points noted above are the main points to be kept in view in the
endeavor to acquire any new Melanesian language.

As will be noticed farther on, familiarity with Mota was a decided
help in linguistic study in Melanesia, but a man would be very apt to
be led astray if he made Mota a rigid standard.

Too much stress can not possibly be laid on the value of learning
lists of words by heart: *'Let each object bring some native sound
ringing in your ears, so that the sound brings the object before your
eyes. Do not be content to speak as a European. The real and most
stringent test of the knowledge of a language is whether you can under-
stand the natives speaking among themselves. To know thoroughly
by book is a different thing from knowing by ear. I believe we must
learn like children, through the ear, not by books much." (Pilking-
ton, of Uganda.)

TOANSLATION OF SCRIPTURE.

The use of Melanesian languages by a missionary is confessedly only
the preliminary to his using them as a vehicle for conveying the divine
message of salvation. To the mind of the missionary the end and
object of a native language, the very reason for its existence, is that it
should be used for the worship of God and for the dissemination of
religious ideas among the people who use it, and to the mind of the
churchman a language has attained to the height of its glory when it

164 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

has been used as a medium for the performance of the highest act of
worship, the celebration of the holy mysteries.

It may be predicated of all Melanesian languages that they are in
themselves fit and proper instruments for use in God's work. The
researches of scholars go to show that all languages are marvels of
perfection, and the so-called jargons of savages are in their degree as
perfect a creation as the language of the most highly civilized people.
To question whether the Gospels can be translated, e. ;., into one of the
languages of Malaita because of the alleged absence from it of certain
words and ideas which are the equivalent of or which correspond to
certain words and ideas in the original Greek is, among other things, to
forget the history of our own language. One has only to look at
Coverdale's Bible, to say nothing of the Douai Bible, to see the immense
number of foreign words expressive of religious ideas that have been
imported bodily into English from the classical languages. In some
cases it may be that the idea required did not exist in English; in other
cases, though the idea and word might be present, yet the foreign word
prevailed, e. g.^ conscience, where the English equivalent inwit survived
until quite recently. Are we, then, to belittle the English language
because either it lacked certain ideas or because it preferred to import
bodily foreign words expressive of certain religious terms instead of
using its own words or of making up words on existing lines ?

It can not be doubted that the actual foundation exists in every
language whereon can be laid the superstructure of words necessary
to convey the message of the Gospel. Nor can any existing language^
Latin or English, be considered as the sacred language. The Blessed
Saviour himself spoke in Aramaic, and yet the knowledge of His words
and acts aiid the story of the carrying out of man's salvation, both by
His words and also by His life, have come to the world not through
Aramaic, but through another language, Greek. To-day the Roman
Catholic Church looks upon Latin as the sacred language, and the
English Church for its part is apt to regard English as the one and only
language, whereas the message of Pentecost is that no one language is
above another in this respect, and that every man has a right to look
on his own language as God-inspired and as existing for the purpose of
conveying to him and his the divine message of salvation.

To doubt that the languages of so-called savages contain sufficient
words and ideas to use in promulgating the Christian religion is surely
tantamount to denying that man was made originally in the image of
God and was intended to seek God if haply he might feel after Him and
find Him.

Wherever translations of the Bible, etc., have been made in Mela-
nesia it has always been found that it was possible to provide from the
native tongue words and terms corresponding to the root ideas of the

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. l6S

original; thus, in the Solomons it is easy to render salvation, u e.^
health, Sa'a mauri to be alive, mauringe health, maurihe life; truth,
Sa'a tvalaHmolinge ; faith, Sa'a hii-^ala^imolingey i. e.j feeling to be true;
atonement, Sa'a ha*a*ufeTurUy u e.y cause to have friendly relations
with. Similarly, renderings are available for such words as spirit,
way, light, and for repent, redemption, i. e,j purchase, grace, i. e.y gift,
though this latter rendering is confessedly imperfect. The idea of
love is dijficult to render into Melanesian; the word used in Mota,
tapevdj denotes propitiation and gift as well as love; the Sa'a word used
means kindly-natured; the root of the Polynesian arohaj which is
rendered as love, is aroy which appears in Florida, Solomon Islands, as
arovi to pity, and in the Mota ma-garo'Sa compassionate. The Maori
of New 2^aland uses the quasi-English ripeneta for repent, but no
doubt a native equivalent could have been found corresponding to
the radical notion of change of mind. In Mota and in many Mela-
nesian languages the word used as a translation of pray is taiaroy which
really implies the invocation of a dead person and which was used
as a preliminary utterance before the real words of invocation. In
the Solomons tataro appears in San Cristoval and in Sa'a *ataro or
^akalo a ghost, and in Polynesia Hawaiian kalokalo prayer; Samoan
tataloy prayer.

Some difficulty was experienced in Sa'a and Ulawa in finding a word
to express pray. At first rihungaHy a San Cristoval imported word, was
used; then a word was found, are to invoke a spirit, arengaH he*u to
perform an ordeal with hot stones, calling on the name of certain
ghosts or spirits, but no verbal noun formed from this arenga or
arengaHnga met with approval. Eventually recourse was had to a
verbal noun qao olanga formed from qao ola to worship, hold communi-
cation with the ghosts, as an equivalent for prayer. In Sa'a there is
also a word, palo which means to act officially, to worship, and its verbal
noun palonga is either an act or worship. The word used so largely in
Polynesia as an equivalent both for prayer and also worship, lotUy has
been imported into southern Melanesia and also into New Guinea by
the missionaries. Dr. Codrington considers that the Sa'a word lo*Uy to
contract ceremonial defilement, is the same as this word lotu. The
word lotu is said to mean bowing down as in prayer, and Dr. Codring-
ton makes the Sa'a lo*u mean to fall from a ceremonial standard, be
brought low. (Mel. Anthrop., p. 233.) Maori uses the quasi-English
kororia for glory, where Mota has lengas bright radiance, and Sa'a has
manikulu* anga fame, prestige, and a similar word might have been
found in Maori.

The translation used in Sa^a for sin is oraluCay the root idea of which
is ^'excess,'' acting contrary to the accepted standard of morality of the
place. The word conscience is extremely difficult to render into Mel-

l66 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

anesian^ and in Sa'a it was done by a periphrasis, the knowledge one
has in oneself. But possibly the most difficult thing to translate into
Melanesian is the Lord's Prayer. The very first phrase, **Our Father, "
presents considerable difficulty, and in the Mota rendering the word
''our" has been omitted altogether, and the word Mama (vocative) is
used by itself. Dr. Codrington defended Mama as the correct voca-
tive for both numbers, but nevertheless tamamam our father, father of
us, does actually occur elsewhere (Isaiah 63, 16) as a vocarive. The
Melanesian is not accustomed to addressing or even to thinking of any
person as father in a corporate relarion to a number of people (beyond
the more immediate family reladonships) ; to his mind fatherhood is a
personal and individual thing; nor again is he accustomed to think of
the spiritual beings whom he worships as the fathers and protectors of
their worshippers. Even in English the phrase ''Our Father" occurs
rarely as a vocative except in the biblical use or rarely in a poedc sense.
Kingdom and will are both difficult words to find renderings for. A
Melanesian knows nothing of a king, but chiefs occur everywhere
and in Sa'a a word alahanga was adopted from alaha chief. For taill
the usual rendering is by a word equivalent to heart (breast) or by a
periphrasis, what the heart is fixed on. A word for debt is common
enough everywhere. In southern Melanesia there was a regular prac-
rice of money-lending or usury. Forgive is generally rendered by the
equivalent for think away, sae 'asi in Sa'a, nom vitag in Mota.

Mr. Copland King has published a pamphlet entitled "Theological
terms in native languages," which deals with this whole quesrion in the
sphere of the Pacific.

In an old catechism in the Mota language, printed by the Mission in
the very early days, several things of interest occur, and light is thrown
thereby on the development and evolution of the method of transla-
tion now in use. The catechism uses two English words for which
narive equivalents have since been found : papataiso for baptism, now
rendered in Mota vasug rongo holy washing; glori for glory, now ren-
dered lengas radiance. Evidently no equivalent for kingdom had as yet
been found; in the Lord's Prayer, in the first instance where the word
occurs, "Thy kingdom come," the Mota renders it by a periphrasis,
"Cause men to become Thy people"; in the second by the equivalent
for "Thine are all things."

Also, curiously enough, in the Lord's Prayer there is a rendering of
the opening word Our, taman kamam^ t. ^., Father-our, where the later
books have only Mama Father; the relative pronoun "which" has been
rendered iniko Thou, whereas the later books in Mota do not attempt
to translate it, but have simply Mama avunana^ O Father in heaven.
In the Apostles' Creed the word now used as equivalent to believe,
nomtupf had not come into use at the time of this catechism {nomtup »
bring thought to a point, cease to have doubt, believe), nom to think

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 167

being used alone. In the modem Mota books the words ** from thence"
in the Creed have no equivalent, but in this old catechism a perfectly
correct rendering nan ia is given.

It is quite clear that in the teaching of religion among the peoples of
the western Pacific many foreign words and terms must necessarily be
employed. Thus, in early days Bishop Patteson used in Mota the
Greek word hasileia as an equivalent for kingdom, there being no
native word available; and just lately Mr. King has used the same
word in the Binandere (Papuan) Gospel translation. But when intro-
ducing this word what need is there for a translator to disguise it
in the form pasideiuy as is done in one London Missionary Society
translation ?

The Melanesian Mission, when importing classical words and New
Testament words for which there is no equivalent, has preferred to
write them in their English rather than their classical form, but the
London Missionary Society in New Guinea and Torres Straits has used
imported words in more or less of their classical form: areto^ bread;
kariUy barley; satauroy cross; also the Hebrew kohena for priest. As a
rendering for church. Bishop Patteson used log4ue in Mota, i. e.y called
out; and similar words obtain throughout the Melanesian Mission.
The London Missionary Society has used ekalesia for church.

It is very difficult to render the word god. The Polynesian missions
have all used the word atuay and this has also been imported by the
Presbyterians into southern Melanesia among Melanesian peoples.
This word atua seems to be on a level, possibly, with the Mota vuiy as
meaning a being that never was a man; or it may be that just as
Fijian kalouy which once was supposed to mean god but now has been
degraded from its high place — so perhaps, though one says it with
fear and trembling, tUua may in time be shown to be equivalent in a
measure to the Fijian kalou or to the Mota tamaUy and may mean a
ghost of the dead, the disembodied spirit of a person. The mission-
aries of the eastern Pacific all spoke of the spiritual beings whom the
people worshipped as gods, just as in the same way they found idols
everywhere; but however this may be, it is safe to say that in the
western Pacific there are neither gods nor idols. Even in Melanesian
Fiji it was the custom to call the objects of the old worship gods, but
Dr. Codrington wrote that Mr. Fison was ''inclined to think all the
spiritual beings of Fiji, including the gods, kalouy simply the Mota
tamaU, ghosts. ** Mr. Hocart has shown the truth of this conjecture
in a paper in the Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute, vol.
XLII, 191 2. The Presbyterians of the New Hebrides also spoke of the
spirits of the dead Mna^, Mota tamaUy worshiped by the natives, as
gods.

In the islands of Torres Straits the word god was translated as ady
the meaning of which was ''something about which a tale was told,"

l68 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

or as augadf which meant totem. One translation in New Guinea has
adopted the word god, but has disguised it as ''kot.'' In Nguna,
New Hebrides, the word used for god is suqe, which in the Banks
Islands is the well-known secret society. When the stories about Qat
in Mota first became known, it was supposed that the peoples of that
part of the Banks Islands regarded Qat as creator and god. The
Polynesian atua is given as meaning god in the dictionaries of the
eastern Pacific, and Hazelwood gives god for kalou in Fijian, and doubt-
less suqe and t-tnat are rendered as god in the dictionaries of the New
Hebrides. Even if the suqe of the New Hebrides (Codrington, Mel.
Anthrop., p. 102) has no connection with the suqe club of the Banks
Group, yet the meaning is at any rate spirit rather than god. The
Melanesian Mission, following the lead of Bishop Patteson, has used
everywhere the English word god and has written it in its ordinary
English spelling.

In every case where nothing is found akin to the idea required, and
in consequence an English word is introduced, it seems better to intro-
duce a foreign word whose meaning is above suspicion; the spelling of
such word is a matter of lesser moment; but where such varieties of
pronunciation prevail, and among such widely different languages, it
seems better to write the word in its original form and then let each
set of people pronounce it in their own way.

There is no need to make a concession to the peculiarities of the
native alphabet in each place, for it will generally be found that the
peoples can make a sufficiently good attempt at the new sound to
justify the retenrion of the old spelling, and God, e. g., to our eyes at
least, looks better than Koty and sheep than sipu. Once a concession
is made to native orthography in such matters, the missionary finds
himself writing, e. g., in Florida in the Solomons Guilikokusi for Wilcox,
and Pulaneti for Plant. Santa Cruz is actually the only place in the
sphere of the Melanesian Mission where the people find a real difficulty
in pronouncing certain letters foreign to their alphabet.

The possession of the two forms of the personal pronoun, first person
plural or dual, the inclusive and the exclusive, enables some finer
shades of meaning to be set forth with greater clearness than is possible
in languages which have not those forms. Thus in St. Luke 7, 5, the
difference between the two words our and us which is understood only in
English, is clearly expressed in Melanesian, the inclusive form being
used in the first case> since He to whom they spoke was also a Jew, and
the exclusive in the second case, since the synagogue had been built
for themselves, the people of Capernaum. A similar case occurs in
St. Luke 24, 20, where the word ^'our'' applies to the people of Judea
only, the two speakers evidently regarding Him to whom they were
speaking as a stranger.

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 169

THE QUESTION OF STANDARD LANGUAGES.

In Melanesia every island has its own distinct speech. These can
all be shown by the grammarian to be kindred and allied, but for all
practical purposes they are separate and distinct. A Mota man going
to Motalava, 8 miles away, unless he had some previous knowledge of
the language, would find himself unable to understand the speech of
the people there. Many words, doubtless, would be the same, but the
intonation is entirely different, the consonants and vowels are strangely
at variance, and the Motalava words are clipped and chopped about
almost beyond recognition. With more frequent communication
bilingualism is getting more common, but it is a curious thing that
when natives from various islands or places meet communication is
held by each person or group of persons speaking in his or in their own
tongue. Thus, a party from Malaita landing on Ulawa will speak Sa^ a
or Lau or Tolo and will be answered in Ulawan, and the general drift
of the conversation seems to be understood quite readily. In a large
measure this is doubtless due to that quickness of understanding
which is characteristic of the Melanesian peoples generally.

Whereas smaller differences of dialect exist on every island, an
island of quite moderate size, like Santa Maria, in the Banks Group,
has two separate languages which vary considerably and which cause
the two peoples practically to be unintelligible to one another. This
sort of thing is multiplied several times over in a large island like
Malaita. The language at the south end of Malaita is the same as
that spoken at the village of Sa'a; in the Mara Masiki Channel, which
divides Malaita in two, the language is that known at Sa'a as Tolo, and
to this belongs the language spoken at Oroha near Sa'a, the sketch
of which made by Bishop Patteson appears in Von der Gabelentz's
''Melanesischen Sprachen." The language round the coast at the
north end is known as Lau, and a knowledge of Lau will carry one
from Sinerago, Diamond Harbor, on the northeast coast, to Langa-
langa, Alite Harbor, on the northwest coast. In the interior, at the
north end, the people speak a language much like Lau but having
distinct peculiarities. Along the coast there will be found variations
of these three main types, such variations amounting almost to sep-
arate languages. Sa^a shows marked affinities to the Wango and
Heuru languages in San Cristoval, whereas Lau has many points of
similarity to the language of Florida, and the inland speech of the
north end has likenesses to the language of Bugotu. All of the three
main languages of Malaita have very decided resemblances to one
another and all are certainly of a common stock, so that Sa'a, e. g.^
is more like Tolo than it is like Wango or Heuru.

Up to the present time the missionaries in the Melanesian Mission
and in the Anglican Mission in New Guinea have been allowed to
prepare translations of the Bible and prayer book, etc., in whatever

I70 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

might be the language of their particular part, without any r^ard as
to whether the language was or was not the language of a dominant
people and as such likely to survive. This no doubt is very convenient
for the people concerned and is also advantageous for the comparative
philologist, who thus has valuable material provided for his studies^
but where languages abound and translators are scarce it does not seem
wise to let men labor at a language unless there is some chance of that
language surviving or being of use in more than its own limited sphere.
It can not be doubted that if the native peoples survive the shock of
civilization certain factors will cause some languages to be used in the
future more extensively than others; such factors are (i) the use of a
language by government or by traders, or (2) the dissemination of any
language by reason of the vigor or the numbers of the people using it.

If the government of New Guinea were to adopt certain languages
for use in specified areas, say, Motuan and Wedauan, to the exclusion
of all others (at present the government officials use a jargon), then,
although a certain amount of hardship would be imposed on the native
peoples at the outset, the gain to the missions from having fixed
languages for their educational work would ultimately more than com-
pensate for any temporal hardships in that all linguistic work could be
focussed on given languages and an ample literature could be created,
and so far as the people themselves were concerned the children in
one generation would have adapted themselves to the new conditions.
One calls to mind that in England the standard Bible fixed the language
just as Luther's Bible set the standard in Germany, and in France the
language of the King's court became the standard language for the
literature of the whole country.

The language of the island of Florida, where the seat of government
of the Solomons is situated and where there is a vigorous and a Chris-
tian population, if taken up by the Government might be made to
serve for all the eastern islands. The spread of such a standard literary
language would be slow, and pending the establishment of such a literary
language it is clearly the duty of the missionaries to reduce to writing
the languages of the various parts and to use them for the purpose of
teaching, though at the same time languages likely to be serviceable by
virtue of their more extended use should be carefully selected. Failing
the appointment of some one language for a group or district, the missions
should develop various types of language in each island or sphere of
work; thus for the greater part of San Cristoval the Heuru and Fagani
languages might be made to serve, while Sa'a, Tolo, and Lau are also
worthy of surviving on Malaita.

Up till the year 1917 the Melanesian Mission used Mota as the edu-
cational language in all its central schook. There was a rime when
owing to the congregating of all the members of the staff at Norfolk
Island during the summer, and to the exclusive use of Mota in the
school, all the other languages of the Mission came almost to be

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. I7I

neglected. Mota was in a fair way to being regarded as the sacred
language of the Mission, and indeed it furnished popularly the standard
by which all the other languages were supposed to be measured, and the
fact that these languages were able to show words or usages that
corresponded to those of Mota was apt to be construed philologically
much in the same way as if the presence in the other Aryan tongues of
words similar to Latin were held as proving that Latin was the root
language of them all and not itself a branch language.

When native teachers speaking various languages have an education
in a language like Mota, which is foreign to most of them, much care
must be exercised in order that the ideas given in the course of teaching
may be made quite clear to the minds of the pupils. Dr. Codrington
used to get his pupils to write down the gist of the lesson in their own
tongues that he might test thereby their understanding of it.

At the conference held in 1916 the staff of the Mission decided to
make a change in the language used as the medium of instruction in the
central schools; Mota was to be abolished and English substituted in its
place. EflFect has already been given to this determination. The
reasons advanced publicly for the change from Mota to English were:

(i) Mota is not well known by the English staff in the Solomons and
the languages spoken by the boys at the two central schools there do
not bear any very great superficial likeness to Mota, so that Mota may
be said to be practically a foreign tongue to all concerned.

(2) Only a small literature is available in Mota, and the learning of
English would open the way for the provision of a larger literature.

(3) English is likely to become the language of general communica*
tion.

(4) The trained teachers ought to be able to act as interpreters for
any whites who might visit their villages.

Now, there is undoubtedly every reason why English should be
taught as a part of the curriculum in the central schools (and also in the
village schools if possible), but to do this is surely a different thing from
making it the only means of communication at the central schools.
While not contending for the continuance of Mota in the schools of the
Solomons, one does contend strongly for the principle that the Mela-
nesian should be taught Christianity through the medium of one of his
own languages. English is a foreign language, but when all is said and
done Mota can not possibly be classed as foreign. Outwardly it may
present many dissimilarities from the Solomon Island languages, yet it
is thoroughly and typically Melanesian, and any Melanesian can learn
it or be taught it without any trouble whatever.

Mota has hitherto been of quite extraordinary value for purposes of
translation; most of our translations into the other Melanesian Ian--
guages were made in the first instance from Mota as a basis, and in
many places it was quite possible thereby for a teacher of average

172 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

ability to make a fair rendering of psalms^ canticles, and hymns for the
beginnings of his work.

Bishop G. A. Selwyn advocated the teaching of the Melanesians at
St. John's, Auckland, in English, but this was before Patteson came on
the scene. Selwyn was a scholar, but it is doubtful whether he could
be characterized as a linguist, nor had he the time to give to linguistic
studies as Patteson had. His Maoris he taught in Maori, and one
hears nothing of any proposal of his to abolish Maori as a medium of
communication. He had perforce to adopt English for his Melanesians,
just as he had to bring them away from their own country in order to
teach them. What one feels about the substitution of English for a
native language now in the Mission is that a veritable cardinal principle
is in danger of being abandoned thereby, viz., the principle that every
man should ^^hear the Gospel" in his own language.

THE NEED FOR A POLICY IN TRANSIATIONAL WORK.

The whole Bible has been translated into almost every Polynesian
language. In Melanesia no complete Bible exists as yet, though the
Mota Bible is practically complete. Certain small sections of the
earlier books of the Old Testament were omitted purposely from it.
In Papua no complete Bible exists, but some of the languages have a
complete New Testament. In setting out to translate the Bible, what
portion is the missionary to start on? How much of the Bible, or
rather, how much of the Old Testament, is really required ? These
two questions must have occurred to the minds of all missionaries,
yet it would seem that no one mission has ever formulated a definite
scheme in the matter of directing or controlling biblical transla-
tions. With regard to the first question, as to what part of the Bible
one should begin on, the Rev. Dr. Macfarlane, of the London Mis-
sionary Society in Torres Straits, wrote asking this question of Dr.
Codrington, and the answer given was that it seemed best to make a
beginning with the Gospel according to St. Luke. In the Melanesian
Mission St. Luke and the Acts were the first translations made by
Bishop Patteson. Dr. Codrington states : '' I wrote the middle of St.
Matthew and St. Mark, the Passion being old. Bishop Patteson
wrote St. John. I did almost all the Epistles. "

Even apart from the necessity for translating the Psalms for use in
the daily services, there can be no doubt that a translation of the
Psalms should be made as soon as possible in order to encourage the
devotional life of the people. The metrical version of the Psalms in
the Indian language of Massachusetts was the first part of the Bible
which John Eliot, the apostle of the American Indians, published, and
in the singing of the Psalms he found the readiest means of arresting
attention and the simplest expression for the religious feelings of his
child-natured people.

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. I73

No choice could be made in the Epistles as to which should be trans-
lated in preference to others, but the translator will naturally make
what progress he can with them all. If a people is to receive the
honor of having the Gospel message written in its own tongue the four
Gospels and the Acts must surely be the minimum amount of trans-
lation done, and it is hard to see how practical religion can be developed
at all among a people unless they have a copy of the Epistles, the
application of the Gospels, ready to their hands.

In very few cases will it be possible for much of the Old Testament
to be translated, either in the languages in the sphere of the Mela-
nesian Mission or in those of New Guinea, owing to the multiplicity
of languages and co the comparative dearth of missionaries and
to the need of working in the first place on the New Testament. More-
over, if the people have a New Testament it is hard to see what need
there is to undertake any systematic translation of the whole of the
Old Testament.

A list of the translations and of books published for use in the
Melanesian Mission is as follows:

(i) New Hebrides.

Raga: Prayer Book, St. Luke, Genesis, Harmonized Scripture Gospel

Lessons, Hymns.
Omba: Prayer Book, Harmonized Scripture Gospel Lessons, Hymns.
Maewo: Prayer Book (small), Harmonized Scripture Gospel Lessons,

Hymns.

(2) Banks Islands.

Lakona: Prayer Book (small^.

Mota: Prayer Book, New Testament, Old Testament, Harmonized
Scripture Gospel Lessons, Commentary on St. Matthew, Instruc-
tions for Catechumens, English Lesson Book, Codrington on the
Miracles and Parables, Hymns.

(3) Torres Islands.

Vava: Prayer Book, Canonical Gospels and Epistles, Hymns.

(4) Santa Cruz.

Ndeni: Prayer Book, Canonical Gospels, Hymns.

(5) Solomon Islands.

Ulawa: Prayer Book, New Testament, Catechism for the Children of
the Church, Hymns.

Sa'a: Prayer Book, New Testament, Catechism for the Children of
the Church, Hymns.

Lau: Prayer Book (small). Gospels, Hymns (few).

Fiu: Prayers and Hymns (small).

Wango: r raver Book (small) and Hymns, St. Luke, Harmonized
Scripture Gospel Lessons.

Guadalcanar: Prayer Book (small), St. Luke, Hymns.

Florida: Prayer Book, Gospels, Canonical Epistles, Harmonized Scrip-
ture Gospel Lessons, Catechism for the Children of the Church,
Hymns.

Bugotu: Prayer Book, Book of Psalms, New Testament, Portions of
the Books of the Prophets, Hymns.

174 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

From this table it will be seen that much translation yet remains to
be done. Florida, which is by far the most important language in the
Solomons, has no complete New Testament. Dr. Codrington has
included a small grammar of the Florida language in his ''Melanesian
Languages/' but naturally he was not able to do for it what he did for
Mota and we still await a full grammar of the language.

After sixty years of life, the Mission has only three complete New
Testaments and only two dictionaries, including the present dictionary
of Ulawa and Sa'a. A grammar of Wango exists in manuscript.
The paucity of grammars is much to be deplored. Sketches made by
Dr. Codrington might conceivably have been filled up even if no new
ones were made independently, but the grammars of Sa'a, Ulawa, and
Lau are the only ones that have been printed since Dr. Codrington's
great work containing grammars of 38 Melanesian languages was
published in 1884.

It would certainly be desirable to get native teachers to make
initial translations of the Gospels through the medium of Mota or
otherwise. The Mota New Testament, however, needs revising. It
was reprinted a year or two ago from stereotype plates and a few
of the printers' errors were corrected, but the Society for the Promotion
of Christian Knowledge would not allow any alterations that ran
over two lines.

Any translations made by natives would serve as a basis for future
work by the missionaries themselves and would also provide gram-
marians with valuable material for comparative study. Thus there
seems to be no reason why in the case of the Tolo language, e. ;., in
Malaita, some of the teachers at Tawani^ahi'a on the west coast who
know both Tolo and Sa'a should not use the Sa'a translation of the
Gospels for work in their own language. Since Bishop Patteson's
time no further investigation has been made of the Tolo language,
though it is an important language both on Malaita and also at Marau
Sound on the south end of Guadalcanal

THE VALUE OF THE STUDY OF MELANESIAN LANGUAGES.

The study of Melanesian languages is an absolute necessity for the
elucidation of problems of language in the western Pacific, and one
might go further and say that light had been thrown on languages so
far away from Melanesia as Madagascar and Malay by the working
out of the details of the grammars of the Melanesian languages. What
a flood of interest is created by Dr. Codrington's discovery of the
identity of the Omba, New Hebrides, word heno and the Florida hanu
with the Malagasy anol In these three languages this word stands
in place of a personal name, and the personal article is prefixed, so that
i kenOy a hanu^ t ano, are identical and mean ''so-and-so." The two
great Melanesian scholars, Bishop Patteson and Dr. Codrington, by

LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. I75

their analysis of words and by comparative studies^ have shown that
the structure of the Polynesian and Melanesian languages is prac-
tically the same. They have shown that in both types the following
features occur:

Adjectives are formed by prefix or sufiix. Time particles are used
with verbs. Transitive suffixes are added to verbs. Pronouns are
suffixed to nouns to denote possession. The personal pronouns are
preceded by the personal article (Mota p-nau, I, Maori a-hau^ Malay

In ''Melanesian Languages'' it has been proved conclusively, by
evidence produced from languages of Melanesian stock, that the per-
sonal pronouns are the same in all the Oceanic languages, also that the
interrogatives are radically the same throughout and have similar uses.
Polynesian scholars generally have paid little attention to Melanesia,
yet the evidence of language is all conclusive of the close relationship
which exists between Polynesian and Melanesian. The failure on the
part of Polynesian scholars to study Melanesian languages has caused
them to make considerable mistakes in etymology and also to overlook
several very patent grammatical characteristics of the Poljmesian lan-
guages. A good many of the derivations in Tregear's ''Maori Com-
parative Dictionary'' are shown to be incorrect on comparison with the
kindred forms in Melanesia. Also, one can not but think that the
tendency to philosophize about the religion of the Polynesian and his
consequent outlook on life would have been kept within more moderate
bounds had the investigators been a little more content to do spade
work and dig into the matter after the practical fashion of Dr. Cod-
rington in his book on Melanesian anthropology.

It has been maintained that the Melanesians had adopted Polyne-
sian forms of speech; that in fact the Polynesians were like the Romans
of old and had imposed their speech upon the peoples with whom they
mixed; but the facts of the case seem to be that, so far at least as lan-
guage is concerned, the two peoples belong to one family, and also that
of the two types the Melanesian is the older and is less worn and stands
to Polynesian somewhat as Anglo-Saxon does to modem English;
also that the explanation of many Polynesian peculiarities of speech is
to be found in the typical Melanesian usages.

Thus with regard to the use of the passive in Polynesian, a use which
has no counterpart whatever in Melanesian, the present writer, owing
to his knowledge of Melanesian, has been able to show elsewhere that
the Polynesian passive is compounded of adjectival suffixes added to
verbal suffixes, and that the gerundives, so common in Polynesia but
hardly appearing at all in Melanesia, are composed of the verbal
suffixes and noun endings. These verbal suffixes are among the
commonest features of the Melanesian languages, but with the single
exception of Samoan they can not be said to appear at all prominently

176 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC.

In Polynesia, though on Melanesian analogies their presence may be
detected in the words in the dictionaries. Also, curiously enough, one
of the Melanesian adjectival suflixes, na (which is a passive ending in
Polynesia), has been noticed in only one Polynesian language in that
capacity, and that only by deduction from a Melanesian example:
Niuetavana clear, open; Mota taatvanamde and flat; Dyak papan plank;
Omba toatva open sea; Sa'a taha to be open, clear; Maori tawha chasm
(Sa'a tahalaa chasm), tawhai to stretch forth the arms.

Also in Malay, another example of a late language with much decayed
forms of speech, Melanesia again supplies a means whereby correct
deductions may be made as to the construction of various words and
possibly also of various forms of speech, e, g., the presence of verbal
sufiixes and of noun suffixes.

Apart from Dr. Codrington's study of the Melanesian forms, who
would have known that apa in siapa^ the interrogative pronoun in
Malay, apa what ? siapa who ? is a form of the word which in Mela-
nesia appears as sava^ hava^ etc., and that the si in siapa is really the
personal article which appears in Javanese before the names of persons ?
Since in many words which are common to Malay and Javanese the
Malagasy suppresses the initial j, this Javanese jt, the personal article,
is shown by Dr. Codrington to be in all probability the Malagasy t,
which is a personal article placed before the proper names of persons.
Thus siapa who, in Malay is shown to correspond to the Mota i sava
who ? and sa mate^ the deceased, in Malay is t mate in Mota.

In this way, through the study of Melanesian linguistics, **the use of
a personal article — a remarkable feature in a language — ^is found to
prevail in Melanesia, in Poljmesia, in Madagascar, and in the Malay
Archipelago.'' This discovery alone is surely sufficient to establish the
importance of the study of the Melanesian languages.

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE-

Melanesia is the geographical name given to various groups of islands
in the Southwest Pacific. These are the nearest of the Pacific Islands
to Australia and they lie in a semicircle oiF the northeast coast of that
continent. New Caledonia, the southern end of the arc, is the nearest
to Australia, and New Britain and New Ireland, lately acquired by
the Australian Expeditionary Forces, form the northern end of the arc.
The groups in the arc are five in number, the Bismarck Archipelago
and the Solomons in the North, Santa Cruz in the center, the New
Hebrides and New Caledonia in the South. The Admiralty Islands
are included under the Bismarck Archipelago; the New Hebrides
include the subgroups of Banks and Torres, and the Loyalties are asso-
ciated with New Caledonia. The term Melanesia belongs properly
to all of these groups of islands. Certain other groups lie outside the
arc, but rank as Melanesian, to wit, Fiji and the islands which lie
oflF the southeast coast of New Guinea, the Trobriands, D'Entre-
casteaux, Woodlark, and the Louisiades.

Etymologically, Melanesia ought to mean *' black islands, '' just as
Polynesia means "many islands" and Micronesia "small islands,"
but considering the wonderful verdure and greenness of the Melanesian
islands one can only infer that those who named them originally had
in their minds the comparatively dark skins of the inhabitants and
that this distinguishing feature of the people was used as a means of
designating the islands where they dwelt. Doubtless to the eye of any
one accustomed to the lighter-skinned peoples of Polynesia these
islands of the Southwest Pacific would seem to be 'islands of the
blacks."

Several external characteristics of the Melanesian peoples serve to
distinguish them from the Polynesians: (i) Shortness of stature, the
average height of the males being possibly 5 feet 4 inches and of the
females 4 feet io>^ inches; (2) a chocolate-colored skin; (3) bushy
hair, frizzed and tangled and standing erect, owing probably to the
incessant teasing of it by the native combs.

The languages spoken in Melanesia vary considerably among them-
selves, but on examination they are shown to possess common features
and to have a very large underlying sameness. The external resem-
blances, however, between the Melanesian languages are much less
than those between the languages of Polynesia; e. ;., the external
resemblances between Maori and Samoan are far greater than those
between Mota and Florida. The witness of language would enable
us to decide at once that Fiji belongs to Melanesia, though its prox-
imity to Polynesia has largely affected the customs and habits and
probably also the religion of its people. Similarly the peoples of the

177

178 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

islands to the east of New Guinea can be shown to be Melanesian by
reason of their languages, and if Melanesia be taken as a starting-
point for nomenclature, the Malagasy language of Madagascar might
even be classed as Melanesian. The peoples of New Guinea have the
same three distinguishing physical characteristics that we have noted
above, and the languages of a very considerable proportion of at least
the coast peoples there can certainly be classed as Melanesian.

Dr. Codrington has shown in "Melanesian Anthropology" that there
is a large general resemblance in the religious beliefs and practices,
the customs and ways of life, which prevail in Melanesia proper, and
further research on the lines indicated by him will probably reveal the
presence of similar beliefs and conditions of life among the Melanesian
peoples of New Guinea and the neighboring islands.

A distinguishing social condition of Melanesia is the complete ab-
sence of tribes, if the word tribe is to be applied as it is to the Maori
people of New Zealand, or as used in Fiji. Descent in nearly every
part of Melanesia is counted through the mother and the people are
everywhere divided into two classes which are exogamous. This
division of the people is the foundation on which the fabric of native
society is built up.

THE GOVERNMENT OF MELANESIA.

Previous to 1914 Germany held an important part of Melanesia,
viz., the Bismarck Archipelago, which comprises the two large islands
known prior to their annexation by Germany as New Britain and New
Ireland, with many smaller islands in the group, notably the Duke of
York, and also with two large islands in the Solomons, Bougainville
and Choiseul, and the small island Buka. France holds New Cale-
donia and the Loyalties, and a joint British and French protectorate,
known as the Condominium, prevails in the case of the New Hebrides,
Banks, and Torres groups, with the center of government at Vila,
Sandwich Island. The Solomons and Santa Cruz are a British pro-
tectorate with a resident commissioner stationed at Tulagi, Florida,
Solomon Islands, and under the orders of the governor of Fiji, who is
high commissioner for the Pacific.

THE PROGRESS OF THE MELANESIAN MISSION.

The nominal field of work of the Melanesian Mission is all the Mel-
anesian islands from and including the Solomon Islands to the three
northern New Hebrides, Raga, Omba, and Maewo, but excluding
Fiji. All of the islands in this sphere as far north as Ysabel (with a
few exceptions noted below) are more or less occupied by the Mission.
The total number in its schools in 1914 was 15,000, of whom 9,000 are
baptized. Many of the smaller islands are now completely Christian,
but even on islands of moderate size, like Ulawa in the Solomons or

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. I79

Santa Maria in the Banks, a certain number are still Heathen, while in
the large islands practically 85 per cent are still outside the Mission's
influence.

The total population of the islands in the sphere of the Mission
numbers anything between 100,000 and 150,000, and the large islands,
Malaita, San Cristoval, and Guadalcanar, contain on a moderate
estimate 70,000 of the total. It is not surprising that on an island
like Malaita, which is 100 miles long and contains a scattered popu-
lation of 30,000 or 40,000 people, comparatively little progress has been
made, but it is especially regrettable that there are still three Heathen
villages on a small island like Ulawa, and that tiny places like Sikaiana,
Rennell and Bellona, and Santa Anna are still unworked. However,
it must be understood that the evangelizing of Melanesia is a pecul-
iarly difficult task, as is shown by the fact that in Tanna in the New
Hebrides, where the attack on Heathenism has been incessant and
where the Presbyterian missionaries have been in actual residence
from the very start of the work, a portion of the island is still Heathen.
Nevertheless, better results might have been obtained in our own
sphere.

OTHER MISSIONARY AGENCIES IN MELANESIA.

The Melanesian Mission is not the only evangelizing body in its
sphere of work. Roman Catholic missionaries settled in the Solomons
about 1897 and made their headquarters at a little island called Rua
Sura, off the east coast of Guadalcanar and fairly close to the trading
station at Aola. A good deal of their work has been done on the west
coast of Guadalcanar near Mole. One of their methods of progress has
been to adopt children from the Heathen parts and to rear them in
Christian surroundings. They made settlements also along the north
end of the island, often in the villages belonging to the Melanesian Mis-
sion, and have begun work on the southeast coast of San Cristoval and
on the west coast of Big Malaita. They have stations also at the^outh
end of Raga, New Hebrides.

The Kanaka labor trade was responsible for the advent of certain
missionaries of Protestant bodies into the Solomons. Most of the
Melanesians in Queensland who attended school and church were
cared for by the Queensland Kanaka Mission, a Protestant body.
At Malu, a place at the north end of Big Malaita, some returned Chris-
tians who had been converted by the agency of these schools of the
Queensland Kanaka Mission and some devoted white missionaries
came to the Solomons in a labor vessel and settled at Malu. But the
malarial conditions of the place and lack of proper equipment brought
about their removal and two of them eventually died of malaria.
When the Kanakas were all deported the Queensland Kanaka Mission
followed their old pupils and made regular stations on Malaita. Their

l8o MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

mission is now known as the South Sea Evangelical Mission. Its
operations are confined mainly to M alaita.

In 1902 the veteran Dr. George Brown visited the western Solomons
and made preparation for beginning a mission of the Methodist body
in New Georgia. This mission is now well established and has extended
its operations in New Georgia and Vella Lavella, and opened a school
on Liuaniua (Qngtong Java, Lord Howe Island), an atoll north of
Ysabel inhabited by Polynesians.

In the New Hebrides, on Raga and Omba in the sphere of the Mel-
toesian Mission, mission work is being done by missionaries of the
Church of Christ.

No delimitation of territory in the case of the various missions has
been attempted by the governments concerned, such as has been done
in New Guinea, and undoubtedly the clashing of the various interests
is not the best thing for the natives. The marking out of a sphere of
operations, with possibly a time limit for the eflPective occupying of
them, would be the fairest for all concerned.

SOME PHYSICAL FEATURES OF THE ISLANDS.

All the islands in the sphere of the Mission have a certain similarity
of appearance from the sea in that they are all covered with dense
forest. Florida and the east coast of Guadalcanar have wide, open
spaces covered with high, rank grass and with a few trees, but in all
the other islands dense bush covers the face of the country from high-
water mark to the tops of the hills miles away in the interior. In the
islands in the south giant creepers twine over all the trees and form a
perfect network, almost blotting out the tops of the individual trees»
and when seen from the sea the huge banyans seem to tower like
observation posts above the flattened tops of the forest. In most of
the islands the land rises abruptly from the beach and access to the
interior is by narrow forest tracks which the frequent heavy rainfalls
have converted into deep ruts. Tree roots cover everything and
walking is extremely difficult in consequence. The paths are never
kept clear and open and the trees that fall across them are allowed to
lie there, and a new track is made round or under or over the obstacle.

Dr. Guppy, in his book, ''The Solomon Islands,*' has a graphic
description of the experiences of the white man when travelling ashore
in Melanesia :

''Bush walking where there is no native track is a very tedious process.
In districts of coral limestone such traverses are exceedingly trying to the
soles of one's boots and to^ the measure of one's temper. After bemg pro-
vokingly entaneled in a thicket for some minutes, the persevering traveller
walks briskly alone through a comparatively clear space, when a creeper
suddenly trips up his feet and over he eoes to the ground. Picking him-
self up, he no sooner starts again when he finds his face in the middle of a

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. l8l

strong web which some huge-bodied spider has been laboriously construct-
ing. He proceeds on his way when ne feels an uncomfortable sensation
inside his nelmet, in which he finds his friend the spider^ with a body as big
as a filbert, quite at his ease. Going down a steep slope, he clasps a stout-
looking areca palm to prevent himself faillin^, when down comes the rotten
palm, and the long-suffering traveller finds himself once more on the ground.
To these inconveniences must be added the oppressive heat of a tropical
forest and the continual perspiration in which the skin is bathed/'

A Melanesian is always careful to turn his toes in as he walks, and
the narrowness of the bush tracks causes him no inconvenience, but
the white man is not so careful how he plants his feet and is constantly
striking the numerous objects which lie by the side of the track or on
its surface. Moreover, a native person keeps his hands by his side as
he walks, whereas the white man does not know the necessity for care
in the matter and he frequently hits the numerous obstacles with his
hands, and some of the leaves on the edge of the track are studded with
sharp thorns! Every Melanesian carries a "scrub '* knife, and with
it he cuts away the limbs that fall over the path, but he cuts them at
his own height and in an immediate line with the path; this suits him
well, but proves awkward for any person who is taller or less careful
about his method of progression.

It can hardly be said that the Melanesian islands as a whole are
beautiful, for the prevailing colors of the forest are too somber and dull;
brilliant-colored shrubs grow round the houses, but none of the forest
trees bear such flowers as one sees on the trees in North Queensland,
and the ground is a tangled mass of undergrowth and creepers. Wide,
open views, panoramic scenes, outlooks over mountain or glen or sea
are impossible to obtain, since the bush closes in everything. But
there is something peculiarly exhilarating, both to mind and body,
when, after struggling along through the numerous obstructions
of the paths and sweltering under the oppressive heat, one suddenly
emerges from the trees on the weather coast of an island and feels the
invigorating blast of the trade wind, and the eye rests with complete
satisfaction on the wonderful blue of the sea and the red of the shore
reef, and the creamy whiteness of the breakers as they beat against it.

Certain places in the Solomons, however, may quite easily rank as
beauty spots. The Ututha Channel, which divides the two eastern
islands in the Floridas; the channel in the Rubiana Lagoon; and the
western end of the Mara Masiki Channel, which divides Malaita in
two — all have delightful vistas and charm one with their tortuous
and sharp windings opening out on here an island, there a cascade;
the giant growths of the coral under the boat fascinate one's gaze;
beautifully colored fishes of vivid greens and reds dart about in the
shallows, while up in the trees, on the side of the steep hills, innumer-
able cockatoos rend the air with their harsh cries, or the big wood

l82 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

pigeons boom out their melancholy note, reminding one of a cow lowing
for its calf. Often, again, the course of a river (like that at Mwadoa^
Ulawa), with its succession of cascades and its deep, clear pools, con*
strains our admiration.

The islands of the Florid as more especially appeal to the eye. They
have more open spaces, the coast line is more indented, and beaudful
bays abound; there are more islands l}ring off the coast, the beaches
are more numerous, and the landing on them is easy. The villages
in Florida nestle under the shade of innumerable coconut trees just
above high-water mark. The beaches are lined with the feathery
casuarina and here and there are coral trees (Erythrina indica) with
their brilliant red flowers, or the gorgeous red leaves of the salite
{Catappa terminalis) light up the whole beach with the glow of their
dying splendor. The huge masses of the vutu {Barringtonia speciosa)
spring right out of the salt water and their biretta-shaped fruits may be
seen floating on every tide. Going north from Norfolk Island, the
sight of a floating fruit of the vutu was generally the first sign of our
entrance into the tropics. Similarly the mighty limbs of the dalo
(Fiji diloy Calophyllum inophyllum) are washed by every wave and its
small ball-like fruit is found lying on every beach. The smell of the
sweet-scented white flowers of the dalo reminds one of nothing so much
as of an orange grove in flower.

But the real attraction and charm of Melanesia lie in the mystery
of the people, their unwritten past, the strangeness of their languages,
their views of life, their habits and customs, the strange flora of the
country, the birds and butterflies, some of these latter measuring 8 or
9 inches across, the excitement of a landing among the Heathen, the
yearnings of soul, the longing to do them good, to lead them out of
their darkness into light, to give them something more satisfying than
the tobacco or calico or knife which they are clamoring for — these
are the things that grip the heart of the missionary and constitute for
him at least the charm of Melanesia. One stands on a beach of the
great island Malaita, and all the fibers of one's being are scirred by
the sight of hill rising upon hill, cape stretching out beyond cape, and
by the knowledge that scattered all up and down the land are souls
awaiting the enlightenment of the spirit of God.

THE FOODSTUFFS OF MELANESIA.

The Melanesians may be called an agricultural people and a great
deal of their time is given up to cultivation. Their two main crops
are yams and taro, of both of which there are numerous varieties. The
best yams are grown in the southern part of Melanesia; the Solomon
Islanders never have enough yams to carry them through the summer
months till harvest time in April, all the yams having been used for
planting. But in the larger islands there is extensive cultivation of

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 183

taro in the districts on the hills, and this food carries the people over
the hunger times of the summer months. A yam garden is a sight
worth seeing; the ground is kept perfectly clear of weeds (this is the
women's share of the work), the yam vines are trained up long poles
and then run along strings which are tied from pole to pole. The vines
are of various shades of green, and when the leaves are dying they turn
red in color and are very beautiful to look on.

Breadfruit grows readily, and the trees have two crops a year, one
coming opportunely during the summer. The canarium (almond)
bears during the winter months, July and August. The nuts are put
into cane baskets and are smoked ready for storing. The coconut
is in bearing all the year through. The tree is at its best at the
coast and just above high-water mark. The large islands of the
eastern Solomons — ^MaIaita,Guadalcanar, San Cristoval, and Ysabel —
have comparatively few coconuts, and the only extensive coconut
plantation on Malaita is along the coast at Sa' a, at the southeast end
of the island. The scarcity of coconuts is largely owing to the fact
that the trees thrive best near the sea, but owing to fear of raids the
majority of the people on these large islands live away from the coast
and so can not grow the trees in any quantity.

Of so-called tropical fruits Melanesia has but few indigenous vari-
etits. Of the common native fruits by far the most important is the
coconut, and one is inclined to question whether any more wonderful
fruit than the coconut grows on this earth ! The fruit is obtainable
all the year round; it is nutritious whether eaten in the green stage
or when it has begun to sprout and is ready for planting. The ripe
nut is generally scraped and strained, and the resultant white juice,
the only real coconut milk, is boiled in the half shell and mixed as a
paste with grated yams or taro. What is commonly known as coconut
milk, the fluid in the dry nut so dear to the hearts of children in Euro-
pean countries, is never drunk by Melanesians, but if opportunity
oflfers is poured into a basin and put by for the animals to drink.

The oil of the coconut is extracted by the old-time process of stone
boiling. Needless to say, dried or smoked coconut (copra) is by far
the greatest article of export from Melanesia to-day. Ceylon used to
be reckoned the planters' paradise so far as growing coconuts was
concerned, but coconut plantations in the islands of the Solomons
come into bearing quicker than in any other part of the world; the
nuts are as good as the big Samoan nuts (indeed seed nuts have been
imported from Samoa), the rainfall is abundant, and hurricanes are
almost unknown. The oil is extracted from the copra and goes to make
some of our best soaps. The shell of the nut is used by the natives
to make cups and bottles, and since it contains oil it bums fiercely in
the fire. From the outer covering of the nut both ropes and mats are
made — the coir of commerce (coir, like copra, is a Singhalese word) ;

184 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

and the natives themselves make sennit and string from it. The dry
sheath, the covering of the new bunch of fruit, serves the natives both as
tinder and as a torch. The leaves of the tree make the very strongest
baskets, and in some islands are used to make the walls of the
houses. In the equatorial Pacific toddy is distilled from the growing
tree and the topmost shoots form a veritable king's banquet, but the
cutting of them destroys the tree.

Other fruits are the vi-apple {Spondias dulcisy commonly known as
uli or urx)j the canarium nut (ngo/t), the nut of the salite tree, which is
found oftenest growing at the mouths of the streams, the banana, and
the breadfruit. Both the banana and breadfruit are always cooked.
The indigenous banana needs cooking to make it eatable, but the com-
mon varieties, Musa cavendishii or gros micful, or the sugar banana of
Queensland, have been introduced and flourish. Many other tropical
and subtropical fruits have also been introduced — oranges, mandarins,
lemons, limes, granadilla, soursop, papaya, pineapples, mangoes, cocoa,
coffee; most of these need careful cultivation, and with the excepdon
of limes and papayas they all tend to die out if allowed to run wild.

Animal food is but rarely partaken of by Melanesians. Pigs they
all have, but they keep them for great events, for death feasts or for
wedding banquets. Opossums (cuscus) and the large fruit-eating bats
and wood pigeons and the monitor lizard are often eaten as relishes
with the vegetable food. The coast people get large quantities of
shellfish at the low spring tides, and on an island like Ulawa a great
deal of fishing is done both from the rocks and also out of canoes. The
people make all their own fishing-lines out of home-made string or out
of strong creepers found in the forest, and in old days their hooks were
cut out of tortoise-shell or out of black pearl-shell. Even to-day the
hooks for the bonito fishing are of native manufacture and the tiny
hooks for whiffing sardines are exquisitely made.

Fishing with nets is followed extensively by the Lau-speaking
peoples who live on the artificial islets off the northeast coast of Ma-
laita. These peoples and the people of the Reef Islands at Santa Cruz
live almost entirely on a fish diet. The flesh of the porpoise is much
prized by the peoples of Malaita and regular drives of porpoises are
held, the animals being surrounded and forced ashore into muddy
creeks, where they are captured. The main value of the porpoise lies
in the teeth, which form one of the native currencies. On the lee side
of the large islands in the Solomons there is a great deal of fishing
with hand nets; men stand in the water at the mouth of the
streams, holding a pole to which two bent sticks are attached with a
net tied to the four ends of the sticks, and lowered to the bottom.
The small fish (sardines and others) are chased inshore by large
kingfish, and pass over the net, which is promptly pulled up by the
fisherman. The fish are transferred by a deft movement to a bag
hanging on the man's back and suspended from his head.

.— 1

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 1 85

Bonito and flying-fish are esteemed as the greatest delicacies. The
former is coarse, but the latter is indeed a dainty. The bonito is a
very sacred fish to the mind of the southern Solomon Islander, and the
catching of it was intimately connected with his religion. The bonito
is caught from canoes, either by a hook trailed aft, no bait being used,
or by a hook played up and down in a jerky fashion and attached to a
strong rod and line. The flying-fish are caught on a gorge made of
tortoise-shell or of the midrib of the rachis of the sago palm. The best
bait is the claw of the robber crab {Birgus lotto) . The hook and line are
made fast to a fishing float called u^o in Ulawa (Maori tUo fish-float).
Numbers of these are thrown out in places frequented by the flying-fish
and the owner stands by in his canoe and watches them.

Sea bream are the most delicate fish in Melanesia. They are caught
with hook and line, and live white ants are thrown out as burly. The
bait is a worm found in the sand at high-water mark. The white ant
used is not the destructive white ant, which is capable of giving a sharp
bite, but is of a brownish color. The ignorant bushmen are popularly
supposed to use the wrong ant, with the result that the bream will
disappear.

THE HOUSES OF THE MELANESIANS.

The houses are mainly of one type, one-roomed buildings, to which
annexes may easily be added. Some of these houses are large enough
to accommodate a chief and his twenty wives, small chambers being
built within the main building. The commoners have their own
houses, one house to each family, and it is rarely that two families
live together. The roof is the first part of the house that is built.
Three rows of posts are erected and ridge poles are set on them. The
poles may rest in a groove or the tops of the posts may be forked.
Bamboo rafters are tied from the center pole to the side, and thatch
is laid on them longitudinally. The thatch is made of leaves, sago
palm or nipa palm, or the leaves of sugar cane (this latter is only used
in the south) sewn on to reeds or laths of bamboos and then tied in
position. The people of Florida and of Ysabel put their thatch on
in very close layers, and consequently the roof lasts very well, but in
the other islands the thatch needs a good deal of repair after the second
year. The smoke of the wood fires used in cooking hardens the thatch
and tends to preserve it; but schools and churches, buildings where
fires are not lighted, need constant repairs to the thatch. The sides
are built in with lattice-work of thin bamboo, and a small doorway is
left in the front which can be covered by a shutter of leaves. Orna-
mental ridges are made on the ground and are hoisted up into position,
and then made fast with creepers.

The Malaita and San Cristoval houses have a platform in front,
where the people sit in the evenings. To get into the house one has

^^ -

r^<:^

-.«> ilT»:«i ^:^^^ _,rfit -^- *• Ji^^rv CO*

_ _ ___ m ^

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 187

Another point as to which incorrect ideas exist is the question of
cannibalism. Doubtless cases of anthropophagy occurred in many
of the Melanesian islands, but it was never characteristic of the people
as a whole, and the man-eating propensities of the Fijian people could
never be predicated of the whole people of any single group in the
sphere of the Mission. So local and confined is the practice that,
while portions of one island regularly follow it, other portions of the
same island hold it in abhorrence, as is the case on Malaita. Joseph
Wate, of Sa'a, a reliable witness, assured me that the Tolo peoples of
Malaita were cannibals, but his own peoples were not, nor were the
shore peoples of Big Malaita. The latter were fish-eaters, and those
who lived on a fish diet did not practice as a regular thing the eating
of human flesh. Cannibalism is the regular practice on San CristovaU
but is held in abhorrence on Ulawa. Yet the belief in cannibalism is
so firmly fixed that one reads in the reports and books of the Mission
that the two Reef Islanders who were held captive at Port Adam in
Bishop John Selwyn's time were being fattened up and kept for eatings
whereas in all probability they were regarded as '^live heads'' {Jtalamoa
moti) and kept for killing, should any necessity arise when a victim
would be demanded, as, e, g.j at the death of any important person
in the place, or they might be sold to anyone looking for a person to-
kill. The bodies after death would be buried.

THE CLEANLINESS OF NATIVES.

To bathe daily is the common practice of most Melanesians, but the
bath is taken in the afternoon and usually after the day's work in the
garden is over. The Melanesian never dreams of having a dip in the
morning, as we whites do, and to the unthinking his failure to do sa
might seem to argue want of proper cleanliness. But, as Dr. Guppy
says, these people are far more susceptible to a rise or fall in the tem-
perature than we are, and he quotes Darwin as noticing that the
Patagonians when over a fire were streaming with perspiration, whereas
the white men with thick clothes on were enjoying the pleasant
warmth. So a Melanesian likes to bathe when the day is warm: on
days when the south wind is blowinr-a strong wind with cloudy
days — bathing is not much indulged in.

Since these people wear no clothes and have no seat but the ground
and take their rest on mats laid either on or just above the floor, and
always with a fire going beside them, their bodies soon show the dirt, but
it is a great mistake to imagine that they allow their bodies to go dirty
or are slack about bathing. A man or woman with fever will abstain
from washing (even in cases of strong fever it never occurs to anyone
to sponge the patient) and to bathe is a sign of convalescence. If a
person stays about a house and is evidently unwashed, one may take
it for granted that he or she is indisposed.

l88 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

THE CHILDREN.

Great care is expended in bathing small children and shielding them
from the rays of the sun. A young mother is excused from all work
and she has the best time in all her life when her first baby is bom.
Her whole time is given up to the child, and it is seldom out of her
arms. Owing to the lack of nourishing foods children are suckled
till they are quite large. The Melanesian baby seems to have no
natural liking for water and one often hears the shrill cries of small
children being bathed in the streams or being washed in the houses.
In the latter case water is poured from a bamboo into one of the wooden
bowls and the child is then washed by hand.

The children at a very early stage of their existence are freed from
the authority of their parents. They have no household duties to
perform; there is no set time for meals; in the morning they may be
given something cold left over from the night before, or the mother
may roast a yam on the fire, but as a rule there is no cooking done till
the late afternoon, when the women return from their gardens. During
the day, if the children are hungry they can get a coconut or a bread-
fruit, or shell-fish, or they can roast a yam or a taro, and a fire can be
made anywhere. The boys can get themselves an opossum or an
iguana and in the hill districts they even find grasshoppers to eat.
One and all they use large quantities of areca nut and pepper leaf and
lime. These seem to be as necessary to the Melanesians of the north-
em islands as is a pipe to a confirmed smoker.

One would expect that children freed thus early from any depend-
ence on their elders would run riot and learn licentious wajrs and
habits, but such does not seem to be the case. There is but little
individuality in Melanesians, and they are not "inventors of evil
things. '* They are bound by traditional customs, by the laws of the
elders, by those social restrictions that the people have evolved for
themselves as a safeguard against the breaking up of their society,
and free agents though the children may be, and lacking parental
control from our point of view, yet there is no such thing among them
as the organized following or doing of evil, and the mling moral ideas
of the people are found as the guide also of their children.

EVANGELIZATION.

Apart from the duty and privilege which every Christian feels of
winning the peoples of the earth for Christ, apart also from the prompt-
ings of the Holy Spirit to bring the peoples of Melanesia to a knowl-
edge of the power of Christ, there can be no conceivable reason for
holding that Melanesians have no need of the Christian religion or
could fail to grasp it when presented to them. In the first place, they
certainly lose nothing by renouncing their old Heathen religion, which
was the worship of their ancestors. The spirits of these ancestors

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 189

provoke fear rather than love, and are invoked from a desire that their
influence should be used to stave off any possible evil that might hap«
pen rather than because they are conceived of as kindly dispositioned
beings who love and want to do good to their worshippers. To a
people with such a religion the knowledge of the Great Spirit God as
a loving Father comes with the utmost force and power.

Melanesians on the one hand are more or less incapable of individual
and separate action; each one is just a copy of his neighbor, and every-
thing is done by concerted agreement among the whole people; on the
other hand, they have no means of preserving the welfare of themselves
as a whole. They have no tribes, no kingdoms, no laws beyond the
unwritten social laws relating to marriage, etc.; life is insecure, accu-
sations of witchcraft are easily made, and death follows as a matter of
course; infanticide is a common practice, big families are almost un-
known, polygamy is a recognized thing. So Christianity comes to
them as a means of insuring both individual and social vigor and only
in so far as they become Christian will they be saved from extinction.
If only from a humanitarian point of view, it were a charity to enlighten
the darkness of these benighted people and to give them something to
strive for, to set before them some spiritual end, to give them a higher
standard of existence than their present one.

There can, however, be no question of leaving them alone now, what-
ever may have been the case in past years; civilization, t. ^., trade, is
coming in fast and the inevitable consequence will be that the white
man's view of life will alter the old style of things. Experience has
taught us that wherever a people without a settled state and a kingdom
and the external power of law is invaded by any of our western peoples,
with their vigor and personality, the less-developed people lose all their
pristine distinctiveness, all bonds are loosed, and inevitable decay sets
in; in other words, the white man destroys the black. Benjamin
Kidd shows this most conclusively in his book ''Social Evolution.''
In the case of Melanesia the process may take time, but that the
result is certain in the end is proved by the disappearance of the nomad
Australian aboriginal, and with a people of a higher culture by the story
of the capable Maori people of New Zealand under modem conditions.

Drink and idleness are two of the main factors that have tended
to the downfall of both the Maori and the Australian aboriginal; low-
class whites have done much to ruin the latter, nor has the Maori
been free from their influence. There is no fear of a large influx of
whites into Melanesia, and the governments have it in their power to
deport any undesirable person, but in the south of Melanesia, e. g.f
on Omba, unscrupulous traders have done incalculable harm. Under
the Condominium of the New Hebrides, drink and firearms can still
be obtained by natives, but the Solomon Island government entirely
prohibits the sale of both.

I90 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

In the more settled islands and districts provision can be made quite
easily for the due employment of the people at regular and systematic
work, so as to guard against the danger of idleness. There is ample
land available everywhere for use either in growing the crops of food or
for planting in coconuts. Hunger ought to be a thing of the past; the
islands hardly know what a drought is; the foodstuflFs, both indigenous
and introduced, are many and varied, and it needs only sufficient
land to be kept under cultivation to insure a plentiful and regular
supply of food. This is clear in our experience, for in our own garden
at Ulawa, which was under the care of Elwin Dume, a man of Mera-
lava, there was always a supply of food, sweet potatoes, yams, pana,
pumpkins, tapioca (cassava), and even taro (which the people of the
place said would not grow in Ulawa), bananas, and pineapples. It
often was the case that when our garden was bearing well others were
searching for food. Elwin used to return home through the village
unconcernedly smoking his pipe and with the tip of a yam showing
out of his bag. ''Oh! look at these white men {mzoa haka)/' the
people would exclaim as he passed, "they have yams while we have
to go and scratch in the forest for food!''

The exercise of due control both by the Mission and by government
ought to obviate the dangers both of idleness and of hunger. As more
and more traders come in, the danger will be that pressure is put on
the government to acquire suitable land for plandng, and great care
will have to be taken that sufficient land is left in the neighborhood
of the centers of population for the use of the people. On an island
like Ugi in the Solomons very large tracts have been alienated, the
original owners are but few, and possession is the more easily acquired.
It is recalled that in the case of the sale of one large tract near the orig-
inal trading station at Selwyn Bay the land was said to have been sold
by a man who had only the very flimsiest right to it, since he was not
an Ugi man at all but an adopted person.

The cure for the existing evils and the means of staving oflF the
threatened extinction of the people do not lie in their employment on
plantations, as some hold. The moral elevation of the people and
their advance in civilization used to be held up as valid reasons for
their being recruited to work in Queensland, but from internal evidence
one would say that the main influence which the labor trade has had
on Melanesia is that it has sadly depopulated the islands. There has
been no social elevation through the trade; the want of cohesion among
the natives, apart from all other considerations, would have been
sufficient to prevent it. The thousands of men who, throughout the
years the trade was in existence, returned from civilizadon did nothing
to better the conditions of life among their neighbors; they dissem*
inated no knowledge, they started no spiritual movement for the
uplifting of their people, they stirred up no divine discontent with

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. I9I

the old-time conditions. They brought back in a measure the outer
trappings of civilization, but were ignorant of its power. While their
axes lasted they made it easier for someone else to work; their pur-
chases gave them for the time being a certain amount of importance;
but once their stock was finished their influence was at an end.

One of the cures for the present state of things in Melanesia is un-
doubtedly work, but work on plantations for wages is not necessarily
an agency that makes either for the setting up of the influences that
have made nations great or insures the end which all desire who
have the welfare of these child races at heart, viz, the ultimate sur-
vival of these peoples.

The comparative scantiness of the population is the real difiiculty
in the evangelization of Melanesia. There must be an assembling
of the. scattered units of population in the islands, and since one of
the first results of the propagation of Christianity in Melanesia is
the gathering together of the people in a community where hitherto
they have been living as scattered units all over the face of the land,
it seems obvious that the initiative in the program of work will lie
with the missions. Once Christianity spreads, and, as a result of its
spreading, peace is established, and old feuds die down and murder
and bloodshed cease and villages are formed in these large islands
with their scattered peoples, then the place of the government is to
see that offenses against life and moral law and order are punished
in order that the people may be given a chance to grow up and become
settled and organized. How else shall it come to pass that ^'that
which is no nation '^ shall become a nation? There can be no ofi^ense
felt by the missionaries at the government thus guarding what is won;
already cases of witchcraft among the Heathen are cognizable by the
government authorities, and they punish breaches of the moral law
among Christians when such are brought under their notice. The
missions can still exercise their own discipline and the secular author-
ities will not interfere with the spiritual side of the work. On the other
hand, since the missions are the bringers of peace, the government
can feel no offense in serving them and following them up and con-
solidating the results of their work. The missions have the first and
best opportunity in the matter; they are thoroughly in touch with
the natives and have, or ought to have, an abundance of first-class
material ready to their hands for compelling men to come in from the
highways and hedges and fill the House of God. Nevertheless the
government itself is doing much for the ultimate salvation of the
peoples; head hunting has been stopped completely, and wild places
like the north end of Malaita are being brought into order by the
establishment of government stations. So far as the Melanesian Mis-
sion is concerned it would seem obvious that the future demands a
large increase of native clergy if the ground is to be won.

192 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

NATIVES OF MELANESIA.

Bishop G. A. Selwyn evidently had a very high opinion of the value
of the work likely to be done by natives in the propagation of the Gos-
pel in Melanesia, when he referred to them as the ''black net/' the
white priests at the same time forming the ''corks" of the gospel net.
The Bishop's idea has been followed faithfully enough, so far as the
mere manning of the Mission with native teachers goes, and the work
of these native teachers occupies a very large place in the Melanesian
Mission to-day; nor can there be any doubt whatever of their ability^
under proper circumstances, to do what the founder of the Mission
planned that they should do. Still, it can not be questioned that up to
the present time the native Christians, teachers and people alike, fall
short in the performance of their part in the casting of the Gospel net.
The truth of the matter would seem to be that the native church has
not yet risen to a sense of its duty in the work of evangelization; Chris-
tianity has seemed to the converts to be more a thing brought from
outside and to be accepted along with the rest of the white man's
things than a matter vitally concerning themselves and depending on
their cooperation.

If the white teachers were removed from Melanesia to-day the prob-
ability is that, though the daily services and daily school would still
be held in most of the villages, yet there would be no advance and no
enlargement of the work, no widening of the borders, and in such places
as were manned by less able teachers it is doubtful whether the past
gains of the Mission would be consolidated. The church life of the
villages depends almost entirely on the teacher alone; the native church
has not been trained in methods of self-government and no legislative
machinery exists; there is no village council to advise or strengthen the
hands of the teacher, and should he fail the whole work would probably
come to an end. Nor is there anything in the way of self-support in
the native church. The Mission supplies the teacher's pay and the
people have no duties incumbent on them in connection with the
upkeep of religion.

It was thought originally that the withdrawal of the white mission-
ary for four or six months every year would tend to encourage habits
of self-reliance among the native teachers and would strengthen their
characters and would foster the idea that eventually the native church
must stand alone. But it certainly seemed as if the time when one
was away was more fruitful in cases of wrong-doing than when one was
actually present among the people. The Mission priest on returning
to his work in the islands is apt to be faced with a sad account of what
has happened "behind his back." He may notice the absence here
and there, from church and school, of certain persons, and inquiry may
elicit the information that they were "outside the inclosure," the

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. I93

victims of sin, mainly of impurity, and though not formally excom*
municated yet self-judged, as their absence proved. Or he would
hear of family quarrels, or of the petulancy of the chief and his arbi-
trary tabu of certain things and of a consequent staying away from
church and school. Or a Christian girl or a catechumen may have
been given in marriage to a Heathen and so lost to the church, or
perchance a Christian man had taken a heathen woman to wife and
was living with her unmarried or even had taken a second wife and
was living with two women. Or it might be that some promising
Christian lad had gone off to live with heathen relatives. Or he
might hear of cases of exorcism, of approaches made to the spirits
of the dead, or of trials by fire or of adjuration of the spirits of the dead
on the part of the Christians. At times he would find a village pre-
paring to go and avenge the cruel murder of some Christian or school-
man wantonly murdered by the heathen. In addition to the moral
failures which occurred in his absence, he might find that the school
and church required roofing, that the fences were down, and that the
village pigs had made a shelter inside the buildings and that his own
"prophet's chamber" was uninhabitable.

What would happen were the white missionaries removed is made
plain by the history of what has occurred in places that have had to
do without the services of a white man for any length of time. Left
to themselves and without the help of a native deacon or priest, the
people tend to become very slack in church attendance and in the per-
formance of their Christian duties, and the recent struggle that Bishop
Wilson had against the secret societies in the northern Banks Group
shows that Christianity there failed to alter fundamentally the original
native view of life.

The Banks Islands in particular have lacked for many years past the
services of a white priest and with a few notable exceptions it may be
said of this particular group that wherever the native teachers have
been left to themselves the work has languished. Since Mr. Adams
went to Vureas the Banks Islands have seen very little of the presence
of a white missionary. Of the work at the Torres Group, once so
promising, but little is heard now, and there can be no doubt that the
continued absence of a white man or of a native priest has had a dele-
terious effect on the work there.

Where the people are strong in character and community life is more
developed, as in the northern Banks Group, a native teacher alone can
not make much headway, but a man in orders exercises a great deal
more power and will be listened to. When the white man is present
matters that had been wrong right themselves very quickly and there
seem to be far fewer cases of wrong-doing. This is doubtless due
partly to respect for his presence. The ordinary native teacher does
not inspire this respect, and unless he were a man of strong moral fiber

194 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

(as some of them are) and with his position well assured he could hardly
venture to rebuke an act which he knew to be wrong. The teacher
is in most cases a man of the place, and village and home associations
and family relationships would prevent him uttering his protest
against a meditated wrong.

There is very little that goes on in a native village that is not known
to most of the people, and things are very well discussed before any
action is taken, and generally the whole village knows the doings and
the intentions of every inhabitant. If the teacher did know before-
hand the chances are that he could not prevent the wrong. Individual
action is rare among Melanesians. A man would hardly dream of
interfering if he saw another doing a thing which was inconsistent
with his Christian calling and no one thinks of the necessity of setting
a standard. Correction or direction or friendly advice is scarcely ever
administered by one Melanesian to another. Even parents whose
children are disobedient will bring them to a teacher or a missionary for
reproof or correction rather than administer the correction themselves.
The last thing that a Melanesian thinks of doing is the preventing
of harm or interfering in a matter in order to right it.

In the absence of the white missionary, if the knowledge of a medi-
tated wrong came to the teacher's ears the existence of a village council
or of a combined council of all the neighboring villages would avail in
all probability to prevent the wrong being done. The nearest thing
to such a council is the Vaukolu of Florida, a yearly gathering of all
the chiefs and head teachers to discuss social, ecclesiastical, and educa-
tional matters. But these gatherings have been held very irregularly
and their decisions have been of little force since there were no sub-
sidiary councils in the villages to assist the teachers in carrying them
out.

The isolation of the peoples in most of the Melanesian islands has
in all probability been largely responsible for the lack of concerted
action hitherto among the Christians. Social life as such was not
known in Melanesia before the advent of Christianity. In their pre-
Christian days these natives do not live in villages or hamlets, but in
isolated groups with two or three houses or huts in a group. With the
exception of certain places in Florida and also of the artificial islets oflF
the northeast coast of Malaita, where hundreds of people live on tiny
rookeries of stone just raised above the level of the tide, there was
nothing that was worthy of the name of a village in the whole of the
Mission's area in the Solomons. Consultative or joint action in a
matter was practically unknown. Each subdistrict had its own petty
chief with a following of half a dozen men in some cases. Every man
knew who his own chief was and would support him when called
upon. Each main district had also its head chief and to him tribute
was paid whensoever he demanded it. Even these head chiefs had

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. I95

no State or surroundings. Thus at Roasi, on Little Malalta, Horo-
hanue was the alaha paine^ the main chief, but he had no immediate
retinue and lived alone with his two wives, the guardian of his ances-
tral spirits, *akaloy and with the skulls of his dead in the house along
with him.

Roasi was composed of two parts, Upper and Lower, Roast i haho,
Roast i *ano. A teacher, Johnson Telegsem, was accepted by the peo-
ple of Lower Roasi, acting quite independently of Horohanue, as they
had every right to do. After two moves they made a final settlement
at Salenga just above the bay. Then two years later Horohanue
himself also asked for a teacher and gathered his own particular people
together and had a school-house built.

The two Christian villages of Roasi were only half a mile apart, with
a ravine in between, and yet separate teachers had to be found for them,
owing to their unwillingness to move to some one central spot where a
permanent church and school could be built. The Mission went so far
as to buy a site down on the beach large enough to accommodate both
sections of the people, who numbered something over 200, but after
Horohanue's death petty jealousies and squabbles completely pre-
vented any concerted action.

At Sa'a, an important place at the southeast end of Malaita, the
titular chief Sinehanue was the direct descendant, twelve generations
removed, of the chiefs who had shared in the original migration from
the hills of Little Malaita (Codrington, Mel. Anthrop., p. 49). He
lived apart from the majority of the people with just his own immediate
relatives and dependents around him. Four separate villages, huu i
lumey collections of houses, formed what was known to the neighboring
peoples as Sa'a, though no one village bore the name as such, and in
each of these there was at least one person who was reckoned as alaha
chief.

The greatest possible difficulty was experienced in inducing the peo-
ples of these four villages to act in concert and assign one place as the
site for the church and school. We had journeys all over the neigh-
borhood looking for a neutral place and houses were begun tentatively
in several directions in order to accelerate union.

With very few exceptions the people inhabiting any particular dis-
trict are always a mere handful. At Sa^a the inhabitants of all the
four villages numbered a little over 200, and the population of an aver-
age Christian village in any of the large islands of the Solomons when
all of the available people had been gathered in would seldom be much
over 60. These villages, moreover, are several miles apart, and there
is nothing in the nature of roads joining them, so it is plain that there
must necessarily be a great deal of unavoidable isolation between the
villages, and concerted action and corporate life will not be acquired
easily.

196 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

CULTIVATION OF RESPONSIBILITY AND INDEPENDENCE IN THE

NATIVE CHURCH.

The native church in Melanesia has never really been asked as yet
to undertake the support of its own clergy and teachers. Bishop
Wood's charge in 191 5 was the first official acknowledgment of the
need for the Melanesians to look to themselves rather than to the
Mission for funds to pay the teachers. In 191 4 the amount contributed
for the support of the Mission by the native church was £31. This
amount certainly seems out of all proportion, since at the same time
the island stations cost £i»300 and most of this was for teachers' pay.
Nor is it that an excessive wage is paid to the teachers. No native
priest receives more than £25 a year, and some of the junior teachers
are rated at only £1 a year. In old days these salaries were always
paid in kind, with now and then a demand for a little cash, but nowa-
days a good deal of payment is done in cash, since traders and stores are
found in almost every place.

There has never been any attempt made to organize a system of local
contributions. If a village wanted to buy timber or iron for the build-
ing of its church, copra was made and was sold for the purpose, the
Mission ship occasionally carrying the copra to market, or curios were
made and were sold abroad. At various times during Bishop Wilson's
episcopate several villages gave contributions in curios and these were
taken and were sold for the benefit of the Mission. But this never
became a regular thing. There seems to be no reason why the support
of the native teachers in the well-established Christian villages should
not be laid as a duty on the native church, with moreover the certainty
of success. Until the time of Bishop Wilson no such thing was thought
of, and one looks in vain for any hint of it in the lives of the first two
bishops. In their time the making of copra was far from being estab-
lished as an industry in Melanesia, and with the exception of food
and curios there was practically nothing that could serve as a means of
raising money. The native money (shell money or the teeth of por-
poises or dogs) was valueless, since there was no means of changing it^
as no traders would take it as a means of exchange.

THE QUESTION OF MAKING A RETURN FOR SPIRITUAL GIFTS.

In himself the Melanesian knows but little, if anything at all, of
gratitude, and he sees nothing incongruous in allowing the Mission to
pay his teachers. Bishop Wilson tried to inculcate the idea that it
was the duty of the natives to convey their Mission priests about in
boats, acting as crews for them and receiving no pay. The missionaries
are often at heavy expense in obtaining boats' crews (every man pays
his own travelling expenses), and in the Banks Group Mr. Cullwick con-
stantly had a crew of six men with him for three months at a stretch.

MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. I97

The various villages, even if they provide any food at all for the crews
(and most of them will do a little to that end), soon tire of feeding
strangers, and so the missionary has to buy food for his crew and carry
it about with him in addition to paying them.

In Malaita and San Cristoval there never was any difficulty in ob*
taining crews, nor was there any bargaining about price (but this was
before the return of the Kanakas from Queensland and the consequent
introduction of a very different set of ideas), whereas in Florida the
missionary has had regularly to hire his crew and appoint a fixed rate
of wages before leaving. In places other than Florida half a crown a
week was reckoned very good pay. A man would gaily leave on a six
weeks' tour with no luggage beyond his pipe, shoulder-bag, and one
loin-cloth. On the morning of departure our yard would be thronged
with men and a spokesman from among them would approach and ask:
"Are many going with you?" "Why?" "Oh, I did not know whether
you had enough." Our own experience was that men had to be turned
away at such times, and a double crew could always be got. But
though they were content with their pay, no one of them would have
been willing to go for nothing, while at the same time the home duties of
them all were practically nil. They and their people were being bene-
fited very materially by the presence of the missionary, but it was per-
haps too much to expect them to give their services free in carrying
him about; moreover, they viewed the work as a chance of earning a
little, and such chances were rare.

The Melanesian attitude with regard to presents is peculiar. A
number of women would come with yams in baskets for sale; one special
basket would be reported as "not for sale," its contents (often inferior
yams) were a gift — but it would have been the height of foolishness to
accept such a gift without making a corresponding return. On being
discharged from hospital a man would ask for a present in that he had
been cured ! Where there is no sense of debt there can be no showing
of gratitude, gratitude being a spiritual and not a natural gift, a sense
of the need to try to make a return for favors rendered. A Melanesian
knows nothing of social duties; his life is lived apart from that of his
fellows; he has no social sense, no dependence on his fellows, no common
bonds of union such as spring up in community life; he asks nothing
from his fellows nor they anything from him; he owes them nothing,
and in consequence his circumstances have never been such as would
be likely to encourage the growth of gratitude. He has never received
anything; he has nothing to return.

The average Melanesian is a person of few worldly possessions; his
house furniture consists of a few wooden bowls, a mortar for pounding
yams or taro, a supply of vegetables smaller or larger according to his
energy, an axe or a cane-knife; also a little stock of native money and
perhaps a canoe. Of clothes he has practically none and the mis-

198 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE.

sionary'8 simple wardrobe seems to him to be lavish in the extreme;
he therefore has no compunction in asking for what he knows the white
man to possess. If a person has practically never owned anything at
all and if all his fellows are in the same condition too it is almost impos-
sible to get him to understand that he should feel gratitude towards
those who give him anything, since from his point of view they have so
much in that they have anything at all.

RELATIONS OF NATIVES WITH WHITES.

The question of treachery follows on that of gratitude. It is a matter
of common belief amongst Europeans that natives are treacherous.
This idea of treachery is generally founded on ignorance of the point of
view of the natives. It is generally supposed that one can not trust
oneself to them; that their attitude is uncertain and that they are
liable to turn and rend one without any provocation. While granting
that the native is a person of moods, it is just as possible to foretell
what action he is likely to take in a given case as it is with Europeans.
In his actions he follows a line of reasoning quite as much as the white
man does. Many attacks on and murders of white men have been
ascribed to treachery on the part of the natives, but it is only fair to
call to remembrance the awful indignities and atrocities perpetrated on
them by the whites and to put these in the scale over against the accu-
sations of treachery. The native certainly at times acts wickedly either
on the impulse of the moment or for a wicked end, but in most cases of
wrong done to whites in Melanesia there has been some antecedent
cause, some evil associated with a white person somewhere. The occa-
sion may have been remote and the connection faulty from our point
of view, but in the mind of the native the provocation was there. With
our notions of direct justice and of the necessity for the punishment of
the actual wrong-doer himself we can not understand the point of view
of the native, which is that justice is satisfied so long as some one of the
same people who did the real or fancied wrong is made to suffer.

iff' ■

m

)3

SOME HISTORICAL NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN

MISSION.

The founding of the Melanesian Mission was due to the vigorous
bodily energy and the apostolic fervor of Bishop George Augustus
Selwyn. The fact that the founder was a Bishop, and as such pos-
sessed the power and authority to insure the success of his plans and
ideas, and had in addition a certain assured sum of money at his
back, caused the Mission to be stamped from the outset with a definite
style and imprinted upon it a traditional method of work. In consid-
ering this style and tradition, we must remember that the founder
of the Mission was Bishop of New Zealand and was thus debarred
from settling in Melanesia and leading the attack on its Heathenism
from within. Since his home and his main interests and his more
regular sphere of work lay outside Melanesia, and since also the carry-
ing out of the work at all seemed to depend, on himself, it is obvious that
the only way for him to begin the evangelization of Melanesia was
by taking boys from it to some place where he could have them trained
with a view to their becoming the future missionaries of Melanesia.

Quite apart, however, from the fact of the foundation of the Mission
by a bishop and from its receiving thereby a definite and a fixed char-
acter at the outset, and apart also from the difficulty of changing a
practice once firmly established, those who know the influence which
Bishop Selwyn exercised in the matter of fixing the constitution of the
Church of New Zealand would naturally expect to find something of
the same rigidity and fixedness in the traditional methods and style of
work in the Melanesian Mission. It must also be borne in mind, when
reviewing the style and methods of work adopted in the Mission, that
its policy herein has not been the result of the deliberations of the
missionaries themselves and has not stood in the definite following of
the teachings of the experience of the many, with alterations from time
to time to suit the varying needs, but has been in effect the regular and
one may say almost the mechanical following of the lines laid down by
the founder. For all that, the Melanesian diocese was an offshoot of
the Church of New Zealand and as such might have been expected to
show the same spirit of cooperadon in religious matters between clergy
and chosen lay representatives consulting together, yet the Mission
never had a synod (though every diocese in New Zealand has one), and
the conference of whites and natives held in 191 1 was the first instance
of any attempt made during the whole history of the Mission to gather
the workers together and to take deliberative measures for the better
carrying on of the work.

Unril the rime, about 12 years ago, wh^i the missionaries first
tended to become permanent residents in the spheres of work in the

199

2CX> NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION.

islands^ practically the only changes made in the original plan of work
in the Mission were: (i) the substitution of Mota for English as the
language of the central school; (2) the removal of headquarters to
Norfolk Island from Auckland. The hand of the founder seemed ever
to lie on the Mission which his strong and vigorous nature and powerful
personality had called into being and directed along its path of life.

In the Melanesian Mission the bishop theoretically is the Mission;
the clergy simply are the bishop's chaplains, and till fairly late in the
episcopate of Bishop Wilson no license was issued to them, and so long
as it was the tradition that they should return every summer to Nor-
folk Island it is evident that they could not be instituted to any cure
of souls. It is quite plain, moreover, that with only a small staiF and
with frequent absences or departures or losses entailing a considerable
moving round of the men, nothing approaching the conditions neces-
sary for the holding of a synod of the Australasian type is likely to
occur, and it does not seem that the Mission is likely to grow quickly
into a church which shall be self-governing unless (in order to com-
pensate for the fewness of the white priests) a large number of native
priests are ordained.

SUPPORT.

The bishop's chief intention in regard to the support of the Mission
seems to have been that it should be a first charge on the Church of
New Zealand, and he evidently regarded the Mission in Melanesia
as part and parcel of the work of the Church of New Zealand. He
also looked forward to the native Maori church as a source whence
missionaries to Melanesia would be obtained. With the division of
the original diocese of New Zealand into six and the consequent
necessity, owing to influx of population, of providing for its own in-
ternal needs, the Church of New Zealand rather failed for many years
to fulfill its obligations to Melanesia. A resolution of General Synod
was passed to the effect that the various dioceses be asked to appoint
a missionary Sunday and to give their alms on that day to Melanesia.
Four out of the six dioceses have now fallen into line with this reso-
lution by appointing such a Sunday.

The Christian Maoris have not realized as yet the hope that Bishop
Selwyn entertained of them, viz, that they should become missionaries
to Melanesia and that the Maori church should support its own foreign
missionaries; but now, with the coming of the Marsden Centenary, a
definite movement has been set on foot to send Maori missionaries to
the Polynesian-speaking peoples in Melanesia.

In Australia the Melanesian Mission was accepted through the Board
of Missions as one of the activities of the church, yet in 1894 Australia's
contribution to Melanesia was only £1,600, whereas in the same year
New Zealand gave £2,750 and England £3,800. The revival of the

NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 20I

Australian Board of Missions' interest in Australia six years ago caused
a great improvement in the local contributions to the Melanesian Mis-
sion, and in 191 3 these amounted to £2,928 as against £5,122 from
New Zealand.

In England, up till the time of the episcopate of Bishop Wilson, all
interest in Melanesia was confined to the Eton Association and to the
actual friends of the Mission — i. e.j those in close touch with particular
missionaries. The Rev. Prebendary Selwyn had discharged all duties
connected with the raising of the English income of the Mission, but
in 1899 a paid secretary was appointed and an office was taken in
the Church House, Westminster. The Rev. L. P. Robin was the first
secretary and he was succeeded in 1905 by the Rev. A. E. Corner,
who still occupies the position and who acts in an honorary capacity.
For the last twelve years the Mission has had a regular lecturer touring
in England and in 191 3 the English income was £8,800.

THE LOG.

Up till 1895 the Mission had no way of making its needs known and
of spreading the knowledge of its work, except by its annual reports or
by quarterly papers published by Bishop J. R. Selwyn in England.
The first number of the ^'Southern Cross Log'* appeared in 1895, and
now for twenty years the "Log** has been published monthly, and an
edition is also published in England. Undoubtedly the "Log" has
helped greatly in the augmentation of interest in the Mission, and the
fact that the Mission has at last emerged into full view and has taken
its place as one of the missions of the whole church is owing largely to
services rendered by the "Log.** We may now say that whereas the
Melanesian Mission started its life as the creation of the apostolic zeal
of one man and was practically a private mission for many years, it
has become at length the possession of the whole English Church.

Before the episcopate of Bishop Wilson the leaders of the Mission
contributed largely to its funds. In the building of the ships a large
amount of private money was thus expended and the present Southern
Cross is the only one built by public subscriptions. Bishop Wilson
saw the necessity of bringing the needs of the Mission to the minds of
the people of the Church at large and he greatly extended the already
existing policy of apportioning native scholars to various schools and
parishes; he also inaugurated the "Island** scheme, whereby a person
or parish guarantees the upkeep of a mission school in a certain place;
by this means he practically insured regular yearly contributions.

The head office of the Mission is in Auckland. This is owing to old-
time associations and also to the presence there of Archdeacon Dudley,
who was for so many years the treasurer of the Mission. Latterly the
organizing secretary for New Zealand has also had his headquarters in
Auckland. Bishop Wilson appointed a committee of business men in

202 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION.

Auckland to advise on monetary matters and to look after the Mis-
sion's interest in the matter of repairs to the ship and the ordering of
stor es for the islands. Doubtless much money was saved by this step.

NORFOLK ISLAND.

It is in the matter of Norfolk Island that the lingai of the Mission —
t. e.f its adherence to tradition — has been most marked. Bishop G. A.
Selwyn was forced at the outset of the work to choose a base of oper-
ations outside Melanesia itself. His policy was to keep the work of
the Mission under his own eye rather than to call for workers to go
and settle in the islands and develop the mission work from within.
It was assumed that for the development of the Mission the base of
operations must necessarily be elsewhere than in the field to be devel-
oped» and while the question of climate has always been supposed
popularly to have been the main determining factor in the course which
was pursued, yet in all probability the matter was settled by other
considerations than those of climate. The climate of Melanesia is
bad enough, but when Bishop Selwyn began his work in the islands
white missionaries of the London Missionary Society and also Presby-
terian missionaries were settled already in the New Hebrides, the
French were in New Caledonia, and the Methodists were in New
Britain. The climate of the New Hebrides is but little better, if at
all, than that of the Banks Islands, where most of the early work of
the Mission was done, and New Britain has almost the same climate
as the Solomons, so it is evident that missionaries of the Melanesian
Mission, or the Northern Mission as it was called at the outset, could
have settled in their own sphere of work had the policy allowed.

The report of 1857, written probably by Mr. Patteson, puts the
matter very clearly from the standpoint of that time. Speaking of
the Melanesians in the school at St. John's, Auckland, he writes:

''They are delicate subjects and require careful handling, morally and
physically. The strength of passion and weakness of consritution which
belongs to their tropical nature reauire careful training. But if they can be
acclimatized mentally as well as pnysically, and taught to unite the energy
and perseverance of the inhabitants of a temperate region with their own
fervor and impetuosity of character, there can be little reason to doubt but
that they will prove most efficient teachers and missionaries to their own
people, when once the erace of God's spirit shall have shined in their hearts.
The pupil will probably, bv the mere force of association, have received
impressions and experienced a change of ^ character which will prove veiy
beneficial to him and which may induce^ him, on mixing once more with his
own friends, to contrast their customs with ours. He will feel the sense of a
want now created in him of something better than his own land supplies;
he will desire to return again to New Zealand, and by degrees be borne alons
from one noint to another till, under God's blessing, he emerges from his ola
dark Heatnen state of mind into a state of conscious apprehension and accept-

NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 203

ance of that religion which has presented itself to him as modifying every
part of his life and character, social, moral and spiritual.

"It is useless to suppose that the 78 islands already visited by the Bishop of
New Zealand can be permanently supplied with English missionaries. It is
indeed beyond the bounds of all probability to suppose that even the twenty*
one islands which have already yielded scholars to the Mission can be pro-
vided with resident English teachers. While India, China, and Africa are
now at length opened to us, and need every help which Christian zeal and
love in Endand may supply, we can not expect any large number of mission*
aries from nome for the work in Melanesia. The only method now open, as
we have said, is to avail ourselves of the strange curiosity which induces
native men and lads to trust themselves with us, and to hope and believe
that out of these some will be led to return again and again to New Zealand
to receive direct Christian teaching.

"In every case the attempt would be made to raise up a staflF of teachers
for each island from among the inhabitants of each island, and the English
inissionary, or^ any native teacher qualified for the work who might be asso-
ciated with him, would not be regarded as permanently attached to the
Earricular island with which they were at any ^ven time brought into relation,,
ut only until such time as the teachers trained up by them in the island
during a part of the year, and in New Zealand during the remainder of it,,
could be taught to carry on the work under the superintendence of the
Bishop making his rounds in the mission vessel. If each group of islands
should be hereafter placed in charge of an English missionary, whose duty
it would be in his small boat to be watching over the native clergy in each
part of his district, and the Melanesian Bishop should be for six months
visiting the islands, bringing back and taking away teachers and scholars,
and for the remaining six superintending the missionary college in New 2^a*
land; some five or six active working men would constitute the whole of the
necessary English staiF.''

It was really Bishop Selwyn's strong personality and his vigor of
mind and body that caused this new and hitherto untried method of
evangelization to be adopted. The Bishop's method was a new one
in the history of modem missions, though in a measure it might be
regarded as an adaptation of the method adopted by St. Boniface
in founding monasteries and in using them to educate missionaries
gathered from the neighborhood. The ordinary way of starting and of
carrying on the work to be done in Melanesia, viz., by residential
missionaries, was difficult enough at that time owing to (i) the short-
age of men, (2) the lack of regular communication other than by the
Mission ship, (3) the difficulty of climate, (4) the multiplicity of lan-
guages. But it must not be forgotten that the other missions in Mela-
nesia, by their policy of settling residential missionaries from the very
inception of their work, have proved that (i) men will oflFer for the
work and (2) climatic conditions can be overcome. Of the other twa
difficulties, that of communication has already been solved and the
language difficulty has not been found to be insuperable.

The native teachers of the Melanesian Mission trained in a fairly
cool climate at Norfolk Island and surrounded by the things of civil-

204 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION.

ization, have certainly not proved any more useful as propagandists
than the native teachers of other Missionary bodies in the Pacific
who were trained in or near their own homes.

It was during the episcopate of Bishop Wilson that those changes
began which not only considerably altered the original plan of the
Mission, but which also bid fair to change its character altogether.
The Rev. H. Welchman was actually the first to make a change in the
original plan of the Mission by settling with his wife at Siota, Florida.
Dr. Comins bought Siota with the idea of establishing a preparatory
school there for teachers, and he and Mr. Welchman had undertaken
to conduct it in turn, Mr. Welchman taking the summer months and
Dr. Comins returning from Norfolk Island during the southeastern
trade season, when Mr. Welchman went back to his own work in
Bugotu. Previous to this, however, Mr. Forrest had been living
continuously at Santa Cruz all the year through, but the rest of the stafF
regularly spent the summer months at Norfolk Island. Bishop J.
Selwyn, moreover, had long been desirous of doing something to aid the
Christian life of the converts, because he recognized the necessity of
building them up in their Christianity. He also wished to give them
something to do in order to replace the misdirected efforts of the old
Heathenism with some form of regular employment. His idea was to
furnish a small vessel for trading purposes and to start a trading com-
pany, thus providing an outlet for the energies of his people, now that
the old avenues of their Heathen life were closed.

FURTHER CHANGES,

During Bishop Wilson's episcopate there were many new develop-
ments of work. Preparatory schools were built at Bongana in Florida,
at Pamua on San Cristoval, and at Vureas in the Banks Group. The
missionaries began to reside permanently among their people and mis-
sion houses were built in all the groups. Men took their wives to the
islands and women workers were placed in pairs in various places.
Still, so long as Norfolk Island remained the Bishop's headquarters it
could not reasonably be said that these doings amounted to a radical
change of front; they were only what might be expected, owing to
the changes in the circumstances of the islands caused by the advent of
trade and by the presence of other missionary bodies in the Mission's
area. These two factors, viz., trade and opposition, have worked such
a change in the Mission's plan that it may be said that practically
all the missionaries are residential in the islands, t. ^., they no longer
return to Norfolk Island during the summer.

The growing importance of the work in the islands so impressed the
authorities that when Bishop Wilson resigned it was felt that his suc-
cessor must be prepared to have his headquarters in the islands. Nor-

NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 2O5

folk Island, however, was to continue, but was to take in only senior
boys and no girls whatever; its numbers would thus be reduced consid-
erably and special attention could then be given to individuals and
special facilities aiforded for the training of ordinands. Under these
conditions it is obvious that the Bishop would have to intrust the head
of the Norfolk Island school with considerable powers. But a prece-
dent might have been found for this in the fact that Bishop Patteson
had previously entertained the idea of locating himself in Fiji in order
to conduct work among the Melanesian laborers there and of intrusting
to others the care of St. Barnabas; Bishop J. R. Selwyn, also, proposed
leaving Dr. Codrington in charge at St. Barnabas, so that he himself
might be free to build up the lives of the Christians in the islands.

The intention at the beginning of the episcopate of Bishop Wood was
to modify the original plan of work by providing that the missionaries
and the Bishop look upon the islands as their main field of operations
and should definitely make their home in the islands, but that the chief
training-school should be away from the islands, i. ^., that the original
plan should still stand in part. But in the light both of the failure of
the situation of the school (in a temperate climate) to affect materially
the mental or spiritual vigor of the scholars as was hoped, and also
having in consideration the undoubted fact that a school to serve the
same purposes could easily be established in these days in the Solo-
mons or in the New Hebrides, one can but think that the Norfolk
Island school might well be closed altogether. The Presbyterians have
their college on Tangoa in the New Hebrides and the Anglicans in
Papua have theirs at Dogura, and both of these colleges can turn out
teachers every bit as capable of doing their work as the Melanesian
teachers from Norfolk Island are for doing theirs.

Possibly it was thought that to close St. Barnabas altogether would
entail the running counter to a vast amount of sentiment, and even if
the closing of it could be shown to be likely to effect a saving financially
considerations of sentiment seemed likely to rule out the project as
impossible or as unwise. One remembers that there was some talk a
few years ago of making Sydney the headquarters for the ship, but inas-
much as the doing of this would have involved the changing of the
business headquarters also (and these have been in Auckland from the
start), it was deemed inadvisable to make any change. Sydney, how-
ever, is the metropolis for the Pacific and caters specially for the island
trade, and there is no doubt that the trade requirements of the Mission
would have been more easily satisfied and a saving in price would also
have been effected by dealing in Sydney; but old associations carried
the day. The history of the monetary contributions to the mission in
New Zealand shows, however, that propinquity to and constant asso-
ciation with the Mission and its work are not the all-important factors
in determining the amount of money likely to be subscribed in a place.
The Auckland diocese used to be far ahead of all the other dioceses

206 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION.

in New Zealand in its support of the Melanesian Mission, but of late
years Christchurch has bran a considerable rival to it. Possibly even
a change of the headquarters of the ship to Sydney would not have
affected New Zealand contributions over much.

It can hardly be said that the Mission has any explicit or definite
policy with regard to the requirements of the life of its missionaries in
the islands, i. e.^ in the matter of food, diet, care of the body, medicine,
clothing, housing, learning of the local language, treatment of natives,
method of propagation of Christianity. In the old days the newcomer
did certainly get impregnated with the atmosphere of the Mission by
living at Norfolk Island; he learned the lingai (a Mota word meaning
*^use'') of the Mission, but nowadays newcomers go straight to their
work in the islands and have to learn the lingai of the Mission as best
they can. It would seem that there never has been any definite policy
with regard to these matters; a man on being put down in the olil days
in charge of a particular place was left there quite alone and presumably
was expected to know how to live his life without warning or direction.
When Bishop Wilson at the outset of his work directed attention to
the need of a set of directions and instructions for managing a whale-
boat the opinion which found favor among the staff was that it was best
to let a man learn by experience. And the question of linguistics was
treated much in the same way — every man was supposed to pick up the
language spoken in his particular district. The learning of Mota was a
fairly simple problem, owing to the many books that were translated
into it (the Mota dictionary was not published till 1896), but it was
quite a different matter when faced with an unknown tongue which one
was supposed to learn, while at the same time no help or directions
were provided towards enabling one to set about the study of it.

The common use of Mota tended, moreover, to cause a depreciation
in the estimate of the value of the other languages of the Mission.
Mota was the language and the enlightenment or the importance of a
place was measured at times by the ability or otherwise of its people to
speak Mota. The unquestioned usefulness and the predominance of
Mota tended to put all the other languages into the background and
had a prejudicial effect on the study of them. Britishers as a rule are
inclined possibly to treat sets of instructions as unnecessary and grand-
motherly, and the non-provision of the missionaries of the Melanesian
Mission with the best wisdom of the day with regard to the needs of
their life was due in the first place to this dislike of being ordered about
and of having to live according to rule and of assimilating their ideas
to a set of formal conditions, and in the second place was the direct con-
sequence of the old view that the life of the missionaries in the islands
was an incidental break in the regular round of duties at Norfolk Island.

A. Recruiting Boat at a Market in Malaita. The Wof

to exchange their Fish (or Garden Produce.

B. Women Traders, etc. Malaita.

"YACHTING" IN MELANESIA.

It did not need the mistake of a clerk in drawing out the letters
patent of Bishop G. A. Selwyn's commission to act as bishop from lat.
50^ S. to 34^ N. (i. e.^ from the Auckland Islands to the Carolines) to
direct the Bishop's attention to the islands of Melanesia. In 1847,
when Selwyn first went to Melanesia, Fiji had already been partially
Christianized^ Tonga and Samoa were practically Christian, the French
were beginning to occupy New Caledonia, and the London Missionary
Society had Rarotongan teachers in the southern New Hebrides and
the Loyalties; John Williams had been murdered in Erromango, and
a French Roman Catholic bishop had been killed at Ysabel, Solomon
Islands. Selwyn wrote in 1849:

"While I have been sleeping in my bed in New Zealand, these islands,
the Isle of Pines, New Caledonia, New Hebrides, New Ireland, New Britain,
New Guinea, the Loyalty Islands, the Kingsmills, etc., have been riddled
through and through by the whale-fishers and traders of the South Sea.
That odious black slug the beche-de-mer has been dragged out of its hole
in every coral reef to make black broth for Chinese mandarins, while I,
like a worse black slug as I am, have left the world all its field of mischief
to itself. The same daring men have robbed every one of these islands of
its sandalwood to furnish mcense for the idolatrous worship of the Chinese
temples, before I have taught a single islander to oiFer up his sacrifice of
prayer to the true and only God. r)ven a mere Sydney speculator could
mduce nearly a hundred men to sail in his ships to Sydney to keep his flocks
and herds, before I, to whom the Chief Shepherd has given commandment
to seek out His sheep that are scattered over a thousand isles, have sought
out or found out so much as one of those which have strayed or are lost.'

Selwyn first reached New Zealand in 1842 and five years later his
great mind and his godly strength and endurance prompted him to
join H. M. S. Dido as acting chaplain on a voyage to Tonga and Samoa
and to the southern New Hebrides and the Isle of Pines. It was at
this last place that he saw a sandalwood trader. Captain Paddon,
living in perfect security among a people credited with every evil
passion and with a name for extreme treachery and cunning. Cap-
tain Paddon ascribed his safety to just and straight dealing, and the
Bishop at once saw the value of this lesson and called Paddon his
tutor. Just dealing seldom fails to commend itself to natives, but
the Melanesian Mission had sad cause later on to know that disin-
terested conduct and the best of motives will not avail against out-
raged feelings or superstitious beliefs or even against the involuntary
breaking of a tabu or a going contrary to some established practice
of native etiquette.

On August I, 1849, Selwyn sailed from Auckland in his own college
schooner, the Undine y for New Caledonia and the New Hebrides, and

207

208 "yachting" in MELANESIA.

thus began what his detractors in New Zealand called his "yachting
cruises." The Undine was a fore-and-aft schooner of 21 tons, and a
square sail could be hoisted on the foremast when the wind was aft.
The Bishop had already made several trips round New Zealand in this
little vessel with Champion zs master. In his later years Champion
lived on Norfolk Island, and during my occupation of the chaplaincy
of the island I had many opportunities of converse with the old man.
He was naturally full of stories about the Bishop and his prowess. One
story was told to his own detriment. On one occasion, when about to
leave Auckland for Wellington, the Bishop on coming aboard found his
captain drunk. He promptly put him below, shut the hatch, got sails

set, and then took the wheel all night and navigated the ship past the
many islets into open water. In the morning the Bishop opened the
hatch and called out, "Champion, are you sober?" "Yes, my lord!"
replied Champion, "Then come up and take the wheel while I sleep."
On Selwyn's first voyage to Melanesia he had, of course, no modern
charts to go by; all that he had were some old Russian and Spanish
charts, the latter being 300 years old. Champion, at my request, made
a model of the Undine and presented it to the Mission; it is now in the
museum at Norfolk Island. The discomforts of life on a 20-ton schooner
in the tropics must have been very great, and in addition the Bishop's
cabin was often occupied with sick and ailing natives. The fare on
board was doubtless composed mainly of "bully" beef and hard bis-

"yachting'' in MELANESIA. 209

cuitSy but one is inclined to think that the following story, if true, shows
hardness run to the death. The Bishop had called in at Norfolk
Island and on Sunday a roast turkey appeared on the table. The cook
was called and was asked by the Bishop where he got the turkey.
''Norfolk Island, my lord/' he replied. Then said the Bishop, ''Have
you got no salt beef on board ? Heave that thing over the side.''

Perhaps the most marvelous feat of endurance on the part of
Bishop Selwyn was the compilation, while at sea in the Undine on the
Melanesian trips, of his "Verbal Analysis of the Bible," which was
intended to facilitate the translation of the Scriptures into foreign
languages. Of this work it may be said that the scope of it is as
yet too great for our present standards of scholarship. We are too
parochial and confined in our thoughts, our efforts are too small and
insignificant, our horizon is always so limited, and our efforts are too
puny to allow us to work on such broad and comprehensive lines as
the Bishop suggests. The greatness of his ideas fairly makes us stagger,
so accustomed are we to puddling along in our own little comers.

The book had a twofold object; it was intended to act as a manu-
script note-book to assist in the translations of the Scriptures, and also
to provide a complete course of annual instruction on the whole subject-
matter of the Bible. AH the words of the Bible can be classified under
less than 250 heads, and these are arranged alphabetically in the
analysis, and provision is made for 60 subheadings in each case. Ref-
erences are given showing where each word occurs, either in the Old
or in the New Testament. The book is so arranged as to supply a
course of annual lessons on the Bible for every Sunday in the year and
two or more of a less strictly religious character for every week* These
are to be used for spelling and reading lessons, then with the references
as lessons on the words of the Bible, then as the heads of catechetical
instruction. The missionary is to write down in one of the columns
the native equivalents for the various English words, thus enabling him
to gain an accurate knowledge of the language of the people among
whom he is working, so that the translations may be idiomatic and accu-
rate, and so that as full and complete a list of words may be compiled
as the language affords. With the assistance of others the Bishop
hoped to expand the book into a complete polyglot dictionary of all
languages and a universal cipher for international communication.
And all the manuscript was prepared in the cabin of a 20-ton schooner
in the tropics! A veritable triumph of mind and spirit over matter I

Bishop Selwyn 's powers of body were equally on as large a scale as
those of his mind. His feat of diving and examining the copper sheath-
ing on the bottom of the Undine^ after she had been aground on a reef
at Noumea, well merited the generous applause of the British and
French men-of-war's men anchored near by.

2IO "yachting** in MELANESIA.

The mission carpenter at Norfolk Island told me a story illustrating
the general opinion held in Auckland as to the Bishop's ability to box.
During the time of the Maori war a man-of<-war's man and a marine
were fighting in Queen Street when the Bishop happened to be passing
by. An onlooker said to Kendall, the carpenter, "Do you see those
two fellows fighting ? Well, there goes someone who could take it out
of the two of them with one hand I " Kendall pretended ignorance and
asked who was meant, "Why, the Bishop of course," said the other.
Champion, of the Undine^ used to recount how at Tanna, where the
Bishop went first in 1849, a native came off and proceeded to air his
knowledge of English, which was mostly of a blasphemous and filthy
nature. The Bishop ordered the man to leave the ship and on his
refusal bundled him over the side into the water. The man swam
ashore and joined a group on the beach, and then the Bishop told
Champion to lower the dinghy. " But, my lord,'' protested Champion,
"surely you are not going to venture on shore." "Lower the dinghy"
was the order. The Bishop then got into it and sculled himself to
shore.

Selwyn's lack of conventionality and his indifference to what is
generally regarded as the convmancfs of his position and his desire to
get on with what he had in hand are well exemplified by the story of his
carrying ashore from the ship the boxes of his chaplain, who had just
arrived from England, and in later years we read of Selwyn himself
superintending the recoppering of the mission ship at Kawau.

One result of Bishop Selwyn's first voyage to Melanesia in the
Undine was that he obtained five native boys whom he took up to
Auckland and thus practically started the Melanesian Mission. In the
following year a voyage was made to the same islands again and Tanna
also was visited. Some Anaiteum people were returned from Tanna
and owing to heavy weather the crossing took two days, and the
Undins had 35 people on board all that time.

In 1 85 1 the Undine was replaced by the Border Maidy a schooner
of 100 tons and costing £1,200, the money being subscribed in Sydney
and Newcastle. The support of the ship was guaranteed in Sydney
and by the Eton Association for helping the Melanesian Mission, and
ever since then Eton has nobly done its duty by the Mission year after
year. The founding of the Australian Board of Missions was another
of the results of Selwyn's visit to Sydney that year. The Bishop
lamented the passing of the little Undine^ which had carried him so
well over 24,000 miles of sea.

In company with Bishop Tyrrell of Newcastle, a voyage was made
in the Border Maid to the southern New Hebrides, to New Caledonia,
to Santa Cruz, and to the Solomons. At Malekula in the New Hebrides
the whole ship's company were in serious peril of their lives. Bishop

"yachting" in MELANESIA. 211

Selwyn being on shore filling water-casks and Bishop Tyrrell minding
the ship. Stones were thrown and arrows were shot> but the calmness
of the whole party undoubtedly saved them from being massacred.

The Border Maid was found to be defective in gear and sails and
was sold the next year. The natives who had been brought up to
Auckland in her were taken to Sydney and were returned to their
homes in a chartered brig named Gratitude. A voyage was made in
the brig Victoria in 1853 as far as Norfolk Island and the Loyalties,
the Bishop being accompanied by the governor of New Zealand, Sir
George Gray. Thus Bishop Selwyn completed seven voyages to Mel-
anesia. Anyone who has visited the islands of Melanesia and has
had experience with the tropical heat and the wet and muggy atmos-
phere, would hardly say that he had been on a '' yachting cruise'';
and when one considers the smallness of the Undine and the confined
space in which the Bishop and his passengers lived, and their sen-
sations in being hove-to in the tropics for 48 hours during a hurricane,
their food salt beef or pork and biscuits, one marvels at the courage
and determination and endurance of this great hero. There were not
wanting those who viewed with great disfavor the Bishop's missionary
voyages; he was frequently told that he had plenty to do at home
without taking up this new work; but who can dictate to a St. Paul?
The fruit of the Bishop's devoted labor is seen to-day in the great
missionary diocese of Melanesia.

When Selwyn visited a strange place his habit was to jump out from
his whaleboat when 10 to 20 yards from the shore, and then to wade or
swim to the beach; on his shoulders he strapped numerous presents,
consisting of tomahawks, fish-hooks, handkerchiefs, prints, red tape.
To the people who stood awaiting him on the beach he gave presents;
he wrote do¥m any names of people that he could obtain (how did he
keep his notebook dry?), and made lists of words for future use. He
bought their yams or coconuts and established friendly relations
with them. In some places he produced one of the native boys who
accompanied him and used him as a tame decoy, hoping to get a lad to
accompany him. The Sydney Bulletin pictures to-day of missionaries
in top hats and frock coats are at least 50 years behind the times. It
was a common report in the Mission and it is an indisputable fact that
both Selwyn and Patteson often went ashore in such regimentals,
though we of to-day wonder how they managed to endure them. In
my missionary play ^'Darkness and Dawn" I had represented Bishop
Patteson as thus attired, but rather than seem to give countenance to
the Bulletin idea I changed the dress. Bishop Wilson, on looking up
his diary, wrote me that George Sarawia, Bishop Patteson's deacon,
had informed him that he recollected the Bishop so dressed when he
first saw him in the islands. The London Missionary Society also

212 "yachting" in MELANESIA.

has pictures showing John Williams at Eromanga clad in silk hat and
frock coat. The modem missionary's dress is of a peculiarly non-
descript character. One remembers visiting a man-of-war in the
Solomons and looking rather like a beachcomber than a mission priest,
a battered straw hat, no coat, shirt torn, skin burned as brown as any
native's, white trousers the worse for wear, and no boots on simply
because there were none to put on; all were worn out with the rough
travelling. We had just returned from a trip round Malaita (240
miles) in a whaleboat.

Some of the most pleasant natives one has known have been pro-
fessional murderers, men who made their money by killing; they quite
appreciate the value of Christian work among their neighbors. Most
of the popular ideas as to cannibalism take their origin from descrip-
tions of old Fijian habits or in a measure from the present-day prac-
tices of certain African peoples, but cannibalism was never universal
in Melanesia; in many of the islands, and even in parts of islands where
it is known to be practiced, it is regarded with great abhorrence. Those
of them who do eat human flesh eat it as a matter of course, associate
it with no superstitious rites or ceremonies, and simply eat it because
they learned the pracrice from their forefathers. The good old idea
of the lurking savage going about with his chops watering, seekingwhom
he may devour, has no foundation in fact, and all writers of fiction have
in the main abandoned it now under the light of ethnological research
and with a better knowledge of the habits and customs of people. It
may safely be said that the natives in Melanesia do not kill men purely
for the sake of eating their flesh. Stories of ogres are common enough
in the islands, men and women who have developed an inordinate taste
for human flesh, but the ordinary native in a cannibalistic district makes
no distinction between human flesh and pork; it is simply flesh meat.

The first Southern Cross of the Mission was built at Blackwall by
Wigram's. She was a schooner of 65 tons. Miss Yonge had sug*
gested, when Bishop Selwyn visited England in 1853, that funds should
be raised for a ship among the readers of ''The Heir of Reddyffe,'*
then just published. Mrs. Keble and some friends raised the required
sum and gave it to the Bishop. The Southern Cross sailed in 1854
from London on the same day that Selwyn and Patteson left England
in the Duke of Portland. On arrival in New Zealand the ship was
utilized for a trip to the South Island, and in 1856 Patteson made his
first voyage to Melanesia in company with the Bishop. After the
wreck of this vessel in i860 on the Hen and Chickens, the schooner
Zillah was chartered for the Melanesian voyages. She was slow and
unsuitable, after the smart and speedy and comfortable(0 Southern
CrosSf and Patteson said that she was guiltless of making 2 miles an
hour to windward in a wind.

"yachting" in MELANESIA. 213

The year of Bishop Patteson's consecration the Durudin, a vessel of
60 tons, was chartered. She was characterized as slow but sound. On
all these ships the missionaries' practice was to have classes for the
natives, and as in Patteson's time these classes were conducted in
several languages which he alone knew, his time must have been well
occupied. The principle on which he worked was that ''to teach
Christianity a man must know the language well." Certainly it is
easy enough to acquire a few words and phrases, but in order to teach
and to drive truths home a good, solid, idiomatic knowledge of a lan-
guage is required. During this same year Patteson made a voyage to
the Solomons in H. M. S. Cordelia and greatly appreciated the comfort
of his new surroundings. He made a landing on Ysabel, where he
acquired a list of 200 words and phrases. The Bishop's practice
ever was to leave his boat's crew and go ashore wading or swimming.
Patteson and Selwyn were both good swimmers, and it surely requires
some skill to swim with a bundle of hatchets and adzes tied to one's
shoulders. We read of Bishop Selwyn swimming out in a surf at
Omba and of Patteson spending two days and a night in the Banks
Group in an open boat in rain and wind riding to an anchor. If
sailors do things of this sort we marvel at their intrepid behavior,
but how much greater is it when men delicately reared act thus in the
performance of their duty for Christ's sake I We heard also of a mission
priest last year in the Solomons who left an island at daybreak and after
continuous rowing against wind and tide reached his destination the
following night. And what shall we say of Dr. Welchman joume}ring
across from Bugotu to Guadalcanar, 60 miles in an open boat, to visit
the sick, and then returning the same way? ''The noble love of Jesus
impels a man to do great things."

While waiting for the second Southern Cross the schooner Sea
Breeze was chartered in 1862, and the following year the new Mission
ship arrived under the charge of Captain Tilly, who had been navigat-
ing lieutenant on the Cordelia and had volunteered to join Pattesoiu
In later years we remember Captain Tilly as the Mission's secretary in
Auckland. The second Southern Cross was a yawl-rigged brigantine
of 93 tons and was also built at Wigram's. Her cost was £3,000, a large
portion of which was contributed by Mr. Keble. Surely if Keble Col-
lege realized the part Mr. Keble played in forwarding the work of the
Melanesian Mission, some of their men would consider it their duty to
volunteer for service in that Mission.

No steward was carried on the Mission ship and the missionaries
waited on themselves until some of the native boys volunteered to
help. This was ever Patteson's way, and Selwyn's too; they were
quite ready to do all the work and rather preferred to stir up and
quicken their boys into helpfulness by letting the idea sink into their

214 "yachting" in MELANESIA.

minds than to cause them to help through being commanded to do
so; but this, of course, presupposes the working of a good deal of
spiritual force in the mind of the natives, and one has to remember that
a bishop or a person in high authority will often get attention shown
him when an ordinary person may easily be passed over. A judicious
mingling of the power of example and of the assertion of authority
would seem to meet the case. If anything, the Mission, in following the
practice of its great leaders, has somewhat failed to exercise the rights
of its position, in trusting that the nadves would themselves see and
realize their duty by their spiritual fathers.

Before Tilly's time the Bishop used to see to all the provisioning of
the ship for the voyages, hired the seamen, kept all the accounts, and
frequently was responsible for the navigation. O temporal O mores!
We latter-day missionaries, when clearing from Norfolk Island, so far
from attending to navigation, cared little in our agony which way the
ship's head was pointed. What lively times we used to have: a ship
full of natives, boys and girls, the decks cumbered with livestock, the
hold, the cabins, the natives' quarters filled with stores and with lug^
gage. There was often no available space for the boys to lie down in;
the 'tween decks was littered up with boxes, tables, furniture, packages,
all piled one on top of the other. Lucky was the boy who could curl up
on the underside of a table stowed upside down. Some people seem
to fancy that Melanesians never suffer from the same ailments that
Europeans do, are never seasick, never get malaria, etc. There is an
equally prevalent belief that natives do not mind the sun's rays at sea,
and also that they have no objection to getting wet with salt water,
whereas when a spray comes on board they instinctively try to dodge it;
possibly this is owing to their objection to having the salt dry on the
bare skin; and also they will always congregate when possible under
the shadow of the sail to avoid the sun. In rain natives start shivering
and their teeth begin to chatter long before a white man shows any
signs of feeling cold.

Between Norfolk Island and the tropic one generally expected to
have a bad time on the Southern Cross. The weather was often very
rough, with a cross sea running, and then everjrthing started rolling
about. The 8-pound tins of meat stored in the lockers in the cabin
would often be shot violently from one side to the other; the book-
case door would threaten to break loose from its hinges, tumblers fell
off the stand and were broken to pieces, lamps and doors swung wildly
about with the rolling of the vessel, an occasional wave would dash
into the side cabins, and to shut the doors meant suffocation. The
bunks were arranged on both sides of the cabin, and where the ship
was over full some luckless wight had to camp on the settee, and his
experiences at night in a gale were somewhat exciting. As often as not

"yachting** in MELANESIA. 21$

one of the bunks was occupied by some boy who was being taken home
ill. But the crown of it all was making up the teachers' pay in the
store-room, commonly known as "the sweat-box/' the temperature
between 95^ and ioo% no air, a rolling ship, and the smell of the bilge
water over all.

The old Southern Cross had no bath and we hailed with delight a
chance -^f standing under the rush of water that came off the deck-
house in a .shower. Tradition says that Bishop John Selwyn used to
get them to turn the salt-water hose on him when they were washing
down the decks.

Captain Tilly resigned in 1870 and Captain Jacob succeeded him
and was in charge of the ship at the time of the Bishop's murder. The
third Southern Cross was built in 1874 and Bongard was her captain
from 1875 till she was sold. Bongard was the mate who took in the
boat at Nukapu and picked up the Bishop's body. He had previously
been mate on Henry Kingsley's yacht. The new ship was built in
Auckland, a noted place for building good schooners. She was a three-
masted topsail schooner of 180 tons, with a 24 horse-power auxiliary
engine; her cost was about £5,000, of which £2,000 came from the Pat-
teson Memorial Fund of the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel.
After she was sold she was renamed Ysabel and was noted for her fast
sailing.

The fourth Southern Cross served from 1891 to 1903. She was
built at Wyvenhoe in Essex by a noted yacht-builder, a friend of
Bishop Selwyn's. Her cost was £9,000 and Bishop Selwyn and his
friends contributed the money. In rig she was a three-masted fore-
and-aft schooner with yards on the foremast, and still bearing her old
name she is in the timber trade from Hobart to Melbourne and may
often be seen in the Yarra just below Queen's Bridge. Her present
owner speaks well of her sailing powers, but oh, when on her how one
longed to be elsewhere! Her sail area was much reduced after she
reached New Zealand, owing to a fear that the hull would not stand
the strain, and this reduction in driving force, together with the drag
of the propeller, made it very difficult to keep her well up when tacking.
In 1901 the Bishop asked me to go to Tikopia in the ship from Mota, a
distance of about 100 miles. On a previous voyage we had done the
same journey in 17 hours; this second time we left on Monday about
noon in a heavy swell; when Tuesday dawned we sighted the island
a long way to windward and at noon we were 20 miles to leeward of it,
and it was 10 a. m. the next day before we landed. It was always a
struggle to get from the Solomons to Santa Cruz, and sometimes it
took the better part of a week, but the last stretch of 600 miles from
Vila to Norfolk Island was a veritable sea of growls. It was generally
a case of making less than 100 miles a day tacking against the south-

2l6 "yachting in MELANESIA.

east trade-wind, and on one occasion we actually made a minus quantity
in the 24 hours* run, so far as actual mileage was concerned, though we
were in a better strategic position for getting south. Coming from the
hot tropics, we felt the cold; our blood was thin and malaria insistent;
supplies were apt to run short and we were perchance but poor expo-
nents of Christian or even of Spartan fortitude. Captain Bongard
remained in charge of the ship till 1897, and then he was succeeded by
the mate, Mr. Huggett, a very old servant of the Mission, whom Mr.
Hammond eventually succeeded.

The present Southern Cross arrived in 1903. Originally she had sail
power as well as steam, but the sails were taken off and the masts
reduced in number and size. Her tonnage is 500, her speed 12 knots,
and she cost £21,000. Captain Sinker commanded her for nearly
ten years and wrote a descriptive account of his first voyage to the
islands, which is entitled, ** By Reef and Shoal. ''

A. Sea-going Canoe, Malaita.

B. Model of Canoe used (or Bonito Fishing, Ulawa.

C. Matema, Reef Group.

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

The first laborers imported into Queensland from the Pacific Islands
arrived there in the year i864. They were imported by Captain
Towns, of Brisbane, for work on the cotton plantations. In 1847
certain pastoralists of New South Wales had requisitioned ships to
procure natives from the islands for employment as shepherds and
drovers. Two ships were employed, the brig Portania and the schooner
Velocity y and their object was described as "trading for cannibals,*'
and when the so-called cannibals could not be obtained by fair means
they were to be taken by force. These two ships called first at the
Loyalties and obtained 30 men, who were far from being cannibals
and who certainly had not the least idea of the agreement under which
they were supposed to serve, but thought they were out on a pleasure
trip to see the world. They next procured men from the Gilberts and
Kingsmills and then made for Rotuma, where the Loyalty Islanders
absconded. An affray followed, during which the whites fired on the
natives, and one native was killed and two whites. Thus early was
that traffic begun which was to lead to the death of so many men,
both white and brown.

In 1867 there were taken to Queensland, for a period of three years,
382 narives, but only 78 of them returned. From this year till the
end of 1 890 there was a constant stream of native laborers flowing to
Queensland from the islands. Then for a few months the trade ceased,
owing to legislarion passed in 1885, but it was revived in the following
year for a period of ten years. In 1901 provision was made for its
complete suppression and all the natives were ordered to be deported
by December 1906.

The trade has generally been called the "Polynesian labor trade"
or the ''Pacific Islands labor trade," and the laborers have been
known as Polynesians or Kanakas, or occasionally as Papuans, but
never once by their real name of Melanesians. The western Pacific
has suffered from the fact of its late development and from the inhos-
pitable character of its natives. The eastern Pacific, Polynesia
proper, was well known to white people early in the nineteenth century
and the hospitality of its natives was proverbial, whereas New Guinea
and the islands of Melanesia, though close to Australia, long remained
unexplored and unknown, the ferocity of the people being in a measure
responsible for this. Accordingly everything was measured in white
men's minds by Polynesia. Thus Dr. Codrington had a long fight to
gain a hearing for the Melanesian languages and to convince people
that they were real independent languages and not mere offshoots of
Maori on the one side or of Samoan on the other. In effect he has
triumphantly proved that Melanesian languages are really older than

217

2l8 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

Polynesian and represent a much more primitive method of speech^
and that the Polynesian languages might possibly be described as much-
worn specimens of Melanesian rather than the Melanesian as crude
forms of Polynesian, and one would not be In error in saying that the
key to the study of the Polynesian languages etymologically is found
in the Melanesian languages.

It is curious, however, that these Melanesians in Queensland should
have been described as Kanakas. Kanaka is an Hawaiian word mean-
ing man, and is identical with the Maori tangatUy so the Kanaka labor
trade means really the trade in men. Possibly the use of the word is
reminiscent of the labor trade carried on by the Spaniards from Lima
for laborers in the mines. Numbers of their ships went kidnapping
at the Sandwich Islands and at Samoa, and just as in Melanesia in
later days the labor vessels were known as " men-buying*' or "men-
stealing" ships, so the Hawaiians probably named them "kanaka-
Stealers/' but it is not certain how the Hawaiian word first came to
be used in the trade in the western Pacific.

Polynesians as such were but little recruited for Queensland or Fiji.
In 1894 Bishop Wilson reported on a number of Gilbert Islanders
(Micronesians) who had just been recruited, and in the early years
raids were made on the Polynesians of Uvea in the Loyalties and on
the Micronesians of the Line Islands. The Rotuma people included
in that early raid are Polynesians in geographical situation, but speak
a Melanesian language. Beyond these instances Polynesians as such
seem not to have been recruited at all. However, a few were recruited
from Rennell, an outlying island in the Solomons, and likewise from
Ongtong Java (Lord Howe Island), north of the Solomons, and from
Tikopia. Most of these recruits died and the survivors were returned
to their homes before completing their three years.

To call these Melanesians Papuans, as some of the labor-vessel
captains did, or worse still, as some of the Presbyterian missionaries
in the southern New Hebrides did, is really inexcusable from a lin-
guistic point of view. Everyone in this part of the Pacific ought to
know that the term Papuan is used to describe the peoples of New
Guinea. The word Papua in itself is said to be a Malay word meaning
frizzly or fuzzy and was applied by sea-going Malays to the frizzly-
headed natives of New Guinea, they themselves of course having
straight, long hair. So far, however, as the character of the hair goes,
Melanesians might well be called Papuans. The Melanesian teachers
in the Anglican Mission in Papua to-day are always called South Sea
Islanders — a name imported from Queensland, whence they were
obtained. All the legislation concerning the imported laborers in
Queensland was under the heading of Pacific Islanders or Pacific
island laborers.

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 219

The labor trade may be summed up as having had three stages of
development: (i) open kidnapping; (2) recruiting under conditions
somewhat improved; (3) legitimate recruiting. Vessels of various
sorts had been sailing in the Melanesian islands from about 1840 —
sandalwood traders, whalers, beche-de-mer curers. Of these the
whalers had perhaps been the least unsatisfactory, in that they at any
rate did not murder the natives, though they certainly left terrible
diseases behind them. The crews of two ships engaged in the sandal-
wood trade in 1842 shot down 26 men in one of the southern New
Hebrides and suiFocated others with smoke in a cave.

The regular and systematic exploitation of Melanesians as laborers
in Queensland and Fiji did not begin before 1866-67. ^^ ^^^ latter
year Bishop Patteson wrote:

'^ Reports are rife of a semi-legalized^ slave-trading between the South
Sea Islands and New Caledonia and Fiji. I am told that the government
sanctions natives being brought upon agreement to work for pay, etc., and
passage home in two years. We know the impossibility of maKing contracts
with New Hebrides or Solomon Island natives. It is a mere sham, an
evasion of some law passed, I dare say, without any dishonorable intention
to procure colonial labor. I saw a letter in a Sydney^ paper which spoke
strongly and properly of the necessity of the most stringent rules to pre-
vent the white settlers from injuring the colored men.''

In 1868 Bishop Patteson speaks of the recruiting from Tanna for
Fiji and expresses his fears that natives were being taken under false
pretences owing to the impossibility of the recruiters understanding
the Tanna language, while to talk of making a contract with them was
absurd.

In 1869 it was found that the Noumea and Fiji vessels were using
the Bishop's name in the Banks Group in order to entice people on
board, pretending that they were his emissaries and accounting for
his absence by saying that his ship had been wrecked, or that he had
broken his leg, or had gone to England and had sent them to fetch
natives to him. As yet no force had been used, but the people feared
the recruiters. Certain English-speaking natives were employed as
recruiting agents, and some of these had learned their English with
the Bishop. In regard to this the Bishop wrote:

''In most places where an^ of our youni people happened to be on shore,
they warned their companions against these men, but not always with
success. This is a sad business, and very discreditable to the persons
employed in it, for they must know that they can not control the masters
of the vessels engaged in the trade. They may pass laws as to the treatment
the natives are to receive on the plantations, but they know that the whole
thin^ is dishonest. The natives don't intend or know anything about any
service or labor; they don't know that they will have to work hard. They
are brought away under false pretences, else why tell lies to induce them to
go on board ? I dare say that many young fellows go on board without

220 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

much persuasion. Many causes may be at work to induce them to do so,
e, f.y sickness in the island, quarrels, love of excitement, the spirit of enter-
prise, but if they knew what they were taken for I don't think they would go.*'

The premium offered by the planters, £io to £12 per head, was
quite su£Eicient to tempt some shipmasters to obtain colored labor by
foul means, if fair proved impossible. Accordingly in 1869 and 1870
we begin to read of wholesale kidnapping and of outrageous acts of
violence. Two cases were reported and the captains of naval vessels
seized the schooners Daphne and Challenge on charges of slavery.
However, their zeal for righteousness cost them dearly; the courts
acquitted the accused, and the naval conmianders were indicted by
the owners of the vessels for detention and unlawful seizure, and a bill
of £900 for damages was sent to one of them. It is recorded of the
Challenge that she decoyed natives of the Torres Islands into the hold
by means of gifts, beads, and trinkets; then the hatches were put on
and a boat placed over the hatchway. The natives began to cut a
hole in the ship's side and eventually were allowed to jump overboard
when the ship was 7 miles off the shore. Later on, the schooner
Helen was boarded by officers and was found to have no clearance and
no license, but the fear of the courts had made the naval captains
careful and, though the illegality was plain, all that was done was to
make the master of the Helen sign a statement of the ill^ality of the
proceedings and then the vessel was allowed to proceed. At Vanua
Lava, in the Banks Group, two natives were knocked down into the
hold and were carried to Fiji, and the captain was convicted on a
charge of assault and sentenced to three years' imprisonment, but the
charge of slavery failed.

The most notorious case, however, was that of the brig Carl^ which
left Melbourne in 1871 to recruit for Fiji. When in the New Hebrides
she was overhauled by H. M. S. Rosario and everything seemed to
be quite in order and all straightforward, whereas an awful tragedy
had happened on her a few days previously. In addition to the
English crew there were a number of ''passengers'' on board, and one
of these, a Melbourne doctor, was part owner of the ship. At Paama
they dressed up one man as a missionary and endeavored to obtain
recruits on the plea that they represented the Bishop. As canoes came
round the ship the captain and crew threw pig iron into them and sank
them; then the ''passengers" lowered the boats and picked up the
struggling natives; those who resisted were hit with clubs or with pieces
of iron. In other places they lowered a boat on top of the canoes and
sank them and then picked up the swimmers. The slaves were all
stowed under hatches and an armed guard placed over them. The
murder-lust seems to have maddened the white men and (inflamed
probably with drink) they imagined that the slaves were about to
mutiny and overpower them. Someone fired a shot at the crowd

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 221

below and then the madness broke forth and everyone on deck started
shooting and kept it up all night long. In the morning they made an
armed reconnaissance and found that the whole place was a shambles;
some 50 had been killed outright and blood was flowing everywhere;
16 were badly wounded and 10 slightly. The dead were thrown over-
board and the legs and arms of the badly wounded were tied and they
too went overboard. The doctor is described as a ^'monster in human
shape/' the instigator and ringleader of the atrocities; however, he
turned Queen's evidence and so got oiF scot-free, while the master and
one of the crew were sentenced to death, but the sentence was com-
muted.

In the same year a ship called the Marion Rennie was the scene of
a terrible massacre. She had kidnapped men all over Melanesia,
among them being Itei of Sa'a, who had paddled out to the ship and
was captured, and Amasia of Fuaga near Ataa Bay, north Malaita.
Itei was baptized by me in 1896 and Amasia after returning from Fiji
with a Fijian wife and a son Inia, now a teacher in the Melanesian
Mission, settled at Qai near Cape Astrolabe and shortly afterwards
was killed at Ngore Fou on a trumped-up charge of witchcraft. The
natives on the Marion Rennie mutinied and killed their white captors
and then were left drifting helplessly about at sea. The Tanna men
on board fraternized with the Solomon Islanders and killed and ate
the natives of the other islands. Eventually a man-of-war fell in
with the ship and conveyed her to Fiji.

Four Fijians who had been crew on another ship returned without
their white masters, and told a story of how they had been attacked
by natives of Anuda, Cherry Island, near Tikopia, and the white men
murdered. The Rosario investigated the case and decided that there
was no truth in it; probably the crew had themselves murdered the
whites.

At the island of Florida, in the Solomons, canoes were decoyed under
the stem of the recruiting ship and then boats were lowered on top of
them and the struggling natives captured in the water; those who
resisted had their heads chopped off with a long knife. The ships
that did this sort of thing were purchasing tortoise-shell and were in
league with the head-hunters of the western Solomons. Desire for
trade caused the canoes to put out to the ships, which fairly swarmed
in these years, brigs, schooners, ketches, recruiting mainly for Fiji.
Some of them had no official license to recruit, some had painted out
their names, others had no customs clearance from their last port.
In some cases the men in the canoes were lassoed round the neck from
the ship and were then hauled on board. In other cases the ship was
painted to resemble the Southern Cross and a man in a black coat went
on shore and invited the natives to go on board and see the Bishop.
Four or five years of this recruiting had practically depopulated some

222 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

of the Banks Islands, and to make it worse women had been taken
as well as men, thus opening up an infinite possibility of wrong-doing
and confusion.

Queensland had legislated in 1868, by the ''Pol3mesiau laborers act/'
with a view to prevent kidnapping, and the shipmasters had to enter
into a bond of £500 that they would observe the provisions of the act.
Also, the employers of labor entered into a bond of £10 per laborer to
provide for return passages; this amount was afterwards lowered to £5.
The act of 1868 also provided a form which was to be read in the pres-
ence of any natives who desired to recruit and was to be signed by the
resident missionary of the place, or by a European resident or a chief
interpreter, to the eiFect that the native was recruited for a term of
3 years or 39 moons with wages at £6 per annum and with clothes and
radons prodded, and with supervinon by the Queensland govemmoit
in his sphere of labor. Nothing is stated in this act about the official
government agent who accompanied the ship to supervise the recruit-
ing, although both the Queensland and the Fijian ships seem to have
carried them then. The Queensland act of 1880 provides for the due
appointment of fit and proper persons to be government agents to
accompany the recruiting vessels.

The Imperial Government, in the ^'Pacific Islanders protection
act" of 1872, definitely provided against any repetition of the Daphne
case, wherein naval officers had been sued for damages^ by ordering
that no officer or local authority should be held responsible, either
civilly or criminally, in respect of the seizure or detention of any vessel
suspected of kidnapping, and the act of 1875 provided for the appoint-
ment of a high commissioner for the Pacific.

In the act of 1884 a set of regulations was laid down for the trade
which might be regarded as ideal; firearms and drink were not to be
supplied to the natives; only such firearms were to be carried as were
required for the ship's use; the ships were to be painted a distinguishing
color, light slate with a black streak 6 inches wide running fore and aft,
and were to carry a black ball at the masthead when recruiting. AH
laborers were to be recruited in the presence of the government agent,
and two Europeans, not counting the agent, were to accompany every
boat when ashore recruiting. If an islander deserted after being
recruited he was not to be taken by force or intimidated. Women
were not to be taken without their husbands or without the consent
of their chiefs. All interpreters employed in the trade were to be paid
fixed wages and all bonuses and commissions thus ceased. AU laborers
returned were to be landed at their own ^'passages" unless they them-*
selves expressly desired to be landed elsewhere. The government
agent was given very summary powers, and if the reguUtions were
faithfully carried out the recruiting would be ynexceptionable.

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 223

The Stopping of the practice of giving commissions and the pa}dng
of fixed wages to all concerned must have had a very salutary effect,
but like the rest of the regulations it was easily evaded, as was shown
in the case of the William Manson* This vessel in 1894 entered into
an agreement with Qaisulia, the chief of Adagege, one of the artificial
islets off the northeast coast of Malaita, whereby he was to receive
a boat in payment for ten men recruited. Qaisulia and his braves
violently seized a number of bush natives for his masters on the
William Manson. The evidence as to the kidnapping was conclusive,
but the white men concerned in it were acquitted and the judges
characterized the acquittal as a miscarriage of justice. The value of
the regulation ordering the government agent to supervise the recruit*
ing and of the stipulation that at least two white men accompany the
boats is seen in the contrast presented by the recruiting for Noumea,
where one hears even now of the French boats going ashore manned
by natives only and of cases of violence continually recurring.

The recruiting of women was always a source of trouble in the islands.
Any native for the nonce might pose as a chief and give his permission
for a woman to leave, provided it were made worth his while, and in
most of the Melanesian islands it is difficult to find out who is the
chief, since there are practically no paramount chiefs. However, the
spirit of the regulation was honest enough, for white men always
regard it as a sine qua non that there must be of necessity regular
chiefs in every place. One has frequently known cases where a man
has persuaded a woman to recruit with him, posing as his wife, or vice
versa, and no one in authority on shore was questioned as to their real
status. On returning the pair were in difficulties and violence and
bloodshed ensued. Their only chance of safety would be to land in
a foreign place on the plea of visiting relations.

Before English was well known in the Pacific the spirit of the regu*
lations as to making recruits understand the terms of their engage-^
ment was undoubtedly difficult to carry out. Indeed, even the very
letter of it was at times completely evaded. Pacific Islanders have
no term corresponding to our word year, and cases are known where
recruits were carefully schooled to hold up three fingers and say ^^ three
yam," t. e.y three harvests, yams being planted only once a year.

In 1884 certain Queensland ships went recruiting in the islands off
New Guinea, and several cases of actual kidnapping occurred, and
many gross and violent murders of natives took place. The inter-
preters acted as unscrupulous and uncontrolled recruiting agents and
were rewarded according to, or were promised compensations corre-
sponding with, the number of recruits obtained. According to the
evidence given, men were recruited by these ships in complete ignorance
of what was expected of them; some thought they were going for ** three
moons,*' others "to go to white men's country and walk about,"

224 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

Others ''to go and work on the ship, '' or ''to sail about. " And doubt-
less, even in Melanesia itself, the actual signing of the recruits was
in many cases a mere farce. Men filed by the government agent and
merely touched the tip of the pen he held in his hand, thus in the par-
lance of the trade "marking paper,'' and often with no explanation
whatever as to the matters involved. However, in time these abuses
came to an end, owing to an extended knowledge among the natives
of what were the processes involved.

In later years the regulation that interpreters must be carried on the
ships involved a good deal of heart-burning among the islanders, and
also necessarily entailed the production of a set of first-rate humbugs
as interpreters, men who were cordially detested by the shore people
and who by virtue of their position on the ship gave themselves tre-
mendous airs when ashore, and who were in consequence a menace
to their various neighborhoods. In the later days of the trade, apart
from the special provisions of the act, there was really no need for
the employment of these interpreters, as there were people in every
part who understood English.

The practice grew up of recruits being obtained by means of a present
given to their friends. This was thoroughly in accord with native
ideas and was known in the native tongue everywhere as buying.
Even Bishop Patteson had to do the same thing when he wanted to
obtain boys as scholars, and the Mission has always followed his
practice when dealing with people in Heathen districts.

Recruiting ships were said by the natives to buy their men and in
the Solomons were always known as the "ships that buy men,'' but
in the New Hebrides and Banks Group, where deeds of violence had
been more common, they were known as "thief ships." The giving
of a present when recruiting was connived at by the authorities,
though in itself it would probably have been held to be contrary to
the spirit of the regulations. So long as this present consisted of harm-
less things like tobacco and pipes and fish-hooks and print and axes
and knives, no exception could possibly have been taken to the prac-
tice. In later years gold was frequently given, even as much as £2
or £3 being paid for a recruit. So firmly established was the practice
that if the pay were not given for a recruit, or if it were reserved to
be handed over to him in Queensland, or if a man ran away and got
on board by stealth, and no pay were sent on shore for him, he was said
by the people to have been stolen, and angry feelings were aroused and
reprisals were sure to be made later on. (The English words sell and
pay and even buy are frequently rendered by a single word in the
Melanesian tongues.) Before the annexation of the Solomon Islands
men were frequently bought with rifles. This of course was contrary
to the regulations, but undoubtedly cases of gun-running were con-
stantly occurring in the Solomons and in the New Hebrides.

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 225

Many a native went to Queensland with the express determination to
get a rifle on the expiration of his agreement. No one in Queensland
was allowed to sell rifles to a Kanaka, and yet they purchased them
by the thousands. Snider carbines and Tower rifles abounded in the
islands. The Samoan vessels were reputed to be the worst offenders
with regard to the furnishing of rifles, one being given for every recruit,
and another being brought back by the recruit on his return. All
vessels leaving Queensland for the islands were examined by the
customs officials and were searched for contraband goods, and the
returning laborers were forced to adopt devious means of secreting
their guns and ammunition.

The regulation box given to returns when they were paid off was a
huge affair, 36 by 1 8 inches, and sometimes these were fitted with false
bottoms and carbines were stowed in them, the barrel being cut short
or the stock being taken off. Innocent-looking boxes of Queensland
plants were found to have earth on the top and a layer of cartridges
underneath. During the Government inspection rifles were sunk in
the water butts or stowed away in the sheep pens or even lowered over
the side into the sea. The native crews would always stow away the
rifles for a fee, concealing them on the ship or up aloft, or even under
the ballast. These crews were mostly Tanna men or Loyalty Islanders,
hardened ruffians, most of them grown old in the trade.

When the Ivanhoe was wrecked in Florida the commissioner had
reason to think that the returns had a number of rifles on board, but
a search of the ship revealed nothing. He then went ashore and after
digging about in various places on the beach came across a whole
consignment of rifles buried in the sand. Should the ship's company
be likely to refuse to allow a return to land his rifle in public, a friend
would come out in a canoe by night and the rifle would be lowered
over the side. It was a common practice for returns to bring back
charges of dynamite with fuse and cap all fixed ready for firing.
These were used for dynamiting shoals of fish. Such charges of dyna-
mite have been found stowed away under the ballast next to the ves-
sel's skin. What wonder, then, that vessels like the Sybil and others
have been lost at sea when carrying returned laborers.

All boats going ashore to recruit were armed. The native crew had
rifles slung under canvas covers on the sides of the boat and the white
men carried revolvers and had rifles also. The regulations were that
no boat should go ashore to recruit unless accompanied by a covering
boat. The recruiting boat contained the white recruiter, who was
generally the ship's boatswain or second mate, and two natives; the
covering boat had two white men, one of them the government agent,
and three natives. In the recruiter's boat was the trade box, and at
times murderous attacks were made by the shore people to gain pos-
session of this box. These boats always landed stem first, so as to

226 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

be able to get away quickly in the event of a quarrel on shore. They
turned round just outside the breakers and then backed in. This is
an operation requiring considerable skill, but most of the native
crews had served a long apprenticeship and were very skilful boatmen.
The boats were double-ended and were steered with a long steer-oar
run through a strop.

The govemor-in-council reserved the right of forbidding recruiting
in any certain part. For many years but little recruiting was done
at Santa Cruz; the kidnapping there in the early years had been the
direct cause of the murder of Bishop Patteson, and his death and the
death of Commodore Goodenough, coupled with the known hostile
character of the people, caused the labor ships to give Santa Cruz a
wide berth. Moreover, in the other islands men were comparatively
easy to obtain. However, one or two adventurous spirits tried
recruiting at Santa Cruz and obtained men from the neighborhood of
Graciosa Bay and also in considerable numbers from the Reef Islands.
In the year 1888 there was an abnormal mortality among these Santa
Cruz recruits in Queensland and it was decided to forbid recruiting
there altogether. The poor things frequently died of nostalgia on
their way to Queensland ; they never learned enough English to enable
them to communicate their needs, either to the whites or to men of
their own color. No one besides themselves could talk their language,
so that their lot in Queensland was indeed a hard one. Yet these
laborers were so profitable to the state that in 1893 the regulation for-
bidding recruiting at Santa Cruz was rescinded and more of the people
were taken to the plantations, but with the same sad result. In one
special case, the island of Tongoa in the New Hebrides, the native
chiefs requested that their island be exempt; this was done, but their
young men paddled over to the next island and recruited thete.

There can be no question that the labor trade has contributed very
largely to the depopulation of the islands. We have the witness of
Bishop Patteson, in 1871, that all the Banks Islands, with the exception
of Mota and part of Vanua Lava, were depopulated. Of Mae, in the
New Hebrides, he wrote:

''Nothing can be more deplorable than the state of the island — I counted
in all about 48 people in the village where of old certainly 300 were to be
seen. Noumea, Fiji, Brisbane, Tanna, is in everybody's mouth, muskets
in everyone's hand, and many more in the houses."

A very small percentage of these men ever returned home and many
who did return brought contagious diseases. The possession of rifles
also was an important factor in hastening the decrease of the popu-
lation ever5rwhere. Doubtless in most cases a spear is a far more
deadly weapon in the hands of a Melanesian than a Snider carbine, for
any shot at a moderate distance, but as a rule a native seldom risks a
shot from far off and prefers fairly to scorch his enemy with the powder
of the cartridge, sticking the barrel right up against him.

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 227

Stories are told of men of Malaita wrapping up old pin-fire rifle
cartridges in a bamboo, binding the whole with string, and exploding
the cartridge by striking the pin with a stone or a billet of wood. It
had got to such a pass on Malaita in later years that for a man to be
without a rifle was certain death ; every able-bodied man carried a gun.
Ramofolo, the chief of Fuaga, an artificial islet by Ataa G>yey Malaita,
had a Winchester which he informed me he had taken from a bush
chief after he had stalked and killed him in order to obtain it. At
Sxi' u Malou, near Aio, on the east coast of Malaita, we landed once in the
presence of a great crowd of armed men, and it was only after they had
searched our boat and seen for themselves that there was no weapon
on board that they believed our statement that we did not carry fire-
arms. Their test of being a man was the possession of a rifle.

Queensland was a veritable refuge for wrong-doers in the islands;
murderers, sorcerers, adulterers, wife-stealers, thieves, discontented
wives, rebellious children, all hailed the coming of a labor-vessel as a
chance to be freed from the likelihood of punishment or from the irk-
someness of home restricrions. However, even a residence of 30 years
did not always avail to protect against home vengeance for wrong-
doing, either actual or imaginary, as was seen in the case of Amasia of
Qai, Malaita, who was shot on a charge (probably false) of witchcraft
committed many long years before. Amasia was quite the Fijian
when he returned; he wore his hair and his sulu in the Fijian style and
had notices posted up in his house in Fijian forbidding people to eat
areca nut there, and none of the people of the place could read. One
used to hear of cases where men were landed elsewhere than at their own
homes, owing to a fear of reprisals for some act of wrong-doing which
they had committed and which had led to their recruiting. In due
time the news of their return reached their home and their friends
paid them a visit which would result in a request that they return home,
and all would be overlooked. If the man were persuaded he and the
woman he had stolen would return with the party and probably the
two would be murdered on the road or at the landing-place.

The acquiring of possessions abroad seldom proved of any benefit
to the native on his return. The native law everywhere in the Pacific
is that on returning a voyager shares with his neighbors all that he has
acquired. This is absolutely de rigueur and the man quite expects it
and thinks it natural, and when his turn comes will claim a share
in someone else's things. In Sa'a a return was not allowed to open
his boxes till the chief gave him permission; then so much was stipulated
as the chiefs share and had to be given before any apportioning was
done. In one case the chief claimed the boxes after they were emptied.

The trade in later years was carried on under respectable conditions,
and might seem to have justified the claims of those who extolled it
as a great instrument of moral and physical good to the natives. The
laborers were employed under good conditions in Queensland, were well

228 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

fed, well housed, and well protected from exploitation; their hours of
labor were not too long, they were well cared for when they were sick,
and practically it was their labor that built up the sugar industry of
Queensland. Their value as laborers is evinced by the fact that in
later years the planters paid the shipowners £20 to £25 per head for
all laborers recruited, and also paid the Government a capitation fee
of £3 per head, and deposited £5 per head to cover the cost of the
return passage. Regular food and r^ular employment under decent
conditions made fine men of them physically, and the returns always
compared favorably in physical appearance with the home men. But
there is no question that the Queensland return, except those who
had been at some mission school, was as a rule a person to be avoided;
he had learned something of the white man's ways and had a certain
amount of the externals of civilization, but the old-time respect for
authority had all vanished and its place was taken by a bold, rough
style of address which did not differentiate between a high commis-
sioner or a bishop and a recruiter of a labor vessel* All alike were
hailed by him as mate and all would be asked for tobacco. In effect
he had lost the charm of the natural state.

Bishop Patteson stated in 1871 that these returns bore a bad char-
acter among their own people and were the ringleaders in wrong-doing.
The general average of morality among the natives seems to have been
lowered by their Queensland experiences. Those who went away
undoubtedly improved in their physical condition, yet this was a poor
compensation for the loss of their old Heathen surroundings with the
air of mystery, and the time-honored etiquette and good manners
belonging to them, and with nothing whatever to replace the loss, no
new set of rules learned, no new motive provided for their lives, no new
code of morals taught, no new outlook given, no new measure of man-
kind impressed upon them by their residence in Queensland other
than that of physical prowess and the mere gaining of money or the
eating of food of a different character. The returns from Fiji were
often improved by their stay in civilization, and this was mainly owing
to the fact that they had either been employed as house servants in
good families or had merely changed one set of native conditions for
another — ^living on a plantation and learning Fijian or mixing almost
entirely with natives and learning but little English. Practically they
still were natives instead of being bad copies of a certain class of whites.

A very great number of lives have been lost in and owing to the
labor trade. The death of Bishop Patteson is an instance of the
terrible result that may follow when men are determined to make
money by acts of treachery to humanity or in defiance of the ordinary
laws of hospitality. Peaceful traders have been assaulted, mission-
aries have been killed, the boats of labor vessels have been attacked
and the men in them killed. All these facts can be directly traced to

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 229

some connection with the labor trade, to wrongs done to natives in
Queensland, to judicial punishment for crime committed, to the
abduction or the recruiting of a man's relations, to their deaths or
prolonged absences away from home and in the white man's country.
In addition to these a desire to gain glory and reputation, the death of
a chief or of some favorite child, zny one of these may be the motive
that leads to an attack upon a white man; many sudden and seemingly
unprovoked attacks on a labor vessel's boats were caused by the mere
fact of their recruiting women.

Bishop Patteson was quite of the opinion that Melanesian natives
as a general rule would respect whites and would not treacherously
make attacks on them, but allowances have to be made for the require-
ments of the Heathen superstition and for the peculiar workings of the
native mind and to the feelings of revenge. But Melanesians generally
give short shrift to shipwrecked people and to strangers who come among
them in a helpless plight. In 1867 a crew of English sailors from a
whaleboat landed at Maanaoba, an island on the northeast coast of
Malaita. They had deserted from their ship in the Kingsmill Islands
and had been drifting for weeks. Only one of the crew, a boy named
Renton, was allowed to survive; the rest were killed. A chief called
Kabau saved Renton and took him across to the mainland, where he
lived for eight years. Ships passed in the interval, but he could not com-
municate with them; however, a labor vessel, the Bobtail Nag^ anchored
near and he was able to send oiF to her a message scrawled on a board,
a fragment of a canoe. This piece of wood is preserved in the Brisbane
Museum. Large presents were given and Renton was rescued.

The accusation of treachery so often brought against Melanesians
has a certain amount of foundation from our point of view. Attacks
have been made by natives on white men merely to satisfy a blood lust
or for purposes of robbery, as in the case of the massacre on board of the
Young Dick at Singerango, Malaita; but it is indisputable that the
white man's behavior to natives in Melanesia has tended to cause an
atmosphere of distrust and dislike, and in most cases is at the bottom
of every attack by the natives. The man Rade, who chopped the
recruiter of the Young Dick at Mapo, southeast Malaita, is reported to
have done so with a view to killing him in revenge for the death of the
Mapo chief in Fiji, but Rade informed me that the man was making
indecent proposals to women; possibly both versions of the matter are
correct. The massacre of the crew of the Dancing Wave^ in Florida, in
1876, was probably caused by a feeling of anger on the part of natives
who had been sent home without any payment of their wages, owing to
the estate on which they were working having passed into the hands of
mortgagees. When due regard is had to the circumstances connected
with the inception of the trade, one can not wonder at the amount of
bloodshed and crime which it produced.

230 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

Before the establishment of local government in the Solomons
British ships of war were employed in punishing any attacks made upon
whites. After the death of Bishop Patteson, H. M. S. Rosario went to
Nukapu to inquire into the causes of his murder. The natives fired
on the ship's boats and the fire was returned both by rifles and by the
ship's guns» but without intending to kill anyone. A party was landed
and the native village was burned to teach the savages to respect white
men. A sailor who was wounded by an arrow afterwards died of
tetanus. The whole incident was unfortunate in that it embittered
the people and made the reopening of Santa Cruz all the harder for the
Mission. The natives of course thought the shooting was connected
with punishment for the death of the Bishop. At Raga, New Hebrides,
the paymaster of the Rosario was attacked and twice clubbed. Shots
were fired from the ship in revenge and four villages were burned, the
idea being that a salutary lesson was being taught to the narives, and in
that the innocent suffered along with the guilty the commander argued
that owners of the burned property would have to get their compensa-
tion out of the guilty ones, as if the act would not have incensed them
all, and a hatred for the whites as a whole would result in consequence
of their burned homes, while they themselves rejoiced over the fact that
no life had been taken among them I

The indiscriminate shooting of shells and burning of villages never
impressed the natives; the only thing they understand in the way of
reprisals is the actual taking of life. Time and again ships of war
fired shells into the bush, some of them entering the very houses, but
due notice had been given and everybody had decamped. At Mapo
one of the shells fired into the bush on the hills was dug out of the earth
and was let into the ground and used as a seat. To fire shells thus into
the bush was certainly an exhibition of power, but the nadve measured
matters otherwise, and it was not long before the power of naval ships
was despised, since they never actually killed anyone as a punishment
for these attacks on the labor-trade vessels.

The last legislation on the labor trade to Queensland was the com-
monwealth act called the '^Pacific Island laborers' act, 1901." No
Melanesians were to enter Queensland after March 31, 1904, and on
December 31, 1906, all agreements were to end and the final deporta-
tion was to begin. Exemptions were granted to any who had been five
years in Queensland before September i, 1884, or who had been in
Australia before September i, 1879, or who had resided in Australia for
20 years previous to December 31, 1906. Also, exemption was granted
to natives who were registered owners of freehold in Queensland or were
married to women not natives of the Pacific Islands, or were suffering
from bodily infirmity or were of extreme age.

The Melanesian Mission never felt it its duty to follow the narives of
these islands to Queensland. Bishop Patteson in 1871 was planning a

THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 23 1

visit to Fiji for the express purpose of devoting himself to the laborers
there; but his death quite put Fiji out of the Mission's thoughts. In
1876 Rev. Edward Wogale went to Fiji and started teaching there, but
stayed only a year or two and no one succeeded him. Bishop John
Selwyn visited Fiji in 1880 and made arrangements for teaching some
of the laborers on Sundays. Dr. Comins and Luke Masuraa visited
Fiji in 1894 ^^^ obtained some excellent teachers who eventually were
responsible for the opening of mission work in the Lau district of north
Malaita. It was not until the first year of Bishop Wilson's episcopate
that any of the authorities visited Queensland with the definite idea of
seeing to the Christian teaching of the Melanesians there. The church
in Queensland as a whole did practically nothing for them, and with the
exception of Mrs. Robinson's excellent school at Mackay and Mrs.
Clayton's at Bundaberg, whatever teaching was given to the Melane-
sian laborers was undenominational and much of it was in the hands of
the Queensland Kanaka Mission, the officials of which were Plymouth
Brethren. In 1896 Rev. P. T. Williams went to Queensland to organize
work there for the Melanesian Mission among the laborers on the Isis>
and Mr. Pritt was also at work on the Herbert River (called by the
Melanesians the Albert River).

The return from Queensland of so great a number of Kanakas, 9^000
in all, was likely to have varied results. The actual Christian element
among them would be sure to affect the Christian life in the Mission
villages. The Heathen element was likely to be a cause of ferment and
excitement and to give considerable trouble, both to their fellows and
also to the whites. There were some who, in their ignorance of native
life, looked for a great material advance in the status of the people of
the islands, owing to the return of so many thousands of men who had
been taught regular habits of industry; others feared that a great out-
break of crime might follow and that endless feuds and desolating
hatreds would be stirred up, and that murders would be rife. The
missionaries themselves were glad that the trade had ceased, but knew
that a great unsettlement of conditions would follow the repatriation.

The work of landing the returns was very well done and all were
landed at their own proper ^^ passages," as the landing-places were
termed. Where possible they were encouraged to attend the Christian
schools. The government station at Tulagi was open to any who feared
to return to their own homes. However, the leavening effect on the
island people as a whole has been practically nil. Even those who
had been most industrious in Queensland made but little attempt to
improve the agricultural methods of their countrymen. For months
after landing none of them, of course, did any work. The condi-
tions were so totally different, the restraint of the plantation life was
relaxed, all competition had ceased, and all that was now required was
to get enough food for the day's needs. Besides, to a man who had

232 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE.

been accustomed for years to a regular diet of beef and bread or
biscuit and sweet potatoes three times a day, the haphazard style of
feeding which the islanders follow was certain to prove upsetting.
If work was to be done in Queensland style, then a great deal more food
must be forthcoming; of yams and taro for planting there never is
an abundance, and though a man might have returned with a good
round sum in gold, yet this would profit him but little if he wanted to
use it to give himself a start in buying stuff to plant. The large colony
of returns at Fiu on Malaita had the greatest difficulty for years to get
enough food to supply their bodily needs.

Sewing-machines and gramophones might have been bought up
cheaply a week or two after the returns had landed. In some cases
sewing-machines were actually abandoned on the beach, for no one
cared to carry them slung on a pole into the interior over razor-back
ridges and up the bed of swollen mountain torrents. Brown boots
and bowler hats and starched shirts and collars and ties were seen
adorning the persons of all and sundry in the neighborhood when the
trade boxes of the returns had been opened. Babies that were brought
ashore in all the glory of woolen socks and bonnets and white clothes
were rolling about naked by nightfall.

The pure Heathen amongst the returns proved generally a menace
to their neighborhoods by opening up old feuds and awakening feelings
of malice and wickedness. Some of them in fact rejoiced in their
reputation as "bad fellow alonga Queensland" and boasted of their
proficiency in evil ways and stated their determination to cause trouble.
The Christians among them, in proportion to their zeal and earnest-
ness, aided the mission work, but in many cases they felt completely
at sea, owing to their having learned their Christianity through the
medium of English and not through their awn tongue, and unless they
were sincere and well instructed, their tendency was to hold aloof
or gradually to absent themselves from the services of the Church.

On the whole it may be said that the results of the repatriation have
caused unrest and lawlessness and increased difficulty in carrying on
any work whatever. The returns expected to buy goods in the traders*
stores at Queensland prices; they demanded Queensland rates of pay,
and both traders and missionaries were faced with labor troubles, and
crude socialistic ideas circulated freely everywhere. In fine, while
as a result of the repatriation, but few murders, comparatively speaking,
were committed and but little suffering or hardship was entailed, yet
the main result was unrest and disturbance, difficulty and confusion.

SANTA CRUZ.

The grave Spaniard Mendana, the discoverer of the Santa Cruz
group, little knew how prophetic was this name of Holy Cross, which,
in his religious zeal, he had bestowed on the island of Ndeni. To-day
memorial crosses stand in Carlisle Bay and in Graciosa Bay on Ndeni,
and on the beach at Nukapu, facing the setting sun.

What a host of memories the name Santa Cruz calls up to the
student of Melanesian history! The ill-fated Spanish admiral Don
Alvaro de Mendaiia, after sailing twice across the Pacific, found his
last home in the bay which he had named Graciosa, on the island of
Ndeni. Three hundred years later the noble-hearted James Good-
enough, commodore of Her Britannic Majesty's squadron on the
Australian Station, met his death at the hands of the natives of Ndeni.
'* Poor Santa Cruz! poor people!" was the exclamation of Edwin Nobbs
and Fisher Young, the faithful Norfolk Island lads in the company of
Bishop Patteson, as they writhed in the agonies of tetanus brought
on by wounds from those terrible Santa Cruz arrows. M ano Wad-
rokal, the native deacon from the Loyalty Islands, the first missionary
to Santa Cruz, braved the fury of these excitable people time and
again in his eiForts to win them for Christ and for peace. Mr. Lister
Kaye's name will go down to posterity as that of the first white man
to Uve on Santa Cruz after Mendaiia and his company. Mr. Forrest
was the next white man to live there and for the whole of his time his
life was constantly in danger. Dr. John Williams was content to
sacrifice his worldly prospects and to devote himself to the healing of
ulcers and the curing of ringworm on Santa Cruz bodies. Mr. O'Fer-
rall and Mr. Nind endured innumerable dangers and perils by waters,
visiting the islands in their whaleboats. The last victim claimed by
Santa Cruz was the mission priest Guy Bury, who died in 191 1 after
a short residence of a few months, the victim not of poisonous arrows,
but of malignant island ulcers.

Forty miles north of Santa Cruz lies the Swallow Group, commonly
called the Reef Islands, and on the smallest of these, Nukapu, there
perished the great mission hero Bishop Patteson. On the island of
Vanikolo, 60 miles south of Santa Cruz, the famous French explorer
La Perouse, who just failed of annexing Australia to the French crown,
was ingloriously cast away.

A brilliant galaxy of names — explorers, sailors, missionaries, admirals,
bishops, priests, deacons — and still to-day Santa Cruz and its neigh-
boring islands are mainly Heathen.

Santa Cruz was discovered and named by Mendaiia in I595f sailing
from Callao in his endeavor to reach again and colonize the isles of
Solomon, which he had himself discovered on a previous voyage in

233

234 SANTA CRUZ.

1566. The night before the expedition sighted land the Almirantay
the fourth ship of the squadron, disappeared, being wrecked possibly
on one of the Reef Islands or on the Duff Group, 95 miles northeast
of Santa Cruz. Mendaiia made a settlement in a bay at the north-
east end of the island, which he named Graciosa Bay. Here the expe-
dition stayed for two months, their ranks being gradually thinned by
disease and by the arrows of the natives. Mendaiia died and was
buried at Santa Cruz. The rest of the company abandoned their
ideas of colonization and set out for Manila, just failing to sight the
Solomons when two days' sail from Santa Cruz.

The Swallow Group was discovered and named by Carteret in 1766
after his ship, the Swallow. The DuflF Group, Taumako, was named
after the mission ship of the London Missionary Society, the Duff^
which sighted them when on a voyage returning from Tahiti in 1797.
The fate of La Perouse was discovered by Dillon, who landed at Van-
ikolo in 1826.

The Santa Cruz Group lies to the east of the Solomons, and the
large island Ndeni, which Mendaiia named Santa Cruz, is 200 miles
from Ulawa and a little less from Santa Anna, the small island at the
southern extremity of San Cristoval. Ndeni is 22 miles long and 10
or 12 miles broad. Like most of the Melanesian islands, there is but
little flat land on it; the center ridge rises to a height of 2,000 feet and
the ridges which offset from it terminate right on the coast. The whole
island is covered with the usual dense vegetation. The climate is
wet and steamy and very trying to Europeans. The average number
of days on which rain falls is probably in excess of the number of rainy
days in the Solomons, which Dr. Guppy reckons as about 180. There
seem to be hardly any bush villages at all, the population living in
large villages on the shore. Graciosa Bay in particular, a deep inden-
tation at the north end, has a large number of populous villages. The
total population may be 8,000, but numbers died of dysentery in 191 5.

Agriculture is followed to some extent, yams, and what are known
in the Solomons as "pana,*' being grown. The "pana" is a yam that
has a prickly vine. Coconuts are comparatively few in number, but
Santa Cruz is renowned for its large canarium nut (almond). These
are smoked and preserved in leg-of-mutton-shaped baskets plaited
out of a coconut leaf. These baskets of nuts are brought off to the
ships for trade, but the Cruzians are quite capable of filling them with
rubbish and then palming them off on the unwary.

The weapons of the peoples in all the islands of the group are bows
and arrows. The bow is made of very tough wood, is of great
length, and exceedingly hard to bend. The bowstring is twisted out
of fiber made from the bark of a garden tree which in Ulawa is called
su^a. The su*a tree has berries of the size and appearance of coffee
berries. These are boiled in wooden bowls by means of placing hot

SANTA CRUZ. 235

Stones in the bowls and are esteemed a great relish. The young shoots
of the su^a are eaten as spinach, and so are the catkins of the male
tree. Fishing-lines are made from the same bark, and some of the
lines are strong enough to hold a shark. They are coated with a
preparation made from the inner skin of the casuarina.

The arrows of Santa Cruz are much to be dreaded. Dr. Codrington
writes that they are uniformly 4 feet long and weigh about 2 ounces.
The bone point is 7 inches long and the foreshaft (of hardwood curi-
ously carved and colored) is 16 inches long. The bone head (human
bone) is covered with a preparation of vegetable ashes which is
supposed to give great supernatural power. The common result of a
wound from any of these arrows is certainly tetanus. However, it
is quite certain that no vegetable poisons are consciously used in the
preparation of the arrows, but all the preparation is done while charms
are being said to fasten supernatural qualities on the arrow. What
the native seeks for is an arrow which shall have mana to hurt. The
truth of the matter seems to be that while the arrows are poisonous^
they are not deliberately poisoned. A punctured wound in the tropics
may easily be followed by tetanus, especially if dirt be adhering to
whatever caused the puncture; and the breaking off of a fine point of
bone i'n a wound is sure to be dangerous and likely to be fatal. The
introduction into the wound of an acrid or burning substance will
increase the inflammation in it. In the case of natives, it is always
expected that tetanus will surely follow and the expectation may %f>
a long way to cause the symptoms. One would think that the rigidity
of the bows and the weight of the arrows would militate considerably
against the accuracy of the shooting; the Malaita bow is much more
easily bent and the arrow is lighter, though a little longer.

The men in the whole of the group wear a turtle-shell ring hanging
from the septum of the nose. These rings are made out of the tail-
piece of the turtle shell, which is of considerable thickness and has an
aperture where it fits on to the carapace. This particular piece of
the shell, called popo (stem) in Ulawa, is much sought after. When
the man wishes to eat he has to lift up his nose ring. Numbers of
rings made of strips of turtle shell are hung in the ears, the lobe of
which becomes much distended, and it is a common thing for the rings
to touch the shoulder. Great heavy discs of pure white clam-shell
are suspended from the neck. The best of these are said to be made
from clam shells of immemorial antiquity found inland in the bush
and dating back to the time when the land was upheaved. On these
discs (called U ma^ moon) a piece of turtle shell is tied, cut into the
conventional shape of the man-of-war hawk. Some of the discs are
ID inches in diameter.

The boys are clad in a narive mat after attaining a certain age and
the men all wear the native mat as a loin-cloth. The women also*

236 SANTA CRUZ.

wear the native mat. In the Melanesian islands of the group the
women are kept much in seclusion and do not mingle freely with the
men, and in all the islands alike there is not as much freedom of
intimacy between the sexes as one sees in the Solomons. Yellow
ocher is much used and everything gets stained by it. The men plaster
their hair with lime, thus bleaching it, and one often sees the hair done
up by wrapping a piece of paper mulberry bark round it. The women's
heads are shaven.

Some 20 miles north of Graciosa Bay, and in full view, there towers
the active volcanic cone called Tamami by the Ndeni people and
Tinakula by the Reef Islanders. This volcano is about 2,000 feet
high and rises straight out of the sea. Its top is generally covered
with a cloud which is half mist and half steam, and at nights the red
lava is often seen coursing down the steep face to the sea on the north-
west side of the island. On his last voj^age, as he lay becalmed near
the volcano, Bishop Patteson noticed that it was in action, and Bishop
John Selwyn saw pumice and gravel descending the sides. The
earthquakes which are so common in the neighborhood, and which are
felt so frequently at Ulawa in the Solomons, are probably caused by
disturbances at this volcanic center. The weather coast of Ulawa
is frequently covered with pumice-stone carried there by the southeast
winds. Tinakula is uninhabited, but coconuts appear round the
coast and the neighboring peoples of Nupani are said to be in the habit
of visiting it to collect what food it offers. There is a striking likeness
between Tinakula and Meralava in the Banks Group, and were Tina-
kula to cease its activity the fertility of its soil would doubtless equal
that of Meralava.

The Swallow Group, or Reef Islands, lie about 40 miles northeast of
Graciosa Bay. These islands are all small and low-lying, the largest
of them, Fenua Loa, is 6 or 8 miles in length and very narrow, while
others (like Pileni and Nukapu) are tiny places which one could walk
round in half an hour. There is a deep-water passage on the east
side of Fenua Loa, between it and the cluster of islands marked Lomlom
on the chart. Lomlom is really the name of a village on Fenua Loa,
and, so far from the Lomlom of the chart being one island, it is really
a group of five clustered round a lagoon. The largest of these is named
Ngailo, and the entrance to the lagoon is by a passage facing Fenua
Loa. The lagoon is dotted with villages and the people of each island
maintain their separate lives, often being at war with their next-door
neighbors. There is a passage through to the south, but owing to
the prevailing southeast wind this is negotiable only in calm weather.
Two small islands lie off Ngailo, called Bange Netepa and BangeNinde.
These differ from the rest of the group in having no encircling reef and
rise precipitously to 1 50 feet, with no beach and with bad landings.

SANTA CRUZ, 237

Fenua Loa is separated only at high water from its northern neighbor
Nifilole. Huge reefs stretch out west in a great arm from Fenua Loa,
and inside the encircling reef lies Matema. When journeying from
Ndeni by whaleboat to the Reef Islands the missionaries made for an
opening in the reef opposite Matema and then sailed or rowed up in
the quiet water under the lee of Fenua Loa. The little island Pileni
lies 3 miles away from Nifilole, and there is a deep-water passage
between the two; Pileni, like Nifilole, Nukapu, and Nupani, is raised
only a few feet above sea-level, but it differs from them in having no
encircling coral reef. Nukapu is 1 5 miles west of Pileni and Nupani
20 miles still farther west. All the islands are covered with dense
forest.

The population of the Reefs is probably now not much more than
500 all told, and two distinct types of language are spoken — Mela-
nesian and Polynesian — each type being split up again into what
almost amounts to local dialects. On Fenua Loa and Nifilole and the
islands to the eastward the language is Melanesian and is akin to that
spoken on Ndeni; on Matema, Pileni, Nukapu, and Nupani the
language is a much-decayed form of a Polynesian language. It is
probable that these four Polynesian-speaking islands do not differ to
any very great extent in language, but that the differences in the Mela-
nesian-speaking islands of the group are far more noticeable. It is
worthy of note that of the Melanesian islands Fenua Loa (Long Island)
has a distinctly Polynesian name, and Nifilole is almost certainly of
the same language stock.

On the Reef Islands there is but little food and no good fresh water.
The people live largely on fish, coconuts, and breadfruit. Frequent
journeys are made to Ndeni in the sailing canoes to get food, which is
bartered for fish, dried breadfruit, and woven mats. The breadfruit
is dried and made up in little plaited packets of cane or is kept in a
silo in the ground and eaten when required. The smell of the bread-
fruit thus preserved is too much for European nostrils. Fish abound
in the shallow waters of the lagoons and are shot with arrows or caught
with nets or hooks. The shells found in these waters are particularly
numerous and beautiful.

The Santa Cruz group claims particular notice for three reasons:
its languages, its looms, its canoes. There has never been any attempt
made to learn the Polynesian language spoken in the Reefs. Bishop
G. A. Selwyn and Bishop Patteson were both Maori scholars and were
able to hold converse with the Nukapu people. Dr. Codrington has
published a small grammar of the Nifilole language and one a little
fuller of the Ndeni language.

The eating of areca nut with pepper leaf and quicklime, which is
characteristic of all the groups from the Solomons westward to India,
proceeds no farther eastward than Santa Cruz and Tikopia. In the

238 SANTA CRUZ.

rest of Melanesia, the New Hebrides, Banks, Torres, Fiji, and in the
whole of Polynesia there is no eating of areca nut, but kava-drinking
is found instead. In the Solomons and in New Guinea the lime is
conveyed to the mouth from the lime gourd or the bamboo by means
of a spatula or a stick, but the Cruzian scorns such delicate ways
and, wetting his first finger, plunges it into the lime and thence into
his mouth. As a result of this excessive use of lime the lips of the
elders are caked quite hard and distinct articulation becomes impos-
sible, so that it is from the lips of the children that the languages
must be learned.

The Melanesian languages of the group have vowels which in cer-
tain parts of speech are inconstant, being attracted to the sound of
the neighboring vowels. Thus a certain preposirion may be ma^ me,
moy according to the vowel in the word which it governs. AH the vowels
except i have a secondary or modified sound. The consonants also
vary greatly; k and g constantly interchange, also k and ng, and d and t;
p, by and v are used indifferently in the same word; / and n also inter-
change. The personal pronouns differ materially from those in ordi-
nary use in Melanesia, there being only one set (instead of two or three)
which is suffixed to nouns as possessive, to verbs as objects, to a stem
ni as subjects. With the verbs the same use prevails as in the Solo-
mons, the personal pronouns being suffixed as objects, the sense con-
veyed being, however, rather participial or gerundival. The tran-
sitive termination of verbs so common elsewhere in Melanesia does not
seem to appear in Santa Cruz.

But very little of the Bible has ever been translated into any of the
Santa Cruz tongues. Parts of the Prayer Book were rendered by Mr.
Forrest into the language of Ndeni, but the translarion is reported to
be very faulty and has practically been set aside. There is a great
and honorable work awaidng someone who shall set himself to learn
one of these tongues, to use it for the disseminarion of Christian
truths, to ascertain its rules and methods of speech, to produce its
grammar and dictionary. Dr. Codrington has laid the foundations
for such study in his specimen grammars of Ndeni and Nifilole. The
main requisites for learning a native language are a good ear to catch
the sounds and a good memory to be able to repeat the words and
phrases, and a sympathetic mind that can put itself en rapport with
the minds of the natives.

In view of the special difficulty of the languages spoken in the Santa
Cruz islands, the Melanesian Mission would be well advised to set
one of its scholars to work on some one particular language in order
to impart the information thus gained to others not so well qualified
to work on a new language. The Rev. H. N. Drummond was of the
opinion that one of the Polynesian tongues, say that of Pileni or
Matema, should be made the standard tongue for the Reef Islands,

SANTA CRUZ. 239

and that it should be used as the basis for all linguistic work. The
peoples speaking Polynesian never learn the Melanesian tongues,
whereas those who speak Melanesian are nearly always bilingual.
It would be advisable to take the language of some one island and
definitely adopt it as the standard language for all translational work.
To learn one language well and to make that the lingua franca seems
a feasible project.

Undoubtedly one of the chief reasons for the present religious stag-
nation in Santa Cruz is the Mission's failure to learn any one of the
languages and to make translations. Many boys have been taken
from the neighborhood to Norfolk Island and have returned home in
order to impart to their fellows what they had learned of Christianity.
They might have done much even without assistance from the whites
had they been provided with books, but with the exception of good
Henry Leambi hardly one of them has risen to a sense of the duties
of his high calling and has kept to his post. A Matema boy, Ben
Teilo, has done excellent work on Vanikolo and Utupua, and has
lately been ordained deacon.

The Santa Cruz boys never throve when taken to Norfolk Island.
As a whole they failed to show much sign of intellectuality, though
some of them were sharp enough; they were always the first to fall ill,
and during any epidemic they were a constant source of anxiety. It
is reported that during one epidemic of meningitis five Cruzians
died within a few days of one another, some sickening and dying within
the day. In former years vessels endeavored to recruit laborers at
Santa Cruz for Queensland, but the recruiting was stopped owing to
the heavy mortality which occurred through nostalgia, men simply
giving up the ghost in their homesickness. In later years the Mission
has been taking Santa Cruz boys for training as teachers to the central
school at Vureas, Banks Islands. There they seem to have kept in
better health, but nevertheless they have been a source of great anxiety
and some have died.

Santa Cruz can also claim distinction as being the only place in
Melanesia where the people use a hand loom. Looms do not appear
in Polynesia at all, but the one used at Santa Cruz has great likeness
to those used in the Carolines. Looms also appear in the Philippines
and in Borneo. The Spaniards in 1595 remarked on the presence of
these looms. The fiber used in the weaving is derived from the stem of
a certain banana and is made into mats for wearing as dresses and into
kits for men's use to carry their lime-boxes, etc. The weaving is done
by the men.

The wonderful sailing canoe of the Cruzians is called loju or tepukeu
These are made principally in the Duff Group, Taumako. The foun-
dation of the canoe is a large hollowed-out log, the aperture being
covered eventually to keep out the water. On this log a big stage is

240 SANTA CRUZ.

built up with cro$s-timbers projecting on both sides, the timbers being
tied with sennit. To keep the log upright there is a float of light wood
into which strong stakes are driven; these are then fastened with sennit
lashings and the other ends are made fast to the timbers of the stage.
On the outrigger side of the stage there is a little apartment with walls
and roof of sago palm, where a fire can be made, and on the opposite
side is a sloping platform where the steersman stands holding his long
paddle and where the merchandise is carried.

The sail of these canoes is shaped like that of the New Guinea sailing
canoes, a swallow tail, and is made of sago-palm leaf. The canoes sail
either end first. The Cruzians make great voyages in these canoes,
the Matema people journeying to Vanikolo, the better part of 100
miles away. At times the sailing canoes are driven out of their course
and reach the Solomon Islands. In one of the schools at Ulawa a
large, wide plank, which was part of the well of one of these canoes,
served as a table in the school-house. The wood was that beautiful
rosewood known in Ulawa as liki and had been cut from the big flanges
of the tree; it was a rich red in color and the graining was beautiful.
The plank was sawed up to make the credence in the Mwadoa Church,
Ulawa.

The voyagers in these canoes experience great hardship at times
when driven out of their course by rough winds. The Southern Cross
rescued recently some natives out of a tepukei far out of sight of land.
They had been at sea for a fortnight. A case is reported of a canoe
with Christians on board returning from Taumako. The wind proved
unfavorable and for ten days they were out of sight of land. Then
water gave out and in their despair they prayed for rain. The next
day a favorable wind sprang up accompanied by heavy showers, and
they were able to catch some water, and then, marvellous to relate,
they knew their position and steered for home.

Ulawa has frequently received these tempest-driven canoes. In
former days the crews were killed, but during Christian times their
lives have been preserved. Some of them have married and settled
down in Ulawa; Ngorangora village had a Reef Island woman who
had married there. Some of these castaways have built small out-
rigger canoes and set off for home paddling. At night they steered by
the stars and they generally managed to reach home. Bishop Selwyn
in 1878 wrote of a Nupani man who had paddled his way back from
Ulawa. Some years ago, on the weather coast of Ulawa, just as the
darkness was coming on, we sighted two Cruzians in one of their small
canoes. Fires were lighted and every attempt was made to induce
them to land, but they evidently were afraid of the reception which
might be awaiting them and they paddled away into the darkness.
Their power of locating their position is wonderful. Captain Bon-
gard, of the old Southern Cross ^ used to tell the story of Te Fonu, one

SANTA CRUZ. 241

of the two Nifilole men driven away from Nupani, whom Bishop
Sehvyn rescued from Port Adam on Malaita in 1877 and returned to
their homes and thus opened up the way again to Santa Cruz. In
order to test Te Fonu's knowledge of the direction of Santa Cruz the
captain used to call him up at night as they were sailing and ask him
where Santa Cruz lay. Te Fonu would look at the stars and then
would point unerringly in the direction of his home, no matter on
what course the ship was lying. Santa Anna, one of the two small
islands at the east end of San Cristoval, has a considerable number of
Cruzians, who after being shipwrecked made their home there.

The smaller paddling canoe of Santa Cruz is well worthy of mention;
it is called jaolo in Ndeni. It is built in the same way as the sailing
canoe, a hollow log with an outrigger and with a platform joining the
two parts. The aperture in the log is very narrow and the paddlers
sit on the lip and have their legs crossed. Both the small canoes and
the sailing ones are coated with lime. The paddles have a large, heavy
blade and a long handle, and look very clumsy in comparison with the
long, tapering blades used in the eastern Solomons. It ^.f^

When the coming of the ships was somewhat of a rare event, it was
a great sight to see the numbers of canoes that came flocking out to
barter their goods at the ship's side. Two men sat in each canoe,
one on each side of the platform, and often a boy would be squatting
on the platform among the goods brought for barter. These goods
consisted of bows and bundles of arrows, paddles, dancing clubs, mats,
kits, looms, fishing nets and lines, lassoes for shark catching, flying-
fish floats, shell armlets, shells and shell spoons for scraping coconut,
bundles of smoked canarium nuts, coconuts, dried and green bread-
fruit, a few yams and pana, areca nuts and pepper leaves, wild wood
pigeons, parrots, and native fowls. The scene alongside the ship was
one of the wildest excitement, the men all shouting their loudest, some
holding up various articles of barter and hissing to attract the atten-
tion of the people on the ship, some maneuvering for place alongside,
canoes getting foul of one another and occasionally one filling. To
be capsized is no hardship for a Cruzian; his canoe may even turn turtle,
but owing to the outrigger it will never sink. They are quite able to
right an overturned canoe; then, catching hold of the end, they pull
the canoe backward and forward, jerking the water out, and finally,
jumping on board, they bail furiously till the craft is afloat again.

To allow the Cruzians to come on board is fatal to the peace of the
ship. They pester everyone to buy, thrusting their wares into one's
face and muttering tambaika (tobacco). The price is arranged by the
buyer holding up as many fingers as he thinks the article to be worth
in sticks of tobacco, whereupon the Cruzian says monduj i. e.y more,
and the buyer airs his knowledge of the language by saying iege kalinge^
"no, my friend," and so the process goes on. Great hands are laid

242 SANTA CRUZ.

on one's arm; huge mouths red with areca nut and lime are thrust in
one's face; the scent of strong-smelling herbs worn in the shell armlets
almost overpowers one; clothes are marked with stains of yellow ocher;
an unmistakable odor of natives pervades everything, and keen eyes
follow every movement; great heads bleached with lime or wrapped up
in bark cloth are thrust into the windows; everything movable has to
be put out of reach, and portholes have to be shut. Captain Bongard
told the story of a Cruzian who endeavored to purloin one of the iron
ringbolts fastened to the deck, returning time and again to have a pull
at it. Cats are much prized by these peoples, and the ship's cat has
to be guarded carefully when they are on board.

As soon as the ship begins to move ahead and the decks are cleared
the confusion becomes appalling. Men hang over the ship's side
waiting for their canoes and expostulating furiously with the ship's
company; others have to be forced to leave, offering their wares all
the time. The ship's people throw tobacco into the water alongside
the canoes and instantly men dive over (the white soles of their feet
showing up plainly), seize the tobacco, and come up shaking the water
out of their mops of hair and wiping the salt off their faces; then, leap-
ing aboard and grasping their paddles, they start c^ after the rest of
the flotilla. Tobacco wet with salt water would not tempt a white
man, but the Nupani men are reported to have smoked tobacco mixed
with dried shark fins! It requires skill to extricate the legs from the
narrow openings in the canoe, and occasionally as the man goes to leap
overboard his leg is caught and broken bones are the result.

Those who are the last to leave the ship calmly drop into the water
over the side, holding their wares extended in the left hand. So quietly
do they slip into the water that the left hand is seldom submerged;
then, swimming with the right, they make their way to their friends.

The catching of sharks by the Cruzians deserves a word of notice.
Each canoe carries a number of half coconut shells strung on a length
of rattan cane. On arriving at a place frequented by sharks this hoop
of cane is jerked up and down in the water and a kind of gurgling
noise is produced by the shells which certainly attracts the sharks.
The noise is popularly supposed to imitate the sound made by a shoal
of bonito leaping out of the water, and sharks are always found where
there are bonito. As soon as a shark is seen, a bait (usually consisting
of a fish) is thrown out; this is tied to a string and is pulled in towards
the canoe. The shark becoming bold follows the bait until (after a
few throws) he gets right alongside the canoe. A man is sitting ready
holding a noose in his hand and, as the shark passes him, the end of
the noose is slipped over the shark's nose. The noose gradually
tightens as the shark turns and then the battle begins. Eventually
the shark is pulled alongside the canoe and is dispatched with blows on
the head from a heavy club. The shark lines are twisted out of fiber

SANTA CRUZ. 243

made from the bark of the tree su^ay described previously. Shark
is esteemed a great delicacy, but Europeans would be well advised
if they refrained from visiting the villages where the flesh or the fins
are being prepared, for the odor is almost unbearable.

Mr. O'Ferrall noted that the Pileni men were sorry for themselves
in that no sharks were left round their island!

In 1906 Rev. H. Hawkins, now archdeacon in charge of the Maoris
in the diocese of Auckland, went on the Southern Cross with a Maori
priest round the Polynesian-speaking islands of the Mission to inquire
into the practicability of sending Maori missionaries to work on these
islands. In addition to Matema, Pileni, Nukapu, and Nupani in the
Reefs, there is Tikopia to the southeast, and in the Solomons Rennell
and Bellona, west of San Cristoval, and Sikaiana, north of Ulawa,
islands all Ijring out of the ordinary track. They were able by talking
Maori to make themselves understood in all these islands, and were
quite confident that Maori missionaries would be able to get on there
from the very first without much hindrance. However, the isolation
in which they would have been compelled to live their lives was felt
to be a complete barrier against the Maoris taking up the work. The
only chance of their being visited was during the biennial trips of the
Southern Cross. For white men thus to be isolated is hard enough,
but in the case of Maoris such isolation would be quite fatal. Never-
theless, several Maoris volunteered for the work, and now that the
Marsden Centenary has been celebrated the project is being revived
and Maoris of the diocese of Waiapu are raising funds to support some
of their own number as missionaries in Melanesia.

But it can not be said that the problem of frequent communication
with these islands has yet been solved. A small auxiliary schooner,
the Selwyny was built for the purpose of intercommunication between
the various stations in the Solomons, but so far she has not proved a
success and has spent a great deal of her time lying up in harbor,
owing to engine defects. A new engine has now been installed, and
better things are expected of the Sehoyny but her small size would
militate against her making frequent and regular voyages to the out-
lying Polynesian islands in the Solomons, and it would be quite out
of the question to think of her visiting Santa Cruz. If the Maoris
are to go as missionaries, then they must be regularly visited, for
their health's sake as well as for the supervision of their work, and this
would demand the presence of a powerful auxiliary schooner stationed
possibly in the Solomons.

In any case, it is quite out of the question for the work at Santa Cruz,
when it is revived, to go on any longer without the missionaries being
provided with some better means of locomotion than a whaleboat.
Mr. Nind's breakdown in health was caused by prolonged journeys
by boat. With their boats fitted with a small dipping lug-sail, when

244 SANTA CRUZ*

crossing over to the Reefs from Ndeni they had to get up as far east as
possible, their sail being small and the westerly set very strong, and it
was often doubtful whether they could make Matema or not; if they
failed, they had to risk the reefs in the night and make for Nukapu.
On the return journey they were lucky if they could make land at the
west end of Ndeni, at Te Motu, and should the wind fail them or veer
round there was the prospect of a steady pull for hours, often with an
inferior crew, against wind and tide and current. With the settling
of white missionaries again in the group, it will be absolutely necessary
to provide a launch for the purpose of work round Ndeni itself, and in
order to insure regular and easy voyages to the Reefs, even if no Maoris
are sent. Utupua and Vanikolo lie too far away to be reached from
Santa Cruz in a launch, but were there a powerful auxiliary schooner
in the eastern Solomons regular visits could be paid to all these places.

The Heathen religion in the Santa Cruz group consists of the worship
of the dead. The people of importance become ghosts, dukoj after
death, and a stock of wood is set up in their houses to represent them.
Offerings of pigs' flesh and of the first fruits of the crop are made to
the duka from time to time and are laid in front of the stock. These
offerings are not allowed to lie there long, and are soon eaten by the
offerers on the plea that the duka having now eaten the immaterial
substance of the gifts, the offerers are free to eat the fleshy part.

The dukat when offended, causes sickness, and the doctor called in
is one who possesses spiritual power, maleUj and who owns a duka him-
self. These wizards, mendekay control the weather on a sea journey,
taking the stock of their duka with them and setting it up in the deck-
house; they also control the sunshine, the rain, and the wind. In the
large villages on Ndeni and in the island of Nupani a number of these
stocks are set up in one house, manduka^ and the ghost-house is often a
building showing some considerable artistic taste in the decoration of
the pillars or in the carvings. The fear of the duka controls every
department of life.

Feather money is peculiar to Santa Cruz; it is made of the red
breast-feathers of a small honey-eater, a bird of the glossiest black
plumage all over save for the breast-feathers; the bill is long and
curved. The birds are caught with birdlime, and they are somedmes
worn alive tied by the legs to a man's waist-belt. The red feathers
are gummed to pigeon's feathers, and these are bound on a prepared
foundation in rows, so that only the red is seen. A length of this money
is about 15 feet.

Bishop G. A. Selwyn visited Santa Cruz in 1852, but did not land.
Four years later he visited the place again and endeavored to make
friends with the people. Mr. Patteson and the Bishop in the same
year landed at Utupua, Vanikolo, and Nukapu. At the latter place
their knowledge of Maori stood them in good stead. In 1862 Bishop

SANTA CRUZ. 245

Patteson went ashore in several places at Santa Cruz and was well
received. Two years later an attack was made upon his boat in
Graciosa Bay, and Edwin Nobbs and Fisher Young were shot with
arrows and died of tetanus. The reason for the attack was that they
probably were taken for ghosts, dukuy and ghosts being really unsub-
stantial could not be harmed by arrows. The natives have short-
lived memories and are slow to receive impressions, and have no
power of making comparisons or of drawing inferences, and though
the news of the white men's coming must have been generally spread
abroad, yet it would be long before it got into the minds of the people
that these were real men like themselves, and came from a real country
in a real canoe like their own sailing canoes, lojuj and were not merely
unsubstantial ghostly figures, embodied spirits of their ancestors.

In 1870 Bishop Patteson landed at Nukapu, and in the following
year he was killed there, Mr. Atkin and Stephen Taroaniaro being
shot at the same time and dying afterwards of tetanus. The reason
for the attack was to avenge the abduction and, to their mind, death,
of five natives who had been kidnapped by a labor vessel a few days
previously. In 1875 Commodore Goodenough was killed at Carlisle
Bay, on Ndeni, a few miles east of Nelua. The attack on him seems
to have been caused by jealousy between two villages, the attacking
party being unfriendly to his guides and resenting his approaching
them from the enemy's village, whereas had he not thus gone through
the villages no attack would have been made.

In 1877 communications were opened up again with the group after
these two murders. Bishop John Selwyn was rescued and returned
to Nupani with Te Fonu, one of two men who had been blown away
and who were being kept at Port Adam, Malaita, as ^Mive heads, '*
ready for killing when needed. Mano Wadrokal, the native deacon
from Nengone, with his wife, Carrie, volunteered the neict year to leave
Bugotu, where he had settled, and begin a school on Nifilole, Te Fonu's
home. Wadrokal reported that the population of Nukapu had been
greatly reduced by sickness; he himself was ill owing to want of food
and of good water and was taken away from the Reefs. The follow-
ing year the Bishop took a party of men from Nifilole accompanied by
Wadrokal, and thus made friends with the people of Ndeni. While
Wadrokal was at Nifilole a number of people from the mainland crossed
over to the Reefs and visited him and made friends, and at his own
request he was set down at Nelua to endeavor to start a school. All
honor must be paid to the brave Wadrokal settling thus alone in the
midst of these excitable and warlike people. His own spirit seems to
have been a mettlesome one, and his white fathers found him hard to
control, but he was ever a pioneer, and he paved the way for gentler
and less fiery successors.

246 SANTA CRUZ.

In 1 88 1 Mr. Lister Kaye joined Wadrokal at Nelua, and thus was
the first white man after Mendana's party to live on Santa Cruz.
Wadrokal had made friends with the people and they had built him
a good house, and a few of them were coming for instruction. The
natives were found to be hospitable and friendly, and the attitude
of suspicion and distrust with which they had been regarded owing to
their attacks on the whites now seemed likely to be dispelled. Wad-
rokal was withdrawn in 1883 owing to illness, and the Bishop lamented
that he had no native volunteer helper to place at Santa Cruz. One
or two attempted to stay, but the excitable character of the people
and the loneliness proved too much for them. Wadrokal returned in
1884, and was present at Nukapu when the Bishop and Mr. Kaye
erected Bishop Patteson's cross there. Boys were taken the same year
to Norfolk Island from Santa Cruz for the first time, but some of them
died. Little progress was made with the mission work in these years,
and there were no baptisms except those of scholars at Norfolk Island.

The son of the chief of Nelua, Natei, and his affianced bride were
allowed to go up to Norfolk Island, where they were afterwards bap-
tized and given the names of James Goodenough and Monica. James
was named after the Commodore, and Mrs. Goodenough was respon-
sible for the cost of his education, but he never seemed to be satis-
factory, and eventually had to be disrated. His wife was a very good
woman and proved very helpful in keeping the women together.
Santa Cruz has all along suffered from a want of firm and reliable head
teachers, though Daniel Melamakaule did good work at Te Motu and
Henry Leambi was ever a gentle and quiet Christian gentleman.

In 1887 Mr. Forrest replaced Mr. Kaye, and the Bishop also spent a
short time ashore and visited the villages on the north coast. By this
time the school at Nelua was fairly well attended, but the teaching
had been intermittent. A small school was started on Nifilole by a
lad named Moses Tepukeia, who had been baptized at Norfolk Island.

In 1889 Mr. Forrest started a school at Te Motu, a village on the
island Guerta, at the west entrance to Graciosa Bay, and he had Dr.
Welchman to assist him. Mr. Forrest and Daniel Melamakaule
were shot at near Te Motu, on account of jealousy between two
villages, they having had occasion to cross from one village to another,
thus incurring the enmity of their attackers. Their courage and
firmness alone saved them. The first adult baptisms were also held
this year, six people being baptized at Nelua. The separation of the
sexes is very closely observed in Santa Cruz, and separate schools had
to be kept for the women; the one at Nelua was ably managed by
Monica and Fanny. At Nifilole the men and the women are never
together in public, not even in the gardens or in performing any house-
hold work, and the absence of capable women teachers in the Reefs
has proved a great hindrance.

SANTA CRUZ. 247

Sixteen adults were baptized in 1890 at Nelua, and a small begin*
ning was made on Nukapu. Natei, the Heathen chief of Nelua^ caused
a great deal of trouble by attempts to blackmail some of the teachers.
The following year baptisms were held both at Nelua and Te Motu,
and a beginning was made on Pileni. In 1894 Mr. Forrest made a
journey in a sailing canoe to the DufF Group^ and George Domo con-
sented to stay and start a school there. In 1895 the baptized Christians
in the group numbered 116. Schools had been started at three places
on Ndeni and the Reef Islands had two struggling schools.

Dr. J. Williams was in charge during 1896 and he staid at Santa
Cruz for a while with Mr. OTerrall during the following year. Daniel
had done good work at Te Motu, and in 1896 Bishop Wilson conse-
crated a new church there. The first baptism in the Reef Islands was
held in 1897 at Nifilole; there were two candidates. The next year both
of the schools on Ndeni were closed, the one owing to the teacher's sin,
the other owing to the complete indifference and the practical lapse
into Heathenism of the male teachers. The two women, Monica and
Fanny, still persevered and saved the place from complete spiritual death.

The Te Motu school was reopened in 1898 on the teacher's repent-
ance, but nothing could be done at Nelua, and from then on till
about 191 5 Christianity practically ceased at Nelua. Te Motu has
somewhat relieved the darkness of the picture, but even there the work
proceeded but fitfully. School work in the Reef Islands was greatly
interrupted by the constant absences of the men on trading and fish-
ing expeditions ; there was also a lack of good teachers, the boys who
were sent to Norfolk Island having to return before their time on
account of ill health. During this year the British Protectorate was
proclaimed over the group, but the resident commissioner was stationed
in the Solomons. Traders were now being established on Ndeni and
steamers were making occasional calls. The following year French
vessels recruited illegally, but were ordered to return the natives and
to pay a heavy fine. It does not appear that the punishment was
enforced, but all recruiting ceased.

In 1899 George Domo reopened the school on Pileni and a school
was begun in one of the villages on Fenua Loa. Nothing much ever
came of this, and the death of one of the school people brought the
work to an end. A boy, Govili, was sent from Nukapu to Norfolk
Island, but had to be returned owing to ill health. In 1900 there
were 120 baptized people in the group. In this year Mr. Nind arrived
to assist Mr. O'Ferrall. A new school was opened on Matema by
Andrew Veleio, but the Reef Islands had no teachers for the women
and the men were forever travelling about.

In 1901 the first confirmation was held in Santa Cruz, at Te Motu,
there being 14 candidates. Nimbi, a village close to Te Motu, sent
four boys to Norfolk Island and new boys were obtained from Ngailo

248 SANTA CRUZ.

in the Reefs. In 1904 Mr. Drummond was relieving at the Reefs.
Ben Teilo, a Matema boy, made good use of the trading connection
existing between his home and Vanikolo, visiting the latter place and
beginning a school there. George Domo also started a school on
Nukapu, but died soon after. By the end of 1905 the Christians
numbered 127. In 1906 a house was built for the missionaries in
Graciosa Bay, for the purpose of starting a central training school for
teachers, llie site was easy of access, but proved to be too much on
the highway for canoes passing up and down to allow of any quiet.

A few small schools were opened on Ndeni, but the supply of teachers
was not sufficient. Henry Leambi was the only one of the past who
was still holding on. At Nifilole the people, never many in number,
were nearly all dead; Pileni was in an unsatisfactory state, and the two
teachers at Matema were making gallant efforts to hold their own.
Teilo opened a new school on Utupua in 1908, having several Reef
Island assistants, one of them being Govili of Nukapu. While home
for a holiday Teilo had done good work in preaching and exhorting in
Matema, Nukapu, and Pileni. A number of Reef Island boys were now
at Vureas. The statistics for 1908 show the Christians as numbering
only 77. No white missionary was available now for the group.

The following year an attempt was made to work the group by
means of a brotherhood, consisting of Rev. H. N. Drummond, Rev.
C. Turner, and Mr. Blencowe; Mr. Drummond had left his work on
Raga for this purpose. Taumako, in the Duff Group, was visited
and a boy was obtained, and an attempt was made to start a school.
Nupani, which had asked in vain in former years for a teacher, was
now found closed against Christianity, owing to the devotion and
respect paid to the ghosts, who had given them great success in fishing.
Some catechumens on Nukapu were being instructed for baptism.
Meanwhile nothing much was doing at Ndeni, except at Te Motu;
the church at Nelua had fallen into ruins, and the people were content
to lapse into heathenism. At the end of the year Mr. Drummond
returned to Raga, and the next year Mr. Blencowe was the only mis-
sionary left. Rev. G. Bury had come to assist, but died after only
three months' work, the victim of malignant ulcers caused by scratches.
In his ignorance he had healed them over with iodoform and subse-
quently died of blood-poisoning. Despite the mission's long history,
and the fact that all the missionaries suffered more or less from these
ulcers on the legs, no certain means was known of preventing the
scratches caused by coral, etc., from festering and turning into these
ulcers. Corrosive sublimate, lysol, witch hazel, poulticing, iodoform^
carbolic acid, all these had been tried in vain. No satisfying treatment
was known, but the writer eventually found that antiphlogistine is a
remedy and safeguard in the event of the legs being scratched.

In 1910 the first baptisms were held on Nukapu, one of the persons,
baptized being the sister of Bishop Patteson's murderer. Volunteers.

SANTA CRUZ. 249

from the Reef Islands offered for work in Tikopia, Utupua, Vanikolo,
TaumakO) and Santa Cruz. Mr. Blencowe left for England to read for
holy orders, and the group was left in charge of a San Cristoval native
teacher, Ben Monongai. Ben Teilo was taken in 191 3 to the Solomons
to read for deacon's orders, and Bishop Wood ordained him the same
year.

For the present all active mission work has ceased in Santa Cruz.
It is the intention of Bishop Wood to make an attempt to open up
things there again with Mr. Blencowe in charge, and with that object
in view he is asking all the friends of the Mission to unite in prayer
that the reproach of Santa Cruz may be wiped away. Already the
prayers are being answered. On the main island, Ndeni, school-
houses have been put in order and the people have shown themselves
desirous of returning to Christian ways. In the Reef Islands vol-
unteers have offered to go as teachers wherever they may be sent.
Up to the present, however, no white men are available to act as leaders.
Mr. Blencowe is serving as an army chaplain and the smallness of the
Mission's staff precludes the idea of anyone being delegated for this
special work. We can only wait in the certainty that our prayers will
be answered and that leaders will be forthcoming.

The difficulties to be overcome are undoubtedly great — climate,
language, isolation, indifference, instability on the part of the people.
However, the Christian influence of the past will have made itself felt,
and there will no longer be the fear of the missionaries' lives being
endangered by attacks from the natives. Volunteers are being called
for among the native Christians in other parts of the Mission, and if
picked men are sent and provision made for their instruction in the
various languages, and also for a regular visitation of the stations, then
it is quite certain that the success which has attended the work else-
where will also attend it in Santa Cruz.

Prayer joT Santa Cruz.

**0 Gody our loving Father^ we humbly ask Thee to
send priests and teachers full of the Holy Ghost and
of power to revive Thy Church in Santa Cruz; thai the
faithful may be strengthenedy the lapsed restored^ and
the Heathen converted^ through Jesus Christ our Lord.**
Amen.

Carved Food-bowls and Porpoise.
Food-bowlg from Ulawa.

I

A. Carvings from Ulawa — Man, Pig. and Dog.

B. Ulawa Hair-combs.

C C. Forehead Omamenta made of Clam and Turtle Shell, Florida.

Ji2

IS
E

i

IS

r

* ■»**«

^

(